Kogan Page Academic Catalogue 2023 (GBP)

Academic Catalogue 2023

Who is Kogan Page?

Kogan Page is a leading independent business book publisher, publishing content from global business experts on the trends and topics shaping business today. Recognized as Digital Publisher of the Year 2020, Academic & Professional Publisher of the Year 2019 and awarded the International Achievement Award at the Independent Publishers Guild (IPG) Awards, we are committed to accessibility standards and deliver the highest quality content from authors who are leading experts in their field.

We publish content across a broad range of subject areas within business:

Business & Management

Human Resources, Learning & Development Marketing & Communications Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Inspection copies

Skills, Careers & Employability

Kogan Page Inspire Risk & Compliance Accounting, Finance & Banking

Our books are available to lecturers through our inspection copy service. We Will consider requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 10 or more students. You can request an inspection copy by registering for an academic account at www.koganpage.com/inspectioncopies

eBooks

Kogan Page books are available as ebooks from major ebook retailers and our website. We also offer multiple access for students through digital textbook platforms such as Kortext and VitalSource.

What’s important to us?

Sustainability

We are proud to have partnered with Carbon Neutral Britain to calculate and offset Kogan Page Ltd’s carbon footprint. In July 2021, our internal efforts led us to become certified as a Carbon Neutral Business. We also partner with suppliers and vendors who follow sustainability guidelines and processes.

Diversity

We take action to ensure we are a diverse and representative organization. We are an active member of the Independent Publishers Guild Diversity and Inclusivity Action Group, we support the Publishers Association Inclusivity Action Plan, partner with Creative Access to support under-represented groups entering the creative industries, and monitor representation across our staff and authors.

Accessibility

We are one of few publishers globally to receive the Global Certified Accessible accreditation and ASPIRE verification service gold rating. This certification is the gold standard for accessible publications within the industry. Testament to our work in creating accessibility in digital textbooks, we also achieved the BIC Excellence Plus award, were a finalist for the DAISY Award for Accessibility in Publishing and were awarded the IPG Digital Publisher of the Year Award 2020.

To find out more about our efforts in these areas, visit: www.koganpage.com/our-values

Stay informed

Subscribe to our newsletter to receive updates on new books, export content, sample chapters and special offers, delivered straight to your inbox: www .koganpage.com/newsletters

Connect with us

kpinfo@koganpage.com www.koganpage.com

Curate a custom textbook for your course

What do we offer?

Build your own Ebook Collection

Choose from our range of books to provide your students with the reading they need

us at

Facilitate learning at all levels with your collection of Kogan Page content.

Choose from books across any area, such as:

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Business & Management

Human Resources, Learning & Development & CIPD

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Marketing & Communications

Risk & Compliance

Skills, Careers & Employability

READ ANYTIME, ANYWHERE

WITH OUR NEW PRINT AND EBOOK BUNDLES

Get the whenFREEebook you buyyourcopyprint

With our print and ebook bundles available at www.koganpage.com you and your students can read Kogan Page and CIPD textbooks anytime, anywhere. You can have the printed copy for your desk plus access to the ebook through the Kogan Page Bookshelf® for free when you select the ‘paperback + ebook bundle’ option.

Powered by VitalSource®, Bookshelf provides an optimized reading experience for you and your students. You can:

• Read books offline on iOS, Android, Mac and PC

• Bookmark, highlight and search for easy navigation

• Adjust the font size to suit your preferences

• Cite content correctly in a variety of citation styles

• Learn collaboratively by sharing notes

We offer bulk discounts on print books, ebooks and bundles to academic institutions –contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com

Table of Contents by Subject

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Accounting & Finance

Financial Technology

International Finance Banking

Sustainable Investment Business & Management Skills

Business Research

Project Management

Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Information, Knowledge & Data Management

International Business Leadership Risk Management

Cyber Security Strategy

Sustainability in Business Innovation & Creativity

Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship Study Skills

Career Development

Specific Careers

Job Seeking Testing

Workplace Skills

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction to HRM

HR Leadership

Strategic HRM

Sustainable HRM

Human Resource Management

International HRM

HR Analytics Business Research

The Business Environment Diversity & Inclusion

HR Technology Performance Management Reward Management Change Management

Information, Knowledge & Data Management Change Management

Employee Engagement

Employment Law & Relations Learning & Development Organizations

Organizational Development Talent Management & Recruitment

Coaching

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Logistics

Global Logistics Operations Management Warehouse Management

Retail Logistics & Supply Chain Transport Maritime Logistics Manufacturing & Production Procurement Supply Chain Finance Supply Chain Management

Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain

Sustainability

Marketing and PR

Advertising Marketing Fundamentals

Digital Marketing

Social Media

Social Media Marketing

Marketing Communications Consumer Behaviour

B2B Marketing Sales & Key Account Management

Branding

Luxury Marketing Event Management Market Research

Marketing Analytics Marketing Strategy Sales & Key Account Management Marketing Strategy

Marketing Planning

Public Relations

Internal Communications Retail

Table of Contents by Title

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Accounting & Finance

Accounting and Finance for Managers

Accounting for Non-Accountants

Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals

Forensic Accounting and Finance

and Portfolio Management

Understanding Islamic Financial Services

The Contemporary CFO

Laundering

Financial Technology Financial Technology

Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech

The Cryptocurrency Revolution

International Finance International Finance

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance

Banking

Retail and Digital Banking

Relationship Management in Banking

Commercial Lending

Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking

Reinventing Banking and Finance

Sustainable Investment Green and Sustainable Finance

Sustainable Investing in Practice

Business & Management Skills

The Practical Negotiation Handbook

The Success Factor

of Management

Business Research Business Research

Business Research Methods

Practical Statistics

The Business Analysis Handbook

Project Management Understanding Project Management

How to Manage Projects

The Power of Project Leadership

Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Business Ethics

Responsible Business

The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics

Information, Knowledge & Data Management Knowledge Management

The Knowledge Manager's Handbook

IT Governance

Accelerated Digital Transformation

The Enterprise Big Data Framework

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business

Be Data Analytical

Be Data Driven

The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation

Data Ethics

Ethical Data and Information Management

International Business Emerging Markets

Leadership Essential Leadership

The Leadership Skills Handbook

The Change Mindset

Develop Your Leadership Skills

Myths of Leadership

Neuroscience for Leaders

Coherence

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader

Risk Management Fundamentals of Risk Management

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management

Business Continuity Management

The Organizational Resilience Handbook

The Risk Management Handbook

Cyber Risk Management

Strategic Risk and Crisis Management

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management

Rethinking Reputational Risk

Cyber Security Cybersecurity for Business

Confident Cyber Security

Strategy Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution

Strategic Decision Making

Management

Management

New Strategist

Business Model Transformation

Strategy through Behavioural Psychology

Business Models Handbook

Making and Problem Solving

of Strategy

Sustainability in Business

to Social Change

Sustainable Business Handbook

& Creativity

Experimentation

Careers & Entrepreneurship

The Business Plan Workbook

to Write a Business

Young Entrepreneur

Skills

Return to Study Handbook

Development

Mental Toughness

Successful Career Toolkit

Superconductors

The Job-Ready Guide

Testing

Ultimate IQ Tests

Ultimate Aptitude Tests

Ultimate Psychometric Tests

How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests

How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests

How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests

Workplace Skills

How to Write Effective Business English 118

How to Write Reports and Proposals 119

Improve Your Communication Skills 120

Develop Your Presentation Skills 121

Dealing with Difficult People 122

Successful Time Management 123

How to Organize Yourself 124

How to Work Remotely 125

How to Manage People 126

Confident Coding 127

Confident Digital Content 128

Confident Web Design 129

Confident Cyber Security 130

Confident Data Skills 131

Be Data Literate 132

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction to HRM

Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 135

Human Resource Management at Work 136

Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 137

Human Resource Management in a Business Context 138

Human Resource Management in Context 139

Human Resource Management 140

Studying Human Resource Management 141

Introduction to Human Resource Management 142

Human Resource Practice 143

People Practice 144

HR Leadership

Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 145

Developing Skills for Business Leadership 146

Strategic HRM

Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 147

Strategic People Management and Development 148

Strategic Human Resource Management 149

Sustainable HRM

Sustainable Human Resource Management 150 Human Resource Management

Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 151

Flexible Working 152 Human Capital Management Standards 153

International HRM

International Human Resource Management 154 International Human Resource Management 155

International Human Resource Management 156

HR Analytics

Predictive HR Analytics 157

Introduction to People Analytics 158 Excellence in People Analytics 159 Learning Analytics 160

Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 161 Data-Driven HR 162 Business Research

Research Methods in Human Resource Management 163

The Business Environment

Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 164 Diversity & Inclusion

The New World of Work 165

The Power of Difference 166 HR Technology

Learning Technology 167

Learning Ecosystems 168

Artificial Intelligence for HR 169

Introduction to HR Technologies 170 Digital HR Strategy 171

Artificial Intelligence for Learning 172 Performance Management

Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management 173

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 174 Performance Management Performance Management 175 Performance Management 176

Motivation and Performance 177 Building Top-Performing Teams 178 Reward Management

Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice 179

Reward Management 180 Reward Management 181 Change Management

Making Sense of Change Management 182

Managing Change 183

Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 184 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change

The Effective Change Manager's Handbook 186

Neuroscience for Organizational Change

Agile Change Management 188

Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Building the Agile Business 189 Change Management

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management

Leading Cultural Change

The Next Rules of Work 192 Employee Engagement

Employee Engagement

Successful Employee Communications

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures

Strategic Internal Communication

Human Experience at Work

Employment Law & Relations

Introduction to Employment Law

Employment Law

Employment Law

Managing Employment Relations

Employment Relations

Employee Relations

Learning & Development

Armstrong's Handbook of Learning and Development

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace

Learning for Organizational Development

Studying Learning and Development

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D

Continuing Professional Development

How People Learn

Adjacent Learning

Neuroscience for Learning and Development

Organizations

Organizational Behaviour

Data-Driven Organization Design

Myths of Work

Organizational Development Organization Development

Developing People and Organisations

People and Organisational Development

The Agile Organization

Organizational Planning and Analysis

Business Resilience

Networked, Scaled, and Agile

Remote Workplace Culture

The Energized Workplace

Talent Management & Recruitment Resourcing and Talent Management

Learning and Talent Development

Inclusive Talent Management

Neurodiversity at Work

Coaching Excellence in Coaching

How to Create a Coaching Culture

Coaching and Mentoring

Systemic Coaching and Constellations

Leadership Coaching

Leadership Team Coaching

50 Top Tools for Coaching

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice

Neuroscience for Coaches

Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching

Coaching People through Organizational Change

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management

A Practical Guide to Logistics

Supply Chains in Action

Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection

From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics

Mastering the Supply Chain

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit

Logistics

The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook

E-Logistics

Defence Logistics

Fashion Logistics

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations

Urban Logistics

Packaging Logistics

Health and Safety in Logistics

Global Logistics

Introduction to Global Logistics

Global Logistics

International Freight Transport

Cross-Border Logistics Operations

International Supply Chain Relationships

Operations Management

The Inventory Toolkit

Business Operations Models

The Operations Advantage

Warehouse Management Warehouse Management

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

Retail Logistics & Supply Chain

Logistics and Retail Management

Managing the Retail Supply Chain

Transport Road Passenger Transport Management

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight

Air Transport Management

Aviation Logistics

Lowe's Transport Manager and Operator's Handbook 2023

Maritime Logistics Maritime Logistics

Maritime Transport

Port Management

Container Logistics

Technology and the Blue Economy

Manufacturing & Production Systems for Manufacturing Excellence

International Standards for Design and Manufacturing

The Tesla Way

Toyota Methods and Operating Models

Product Design and the Supply Chain

Procurement

Strategic Sourcing Management

Effective Strategic Sourcing

The Technology Procurement Handbook

Category Management in Purchasing

Sustainable Procurement

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management

Contract Management

Supplier Relationship Management

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals

The Buyer's Toolkit

Leading Procurement Strategy

Global Contract Logistics

A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement

Supply Chain Finance Supply Chain Finance

Supply Chain Management Accounting

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling

Supply Chain Management

Strategic Supply Chain Management

Strategic Value Chain Management

Supply Chain 4.0

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management

Supply Chain Disruption

E-Business and Supply Chain Integration

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain

Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice

and Supply Chain Innovation

The Lean Supply Chain

Supply Chain Management and Logistics

Supply Chain Ecosystems

Chain Risk Management

and the Supply Chain

Blockchain into Supply Chain Management

Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain

Humanitarian Logistics

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians

Sustainability

Mastering the Circular Economy

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management

A Circular Economy Handbook

Green Logistics

Global Waste Management

Understanding Planned Obsolescence

Sustainability in Global Value Chains

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management

Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics

The Road to Zero Emissions

Decarbonizing Logistics

Decarbonizing Business 341

Supply Chain Ethics 342

Sustainable Procurement

Marketing and PR

Advertising

Essentials of Advertising 346 Paid Attention 347 Marketing Fundamentals

Myths of Marketing 348

Digital Marketing

Digital Marketing in Practice 349

Digital Marketing Strategy 350

The Digital Marketing Handbook 351

Understanding Digital Marketing 352

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 353

E-Commerce Website Optimization 354

Mobile Marketing 355

Video Marketing 356

Podcasting Marketing Strategy 357

Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing 358

The Martech Handbook 359

Social Media Marketing for Business 360

Social Media

Understanding Social Media 361

Myths of Social Media 362

Social Media Marketing Social Media Strategy 363

Influencer Marketing Strategy 364 Marketing Communications Marketing Communications 365

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 366 Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 367

Experiential Marketing 368

Persuasive Copywriting 369 Consumer Behaviour

Inspiring Green Consumer Choices 370

The New Chameleons 371

B2B Marketing

Innovative B2B Marketing 372

B2B Marketing Strategy 373

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 374

B2B Customer Experience 375 Sales & Key Account Management

Selling Transformed 376

Implementing Key Account Management 377 Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 378 Key Account Management 379

A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing 380 Sales and Marketing Channels 381 Branding

Global Brand Management 382

The New Strategic Brand Management 383 International Brand Strategy 384 Brand Strategy in Three Steps 385 Digital Branding 386

From Marginal to Mainstream 387 Fashion Brand Management 388

Myths of Branding 389

Luxury Marketing

Managing Luxury Brands 390

The Luxury Strategy 391

Kapferer on Luxury 392

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 393 Brand Elevation 394

The Management of Luxury 395 Event Management Event Planning and Management 396 Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 397 Market Research Market Research in Practice 399 Questionnaire Design 400

User Research 401

Using Semiotics in Marketing 402 Games and Gamification in Market Research 403 Marketing Analytics Marketing Analytics 404

Predictive Analytics for Marketers 405 Marketing Metrics 406

Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407

Advanced Customer Analytics 408 Practical Text Analytics 409 Marketing Strategy

Advanced Marketing Management 410 Marketing Strategy 411

Sales & Key Account Management Sales and Marketing Channels 412 Marketing Strategy

Using Behavioral Science in Marketing 413 Stand Out Marketing 414

Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 415 Marketing Planning

Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 416

How to Write a Marketing Plan 417 Public Relations

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 418 PR Technology, Data and Insights 419 Ethics in Public Relations 420 Crisis Communication Strategies 421 Communicate in a Crisis 422 Myths of PR 423

Internal Communications

Influential Internal Communication 424 Internal Communications 425

Retail

Retail Marketing Strategy 426 Next Generation Retail 427

The Retail Start-Up Book 428 Omnichannel Retail 429 Retail Disruptors 430

Using Semiotics in Retail 431 Retail Innovation Reframed 432

Accounting and Finance for Managers

A Business Decision Making Approach

This book

• Specifically designed for business and management students who need to understand accounting and finance information in order to make better-informed business decisions

• Uses clear language accessible to students who have not studied finance previously and explains all key concepts in a logical manner

• Develops analytical skills through exercises, comprehension questions, and the interpretation of real financial statements and worked examples from well-known businesses, such as Tesco, Ryanair and Whitbread PLC

• New to this edition: provides updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring more modern real-world examples in extracts and in expert view sections.

• Online resources: bonus chapters containing guidance and teaching tips, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter

Description

This textbook is the ideal guide for business and management students who need to understand accounting and finance information and develop analytical skills in order to make better-informed decisions.

Accounting and Finance for Managers rebukes the myth that in order to excel in accounting and finance you need to be great at mathematics. Split into two broad sections which focus on financial accounting and management accounting and finance, this textbook uses clear, accessible language that will appeal to students from a variety of academic backgrounds. Taking a uniquely practical approach that focuses on the financial aspects of business decisions, the textbook covers all the core topics of accounting and finance, including basic bookkeeping, financial analysis, business planning, cash-flow analysis and investment decisions.

Now in its third edition, Accounting and Finance for Managers contains updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring up-to-date real-world examples of real options, value chain analysis and competitive advantage analysis. This textbook features ‘traditional’ accounting practices in detail, but also covers topics with a strategic focus to ensure students learn to think in broader strategic terms. Written for an international audience using International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) terminology with supporting online resources including additional exercise questions, curated further reading and lecture slides for each chapter.

Author Information

Matt Bamber is an Assistant Professor in Accounting at Schulich School of Business, York University. He has taught a range of undergraduate, MBA and other postgraduate courses. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales, with professional experience in the UK and US.

Simon Parry is a Senior Lecturer in Accounting and Finance at Newcastle University. Over the last 22 years he has taught professional accounting courses for ACCA, CIMA, ICAEW, and CIPD, together with academic courses for Business, Accounting and MBA students. He is a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW, FCA) with 34 years' professional experience in industry, practice and the public sector.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789667516

Ebook: 9781789667523 Pages: 464

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Introduction to accounting

Accounting concepts and systems

Financial analysis: Part I

Financial analysis: Part II

Business planning

Budgets and performance management

Cash flow and working capital management

Pricing decisions

Investment decisions

Financing decisions

Operational decisions

Appendix A: An introduction to double-entry bookkeeping

Appendix B: International Accounting/ Financial Reporting Standards Appendix C: Example earnings announcements

Appendix D: Discount tables

Appendix E: Annuity factors

Appendix F: Useful web links

Accounting for Non-Accountants

This book

• Presents the basics of both financial and management accounting in an easy to follow format

• Contains review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, to embed learning

• New to this edition: fully updated with new content including reworked chapters on the current issues in accounting and economic issues that have an effect on accounting

• Brings the reader up to date on UK GAAP accounting standards, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS)

• Online resources: Over 200 additional review questions to support the book and a glossary of key terms

Description

Accounting has a reputation as a technical and jargon-heavy subject, but there is no reason why those without formal training cannot master the basics of interpreting accounts and making good decisions.

Accounting for Non-Accountants assumes no prior knowledge of the subject area and is designed to serve as an introductory text for managers and non-specialists who wish to gain an oversight of the accounting discipline. The book covers both financial and management accounting in sufficient detail to allow data to be interpreted but in a clear and accessible manner so the reader can quickly gain an understanding of the basic principles of the subject area.

Now in its 12th edition, Accounting for Non-Accountants has been fully updated to the latest regulatory requirements including the UK GAAP framework, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS). The final chapter focuses on the impact of changes in the economic environment on businesses and there are introductions to areas including tax, transfer pricing and creative accounting. This practical guide includes review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, and is supported online by over 200 questions and a glossary to develop a firm understanding of all topics.

Author Information

David Horner has taught Accounting and related courses for over 25 years in the UK. He currently teaches at Birkdale school, Sheffield. He has written numerous textbooks aimed at students both for schools and university level. He has worked with AQA, a major examination board in the UK, for over 20 years.

Edition: 12

Date: 03/05/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789664300

Ebook: 9781789664317 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Adjustments to the

the Double-entry System

for Other

Introduction to Business

Costing and

Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals

New Title

This book

• Explains how value pricing is the fairest and most profitable option for accountants and bookkeepers, and a better alternative to hourly billing

• Contains clear guidance on becoming more confident and comfortable with your pricing strategy and how to avoid pricing too low

• Describes how to identify the right kind of client, the critical steps to pricing a new client and powerful strategies to re-price existing clients without losing them

• Features benchmarking research on how thousands of accounting professionals price their services and dozens of case studies of firms which implemented value pricing

• Covers all aspects of pricing, including creating effective packages, setting out a fixed price agreement and building scope creep into the price

Description

Accountants and bookkeepers are working long hours but not making the profits they should. A value pricing strategy can lead to better prices for accounting professionals and better results for their clients.

The concept of value pricing is simple to understand but many accountants struggle with the price conversation and lack the confidence to charge higher prices. Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals is a practical guide to building a clear pricing strategy, feeling more confident and increasing earnings. It covers the critical steps to pricing a new client and how to re-price existing clients without losing them by quantifying value.

The book's step-by-step approach is backed up by dozens of real-life case studies of firms which applied these methods to get better results, along with benchmarking research based on a survey of thousands of accounting professionals. There is guidance on calculating a profitable price, creating effective packages and managing the 'invisible' cost of scope creep, and new insights into meeting clients remotely and pricing in difficult economic times. Become more profitable and deliver extraordinary solutions to clients with this essential guide to effective value pricing.

Author Information

Mark Wickersham is a Chartered Accountant, speaker and sought-after profit improvement expert. Since selling his own accountancy practice in 2006 he has trained and mentored hundreds of accountants around the world on how to improve their value pricing techniques and strategies. He has built a large, international online community with The Value Pricing Academy, The Bookkeepers' Pricing Academy and the private Facebook group, Value Pricing with Mark Wickersham.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398605374

Ebook: 9781398605381

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

1

The problem with the old-fashioned way of pricing accounting services

2 What the research tells us

3 Overcoming a lack of confidence when pricing

4 What makes a great pricing strategy?

5 How does pricing change in a postCOVID world?

6 The foundations of value pricing

7 The structure of the value conversation

8 How to price a new client

9 How to prequalify prospects so you avoid the time wasters

10 The questions to ask the client to determine value

11 Giving clients a choice – Your first step to value pricing

12 How to create effective packages

13 How to calculate a profitable price

14 How to properly build scope into the price so you never make a loss

15 How to set out your fixed price agreement

16 How to identify and tackle scope creep

17 How to re-price your existing clients without fear of losing them

18 How to get clients to value what you do for them

19 How to quantify the value to your client

20 The reason your clients are clueless about price and how that helps you

A Complete Guide for Accountants and Bookkeepers to Find the Right Clients and Increase Profitability

Forensic Accounting and Finance

Principles and Practice

This book

• Each chapter is written by a high-profile specialist, in association with the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants, bringing the latest industry insights to the topics covered

• Considers the Forensic Accountant in practice, using case studies throughout from a number of different regions and sectors to demonstrate the link between theory and forensic accountancy in the professional world

• Offers comprehensive coverage of all key forensic accounting topics, such as taxation, financial analysis and modelling and auditing and reporting while also covering areas of current interest to the sector, including financial crime, fraud and cyber crime while sharing expertise on civil disputes and litigation and expert witnessing and dispute resolution

• Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and links to regional updates

Description

A complete guide to Forensic Accounting and Finance, this book is ideal for advancedlevel students and new or mid-level forensic accounting professionals looking to boost their specialist knowledge as part of their CPD, for accountants who wish to build more knowledge in this skills area or advanced undergraduates who feel ready to stretch themselves.

Demand for expertise in this field is growing, and Forensic Accounting and Finance offers a complete, accessible and affordable guide, combining coverage of principle theory with the real and practical needs of the professional. Written by a strong academic and practitioner author team and in association with the Network for Independent Forensic Accountants, this book covers all forensic accounting topics from forensics as an extension of auditing and the basic principles of forensic accounting, to financial analysis and modelling, financial reporting, financial crime, and IT systems.

Forensic Accounting and Finance shares current examples and case studies, highlighting cultural differences for key topics with updated regional legislation information available online for those looking for a truly global approach which is always up to date. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides and links to regional updates.

Author Information

Bee-Lean Chew is an experienced member of the forensic accounting team at Wilder Coe Ltd., a director of the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants and a provider of CPD training to solicitors and fellow business professionals. The author trained with Wilder Coe Ltd., becoming partner in 2005. A Chartered Accountant, Ms Chew has a Law degree from Kent University, a Master's degree in Finance from the University of Strathclyde and is an ICAEW-accredited Forensic Accountant.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749479992

Ebook: 9780749480004 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 215x140

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

1 The forensic accountant in practice [Fiona Hotston Moore and Simon Martin]

2 The forensic accountant as expert witness [Niamh M Brennan]

3 Forensic accountancy and taxation [Tim Cook]

4 Forensic accountancy and fraud [David Muggridge]

5 Fraud prevention [Steven Toms]

6 Professional negligence [Adam Stronach and Christopher Hatcher]

7 Valuations [Brian Spencer and Christopher Hatcher]

8 Audit and financial reporting [Bee-Lean Chew]

9 Crime [Andrew Donaldson and Adam Calvert]

10 Commercial disputes [Kate Hart]

11 Forensic accountancy in matrimonial cases [Kate Hart]

12 Insolvency [Norman Cowan]

13 Personal injury [Christopher Hatcher]

Investment and Portfolio Management

A Practical Introduction

This book

• Introduces what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject in a highly accessible, engaging way

• Is rooted in Europe rather than adapted from a US text, but draws on examples and practice from around the world

• Adopts a practical approach, drawing on the authors' many years of experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with real-world examples and practice, making it the perfect choice for those preparing for a career in finance and investment

• Offers a concise introduction, supported with links to further reading and self-directional study

• Online resources: Lecture slides and figures from the book

Description

For students of finance at both undergraduate and postgraduate level, or those preparing for professional examinations, Investment and Portfolio Management develops knowledge and understanding of the key financial products, investment strategies and risks in financial markets in the UK and internationally.

With an emphasis on practice, Investment and Portfolio Management presents the theory and its relevance and application in the financial workplace. The authors draw on their experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with case studies, examples and problems, including material relevant to candidates studying for professional examinations offered by the major professional bodies in the subject area (Charted Institute of Investment, CII & Chartered Institute of Securities and Investment, CISI). Each chapter is written in an easy-to-follow style, allowing readers to navigate their way through different topics without issue, avoiding complicated technical jargon, in favour of simpler terms and writing style. To meet the criteria for those studying for academic and professional courses, links are provided to more in-depth material and in-chapter features to encourage selfdirectional learning.

Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and figures from the book.

Author Information

Ian Pagdin is Course Leader for Banking & Finance Masters and a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. His background is finance, having worked in the finance industry for 22 years, including 19 years as an independent financial adviser.

Michelle Hardy is a senior lecturer and module leader for several key modules on a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. Her background is corporate banking and international wealth management for 14 years. She is a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2017

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749480059

Ebook: 9780749480066 Pages: 616

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Introduction

Financial Markets

Main Market Participants

Global Fund Management Industry

Investment Theory

Investment Classes

Equity

Debt

Mutual Funds

Derivatives

Alternative Investments

Risk

Types of Risk

Financial Regulation and Supervision

Portfolio Management

The Advisor and the Client

Issues Involved in the Management of Retail Fund Management Products

Taxation

Understanding Islamic Financial Services

Theory and Practice

This book

• Considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions

• Offers four cutting edge, in depth case studies that clearly demonstrate how the system operates in different types of financial systems

• Is written by Karim Ullah, a key player in Islamic finance in Pakistan, having played a major role in setting up the Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance there

• Presents a much needed up to date resource for a growing global industry thirsty for new sources of knowledge.

Description

WINNER: The HEC Outstanding Research Award 2019

Understanding Islamic Financial Services offers fresh insights on the Islamic financial system. The importance of this system cannot be underestimated. Experts expect that it is likely to sustain double digit growth globally over the next few years, and demand for professionals in the area has never been higher, both in the UK and around the world.

While other texts on the subject look at the basic concepts, principles, contracts and financial products used in Islamic banking and finance, Understanding Islamic Financial Services goes one step further and provides a new context, identifying four levels on which the Islamic Financial system operates: product level, institution level, market level and intermarket level. It considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions.

Understanding Islamic Financial Services covers contemporary developments in service science (e.g. service theories, service visualization tools and service co-creation concepts) and implications for the development and sustainability of Islamic financial services Examples from practice enliven the text and allow the reader to relate the theories and principles discussed to current practice.

Author Information

Karim Ullah is Assistant Professor and Islamic Financial Services Co-ordinator, Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance at the Institute of Management Sciences. He has taught extensively in the areas of Islamic banking and finance, business finance and managerial finance, amongst others.

Wafi Al-Karaghouli is Senior Lecturer in Operations and Project Management, Brunel University. He has extensive experience within multinational companies and Higher Education.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749480516

Ebook: 9780749480523

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

1 History and Development of the Islamic Financial System

2 Islamic Law (Shariah), Economics, and Financial System

3 Core Elements of the Islamic Financial System

4 Multi-Level Islamic Financial System

5 Product Level Development of Islamic Financial System

6 Institution Level Development of Islamic Finance

7 Market Level Development of Islamic Financial System

8 Inter-Markets (Ecosystem) Level Development of Islamic Financial System

9 Adaptability and Sustainability of Islamic Financial System

Finance,

The Contemporary CFO

How Finance Leaders Can Drive Business Transformation, Performance and Growth in a Connected World

This book

• Motivates current and future finance leaders to re-examine their approaches and the capabilities needed to meet rapidly changing expectations in an uncertain, connected world

• Examines the practical aspects of digital business transformation, from process automation to creating a data-driven culture and preparing knowledge workers for a new future

• Evaluates new requirements for corporate performance management, including more dynamic approaches to planning, budgeting, forecasting, resource allocation and performance tracking

• Explores the evolution of new digital business models, including digital business platforms and ditial business ecosystems, and their implications on value creation and on driving sustainable growth

• Includes key takeaways, guiding principles, case studies and practical examples throughout the book to encourage readers to apply leading practices in their own organization

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398602908

Ebook: 9781398602915 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The engineer perspective (and the art of design thinking)

Introduction

Beyond process automation

Data, data, data

It’s all about people

The engineer perspective - Summary

The entrepreneur perspective (and the art of systems thinking)

Introduction

The strategic performance dialogue

The operational performance dialogue

Performance culture

The entrepreneur perspective - Summary

The economist perspective (and the art of network thinking)

Introduction

Digital business platform

Digital business ecosystems

Multi-stakeholder value

The economist perspective - Summary

Bibliography

Anti-Money Laundering

A Practical Guide to Reducing Organizational Risk

This book

• Addresses the needs of the non-specialist compliance professional from a range of industries, backgrounds and experience

• Outlines the different elements of antimoney laundering (AML) practice to support compliance professionals at any stage of their career to put effective controls in place in their own organisations

• Presents readers with the global oversight needed to align activity to a cohesive plan, sharing case studies and examples of good and bad practice from around the world

• Includes the EU 4th Directive, due to come into practice in July 2017; stays up-to-date with current regulations

Description

It is estimated that between 2 and 5 per cent of global GDP (over $3 trillion) is laundered by criminals around the world every year.

Once thought to be a problem which only affected banks and the financial services sector, high profile cases, such as the recent leak of the Panama Papers in 2016, have thrust the issue into the public arena, and governments around the world are being forced to put robust systems and controls in place. Anti-Money Laundering offers a cost-effective selfdevelopment tool for the busy compliance professional eager to progress their career and in need of an accessible, practical and jargon-free introduction to anti-money laundering (AML).

Anti-Money Laundering offers a practical guide to navigate the maze of requirements needed to counter money laundering in an organization. This book separates the different elements of AML practice, featuring a range of case studies and scenarios highlighting issues and best practices around the world. The text demonstrates that it is by foresight and methodology that AML can be mitigated, and provides clarity on complex points to better enable readers to gain the expertise they need to achieve success in practice.

Author Information

Rose Chapman is the Global Head of Compliance for a leading travel commerce platform and solutions provider. With over 20 years of experience working in compliance and ethics in global organizations, she is accustomed to the demands and challenges faced by business professionals and compliance teams working in fast-moving, culturally diverse and dynamic environments. She is a lecturer and training manual writer/reviewer for the ICA in Post Graduate Diplomas and Certificates in Compliance, a member of the Institute of Money Laundering Prevention Officers Committee, UK, and a recognised speaker and expert voice on anti-money laundering.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2018

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749481896

Ebook: 9780749481902

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 234x154

Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Reaction: The rise of anti-money laundering and counter-terrorist financing activity

2 Implementing an anti-money laundering risk control framework

3 Using the anti-money laundering strategy wheel

4 Applying the brakes at key moments

5 Country and people risk

6 Product and delivery channel risk

7 Regulators: External reporting and Financial Intelligence Unit activity

8 Navigating cultural change

9 Conclusion

Financial Technology

Case Studies in Fintech Innovation

This book

• Combines theoretical and commercial perspectives informed by the author's professional experience and academic research

• Thoroughly explains key technologies and emerging business models in a clear and accessible manner for those with no technological background

• Includes a mix of international case studies from large financial services organizations and smaller start-ups, including Lloyds Bank, TransferWise, Generali, Starling and Stocktwits

• Covers the topics required for postgraduate and undergraduate Financial Technology courses and includes learning objectives and discussion questions based on case studies

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides for lecturers and additional case studies.

Description

With the continued success of fintech (financial technology) businesses around the world, financial services are becoming increasingly de-centralized, personalized, and automated.

This new textbook strikes a balance between academic depth and commercial relevance in examining the advantages and challenges of these changes through the lens of various analytical frameworks. Financial Technology demystifies key technologies, such as blockchains, APIs, AI, machine learning, and cloud computing, in a clear and accessible style suitable for readers with no technological background.

Real-world case studies from a variety of international organizations including Lloyds Bank, TransferWise, Generali, Starling and Stocktwits, bridge the gap between theory and practice and contextualize learning in terms of real businesses, from large incumbents to smaller start-ups. With coverage of robo-advisors, mobile-only banks, open banking and risk and regulation, this book also explores a range of analytical frameworks to critically examine new technologies and emerging business models.

Financial Technology enables readers to understand the fintech movement in the context of recent financial history, examine the key drivers of change and form insights about the financial system in a forward-looking and global manner. Online resources include PowerPoint slides for lecturers and additional case studies.

Author Information

Niels Pedersen is a Senior Lecturer on the MSc Financial Technology programme at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, and a regular conference speaker on fintech. As a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW), he worked at PwC and the Financial Services Authority before coming to academia.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789665437

Ebook: 9781789665444 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Financial Technology

Finance, Risk,

Table of Contents

1 Networks, APIs and fintech banking platforms – How technology is decentralizing finance

2 Disruption and disintermediation – How financial innovation and cloud computing gave birth to the fintech revolution

3 Behavioural economics and experience design – How to optimize user engagement

4 Artificial intelligence and automation in fintech – AI and machine learning in practice

5 Bitcoin, blockchain and cryptocurrencies – The applications of distributed ledger technology in finance

6 Digitizing the price mechanism – The impact of automation and social media on financial markets

7 Financial crime, cybersecurity and risk management – Pitfalls and opportunities in fintech

8 Regtech and regulatory compliance –Financial regulation in a fintech context

9 Looking to the future – Optimization, decentralization and personalization

Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups

How to Power Growth, Track Performance and Drive Innovation

This book

• Develops the financial intelligence you need to communicate effectively with investors, implement business strategies and pinpoint emerging pathways for profit

• Outlines how to analyze your performance and undertake risk-return assessments to tactically grow your start-up

• Offers proven methods for tracking your start-up’s progress to ensure that growth is maintained and continuous

• New to this edition: analysis of financial statements directly from start-ups, new case studies on companies that have scaled up, focus on new digital technologies and market opportunities for start-ups, information on new players and potential future tech startups

Description

More than a third of start-ups fail due to founders having a poor understanding of financial management. Become financially savvy with this easy to understand guide and learn how to effectively grow your business, communicate with investors and progress to the next level.

Start-ups face many challenges but managing the finances does not need to be one. Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups offers a complete financial toolkit on how to use this area of your business to your advantage. This book contains invaluable tools and insights designed specifically for tech start-ups, with a concentrated focus on what is important in financial terms for technology-based and innovation focused entrepreneurial businesses.

The fully updated second edition offers greater analysis of financial statements directly from real-world start-ups, charts the success of businesses that went from start-up to scale-up with all new case studies and covers new digital technologies, emerging opportunities in the ecosystem, developing markets and much more. For entrepreneurs and tech innovators, this is a must-have book to help take your idea from concept to company with clear and effective financial insights.

Author Information

Alnoor Bhimani is Professor of Management Accounting at the London School of Economics (LSE) and was previously Head of the Department of Accounting and Founding Director of LSE Entrepreneurship based in London, UK. He regularly delivers business and technology focused talks at conferences and events across the globe, is a professionally certified accountant and has a PhD from LSE and an MBA from Cornell University where he was a Fulbright Scholar.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398603066

Ebook: 9781398603073 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Financial Technology

Table of Contents

Now is the Time

Tech Start-ups - It’s a Different World

Start-up Contribution Analysis

Start-up Financial Analysis

Start-up Progress Analysis

The Importance of Being Liquid

What’s it Worth to you

Tracking your Start-up’s Growth

Glossary

Resources

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech

Driving Banking Innovation Through Effective Partnerships

This book

• Explores how banks can collaborate with fintech firms to drive innovation in areas such as cash management, compliance and tax

• Explains key fintech segments such as regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance management

• Includes case studies and business models of banks who have had successful partnerships including Barclays and Citibank

• Covers key fintech hubs in Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America and the US

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749486372

Ebook: 9780749486389 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Financial Technology

Table of Contents

1 Banks versus fintechs during the economic crisis

Fintech for customer experience

Early collaboration models

Widening of the fintech ecosystem

Emerging markets driving innovation

Governments and fintech hubs

Fintech segments at play

B2B fintech

Collaboration models within fintech

Challenger banking

Data and analytics

Conclusion

Description

Fintech has emerged as one of the fastest growing sectors in the financial services industry and has radically disrupted traditional banking. However, it has become clear that for both to thrive, the culture between fintech and incumbent firms must change from one of competition to collaboration. The Financial Services Guide to Fintech looks at this trend in detail, using case studies of successful partnerships to show how banks and fintech organizations can work together to innovate faster and increase profitability.

Written by an experienced fintech advisor and influencer, this book explains the fundamental concepts of this exciting space and the key segments to have emerged, including regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance management. It looks at the successes and failures of bank-fintech collaboration, focusing on technologies and start-ups that are highly relevant to banks’ product and business areas such as cash management, compliance and tax. With international coverage of key markets, The Financial Services Guide to Fintech offers practical guidance, use cases and business models for banks and financial services firms to use when working with fintech companies.

Author Information

Devie Mohan is a fintech industry advisor and analyst based in London, UK. She is cofounder and CEO of Burnmark, a fintech research company, a contributor to the ING group Think Forward Initiative, and sits on the Editorial Board for the Journal of Digital Banking. She has been listed in the top 10 of various fintech influencer lists. In 2019 she was included in the Financial Times’ list of the 100 most influential BAME leaders in technology.

Risk,

The Cryptocurrency Revolution

Finance in the Age of Bitcoin, Blockchains and Tokens

This book

• Pulls together the most important takeaways from the growth of cryptocurrencies and blockchains, looking at their potential impact on traditional business and finance

• Explains the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how the landscape has evolved

• Explores how blockchains can enable new financial products and efficiencies for incumbent banks and financial institutions

• Examines the implications of Big Tech companies such as Facebook entering the digital currency market

• Compares the attitudes of governments and regulators around the world to genuinely borderless technologies

Description

The world of cryptocurrencies and blockchains was initially viewed as a niche space of little interest to mainstream business and finance sectors.

With major banks now licensed to provide cryptocurrency custody solutions, and everyone from Facebook to governments using the underlying technology to create their own digital currencies, this has undoubtedly changed.

The Cryptocurrency Revolution explains the most important takeaways from the continued growth of digital currencies and blockchain technology and explores the transformative possibilities of borderless payments, decentralized finance (‘DeFi’) and machine-to-machine transactions.

Written in jargon-free and accessible language, this book examines the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how decentralized technologies could enable banks and financial institutions to become more efficient. It looks at the potential impact of company-backed virtual currencies (such as Facebook’s Libra) and how governments and regulators around the world are reacting to these innovations. With discussion of the principles of tokenomics and the difference between public and private blockchains, The Cryptocurrency Revolution is the essential guide for those wishing to understand the threats and opportunities of the changing world of payments and finance.

Author Information

Rhian Lewis is a software engineer and former digital journalist at thetimes.co.uk. She co-founded the London Women in Bitcoin meetup in 2014 and co-developed the altcoin portfolio tracker countmycrypto.com. She is an international conference speaker and blogger on blockchain technology and cryptocurrency.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789665680

Ebook: 9781789665697

Pages: 280 Format (mm): 230x158

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Financial Technology

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What is money?

2 The first 10 years of Bitcoin

3 Litecoin, Ethereum and a tidal wave of altcoins

4 Libra: how Big Tech moved in on digital currencies

5 Tokenomics and governance

6 Driving change with token economies: case studies

Public blockchains versus permissioned blockchains

ICO mania

Banking and financial services

A revolution in financial products

Regulation

12 State-issued digital currencies

Future digital currency trends

International Finance

For Non-Financial Managers

This book

• Includes a highly accessible, engaging introduction to what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject

• Draws on examples from practice from around the world to offer a truly global approach

• Offers an up-to-date approach to the subject post global financial crisis

• Provides a glossary to accompany the text, offering instant access to key terminology

• Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2018

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749480011

Ebook: 9780749480028 Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional Subject: International Finance

Table of Contents

1 The International Financial Environment

The Rise of the Multinational and the International Monetary System

2 The Institutions and Participants that Make Up the Global Financial System

The History of Exchange Rates, the IMF and the World Bank

The Euro and the Global Financial Environment

Exchange Rates

Exchange Rate Regimes

Description

International Finance offers a clear and accessible introduction to the fundamental principles and practice of international finance in today's world, from the international financial environment and exchange rates, to financing multinational companies and international investment. The theory and techniques are presented with the non-financial manager in mind, and the theoretical material is supplemented by case studies and a discussion of the appropriateness of the various techniques and principles to solve practical problems. This book draws from examples and practice around the world, helping students of international corporate finance, particularly non-specialist finance students, understand the complexities of modern Europe and comparative systems of finance globally.

International Finance is essential reading for anyone studying international finance or needing an up-to-date, engaging resource to help them navigate the complicated and ever-changing global financial world. Key theories and terms are explained and defined, avoiding unnecessary jargon and acknowledging that many readers are coming to the subject with little or no prior knowledge of corporate finance at all. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

Author Information

Dora Hancock has over 30 years' teaching experience at universities in the UK including Birmingham City University and Leeds Beckett University. Recently, her teaching has focused solely on finance, including international, corporate and investment finance on undergraduate, postgraduate and professional courses. She has taught UK and international students. The author is passionate about teaching and writing materials for students and lecturers to use.

Parity Conditions and Forecasting Exchange Rates

Currency Markets

Measuring and Managing Exchange Risk

Financing the International Company

Financing International Trade

Long Term Sources of Finance

International Cash Management

International Investment

Investing Directly in Foreign Enterprises

International Investment Appraisal

Country Risk Analysis

Long–Term Financing

Capital Structure

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance

The Complete Guide for International Sales, Finance, Shipping and Administration

This book

• Contains international case studies and examples of cross-border transactions from across the globe

• Features a section on risk management and its potential impact on the physical flow of goods and the cost of insurance

• Contains a comprehensive glossary to demystify all the key terms associated with international trade and finance to ensure that readers can use them confidently

• Provides a complete and thorough assessment of all the issues involved in the international financing process as well as key insight into the financing process by describing it from the perspectives of both the buyer and the seller

• Is full of practical examples and easy-touse templates to ensure practitioners are complying with best practice

• Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Description

International trade, and its financing, is now a key component of many undergraduate and postgraduate qualifications. For anyone involved in international sales, finance, shipping and administration, or for those studying for academic or professional qualifications in international trade, The Handbook of International Trade and Finance offers an extensive and topical explanation of the key finance areas. This essential reference resource provides the information necessary to help you to reduce risks and improve cash flow, identify the most competitive finance alternatives, structure the best payment terms, and minimize finance and transaction costs.

This fully revised and updated 4th edition of The Handbook of International Trade and Finance also describes the negotiating process from the perspectives of both the buyer and the seller, providing valuable insight into the complete financing process, and covering key topics such as: trade risks and risk assessment; structured trade finance; methods and terms of payment; currency risk management and bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit.

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance provides a complete and thorough assessment of all the issues involved in constructing, financing and completing a crossborder transaction, as an indispensable guide for anyone dealing with international trade. The new edition also includes a section on risk management, which plays an increasingly important role in international trade from currency fluctuations to political risk and natural disasters.

N.B. This covers the principles of international trade and finance that are common across the globe and is relevant to anyone wanting to understand the subject, wherever they are located. Specific national issues (such as the UK's Brexit decision) do not affect the content. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

Author Information

Anders Grath has over 25 years' experience in international trade and finance within major European financial institutions, as head of both international departments and corporate units. He is the author of a series of similar titles on individual country markets.

Finance, Risk, Information Management

Edition: 4

Date: 03/08/2016

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749475987

Ebook: 9780749475994

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: International Finance

Table of Contents

Trade risks and risk assessment

Methods of payment

Bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit

Currency risk management

Export credit insurance

Trade finance

Structured trade finance

Terms of payment

The export quotation

Retail and Digital Banking

Principles and Practice

This book

• Supports the Chartered Banker Institute's Personal and Private Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

• Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking in professional training or at undergraduate and postgraduate level

• Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

• Offers thought leadership on retail and digital banking from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

• Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for the Personal and Private Banking module, Retail and Digital Banking looks at the changes that have occurred, including developments in onshore and offshore operations, call centres and the impact of technology and other critical factors in retail and digital banking. This book considers the evolution of retail banking services and the major role that technology has played in providing quality, cost-effective services to consumers. This fascinating text then goes on to offer expert thought leadership on the future of retail banking and what this could mean for existing established banks and disruptive new entrants.

Retail and Digital Banking offers readers the opportunity to take a step back and consider the evolution of the sector in which they work and the tremendous level of change that has occurred over time for all operational activity. Retail and Digital Banking provides support for the Personal and Private Banking module assessment and features practical case studies from the banking sector. This essential text brings the journey of modern banking to life and considers what the future holds. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

Author Information

John Henderson has over 30 years' experience in the banking sector, having held a number of roles for the Bank of Scotland, Sainsbury's Bank, the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS) and NatWest. He began his career working in retail branches but has also been Regional Training Manager, headed up the Treasury Department and other operational risk services, managed quality for an operational call centre business and also led branch design and distribution. His current role is with the RBS Group, where he manages the offshoring portfolio. The author is a Fellow of the Chartered Banker Institute.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482718

Ebook: 9780749482725

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x160

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The birth and development of retail banking

2 The growth of retail banking and its place in the economy

3 Problems and opportunities caused by financial crises

4 Preparing for external trends and influences to deliver high-quality income and cost-effective services

5 Disruption in the market

6 Distribution of retail banking services via a range of customer channels

7 Multi-channel versus omni-channel

8 The role of technology in the evolution of retail banking

9 The impact of legislation and regulation on retail banking operations

Relationship Management in Banking

Principles and Practice

This book

• Supports the Chartered Banker Institute's Personal & Private Banking and Commercial Lending modules requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

• Is written by banking sector experts with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level

• Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

• Offers thought leadership on relationship management from expert authors with over 50 years of combined experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

• Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for the Personal & Private Banking and Commercial Lending modules, Relationship Management in Banking supports and develops the need to be able to manage key customer relationships. The text considers the nature of commercial relationships and help the reader synthesise complex factors in order to develop a robust relationship management methodology. It will draw from bona fide case studies and examples that can demonstrate key relationship management concepts as well as bring learning to life and share examples of customers, good and bad, from a range of different sectors.

Through case studies and providing online updates to regulations, Relationship Management in Banking considers how to critically analyze approaches to relationship management used for a variety of banking customer types and examine the impact of legislation, regulation, governance and technology on banking relationship management and customer acquisition and retention. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

Author Information

Steve Goulding worked for a UK Bank for 35 years, the majority of which were spent in Commercial and Corporate, as a Relationship Director. He is now an author, coach and mentor for a number of financial services personnel, and provides management consultancy services for a number of businesses.

Richard Abley has operated within the banking industry since 1978, fulfilling a number of customer-facing and leadership roles in business and corporate banking. Simultaneously, he has lectured to many hundreds of bankers seeking to obtain their professional qualifications, and has co-authored several books on banking.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482831

Ebook: 9780749482848

Pages: 400

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Business customers

2 Products and services

3 Reputational risk and ethics

4 The changing nature of banking

5 The changing nature of regulation and legislation

6 The role of the relationship manager

7 Tools and techniques to help relationship managers

8 Customer service and portfolio planning

9 Relationship strategies: customer retention, development and acquisition

10 Case study – gaining new business

11 Glossary

Commercial Lending

Principles and Practice

This book

• Supports the Chartered Banker Institute's Commercial Lending module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

• Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level

• Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

• Offers additional numeracy support to help readers with practical lending work, such as assessing balance sheets and understanding financial reports and documents

• Offers thought leadership on commercial lending from an expert author with over 30 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

• Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for one of the modules leading to the Institute's professional qualifications and chartered status, Commercial Lending supports readers that wish to develop their ability to analyze the creditworthiness of a customer and their business in the context of the current economic climate, future market and sector expectations.

Commercial Lending uses a series of practical exercises and case studies, and provides the tools needed for the reader to understand and appraise a customer's business strategy. This will then enable the reader to provide appropriate funding solutions to meet the commercial needs of customers while reflecting the bank's risk appetite. These tools include: how to assess the performance and creditworthiness of a business; how to critically evaluate the robustness of cash flow; and how to undertake sensitivity analysis to quantify sustainable debt repayment capacity. This practical text will present a critical analysis of financial and non-financial information to help readers identify key risks inherent in the customer's lending proposition. Readers will go on to propose suitable funding solutions that mitigate risk and meet the needs of customer and bank. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

Author Information

Adrian Cudby runs his own financial training and consulting business based in Leeds, UK. His clients range from international financial institutions to individuals who require oneto-one mentoring and coaching. He is a professional banker (ACIB) with over thirty years' experience in the industry. He has a Master's Degree in Business Administration and holds a Postgraduate Certificate in Higher Education.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482770

Ebook: 9780749482787 Pages: 352

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Table of Contents

1 The relationship between the bank and the customer

2 The financial analysis of businesses

Cash analysis

How to structure a lending proposition

The strategic analysis of business

Securities for lending

Lending products

Management and leadership

Businesses facing financial difficulties

Glossary

Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking

Principles and Practice

This book

• Supports the Chartered Banker Institute's Professionalism and Ethics module requirements and helps prepare for assessment

• Includes case studies, further reading and viewing recommendations, and definitions of key terms throughout

• Analyzes the evolution of the bank's role in society and examines the impact of legislation, regulation and governance on banking operations

• Offers a range of ethical theories and their applicability to banking and finance

• Online resources: a glossary and information on further sources

Description

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for its professional qualifications, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking emphasizes the importance of professionalism for banks, and explores how all staff play a key role in putting customers at the heart of their business.

Taking an applied approach, it aims to develop the reader's capability to: recognize and contribute towards balanced outcomes for consumers and organizations; understand the impact of reputational deficit; and understand the personal impact of an individual in the workplace.

From a discussion of the main branches of ethical thinking to an overview of regulation and legislation in the UK and internationally, this book covers the theory and practice of conduct and professionalism in banking. Chapters contain activities and industry case studies, and further reading and viewing suggestions are included to help develop a deeper understanding of the topics covered. With fully referenced discussion of conflicts of interest, decision making models, the role of professional bodies, corporate governance, conduct risk management and the Global Financial Crisis 2007-08, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking is the essential guide for finance professionals.

Author Information

Fred Bell is an experienced career banker with extensive risk management leadership expertise. Working over 39 years in the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS), he has held senior leadership roles including Head of Operational Risk in the RBS Wealth Division, Head of Risk at Tesco Personal Finance and Head of the RBS Bank of China Risk Programme. Bell established and ran RBS's first dedicated business continuity function.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2019

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482909

Ebook: 9780749482916 Pages: 376

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Ethics theory

Professionalism and ethics in banking

Ethical decision making in practice

A short history of banking

An overview of regulation and legislation in banking

Corporate governance

Conduct and culture in banking

Conduct risk management

Corporate social responsibility and environmental issues

Ethics and technology

Reinventing Banking and Finance

Frameworks to Navigate Global Fintech Innovation

This book

• Provides advice for banking and finance professionals on the drivers and challenges of innovation, and the possibilities of collaboration and partnerships

• Explores the emergence of global fintech hubs, including London, New York, Tel Aviv, the Gulf and Shenzhen, and how their specialisms distinguish them

• Contains examples of companies leading in innovation and interviews with innovators and experts to capture multiple perspectives

• Covers current technology trends in banking and finance such as AI, machine learning, blockchain and digital identity

• Outlines the background and building blocks of innovation in financial services and the key factors which have shaped the industry such as mobile, cybersecurity and big data

Description

Named as the best overall book on banking of 2022 by Investopedia.

The finance industry is currently going through a digital revolution, with new and developing technology transforming the world of banking and financial services beyond recognition. Banks and financial institutions worldwide recognize the pressing need to innovate to avoid disruption or displacement by highly agile and often smaller fintech companies. Reinventing Banking and Finance is an essential guide for finance professionals to current trends in fintech, innovation frameworks, the challenges of outsourcing or embedding innovation, and how to effectively collaborate with other organizations.

Beginning with the history and background of how banking got to the era of fintech, the book provides a thorough overview of the global fintech ecosystem and the drivers behind innovation in technologies, business models and distribution channels. Examples of key institutions and interviews with innovators and experts shine a light on key financial innovation hubs in UK, US, China, Israel and more, and offer advice for institutions looking to choose the right market for their needs. Covering genuine innovations in AI, machine learning, blockchain and digital identity, Reinventing Banking and Finance offers expert insight into navigating the complex and multi-layered finance industry.

Author Information

Helene Panzarino is a highly experienced fintech Programme Director, exited entrepreneur, educator and author. Her most recent role was MD of the global Rainmaking Colab fintech Programme, a world-first, post-accelerator programme for Series A+ fintechs and Tier 1 financial institutions. She is also an Associate Director of the LIBF Digital Banking Centre, the Lead Fellow and creator on a world-first fintech Pathway in a Masters in Tech Entrepreneurship Degree for UCL. She is a co-creator and lead delivery partner on the Imperial College Fintech Executive Education.

Alessandro Hatami is the founder of advisory firm Pacemakers.io, specialising in digital transformation in financial services. He has been a practitioner of digital innovation in banking for over 15 years, holding senior executive roles at businesses such as PayPal, Lloyds Banking Group, PayPoint and GE Capital.

Finance, Risk, Information Management

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789664096

Ebook: 9781789664102 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Banking

Table of Contents

The History of Banking

The Digital Threat

The Shape of the Perfect Neobank

The Journey from Bricks and Mortar to Digital

The Fintech Hubs

The Fintech Tribes

London

The Gulf

Paris

New York City

Tel Aviv

Shenzhen

Final Thoughts

Further reading

Green and Sustainable Finance

Principles and Practice in Banking, Investment and Insurance

This book

• Shows how to embed green and sustainable finance principles and practice into finance advice, analysis and decisions to lead a successful transition to net zero

• Covers risk and regulation in green finance, international market frameworks and standards, and the role of a range of financial institutions and markets

• Considers ethics and professionalism, and how the finance sector can mainstream green finance

• New to this edition: discussion of the growth of the green and sustainable bond market, ocean finance, sustainability reporting, and other emerging areas for green and sustainable finance, such as nature-based finance

• Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as the core text for the benchmark Certificate in Green and Sustainable Finance

Description

As nations continue to work towards a sustainable future, the finance sector has a crucial role to play in driving sustainable business and managing the transition to a net zero economy.

To achieve this change, it is vital for the finance sector to allocate capital to the firms, investments and projects looking to create a low carbon world. Green and Sustainable Finance offers a comprehensive guide to the application of common green and sustainable principles and practices in banking, investment and insurance to manage risks and seize opportunities in the transition to net zero. As climate change becomes an ever more pressing issue, it is essential that finance professionals grasp these principles to combat the threat of climate change and maximize the opportunities of a low-carbon future.

Written by the CEO of the Chartered Banker Institute, this fully updated second edition includes much greater coverage of the reporting of environmental impacts and carbon accounting, regulatory and market developments in climate and environmental risk management, the rapid growth of sustainable investment, and the latest finance sector alliance and initiatives, including the COP26 Private Finance Strategy and Glasgow Financial Alliance for Net Zero (GFANZ). Endorsed by the CBI as the core text for the benchmark Certificate in Green and Sustainable Finance, this book is essential reading for finance professionals and students taking modules on Green and Sustainable Finance, and individuals working to embed sustainability in business, policy and regulation.

Author Information

Simon Thompson is Chief Executive of the Chartered Banker Institute. He leads the UK's Green Finance Education Charter initiative and is a former Vice President of the European Bank Training Network. Simon is a Fellow of the Chartered Banker Institute, a Member of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development and holds an MBA from the University of Edinburgh.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/03/2023

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398609242

Ebook: 9781398609259 Pages: 568

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Sustainable Investment

Table of Contents

An Introduction to Green and Sustainable Finance

1 Climate Change and Our Changing World

Building a Sustainable Financial System

3 Monitoring and Reporting Flows and Impacts of Green and Sustainable Finance

4 Risk Management

5 Retail, Commercial and Corporate Banking

Green and Sustainable Bonds

Central and Development Banks

Sustainable Investment

Insurance

10 Green and Sustainable FinTech

11 The Future of Green and Sustainable Finance

Sustainable Investing in Practice

ESG Challenges and Opportunities

New

This book

• This insider's guide optimizes the opportunities for sustainable finance while noting and addressing the challenges with solutions

• Helps readers to avoid common pitfalls with its balanced and realistic take on sustainable investing

• Covers topics such as ESG ratings, data and disclosure, multi-asset portfolios and public equity markets

• Supported by fresh insights and viewpoints from a range of top-tier expert commentators including Richard Curtis, Professor Robert G. Eccles and Catherine Howarth.

• Written by an experienced author team who built one of the financial industry's fastest growing and most decorated sustainable investing franchises

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398607903

Ebook: 9781398607910 Pages: 312

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Sustainable Investment

Table of Contents

Introduction

What is sustainable investing?

Sustainable data and ESG ratings

Sustainable public equity markets

Sustainable public debt markets

Sustainable private markets

Themes and the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals

Sustainable multi-asset portfolios

Conclusion

The Practical Negotiation Handbook

A Five Step Approach to Lasting Partnerships

This book

• Explains how to follow a tried and tested fivestep negotiation process using a solutionfocused approach, from contextual analysis and goal preparation to building an offer

• Includes best practice case examples, checklists and tools that can be applied at once without too much theory

• Covers the importance of verbal and nonverbal communication skills, offers advice on virtual negotiations and addresses outdated beliefs about gender and negotiation

• Based on the author's years of experience negotiating in different international settings across business, academia and nongovernmental organizations

• Explores how to develop the right attitude and approach to get results as an ethical and respected negotiator

Description

Effective negotiations lead to sustainable partnerships, help both parties to achieve higher goals than they would alone and allow organizations to avoid the costly price of conflict. This book outlines a simple and powerful method of negotiating, either in person or virtually.

The Practical Negotiation Handbook outlines a tried and tested five-step process for negotiating lasting agreements, with best practice case examples, checklists and tools. This thoroughly practical guide brings together over 25 years of the author's experience negotiating in a variety of countries and contexts to give you the confidence to negotiate any kind of contract or agreement, large or small.

Using a 'solution-focused' approach which centres around preferred outcomes rather than conflicts, and on questioning and listening to the other party rather than trying to convince or impose and making assumptions, this pragmatic book will help build your profile as an ethical and respected negotiator. From contextual analysis and goal preparation to the importance of communication and building an offer, it cuts through the theory and clearly outlines the skills needed to influence the outcome and implementation of any negotiation.

Author Information

Melissa Davies is a negotiation expert, professional trainer and coach based in Geneva, Switzerland. She is the founder of negoservices Sàrl and has over 25 years' experience in negotiating agreements and building lasting partnerships around the world. She leads workshops in negotiation skills and conflict management for businesses, universities, research institutes and not-for-profit organizations, and is a visiting lecturer at Geneva School of Business Administration, University of Applied Sciences Western Switzerland.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2021

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398601802

Ebook: 9781398601819 Pages: 248

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Business & Management Skills

Table of Contents

Preface - Why this book fills a market need

1 Introduction and mind-set

2 The five-step negotiation process

3 Prerequisites and positioning your goal

4 Step 1 - Contextual analysis

5 Step 2 - Preparing your goal and your roadmap

6 Step 3 - The encounter(s)

7 Step 4 - The offer

8 Step 5 - The implementation

9 A few words on gender and negotiation

10 Stand out as an excellent negotiator

The Success Factor

Developing the Mindset and Skillset for Peak Business Performance

This book

• Features interviews with high achievers including Nobel laureates, astronauts and Olympic champions (including such people as Dr. Tony Fauci NIH (NIAID) Institute Director; Dr. Mike Brown, Nobel prize winner; Dr. Peggy Whitson, Former Chief Astronaut, NASA; Maxine Clark, founder and former CEO of Build-A-Bear Workshop)

• Outlines practices to help readers identify their passions, find mentors, develop a team of mentors, establish a community of practice and pursue informal learning

• Online resources include a downloadable Passion audit, a goal audit worksheet and a mentoring team worksheet

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398602298

Ebook: 9781398602304 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Business & Management Skills

Description

WINNER: Independent Press Award 2022 - Business Motivational

What do astronauts, Olympic champions, and Nobel laureates do differently that allows them to achieve at such a high level?

High achievers share the same four attributes: intrinsic motivation, perseverance, strong foundation, constantly learning through informal means. The key to their success is that they do all four of these things at the same time. Based on research and in-person interviews with astronauts, Nobel Prize winners, and Olympic champions, The Success Factor outlines the approach that individuals aspiring to improve their performance can adopt.

Using these four shared attributes as a guide, The Success Factor helps you reach your peak by applying the lessons of high achievers in your own life: identify your passion using a Passion Audit; learn how and where to find a mentor and how to build a mentoring team; develop your own community of practice; pursue your interests through informal learning; manage your time and energy. The Success Factor comes with online resources that feature a downloadable Passion Audit worksheet, Mentoring Team worksheet, and Goal Audit worksheet. The book offers scripts for approaching potential mentors and a list of uncommon places to find a mentor, such as webinars, airports, and social media.

The Success Factor features exclusive interviews with high achievers, including such people as Dr. Tony Fauci NIH/NIAID Institute Director; Dr Mike Brown, Nobel prize winner; Dr Peggy Whitson, Former NASA Chief Astronaut; Maxine Clark, founder and former CEO of Build-A-Bear Workshop; and Steve Kerr, eight time NBA Champion and head coach of the Golden State Warriors.

Author Information

Ruth Gotian, based in New Rochelle, New York, is a leadership coach, keynote speaker, educator, and social scientist who researches the most successful people in order to learn about their mindsets and practices. She serves as the Chief Learning Officer and is Assistant Professor of Education in Anesthesiology at Weill Cornell Medicine in New York City, New York. She is the 2021 recipient of the Thinkers50 RADAR Award, making her the world's #1 emerging management thinker. Her work regularly appears in Forbes, Psychology Today, Nature, Scientific American, Academic Medicine, and Harvard Business Review

Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Identifying Success

Objective versus Subjective Measures of Success

What is success?

Success is a Moving Target

Four Pillars of Optimizing Success

Tap into an Intrinsic Motivation

Respond to Challenges with Perseverance

Cultivate a Solid Foundation

Embrace Opportunities for Continuous Learning and Growth

Optimizing Your Success

Finding Your Passion

Finding a Mentor

Developing Your Mentoring Team

Finding Your People

Embracing Opportunities to Learn

Conclusion

Myths of Management

Dispel the Misconceptions and Become an Influential Manager

This book

• Explores 50 of the most pervasive myths that all managers and aspiring managers should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the downright damaging

• Is written by Professor Sir Cary Cooper (President of the CIPD and Professor at Manchester Business School) and Stefan Stern, management journalist and director of the High Pay Centre

• New to this edition: fully updated to bust new myths such as hybrid working is not going to work, extraverts are the vital ingredient to make a team perform, stars will always perform well wherever they are, entitled millennials are self-obsessed and frightened of hard work.

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

Is it really true that working longer hours makes you more successful? Are millennials self-obsessed and frightened of hard graft? Do you really need to hide your emotions in order to gain respect as a manager? Does higher pay really always lead to higher performance?

The world of management is blighted by fads, fiction and falsehoods. In Myths of Management, Cary Cooper and Stefan Stern take you on an entertaining journey through the most famous myths surrounding the much-written about topic of management. They debunk false assumptions, inject truth into over-simplifications and tackle damaging habits head-on.

Whether cheesy, naïve or even destructive, management myths could be holding you back and stifling your team's potential. Myths of Management is the guide you need to become an enlightened manager.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media, strategy and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the test. Entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Stefan Stern writes for the Guardian and the FT, where he was the management columnist between 2006 and 2010. He is visiting professor in management practice at Cass Business School and is Director of the High Pay Centre.

Sir Cary Cooper CBE is the 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the Alliance Manchester Business School, University of Manchester. He is President of the CIPD, President of the British Academy of Management and Editor-inChief of the Blackwell/Wiley Encyclopedia of Management

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398607743

Ebook: 9781398607750 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 216x135

Product Category: General Subject: Business & Management Skills

Research

Enjoy Creating, Developing and Writing Your Business Project

This book

• Provides a clear, step-by-step narrative that links the student's research to their aims of getting into their preferred organizations

• Makes students comfortable and confident in selecting research methods to learn about organizations

• Helps students to develop strong arguments and convincing stories that will convince examiners of their knowledge

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2013

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749468958

Ebook: 9780749468965

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business Research

Description

Knowledge of business research is necessary for any business student, as all postgraduate business programmes and business-related disciplines require it. Business Research is a groundbreaking book for student researchers who need to conceive, conduct and complete a new research project for the first time. It concentrates on the business organization and gives invaluable practical advice on going out into the field and conducting interviews, researching problems and learning about organizations. Through its conversational, accessible style and its adoption of a student's perspective, this book will make the process of learning about research enjoyable and the resulting research project outstanding.

Business Research is essential reading for students who are studying for one or more modules in research methods for a postgraduate qualification in business and management; students who have a methodological component to one of their modules (eg a module in organizational behaviour); and students who have to conduct an investigation in a business and management field, for a dissertation or project report, and need guidance and assistance on how to approach, conduct and report every aspect of their project.

Author Information

Wilson Ng leads and delivers business research methods modules for undergraduate and postgraduate students at the University of Roehampton. He is a Visiting Professor at two European universities: UNICA (Università degli studi di Cagliari) in Italy and BEM (Bordeaux Management School) in France. Prior to his academic career, Wilson was a senior investment banker with NM Rothschild in London and Singapore.

Elayne Coakes has taught business research methods at the University of Westminster for many years. Her consultancy experience in large and small enterprises has provided Elayne with extensive applied business experience.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Planning your project

The nature of business research

Methodology and methods

‘Doing’ your project

The project proposal

Collecting quantitative data

Collecting qualitative data through interviews

Collecting data as an ethnographer

Case study research

Collecting data: less common methods

Ensuring data saturation

Reporting your findings

Analysing quantitative data

Analysing qualitative data

Writing your report

Discussing project findings

Conclusion to your report

Reference lists

Writing your abstract

Conclusion

Business Research Methods

A Practical Approach

This book

• Helps students apply research methods to their own projects

• Presents complex principles in a user-friendly way

• Online resources: instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides, figures and tables from the text and web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students

Edition: 1

Date: 24/11/2009

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843982289

Ebook: 9781843983620 Pages: 656

Format (mm): 265x195

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Business Research

Description

Organizations need research, and managers have to be able to commission, judge and use others' research as well as conduct research themselves to inform business decisions. Business Research Methods helps you understand the challenges of carrying out worthwhile research into significant issues and develop a wide range of research-related professional skills. Guiding you through the process of selecting, carrying out and reporting on a successful research project, it breaks down the research process, from exploring the literature and crafting a research proposal to practical research management and addressing the transferable skills of project management and communication.

Business Research Methods places research firmly in the real world, exploring why research is done and how to ensure that projects are meaningful for organizations. Examples and case studies, including examples of students' projects, give learners with little or no work experience a meaningful context in which to relate their own projects. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor's manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides and figures and tables from the text. Resources for students include web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students.

Author Information

Sheila Cameron is a senior lecturer at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

Deborah Price is a lecturer in Management at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

Table of Contents

From First Ideas to Possible Topics

Practical Business Research - An Overview

The Complexities of Business Research

The Investigative Process

Stakeholders, Power and Ethics

Considering Possible Topics

Towards a Research Proposal

Exploring the Literature

Writing A Literature Review

Research Questions and Purposes

Data, Evidence and Sampling

Choosing a Research Method

Crafting a Research Proposal

Data Collection

Producing a Research Project from Secondary Data

Case Study Research

Action-Oriented Research and Action Research

Groups and Workshops

Analysis

Theory

Quantitative

Statistical

Research Skills

the Project

Client Relationships

and Reflection

about Research

Practical Statistics

A Handbook for Business Projects

This book

• Enables readers and students to translate statistical data into comprehensive information

• Supports readers at all levels of knowledge and experience through a two-level approach with 'The essentials' and 'Tell me more' sections

• Encourages active distance and independent learners through case studies and simple explanations

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2013

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9780749468460

Ebook: 9780749468477 Pages: 184

Format (mm): 244x172

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Business Research

Description

Practical Statistics is an introduction and reference guide for those studying business and management at postgraduate level, MBA students and professionals. It gives the reader a solid understanding of statistics without being too simple or mind-numbingly complex. It turns statistics, often perceived as being difficult and pointless, into something approachable and sensible.

John Buglear emphasizes the importance of working back from results rather than working out results. He starts the book with basic concepts that get increasingly more complex, from simple diagrams to multivariate methods, as well as using simple metaphors to aid understanding. The book has a two-level approach, with sections headed 'The essentials' and 'Tell me more' to support learning at all levels.

A rare book on business statistics that students and professionals can really understand, Practical Statistics supports active learning with use of applications and case studies, invaluable online learning materials and fully worked solutions to questions in the review section.

Author Information

John Buglear is Head of the Division of Management at Nottingham Business School. He teaches quantitative methods and basic accounting on undergraduate and postgraduate programmes. He has lectured in statistics, operational research and research methods on postgraduate international programmes: Azerbaijan (in collaboration with BP Exploration); the Czech Republic (in collaboration with PricewaterhouseCoopers) and Uzbekistan.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What you need to know before you start analysing data

2 Analysing univariate data

3 Analysing bivariate data

4 Analysing multivariate data with dependency

5 Analysing multivariate data for interdependency

The Business Analysis Handbook

Techniques and Questions to Deliver Better Business Outcomes

This book

• Explores common problems which occur when conducting business analysis and how to handle them

• Covers industry standard tools, techniques and methodologies, and explains which situations to use them in

• Includes standard templates of key documents such as the business requirements document, the functional requirements document, the options paper and the business solution document

• Offers advice on how to engage stakeholders, communicate effectively and handle conflict

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2019

Price: £31.99

Paperback: 9780749497064

Ebook: 9780749497057 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Business Research

Description

FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2020 - Specialist Book Category

FINALIST: PMI UK National Project Awards 2019 - Project Management Literature Category

The business analyst role can cover a wide range of responsibilities, including the elicitation and documenting of business requirements, upfront strategic work, design and implementation phases. Typical difficulties faced by analysts include stakeholders who disagree or don't know their requirements, handling estimates and project deadlines that conflict, and what to do if all the requirements are top priority. The Business Analysis Handbook offers practical solutions to these and other common problems which arise when uncovering requirements or conducting business analysis.

Getting requirements right is difficult; this book offers guidance on delivering the right project results, avoiding extra cost and work, and increasing the benefits to the organization. The Business Analysis Handbook provides an understanding of the analyst role and the soft skills required, and outlines industry standard tools and techniques with guidelines on their use to suit the most appropriate situations. Covering numerous techniques such as Business Process Model and Notation (BPMN), use cases and user stories, this essential guide also includes standard templates to save time and ensure nothing important is missed.

Author Information

Helen Winter has over 20 years' Business Analysis experience, having worked as a consultant on large-scale transformation programmes within the financial services, regulation, insurance and utilities sectors. She has the BCS International Diploma in Business Analysis and is a BCS certified Chartered IT Professional. She is an active volunteer for IIBA (International Institute of Business Analysis) and the founder of Business Bullet, an online magazine promoting business analysis and providing guidance for professionals.

Table of Contents

Preparation for business analysis

Effective working relationships

Business context and vision

Business context and business processes

Business context/understanding requirements

System context/understanding requirements

Managing requirements

Enterprise business analysis

Templates

Understanding Project Management

Skills and Insights for Successful Project Delivery

This book

• Improves managers' analytical skills and ability to recognise and manage projects

• Supports independent and distance learners with online resources, activities and exercises similar to those on MBA courses

• Fits into a range of business courses including MBAs and executive education schemes, allowing students to apply their practical experience in the workplace to their studies

• Encourages managers' understanding of specific contextual challenges that are increasingly common in the contemporary world of projects

• Online resources: lecture slides and instructor's manual

Description

Understanding Project Management takes an applied approach to the study of project management, carefully balancing reflective practice and methodology necessary for successful deployment of tools and techniques in the real world. Including plenty of practical examples as well as contemporary real-world case studies, it takes a unique approach to the study of project management with an emphasis on international aspects and dilemmas that are increasingly common in the contemporary world. With a host of features to encourage reflection and reinforce learning, it is the ideal complement for independent or classroom study on a range of business courses.

Understanding Project Management helps managers understand project management, develop perspectives in application, and, through reflection, enables them to develop a project management capability, at an individual, organization or project level. The content throughout is guided by practice, making this an essential read for anyone wishing to make a success of the project management role. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor's manual.

Author Information

Gary Straw has delivered project management modules on MBA and Master's and management development schemes for business schools in the UK and Eastern Europe, including Aberystwyth School of Management and Business, The Management Centre at Bangor University and Kingston Business School. He has also delivered ILM and CMI project management courses. His professional experience and insights into project management have developed through working within a number of private- and publicsector organizations, delivering projects in a range of market sectors.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2015

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749470555

Ebook: 9780749470562 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Project Management

Table of Contents

1 Projects in an ideal world

1 An introduction to projects and project management

2 Projects at the conceptual phase

Planning within projects

2 Projects in a real world

4 After the planning: delivering projects

Managing to completion

Reviewing and learning in projects

3 Projects in a challenging world

Projects – a way of thinking

Within and outside projects

A global stage

Managing and leading in project environments

Developing a capability

Managing and leading project enviornments

12 A spectrum of project management roles

Develop the capability

How to Manage Projects

Essential Project Management Skills to Deliver On-time, Onbudget Results

This book

• Provides a complete, jargon-free introduction to the principles and practices of project management, along with practical tools and checklists to use in real life

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential and value-adding work skills to help you develop your career

• Features practical, exercises, templates tools and checklists to use in real life

• New to this edition: fully updated to include revised exercises, case studies and worked examples

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606166

Ebook: 9781398606258

Pages: 240 Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Project Management

Description

Are you overwhelmed by project management jargon? Interested in developing a project management career, but bewildered by the plethora of costly courses and qualifications? Then this is the book for you.

How to Manage Projects explains the fundamentals of this essential skill in a clear, practical and accessible way, making it the perfect introduction to managing better projects in your current role, or even that first step to developing a professional career as a project manager.

This new 2nd edition features practical exercises and top tips, and takes you through successfully and confidently managing a project from conception to completion. Essential reading for anyone who wants to manage their own projects well without all the unnecessary jargon, How to Manage Projects makes this vital skill easily accessible with one handy, easy-to-use book.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Paul J Fielding (Ph.D ) is a business consultant specializing in developing project management systems, business operations and quality systems for his clients. He has received international awards and recognition (including the Deming Award), and has worked across many industries, technologies, and cultures, from large institutions to startups and non-profits. He has developed a worldwide reputation for developing quality project management systems, international business operations, creating game-changing process innovations and quality improvement processes. He currently operates out of Portland, ME; Dallas, TX; and NYC.

Table of Contents

1 Project success is more than just one thing

2 The accidental project manager – What is this going to take?

3 Where does a project manager fit in the organization? The role of the PMO

4 Project governance

5 Project scope – Defining it, managing it, changing it and avoiding creep

6 The project quality plan

7 Different types of project lifecycle models

8 Planning the project – Schedule management (time management)

9 The project staffing plan

10 Design and configuration management

11 Cost planning and cost management

12 The project’s supply chain plan

13 Project execution – Tracking, updating, reporting and acceptance

14 Evaluation, lessons learnt and improving the next project

The Power of Project Leadership

7 Keys to Help You Transform from Project Manager to Project Leader

This book

• Explains how to generate results for the project and client while being recognized in the process

• Explores how leaders can foster collaboration, gain buy-in from stakeholders, and motivate a team

• Includes interviews from dozens of leading experts from a variety of organizations, including Expedia, British Gas, Standard Bank, Verizon Enterprise Solutions, and the UK Government

• New to this edition: more interviews with successful project leaders and new coverage of topics such as overcoming dysfunctional team behaviour, facilitation and conflict resolution, and collaborative planning

Description

WINNER: PMI UK National Project Awards 2019 - Project Management Literature Category

Projects and work environments are becoming increasingly complex, with more stakeholders, dispersed teams and an unprecedented rate of technological change. In order to adapt to this complexity and find new opportunities to innovate and build a high performing team, project managers must shift their mindset to one of project leadership. The Power of Project Leadership explains how to generate positive results for projects and clients while growing as a leader and empowering the team to fully contribute.

Now in its second edition, The Power of Project Leadership contains new interviews with successful project leaders and discusses current topics such as the psychology behind high performing teams, coaching, facilitation and conflict resolution, collaborative planning and risk management. It outlines the capabilities, attitudes and behaviours needed to become a confident, driven and focused project leader, including leading with vision, continuously improving, empowering teams, building trust with stakeholders, and using powerful techniques. With examples of the most fundamental causes of project failure and how to avoid them, The Power of Project Leadership shows how to inspire teams, add real value and deliver outstanding projects.

Author Information

Susanne Madsen is an internationally recognized project leadership coach, trainer and consultant. Prior to setting up her own business, she worked for almost 20 years in the corporate sector leading high-profile programmes for major global corporations. She is a fully qualified corporate and executive coach accredited by DISC, and a regular contributor to the Association for Project Management (APM). She is a frequent speaker at organizations and leading business schools and is also the co-founder of The Project Leadership Institute, which is dedicated to building authentic project leaders.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/08/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749493240

Ebook: 9780749493257

Pages: 336 Format (mm): 215x154

Product Category: Professional Subject: Project Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The world is changing and so must you

2 Your hidden drivers

3 The 7 keys to project leadership

1 Key #1 – Be authentic

2 Key #2 – Lead with vision

3 Key #3 – Improve and innovate

4 Key #4 – Empower the team

5 Key #5 – Get close to your stakeholders

6 Key #6 – Establish a solid foundation

7 Key #7 – Work with intent

4 Making the transition happen

Global Business Ethics

Responsible Decision Making in an International Context

This book

• Gives readers the knowledge and confidence to make sound ethical decisions in all business activities

• Provides easily implementable practical guidance in the form of decision-making trees and a model organizational ethics code

• Features detailed analysis of international ethical issues such as the conflict between Sharia law and Western principles

• Supports the student market with case studies and worked examples of dilemmasolving

• Online Resources: Instructor's manual, lecture slides and appendices

Description

Corporate social responsibility, sustainability and acting ethically are all accepted business aims, but their meaning and implementation in a global context is far less clear-cut. Global Business Ethics cuts through the confusion to provide a coherent basis for ethical decisionmaking within the complications of the international business landscape.

Underpinned by theory and including worked-through examples of ethical dilemmas and their solutions, this textbook will guide the reader beyond theory to real-world business decisions. Practical tools such as decision trees and suggested principles to apply in dilemma situations give readers the skills and confidence to tackle the ethical challenges they face. Global Business Ethics offers a unique working code of ethics provided as a model with guidance to readers for adaptation and implementation. Case studies include: Walmart, Hershey's, Citibank, Ford, Nike, Johnson & Johnson, Harley-Davidson, The Body Shop and Procter and Gamble.

A chapter on the legal aspects of ethics provides guidance on the complex relationship between law and ethics in international business. The final part takes an in-depth look at the practical application of ethics in business life. Covering all the major theories of ethics, including an examination of the role of quantification of ethics, Global Business Ethics demonstrates how their principles can be applied to inform better business decisions.

Online supporting resources for this book include instructor's manual, lecture slides and appendices.

Author Information

Ronald D Francis is Professor Emeritus in Ethics and Governance at Victoria University, Melbourne. His experiences in ethics extends over decades, and includes a period as Chairman of a national ethics committee, and as a member of a psychologists' registration board, as well as ten years on a research ethics committee. As a consultant, he has worked with corporations and universities to develop ethics codes and deliver practical business ethics training.

Guy Murfey is a psychologist and lawyer, recently retired as the National Practice manager of the Australian Tax Office's (ATO) Legal Services Branch, where he was responsible for the day to day running of litigation, ensuring that the highest ethical standards of practice were adhered to.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2015

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749473952

Ebook: 9780749473969

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 241x171

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Table of Contents

1 THE NECESSITY, JUSTIFICATION AND RESEARCH INTO CROSS CULTURAL BUSINESS ETHICS

Background to ethics

Justification for ethics

Cross-cultural issues in business ethics

Organizational factors in business ethics

Individual factors in business ethics

THEORETICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS ETHICS

Theoretical approaches

Legal aspects of ethics

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Ethical gradualism, culture, quantification and codes

Investigating ethical breaches

International standards and first principles

Ethical codes: ready reference guide (glossary of international codes related to ethics)

Responsible Business

Making Strategic Decisions to Benefit People, the Planet and Profits

This book

• Highlights the added value to organizations of incorporating triple P (People, Planet and Profits) considerations into investment decisions

• Features case studies from private and public sector, not-for-profit and social enterprise organizations who have benefited from this approach including the Ellen MacArthur Foundation

• Includes access to a ready-made business simulator tool for evaluating investment decisions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2018

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749480608

Ebook: 9780749480615

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Table of Contents

Preface

1 Working Towards Responsibility in Business and Society

2 The Responsible Business Simulator at the Heart of the Decision-Making Process

3 Shared Value as a Framework for Shaping the Strategy

4 Innovation and Sustainability as a Catalyst for Responsible Growth

5 Stakeholder Management and Interactivity in the Decision-Making Process

Description

Until recently, profit has been the driving force for most business decisions. However, business leaders must now look more widely at their actions to assess the impact of these on people both inside and outside the organization as well as the environment.

Responsible Business provides a seven step framework that eliminates internal bias and can be used to make decisions that increase profits, benefit staff and protect the environment as a whole. This means that personal values, ethics and morals can be aligned with business goals and overall company strategy.

Responsible Business will enable business leaders to answer questions including: What values should be attached to financial and non-financial aspects of business decisions? How can these values be translated into concrete manageable actions? Which decisions best suit the strategic goals of the organization? Readers will have access to the business simulator tool which removes the complexity, ambiguity and stress of business decisions to allow leaders to manage the competing priorities in their organization and confidently make the best investment decisions for their business. With diverse case studies from organizations who have benefited from this approach, this book is essential reading for everyone needing to evaluate their investment decisions.

Author Information

Annemieke Roobeek is Professor of Strategy and Transformation Management at Nyenrode Business Universiteit (Netherlands). She was previously Professor of Technology and Economics at Nyenrode and Professor of Complex Issues in strategy and policy at the University of Amsterdam.

Jacques de Swart is Professor of Applied Mathematics at Nyenrode Business University and partner within PwC, where he is responsible for the Data Analytics Group.

Myrthe van der Plas is a GARP certified Financial Risk Manager. She works within the Data Analytics Group of PwC and also teaches courses on Strategic Decision Making at several universities.

6 Strategic Decision Making based on Data and Dialogue via the Responsible Business Simulator

7 Using the Responsible Business Simulator

8 Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions

9 Putting Roof Renovation in a Strategic Context

10 Choosing between Various Waste Collection Systems

11 Creating a Healthy and Productive Working Environment

12 Quantifying the Contribution of Sports

13 Responding to the Refugee Influx in Europe

14 Attracting Investment at a Social Enterprise

15 Conclusion

The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics

Why Compliance isn’t Working - and How to Fix it

This book

• Discusses compliance in broader terms than other books in the market, considering social, psychological, global and cultural factors in order to better understand how to collaborate, communicate and engage others in the organization

• Provides precision, but also allows nonspecialist readers to access the information provided, including expertise on the typical traps to be aware of, policy and process and how to develop an ethics and compliance strategy

• Provides an ideal self-development toolkit that readers can access on a day-to-day basis, offering a clear, simple route to quickly find and apply expertise

• Gives professionals clear guidance to key issues, using accessible language and cutting through jargon to define ethics and compliance and offer practical advice and ideas

• Uses storytelling and scenarios to help readers apply theory to real-life situations, bringing issues to life in the human, social and political contexts relevant to the workplace

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2019

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749482978

Ebook: 9780749482985 Pages: 376

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Table of Contents

1 Section - ONE:

1 Why compliance isn’t working

2 The meaning, origins and role of compliance and ethics

3 Barriers to success

4 Looking for answers

2 Section - TWO:

5 The anatomy of a compliance and ethics programme

6 Top-level commitment

7 Risk assessment and due diligence

8 Code of conduct and policies

9 Communication, education and training

10 Whistle-blowing hotline and speak-up culture

11 Procedures and controls

12 Investigations, remediation and enforcement

13 Assurance and continuous improvement

14 Implementation – The compliance and ethics function – and everyone else

Knowledge Management

An Interdisciplinary Approach for Business Decisions

This book

• Is written specifically for business and management courses, focusing on issues such as how knowledge management can be integrated with the business decision making process

• Covers the most advanced IT and information systems technologies and cutting-edge research on topics such as boundary spanning

• Includes real world case studies, role play scenarios, and "think back" and "critique discussion" questions to encourage reflective learning and critical thinking

• Takes an international approach to knowledge management, for example comparing models from USA, UK and Japan

• Online resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and exercise questions for students

Description

As knowledge economies become increasingly important around the world, it is essential that organizations are able to transform their knowledge into a competitive advantage. This textbook offers an interdisciplinary approach to knowledge management written specifically for postgraduate students in business and management schools. Knowledge Management presents classic and advanced concepts, models and frameworks using a clear logical structure, which covers building knowledge competence, the knowledge lifecycle, and integration of knowledge management with business decision making. An overall framework illustrates links between chapters and ensures readers can gain a body of actionable knowledge rather than learning isolated, uncontextualized topics.

Based on cutting-edge research findings and covering the most advanced IT and IS technologies, this book emphasises the need for knowledge management to span boundaries across organizations, supply chains and partnerships, rather than being limited to individual learning and sharing within businesses. Knowledge Management is international in scope and includes real world case studies and role play scenarios to show how theories are applied in practice, and "think back" and "critique discussion" questions to encourage reflective learning and critical thinking. This indispensable text provides a dynamic picture of the evolution of knowledge management and demonstrates its full potential to enable better business decisions. Accompanying online resources include PowerPoint slides for lecturers and exercise questions for students.

Author Information

Shaofeng Liu is Professor of Operations Management and Decision Making at Plymouth Business School, University of Plymouth, UK. She teaches a Knowledge Management module every year to postgraduate students across several courses in the Faculty of Business. She is Senior Editor for Cogent Business & Management and Associate Editor for the International Journal of Decision Support System Technology and has published over 150 research papers in peer-reviewed books, journals and conference proceedings.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2020

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9780749494834

Ebook: 9780749496876 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 240x205

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Knowledge management – Key concepts and models

Introduction to knowledge management

Tacit and explicit knowledge

Knowledge management process and lifecycle models

Building knowledge competence in organizations

Organizational learning

The learning organization

Organizational culture for knowledge sharing and learning

Crossing knowledge boundaries

Communities of practice

Knowledge boundaries and boundaryspanning mechanisms

Knowledge networks

ICT-enabled knowledge managementInternet of Things and big data analytics

Knowledge support for business decision making

The business decision context

Human decision-making processes and knowledge requirements

Knowledge-based decision support systems

The Knowledge Manager's Handbook

A Step-by-Step Guide to Embedding Effective Knowledge Management in your Organization

This book

• Guides the reader through the essential steps of aligning knowledge management with organizational priorities to deliver long-term benefits

• Covers best practice requirements from the first internationally recognised standard for knowledge management, ISO 30401:2018

• Provides practical checklists, guidelines and process templates to help with implementation

• Includes case studies from a variety of organizations, such as Mars, Huawei and the Singapore Youth Olympics

• New to this edition: clear guidance on ISO 30401:2018, new content on the impact of AI and data analytics, and updated case studies

Description

WINNER: CILIP's Knowledge and Information Management Award 2019 - Information Resources Print Category

The way an organization manages and disseminates its knowledge is key to informed business decision-making, effectiveness and competitive edge. The Knowledge Manager's Handbook takes you step by step through the processes needed to define and embed an effective knowledge management framework within an organization.

This second edition now includes clear guidance on the best practice requirements from the first ever internationally recognised standard for knowledge management, ISO 30401:2018, as well as content on the impact of AI and data analytics. Nick Milton and Patrick Lambe work through each stage of creating and implementing a knowledge management framework for an organization's specific needs, based around the four essential aspects of knowledge management: people, processes, technologies and governance. With updated international case studies from organizations of all sizes and sectors, along with user-friendly templates and checklists to help implement effective knowledge management procedures, The Knowledge Manager's Handbook is the end-toend guide to making a sustainable change in the knowledge management culture.

Author Information

Dr Nick Milton is a director and co-founder of Knoco Ltd, an international knowledge management consultancy. He previously worked at BP, coordinating the BP Knowledge Management Community of Practice, and was a member of the working group for the development of ISO 30401:2018.

Patrick Lambe is a founding partner of Straits Knowledge, a global consulting and research firm specializing in knowledge, learning and innovation. He is a Visiting Professor in knowledge management at Bangkok University, President of the International Society for Knowledge Development Singapore chapter and an editorial board member of the Journal of Knowledge Management.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £41.99

Paperback: 9780749484606

Ebook: 9780749484613 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

27001/ISO

Edition: 7

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749496951

Ebook: 9780749496968

Pages: 408

This book

• Advises on the development and implementation of an information security management system that will meet the ISO 27001 specification

• Outlines IT governance best practice for international organizations of all sizes and across sectors

• New to this edition: changes in global regulation (including GDPR) and updates to standards in the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) and the latest standards on auditing

• Covers topics such as risk assessment, asset management, controls, security, supplier relationships and compliance

Description

Faced with the compliance requirements of increasingly punitive information and privacy-related regulation, as well as the proliferation of complex threats to information security, there is an urgent need for organizations to adopt IT governance best practice.

IT Governance is a key international resource for managers in organizations of all sizes and across industries, and deals with the strategic and operational aspects of information security.

Now in its seventh edition, the bestselling IT Governance provides guidance for companies looking to protect and enhance their information security management systems (ISMS) and protect themselves against cyber threats. The new edition covers changes in global regulation, particularly GDPR, and updates to standards in the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) plus the latest standards on auditing. It also includes advice on the development and implementation of an ISMS that will meet the ISO 27001 specification and how sector-specific standards can and should be factored in. With information on risk assessments, compliance, equipment and operations security, controls against malware and asset management, IT Governance is the definitive guide to implementing an effective information security management and governance system.

Author Information

Alan Calder is Group CEO of GRC International Group plc, the AIM-listed company that owns IT Governance Ltd.. He led the world's first successful implementation of BS 7799 (now ISO 27001) and was involved in developing a wide range of information security management training courses, accredited by the International Board for IT Governance Qualifications (IBITGQ).

Steve Watkins is Executive Director at GRC International Group plc, chair of the UK ISO/ IEC 27001 User Group and contracted technical assessor for UKAS. He is a member of the international technical committee responsible for the ISO 27000 family of standards, and chairs the UK National Standards Body's technical committee IST/33 (information security, cyber security and privacy protection) that mirrors it.

Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Why is information security necessary?

The UK combined code, the FRC risk guidance and Sarbanes–Oxley

ISO27001

Organizing information security

Information security policy and scope

The risk assessment and Statement of Applicability

Mobile devices

Human resources security

Asset management

Media handling

Access control

User access management

System and application access control

Cryptography

Physical and environmental security

Equipment security

Operations security

Controls against malicious software (malware)

Communications management

Exchanges of information

System acquisition, development and maintenance

Development and support processes

Supplier relationships

Monitoring and information security incident management

Business and information security continuity management

Compliance

The ISO27001 audit

Accelerated Digital Transformation

How Established Organizations Can Gain Competitive Advantage in the Digital Age

New Title

This book

• Offers a guide to implementing digital transformation tailored for established organizations.

• Underpinned by the author's impressive experience as an internationally recognised C-suite level digital leader with a 30-year career specialising in established businesses

• Provides a tried and tested framework that steers established organizations through the digital transformation journey, focusing on accessible incremental change.

• Showcases AI in action through a series of AI-generated content summaries, demonstrating both the disruptive potential and sophistication of AI-and its limitations

• Presents a vibrant storytelling approach rich with examples and perspectives, experiences and viewpoints from a global team of experts representing different digital transformation archetypes

Description

Achieve successful digital transformation with this authoritative guide designed specifically for established organizations.

At a time where even the most recognized business models are under threat, organizations risk devastation if they do not transition successfully to the new digital reality. Yet what works for digital natives does not always work for established organizations. Recognized as one of the world's top global executives leading innovative transformation, Neetan Chopra's deep experience of steering organizations through digital disruption drives the practical approach of Accelerated Digital Transformation. Having designed transformation journeys, overcome setbacks and driven outcomes within multiple leading companies, Neetan Chopra tackles key factors for established organizations including inertia, impetus, outcomes, digital capabilities and culture.

The book is underpinned by a tried and tested framework that will guide readers step by step through the entire digital transformation journey. This will be an essential resource for leaders, managers and practitioners leading and executing digital transformation.

Author Information

Neetan Chopra is a C-suite level senior digital leader with a track record of driving change and innovation at established enterprises. In his three-decade career, he has led digital transformation in global enterprises operating diverse business models across the aviation, travel, logistics, retail, food and beverage, real estate and entertainment industry sectors. He is currently Chief Digital and Information Officer at IndiGo (InterGlobe Aviation Ltd) in Gurugram, India; prior to this, he also held roles at Dubai Holding, Emirates Airlines and Accenture. He sits on the boards of multiple tech start-ups, has built multiple global innovation labs including at Oxford University and Carnegie Mellon University and is an Adjunct Professor at Botho University, Botswana. He is recognized by the Constellation Research Business Transformation 150 as one of the world's top global executives leading innovative business transformation efforts in their organizations.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398608924

Ebook: 9781398608931 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Preface

Framework for transformation

Breaking the inertia and creating momentum

Working the transformation

Significant opportunities for established businesses

External shocks accelerate the journey

Insights from global disruptors

The Hacks – key takeaways

In Conclusion

The Enterprise Big Data Framework

Building Critical Capabilities to Win in the Data Economy

This book

• Shows readers how to fully leverage, analyze and integrate big data to reduce costs, increase operating margins and add income

• Offers a vendor-independent approach to transforming massive quantities of data into value

• Covers detailed data analysis and data engineering techniques for anyone who wants a deep understanding of big data

• Helps readers understand the core concepts and techniques that underpin the somewhat abstract concept of big data

• Online resources: sample data for practice purposes

Description

Businesses who can make sense of the huge influx and complexity of data will be the big winners in the information economy.

This comprehensive guide covers all the aspects of transforming enterprise data into value, from the initial set-up of a big data strategy, towards algorithms, architecture and data governance processes. Using a vendor-independent approach, The Enterprise Big Data Framework offers practical advice on how to develop data-driven decision making, detailed data analysis and data engineering techniques.

With a focus on business implementation, The Enterprise Big Data Framework includes sections on analysis, engineering, algorithm design and big data architecture, and covers topics such as data preparation and presentation, data modelling, data science, programming languages and machine learning algorithms. Endorsed by leading accreditation and examination institute AMPG International, this book is required reading for the Enterprise Big Data Certifications, which aim to develop excellence in big data practices across the globe. Online resources include sample data for practice purposes.

Author Information

Jan-Willem Middelburg is the CEO and co-founder of Cybiant, based in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. With Cybiant he helps to create a more sustainable world through analytics, big data and automation, developing algorithms and employing data scientists to unearth patterns and information. He is also President and Chief Examiner of the Enterprise Big Data Framework, an independent organization dedicated to upskilling individuals with expertise in Big Data. In partnership with APMG-International, the Enterprise Big Data Framework offers vendor-neutral certifications for individuals.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2023

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398601710

Ebook: 9781398601727 Pages: 568

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Introduction to Big Data

Introduction to Big Data

The Big Data framework

Big Data strategy

Big Data architecture

Big Data algorithms

Big Data processes

Big Data functions

Artificial intelligence

Enterprise Big Data analysis

Introduction to Big Data analysis

Defining the business objective

Data ingestion – importing and reading data sets

Data preparation – cleaning and wrangling data

Data analysis – model building

Data presentation

Enterprise Big Data engineering

Introduction to Big Data engineering

Data modelling

Constructing the data lake

Building an enterprise Big Data warehouse

Design and structure of Big Data pipelines

Managing data pipelines

Cluster technology

enterprise Big Data algorithm design

Introduction to Big Data algorithm design

Algorithm design – fundamental concepts

Statistical machine learning algorithms

The data science roadmap

Programming languages 26 visualization and simple metrics

Advanced machine learning algorithms

Advanced machine learning classification algorithms

Technical communication and documentation

Enterprise Big Data architecture

Introduction to the Big Data architecture

Strength and resilience – the Big Data platform

Design principles for Big Data architecture

Big Data infrastructure

Big Data platforms

The Big Data application provider

System orchestration in Big Data

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business

Unlock Data Assets and Increase Innovation with a ResultsDriven Data Strategy

This book

• Follows the five 'waves' of data maturity businesses must pass through to implement a data-driven strategy which leverages existing assets

• Explains how to choose projects which reflect organizational goals and get started with some quick wins

• Outlines how to improve business performance and optimise processes through automation

• Explores how investing in AI, machine learning and data science can help businesses become leading innovators prepared for change

• Offers guidance on rigorous data governance and the importance of data quality in building trust

Description

For many organizations data is a by-product, but for the smarter ones it is the heartbeat of their business. Most businesses have a wealth of data buried in their systems which, if used effectively, could increase revenue, reduce costs and risk and improve customer satisfaction and employee experience.

Beginning with how to choose projects which reflect your organization's goals and how to make the business case for investing in data, this book then takes the reader through the five 'waves' of organizational data maturity. It takes the reader from getting started on the data journey with some quick wins, to how data can help your business become a leading innovator which systematically outperforms competitors.

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business outlines how to build consistent, high-quality sources of data which will create business value and explores how automation, AI and machine learning can improve performance and decision making. Filled with realworld examples and case studies, this book is a stage-by-stage guide to designing and implementing a results-driven data strategy.

Author Information

Simon Asplen-Taylor is an experienced and successful data and analytics leader based in London, UK, having served as Chief Data Officer for multiple FTSE firms and led some of the largest data led transformations in Europe. He specialises in transforming business through the use of data, analytics and artificial intelligence and is currently leading the data transformation at Lloyd's of London. He was included in the dataIQ 100 Most Influential People in Data in both 2020 and 2021.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2022

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398606050

Ebook: 9781398606067

Pages: 328

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

How data and analytics can help you grow your business

How can this book help you?

The business case for data

Your data and analytics strategy

A team game

Wave 1: Aspire

A quick win

Repeat and learn

Wave 2: Mature

Data governance

Data quality

A single customer view

Reports and dashboards

Data risk management and ethics

Wave 3: Industrialize

Automation, automation, automation

Scaling up and scaling out

Optimizing

Wave 4: Realize

The voice of the customer

Maximizing data science

Sharing data with suppliers and customers

Wave 5: Differentiate

From data-driven to AI-driven

Data products

Right leadership, right time

Epilogue: Data success

Be Data Analytical

How to Use Analytics to Turn Data into Value

This book

• Offers a strategic guide on how to use analytics to ensure that business decision making is fully data-driven

• Utilizes the four levels of analytics model (describe, diagnose, predict, and prescribe) to help organizations develop a cohesive framework for the systematic and strategic conversion of data into value, insight and action.

• Provides practical guidance on how to use the four levels of analytics effectively, covering people and functions, strategies, skills and implementation

• Takes an accessible and non-technical approach tailored specifically for business practitioners, managers and leaders who need to use analytics as part of their everyday roles

• Written by a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy, data culture and data-driven transformation.

Description

Be Data Analytical is the book organizations and individuals need to understand how to truly use analytics to turn data into valuable insights and drive smarter decision making.

Data needs analytics to turn it into value and for organizations to be truly data-driven, they need to use analytics correctly. However, most organizations do not move beyond the first, most rudimentary stage of analytics. They miss out on the powerful insights and opportunities available with all the four levels of analytics: descriptive, diagnostic, predictive and prescriptive. Be Data Analytical reveals how to supercharge data value through all the four levels of analytics, bringing data to life and enhancing data-driven decision making.

Be Data Analytical examines each of these four levels of analytics in-depth: what they are, why they matter, how they can be used strategically and how they can be implemented. The book also explores how individuals and organizations can improve their skills and performance in each of these areas. Written by a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy, the book shows professionals, managers, leaders and organizations how to use analytics for the successful and strategic conversion of data into value, insight and action.

Author Information

Jordan Morrow is Vice President and Head of Data and Analytics at BrainStorm. He served as the Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project, currently serves on the board of INFORMS Analytics Certification Board and is an active voice in the data and analytics community. He has helped organizations around the world, including the United Nations, build and understand data literacy. He is based in Salt Lake City, Utah and is also the author of Be Data Literate and Be Data Driven (Kogan Page).

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2023

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398609280

Ebook: 9781398609297 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

1 Data and Analytics

1 Defining data and analytics

2 Defining the four levels of analytics

3 The power of analytics in decision making

2 The four levels of analytics- define, empower, understand and learn descriptive analytics

4 What are descriptive analytics?

5 How are descriptive analytics used today?

6 How individuals and organizations can improve in descriptive analytics

7 What are diagnostic analytics?

8 How are diagnostic analytics used today?

9 How individuals and organizations can improve in diagnostic analytics

10 What are predictive analytics?

11 How are predictive analytics used today?

12 How individuals and organizations can improve in predictive analytics

13 What are prescriptive analytics?

14 How are prescriptive analytics used today?

15 How individuals and organizations can improve in prescriptive analytics

3 Bringing it all together

16 Using all four levels of analytics to empower decision making

17 Conclusion: bringing it all together in your business or personal life

Be Data Driven

How Organizations Can Harness the Power of Data

This book

• Shows managers, leaders and data professionals how to harness the power of their data and analytical strategies to become truly data driven

• Outlines a roadmap for building a datadriven organization, including deciding on outcomes and building a strategy

• Explains how to identify and overcome common hurdles, such as a foundational skills gap and the difficulty of creating a datadriven culture

• Explores advances in technologies, where to invest and the importance of the human element in data

• Includes case studies of data-driven businesses and how the COVID-19 pandemic has impacted the way organizations use data

Description

Make any team or business data driven with this practical guide to overcoming common challenges and creating a data culture.

Businesses are increasingly focusing on their data and analytics strategy, but a datadriven culture grounded in evidence-based decision making can be difficult to achieve. Be Data Driven outlines a step-by-step roadmap to building a data-driven organization or team, beginning with deciding on outcomes and a strategy before moving onto investing in technology and upskilling where necessary.

This practical guide explains what it means to be a data-driven organization and explores which technologies are advancing data and analytics. Crucially, it also examines the most common challenges to becoming data driven, from a foundational skills gap to issues with leadership and strategy and the impact of organizational culture. With case studies of businesses who have successfully used data, Be Data Driven shows managers, leaders and data professionals how to address hurdles, encourage a data culture and become truly data driven.

Author Information

Jordan Morrow is Vice President and Head of Data and Analytics at BrainStorm and a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy. He served as the Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project and is an active voice in the data and analytics community. He has helped organizations around the world, including the United Nations, build and understand data literacy. He is based in Salt Lake City, Utah and is also the author of Be Data Literate (Kogan Page).

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2022

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398606128

Ebook: 9781398606555

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

1 Foundational

1 A data-driven world

2 The impact of Covid-19 on organizations and data

3 Technologies advancing data and analytics, and the need for the human element

4 What is a data-driven organization?

2 Gaps

Foundational skills gaps

Pillars of an organizational data strategy

The gap in leadership

The biggest hurdle: culture

Building your data-driven organization

Decide your outcome

Build your strategy

Be data driven—start your journey!

References

The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation

Quickly Master the Essentials with Tips, Case Studies and Actionable Advice

This book

• Presents 17 practical and easy-to-follow steps for delivering successful digital transformation

• Features key tips and tricks on putting principles into action, case studies of organizations getting it right and advice on what to say in your next meeting

• Covers important aspects of the end-to-end process, including creating a digital strategy, change management, stimulating innovation and knowing where to upskill and where to bring in new talent

• Helps time pressured professionals build confidence and quickly master the essentials of digital transformation

• Outlines how to start with the 'basics' of data science, cyber security, workable technology and good user experience and build from there

Description

Digital transformation is a vital practice for organizations trying to keep up with competitors, but with new digital approaches constantly promising to revolutionise the workplace it can feel impossible to keep up. Cut through the hype with this accessible guide to making end-to-end digital transformation happen.

While technology offers the possibility for business improvement, successful digital transformation also requires an effective strategy, the right culture, change management, the ability to stimulate innovation and the knowledge of where to upskill and where to bring in new talent. The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation covers each of these factors and more by breaking the process down to 17 easy-to-follow and practical steps.

Each chapter includes a case study of an organization getting it right, along with advice on putting the principle into action, key tips and tricks, and what you might say in your next meeting. This book also outlines how to start with the foundations of 'doing digital' and build from there, including data science, cyber security, workable technology, minimised stack duplication, data registers and good user experience. Quickly build confidence and make change happen with this actionable guide to the essentials of digital transformation.

Author Information

Dr Antonio Weiss, based in London, UK, is a Senior Partner at The PSC, an award-winning public service consultancy specialising in user-centred design, digital, strategy and delivery. He has advised the Office for Artificial Intelligence, the UK Space Agency and NHSx as well as numerous other pioneering digital organizations and frequently trains leaders to become digital transformation experts. He is also an Affiliated Researcher at the University of Cambridge's Digital State programme and the co-founder of Thomas Clipper, an e-commerce lifestyle brand for men featured in GQ, The Guardian and The Telegraph.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398603653

Ebook: 9781398603660

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Getting the strategy and the roadmap right

What is a digital strategy?

Choosing your strategic delivery vehicle

How to do a digital roadmap

Making change happen

Ways of working

Senior and organisational buy-in

Funding digital

Doing digital

Understanding your users

Doing the bare minimum

Building new services

Buying technology

The cloud, APIs and open-source

Using data science to inform decisionmaking

Stimulating innovation

Future-proofing

Protecting and defending your organisation

The ethical digital organisation

Upskilling and bringing in new talent

Defining the next horizon

New

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation

This book

• Shows how businesses can embrace digital transformation and agile processes to achieve organizational success

• Provides guidance on how to scale agile principles and operations, make change stick and adopt agile mindsets and culture

• Contains real-life insights and examples from organizations driving business success with agility and digital innovation such as AirBnb, Amazon and Google

• New to this edition: material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams

Description

How can businesses transform to achieve competitive advantage in a digital-enabled world? How can managers and leaders create a culture that supports lasting change through these transformations?

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation is an in-depth guide for all those needing to better understand, implement and lead digital transformation in the workplace. It sets aside traditional thinking and outdated strategies to explain what steps need to be taken for an organization to become truly agile, embed innovation and develop talent to succeed.

This majorly revised second edition of Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation contains new material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, and using data effectively in organizational decisionmaking. Full of practical advice, examples and real-life insights from organizations at the leading edge of digital transformation including AirBnb, Amazon and Google, this book is an essential guide to driving success by becoming an agile and digital native business.

Author Information

Neil Perkin is a writer, keynote speaker and founder of Only Dead Fish, a consultancy which specialises in digital strategy, transformation and agility. Based in West Sussex, UK, he has worked with organizations including Vodafone, GSK, Samsung, the UK Government and The Financial Times, and curates the quarterly series of Firestarters thought leadership events for Google UK.

Peter Abraham is an author, practitioner and co-founder of weareCrank, which uses data to drive decision making and driving growth through the intersection of data, user experience and channel optimization. Based in Surrey, UK, he has over 20 years' experience of helping global companies define their digital strategy and build digital centres of excellence to support true agility in business.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789666533

Ebook: 9781789666540

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

The agile business

The key forces for change

How digital disrupts

What’s stopping you?

Defining digital transformation and how an agile business is the foundation for it

Fast

Operating in the ‘ambiguity zone’

Agile and adaptive methodology

The agile innovation process

Focused

The role of vision and purpose

Agile strategy and planning

Linking strategy to execution

Flexibility

Agile structures and resourcing

Scaling agility

Building the culture to move fast

A blueprint for flexibility - autonomy, mastery and purpose

Digital-native talent

Start small, scale fast and the transformation journey – putting it all together

Index

Data Ethics

Practical Strategies for Implementing Ethical Information Management and Governance

This book

• Provides a detailed framework with practical methods for organizations to implement an ethical information management strategy

• Assesses the types of ethical dilemmas your organization might face as it becomes more data-driven and provides guidance on how ethical frameworks can be standardized across cultures that have conflicting values

• New to this edition: sustainability and environmental management, the challenge of ethical trade-offs with analytics and ad-tech; discussion of data colonialism; case studies on Smart Cities and Demings Principles

• Is written by internationally regarded experts in information governance, data privacy and information ethics

Description

Data-gathering technology is more sophisticated than ever, as are the ethical standards for using this data. This second edition shows how to navigate this complex environment.

Data Ethics provides a practical framework for the implementation of ethical principles into information management systems. It shows how to assess the types of ethical dilemmas organizations might face as they become more data-driven. This fully updated edition includes guidance on sustainability and environmental management and on how ethical frameworks can be standardized across cultures that have conflicting values. There is also discussion of data colonialism, the challenge of ethical trade-offs with ad-tech and analytics such as Covid-19 tracking systems and case studies on Smart Cities and Demings Principles.

As the pace of developments in data-processing technology continues to increase, it is vital to capitalize on the opportunities this affords while ensuring that ethical standards and ideals are not compromised. Written by internationally regarded experts in the field, Data Ethics is the essential guide for students and practitioners to optimizing ethical data standards in organizations.

Author Information

Katherine O'Keefe is a lead consultant and Director of Training with Castlebridge and Lecturer in Data Protection and Ethics with the Law Society of Ireland's Diploma Centre. Based in Dublin, Ireland, she has served on Scotland's National Expert Group for Digital Ethics and designed and developed international professional accreditation schemes for Information Management.

Daragh O'Brien is the Managing Director of Castlebridge, one of Europe's leading Business Information Strategy and Governance consultancies. He is also on the teaching faculty in University College Dublin School of Law for their Professional Diploma in Data Protection and Governance. Based in Dublin, Ireland, he has held senior roles in CRM Programme management and Regulatory Assurance in a leading telecommunications company.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/05/2023

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398610279

Ebook: 9781398610286

Pages: 400

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

Introduction: why write a book on information ethics?

1 Ethics in the context of information management

2 Introduction to ethical concepts and frameworks

3 Ethical Principles, Standards, and Practice

4 Ethics, privacy and analytics

5 Information Ethics and Information Management

6 Developing an ethical architecture for information management

7 Introducing the Ethical Enterprise Information Management (E2IM) framework

8 Information ethics as an information quality system

9 Information ethics and data governance

10 Information ethics and rise: the rise of the Ethical Impact Assessment

11 Data Ethics at a Macro Scale

12 Conclusion

Ethical Data and Information Management

Concepts, Tools and Methods

This book

• Is the first book of its kind written for information managers and data scientists

• Is written by internationally regarded experts in information governance, data privacy and information ethics

• Provides a detailed framework with practical tools and techniques for implementing an ethical information management strategy

• Includes well-researched, road-tested material that the authors use in their training

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749482046

Ebook: 9780749482053

Pages: 344

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Description

Information and how we manage, process and govern it is becoming increasingly important as organizations ride the wave of the big data revolution.

Ethical Data and Information Management offers a practical guide for people in organizations who are tasked with implementing information management projects. It sets out, in a clear and structured way, the fundamentals of ethics, and provides practical and pragmatic methods for organizations to embed ethical principles and practices into their management and governance of information.

Written by global experts in the field, Ethical Data and Information Management is an important book addressing a topic high on the information management agenda. Key coverage includes how to build ethical checks and balances into data governance decision making; using quality management methods to assess and evaluate the ethical nature of processing during design; change methods to communicate ethical values; how to avoid common problems that affect ethical action; and how to make the business case for ethical behaviours.

Author Information

Katherine O'Keefe is a Data Governance and Data Protection Consultant and Trainer at Castlebridge Associates, Dublin. She also delivers Data Ethics training for the Data Protection Certificate Data Round Table for the Law Society of Ireland.

Daragh O Brien is a Data Governance, Data Quality and Data Privacy Consultant and Trainer. He is Managing Director and Lead Consultant at Castlebridge Associates. He is also an adjunct faculty member at the Law Society of Ireland Diploma School.

Table of Contents

Introduction: why write a book on information ethics?

1 Ethics in the context of information management

2 Introduction to ethical concepts and frameworks

3 Ethics, privacy and analytics

4 Information ethics and artificial intelligence: concepts and thought experiments

5 Ethics in the Data Management Body of Knowledge

6 Developing an ethical architecture for information management

7 Introducing the Ethical Enterprise Information Management (E2IM) framework

8 Information ethics as an information quality system

9 Information ethics and data governance

10 Information ethics and risk: the rise of the Ethical Impact Assessment

11 Making the ethical information management change

12 And in conclusion…

Emerging Markets

Strategies for Competing in the Global Value Chain

This book

• Demonstrates how companies can build their competitiveness by understanding the global value chain in which they operate

• Offers lessons for US, Japanese and European multinational companies as well as emerging market multinationals in how to understand the new business environment

• Explains how to position your company to succeed in emerging markets and in traditional markets, and to take advantage of the benefits of both

• Includes case studies from renowned international companies from both sides of emerging markets

• Online Resources: Lecture slides of each chapter

Description

The traditional dominance of international markets by companies from the US, Western Europe and Japan can no longer be taken for granted. Emerging market economies, from the powerhouse Chinese economy (set to pass the US in national income by 2020) to dynamic players such as Mexico, South Africa and Indonesia, are rapidly changing the competitive landscape.

Companies that can successfully enter these emerging markets may reap rewards and benefits from cost reductions and market opportunities. By understanding their positioning in the global continuum of companies and customers - the global value chain - businesses can build their strategies for better competition, more effective resource allocation, cost reduction, and a heightened awareness of the risks and benefits.

Packed with in-depth case studies of multinationals from both sides of emerging markets, including: Accenture, Walmart, Google, Nike, Novartis, PetroChina, Embraer, Tata Group and FEMSA; Emerging Markets is essential reading for anyone looking to understand the new competitive landscape and how they can maximise the business opportunities available.

Online supporting resources include lecture slides that align with each chapter.

Author Information

Professor Robert E. Grosse is Dean of the School of Business Administration at American University of Sharjah, and was 2012-2014 President of the Academy of International Business. He has taught international finance in the MBA programmes at Thunderbird, the University of Miami, the University of Michigan, the Instituto de Empresa (Madrid, Spain), and in many universities in Latin America, and he lectures on executive education programmes around the world. He was founding Director of Standard Bank Group's (South Africa) executive education programme, the Global Leadership Centre, offering leadership development training to 11,000 managers and executives. He is a leading author on international business topics, and his latest book, Can Latin American Firms Compete? was published by Oxford University Press in 2007.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2015

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749474492

Ebook: 9780749474508

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Business

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Why emerging markets are the place to be

2 The time horizon

3 What is the challenge from emerging markets?

4 Competing in emerging markets

5 Competitive strategies of firms in China: MNEs, SOEs and private firms

6 Emerging market MNEs competing in industrial countries and globally

7 Innovation is key

8 Large, small, family-owned and stateowned companies from emerging markets

9 Conclusions

Essential Leadership

Develop Your Leadership Qualities Through Theory and Practice

This book

• Contains all the essential and emerging theories and models of leadership to give students and practitioners a solid and rigorous academic underpinning to their leadership development

• Combines this theory with practical guidance based on research in the field and case studies, allowing students and practitioners to unite academic background with real-life situations in order to strengthen themselves as leaders

• Self-assessment tools and reflective exercises enable students and practitioners to discover their personal leadership style, their strengths and weaknesses, and learn how to become better leaders

• Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and an instructor's manual

Description

Essential Leadership is a practical, accessible book that tackles theory and practice in an integrated and stimulating way. You are encouraged to engage with a wide range of leadership theories and frameworks as well as rate your own leadership skills and qualities, make realistic self-development plans and start to experiment with new or different approaches. Rather than offering one best way forward or becoming overly theoretical, this book is a pragmatic resource for new and experienced leaders looking to navigate the leadership literature and start to fully realize their own leadership potential.

Supported by exercises, practical examples, rigorous self-assessments, advice and suggestions, Essential Leadership offers an important guide for those currently working, or planning to work, in a 21st century business environment with all its complexity and uncertainty. It provides an over-arching framework of five essential leadership qualities that can be refined and combined as leaders grow, allowing them to be particularly responsive to the business context. The book allows readers to discover and develop their own leadership qualities, and master them through understanding, experimentation, feedback and reflection. Cutting-edge research into Millennial Leadership is also included, as are sections on developing your leadership maturity throughout life, and how leadership culture forms and changes. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor's manual.

Author Information

Esther Cameron has been experimenting with approaches to leadership and change for 25 years. She is a founding Director of Integral Change Consulting Ltd and was previously a lecturer for the University of Bristol. Together with Mike Green, she is co-author of Making Sense of Change Management (also published by Kogan Page).

Mike Green is Director of Transitional Space Ltd, and a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School where he tutors and coaches in Leadership and Change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in Change Management to managers and change agents globally.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2017

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749477400

Ebook: 9780749477417 Pages: 400

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Era

Leadership Frameworks and Research

Leadership Traits and Characteristics

Contingency Theories

Situational Leadership

Psychodynamics, Power and the Shadow

Transformational and Transactional Leadership

Strategic and Innovation Leadership

Change Leadership

Leadership Responsibility and Values

Leading across Organizations and Networks

Leadership Health – Mind, Body and Spirit

Learning to Lead in Practice

What Does 21st-century Leadership Require?

How do Leaders Learn?

Levels of Leadership Maturity

You and Your Development

Taking Stock and Self-Rating

Clarifying your Goals and Intended Outcomes

Developing and Using the Five Qualities

Overview of the Five Qualities Framework

The Tenacious Implementer Quality

The Measured Connector Quality

The Visionary Motivator Quality

The Thoughtful Architect Quality

The Edgy Catalyser Quality

Becoming Masterful

and Organizations

Leadership Culture

Changing Leadership Culture

The Implications of Millennial Leadership

The Leadership Skills Handbook

100 Essential Skills You Need to be a Leader

This book

• Features practical advice on over 100 leadership skills plus tips, exercises and examples, arranged in an easy dip-in-andout style

• Allows you to create your own personalized formula for success, based on a combination of what works best for both the individual reader's career and their company

• New to this edition: exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the current volatile and ambiguous business world

• Is written by award-winning and best-selling author, Jo Owen, who has sold hundreds of thousands of copies of his books on leadership and management worldwide

Description

WINNER: CMI Management Book of the Year 2013 - New Manager Category (previous edition)

The Leadership Skills Handbook from best-selling author Jo Owen reveals the essential skills you need to be an effective leader.

This book shows you what works in practice, not in theory, in crucial areas such as people skills, career skills, mindset skills, organization skills, personal values and behaviours. Each skill is presented in a concise, easy to follow format, with an accompanying framework to help you deploy it in your own life. The skills are about the real challenges real leaders must master, and as you observe and record real-life examples of skills in action, you will be developing your own unique formula for success in the context that matters to you.

Based on research from over a thousand leaders throughout the world at all levels in the public, private and voluntary sectors, The Leadership Skills Handbook identifies the practical skills to make you even more successful, and offers guidance on all key topics. This updated new edition includes exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the 21st century and 10 whole new skills. These include the need to influence rather than control, how you get people to commit to your vision rather than comply and how career is no longer a noun but a verb for new generations of workers.

Author Information

Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-award-winning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK's largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, Myths of Leadership and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages. Jo Owen is the first person to win the Chartered Institute of Management Gold Award four times for four of his books.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789666687

Ebook: 9781789666700 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 215x138

Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

The Change Mindset

The Psychology of Leading and Thriving in an Uncertain World

This book

• Devises a practical toolkit steeped in behavioural science to grow your ability to lead yourself, your team and your organization through change and uncertainty

• Includes exclusive interviews from leaders in the fields of business, academia, the arts and social enterprise who have all dealt with navigating change including Gillian Tett from The Financial Times, Charles Handy CBE, Fred Prysquel from Vilbrequin, Annmarie Lewis OBE and Andrew Likierman from London Business School

• Highlights the main failure traps to change and transition for people in organizations; from limiting behaviour that imitates what others have done in the past, not dreaming big enough in our reactions to change, to not exploring possibilities fully

• Defines triggers to lead through successful transitions that moves people to action

Description

Change and uncertainty aren't going away. You can help your team navigate the storm and embrace them.

In The Change Mindset, leadership development expert Andy Craggs unpicks the main reasons why teams fail when it comes to dealing with change and navigating uncertainty. He defines the common traps that lead to failure; from not allowing yourself to reimagine the possible, mimicking the behaviour that your competition has shown when dealing with change, to doubting yourself and your team. Leading through change requires business leaders to be courageous and to show empathy, both for themselves and their people. With those attributes, this book, which is steeped in behavioural and organizational psychology analysis, catapults you to developing meaningful and long-lasting adaptability and resilience in the face of uncertainty.

Join the author in his exploration of transitions, and hear from world-renowned business, academia, arts and social enterprise leaders who share their own dealings with change. They show us the way in how they have grown to manage change for themselves and the people around them.

Author Information

Andy Craggs has over 30 years of experience in leadership and business consulting. A Director of Executive Education at London Business School, he has previously worked for Dow Jones, Walt Disney and Sony and now delivers leadership, change and executive coaching programmes for companies like Apple, BBC, ING, Dyson and Novartis. A public speaker and writer on organizational issues and cross-cultural leadership, he has delivered keynote addresses for large audiences at organizations such as EY and PMI, and has taught at UCLA (US), EMAM (Italy), and the IPA (UK). He is based in London, UK.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398604926

Ebook: 9781398604933

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 234x154

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What is Transitional Change and Why is it Prone to Failure?

2 Our Shared Human Experience as a Metaphor for Leading Change

3 Person, Passion, Permission, Purpose: The Four Tenets of Powerful Change Leadership

4 Building a Change Mindset Through Courage & Empathy

5 The FAIL Behaviours: Transition Traps & How to Recognize Them

6 The SPARK Practices: Transition Triggers & How to Use Them

7 The Transitions Masterclass: Dreamers, Drivers, Shapers & Sherpas

8 The Change Mindset Toolkit: How to Improve Decision-making in Uncertainty

9 Meet the Platers: Lessons from Powerful Leaders on Navigating Change

Develop Your Leadership Skills

Fast, Effective Ways to Become a Leader People Want to Follow

This book

• Provides a full overview of how to grow as a leader and encourages you to find greatness in others

• Is from the bestselling author and world renowned leadership expert John Adair, with over 500,000 books sold worldwide and translations into 25 languages

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: revised case studies throughout and summaries of the latest leadership thinking

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606173

Ebook: 9781398606272

Pages: 112 Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What you have to be

What you have to know

What you need to do

How to turn the core leadership functions into skills

How to develop yourself as a leader

How to lead at the strategic level

How to grow leaders in your organization

Appendix

Further reading

Description

This indispensable guide from leadership guru John Adair, will boost your confidence levels, inspire you and help you on your journey to becoming a leader of excellence.

Acknowledged as a world expert, John Adair offers stimulating insights into recognizing and developing individual leadership qualities, acquiring personal authority and, most importantly, mastering core leadership functions such as planning, communicating and motivating. This 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to improve or develop your leadership skills, this guide distils the essence of John Adair's teaching and provides a framework for becoming an effective leader.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

John Adair is acknowledged internationally as an authority on leadership, based in Guildford, UK. The world's first Professor of Leadership Studies, he advises organizations and has received the Lifetime Achievement in Leadership Award. He is the author of the bestselling classics Not Bosses But Leaders, The John Adair Lexicon of Leadership and The Inspirational Leader, all published by Kogan Page.

Myths of Leadership

Dispel the Misconceptions and Become an Inspirational Leader

This book

• Explores 35 of the most pervasive myths that all leaders and aspiring leaders should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the potentially career damaging

• Is written by the bestselling and award wining author, Jo Owen, (The Mindset of Success and The Leadership Skills Handbook)

• New to this edition: fully updated with new myths including all organizations want leaders, leaders know how to lead change and you can lead remotely

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

The best leaders are born, not made. The best leaders are always in control. The best leaders are those with the highest IQs. But are they really?

The thinking about what makes the greatest leaders is increasingly muddled by stereotypes, false promises and pseudo-science. The best leaders rely on fact, not fads. Myths of Leadership blasts away the fluff and confronts false legends head on. Jo Owen uses the most credible research to analyze each myth, using international business case studies, leadership theory and insightful interviews, to uncover the truth.

This is a compelling examination of the most pervasive misconceptions about leadership that will help you elevate your own leadership abilities, better inspire your team and empower your organization by thinking differently. Entertaining and accessible Myths of Leadership throws out the management jargon and skewers over-hyped leadership trends to bring you the best practical tips you need to become a better leader.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media, strategy and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the test. Entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-award winning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK's largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, The Leadership Skills Handbook and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398608276

Ebook: 9781398608283 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 200x130

Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Neuroscience for Leaders

Practical Insights to Successfully Lead People and Organizations

This book

• Provides a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations using the latest neuroscience findings

• Offers leaders practical guidance in an easy to understand framework

• New to this edition: new examples, activities and applicable leadership suggestions plus updates with the latest scientific developments in neuroscience relating to leadership

• Relates theory to practice with real examples and a variety of individual and company examples

• Presents primary research and academic research to help improve your leadership performance

Description

Unlock your potential with the latest neuroscientific insights and succeed as a leader in complex business environments.

As understanding of neuroscience increases, it is better understood how scientific insights can be applied to develop and enhance leadership. Neuroscience for Leaders captures the most up-to-date and important findings in neuroscience and links these to the business world. This guide offers a simple framework to put these principles into practice to make better decisions, take the right actions and find faster solutions.

Now in its second edition, this book presents a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations based on academic research. The authors' 'Brain Adaptive Leadership' approach offers a step-by-step guide to enhancing the way leaders think, understanding and nurturing emotions, shaping automated brain responses and developing dynamic relationships. Examples, activities and practical suggestions are all designed to be clear and engaging. Neuroscience for Leaders is the essential guide for leaders who are ready to gain the business advantage scientifically.

Author Information

Nikolaos Dimitriadis is an award-winning communications professional, educator and consultant. Based in Serbia, he is the Head of Neuro Consulting Services at OptimalHRGroup and the Country Manager for Serbia for The University of Sheffield International Faculty, City College.

Alexandros Psychogios is a Professor of International HRM in Birmingham City Business School at Birmingham City University, UK. He is also a Visiting Professor at Cyprus International Institute of Management (CIIM) and a Research Associate in South Eastern European Research Centre (SEERC).

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789662146

Ebook: 9781789662153

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction – The leadership enigma and the human brain

1 Pillar 1 thinking brain

1 Powerful brain, powerful leader

2 Clear mind, strong direction

3 Higher performance, more followers

Summary of pillar 1

2 Pillar 2 emotional brain

More emotion, better decisions

Right emotion, right action

Summary of pillar 2

Pillar 3 brain automations

Gut reaction, faster solution

Summary of pillar 3

Pillar 4 relational brain

More connected, more successful

Brain communication, better persuasion

Summary of pillar 4

Concluding remarks – The future, the brain and the BAL approach

Coherence

The Science of Exceptional Leadership and Performance

This book

• Presents a comprehensive enlightened leadership model that has been proven to help business leaders overcome their everyday challenges

• Unlocks your true potential as a leader using a unique set of scientifically based metrics that are designed to drive individual and organizational success

• Includes case studies and interviews from prominent business leaders and and insights from a diverse range of research fields

• New to this edition: practical tools and new insights on how to transform productivity, manage complexity, accelerate innovation and drive greater commercial performance

Description

Understand how to overcome the obstacles inhibiting performance and unlock the potential for brilliance that lies within every leader.

Most leaders are operating nowhere near their optimal level of performance. In this book, Dr Alan Watkins helps leaders at every level understand how they can transform their output and unlock their true potential. He shares proven techniques that have helped thousands of leaders in FTSE 50 giants and SMEs across market sectors and geographies as well as the Olympic and Paralympic Rowing Team, resulting in them achieving their best ever medal haul in London 2012.

Coherence shows how our ability to lead and deliver results is rooted in our biology. Dr Watkins explains the science of how to increase energy levels and become smarter, more resilient, happier, healthier and more successful in whatever we do. Drawing on case studies from prominent business leaders and insights from a diverse range of research fields, he reveals the secrets to exceptional leadership and how to be brilliant every day. Now in its second edition, this vital guide contains upgraded practical tools and new insights on how to transform productivity, manage complexity, accelerate innovation and drive greater commercial performance, all while becoming healthier and happier.

Author Information

Dr Alan Watkins lives on the south coast of England and is CEO and co-Founder of Complete, a consultancy specializing in developing exceptional leadership through individual and team development. A physician and neuroscientist, he has been a coach to many top CEOs and business leaders around the world for over 25 years, bringing the latest approaches from neuroscience, physiology and systems theory to the human performance challenge. He is a visiting Professor in Business Studies at Kingston University, London.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398601185

Ebook: 9781398601192 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 15x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

1 The great performance myth

Be younger

Be healthier and happier

Be smarter

Be successful

Be influential

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader

This book

• Explores how four great philosophersAristotle, Socrates, Kant and Nietzschewould approach questions of empowerment, engagement, leadership, values and performance

• Explains why modern organizational practices miss what matters the most - their people

• Reveals how leaders and their people can progress towards being more fully flourishing persons in the workplace by smashing through seven common workplace fictions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749493165

Ebook: 9780749493172

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction – The dehumanized workplace

Who can reconnect us with our dreams?

Reason and passion in the humanized workplace

Humanizing strategy

Creativity and critical thinking

A question of example and fairness

The gift of authority

Meaning and communication

From engagement to encounter

Values and ethical pluralism

The freedom to do what you can

Index

Description

For decades, we have looked to management theorists, organizational psychologists and economists to tell us how we can squeeze the most out of people at work. The result? People are uninspired, feel like cogs in a machine and prefer to leave traditional work structures behind. Numbers and productivity can only get you so far.

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader offers a different route that will allow you to reconnect with the humanist values of work. By turning to philosophy, and what it teaches us about finding fulfilment and living a good life, this book uncovers the ways you can re-engage your workforce by valuing its members as people, rather than just tools within the process.

The four authors argue that the rise of the 'omnipotent leader', who focuses on telling rather than leading, risks creating a new generation of feudal CEOs and needs to be resisted. With the help of Aristotle, Socrates, Kant and Nietzsche, as well as a whole host of other brilliant minds, they turn traditional management practices on their head, showing how moving away from traditional, hierarchical, risk focused control structures can lead to improved employee engagement, increased productivity and better outcomes for the entire business.

Author Information

Alison Reynolds is a business leader and consultant in strategy execution. She is part of the Faculty in Executive Education at Ashridge Business School.

Jules Goddard is a Fellow of the Centre for Management Development at London Business School, where he has taught competitive strategy and creative marketing for 30 years.

Dominic Houlder is an Adjunct Professor in Strategic and Entrepreneurial Management at London Business School. He is internationally recognised as a leading business strategist.

David Lewis is Programme Director for Executive Education at London Business School and a renowned strategy and leadership expert.

The four authors met while undertaking a Master's in Research in Philosophy at the University of Buckingham.

of Risk Management

This book

Details regulatory developments affecting risks to reputation, the business model and strategy, along with improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting for assurance and reporting purposes

Provides relevant international case studies including BP, Singapore Airlines and Darktrace

New to this edition: new content on cyber risk, black swan events (such as COVID-19), climate risk, and case studies on Arcadia, Boohoo and HBO

Covers developments in enterprise risk management (ERM), loss control and the value of insurance as a risk management method·

Online resources: lecture slides with figures, tables and key points from the book

(mm):

9781398602861

9781398602878

Category: Textbook/ Professional

Risk Management

Table of Contents

to

of Risk

and Aims of

to Risk Management

the

Treat, Transfer

of Risk Appetite

Practitioner

Governance

Risk Management

Risk Management

Management

Environment

on

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management

Understanding and Implementing Effective Tools, Policies and Frameworks

New

Description

This book

• Explains the key components of an operational risk management framework and supporting governance structures

• Includes case studies of major operational risk events to illustrate key concepts, covering rogue traders, fraud and technology issues

• Covers operational risk tools including categorisation, risk and control selfassessment, scenario analysis, events and losses and operational risk indicators

• Explores the regulatory treatment of operational risk and how to create an effective risk culture

• Examines where operational risk fits in relation to other risk types and how this can create challenges

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398605022

Ebook: 9781398605039 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 240x172

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Threats to an organization's operations, such as fraud, IT disruption or poorly designed products, could result in serious losses. Understand the key components of effective operational risk management with this essential book for risk professionals and students.

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management outlines how to implement a sound operational risk management framework which is embedded in day-to-day business activities. It covers the main operational risk tools including categorisation, risk and control self-assessment and scenario analysis, and explores the importance of risk appetite and tolerance.

With case studies of major operational risk events to illustrate each concept, this book demonstrates the value of ORM and how it fits with other types of risk management. There is also guidance on the regulatory treatment of operational risk and the importance of risk culture in any organization. Master the essentials and improve the practice of operational risk management with this comprehensive guide.

Author Information

Dr Simon Ashby is Associate Professor of Financial Services at Vlerick Business School, based in Brussels, Belgium. Prior to this he was Associate Professor at Plymouth Business School, UK and worked as a financial regulator and a senior risk manager in a number of top UK financial institutions. He is a Fellow and former Chairman of the Institute of Operational Risk (IOR) and a Senior Research Fellow at the Centre for Risk, Banking and Financial Services at the University of Nottingham.

The IRM is a world leading professional body for risk management, driving excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for opportunities and threats of the future.

Table of Contents

1 Understanding operational risk - key concepts and management objectives

Embedding operational risk management

Categorizing operational risks

Risk culture

Risk appetite

Operational risk governance

Risk and control self-assessments

Operational loss events

Operational risk indicators

Scenario analysis and stress testing

Organizational resilience

Regulating operational risk

Business Continuity Management

Resilience

This book

• Explains how to implement the best practice contained in ISO 22301:2019 and deliver an effective business continuity capability

• Explores key lessons for business continuity and resilience professionals from the COVID-19 pandemic

• Features case studies of significant organizational crises and disruptions and explores the lessons learned, including Home Depot, Nissan and KFC

• Contains templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance, including a Business Impact Analysis

• Tackles key issues including getting the Board engaged, obtaining real investment for resilience building and good practice in crisis response

Description

Implement practical solutions in business continuity management and organizational resilience guided by international best practice from ISO 22301:2019.

Business continuity management and resilience are critical to maintaining a healthy business, but many organizations either do nothing (leaving themselves exposed to disruption), take short cuts (leaving major gaps) or fail to properly engage senior stakeholders. This book is a straightforward guide to delivering an effective business continuity capability, including practical solutions built from the author's personal experience managing hundreds of projects in a variety of business settings.

Business Continuity Management compares incident management, crisis response and business continuity and how to explain their importance to senior decision makers to ensure appropriate investment. Readers will benefit from case studies of organizational crises and disruptions, including Home Depot, Nissan, RBS, Facebook, Equifax and KFC, and an exploration of lessons learned from the COVID-19 pandemic. With key performance indicators, templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance, this book is the essential reference for business continuity and resilience which can be tailored to any organization.

Author Information

James Crask is Global Lead for Resilience Advisory Services at Marsh, based in UK, working with clients to deliver resilience and business continuity solutions. He also chairs the International Standards Committee (ISO) responsible for all global Business Continuity and Organisational Resilience ISO Standards, including ISO 22301:2019. He previously worked for PwC where he was responsible for building the UK firm's business resilience advisory services and has held roles for the Nuclear Decommissioning Authority in the UK and for the British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC).

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2021

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789668131

Ebook: 9781789668148

Pages: 344

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Table of Contents

About the author Introduction

Core principles

The evolution of resilience

What can we learn from international standards?

How business continuity and resilience differs between industries

Comparing incident management, crisis management and business continuity

Good practice in crisis response

Lessons for business continuity and resilience from COVID-19

2 Guidance on delivering an effective business continuity capability

Gaining and maintaining the attention of the board

Developing the governance and implementing resources

Delivering the BIA and determining recovery strategies

Writing plans and procedures

Training and exercising

Supply chain resilience

Reviewing, auditing and improving

Templates and checklists

Plan contents and tips for completion

Response templates

Assurance scorecard

Index

The Organizational Resilience Handbook

A Practical Guide to Achieving Greater Resilience

This book

• Introduces a tool for organizational resilience capability which can be scaled and adapted to any business regardless of size or complexity

• Explains how to conduct detailed assessments, report on resilience capability, benchmark performance, and develop strategies for achieving greater resilience

• Features case studies analyzing House of Fraser, Mercedes, Alibaba, BP, Transport for London and the WannaCry ransomware attack

• Covers related topics such as knowledge management, security, organizational learning, compliance and business transformation

• Avoids the common pitfalls of focusing solely on unexpected events and crisis management

Description

For businesses to grow and be successful their approach to resilience must be defined by a holistic and risk-focused outlook, rather than one which is narrow and dominated by event-oriented continuity practices. The Organizational Resilience Handbook shows that success is as much to do with innovation and the speed with which new products are brought to market as it is with organizations having to deal with unexpected crisis situations. It comprehensively covers the full breadth and depth of the field and introduces related topics such as security, safety, e-commerce, emerging technologies and customer experience.

Through adopting a strategic and progressive approach, practitioners can apply the book's methodology to develop an in-depth understanding of resilience within their own organization and use it to effectively engage with the board and senior management in developing strategies for achieving greater resilience capability. A range of high-profile case studies, such as Mercedes, the UK's National Health Service, Alibaba and BP, help to illustrate the concept of resilience by detailing characteristics and behaviours which confirm its meaning. The Organizational Resilience Handbook is a practical guide to selfassessment, benchmarking performance and implementing resilience frameworks in any organization.

Author Information

Graham Bell is a consultant and trainer specialising in organizational resilience and the assessment and mitigation of business risks. He delivers a qualification course on organizational resilience regulated by Ofqual and has 30 years' international experience in roles across manufacturing, telecoms, transport and energy sectors. He is a Fellow of the Institute for Strategy, Resilience & Security (ISRS), at University College London (UCL), and of the Institute of Strategic Risk Management (ISRM). He is also a member of the BSI Committee (CAR/001/01) tasked with the revision of BS 65000 Organization Resilience.

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789661842

Ebook: 9781789661859 Pages: 304

Format (mm): 235x159

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Contextual setting

Definitions and references

Reasoning and benefits

Case studies

The Organizational Resilience Capability Model® (ORCM)

Assessment and reporting

Other key issues and ideas

Application and implementation

The Risk Management Handbook

A Practical Guide to Managing the Multiple Dimensions of Risk

This book

• Covers all the main areas of risk management in business, including cyber risk and political risk

• Includes chapters from leading subject experts, outlining best practice and emerging developments

• Highlights the key emerging issues in risk management for business, drawing on cutting-edge thinking

• Uses a consistent framework to allow readers to easily compare practice in each area and apply insights

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2016

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749478827

Ebook: 9780749478834 Pages: 336

Format (mm): 230x152

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Description

Risk management is dynamic, with new risks continually being identified and risk management techniques adapting to new challenges. The Risk Management Handbook gives a clear snapshot of the current state of play in the risk management landscape, and a look ahead to the key emerging issues in the field. Drawing together leading voices from the major risk management application areas - from GRC to supply chain risk, operational risk to cyber risk - this edited collection showcases best practice in each discipline and provides a succinct and coherent picture of the field as a whole. Part One surveys these crucial application areas and provides a broad integrative framework for the differing contexts within which risk management is undertaken. Part Two explores emerging issues and techniques, from risk-based thinking to communicating uncertainty.

The Risk Management Handbook offers readers knowledge of current best practice and a cutting-edge insight into new developments within risk management. Whether you are a risk professional wanting to stay abreast of your field, a student seeking a broad and upto-date introduction to risk, or a business leader wanting to get to grips with the risks that face your business, this book will provide expert guidance.

Author Information

Dr David Hillson is The Risk Doctor. He is an international risk management consultant, and leads The Risk Doctor Partnership (www.risk-doctor.com). He is recognized globally as an expert practitioner in risk management, and he has made several innovative contributions to the field. He consults, writes and speaks widely on the topic and has received many awards. David Hillson is an active Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) where he was named the inaugural "Risk Personality of the Year" in 2010-11, and he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) to contribute to its Risk Commission.

Table of Contents

Introducing risk [Dr David Hillson]

1 Multidimensional risk management

1 Enterprise Risk Management [Liz Taylor]

2 Governance, Risk and Compliance [Robert Toogood]

3 Operational Risk Management [Edward Sankey, with Dr Ariane Chapelle]

4 Project, programme and portfolio risk management [Dr Dale F Cooper]

5 Political risk management [Robert McKellar]

6 Reputational risk [Arif Zaman]

7 Supply chain risk management [Linda Conrad]

8 Business Continuity Management [Ian Clark]

9 Managing stakeholder risk [Dr Lynda Bourne and Patrick Weaver]

10 Ethics in risk management [Giusi Meloni]

Cyber risk management [Ben Rendle]

Emerging trends

12 Country risk management [Daniel Wagner]

Communicating uncertainty [Dr Veronica Bowman]

14 Risk-based decision making [Dr Keith Smith]

15 Risk leadership in complex organizations [Dr Richard Barber]

16 Resilience [Dr Erica Seville]

17 Organizational change management and risk [Dr Ruth Murray-Webster]

18 Risk culture [Alex Hindson]

19 Social media risk [Dr Greg Ker-Fox]

20 Risk in development aid practice [Magda Stepanyan]

21 Epilogue: The future of risk management [Dr David Hillson]

Cyber Risk Management

Prioritize Threats, Identify Vulnerabilities and Apply Controls

This book

• Provides guidance on managing common threats to confidentiality, integrity and availability including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service

• Includes examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, along with implementation review checklists at the end of each chapter

• Explores how to prioritize relevant risks rather than those sensationalized by the media

• Covers human factors around cyber risk and how they impact employee training and cyber awareness

• Contains interviews with leading security and risk professionals from a variety of industries

Description

Most organizations are undergoing a digital transformation of some sort and are looking to embrace innovative technology, but new ways of doing business inevitably lead to new threats which can cause irreparable financial, operational and reputational damage.

In an increasingly punitive regulatory climate, organizations are also under pressure to be more accountable and compliant. Cyber Risk Management clearly explains the importance of implementing a cyber security strategy and provides practical guidance for those responsible for managing threat events, vulnerabilities and controls, including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service.

Examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, add context throughout and emphasize the importance of communicating security and risk effectively, while implementation review checklists bring together key points at the end of each chapter. Cyber Risk Management analyzes the innate human factors around risk and how they affect cyber awareness and employee training, along with the need to assess the risks posed by third parties. Including an introduction to threat modelling, this book presents a data-centric approach to cyber risk management based on business impact assessments, data classification, data flow modelling and assessing return on investment. It covers pressing developments in artificial intelligence, machine learning, big data and cloud mobility, and includes advice on responding to risks which are applicable for the environment and not just based on media sensationalism.

Author Information

Christopher J Hodson is Chief Information Security Officer (CISO), EMEA at Tanium. He has 18 years' experience across the financial, retail, energy and media industry sectors and was previously CISO, EMEA and Data Protection Officer at Zscaler. He holds an MSc in Cyber Security from Royal Holloway and retains an active role in the Infosec industry through directorship of the Institute of Information Security Professionals (IISP) and membership of CompTIA's Cyber Security Committee.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2019

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749484125

Ebook: 9780749484132

Pages: 416 Format (mm): 230x160

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Table of Contents

Contextualizing cybersecurity risk

Why now? The only constant is change

Technologies and security challenges

Data breaches

Cybersecurity programme management

What are cybersecurity and cybercrime?

Establishing a cybersecurity programme

Actors, events and vulnerabilities

Threat actors

Threat events

Vulnerabilities

Controls

Conclusion – The cybersecurity risk equation explained

Cyber risk management – A conclusion

Strategic Risk and Crisis Management

A Handbook for Modelling and Managing Complex Risks

This book

• Shows how risk and crisis managers can create robust and resilient organizational frameworks

• Provides an overview of emerging threats and their impact on businesses and wider society

• Includes detailed analysis of a wide selection of global case studies, including COVID-19, the UK National Health Service WannaCry attack, the Texas snowstorm, the Manchester Arena bombing and the Gatwick Airport drone Incident

• Uses an approach grounded in rigorous research and practitioner experience

• Covers management systems, creating organization capability, and the importance of communication and decision-making under pressure

• Online resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Description

From natural disasters to cyber-attacks to major project failures, the modern risk environment is highly complex and crises can affect organizations at any time - and come from any direction.

All senior risk and crisis managers face a similar challenge: maximizing their organization's ability to prepare for a potential high-impact event. Strategic Risk and Crisis Management shows how implementing the right frameworks and capabilities means businesses will not only survive but respond and recover at a time of maximum chaos and confusion. It covers the integration of multiple stakeholders and the importance of information exchange and critical decision-making under pressure at strategic, tactical and operational levels.

Strategic Risk and Crisis Management includes case studies with detailed analysis of organizational failures and the lessons learned, including COVID-19, the WannaCry attack, the Texas snowstorm, and the Gatwick Airport drone Incident.

Blending rigorous research with practice, this book offers a range of realistic solutions for any operational environment. Authored by a recognized global authority on the strategic management of complex events, this will be an essential read for professionals working in risk, security and crisis management and emergency response. It will also be a core textbook for university students taking modules on risk, security, emergency and crisis management.

Author Information

David Rubens is Executive Director of The Institute of Strategic Risk Management and the CEO of Deltar Training Solutions Ltd, based in London, UK. He is an Associate Lecturer at the University of Portsmouth and a Visiting Lecturer on Strategic Leadership at Cranfield University. He is a recognised authority on the strategic management of complex events. He is a member of the UK Critical Infrastructure Resilience Executive Steering Committee and has served twice as a Main Board Director of the UK Security Institute.

Simon Rüegger is Assistant Director at Ernst and Young (EY) and is based in Zurich, Switzerland. At EY, he leads the corporate security functions for Switzerland and Austria and sits on the working groups for strategic global resilience and security initiatives. He is also a member of the Europe West CBS Young Leadership Board.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398609754

Ebook: 9781398609761 Pages: 336

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

Setting the scene – an overview of historical crisis management research

2 Corporate risk management in the 2020s

3 Black swans + grey rhinos – being ready

Causes of crisis management failure

Incident command systems and hierarchical management

Leadership

Resilience

The regulatory system – a failing safety net

9 Setting the scene – a case-study in urban dysfunction

Global urban resilience

Creating the new urban order

In the stranglehold of a pandemic –learning from covid-19

Case studies

Wicked problems

New

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management

A Practical Guide to Reaching Net Zero Goals

New Title

This book

• Provides a practical roadmap for how organizations can incorporate climate change into their enterprise risk strategy, integrating existing and new risk management methodologies

• Covers best practice risk management tools and techniques and how they can be tailored for climate change such as use of the risk radar, bow tie analysis, stress and scenario testing, risk maturity models, and risk reporting dashboards

• Presents international, sector-agnostic approach supported by examples, case studies and interviews and insights from leading experts in risk management across different industries

• Explains the climate change risk taxonomy that is now widely and consistently used across world by regulatory and risk managers.

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398608702

Ebook: 9781398608719

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Table of Contents

Introduction - Climate change enterprise risk management in context

1 Climate change risk landscape and ERM maturity

2 Climate strategic positioning and risk appetite integration

3 Developing an effective climate governance framework

4 Climate change risk identification techniques including stakeholder mapping

5 Managing transition risks

6 Building climate resilience

7 Climate physical risks – data sources, uses and challenges

8 Designing an effective climate emerging risk management process

9 Climate emerging trends, issues and challenges

10 Climate stress and scenario testing

11 Climate risk integration into specific business processes

12 Financial reporting and climate disclosures

Rethinking Reputational Risk

How to Manage the Risks that can Ruin Your Business, Your Reputation and You

This book

• Explains the underlying behavioural and organizational risks that can leave organisations vulnerable to what can be catastrophic reputational damage

• Provides a framework and insights that will help risk managers and boards to focus on and deal with the fundamental behavioural risks that underlie reputational risks

• Reveals how and why these risks remain hidden for long periods before emerging unexpectedly, giving readers the incentive to troubleshoot for their organizations well before trouble emerges

• Uses a wide variety of real-life case studies - BP, Barclays, AIG, Volkswagen and the NHS - and examples of organizations that have suffered reputation damage to draw out insights

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2017

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749477363

Ebook: 9780749477370 Pages: 336

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Risk Management

Description

A company's reputation is one of its most valuable assets, and reputational risk is high on the agenda at board level and amongst regulators. Rethinking Reputational Risk explains the hidden factors which can both cause crises and tip an otherwise survivable crisis into a reputational disaster.

Reputations are lost when the perception of an organization is damaged by its behaviour not meeting stakeholder expectations. Rethinking Reputational Risk lays bare the actions, inactions and local 'states of normality' that can lead to perception-changing consequences and gives readers the insight to recognize and respond to the risks to their reputations. Using case studies, such as BP's Deepwater Horizon oil spill, Volkswagen's emissions rigging scandal, Tesco, AIG, EADS Airbus A380, and Mid-Staffordshire NHS Hospital Trust, and analysis of their failures, this hard-hitting guide also applies lessons drawn from behavioural economics to the behavioural risks that underlie reputation risk.

An essential read for risk professionals, business leaders and board members who need to understand and deal with business-critical threats to their reputation, this book presents a new framework that will be invaluable for all involved in safeguarding an organization's reputation.

Author Information

Anthony Fitzsimmons is Chairman of Reputability LLP and an authority and leading thinker on reputational risk and the propensity of behavioural and organizational risks to cause reputational damage.

Derek Atkins BSc PhD MIMMM CEng FCIM FCII Chartered Insurer was a visiting Professor at Cass Business School, London, teaching risk management, reputational risk, and insurance, and a partner in Reputability LLP. He was the co-author of a dozen books.

Table of Contents

Rethinking

Introduction

Reputation Basics

How Reputations are lost

What is Reputational Risk?

The hole in Classical Risk Management

Stakeholder Behaviour

Risks from failing to communicate and learn

Character, Culture and Ethos

Incentives

Complexity

Board composition, Skill, Knowledge, Experience and Behaviour

Risks from Strategy and Change

Incubation and complacency

The special role – and Risks – of leaders

Case studies

BP: Texas City Explosion

BP: Deepwater Horizon

Tesco PLC

American International Group (AIG)

EADS Airbus A380

Volkswagen

Mid Staffordshire NHS Foundation Trust (Stafford Hospital)

Practicalities

The way forward

System Basics – Getting to ‘go’

Setting up the Reputational Risk Management System

Operating the Reputational Risk Management System

Cybersecurity for Business

Organization-Wide Strategies to Ensure Cyber Risk Is Not Just an IT Issue

This book

• Explains how organizations can achieve their digital transformation goals without creating undue cybersecurity risks

• Brings together chapters written by senior practitioners of cybersecurity from a wide range of industry sectors

• Based on principles that have been independently shown to improve cybersecurity by enhancing risk management, aligning business goals and creating a culture of security throughout an organization

• Explores the roles and responsibilities of each department in managing cyber risk, including HR, Legal, Audit, M&A and Supply Chain Management

• Reframes cybersecurity as a strategic business issue and translates board-level principles to the management level

Description

Balance the benefits of digital transformation with the associated risks with this guide to effectively managing cybersecurity as a strategic business issue.

Important and cost-effective innovations can substantially increase cyber risk and the loss of intellectual property, corporate reputation and consumer confidence. Over the past several years, organizations around the world have increasingly come to appreciate the need to address cybersecurity issues from a business perspective, not just from a technical or risk angle. Cybersecurity for Business builds on a set of principles developed with international leaders from technology, government and the boardroom to lay out a clear roadmap of how to meet goals without creating undue cyber risk.

This essential guide outlines the true nature of modern cyber risk, and how it can be assessed and managed using modern analytical tools to put cybersecurity in business terms. It then describes the roles and responsibilities each part of the organization has in implementing an effective enterprise-wide cyber risk management program, covering critical issues such as incident response, supply chain management and creating a culture of security. Bringing together a range of experts and senior leaders, this edited collection enables leaders and students to understand how to manage digital transformation and cybersecurity from a business perspective.

Author Information

Internet Security Alliance provides thought leadership in cybersecurity and works with the US government to advocate for public policy that will advance the interests of cybersecurity.

Larry Clinton is President of the Internet Security Alliance. He advises industry and government on cyber policy and regularly appears in the media to provide an expert opinion. He has briefed NATO, the Organization of American States (OAS), G-20 and the US Congress. He has twice been named to the NACD 'Directorship 100' list of the most influential individuals in corporate governance.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398606142

Ebook: 9781398606395 Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Cyber Security

Table of Contents

1 Why we need to take an enterprise-wide approach to cyber risk

1 The growing cyber threat – not just an “IT” issue

2 View from the top – how boards are addressing cyber risk

3 Structuring the organization for the digital age

4 A modern approach to assessing cyber risk

2 How to manage cyber risk from an enterprise-wide perspective

5 The roles and responsibilities of human resource management in cybersecurity

6 The roles and responsibilities of legal and general counsel

7 The roles and responsibilities of audit and compliance

8 Cybersecure supply chain and third-party management

9 The roles and responsibilities of technical operations

10 The roles and responsibilities of external communications and crisis management

11 The roles and responsibilities in mergers and acquisitions

12 The roles and responsivities of cyber operations in developing a culture of security

Confident Cyber Security

How to Get Started in Cyber Security and Futureproof Your Career

This book

• Covers the basic principles of cyber security, a vital and in-demand skill area

• Features real-world case studies to help you apply your knowledge, from companies and people such such as Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, plus examples from a range of industries including entertainment, social media influencers and property

• Includes practical exercises to help you hone your skills, as well as dedicated advice on how cyber security can enhance your career, wherever you are in your work life

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Description

The world is more digitally connected than ever before, and with this connectivity, comes vulnerability. It is therefore vital that all professionals understand cyber risk and how to minimize it. This means that cyber security skills are in huge demand, and there are vast career opportunities to be taken.

Confident Cyber Security is here to help. This jargon-busting guide will give you a clear overview of the world of cyber security. Exploring everything from the human side to the technical and physical implications, this book takes you through the fundamentals: how to keep secrets safe, how to stop people being manipulated and how to protect people, businesses and countries from those who wish to do harm.

Featuring real-world case studies from Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, as well as social media influencers and the entertainment and other industries, this book is packed with clear explanations, sound advice and practical exercises to help you understand and apply the principles of cyber security. Let Confident Cyber Security give you that cutting-edge career boost you seek.

About the Confident series...

From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Dr Jessica Barker is an award-winning global leader in cyber security. She is co-Founder and co-CEO of Cygenta, where she influences cyber security awareness, behaviour and culture in organizations around the world. She has been named one of the top 20 most influential women in cyber security in the UK, is the Chair of ClubCISO. and is a popular keynote speaker, including RSA San Francisco in 2020.

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789663402

Ebook: 9781789663419

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 217x140

Product Category: General Subject: Cyber Security

Table of Contents

Introduction

Why cyber security?

What cyber security is

Why it is important

The technical side of cyber security

Technical vulnerabilities

The human side of cyber security

Why people are so important in cyber security

Social engineering

Attacks that utilise social engineering

The physical side of cyber security

Why physical space matters in cyber security

Attacks on the individual

Attacks on organisations

Nation state cyber security – Geopolitics

5 The future of cyber security and what it means for your career

Cyber security in different industries

Cyber security at the board level

The variety of cyber security careers

Pursuing a cyber security career

Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution

Capabilities to Achieve Superior Performance

This book

• Explains what businesses need to do to thrive in the increasingly uncertain context of the fourth industrial revolution, and how this can be achieved

• Illustrates the importance of establishing long term strategy, despite the turbulence and unpredictability of the markets, and provides tools and techniques to make these decisions

• Outlines the dynamic capabilities firms require to achieve competitively superior performance, with examples of good practice and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness

• Includes a self-assessment questionnaire to assess the dynamic capacity of your organization, which can be an indicator of future performance

• Draws on robust research which tracked organizations over five years as well as the author's experience as an international business consultant

Description

LONGLISTED: CMI Management Book of the Year 2021

The business world is currently experiencing fundamental disruption, in part driven by the technology enabled Fourth Industrial Revolution. Corporate value is created and lost in breathtakingly short periods, and the rise of 'unicorns' against the demise of oncevenerated organizations has shown that how firms compete has changed. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution presents a framework for managing and winning in the new accelerated world of business, focusing on the key capabilities organizations now need to achieve competitively superior performance.

Building on the 'dynamic capabilities' approach already familiar to strategists and based around his own research, Stephen Wyatt shows how executives can assess the dynamic capacity of their organization - a leading indicator of future performance in comparison to their industry peers.

Written in an accessible style with best practice examples from companies and quotes from executives to support each insight, this book includes a self-assessment questionnaire to measure the dynamic capacity of your organization and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution offers timely insights on driving innovation and emphasizes the importance of long-term strategy, change management and new models of dynamic leadership.

Author Information

Stephen Wyatt is Professor of Strategy and Leadership at the University of Bath. For over 25 years he has been a business consultant focused on developing leaders and enabling organizations to thrive in highly dynamic environments. He is also Affiliate Faculty at Singapore Management University and Industrial Associate at the University of Cambridge, and serves on the boards of the Global Innovation Management Institute and the Management Consulting Institute.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789666809

Ebook: 9781789666816 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x152

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

Introduction

Competing for tomorrow, today

Build dynamic capacity - Thrive in 4IR

Sense & Make Sense

Seize & Replicate

Reposition & Reconfigure

Drive audacious growth - Be purpose-led

Purpose-led, forward-leaning

Ambidextrous - ‘Both AND’ mindset

Continuous evolution

Win the 4IR talent race

The race to develop 4IR talent

Deploy talent with fluid teaming

Human-centred workforce managementDuty of care

Dynamic advantage

Superior performance in 4IR

Section - SIX: Summary

Boosters and key themes

Strategic Decision Making

Discovery-Led Approach to Critical Choices in Turbulent Times

This book

• Explores what senior managers can do to make better strategic decisions in a business environment of uncertainty, ambiguity and confusion

• Shows how to test, evaluate and refine strategic interventions before cascading throughout the whole organization

• Provides guidance on how to combat decision-making bias and organizational inertia

• Features examples from Ryanair, Netflix, HMV, Komatsu, Caterpillar, Ericsonn, Tesco and McDonalds

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2018

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749472603

Ebook: 9780749472610 Pages: 256

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

Introduction - Why Strategic Decision Making needs to become Discovery-led

The World is Changing, but we don’t always see it

Organizational Inertia - Why Enterprises find it Difficult to Change

Top-down Decisions

Middle-Out Decisions

Discovery-Led Decision Making

Mode I - Framing

Mode II - Experimenting

Mode III - Scaling

Implications for Organisations

The Force that is You

Description

Making strategic decisions is a fundamental skill for leaders and managers. However, in a business environment that is in a constant state of change, making strategic decisions has never been more difficult. Strategic Decision Making addresses this challenge by providing a framework that can be used to make sound decisions in an uncertain world. Structured around the core concepts of framing, experimenting and scaling, this book will ensure that efforts are focused where the need is greatest, that interventions are tested, evaluated and revised if necessary and that successful initiatives are effectively rolled out across the business.

Packed with real world examples and backed up by academic research, Strategic Decision Making will allow today's leaders and the leaders of tomorrow to make successful and defensible business choices. It shows how to: avoid decision-making bias, overcome organizational inertia, manage the difficulties of rigid organizational structures and avoid being side tracked by outdated or irrelevant experience. Essential reading for business practitioners and management students alike, this comprehensive guide provides a robust approach to achieving strategic success.

Author Information

Dr Simon Haslam is a Chartered Director, strategy consultant and strategy programme lead at the Institute of Directors. He is a Visiting Fellow at Durham University Business School and co-owns the research and consulting firm FMR Research. He consults internationally to public,private and third sector organisations.

Dr Ben Shenoy helps organizations apply behavioural insights to a variety of business issues, through executive education, speaking engagements and applied research. He is a Visiting Professor at The London School of Economics and Director of the Business Insights Lab at the University of Surrey.

Resetting Management

Thrive with Agility in the Age of Uncertainty

This book

• Dispels the ambiguity around on-trend buzzwords and explains how executives can deliver flexibility and entrepreneurship at a strategic, organizational and leadership level

• Includes case studies from companies including General Electric, Lego, Accor Hotels, ING, LVMH and Deutsche Telecom

• Explains why business agility is much more than agile

• Provides diagnostic tools to measure a business' starting level of agility and practical models to help any business to start and sustain a successful agility transformation

• Shows that it is possible to embrace uncertainty, rather than fear it

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789667172

Ebook: 9781789667189

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

1 A Call to Action (Why)

1 Why Agility?

2 The What of Business Agility - Reshaping How Organizations Make Choices

2 A New Agility Landscape (What)

3 Strategic Agility

4 Ramping Up Organizational Agility Without a Profound Overhaul of the Hierarchy

5 Intermediate Stage of Organizational Agility - Pockets of Agility, Powered by Agile Methods

6 Organizational Agility: The Pioneers of New Organizational Forms

7 Leadership Agility

Description

SHORTLISTED: Business Book Awards 2022 - Change & Sustainability

The ability to renew competitive advantage with flexibility is essential for any business in today's turbulent world. How do you go beyond trendy buzzwords and master the principles of business agility?

Resetting Management helps leaders understand why business agility matters. Agility releases a new level of energy, innovation and entrepreneurship, enabling organizations to respond to disruption while still delivering business strategies with rigour and efficiency. Using diagnostic tools and practical models, the book describes how to master the essential components and principles of agility and respond to uncertain and fast-changing environments.

Featuring case studies from some of the world's leading companies and illustrating how they have successfully and less successfully transformed for greater agility - including Lego, General Electric, LMVH and ING - Stéphane J.G. Girod and Martin Králik provide leaders with the skills to master the transformation journey that is right for their business.

Author Information

Stéphane J.G. Girod is Professor of Strategy and Organizational Innovation at IMD business school in Lausanne, Switzerland. He writes a column in Forbes.com and his opinion pieces have been carried by China Daily, The Economist, BBC News, Tribune de Genève and The Times. Before joining IMD he was Manager of the Accenture Institute for High Performance, based in London.

Martin Králik is an IMD external associate, based in Southeast Europe. Before IMD, he worked with Insead and the International Data Corporation.

3 How to Transform for Agility Successfully

8 Managing the Trade-offs of Strategic Agility

9 Navigating the Challenges of Implementing Agile Methods

10 Managing the Trade-offs of Radically New Organizational Forms

11 Final words

Evidence-Based Management

How to Use Evidence to Make Better Organizational Decisions

This book

• Explains what information qualifies as evidence and how it can drive better organizational decisions

• Outlines how to improve the quality of organizational decisions by using data from multiple sources including organizational data, professional expertise, stakeholder values and scientific literature

• Shows how to critically analyze and evaluate evidence in order to get the most out of it

• Online resources: Lecture slides, case studies, exercises and further reading

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2018

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749483746

Ebook: 9780749483753 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Strategy

Description

Decisions in businesses and organizations are too often based on fads, fashions and the success stories of famous CEOs. At the same time, traditional models and new cuttingedge solutions often fail to deliver on what they promise.

This situation leaves managers, business leaders, consultants and policymakers with a profound challenge: how can we stay away from trends and quick fixes, and instead use valid and reliable evidence to support the organization?

In response to this problem, evidence-based management has evolved with the goal of improving the quality of decision-making by using critically evaluated evidence from multiple sources - organizational data, professional expertise, stakeholder values and scientific literature. This book sets out and explains the specific skills needed to gather, understand and use evidence to make better-informed organizational decisions.

Evidence-Based Management is a comprehensive guide that provides current and future managers, consultants and organizational leaders with the knowledge and practical skills to improve the quality and outcome of their decision-making. Online resources include case studies, exercises, lecture slides and further reading.

Author Information

Eric Barends is Managing Director of the Center for Evidence-Based Management and advises management teams and boards of directors on evidence-based management and decision-making. He is also a visiting lecturer at New York University, Australian National University and VU University Amsterdam.

Denise M Rousseau is the H J Heinz II University Professor of Organizational Behavior and Public Policy at Carnegie Mellon University's Heinz College and Tepper School of Business. She was formerly the President of the Academy of Management and is an adviser to numerous social enterprises, professional associations, and governmental and for-profit organizations.

Table of Contents

Evidence-based management: the basic principles (with Rob Briner)

ASK: Critical questions about assumed problems and preferred solutions

Evidence from practitioners

ACQUIRE: Evidence from practitioners

4 APPRAISE: Evidence from practitioners

2 Evidence from the scientific literature

A short introduction to science (with Rob Briner)

6 ACQUIRE: Evidence from the scientific literature

7 APPRAISE: Evidence from the scientific literature (with Rob Briner)

3 Evidence from the organization

8 ACQUIRE: Evidence from the organization (with Martin Walker)

9 APPRAISE: Evidence from the organization (with Martin Walker)

Evidence from stakeholders

10 ACQUIRE: Evidence from stakeholders

APPRAISE: Evidence from stakeholders

AGGREGATE: Weighing and pulling together the evidence

APPLY: Incorporating the evidence into the decision-making process (with Alessandra Capezio)

14 ASSESS: Evaluate the outcome of the decision taken

15 Building the capacity for evidence-based management

Guidelines for critically appraised topics

The New Strategist

Shape your Organization and Stay Ahead of Change

This book

• Explores how the role of strategist should adapt to face new challenges and drive the corporate agenda

• Is based on original research from the prestigious Institute of Management and Strategy, University of St. Gallen

• Focuses on the day-to-day practice of strategy and the practical implications of current challenges rather than the theory

• Looks at various strategic roles, including managers, strategy consultants and Chief Strategy Officers

• Allows strategists to reflect on and legitimate their own role

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2020

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9781789661125

Ebook: 9781789661132

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

Professionalizing strategists

The executive as strategist

Chief strategy officer

Strategists at headquarters

Strategists’ competencies

A strategist’s tools

Looking ahead

Appendices

References

Index

Description

As organizations face an unprecedented rate of change, how should the role of the strategist adapt to address new challenges? Based on original research and consulting projects from the Institute of Management and Strategy, University of St. Gallen, The New Strategist is a practical guide which explains how to execute strategy, not just think about the theory. It examines day-to-day strategy work, explores the competences required by strategic leaders, and maps out the strategist's tools of the trade, including processes, initiatives and discourse.

Using a rich and unique data set, this book looks at the roles of different strategists in an organization and emphasizes the importance of managers and strategy consultants as well as Chief Strategy Officers and other leaders. Crucially, The New Strategist focuses on the practice of strategy rather than the theory, answering key questions around how professional strategists should work and which methods and techniques they should draw upon. This timely and authoritative text will support and strengthen managers in fulfilling their strategic leadership responsibilities, allowing them to contribute to the professionalization of the field and ensure their role is suitable for the future of business.

Author Information

Prof. em. Dr. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor Emeritus of Management (previously Executive Director) at the Institute of Management and Strategy at the University of St. Gallen. He is a member of multiple boards of international organizations, works as a consultant and trainer for a variety of companies, and is the recipient of several international awards. He researches and teaches on matters of strategic management and has co-authored nearly 400 publications, including Radical Business Model Transformation and The Management of Luxury (both published by Kogan Page).

Radical Business Model Transformation

How Leading Organizations Have Successfully Adapted to Disruption

This book

• Addresses business model transformation as a leadership challenge providing actionable tools and guidance for companies

• Provides insights into organizations that have made radical shifts including SAP, Netflix and Daimler

• New to this edition: updated case studies with a global focus, new literature to keep up-to-date with the academic discourse and new chapters on areas such as Digital Transformation

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789661965

Ebook: 9781789661972

Pages: 368

Format (mm): 230x150

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

About the authors

1 Why business models need to radically shift

1 How business model transformation became mainstream

2 Working with the Business Transformation Board

2 Navigating the business model transformation journey

3 Drivers of business model transformation

4 How to assess your current and target business model

5 How to lead a radical shift of your business model

3 Learning from successful transformational organizations

6 Case studies of companies radically shifting the level of inclusiveness

7 Case studies of companies radically shifting the level of customization

8 Case studies of companies that sequence multiple radical shifts

4 How to move forward

9 Mastering the transformational leadership challenge

10 Designing your business model transformation path

11 Index

Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology

Create Competitive Advantage in Relentlessly Changing Markets

This book

• Explains how managers and leaders can influence, measure and reinforce employee behaviours that lead to actual results

• Brings together academic theories and practitioner experience drawn from behavioural psychology, strategy and change management

• Explores how adopting a behavioural approach leads to greater adaptability in rapidly changing business circumstances

• Considers the importance of understanding behaviour in encouraging innovation and improving employee engagement

• Proves that by spending less time on giving instructions and more time on follow-up, feedback and learning, organizations can achieve better results

Description

Accelerate strategy and achieve desired results with this guide to understanding and influencing employee behaviour, based on the theory and practice of strategic management, behavioural psychology and change.

The realisation of strategy is entirely dependent on employee behaviour, so in order to achieve business results it is vital that managers and leaders develop an understanding of human behaviour. Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology shows that by identifying which behaviours should be measured and encouraged, organizations can succeed in implementing strategies for continuous adaptation in a rapidly changing business environment.

Grounded in practitioner experience and academic research, this book argues that to achieve set goals organizations should spend less time planning and sending out instructions and more time on providing feedback on implementation and drawing out key points to be learned. By focusing on behaviour in this way, organizations can create a culture where innovation is encouraged and employees want to contribute to the company's future. Ensure long-term success and seize competitive advantage with this essential guide to identifying the key behaviours which will create business results and what influences them.

Author Information

Pontus Wadström is an independent consultant and advisor in strategy and change based in Stockholm, Sweden, and has worked with all types and sizes of organization in almost all industries. He is also an affiliate researcher and lecturer at KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm. His research focus is on how large and complex organizations 'do' strategy in practice, all influenced by his previous studies in both management and behavioural psychology.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604827

Ebook: 9781398604865 Pages: 256

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

1 A theory of everything

Introduction to strategy and behaviour

Strategy, change and behavioural psychology

A common language

Behaviour – The least common denominator

Arbitrariness is over

Old management principles are no longer good enough

The organization, its development and lack of development

Evidence and measurement

Unexpected simplicity

Behaviour – The foundation of everything

Activators – The igniting spark

Consequences – No feedback is also feedback

Strategy is behavioural change

A behavioural view of strategy

To realise strategy is to change

Exploiting competitive advantages – Big, best, fast and beautiful

Smart as a competitive advantage

From individual insight to competitive edge

Smart and behavioural strategising

The future of competitive advantage

New

The Business Models Handbook

Templates, Theory and Case Studies

This book

• Presents well-known and respected business models in their purest form, ensuring readers can trust them to dependably solve business challenges in any context and avoid the unreliable, re-purposed versions so often found online

• Provides a clear explanation of every model's history, along with relevant theory, business application and real-world case studies

• Helps readers add structure and clarity to business problems, and gives them templates they can apply to overcome their own professional challenges

• Brings together 50 of the most valuable business models into one reliable resource, including AIDA, Branding Pentagram, Disruptive Innovation Model, Gap Analysis, Porter's Five Forces, SWOT and many more

• Online Resources: lecture slides to support each chapter

Description

Enhance your business and marketing planning and overcome common challenges, with this collection of the most valuable and reliable business frameworks and models.

Business frameworks sit at the heart of every successful business. They add structure and clarity to business problems and can help practitioners overcome the everyday challenges they face. The Business Models Handbook brings together the most helpful and widely used templates and frameworks into a single, invaluable resource. Each chapter focuses on an individual business framework, giving an overview of 50 of the best known frameworks and how it will help an organization grow and be profitable. Each supported by a realworld case study, these include ANSOFF matrix, Price-Quality-Strategy model, Stage-Gate model, Service Profit Chain and many more.

Authored by a leading global market researcher with a background working on over 3,000 different research projects, The Business Models Handbook is an invaluable resource for any student or professional. Online resources include lecture slides that align with each chapter.

Author Information

Paul Hague is the Founder of B2B International Ltd, a global market research company. He is fellow of the Market Research Society and the author of ten books, sharing 30 years of practical experience in market research and marketing. He is a visiting fellow at Manchester Metropolitan University and a guest lecturer at Manchester Business School. His books have been translated into Italian, Indonesian, Bulgarian, Polish, Portuguese and Chinese.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2019

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749481872

Ebook: 9780749481889

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Strategy

Decision Making and Problem Solving

Break Through Barriers and Banish Uncertainty at Work

This book

• Provides tried and trusted methods to evaluate your own decision-making processes and helps you implement these decisions

• Is written by the leadership guru and bestselling author John Adair, with over 500,000 books sold and translations into 25 languages

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: updated case studies and examples as well as revised top tips and interactive, reflective exercises

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606180

Ebook: 9781398606296

Pages: 120 Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents

Introduction

Your mind at work

The art of effective decision making

Sharing decisions with others

Key problem-solving strategies

How to generate ideas

Thinking outside the box

Developing your thinking skills

Appendix

References and Further reading

Description

Thought leader John Adair provides the techniques and insights you need to find solutions, spark creativity and confidently make the right decisions.

This 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to provide a clear framework that can generate ideas and inspire confidence in your team - so you can spot the solution in every problem, and create ideas to rival even the best strategists.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

John Adair is acknowledged internationally as an authority on leadership, based in Guildford, UK. The world's first Professor of Leadership Studies, he advises organizations and has received the Lifetime Achievement in Leadership Award. He is the author of the bestselling classics Not Bosses But Leaders, The John Adair Lexicon of Leadership and The Inspirational Leader, all published by Kogan Page.

Myths of Strategy

Dispel the Misconceptions and Deliver a Winning Strategy

New Title

This book

• Explores over thirty distracting myths addressing subjects such as SWOT analysis, whether leaders need to be visionaries and the argument that Chief Strategy Officers are essential

• Includes case studies from Nespresso, Ikea and Viagra

• Provides an antidote to vague strategy-speak which will help provide real and sustainable growth

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

Every business should introduce new technologies to improve their performance? The only way to innovate is to think outside of the box? And obviously, having a Chief Strategy Officer is a guarantee of success. Really?

The reality is that there are no magic recipes for success. If there were, every company would use them, and no single company would be outstanding.

Business strategy is messy, requires hard graft and is difficult to get right. And yet the world of strategy is dominated by management consultants and business gurus making sweeping generalizations, oversimplifying business thinking and peddling their own unfounded ideas. But do these methods actually work?

Myths of Strategy debunks thirty of these most common strategy sagas, cutting through consultant hyperbole and provide you with tried and test business ideas that will make your company more successful.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media, strategy and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the test. Entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Jérôme Barthélemy is Executive Vice-President, Dean for Post Experience Programs, Corporate Programs and Relations and Professor of strategy and management at ESSEC Business School, Paris, France. He has been a visiting professor and visiting research scholar at New York University (NYU), Stanford University and Cambridge University. His book, Unleash your company's competitive spirit, received France's best management book award in 2017.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398607828

Ebook: 9781398607835 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 197x127

Product Category: General Subject: Strategy

Sustainability to Social Change

Lead Your Company from Managing Risks to Creating Social Value

This book

• Reveals how Ben & Jerry's, Unilever, Nike, Danone, Ikea, NEC, Jaipur Rugs and BlackRock made the strategic shift from minimizing risk to creating social value

• Outlines strategies and practices for companies to create purpose, engage the "whole person," create value for society and revive the planet

• Offers a self-assessment to help readers evaluate their company's mindset and practices

• Online resources include a guide to help employees become socially conscious, operate in a purposeful company, become allies for social justice, add social value to their products and establish "green" habits

Description

Is your company using its talent to create social value? Or is it simply managing risks? To address the problems facing society and business today, sustainability is not good enough.

Instead, companies need to do their part to lead social change. In Sustainability to Social Change, leadership and social innovation experts Philip Mirvis and Bradley K. Googins share their hands-on research to reveal how leaders can design and guide their companies to create more inclusive prosperity and become agents of social change. The book reveals the inside story of how socially innovative companies are making the strategic shift from minimizing risk to creating social value. It then outlines the strategies and practices that leaders can use to address the five biggest problems facing companies and society today: Purpose, Prosperity, Products, Planet and People.

Filled with real life examples, hands-on guidelines and self-assessments to rate your company's performance, Sustainability to Social Change helps you pivot your company's mindset and practices in order to enhance society and the environment, and fuel its own success. Online resources include a guide to help employees become socially conscious, operate in a purposeful company, become allies for equity and social justice, add social value at work and establish "green" habits.

Author Information

Philip Mirvis is an organizational psychologist who serves as senior research fellow for the Global Network on Corporate Citizenship and Babson Social Innovation Lab. He is based in Ranchos des Taos, New Mexico. He has led public and corporate seminars, and lectured in over 50 nations throughout Asia, Europe, and Africa, and in Brazil and Australia.

Bradley Googins is a retired professor and former Director of the Center of Corporate Citizenship at Boston College. He is currently a visiting professor of Strategy and Entrepreneurship at the Catholic University of Milan. He is based in Watertown, Massachusetts.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2022

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398604353

Ebook: 9781398604360

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sustainability in Business

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Where We Are Now and What’s Next

1 Sustainability - The End of the Beginning

2 Social Change - The Start of Something New

3 Business as an Agent of ChangeTrailblazers and Transformers

4 Changemaking - Gearing Up to Lead Social Change

2 Lead Your Company into the Future

Put Purpose First

Make Prosperity Inclusive

Engage the Whole Person

Produce Social Value

Revive the Planet

Systemic Social Change

Epilogue

The Sustainable

Handbook

A Guide to Becoming More Innovative, Resilient and Successful

New Title

This book

• Focuses on how businesses can become more sustainable in practice (the 'how') rather than on the case for sustainability (the 'why')

• Features practical tools and tips and a variety of case studies of organizations successfully embracing sustainability

• Covers the whole process to sustainability, from defining an organizational purpose and setting goals to engaging stakeholders, creating a successful culture and avoiding common pitfalls

• Spotlights actionable examples of how businesses can become more innovative, resilient and successful by becoming more sustainable

• Explores how sustainable businesses create long term value by minimising negative social, environmental and economic practices and maximizing positive impacts

1

Date: 03/02/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604049

Ebook: 9781398604056 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sustainability in Business

Table of Contents

Introduction

it to the world

Business Experimentation

A Practical Guide for Driving Innovation and Performance in Your Business

This book

• Explains how carrying out experiments can introduce and reinforce the competences that support an innovative and agile organization

• Includes case studies and examples of successful experiments concerning problem solving, performance improvement and strategic innovation

• Contains downloadable templates, worksheets and activities to accompany each stage of the experimentation process

• Explores how experimentation can be used to change behaviours as well as systems and processes, with evidence from the authors' work with leading organizations

• Outlines the pressing need for organizations to re-assess their priorities and business direction in today's fast-changing climate

Description

Business experimentation can not only create measurable value for organizations, it can provide the inspiration to break with the habits of the past by dealing with challenges and exploiting opportunities.

This book is a step-by-step, practical guide to the six-stage business experiment process, from understanding the problem or opportunity to creating a hypothesis, planning the experiment and analysing the findings. It explores the top design criteria for successful and impactful business experiments and includes valuable case studies covering problem solving, performance improvement and strategic innovation. To support the process, Business Experimentation also includes downloadable, editable templates, worksheets and activities for use in ideation and planning sessions.

This business experiment methodology can be used to support a one-off initiative or to underpin desired behaviours as part of a wider organizational change programme, as experimentation encourages people to be bold, take risks and seek new ways of doing things. Based on programmes the authors have run with a variety of leading organizations and with astonishing results, this practical guide provides businesses with the confidence to get started with experimentation and the tools to succeed.

Author Information

Rob James established his own leadership consultancy practice in 2003 after senior roles in executive development at PwC. In this practice, and as a Programme Director at London Business School, he has worked globally across many industry sectors using experimentation to create greater value for businesses.

Dr Jules Goddard is the leading proponent and practitioner of action learning programmes at London Business School, UK. He was the first person to be appointed Gresham Professor of Commerce and now serves as a member of the Council of the Royal Institute of Philosophy.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398601673

Ebook: 9781398601680

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Innovation & Creativity

Table of Contents

Introduction to experimentation in business

1 What we really mean by ‘experiments’

2 Ten principles of successful business experiments

A ‘typology’ of experiments

The benefits of experimentation – And what inhibits managers from using it

An overview of the experiment process

Identify

Discovery

Ideation

Define

Experiment

Evaluation

selection

manager

The Business Plan Workbook

A Step-By-Step Guide to Creating and Developing a Successful Business

This book

• Enables readers to research and complete a winning business plan by highlighting 24 separate areas of development with corresponding assignments

• Is based on teaching methodology which was developed at one of the UK's best business schools, Cranfield School of Management

• Contains close to 70 case studies of business planning that are behind a myriad of business ventures that include Richer Sounds, Eat 17, The Northern Dough Company, Catalan and Secret Escapes

• New to this edition: Has been streamlined to ensure readers spend time where it matters and also includes updated information resources, new case studies and updated financial projection assignments

• Online Resources: Includes slide deck for lecturers and downloadable templates

Description

Lay down the foundations of a successful business venture through a thoroughly researched and competitive business plan.

Based on tried and tested business methodology used at the leading business school, Cranfield School of Management, this 10th edition of The Business Plan Workbook guides you through all the necessary steps to constructing a winning business plan. This is a practical run-through of 26 key areas of development of strategic planning. It will allow you to think of these areas in isolation through the use of assignments that ensure you have stress-tested your business proposition. This guide covers how to

- Come up with a winning business idea

- Complete market and competitive research

- Set up a winning marketing strategy

- Forecast watertight financials and projections

- Define realistic operations and staffing

- Deliver an unforgettable pitch to potential backers and investors

This new and fully updated edition includes 67 business case studies that show you how successful entrepreneurs have dealt with strategic planning in the past. The content has been streamlined to focus on the most critical parts of business planning, ensuring you spend time where it matters and stay competitive. With new information resources and financial planning consideration, this is an invaluable guide for entrepreneurs, business executives and students.

Author Information

Colin Barrow has lectured in business schools in the UK, the USA, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe. A former visiting fellow at Cranfield School of Management, he is the author of the 30 Day MBA series, Financial Management for the Small Business and Starting a Business from Home (all published by Kogan Page).

Paul Barrow is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and also a consultant advising SMEs on growth strategies.

Robert Brown is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and directed the Graduate Enterprise Programme there, where he led a course on entrepreneurship.

Careers & Entrepreneurship

Edition: 10

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789667370

Ebook: 9781789667387 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 232x150

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Entrepreneurship

How to Write a Business Plan

Win Backing and Support for Your Ideas and Ventures

This book

• An accessible guide to producing the most professional and convincing business plans, including advice on plans for internal as well as external company use

• Provides invaluable help with the sales forecast and compiling of all the necessary financial information

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: updated to include new ways of sourcing finance such as crowd funding, revisions to business legislation and advice on risk, legal issues and confidentiality

Description

If you are starting or selling your own business, or wanting to expand your company, business plans are essential. Get expert guidance on how to make an impact with your business plan and successfully communicate your strategic vision.

Whether it is to raise finance, sell a business or develop a specific project, this is your one-stop guide to producing the most professional and convincing business plan for a new venture. This 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you write a comprehensive and compelling plan, as well as content on digital developments such as crowdfunding, online retailing and digital marketing.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Brian Finch is an independent consultant, with considerable experience of preparing and delivering effective business plans, as well as advising others on their preparation of winning material. He is the author of Effective Financial Management, also published by Kogan Page. He is based in London, UK.

Edition: 7

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398605640

Ebook: 9781398605657

Pages: 200

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents

Introduction

The structure of the plan

Summary

business background

market

Management

proposal

forecast

Risks

information

Legal issues and confidentiality

Selling your business

Improve business performance

Bidding for business

The Young Entrepreneur

How to Start A Business While You’re Still a Student

This book

• Tells you all you need to know to launch a business without dropping out or waiting for graduation

• Provides tailored information and advice, from that lightbulb moment and getting started, to scaling up or selling your business - including specific highlights of how being a student can be an advantage

• Provides clear and invaluable guidance on where and how to access funding, mentorship and support

• Features inspiring case studies from successful young founders as well as from the authors' own experiences as young serial entrepreneurs

Description

If you have a great start-up idea and know how to think like an entrepreneur, but are still at college or university, then this book will show you how to run your business without having to drop out.

Research shows that Generation Z are the most entrepreneurial generation yet. If you don't want to wait until you graduate before launching the next big thing, then this bookwritten by successful young entrepreneurs Swish Goswami and Quinn Underwood - is for you.

Packed with practical and realistic advice The Young Entrepreneur really cuts through the noise surrounding business innovation and makes a clear case for starting your own company while you're young. Featuring inspiring examples and invaluable resources to give you the tools you need, this book is your one-stop guide to jump-start your entrepreneurial journey.

Author Information

Swish Goswami, 24, is the CEO of Trufan, a tech company building products that improve brand engagement while respecting a consumer's right to privacy and compensation. His company has made two acquisitions, raised over $4.1M to date (from several NBA players and venture firms) and has clients like Sony Music, L'Oreal, Netflix, NBA, NFL, and a plethora of small to medium sized businesses.

Swish has given three TEDx talks and is an investor/advisor through his angel fund AGEX Capital (investments include Faze Clan, Wombo, Upstream, etc). Swish has a personal following of over 200,000 and enjoys speaking around the world under North America's prestigious bureau Speakers Spotlight. For his entrepreneurial and philanthropic achievements, Swish was inducted into Plan Canada's Top 20 under 20, recognized as LinkedIn's Top Voice and Startup Canada's Young Entrepreneur of the Year and awarded the United Nation's Outstanding Youth Leadership award.

Quinn Underwood, 24, is the CEO of Autumn, a privacy-first startup that leverages Artificial Intelligence to help individuals and organizations identify early signs of burnout, depression, and other mental health challenges, and respond proactively. Autumn works with major non-profits and scaling companies to promote mental health and prevent burnout. Quinn is also the former co-founder of Advin, a health tech company which he helped scale across Bangladesh and India. He is based in Toronto, Canada.

Careers

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9780749497347

Ebook: 9780749497330

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 199x130

Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents

Foreword

Entrepreneur

Introduction – What to expect

The entrepreneur mindset

Endeavour

The lightbulb moment – How to come up with an idea

Common mistakes

Infrastructure

MVP (Minimum Viable Product)

Development

Launch

Traction

Fundraising

Scale

End goal

Misconceptions of starting a business

Opportunities

The Return to Study Handbook

Study Skills for Mature, Distance, and Workplace Learners

This book

• Is a one-stop, comprehensive guide for candidates on professional qualifications, mature students, distance or part-time learners, adults returning to study, and other non-traditional students, providing the full range of mental and practical skills you need to succeed

• Will help you effectively manage your learning alongside the diverse and often conflicting priorities of adult life, including full-time work or family responsibilities

• Features recommended technology tools, practical exercises, useful templates and inspirational and aspirational case studies from a range of non-traditional, real-life students and graduates

Description

Have you learned how to learn? Written especially for professional or distance learners, part-time or mature students, and formal CPD qualification candidates, The Return to Study Handbook will teach you how to study effectively, ace your ongoing education, and get the grades you need to advance in your career.

Whether you need to balance your learning with full or part-time work, or overcome the 'mindset gremlins' stemming from a negative school experience, this book will empower you to effectively manage your own learning and provide you with the full range of mental and practical skills you need to succeed.

Packed with practical tools, tips, exercises, case studies and strategies, plus the author's own inspirational story, The Return to Study Handbook not only covers the study skills necessary for any student to be successful - such as effective note-taking; exam technique; and essay writing - but it specifically addresses relevant topics for non-traditional students. With advice on recommended technology aids; handling procrastination and distractions; dealing with overwhelm and avoiding burnout; managing distance learning; and overcoming the mental and emotional barriers of past experiences, this book will guide you through everything you need to achieve the grades and career you want.

Author Information

Chloe Burroughs is a Graduate Ambassador for the Open University. Study coach, blogger, entrepreneur, and contributing writer for We Are The City; she specializes in using her own experience as a full-time professional and part-time distance learner, to help people overcome barriers to learning and achieve the grades they need to advance in their careers.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2019

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749496906

Ebook: 9780749496913

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: General Subject: Study Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

Getting ready for further study

Independent learning

Embrace your non-traditionalism as a student

How to prepare for higher education

Goal setting

Mindset and motivation

Mindset

Motivation

Organization and productivity

Organization

Productivity

The dark side of productivity

Classes, note taking and assignment

taking

writing

Developing Mental Toughness

Strategies to Improve Performance, Resilience and Wellbeing in Individuals and Organizations

This book

• Demystifies mental toughness and provides an evidence-based measurable framework to improve the ability to cope with daily pressures and stress, and promote performance

• Features practical guidance for applying mental toughness to develop leadership, organizational culture and self-awareness

• Includes case studies, such as from Deloitte and Ethiad, that demonstrate how mental toughness concepts can enhance employee experience

• New to this edition: Expansion of the 4Cs model to include concepts on learning orientation and resilience; chapters on selfawareness and evidence-based practice; material on diversity and inclusion and the latest research in the field

Description

How can individuals and organizations understand and measure mental toughness to deal with stress and challenge, and so improve performance? This fully updated third edition of Developing Mental Toughness provides the answers to unlock this potential.

Tracing its development from sports psychology into the business sector, Developing Mental Toughness provides a reliable psychometric measure to apply at the organizational level. With coverage on how mental toughness relates to other behaviours and can be applied to employability, leadership, performance, creativity, emotional intelligence and motivation, the practical guidance and exercises in this book make it essential reading for academics, managers and coaches alike.

This third edition includes an expansion of the 4Cs model to include concepts on learning orientation and resilience and new chapters on evidence-based practice and using the Mental Toughness Questionnaire (MTQ48) to gain richer self-awareness. Featuring case studies from Deloitte and Ethiad, Developing Mental Toughness is the practical coaching guide for developing capabilities and resilience.

Author Information

Peter Clough is former Head of Psychology at Hull University, UK. Based in East Yorkshire, UK, he is recognised as a leading applied academic authority in this field.

Doug Strycharczyk, based in Chester, UK, is MD for AQR, an organisation which has been instrumental in most of the pilots which lead to the adoption of mental toughness in new sectors.

John Perry is Lecturer in Sport and Exercise Psychology at the University of Limerick, Republic of Ireland, and was formerly Head of Psychology at Mary Immaculate College.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398601840

Ebook: 9781398601857 Pages: 344

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Career Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

The importance of stress

Developing the model and the MTQ48

Mental toughness and the MTQ48 measure

Control

Commitment

Challenge

Confidence

Mental toughness and its relationships with other important models – Mindset, positive psychology and emotional intelligence

9 Decision making

10 Mental toughness and fatigue – The impact of mental toughness on the development of fatigue

11 Mental toughness and the world of work (1) – Stress, motivation, leadership, coaching and teamworking

12 Mental toughness and the world of work (2) – Assessment and development, and talent management

13 Employability – A key issue for the 21stcentury employer and employee

14 Using the MTQ48 measure to improve self awareness

15 Mental toughness and the world of education and the development of young people

16 Mental toughness in sport

17 Mental toughness and its link to the social and health sectors

18 Can mental toughness be developed? – The practitioner’s and psychologist’s perspectives

19 Using the mental toughness model and the MTQ48 in coaching and mentoring

Positive thinking

Visualization

22 Anxiety control and relaxation – A physiotherapist’s perspective

Attentional control

Goal setting

25 Research and evidence-based practice using the MTQ48

Good Work

How to Build a Career that Makes a Difference in the World

This book

• Guides you through a clear step-by-step structure to help you get - and succeed in - a job that will have a positive impact on the world

• Is packed with practical tools, useful worksheets and helpful tips, to help you apply the advice to your own life and career path; from working out your own values and strengths, to figuring out how they fit in with what the world needs

• Features case studies from leaders in the sector, including a Director of Corporate Responsibility and a Chief Sustainability Officer

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789665727

Ebook: 9781789665734

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 215x140

Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Description

Do you want to have a positive impact on the world? Do you want to have a successful career that makes a difference? In short... do you want to do Good Work? Let this stepby-step guide show you how.

Packed with useful tools and exercises, this step-by-step guide will help you figure out your passion and purpose, and how to effectively harness it to make real and positive changeon the world, and on your career. Whether you want to battle climate change, promote diversity and inclusion, work in sustainability - or if you're not sure, but just want to leave things a little better at the end of every work day - let this book support you in turning that passion into action.

Written by corporate responsibility consultant and certified coach Shannon Houde, this book is part career guide and part job search help - and all purpose-driven. From understanding what the 'purpose economy' is and how you fit into it, to what jobs to go for and how to land them, Good Work is the helping hand you need to make a career out of changing the world.

Author Information

Shannon Houde is the Founder and Managing Director of Walk of Life Coaching, an international career advisory consultancy focused on sustainable business, environmental, impact investing, international development and corporate responsibility. A speaker, consultant and certified coach, she works with clients around the world, across brands ranging from Google and Deutsche Bank to Virgin Airlines and the UN Foundation. Originally from Maryland, US, she has lived and worked in Washington DC, Chile, San Francisco, Phoenix, Sicily, Geneva and London, to name a few, and is now based in Cambridge, UK.

Table of Contents

Introduction – making a difference

1 The market LANDSCAPE

1 Lay of the land – what is an impact career?

2 The change makers – who do I want to be when I grow up?

2 AIM YOUR COMPASS

3 Narrowing the net – how do I figure out where I fit into the sustainability market?

4 The two-way street of values-based organizations – how do I match my values and traits to theirs?

5 Change your course – how do I overcome my fears and enhance my impact credentials?

3 MAP YOUR STORY

6 Be in their shoes – how do I unpack what the hiring manager wants when I don’t know the lingo?

7 Prove your skills – how do my skills translate for a mission-driven role?

8 Wow them on paper – what are the bits of my story that make me unique for the purpose economy?

9 Write a cover letter using KISS – this sector loves storytelling

4 STEP INTO THE MARKET

10 Tell me so I’ll listen – how do I convert my unique story into a thought leader’s biography?

11 Sustainability jobs are all about partnering – how to show I’m worth collaborating with on LinkedIn?

12 Working with recruiters – where do I find the best impact roles?

13 Networking sherpa – how can I walk the talk of collaboration and make new friends for a win–win?

14 Now in person at the interview – how do I show them in person that I’m the one for the job?

15 Conclusion

Index

The Successful Career Toolkit

Your Quick Fire Guide to Mastering Business Skills

This book

• Provides quick-reference support for a huge range of essential business skills - including self-management, process management and people management - making it a valuable tool be referred to again and again throughout your career, from new jobs to senior management

• Offers quick access to tools and techniques to help you make considered decisions when faced with a challenge at work, including self-assessment questions, useful templates and interactive exercises

• Empowers you to feel confident in any work situation, using tried-and-tested coaching techniques to give you the tools you need

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2019

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749484774

Ebook: 9780749484781 Pages: 232

Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Description

As you progress in your career, you will face new challenges. From managing yourself, to managing processes, projects and people, what works for one situation may not work for another and you'll need to be able to develop and apply what you know in a different way.

The Successful Career Toolkit is a helpful survival guide to keep on hand no matter where your career takes you. With focused, skill-based topics in three broad areas - managing yourself, managing tools and processes, and managing others - this book uses tried-andtrusted coaching techniques to help you face any imaginable workplace challenge, from asking for a raise or managing a difficult conversation, to improving your presentation skills or giving constructive feedback to an employee.

Written by experienced senior business leader, coach, and mentor Patrick Barr, this book does what it says on the tin - providing concise and empowering guidance on a range of essential business skills. With practical, interactive exercises throughout, The Successful Career Toolkit is a vital resource you will return to again and again as you progress in your chosen career.

Author Information

Patrick Barr has over 20 years international leadership experience, having held senior roles in Ireland, the UK and the USA in the airline, FMCG and IT industry sectors. Owner and Managing Partner of Barr Performance Coaching, he is passionate about leadership development and performance management. He is a member of the Enterprise Ireland Mentor Panel and The European Mentoring and Coaching Council.

Table of Contents

Managing self

Communication skills

My curriculum vitae

Career planning

Induction (as an employee)

Building good relationships

Why mindset matters

Personal work–life balance

Managing stress

Dealing with disappointing news at work

Resilience

Managing your personal brand

Effective networking

Leadership

Managing others

How to disagree

How to handle a difficult boss or peer

Leading teams

Supporting a team’s work–life balance

Performance discussions (as a manager)

Impact and influence

Challenging the status quo

Building a culture of innovation

Bringing about behavioural change

Overcoming resistance

Managing the task

How to interview (as a candidate)

Performance discussions (as an employee)

One-to-one meetings with your boss

How to ask for a pay rise

Negotiation skills

How to handle an unethical request

How to resign

How to interview (as the hiring manager)

New employee induction

Succession planning

Make Your Own Map

Career Success Strategy for Women

This book

• Provides tried-and-tested strategic planning tools and practical exercises, borrowed from successful business practice, to apply to individual career paths

• Is written specifically for women, to account for and answer the particular challenges and difficulties that many women face in the workplace and with career planning

• Is based on material from the Oxford University's first leadership programme for women, the Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789668360

Ebook: 9781789668377

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 216x138

Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Description

There's no such thing as a pre-set path to career success. Following the footsteps of others can only get you so far - and for women, there are often additional obstacles. But what if you could design your own path to your career goals? What if you could Make Your Own Map?

Based on material from the popular Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, Make Your Own Map will help you develop a resilient and aspirational strategy for your career - whatever your starting point.

Effective methods of strategic planning have been tried and tested in the corporate business world, and this book shows you how to repurpose those methods for yourself, even if you're not in the corporate world. Packed with strategic tools and practical exercises, this book will help you: -Assess and define your career goals -Make a plan -Implement your plan to find the work that fits your needs, your skills, and your direction.

With your best career as the goal, this book will help you forge your own path and Make Your Own Map

Author Information

Kathryn Bishop is an Associate Fellow at the Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, where she has taught strategy development to organizations and individuals for over 20 years. She is the Programme Director for Women Transforming Leadership - Oxford University's first leadership programme for women - and has worked with women from all over the world as they make their career and development plans. Her background includes IT and HR and she has worked as a line director and manager, a project manager, a consultant and as a non-executive director in both the private and public sectors.

Table of Contents

Introduction – what this book covers, why it will help, and how to use it

1 Devising a strategy for you – the Strategy Triangle

1 Examining the past and present to plan for the future

2 How you got to where you are now – your Journey Map

3 What is working well right now – your Personal Dashboard

2 Envisaging your future – four different approaches

4 The work that matters most to you – the Ikigai model

5 The purpose you serve – the story of you

6 Organizing your working life – your life architecture

7 What’s worth developing – the Strengths model

3 Making strategy real

8 Making a career transition – the Product/ Market matrix

9 Turning your new strategy into action –planning and experimenting

Getting under way – tactics for taking action

References

Further reading

Career Fear (and how to beat it)

Get the Perspective, Mindset and Skills You Need to Futureproof your Work Life

This book

• Takes a topic that feels overwhelming and abstract, and breaks it down into clear, practical steps that will reassure and help you take control of your career

• Guides you through the process of understanding the career landscape of the past, present and future, and your unique place in it

• Features inspiring case studies, clear and practical examples, and tools such as decision-making techniques to help you apply the theory to your own career path

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789664621

Ebook: 9781789664638

Pages: 208

Format (mm): 217x139

Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Description

What's going on with the world of work? Will my job exist in five years' time? What's 'disruption' all about, and what does it mean for me?

Jobs don't look like they used to. In this age of innovation, staying in control of your work life can feel overwhelmingly challenging. So what does it take to have - and be in control of - a successful and fulfilling career? Career Fear (and how to beat it) will help you answer this question for yourself.

In this practical and reassuring book, you'll explore the perspective, mindset and uniquely human skills you need for a resilient and thriving career - without the fear. From understanding how the world of work is changing, to self-reflection and developing your critical thinking; author Somi Arian guides you through everything you need to be ready for an exciting and varied journey through life and work. Packed with clear, useful examples and inspiring case studies, Career Fear (and how to beat it) helps you beat that career fear and prepare to succeed - no matter where your career takes you.

Author Information

Somi Arian is a tech philosopher, international speaker, entrepreneur, award-winning filmmaker and LinkedIn Top Voice among UK influencers. Her work focuses on the impact of technology on society at large, the future of work and digital marketing.

She has given talks to industry leaders from organizations as diverse as the BBC, The Economist, Marie Claire, The Guardian, Amazon, HSBC, Virgin Atlantic and American Express. Her 2018 documentary The Millennial Disruption has been nominated for a dozen international film festival awards, winning the Worldfest Houston Silver RemiBest Documentary Short Film (2019) and Idyllwild International Festival - Best Directory Documentary (2019).

Table of Contents

Introduction

PERSPECTIVE

A history of work

The modern career landscape

The future of work - AI and humanity

The future of work - Time, transition and machines

MINDSET

Knowing yourself

Your place in the world

(HUMAN) SKILLS

Emotional intelligence

Critical thinking

Contextual creativity

Mindfulness

Bringing it all together

Index

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs

This book

• Fully updated content for 2020, including new careers in the digital space such as Analyst and Influencer

• Provides jobseekers with crucial and concise information: what qualifications are required, what does the job entail, what are the starting salaries and what are the opportunities in the industry

• Functions as an easy-to-read and nonintimidating guide that is perfect for young people considering their career options

• Covers over 300 different career paths available today

• Gives careers advisers a one-stop reference guide to a huge range of career options, allowing them to easily direct students to the choices that best suit their ambitions and capabilities

Description

From accountant to zoologist, this new edition of The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is your one-stop shop for insightful guidance on more than 300 different career areas in the UK. This book is designed to help identify what personal strengths fit to what kinds of work, what skills you should highlight on a CV and what you need to know about each job.

This book is a quick and informative way to find out about what jobs and careers are out there, from traditional roles to new opportunities in the digital world. For those looking for their first job after school or university, or for anyone considering a change of career, this book provides reliable and up-to-date advice on a wide range of professions to help you choose the right path for you.

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs covers the practical issues you need to understand, such as the extent of job opportunities in each industry, what personal skills are needed, what experience is required, entry qualifications, training, as well as typical earnings and starting salaries. In an ever more competitive and changing job market, information will help maximize your chances of success. This handy and informative reference guide is also a valuable resource for careers advisers working in schools, colleges and universities who need to keep track of new developments - such as new roles and routes of entry, professional associations and exams - to offer the very best guidance to today's job hunters.

Author Information

Edition: 26

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789664584

Ebook: 9781789664591 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: General Subject: Specific Careers

Table of Contents

Success After Service

How to Take Control of Your Job Search and Career After Military Duty

This book

• Includes a detailed checklist of career-related tasks, such as drafting a résumé, finding a mentor and accessing internships, to complete prior to transition

• Offers insights and information from corporate hiring managers and recruiters regarding the skills gaps and culture differences veterans should address when applying

• Provides practical resources for the US Department of Labor's Transition Goal Plan Success (GPS) Program

• Written by an accredited expert in the civilian space on personal branding and military transition, whose extensive experience in helping service members build civilian careers comes in motivational yet practical tips

Description

WINNER: Independent Press Awards 2021 - Career

Figuring out your next move after transitioning out of the military should start before your last day. Prepare yourself emotionally and professionally to put those hard-earned skills in context of the civilian world.

The transition from military to civilian life is more than just a title change; it is a whole new life experience with the sense of excitement and possibility that accompany a transition. Whether you're preparing to retire or separate, Success After Service is written to help all veterans succeed in the civilian workplace.

Success After Service provides the tools, resources and strategies to help you adapt to the civilian workplace and evaluate post-military career options. Whether you become an entrepreneur, move into the corporate world or pursue higher education, you will learn how to develop a portfolio of career assets, including your résumé, elevator pitch, online profiles, interview acumen and professional network, empowering you to begin your new career with confidence and clarity. Success After Service is the perfect guide for transitioning military and veterans who seek a coherent set of strategies, resources and steps for building a meaningful, deliberate and rewarding post-military career.

Author Information

Lida Citroën specializes in personal branding and reputation management online and in-person for a target audience, and is based in Englewood, CO. She volunteers to help transitioning military service members build their civilian careers by teaching personal branding and online reputation management in the TAP program at the United States Air Force Academy. She also consults with private Fortune 100 companies who are looking to hire and increase the number of veteran employees. She is the author of two veteranfocused books: Your Next Mission (2014) and Engaging with Veteran Talent (2017).

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789665932

Ebook: 9781789665949

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Specific Careers

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Fundamentals of Career Readiness

2 What to Do Before You Separate/Retire

3 Evaluating the Path Forward – Employment, Education, or Entrepreneurship

4 Building Your Personal Brand

5 Career-Ready Tools to Gather – Resume and Cover Letter

6 Getting Yourself Out There – Crafting Your Narrative and Networking in Person

7 Getting Yourself Out There – Networking Online

8 Finding Mentors, Apprenticeships, and Internships

9 Researching, Applying, and Interviewing for a Job

10 Choosing and Beginning Your Career, Education, and Business Venture

11 Growing Your Career in the First Three Years

12 Growing Your Career and Knowing When to Move On

Ultimate Job Search

Master the Art of Finding Your Ideal Job, Getting an Interview and Networking

This book

• Provides everything job hunters need to know in one book on how to maximize their chances of securing a new role

• Features sample CVs for different types of jobs and sector specific interview questions

• New to this edition: new and up-to-date advice on the changing face of technology in job seeking; avoiding scams and other traps; developing resilience; and the future of work

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Edition: 6

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398602175

Ebook: 9781398602182

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x152

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Description

Finding the right job can be a job in itself - but this one-stop-shop guide will take you through every step.

Covering everything from looking for jobs online to making a fantastic impression at interview, Ultimate Job Search is everything the ambitious job hunter needs. Take the stress out of job-seeking with comprehensive advice on:

-Designing your job-search strategy

-Building an online profile

-Writing a stand-out cv/resume -Sample cover letters to help you sound both authentic and impressive -Giving a winning interview performance -Dealing with rejections and offers

Now in its 6th edition, Ultimate Job Search now contains new and up-to-date advice on the changing face of technology in job seeking; avoiding scams and other traps; developing resilience; and the future of work. Let this invaluable guide help you on your way to your next dream job.

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or resume and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and IQ tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of Ultimate Interview, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters, all published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

Introduction

First things first

The highly employable candidate

Making a start

The skills they want from everyone

Your CV

CV problems

CVs with special considerations

CVs for specific jobs

Application forms

Covering letters

Telephone calls

The job search

Your online job search

Job search strategies

Interviews – making a great impression

Answering interview questions

Questions for specific jobs

Questions for school and college leavers

Interviews and more

Offers and rejections

Ultimate New Job

Definitive Guide to Surviving and Thriving As A New Starter

This book

Covers every aspect of starting a new job or internship, tackling the top 15 questions that people ask when starting a new position

Includes essential advice, such as managing a difficult new boss and managing your image

Provides extra material available on The CV Centre's website, offering interactivity, forums and a video blog

Description

Author Information

James Innes is an accomplished author and the Founder and Managing Director of The CV Centre - the UK's leading CV consultancy. Following more than a decade of experience heading up The CV Centre, James is widely considered to be one of the UK's leading careers experts. Visit his website at: http://www.ineedacv.co.uk/

1

03/03/2012

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749464097

Ebook: 9780749464844 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 242x168

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

new job

the offer

your last job

prepared

The first week

D-Day – your first day

your purpose

is power

people

your new boss

your place within the team

your

and socialising

The learning curve

and organisation

management

with

with difficult people

office politics

and stress

with change at work

change at work

like jumping ship?

and upwards

appraisals

for a pay rise?

five top tips to survive and thrive in your new job

and thrive

Ultimate Cover Letters

Master the Art of Writing the Perfect Cover Letter to Boost Your Employability

This book

• Includes sample cover letters, from a wide selection of industries, that the reader can adapt for their own use

• Contains an indispensable list of useful key phrases that can help you create a compelling cover letter and write fluidly

• Guides you through the entire cover letter process, from drafting, writing and sending it, to writing follow up emails, networking emails and emails following either acceptance or rejection

• Is written by internationally best-selling author and job seeking expert, Martin John Yate

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description

Does your cover letter have the X factor? How can you make sure that it communicates what employers really want? Ultimate Cover Letters, from best-selling author and careers expert Martin John Yate, describes how to write the very best cover letters, helping you to open doors to job interviews and offers of employment, and outshine all other candidates. From the very popular Ultimate series, the book offers sound advice on assembling letters and how to use key 'power phrases' to get results, as well as over 100 sample letters to cover a variety of situations. These include e-mail responses to online applications, speculative letters, letters to answer advertised vacancies, follow-up letters, networking letters and even acceptance and resignation letters.

Now including a chapter on how to develop your professional image and integrate it into your job search letter, Ultimate Cover Letters 5th edition covers all aspects of this crucial part of the job-hunting process in an engaging and approachable way, ensuring you put every chance of success by your side. Ultimate Cover Letters will help you make the perfect first impression.

About the Ultimate series... The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Martin John Yate is an internationally best-selling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His best-selling book Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is now in its 8th edition and has sold over 5 million copies. He is also the author of the highly successful Ultimate CV, both published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/08/2018

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749481667

Ebook: 9780749481674 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

1 Read This First

2 Cover Letters – The Secret Weapon in Your Job Search

3 The Six Types of Job Search Letters

Know the Job, Know Your Customer

Develop Your Professional Identity

Elements of a Great Cover Letter

7 Assembling Your Job Search Letter

8 How to Polish and Edit Your Letters for Maximum Impact

The Plan of Attack

10 Sample Letters

Ultimate CV

Master the Art of Creating a Winning CV with Over 100 Samples to Help You Get the Job

This book

• Is written by renowned careers expert

Martin John Yate, author of the companion title Ultimate Cover Letters and best-selling careers title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

• Contains everything you need to know to produce the perfect CV that will differentiate you from the competition

• Includes over 100 samples of winning CVs, tailor-made for different job descriptions and special situations, that you can adapt for yourself

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description

Does your CV have the X factor? Do you want your CV to impress potential employers and show them exactly what they want? Ultimate CV, now in its 5th edition and part of the successful Ultimate series, provides you with the key guidance you need to create an irresistible CV that will grab any recruiter's attention. This book will help you to stand out from other candidates, open doors to job interviews and maximize the potential for job offers. Careers and CV guru Martin John Yate shows you how to position plain facts into a powerful sales pitch that will get you the job you want.

Ultimate CV covers every aspect of this crucial part of the job-hunting process. It contains hundreds of sample CVs, tailored to specific jobs and industries, that you can use and personalize for your own applications. Alongside insightful advice on hunting for jobs, this indispensable book will give you all the guidance you need to create a distinctive, professional CV so you can get that dream job.

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Martin John Yate is an internationally best-selling author and renowned expert on career matters. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His top selling title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions, published by Kogan Page, is now in its 8th edition.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/08/2018

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749481537

Ebook: 9780749481520

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

1 How to Make Your CV Shine

Get Inside Your Customer’s Head

The Basic Ingredients

Building Your Professional Identity

Choose Your Format

The Simplest, Smartest, Fastest Way to Write Your CV

How to Give Your CV Impact

Getting the Most from Your CV

Ready to Launch

The CVs…

Ultimate Interview

100s of Sample Questions and Answers for Interview Success

This book

• Helps job-seekers effectively and confidently prepare for the most painful part of the job search - the interview

• Features 100s of sample interview questions and sample answers from a diverse range of job types including management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical jobs, creative jobs and practical jobs

• New to this edition: new and up-to-date advice on the future of work; developing resilience; blind selection processes; and working in the gig economy

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description

Don't let interview nerves get the better of you - present the best version of yourself and be ready for anything to wow your potential employer.

Including hundreds of sample interview questions and answers to really help you nail it on the day, Ultimate Interview is the ideal tool to help you relax and show off your best side.

The secret to stress-free interviewing is preparation, preparation, preparation, and this book will take you through everything you need to effectively prepare, including:

-Understanding your interviewer and what they are looking for -How to highlight the evidence they want to see -How to stand out from the competition

-Coping with difficult questions

-Telephone, video and assessment centre interviews

This fully updated 6th edition now contains new and up-to-date advice on the future of work; developing resilience; blind selection processes; and working in the gig economy. Getting a job doesn't have to be painful - let this book help you give the Ultimate Interview

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or resume and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and IQ tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of the best-selling Ultimate Job Search, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters, all published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 6

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398602137

Ebook: 9781398602144

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 232x160

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

Introduction

Know Your enemy

Prepare yourself

Standing out

Answering questions

Starting in the interview

Questions they ask everybody

Questions for practical jobs

Questions for creative jobs

Questions for clerical and administrative jobs

Questions for sales and marketing jobs

Questions for technical jobs

Questions for management jobs

Questions for customer relations jobs

Questions for school and college leavers

Tackling the difficult questions

Dealing with tricky questions

Answering off-the-wall questions

Your questions for the interviewer

Variations on the theme

Interview extras

Looking the part

What happens next?

Ultimate Presentations

Master Interviews and Presentations to Land Your Dream Job

This book

• Covers everything you need to deliver outstanding presentations, including the aspects that people find most difficult: coping with the unexpected interruptions, controlling nerves and bad habits, and dealing with audience questions and interaction

• Contains practical exercises for you to practice your presentation skills, sample structures for presentations for you to adapt to your own purposes and case studies of successful (and unsuccessful) presentations

• New to this edition: Features a new chapter on presenting your personal brand, and well as new and improved examples, exercises and images

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398601765

Ebook: 9781398601772 Pages: 208

Format (mm): 232x160

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

Introduction

The importance of presentation skills

Why presentation skills are important

Giving presentations at interviews and assessment centres – the essentials

Giving presentations in your professional life – the essentials

The presentation

How to prepare for a presentation

How to structure your presentation

Time management

Presentation styles and techniques

Presenting as part of a group

Using technology and visual aids

Openings and endings

You

Personality and message

Personal brand

Overcoming nerves

Body language

Verbal communication

Coping with the unexpected

The audience

Tailoring your presentation to your audience

Impressing potential employers in an interview presentation

Answering questions on the spot

Audience interaction or participation

Conclusion

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

Your

Search Guide with over 200

This book

• Gives an end-to-end guide to securing a job: searching, applying, preparing, interviewing and negotiating

• Has sold over 5 million copies across previous editions

• Includes over 200 interview questions with expert tips for tackling them

• Provides guidance on the trickiest issues facing jobseekers, such as salary negotiations and searching for jobs during tough economic times

• New to this edition: brand new content on making a career change

Edition: 11

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781789666915

Ebook: 9781789666939

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 217x140

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Description

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is the essential companion for all jobseekers. With over 5 million copies sold, this bestseller takes you through the whole process: from composing your CV and preparing for interviews, to interview techniques, answering tough questions and even negotiating your new salary. Crammed full of the difficult questions that interviewers might throw at you, Martin John Yate gives you expert tips and suggested answers to tackle the tricky ones including:

Why should I give you the job? What is your biggest weakness? What are your salary expectations? How long would you stay with the company? What is your greatest strength? Why do you want to work here?

Now in its 11th edition, Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is your indispensable guide to blowing away the competition and landing your dream job.

Author Information

Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies and is widely respected as the expert on all career matters. He is also the author of Ultimate CV and Ultimate Cover Letters, both published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

Introduction

The Well-Stocked Briefcase

The realities of job hunting

Transferable skills and professional values

The productive CV

Networking and the successful job search

Network-integrated job search tactics

Getting to Square One

Making contact

The telephone interview

Dressing for interview success

Body language

The curtain goes up on the job interview

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

The five secrets of securing a job offer

Why interviewers do the things they do

How to knock ’em dead

Questions of manageability and team spirit

The stress interview and illegal questions

Answering unanswerable questions

Welcome to the real world

The graceful exit

Finishing Touches

Out of sight, out of mind?

Snatching victory from the jaws of defeat

Negotiating the offer

Multiple interviews, multiple offers

Index of questions

Index

Assessment Centre Success

Your Ultimate Resource of Practice Exercises and Sample Questions to Help you Ace the Activities, Beat the Competition and Impress Employers

This book

• Contains one of the highest numbers of practice exercises and questions on the market, developed and sourced by an expert Assessment Centre planner

• Is full of insider tips and tricks from author Tony Weightman, who has run Assessment Centres for major clients including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London

• Helps job seekers gain confidence by giving them the tools to practice showcasing the kinds of skills that top employers are looking for - from leadership and teamwork, to decision making and keeping calm under pressure

• Provides essential practice for all aspects of the Assessment Centre, including individual exercises, interviews, group exercises, presentations and psychometric testing

Description

Assessment Centre Success is your road map to mastering the skills, exercises and challenges that you'll be faced with when trying to secure that prized job offer.

An Assessment Centre can be daunting: you are likely to face a full day of challenging exercises, tests and skilled competitors. However, with the right level of practice and preparation, you will be able to confidently tackle whatever employers may throw at you.

Written by experienced Assessment Centre planner, Tony Weightman, Assessment Centre Success contains a bank of practice exercises and insider tips to help you succeed. Individual exercises are covered, including how to deliver good presentations, reports, interviews and analysis under pressure as well as group exercises such as problem solving and team presentations. Expert guidance on how to demonstrate the key skills employers are looking for helps you understand how to show yourself in the best possible light under challenging circumstances: including leadership, team work, industry knowledge, keeping calm under pressure, decision making, analytical skills, confidence and communication skills.

Author Information

Tony Weightman has over 30 years' experience as an HR consultant for major organizations including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London. He has developed and run assessment centres for some of the UK's largest organizations across several industries including food, engineering, hospitality and the charity sector, as well as for MBA candidate development.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2018

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749483135

Ebook: 9780749483142

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What is an assessment centre?

2 What employers are looking for

3 How will it work?

4 How to prepare for an assessment centre

5 Individual exercises: communication

6 Individual exercises: analysis

7 Group exercises

8 Psychometric tests

9 The interview

10 Dealing with difficulties and how to perform on the day

11 Gaining feedback after the event

12 Conclusion

Appendix 1: Model answer for identifying skills from a job description

Appendix 2: Model answer for written report 1

Appendix 3: Model answer for written report 2

Appendix 4: Presentation planning template

Appendix 5: Example of presentation feedback using POOSA

Appendix 6: Model answer for in-tray prioritization exercise

Revolutionize Your Career and Make Big Things Happen Superconductors

This book

• Pushes the reader to triumph over increasingly disrupted career paths by fully developing themselves with the original, practical and hands-on exercises at the end of every chapter

• Shows the reader how they can become irreplaceable, get an edge on the competition and stay valuable in a context of growing automation, AI, and increased outsourcing

• Covers crucial skills that help the reader be the best they can be at creativity, charisma, relationship building, getting ahead, learning, story telling, and making their ideas reality

• Contains inspiring interviews with cuttingedge experts, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capital experts, digital storytellers and human behaviour specialists

Description

The steady career path is a thing of the past: disruption is here to stay. You need to be able to keep learning, growing and reinventing yourself to stay valuable in the midst of this change. Those who succeed in this new world will be the ones who have skills that are always in demand and cannot be replaced. Creativity, charisma, confidence, constant learning, storytelling, adaptability and tribe building are the keys to having a thriving professional life and turning ideas into reality. Superconductors is your treasure trove of exclusive interviews and hands-on self-development exercises to inspire you and push you into action. Derek Loudermilk brings together some of the best minds to coach you on every skill, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capitalist experts, human behaviour hackers, journalists and digital storytellers. Michael Margolis, Vanessa Van Edwards, Derek Muller, Jason Zook, Linda Rottenburg are just some of the people giving you original insights and advice to help you form your own path.

If you're ambitious and you want to carve your place in this chaotic, but exciting, new world of work then you need to be a superconductor: you need to have the creative energy, the ability to build great networks and the charisma to make big things happen. Whether you want to live as a digital nomad, an entrepreneur or be a formidable force in your chosen industry, Superconductors gives you the unique insight and hands-on tools to be the best you can be.

Author Information

Derek Loudermilk is a serial US entrepreneur, business coach and international speaker. A dedicated professional adventurer and digital nomad, he is also the host of the Art of Adventure Podcast and the Uncharted Family Podcast.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2018

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749482367

Ebook: 9780749482374

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 232x155

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table of Contents

Introduction

Revolutionize your career

Build a strong foundation

Optimizing your creativity

Do your best work

Accelerate your learning

Telling your story

Portraying your best self: the science of charisma and confidence

Strategic relationships

Think big

Fun and games

The Job-Ready Guide

How to Set Yourself Up for Career Success

This book

• Features interviews with industry professionals, employers, and graduates, selfdevelopment exercises and focused learning outcomes

• Is a one-stop shop with everything readers need to become job-ready, including developing the skills that employers want, doing a successful job search, performing in interviews and assessment centres and planning for a dream career

• Empowers job-seekers to feel in control of their employability and career planning by providing practical advice and interactive self-assessment exercises

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2019

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749483258

Ebook: 9780749483265

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Description

To get the career you want, you need to be job-ready. This is your all-in-one guide to understanding what employers want and how to prepare yourself with a personal career plan.

From gaining work experience, to mastering essential skills and acing the application process, The Job-Ready Guide is a complete resource for standing out from the crowd and getting a job offer. It shows you how to build a strong CV, write an impressive cover letter, excel at interviews, and cultivate the professionalism that employers want.

Moving from education into the workplace can be a challenge: the world of work demands skills that you may never have had to truly use - or think about - before. The Job-Ready Guide will help you to boost your employability, covering everything you need to prepare for and start a successful career. You'll be able to conduct a systematic job search, learn how to network and develop a personal brand online, as well as hone valuable skills including leadership, teamwork, creativity and problem-solving. A highly practical, hands-on guide, this book is packed with useful features, including interactive exercises to help you in your real life; insider advice from employers; and tips from professionals at different stages in their careers who reveal 'what they wish they'd known'.

Author Information

Anastasia de Waal is director of I Can Be, a charity focused on breaking down barriers to opportunity for disadvantaged children and young people.

Before setting up I Can Be, she was Deputy Director of think tank Civitas and Director of the Family and Education Unit. A qualified primary school teacher and Chair of national parenting support charity Family Lives, Anastasia de Waal has written a number of publications on education and family issues.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Setting yourself up for success

CV building

Career planning

Work experience and internships

Further study

Developing job-ready skills

Leadership and teamwork

Communication skills

Problem-solving

Industry knowledge

Looking for a job

Systematic job hunting

Understanding what employers want

Social media, personal branding and selfpromotion

Networking

Budgeting and money skills

Applying for a job

Creating a winning CV

Covering letters and application forms

Interviews

Assessment centres

Giving presentations

Getting an offer

Starting a job

Planning and preparation

Twenty questions about your first day answered

Making a good impression and building positive relationships

Planning your next move

Index

Ultimate IQ Tests

1000 Practice Test Questions to Boost Your Brainpower

This book

• Is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available with 1000 psychometric test questions - substantially more than the nearest competitor

• Is perfect for those facing an IQ test or for puzzle enthusiasts

• Covers every aspect of IQ testing, including verbal reasoning, diagrammatic reasoning and lateral thinking

• Is written by two of the undisputed masters of IQ testing, Philip Carter and Ken Russell, who have created over 60 books on the subject

Edition: 3

Date: 03/08/2015

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749474300

Ebook: 9780749474317 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Description

IQ tests are routinely encountered in recruitment for various industries, including for jobs in the government, armed forces, and education as well as industry and commerce. Competition is fierce and employers are determined to cut the weak from the strong so it is essential for candidates to be prepared. Ultimate IQ Tests is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available. Written and compiled by experts in IQ testing and brain puzzles, it contains 1000 practice questions organized into 25 tests, with a simple guide to assessing individual performance.

With a brand new test in this edition, designed to be more challenging than the others so you can track progress, this is the best one-stop resource to mind puzzles. Working through the questions will help you to improve your vocabulary and develop powers of calculation and logical reasoning. From the best-selling Ultimate series, Ultimate IQ Tests is an invaluable resource if you have to take an IQ test, but it's also great fun if you like to stretch your mind for your own entertainment - and boost your brain power.

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you from your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Ken Russell and Philip Carter are IQ test experts who are continually devising new IQ tests and puzzles. They have produced over 60 books covering all aspects of testing, crosswords, puzzles and reasoning. These include the best-selling Test your IQ published by Kogan Page.

Philip Carter is also the author of IQ & Psychometric Tests, The IQ & Psychometric Test Workbook, Test and Assess Your IQ, Advanced IQ Tests, IQ and Aptitude Tests, IQ and Personality Tests, Succeed at IQ Tests, all published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

1 Test 1 - Questions

Test 2 - Questions

Test 3 - Questions

Test 4 - Questions

Test 5 - Questions

Test 6 - Questions

Test 7 - Questions

Test 8 - Questions

Test 9 - Questions

Test 10 - Questions

Test 11 - Questions

Test 12 - Questions

Test 13 - Questions

Test 14 - Questions

Test 15 - Questions

Test 16 - Questions

Test 17 - Questions

Test 18 - Questions

Test 19 - Questions

Test 20 - Questions

Test 21 - Questions

Test 22 - Questions

Test 23 - Questions

Test 24 - Questions

Test 25 - Questions

Ultimate Aptitude Tests

Over 1000 Practice Questions for Abstract Visual, Numerical, Verbal, Physical, Spatial and Systems Tests

This book

• Contains 1,000 questions of essential practice for recruitment tests and aptitude assessment procedures

• Includes detailed explanations of answers to aid learning and test scoring abilities

• Comes with a free suite of online tests which allow the reader to practise and score themselves against others

• Gives readers the technical skills and practice opportunities so that they can impress prospective employers and get hired

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description

Do you need to prepare for an aptitude test for an interview or selection process? Do you want to practise and improve your scores?

Ultimate Aptitude Tests, now in its fourth edition and part of the best-selling Ultimate series, is the largest and most comprehensive book of its kind, boasting over 1000 varied practice aptitude questions with accompanying answers and explanations. In such a competitive job market, it's the perfect book to ensure you're entirely prepared to get those high scores and impress potential employers.

Businesses use aptitude tests when recruiting; sometimes even to fast-track potential leaders. Providing essential practice, Ultimate Aptitude Tests includes tests like those you are likely to encounter, including abstract visual tests, verbal and numerical reasoning tests, practical skills and understanding tests, spatial and systems potential tests and logic and intuition tests of different types. This new edition also now includes a brand new section on online testing environments as well as free access to a separate full online test to evaluate your abilities. Ultimate Aptitude Tests is brilliant preparation for candidates wishing to outshine their competition and secure their dream job.

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you from your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Jim Barrett is a chartered psychologist with years of experience in advising organizations on their selection procedures. He is a best-selling author and has written many testing books, including The Complete Personality Assessment, How to Pass Advanced Aptitude Tests, The Aptitude Test Workbook and he is co-author of Test Your Own Aptitude, all published by Kogan Page.

Tom Barrett runs a online software development consultancy. He specialises in web software architecture, web standards, usability and content management. Tom is a psychology graduate and has developed the software for the online psychometric tests available at insight-tests.com.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/07/2018

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749482084

Ebook: 9780749482091 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Table of Contents

Numerical

Testing

Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship

Ultimate Psychometric Tests

1000 Questions and Answers for Verbal, Numerical, and Personality Tests

This book

• Boasts over 1,000 practice questions, with supporting answers and explanations

• Features sample questions from every major type of test including verbal and numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, nonverbal and diagrammatic tests, spatial and recognition tests, situational awareness questions, quantities and conversions

• Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398602380

Ebook: 9781398602397

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x152

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Table of Contents

1

Psychometric tests – What are they?

How to pass psychometric tests and how to use this book

Verbal reasoning

Numerical reasoning

Personality questionnaires

Non-verbal reasoning, mechanical comprehension and data interpretation

Answers and explanations

Description

Don't let a psychometric test - or your nerves - stand between you and your dream job.

Many interviews and assessment centres include psychometric testing as part of the hiring process, and fears about tests are all too common and undermine confidence and performance on the day. But practice makes perfect - and with over 1,000 exercises from all the major types of test, Ultimate Psychometric Tests is the ideal tool to help you get to grips with:

-verbal and numerical reasoning -personality questionnaires -non-verbal and diagrammatic reasoning -spatial recognition and visual estimation -situational awareness -quantities and conversion tests

With each test supported by detailed answers and explanations, Ultimate Psychometric Tests will boost your confidence and your performance on the day, to help you land your next dream job.

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or resume and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and IQ tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Author Information

Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions, based in Newhaven, UK. He is the author of many testing books, including How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, The Graduate Psychometric Test Workbook, How to Pass Advanced Numeracy Tests, The Advanced Numeracy Test Workbook and How to Pass the Civil Service Qualifying Tests all published by Kogan Page.

How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests

Over 550 Practice Questions

This book

• Contains over 550 practice questions - the highest number of practice questions on the market - to help readers become as prepared as possible for numerical reasoning tests

• New to this edition: brand new chapter on Data Sufficiency test questions, an increasingly common element in numerical reasoning tests

• Is written in a clear, accessible style to improve readers' confidence and demystify numerical problems

• Covers the essential numerical topics readers need to understand when preparing for the tough tests set by many employers

Edition: 3

Date: 03/06/2017

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9780749480196

Ebook: 9780749480202 Pages: 224

Format (mm): 216x138

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Description

Containing the largest bank of test questions on the market, How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests provides advice, practice and exercises to help you prepare for the rigorous tests used by employers, helping you to build up speed, accuracy and confidence.

An overview of the basics is followed by a step-by-step guide to numerical tests, covering:

- Fractions and decimals

- Rates

- Percentages

- Ratios and proportions

- Data interpretation

Also containing practice on mathematical problems in written word format to aid your analytical skills, How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests gives you everything you need to boost your ability and face the challenge head on.

Author Information

Heidi Smith is the author of a number of best-selling books on psychometric testing. She has many years' experience working in global consultancies in education and training and now runs her own consultancy providing Russian-language business services.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Review the Basics

Fractions and Decimals

Rates

Percentages

Ratios and Proportions

Data Interpretation

Word Problems

Data Sufficiency Problems

How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests

Over 500 Practice Questions

This book

• Features a unique five-step winning approach to verbal reasoning tests to help readers beat the competition

• Is written in a clear and accessible style to improve readers' understanding and confidence with difficult verbal reasoning exercises

• Contains over 500 practice questions and expert advice covering all aspects of advanced verbal reasoning

Edition: 3

Date: 03/06/2017

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9780749480172

Ebook: 9780749480189 Pages: 256

Format (mm): 218x140

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Description

Containing the largest bank of test questions on the market, How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests provides advice, practice and exercises to help you prepare for the rigorous tests used by employers, helping you to build up speed, accuracy and confidence.

Testing expert Mike Bryon offers practice on a range of areas, including:

- English usage - Written assessments - Presentations - Group exercises - Assessment centres

Including four timed realistic tests with interpretations of your score, How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests covers word links, word swaps, sentence sequence, decision analysis, reading comprehension as well as critical reasoning, giving you everything you need to boost your ability and face the challenge head on.

Author Information

Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions. He is also the author of many books including Ultimate Psychometric Tests, How to Master the UKCAT, Management Level Psychometric Assessments, The Verbal Reasoning Test Workbook, Great Answers to Tough Career Dilemmas and How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, all published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

Verbal Reasoning Tests

The Winning Approach

110 Warm Up Questions

100 English Usage Questions

100 True, False or Cannot Tell Questions

Decision Analysis

Four Timed Realistic Tests with Interpretations of Your Score

Answers and Detailed Explanations

How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests

Essential Practice for the Qualified Teacher Status Skills Tests

This book

• Provides more than 1,000 questions to help you prepare for the QTS Skills Test

• Provides practice and review of basic maths and literacy as well as the more complex problems that feature in the test

• Contains practice in verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning and abstract reasoning

• Online Resources: MP3 audio files to test mental arithmetic and sample numeracy tests

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2016

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9780749478292

Ebook: 9780749478308

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 240x172

Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Description

All trainee teachers in England and Wales have to sit numeracy and literacy skills tests in order to achieve Qualified Teacher Status (QTS) which permits them to continue or start teaching. How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literary Skills Tests includes both literacy and numeracy revision and mock tests. The numeracy section starts at a low level and includes a diagnostic test, a maths review, mental and general arithmetic practice, and revision of statistics. It gives the reader a good grounding in the skills needed to pass the test, particularly if maths has always been a weak subject or hasn't been revised in years. The literacy section includes practice material on spelling, punctuation, grammar and comprehension. It highlights the areas where people commonly have problems, and provides easy to follow explanations and practice questions and answers.

Online supporting resources for this book include MP3 audio files to test mental arithmetics and sample numeracy tests.

Author Information

Chris Tyreman has 12 years' experience coaching candidates in Maths, English and IQ tests. He is a tutor for distance learners studying for GCSE Maths and the QTS skills tests and the author of learning materials used in colleges of further and higher education. He is also the author of How to Master Nursing Calculations, and co-author of How to Master the UKCAT also published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

How to Write Effective Business English

This book

• Features activities and international case studies to illustrate good writing practices and to apply practical knowledge

• New to this edition: new chapters on writing well across disciplines, how social media and the spoken word affects writing, and new business case studies which include companies such as L'Oréal

• Provides a confidence boost to both native and non-native English speakers in writing in and for professional environments, as well as writing globally

Edition: 4

Date: 03/05/2023

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398609952

Ebook: 9781398609969

Pages: 160

Format (mm): 216x138

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Description

Unlearn bad habits, sharpen your emails and improve your written communication throughout your business with How to Write Effective Business English. An easyto-follow guide on how to write with confidence, whether or not English is your first language.

With new chapters on writing well across all disciplines, writing globally, and the impact of social media on workplace communication, this new edition prepares you to clearly liaise with your colleagues and to your target market in order to get your point across.

Not only is this for individuals who want to better their craft and build their confidence, but it's also for multinational companies where communication is vital. Whether you're fluent in English or still learning, all speakers can iron out areas where there are common misconceptions, and bring those skills into their workplace.

Fiona Talbot informs you on how to format your prose to cater for a business world, by using case studies from L'Oréal, Loaf Furniture and Octopus Energy to demonstrate how English is used internationally in business and to teach you how to address different scenarios, whilst putting your best foot forward. Express yourself in business in a clear manner on all platforms, and get your message across with impact.

Author Information

Fiona Talbot is an internationally acclaimed business writing author. She works in the UK and internationally, training and advising on how to deliver premier written corporate communication for both native and non-native English speakers in today's digital, global economy. She has featured in major publications such as The Sunday Times, The Irish Times, The Press Association, Accounting Technician and Personnel Management. She is also the author of Improve Your Global Business English, Make an Impact with Your Written English, and Executive Writing Skills for Managers, all published by Kogan Page. Fiona Talbot is based in Chester, UK.

Table of Contents

Business writing for today

Why are you writing?

Writing across disciplines and to wider audiences

Quality matters

How social media and the spoken word affects writing

Standard or variant English

Writing globally or for international teams

Instant messaging and emails

Practical conventions and common confusions

Conclusion

New

How to Write Reports and Proposals

Create Attention-Grabbing Documents that Achieve Your Goals

This book

• Offers clear, concise and practical guidance on how to write succinctly and with impact across different media, as well as deciding what to include in a report

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: new and improved practical features to aid learning, including useful templates, top tips and interactive, reflective exercises

Edition: 6

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606104

Ebook: 9781398606357

Pages: 160

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Description

Getting a message across on paper and presenting a proposal in a clear and persuasive form are vital skills for anyone in business. This book provides practical advice on how to impress, convince and persuade.

This fully updated 6th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips that will help you to write succinctly and with impact across different media. How to Write Reports and Proposals will give you the tools to put over a good case with style.

The Creating Success series of books... Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Patrick Forsyth runs Touchstone Training & Consultancy and specializes in marketing, sales and communications skills. He is based in Essex, UK. He is the author of more than fifty successful business books, translated into 17 languages, including Successful Time Management, also published in the Kogan Page Creating Success series. He writes regularly for a number of business journals, and for Writing Magazine.

Table of Contents

Introduction – Pitfalls and opportunities

What makes good business writing?

Creating a good report

Preparing to write

The power of language

Making numbers clear

Making proposals persuasive

The contribution of layout and presentation

New

Improve Your Communication Skills

How to Build Trust, Be Heard and Communicate with Confidence

This book

• Offers a comprehensive guide to all types of communication at work, including useful tips, checklists and exercises for a direct impact on career development

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: new and improved practical features to aid learning, including useful templates, top tips, and interactive, reflective exercises

Edition: 6

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398605824

Ebook: 9781398605893

Pages: 168

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

What is communication?

What’s your communication style?

Seven ways to improve your conversations

The skills of enquiry

The skills of persuasion

Tough conversations

Making a presentation

Putting it in writing

Networked – The new conversation

Description

Better communication skills will have a direct impact on your career development. Improve Your Communication Skills is your practical guide to effective communication in business.

This fully updated 6th edition now features a handy self-assessment tool to help you profile your own preferred communication style, even more practical exercises, useful checklists and top tips, as well as content on influencing others and managing difficult conversations. This book provides vital guidance on improving your conversations, building rapport, giving effective presentations, writing excellent reports and networking successfully. With the help of Improve Your Communication Skills, you will be able to get your message acrossevery time.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Alan Barker is Managing Director of Kairos Training, a learning consultancy devoted to creativity and communication at work. He is based in Wiltshire, UK. He is the author of How to Manage Meetings, also published by Kogan Page.

Develop Your Presentation Skills

How to Inspire and Inform with Clarity and Confidence

New Edition

This book

• Helps you face your performance demons, improve your skills and enhance your career prospects

• Provides in-depth advice on how to cultivate successful interaction with an audience, find an authentic voice and judge what's expected of a presenter

• New to this edition: Updated to take into account new technologies, the basic rules of presenting on screen and how to interact with other people when working remotely

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential skills to help you develop your career

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398605930

Ebook: 9781398605947

Pages: 184

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Description

Provides step-by-step advice to prepare effectively and nail that presentation. This quick and easy guide provides a practical toolkit for developing a winning presentation and improving your confidence.

Complete with case studies and expert input to help you avoid disaster, Develop Your Presentation Skills includes content to help you to deliver a presentation 'stripped bare' and to use new media to engage with your audience.

This fully updated 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you find your voice and use it with style; to inform, to persuade, to impress. From unpicking the original brief and understanding just what the audience wants, to facing your performance demons and constructing compelling content, you will keep your audience rapt with attention.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Theo Theobald has spent most of his adult life in front of an audience, as Management Trainer, Stand-Up Comic and most recently Funeral Celebrant, writing and conducting countless services. A media career including a senior role with the BBC, was followed by 20 years as a freelancer. He is the author of On Message, also published by Kogan Page. He is based in Worcestershire, UK.

Table of Contents

Introduction

What’s your motivation?

Where do you begin?

What on earth are you going to say?

It’s time to write… now!

The power of storytelling

Using humour

Working from home

Rehearsal

Finding your voice

Openings

Endings

Handling your nerves

Handling your audience

Question and answer sessions

Getting ready – some practical aspects

As the moment approaches

Stripped bare

Advanced interactivity

Progress report

Confidence under pressure

What next?

Dealing with Difficult People

Fast, Effective Strategies for Handling Problem People

This book

• Features example scripts so you're never stuck for what to say, as well as quick fire escapes and negotiation tools, ensuring you keep your cool at home and at work

• Is written by the highly respected speaker and broadcaster Roy Lilley and has sold over 50,000 copies over the past editions

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential and value-adding work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: Information on cyber bullying and on-line behaviour, and add a new section on remote working

Description

Learn how to navigate the bullies, manipulators and complainers who drive you mad. With example dialogue and techniques, it will help you navigate tricky situations and keep your cool.

By understanding the motives and individual behaviours of difficult people, you can learn to manage aggression, reduce awkwardness and remain the better person. This 5th edition of the bestselling Dealing with Difficult People features practical exercises, useful templates and top tips you need to get the best out of the worst, including how to deal with difficult customers, dealing with difficult people in the digital sphere, advice on beating bullies at their own game and how to deal with a boss who drives you barmy.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Roy Lilley is an established writer, broadcaster and commentator on health and social issues, speaking at conferences and seminars throughout the UK and overseas. He regularly contributes to The Today Programme, Newsnight, the Midnight Hour, BBC News 24, and BBC Radio Five Live. He writes for The Guardian, The Sunday Times, The Telegraph and other national papers and management periodicals. He is based in Surrey, UK.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606159

Ebook: 9781398606234

Pages: 184

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

1 A short course in human relations

The seven classic difficult types

Dealing with difficult bosses

Dealing with difficult colleagues

Dealing with difficult staff

Massaging the egotists

Handling aggressive people

Deaing with laziness

Beating the bullies at their own game

Moaners, groaners and critics

Perfectionists can be a pain

Manipulating the manipulators

Morale, attitude and how was it for you

Fault-finders and nit-pickers

15 Gossip:a bush fire you can do without

16 The customer is always right – really?

17 Complaints: we love them

18 e-difficut@yourplace

Social networking

If things don’t change they’ll stay the same

21 A fast-track guide to conflict and how to handle it

And, finally, finally…

Successful Time Management

How to be Organized, Productive and Get Things Done

This book

• Provides effective ways to manage your schedule so as to maximize productivity at work and at home

• Is packed with exercises, action sheets, and appendices, including a brief assessment of various time management systems such as day, year, and meeting planners

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: updated to include more on home and mixed home/remote working and how to manage yourself when you're based away from the office

Edition: 6

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606197

Ebook: 9781398606319 Pages: 184

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

1 Time, a key resource – Opportunities and difficulties

2 First steps towards effective time management

Getting (and staying) organized

Combating the time wasters

Emails – Shortcut or time black hole?

First things first

Controlling the paperwork

Working with other people

Final words

Description

Successful Time Management is packed with proven tips, tools and techniques to help you review and assess your time management and adopt new work practices to improve it.

This book includes great time-saving ideas, practical solutions and checklists, plus advice on: controlling paperwork, organizing your emails, delegating and working with others, prioritizing to focus on key issues, getting and staying organized. This fully updated 6th edition features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you minimize time-wasting and interruptions, and focus on the priorities that will lead to success in your job and career. Successful Time Management will give you the tools to become more efficient and effective.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Patrick Forsyth runs Touchstone Training & Consultancy and specializes in marketing, sales and communications skills. He is based in Essex, UK. He is the author of more than fifty successful business books, translated into 17 languages, including How to Write Reports and Proposals, also published in the Kogan Page Creating Success series. He writes regularly for a number of business journals, and for Writing Magazine

How to Organize Yourself

Simple Ways to Take Control, Save Time and Work More Efficiently

This book

• Offers very practical tips that are easy to implement and will overhaul how you run your work and home life

• Includes information on dealing with email overload, organizing digital files and the latest notable software to give an immediate impact on how organized you are

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: updated material on working at home, post-pandemic. More advice on multi-location working, organizing workspace and dealing with distractions and disruptions and how to maximize digital collaboration

Description

Dramatically improve the way you work with great tips on how to determine goals, prioritize tasks, overcome distractions; build positive work habits and adjusting to working at home.

This fully updated 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you get organized, as well as content on how to deal with the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and adapt to the ever increasing scope for interruption and procrastination in our 24/7 lives. How to Organize Yourself will enable you to take control of your workload, reduce stress and fatigue, and free up time for the things that really matter.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

John Caunt is a freelance writer, drawing on his many years' experience as a senior manager, trainer and life coach. He is the author of Stay Confident, How to Organize Yourself, Boost Your Self-Esteem and 30 Minutes to Manage Information Overload, all published by Kogan Page. He is based on the Isle of Wight, UK.

Edition: 7

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606098

Ebook: 9781398606333

Pages: 184

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Know where you are going

2 Organize your time

3 Understand the way you work

Organize information

5 Organize the way you work with others

Organize your space

7 Organize filing systems

8 Use technology effectively

Organize yourself at home and away

Keep up the good work

How to Work Remotely

Work Effectively, No Matter Where You Are

This book

• Explains how employees can successfully adapt to home, remote, flexible and hybrid working

• Advises managers of homeworkers how to communicate with their teams, lead and manage performance and addresses questions around productivity, motivation and trust

• Identifies key skills you need to develop such as relationship building, understanding the needs of your organization and effectively using technology

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

Description

Non-office based work is here to stay, but everyone experiences it differently. Find out how to make working at home and remote work, work for you.

How to Work Remotely will help anyone adapt to home, remote and hybrid working. Suitable for homeworkers, or the managers and leaders of homeworkers, this highly practical book will address how to be successful and build a career while working remotely, or away from the office.

Packed with practical exercises and top tips, the book includes advice on wellbeing when working from home, how to get organized, how to start a new role when you're not in the office and suggestions on the best ways to be productive. HR specialist Gemma Dale also explains about managing the performance of remote and hybrid teams and effectively making home working accessible for all colleagues.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Gemma Dale is an experienced HR Director, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, Fellow of the HEA and a regular speaker and writer on a variety of HR topics including employee engagement, flexible working and wellbeing. She is the co-author of several ebooks on HR and wellbeing, and Flexible Working also published by Kogan Page.

She is also lecturer in the Business School at Liverpool John Moores University, as well as running her own business, The Work Consultancy where she focuses on focuses on policy development, flexible working and wellbeing. She is based in Liverpool, UK.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398606111

Ebook: 9781398606371

Pages: 184

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

1 An introduction to remote work

2 The practicalities of remote work: Setting yourself up for success

3 Your personal productivity and effectiveness

4 Communication and collaboration

5 Your well-being as a remote or hybrid worker

6 Your presence and personal brand

7 Managing your career as a remote worker

8 Leading and managing remotely

9 Final thoughts

10 Appendix 1: Resources for remote and hybrid workers

11 Appendix 2: Resources for remote and hybrid leaders and managers

12 References and further reading

How to Manage People

Fast, Effective Management Skills that Really Get Results

This book

• Provides a complete overview of people management, its most common issues and how to deal with them along with practical tools to get the best from teams

• Written by bestselling author Michael Armstrong, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into 24 languages

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• New to this edition: managing homeworkers, more on change management and updated advice on essential management skills

Description

Bestselling author Michael Armstrong provides valuable insight into the skills required to be an effective manager, helping you get the best from your staff through motivation, reward and leadership.

This fully updated 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips, alongside advice on managing virtual teams, enhancing employee engagement and managing conflict. Essential reading for anyone who wants to get the best from their teams, How to Manage People distils the essence of good management into one handy, easy-to-use book.

The Creating Success series of books...

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is a bestselling author and people management expert, based in London, UK. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty four languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this, he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He is also the author of the bestselling How to Be an Even Better Manager, now in its 10th edition and also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398605466

Ebook: 9781398605473 Pages: 232

Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Preface

Managing people

What managers do

Treating people right

Leading, motivating and engaging people

Leadership

Motivating people

Enhancing engagement

Organizing people

The process of organizing

Defining roles

Team building

Managing remote workers

Managing performance

Performance leadership

Performance leadership skills

to people management

Selection interviewing

people

people

change

conflict

Handling people problems and issues

to handling people problems

Dealing with disciplinary problems

Managing under-performers

Dealing with negative behaviour

Dealing with absenteeism and timekeeping issues

Handling challenging conversations

Giving bad news

Managing bias

Dealing with bullying and harassment

Appendix: Notes on exercises

References

Confident Coding

How to Write Code and Futureproof Your Career

This book

• Contains practical guidance on how to enhance your career through coding skills

• Teaches you how to use HTML, CSS, JavaScript and Python; debug and problemsolve; create your own websites and apps for Android and iOS

• Was the Bronze Runner Up at the Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition)

• New to this edition: new and improved step-by-step examples; a real-life visitor registration app you can create; Mac- and Windows-friendly

• Features online coding exercises and activities, for you to practice and hone your new skills

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Description

BRONZE RUNNER UP: Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition)

Coding is one of the most in-demand skills in the job market. Whether you're an entrepreneur, a recent graduate or a professional, you can supercharge your career simply by grasping the fundamentals, and Confident Coding is here to help.

This new and improved second edition of the award-winning book gives you a step-bystep learning guide to HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Python, building iPhone and Android apps and debugging. For entrepreneurs, being able to create your own website or app can grant you valuable freedom and revolutionize your business. For aspiring developers, this book will give you the building blocks to embark on your career path. For working professionals, coding skills can add a valuable edge to your CV. Whatever your professional profile, if you want to master the fundamentals of coding and kick start your career, Confident Coding is the book for you.

About the Confident series...

From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Rob Percival is a web developer, author and entrepreneur who has taught over 500,000 students how to code through his online courses on Udemy. His courses have been translated into over five different languages and have taught people all around the world to become proficient and confident web-developers.

Darren Woods is Managing Director of Synapture, a Cambridge-based Web/Software Development Agency. Alongside his development work, he teaches a Pre-Diploma Computer Science course and A-Level Computer Science.

Edition: 2

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789663082

Ebook: 9781789663099

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 215x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

Why coding

Why coding is important and what it can do for you

What coding is

Languages

HTML

CSS

JavaScript

Python

In practice

Website development

Building an android app

Building an iPhone/iPad app

Debugging

Futureproofing your career with coding

Using coding to enhance your career prospects

Coding and entrepreneurship – creating your own business or product

Pursuing coding further – becoming a developer

Conclusion

Confident Digital Content

How to Create and Manage Amazing Social Media and Web Content for a Futureproof Career

This book

• Explains the basics of video creation, graphic design, photography, digital journalism and writing skills specialized to the digital world

• Can enhance all career paths, with advice on boosting creativity, career prospects, entrepreneurship and leadership in the digital world and exercises to help you put your knowledge into practice

• New to this edition: Covers the latest trends including fake news and social listening analysis; updated and improved case studies; and a new chapter on digital content campaign planning

• Features interviews with experts from Mumsnet, CNN International, HuffPost UK, Bunster's Hot Sauce and Crocstar Media

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Description

Are you considering a career in social media? Are you an entrepreneur or freelancer looking to boost your online content marketing? Maybe you're looking for your next career pivot, or you're simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge? Wherever you are in your career, Confident Digital Content can help.

Covering the essentials of online content, this book takes you through everything you need to know - from how to write effectively for online platforms, through to video, audio, graphic design and photography. Featuring inspiring case studies from individuals at companies including CNN International, Mumsnet, Bunster's Hot Sauce and HuffPost UK, this practical beginner's guide includes guidance on content marketing strategy, metrics and community management.

This updated second edition features advice on the latest trends, including fake news, the importance of stories and social listening analysis. Though trends, fads and hashtags change, the principles of great online content remain the same - let Confident Digital Content give you the grounding you need to ace your social channels and supercharge your career.

About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Adam Waters has been working in digital for fifteen years. He currently runs BFBS Creative. He's a juror for the Royal Television Society Digital Journalism awards and a regular digital advisor to charities and government. Passionate about creating opportunities through digital skills, Adam is on the InsideOut Leaderboard and runs mentoring programmes for young people.

Edition: 2

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789663365

Ebook: 9781789663372 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 215x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Why digital content skills are essential for your career

How to write for digital

Making great video

Graphic design, photography and audio

Digital community building

Evaluation

Social media

People

Campaign planning

Conclusion

Confident Web Design

How to Design and Create Websites and Futureproof Your Career

This book

• Covers the essential skills and concepts you need, including coding languages, tools, creating, enhancing and publishing the website

• Provides a step-by-step guide which enables you to build your own basic website by the end of the book, in easy-to-understand language

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789663457

Ebook: 9781789663464

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 215x138

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Description

Do you need a website to support your freelance business or entrepreneurial venture? Or are you considering a career in web design? Maybe you're looking for your next career pivot, or you're simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge?

Wherever you are in your career, Confident Web Design can help. The ultimate beginner's guide to designing, building and publishing basic websites, this book features exclusive online exercises to help you practice your new skills in context. Covering the basics of HTML, CSS and JavaScript, as well as giving you a thorough grounding in the real-life application of these principles, this book provides helpful examples, explanations of technical terms, and clear, easy-to-understand language - meaning your first website is only a few chapters away.

Taking you on a practical journey to publish a basic website from scratch, the book's structure is designed to break down each skill into manageable chunks. Wherever you are in your career, let Confident Web Design give you that cutting edge with vital programming and design skills.

About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Kenny Wood, the founder of IndigoMelody, has over 12 years of experience in web design. He has created websites and apps for organizations including SkillPill, Globelynx, the University of Warwick, Crenshaw Associates, Lennon Wright, Gadfly Media and the British Forces Broadcasting Service. A regular blogger, he created IndigoMelody's 'How we Made It' web design blog.

Table of Contents

Introduction

How the web works and the tools and languages of web design

HTML

HTML part 1

HTML part 2

CSS

CSS part 1

CSS part 2

CSS part 3

JavaScript

JavaScript part 1

JavaScript part 2

JavaScript part 3

JavaScript part 4

Putting everything into practice

Creating the website

Getting your website online

Conclusion

Confident Cyber Security

How to Get Started in Cyber Security and Futureproof Your Career

This book

• Covers the basic principles of cyber security, a vital and in-demand skill area

• Features real-world case studies to help you apply your knowledge, from companies and people such such as Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, plus examples from a range of industries including entertainment, social media influencers and property

• Includes practical exercises to help you hone your skills, as well as dedicated advice on how cyber security can enhance your career, wherever you are in your work life

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Description

The world is more digitally connected than ever before, and with this connectivity, comes vulnerability. It is therefore vital that all professionals understand cyber risk and how to minimize it. This means that cyber security skills are in huge demand, and there are vast career opportunities to be taken.

Confident Cyber Security is here to help. This jargon-busting guide will give you a clear overview of the world of cyber security. Exploring everything from the human side to the technical and physical implications, this book takes you through the fundamentals: how to keep secrets safe, how to stop people being manipulated and how to protect people, businesses and countries from those who wish to do harm.

Featuring real-world case studies from Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, as well as social media influencers and the entertainment and other industries, this book is packed with clear explanations, sound advice and practical exercises to help you understand and apply the principles of cyber security. Let Confident Cyber Security give you that cutting-edge career boost you seek.

About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Dr Jessica Barker is an award-winning global leader in cyber security. She is co-Founder and co-CEO of Cygenta, where she influences cyber security awareness, behaviour and culture in organizations around the world. She has been named one of the top 20 most influential women in cyber security in the UK, is the Chair of ClubCISO. and is a popular keynote speaker, including RSA San Francisco in 2020.

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789663402

Ebook: 9781789663419

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 217x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

Why cyber security?

What cyber security is

Why it is important

The technical side of cyber security

Technical vulnerabilities

The human side of cyber security

Why people are so important in cyber security

Social engineering

Attacks that utilise social engineering

The physical side of cyber security

Why physical space matters in cyber security

Attacks on the individual

Attacks on organisations

Nation state cyber security – Geopolitics

5 The future of cyber security and what it means for your career

Cyber security in different industries

Cyber security at the board level

The variety of cyber security careers

Pursuing a cyber security career

Confident Data Skills

How to Work with Data and Futureproof Your Career

This book

• Covers the most important techniques of working with data, including: visualization, modelling, preparation, presentation and communication

• Contains several inspiring case studies that show you how data skills are applied in real companies from around the world, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue, AlphaGo and Mike's Hard Lemonade Co.

• Gives insightful guidance on how your new skills can boost your employability, enhance your career and make a difference to your chosen industry

• New to this edition: New and up-to-date case studies; content on neural networks and deep learning; content on the latest developments and opportunities in AI and deep learning

• Demystifies the seemingly difficult world of data and makes complicated techniques easy to understand through clear language and step-by-step instructions

• Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Description

Data has dramatically changed how our world works. Understanding and using data is now one of the most transferable and desirable skills.

Whether you're an entrepreneur wanting to boost your business, a jobseeker looking for that employable edge, or simply hoping to make the most of your current career, Confident Data Skills is here to help.

This updated second edition takes you through the basics of data: from data mining and preparing and analysing your data, to visualizing and communicating your insights. It now contains exciting new content on neural networks and deep learning. Featuring in-depth international case studies from companies including Amazon, LinkedIn and Mike's Hard Lemonade Co, as well as easy-to understand language and inspiring advice and guidance, Confident Data Skills will help you use your new-found data skills to give your career that cutting-edge boost.

About the Confident series...

From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner's resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Author Information

Kirill Eremenko is a data science entrepreneur, instructor and consultant. As Founder and CEO of SuperDataScience, he leverages data to drive business strategy, revamp customer experience, and revolutionize business processes. Kirill runs more than 50 online courses, taken by over 1,000,000 students worldwide.

Edition: 2

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781789664386

Ebook: 9781789664393

Pages: 320

Format (mm): 215x140

Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 “What is it?” key principles

1 Defining data

2 How data fulfils our needs

3 AI and our Future

2 “When and where can I get it?” data gathering and analysis

4 Identify the problem

5 Data preparation

6 Data analysis (part I)

7 Data analysis (part II)

3 “How can I present it?” communicating data

8 Data visualization

9 Data presentation

10 Your career in data science

Be Data Literate

The Data Literacy Skills Everyone Needs To Succeed

This book

• Shows the reader how to improve their data literacy: the ability to analyze, find insight in, and communicate with data confidently

• Explains how to use data to become a better decision maker by developing curiosity, creativity and critical thinking

• Examines the different skills required for the four levels of analytics (descriptive, diagnostic, predictive, prescriptive) and for different aspects of the data literacy world, from data visualisation to data science and data architecture

• Includes tips, tricks and exercises to work through and examples from industries successfully implementing data literacy skills from a leading expert and trainer

Description

In the fast moving world of the fourth industrial revolution not everyone needs to be a data scientist but everyone should be data literate, with the ability to read, analyze and communicate with data.

It is not enough for a business to have the best data if those using it don't understand the right questions to ask or how to use the information generated to make decisions. Be Data Literate is the essential guide to developing the curiosity, creativity and critical thinking necessary to make anyone data literate, without retraining as a data scientist or statistician.

With learnings to show development and real-world examples from industries implementing data literacy skills, this book explains how to confidently read and speak the 'language of data' in the modern business environment and everyday life. Be Data Literate is a practical guide to understanding the four levels of analytics, how to analyze data and the key steps to making smarter, data-informed decisions. Written by a founding pioneer and worldwide leading expert on data literacy, this book empowers professionals with the skills they need to succeed in the digital world.

Author Information

Jordan Morrow is Vice President and Head of Data and Analytics at BrainStorm and a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy, having built one of the world's first data literacy programs. He served as the Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project, has spoken at numerous conferences around the world and is an active voice in the data and analytics community. He has also helped companies and organizations around the world, including the United Nations, build and understand data literacy. He has won numerous awards for his work and is based in Utah, USA.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789668018

Ebook: 9781789668025

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Workplace Skills

Table of Contents

1 The world of data

2 The four levels of analytics

3 Defining data literacy

4 The data literacy umbrella

5 Reading and speaking the language of data

6 Combining data literacy and the four levels of analytics

7 The steps of data literacy learning

8 The three Cs of data literacy

9 Data informed decision-making

10 Data literacy and data and analytical strategy

11 Begin your data and analytics journey

CIPD Foundation

CIPD Intermediate

Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice

A Guide to the Theory and Practice of People Management

This book

• Develops understanding of all the essential areas of the HR function, such as employment law, learning and development and performance management

• Ideal for professionals and those studying undergraduate and postgraduate degrees, both CIPD and non-CIPD courses

• Supports learning with a range of pedagogical features including key learning points and case studies from international organizations such as IBM and HSBC

• New to this edition: chapters on the future of work and managing remote employees; coverage of the contribution of the HR function to corporate social responsibility and employee wellbeing

• Online resources: comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students, lecture slides, all figures and tables, questionnaire, checklist toolkits, a literature review, glossary and bibliography

Edition: 16

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398606630

Ebook: 9781398606647

Pages: 800

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

New

Human Resource Management at Work

This book

• Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress

• Aligns fully with the new CIPD Advanced Level 7 qualification and is written by one of the experts involved in its development

• Puts human resource management (HRM) in a business context and includes case studies and practical examples to help prepare students for a professional HR role

• New to this edition: Brand new chapter on organisation design and development including coverage of workplace culture, job design and change management as well as additional coverage of analytics, diversity and inclusion

• Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and a lecturer's guide

Edition: 7

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £48.99

Paperback: 9781789664867

Ebook: 9781789664874 Pages: 568 Format (mm): 246x192

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

1 HRM, strategy and the global context

HRM, strategy, and diversity and inclusion

Forces shaping HRM at work

HRM, alignment and integration

International and comparative HRM

Responsibilities for delivering HRM

The changing roles of HR professionals 155

Line managers, leadership and HRM

HRM practices and processes

Resourcing and talent management 225

Performance management and development

Learning and knowledge development

Managing employment relations

Employee participation, engagement and voice

Reward management

HRM and performance from a business perspective

HRM and performance

Research skills and project management

Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters

This book

• Offers a solid foundation in both the theory and practice of HRM through a wide variety of pedagogical features

• New to this edition: a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR and updated online resources

• Online resources: an instructor's manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for tutors plus multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for students

Edition: 3

Date: 31/01/2017

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781843984429

Ebook: 9781843984597

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 246x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Description

Packed with practical information and offering a solid foundation in HRM theory, Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters covers all the topics MBA students need to know in a concise, accessible way. One of the only texts available for HR non-specialist students doing a Masters or MBA, it looks at the changing world of the line manager and HR professional with regard to key topics such as HRM and strategy, employee resourcing, human resource development, employee relations and performance management. Annotated further reading for each chapter and questions for each case study help cement knowledge and understanding.

Now aimed at a wider readership of management Masters students, this fully updated 3rd edition of Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters features a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR, and updated online supporting resources. With diagrams and models throughout, it covers topics such as CSR, organizational culture and change, performance management and talent management, the criticisms of HRM levelled by the Critical Management School and different HRM challenges as they relate to each chapter. Online supporting resources for tutors include an instructor's manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies; additional resources for students include multiple-choice questions and additional case studies.

Author Information

Iain Henderson is a senior teaching fellow at Edinburgh Business School, Heriot-Watt University, UK.

Table of Contents

Human Resource Management

Employee Resourcing

Learning and Development

Employee Relations

Human Resource Management and the Design of Work

Managing Performance

Managing Rewards

The Global Context of HRMInternational and Comparative HRM

Contemporary Issues and Future Trends

Human Resource Management in a Business Context

This book

• Is the essential text for all postgraduate and undergraduate students studying the broader business context within which HR operates

• New to this edition: updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation

• Online resources: additional case studies and activities, lecturer's guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links

Edition: 3

Date: 01/06/2016

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843984047

Ebook: 9781843984511

Pages: 608

Format (mm): 245x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Description

Highly accessible and student-friendly, Human Resource Management in a Business Context is the core text for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module, Human Resource Management in Context, and is also essential reading for other undergraduate and postgraduate HR and business degrees. In clear and easy to navigate chapters, which consider government policy, regulation, the world economy and demographic and social trends, this book provides the firm theoretical background that you can apply in practice.

Human Resource Management in a Business Context is packed with international case studies, examples and activities that will actively engage you with the different areas of knowledge and allow you to work through the material step-by-step. This edition is fully updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation. The online resources available have also been expanded on, and now provide additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer's guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links.

Author Information

John Kew is an educational consultant and has written flexible learning material for the CIPD's Professional Development Scheme.

John Stredwick is Senior Lecturer at University of Bedfordshire and a well renowned author. He is Visiting Professor at Webster University (US) based in Regents Park.

Table of Contents

Human Resource Management in Context

The Managerial Context of Human Resources

The Competitive Environment

Government Policy

Regulation

The World Economy

Demographic and Social Trends

Technology

Ethics, Social Responsibility and Sustainability

Strategic Management

HR Delivery, Strategy and Performance

Human Resource Management in Context

Insights, Strategy and Solutions

This book

• Helps students understand, analyse and critically evaluate key issues including the managerial and business environment, how HR strategies are shaped, globalization and demographic, social and technological trends

• New to this edition: enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map

• Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and answers to/guidance for the chapter activities for lecturers

Edition: 4

Date: 13/02/2015

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843983583

Ebook: 9781843984023 Pages: 488

Format (mm): 245x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Description

HR functions within both internal and external contexts. The understanding of both contexts is crucial for comprehending how and why they drive HR strategies and practices in organizations, as well as the rules and structures within which they work. Built around five major themes which impact upon the HR function, and mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Human Resource Management in Context enables students to understand the complex and changing organizational context in which HR operates today by providing a comprehensive breakdown of the concepts, theories and issues from globalization and government policy to demographic, social and technological trends.

This fully updated 4th edition of Human Resource Management in Context includes a range of pedagogical features, balancing theory with practical analysis to form an engaging insight into the strategic side of HR. It includes enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor's manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and guidance for the chapter activities.

Author Information

David Farnham, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, is an emeritus professor at the University of Portsmouth and visiting professor at the University of Greenwich, UK. He has been a visiting professor at the University of East London, a visiting senior research fellow at the University of South Wales and a visiting senior research fellow at the Catholic University Leuven. He is Chief Examiner for the CIPD and a member of the advisory board of the Personnel Policies Study Group of the European Group of Public Administration, Brussels.

Table of Contents

1 Introducing Human Resource Management, Organisation and Management

1 Human Resource Management and its External Contexts

2 Contemporary Organisations and their Internal Contexts

3 The Managerial and Business Contexts of Organisations

2 Strategy Formulation and Implementation

Developing Corporate Strategies

Developing Human Resource Strategies

3 The External Contexts of Human Resource Management

Markets and the Competitive Context

Globalisation and International Factors

Demographic and Social Trends

The Technological Context

Government Policy and Legal Regulation

Human Resource Management

People and Organisations

This book

• Maps to the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management

• Covers the employment relationship, resourcing and workforce planning, employee engagement and reward and discusses organisational design and development and how to improve organisational performance

• Includes pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, reflective activities, case studies and further reading to help students track their progress, reinforce their learning and see how the theory applies in practice

• New to this edition: Brand new chapters on people management in an international context, wellbeing at work and equity, diversity and inclusion

• Online resources: Powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links

Description

Human Resource Management: People and Organisations provides thorough coverage of key HR topics and their context to enable students to excel in their academic studies and begin a successful career as a people professional.

Now fully updated for a third edition, Human Resource Management: People and Organisations covers everything from essential UK employment law and managing the employment relationship through to resourcing and workforce planning, employee engagement and reward management. There is also expert discussion on organisation design and development as well as advice on how to improve organisational performance. This edition now includes brand new chapters on people management in an international context, wellbeing at work and equity, diversity and inclusion

This book is fully supported by a range of pedagogical features including learning outcomes to summarise the content that will be covered in each chapter and track progress, reflective activities to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to aid wider engagement with areas of particular interest. Case studies throughout also help students understand how the theory applies in practice. It is ideal reading for anyone studying the CIPD Associate Diploma in People Management as well as those in the early stages of their career in HR.. Online resources include PowerPoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links.

Author Information

Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Based in Devon, UK, he previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School and has worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS.

Professor Carol Woodhams is Professor of Human Resource Management and Head of the Department of People and Organisations at the University of Surrey, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels and is based in Surrey, UK.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398606937

Ebook: 9781398606944

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 246x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

1 Managing the employment relationship

Talent management and workforce planning

Reward management

Employment law

Human resource development

Improving organisational performance

People management in an international context

Equality, diversity and inclusion

Wellbeing at work

Glossary

Human

Development

New

Studying Human Resource Management

A Guide to the Study, Context and Practice of HR

This book

• Maps to the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management

• Covers the study of HRM, how to manage and co-ordinate an HR function, organisational performance and culture in practice as well as professional behaviours and values of a people professional

• Provides guidance on how to manage HR data and information and use it to make evidence-based decisions

• New to this edition: Two new chapters covering diversity and inclusion (D&I) and wellbeing at work

• Online resources: Powerpoint slides, Lecturer manual and annotated web links

Description

Studying Human Resource Management is an ideal textbook for anyone studying the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management.

Fully updated throughout, this book provides thorough coverage of the study of HRM, managing and co-ordinating the HR function, organisational performance and culture in practice as well as business issues in the context of HR. Written by experts in the field with both academic and practitioner experience, Studying Human Resource Management includes invaluable discussion on professional behaviours for people professionals and guidance on how to manage HR data and information and most importantly, how to use it to make evidence-based decisions. There are also now two brand new chapters on diversity and inclusion (D&I) and wellbeing at work.

Each chapter includes key learning outcomes to summarise the content that will be covered and to help students track their progress, reflective activities to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to support wider engagement with areas of particular interest. This book also includes case studies to help students understand how the theory applies in practice. Online resources include Powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links.

Author Information

Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Based in Devon, UK, he previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School and has worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS.

Professor Carol Woodhams is Professor of Human Resource Management and Head of Department of People and Organisations at the University of Surrey, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels and is based in Surrey, UK.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398606890

Ebook: 9781398606906

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 245x188

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

The people management contribution

The people management business environment

Strategy and structure

Contemporary people management issues

Shaping people practice to benefit your organisation

Research and evidence-based practice in HRM

The behaviour of the people professional

Glossary

Appendices

Introduction to Human Resource Management

This book

• Provides a comprehensive overview using straightforward language and key concept definitions to introduce those without industry experience to all the key aspects of HR and the role of the HR practitioner

• Goes beyond theory and encourages further thinking and reflective learning using 'pause for thought' boxes, activities, review questions, practical examples and wider reading to consolidate students' learning and show how to apply this in the workplace

• Includes case studies from a range of organizations such as PwC, Rolls-Royce, Deliveroo and the BBC, as well as small and medium enterprises to show how HRM is applied in different organizations and international contexts

• New to this edition: international case studies, updates to legislation, coverage of zero-hours contracts, the gig economy, the continued rise of social media in recruitment and additional information on apprenticeships such as the UK apprenticeship levy

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides, additional case studies and reflective questions for student self-study

4

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9780749483685

Ebook: 9780749483692 Pages: 568 Format (mm): 245x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

Organisations

Aspects of organisational culture

Human Resource Management (HRM)

The role of the HR practitioner

Human resource planning

Recruitment

Induction and retention

Learning and development – Key Concepts

Learning and development – The practical aspects

Employee motivation and performance

Employee reward

The employment relationship

Health, safety, well-being and work-life balance

Diversity and equality

Understanding employment law

Ending the employment relationship

Change management

Handling and managing information

Human Resource Practice

This book

• Provides a thorough grounding in all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, performance management, reward management and L&D

• Includes a dedicated chapter on personal effectiveness to provide students with the skills they need to progress in a career in HR such as influence, resilience, empathy and handling difficult conversations

• Covers wider business topics including change management, organisational context and communication technology to ensure that students have a broad understanding of the business environment

• Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress as well as explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply.

• New to this edition: Fully aligned to the new CIPD Level 3 qualification including additional information on job design, people analytics and employee mental health

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

Description

Human Resource Practice is a practical and accessible guide for students and anyone looking to gain a thorough understanding of HR and is the definitive text for the CIPD's Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice.

This book covers all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, performance management, reward and learning and development (L&D). It also provides students with the broader coverage of the business environment that they need to succeed including topics such as change management, organisational context and the legal background to employment.

This fully updated 8th edition of Human Resource Practice now includes new coverage of the changing nature and demographic of the workforce, the continuing impact of technology and new developments that may be used. There is also coverage of the importance of data and people analytics to HR as well as an enhanced final chapter which includes additional material on working in a team, influencing skills and the importance of empathy, resilience and emotional intelligence. Reflective activities, case studies and explore further boxes throughout encourage students to think critically about the content and understand how it applies in practice in the workplace. Online resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides and annotated web links.

Author Information

Fiona Whiting is a freelance HR and organisational development consultant with over 20 years' experience as an HR practitioner. She has held a number of executive board-level positions and has worked predominantly with the NHS, local authorities and academic institutions as well as in a variety of private sector organisations. Fiona Whiting is also the co-founder and director of The People Effect List.

Edition: 8

Date: 03/10/2020

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781789665765

Ebook: 9781789665789 Pages: 416

Format (mm): 247x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

1 Introduction and overview

The organisational context

The legal background to employment

Job analysis and design

Recruitment and selection

Performance management

Reward

?Employee relations

Learning and development

Information and communication technology in HR

Change in organisations

Personal effectiveness

People Practice

This book

• Written to support the new CIPD Level 3 Foundation qualification by the team who developed the syllabus

• Provides guidance on workforce analytics to enable students to use data and evidence to make informed business decisions and add organizational value

• Outlines the core behaviours and skills for people professionals including, developing professional courage, working ethically and managing change

• Online resources: Lecturer manual, Powerpoint slides and student multiple choice questions

• Includes key definition boxes, exercises, case studies and further reading to ensure a clear understanding of both the theory and practice, broad engagement with the subject and critical thinking skills

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781398602427

Ebook: 9781398602434 Pages: 256

Format (mm): 245x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Introduction to HRM

Table of Contents

Introduction

Business, culture and change

Evidence-based practice and analytics

Core behaviours for people professionals

The employee lifecycle and recruitment process

Selection and appointment

The employment relationship

Performance management

Reward and reward systems

Supporting others to develop skills and knowledge

Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR

Developing Effective People Skills for Better Leadership and Management

This book

• Fully aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) 'Leading, Managing and Developing People' and 'Developing Skills for Business Leadership' modules

• Written by the UK's bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages

• Online resources: lecture slides, an instructor's manual, a student's manual and a literature review

• Explores the key concepts of leadership, management and people development as it relates to the HR function

Edition: 4

Date: 03/11/2016

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749478155

Ebook: 9780749478162 Pages: 472

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook Subject: HR Leadership

Description

To make an effective contribution, HR specialists have to be good at management, leadership and developing both themselves and others. They also need to be aware of the management and business considerations that affect their work. Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR provides guidance on the processes of management and leadership with particular reference to what HR managers and aspiring managers need to know and do to make a difference.

Written by renowned human resources expert and bestselling author Michael Armstrong, Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR covers in one volume the 'Leading, Managing and Developing People' and 'Developing Skills for Business Leadership' Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) modules. It includes numerous practical features such as case studies, practitioner interviews, exercises and clear learning objectives to aid learning. This is the essential book for HR students and professionals looking to broaden their skills and understanding relating to management and leadership. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor's manual, a student's manual and a literature review.

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is the UK's bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

Table of Contents

Leading, managing and developing people fundamentals

Leadership

Management

Developing people

Human resource management and learning and development

The essence of human resource management

The practice of HRM

The practice of learning and development

The contribution of HRM and L&D in different types of organizations

The professional and ethical approach to HRM and L&D

People management processes

Commitment

Employee engagement

Change management

Flexible working

Managing diversity and inclusion

Leadership, management and learning and development skills

Leadership skills

Management skills

People management skills

Learning and development skills

Managing interpersonal relationships at work

Managing oneself

Problem solving and decision making

Analytical, critical and consultancy skills

Information handling skills

Business and financial skills

Postgraduate study skills

Developing Skills for Business Leadership

Building Personal Effectiveness and Business Acumen

This book

• Supports the core knowledge and behaviour requirements of 'Personal effectiveness, ethics and business acumen' in CIPD Level 7 qualifications

• Provides 'skills in practice' examples to help students without prior business experience to put the skills in context and understand how they apply in the workplace

• New to this edition: New content on leading ethically, managing virtually, working inclusively, developing the organisation and managing stress

• Online resources: Lecturer's manual, powerpoint slides, additional case studies, activities and templates

Description

Split into the core areas of managing yourself and others, transferable management skills and postgraduate study skills, this is an ideal textbook For CIPD Level 7 students and those on non-CIPD business masters degrees.

Covering the theory and practice of the key topics needed for successful professional development and practice, Developing Skills for Business Leadership includes content on interpersonal and communication skills, managing information and projects, change management, decision making, managing financial resources and data analysis. This new edition has been fully updated throughout and now includes new material on leading ethically, managing virtually, working inclusively, developing the organization and managing stress. This book provides everything that students will need to manage teams in the workplace, make sound and justifiable business decisions and effectively lead, engage and influence others.

Each chapter is supported by 'skills in practice' examples to help students with no prior business experience put the skills into context and see how they apply in the workplace as well as reflective questions to consolidate learning and case studies, activities and 'explore further' boxes to encourage learner engagement. Online supporting resources include a lecturer's manual, powerpoint slides, additional case studies, sample assignments and templates.

Author Information

Gillian Watson is a principal lecturer in the Faculty of Business and Law at the University of Sunderland, UK, responsible for international development and partnerships. Based in Sunderland, UK sh e has undertaken additional senior roles in the faculty such as HRM team leader and chair of the Applied Management, FdA and HND board.

Stefanie Reissner is a lecturer at Newcastle University Business School, UK. Based in Newcastle, UK she is currently degree programme director for a dual Masters in conjunction with Rijksuniversiteit Groningen in the Netherlands. She is a fellow of the Higher Education Academy and an associate academic member of the CIPD.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398604964

Ebook: 9781398604971 Pages: 576

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: HR Leadership

Table of Contents

Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management

Improve Business Performance Through Strategic People Management

This book

• Shows how to align HR strategies, policies and practices with wider organizational goals and objectives to improve business performance

• Features key learning summaries, source reviews and real-life examples from organizations including UNICEF and General Motors (GM)

• New to this edition: chapters on evidencebased strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies and HR analytics, additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking

• Online resources: lecture slides and handbooks for lecturers and students which include self-assessment questions, case study exercises and a glossary and literature review

Description

Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management is a complete guide to integrating HR strategies with wider organizational goals and objectives approaches to achieve sustained competitive advantage.

Supported by key learning summaries, source reviews and practical real-life examples from organizations including UNICEF and General Motors (GM), this book provides coverage of HRM strategies in key areas of the function such as employee engagement, talent management and learning and development, as well as strategic HRM approaches in an international context.

This fully revised seventh edition of Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management contains new chapters on evidence-based strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies and HR analytics, as well as additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking. It remains an indispensable resource for both professionals and those studying HR qualifications, including undergraduate and masters degrees and the CIPD's advanced level qualifications. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students which include self-assessment questions, case study exercises, and a glossary and literature review.

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is the UK's bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward and was previously a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

Edition: 7

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781789661729

Ebook: 9781789661736

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Strategic HRM

Table of Contents

Introduction

Strategic human resource management (SHRM)

Human resource management

Strategic management

The concept of strategic human resource management

The evolution of SHRM

The reality of SHRM

People strategy in general

The concept of people management

The nature and practice of people strategy

Developing people strategy

Implementing people strategy

The strategic role of people professionals

Specific people strategies

Organization development strategy

Human capital management strategy

Knowledge management strategy

Corporate social responsibility strategy

Organizational performance strategy

Individual performance strategy

Digital strategy for people management

Employee engagement strategy

Resourcing strategy

Talent management strategy

Diversity and inclusion strategy

Learning and development strategy

Reward strategy

Employment relationships strategy

Employee wellbeing strategy

International people management strategy

Strategic People Management and Development

Theory and Practice

This book

• Explores how to ensure that people practice is evidence-based, outcome-driven and improves the performance of both employees and the organisation

• Provides comprehensive coverage of all elements of an HR professional's role from recruitment and reward to job design and conflict management

• Includes reflective practice activities to encourage critical thinking and explore further boxes to help students read more widely

• New to this edition: additional content on organization development, employee experience and HR ethics

• Online resources: powerpoint slides, instructor's manual and sample essay questions

Description

Strategic People Management and Development maps to the CIPD Level 7 module 'People Management and Development strategies for performance'.

It focuses on the need for evidence-based and outcome-driven practice in the people profession and explains how HR and Learning and Development (L&D) professionals can create value and drive performance in an organisation. It provides a thorough grounding in the theory and practice of how to lead and manage employees and effectively develop a workforce as well as extensive coverage of how to ensure professionalism and ethical behaviour in the people function. This book also includes discussion of organisation development and how high-performance work practices drive positive organisational and employee outcomes.

This book also includes practical advice on key HR activities including recruitment, job design,and reward. Fully updated throughout, this book includes case studies to help students see how the theory applies in practice, reflective practice activities to help them think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress as well as 'explore further' boxes to encourage wider reading. Online resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides, and sample essay questions.

Author Information

Gary Rees is Head of the Organization Studies and Human Resource Management at Portsmouth Business School. He is based in Portsmouth, UK.

Ray French was previously Principal Lecturer in Organizational Behaviour at Portsmouth Business School. He is based in Portsmouth, UK.

Edition: 6

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9781398607606

Ebook: 9781398607613 Pages: 376

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Strategic HRM

Table of Contents

1 Introduction [Gary Rees and Ray French]

2 The Scope and Nature of Human Resource Management and Human Resource Development [Gary Rees]

3 HRM Contributions in Different Settings [Charlotte Rayner and Liza Howe-Walsh]

4 Professionalism and Ethics in Managing People [Matthew Anderson and Charlotte Rayner]

5 Leadership and Leader Development [Wenjin Dai & Alex Tymon]

6 Managing Change [Gary Rees and David Hall]

7 Flexibility and the Psychological Contract [Ray French]

8 Organisational and Job Design [Ray French]

9 Recruitment and Selection [Sally Rumbles and Ray French]

10 Developing Employees [Alex Tymon and Margaret Mackay]

11 Managing the Employment Relationship [Sally Rumbles and Peter Scott]

12 Performance Management, Motivation and Reward [Gary Rees and Alex Tymon]

13 Summary Themes and Future Trends [Ray French and Gary Rees]

New

Strategic Human Resource Management

HR Professional’s Toolkit

This book

• Provides guidance on how to assess business needs including interpreting financial results and understanding markets and channels to ensure organizational objectives are supported by HR practices

• Explores career frameworks and personal and professional development to help enable you to make an impact in your organization and beyond

• Shows how to meet the challenges of a changing business environment when building a talent pipeline and implement a workforce planning process

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749484040

Ebook: 9780749484057 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Strategic HRM

Description

FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2020 - HR & Management Category

HR's contribution to the business goes beyond its traditional role of managing hiring, discipline and payroll. Strategic Human Resource Management is a practical guide for all those in HR roles to support wider organizational goals and objectives whilst developing and engaging individual employees through focussing on the concept of 'People Experience'.

Drawing upon tools, exercises and case studies, this complete resource covers the core areas that are essential to achieving competitive advantage through understanding yourself, your business, your industry and your profession. Strategic Human Resource Management shows how to hone the personal skills needed to excel in HR and leadership positions, such as authenticity, network building and managing stakeholder relationships, alongside the importance of focussing on self-care and mental wellbeing.

This book provides guidance on building competitor awareness, markets and channels, trends and forecasting and interpreting financial results in order to build commercial acumen. Career frameworks, professional accreditation and the importance of continued personal and professional development are also explored, in addition to technological trends and the future of work in a changing business environment. This comprehensive toolkit is an indispensable resource for HR professionals who want to implement HR practices that benefit the business and its workforce, and make an impact within their organization and profession.

Author Information

Karen Beaven is an executive coach and the founder of the HR Entrepreneur's Network. She has operated at HR Director level for a number of years at companies including River Island and AllSaints, and has been ranked as one of the most influential HR practitioners by HR Magazine in 2016 and 2017. She was also recognised as HR Director of the year in 2015 and has been listed as a Global HR superstar by HRO Today.

Table of Contents

Know your self

Continuous personal development

Drive and passion

Comfort zone

Interpersonal skills

Your personal network

Inspirational leadership

Know your business

results

focus

and channels

your industry

environment

and regulations

and forecasting

the talent?

planning

your profession

accreditation

bodies

framework

development

The development of the industry

The future of work

Sustainable Human Resource Management

Using HRM to achieve long-term social, environmental and business goals

New Title

This book

• Explains what sustainable Human Resource Management is, what the benefits are and what the risks are of unsustainable HRM

• Shows how to implement and measure the effectiveness of sustainable HRM practices as well as specific guidance on sustainable HRM in different parts of the world, green HRM, responsible business, ethics and sustainable HRM as a business strategy

• Includes international case studies and examples throughout to show how sustainable HRM can improve candidate attraction and retention, employee engagement and reward as well as how improving productivity, employer branding and company culture to drive both efficiency and business performance

• Pedagogical features in each chapter include learning objectives, key concept definitions, skill check boxes, workshop discussion articles, chapter summaries, study questions and key readings

• Online resources: Sample course outline, PowerPoint slides and student engagement questions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398606494

Ebook: 9781398606708

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Sustainable HRM

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to Sustainable HRM

2 Sustainable HRM: key concepts, theories and approaches

3 Harm caused by unsustainable HRM

4 Regenerating the human resource base

5 Green HRM

6 Sustainable HRM as a business strategy

7 Enacting sustainable HRM and introducing organizational change

8 Measuring and reporting sustainable HRM

9 Sustainable HRM in different areas of the world

Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis

How to Support your Staff in Difficult Times

New Title

This book

• Provides guidance that can be used for any kind of crisis whether it is a health, economic or social event

• Shows how to get communication right in a crisis and manage employee stress, anxiety, burnout and fear

• Explores practical steps to improve motivation, productivity and engagement in the workforce during times of uncertainty

• Contains case studies from over 40 organizations including Microsoft, Shell, Marks and Spencer, Serco and Twitter

• Includes advice for short term interventions during a crisis as well as middle and longer term strategies for workplace health and wellbeing post-crisis

Description

During the Covid-19 pandemic, almost half of Americans reported that the crisis had a negative effect on their mental health. In the UK, the financial crisis of 2008 resulted in a rise in stress and anxiety and a decline in physical health. When dealing with a crisis, a business will consider the resilience of its structures and processes or the impact on forecasts and budgets but what about their people?

Without a supported, engaged and motivated workforce, the business won't be able to achieve its crisis recovery plans. Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing During a Crisis is a practical guide for all HR professionals and those responsible for talent management. It covers how to deal with employee stress and burnout as well as how to drive engagement, motivation and morale during unsettled times. There is expert guidance on how to deal with role and responsibility changes and explains how to improve productivity through effective employee communication.

Supported by case studies from companies including Microsoft, Marks and Spencer, GlaxoSmithKline, Rolls-Royce and Twitter, this book equips readers to deal with a crisis as it is happening and implement longer term post-crisis strategies. Written by an expert author team including Professor Sir Cary Cooper, Chair of the National Board of Health and Wellbeing at Work, this is necessary reading for all professionals needing to deal with the health and wellbeing of their workforce in any crisis that may arise.

Author Information

Professor Sir Cary Cooper is the President of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the ALLIANCE Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK. Based in Macclesfield, UK, he is also the Chair of the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work.

Ian Hesketh is the Health and Wellbeing Lead for the UK College of Policing and Support for the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work, University of Manchester. Based in Blackpool, UK he is an Honorary Researcher at Lancaster University Management School and a Visiting Fellow at the Open University

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398601222

Ebook: 9781398601239

Pages: 200

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resource Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Before the outbreak

2 Lockdown hits the UK

3 Policing the Covid-19 pandemic

4 Fujitsu - Information technology and the Covid-19 pandemic

5 Consultancy - The elusive origin of strength in a crisis

6 Universities - Blurring edges – leading teams and institutions in Covid-19

7 NHS Employers - The National Health Service and the Covid-19 pandemic

8 Microsoft - Managing wellbeing in a crisis – a Microsoft view

9 Construction - Maintaining the health and wellbeing of Mace colleagues throughout Covid-19

10 The CIPD’S pandemic response –supporting our organization and the people practitioners and communities we serve

11 Reflections on the coronavirus pandemic at Rolls-Royce – one year in

12 John Lewis Partnership - Managing wellbeing in a crisis

13 Real estate and the Covid-19 pandemic

14 Legal sector and the Covid-19 pandemic

15 Professional services: Mind the manager wellbeing gap

16 Health - Impact of Covid on the older worker – an early view

17 Concluding remarks

Flexible Working

How to Implement Flexibility in the Workplace to Improve Employee and Business Performance

This book

• Provides guidance on how to design and implement an effective flexible working policy

• Covers different forms of flexible working including job sharing, compressed or altered hours and remote working

• Shows how a proactive flexible working strategy creates more inclusive organizations and allows businesses to become more environmentally responsible

• Explains how flexible working practices improve talent acquisition, development and retention, reduce workplace stress and increase employee engagement

• Includes case studies from organizations including Zurich Insurance

Description

SHORTLISTED: Business Book Awards 2021 - HR & Management Category

DISTINGUISHED FAVOURITE: Independent Press Awards 2021 - Business General Category

Flexible working is now a key concern for many employees. It spans genders, ages and family circumstances, with 37% of millennials declining a job offer if working flexibly isn't an option and 78% of employees over 50 wanting more flexible hours.

Flexible Working is a practical guide for HR practitioners showing how to develop an effective flexible working strategy to meet the needs of employees and the needs of the business. This book explains how to develop effective flexibility policies and processes as well as how to communicate and train line managers on these practices. It also includes advice on how to overcome barriers to flexible working, dispels common myths and offers guidance on the different forms of flexible working available to organizations.

Flexible Working shows that working practices outside the standard 9-5, five-daysa-week in the office can benefit a company. It drives employee engagement and performance, reduces costs and workplace stress and improves talent acquisition from a more diverse talent pool. It also explains how a proactive flexible working strategy can have sustainability benefits and reduce a company's carbon footprint. Including case studies from organizations such as Zurich Insurance, and supported by rigorous analysis of flexible working data, this is essential reading for all HR professionals.

Author Information

Gemma Dale is a Senior HR professional, conference speaker, writer and coach with over 20 years' experience. She is a lecturer at Liverpool John Moores University Business School, UK, and co-founder of The Work Consultancy where she helps business develop their people policies. She is a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD (Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development) and author of the award-winning HR blog, People Stuff. In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789665895

Ebook: 9781789665901

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resource Management

Table of Contents

Introduction: Why flexible working and why now

1 The case for flexibility

1 Flexible working

2 The benefits and challenges of flexible working

3 Flexible working and the future of work

4 Flexible working and inclusion

5 Flexible working and wellbeing

6 Exploring flexible working myths

7 The barriers to flexible working, and how to overcome them

2 Introducing flexible working: The practical guide

8 From compliance to culture: Six elements of a truly flexible workplace

9 Developing a strategy for flexible working

Effective policy and process

Supporting implementation

Conclusions

Flexible working toolkit

14 Epilogue: Flexible working post Covid-19

Appendix 1: Sample tools for managers

Appendix 2: Sample tools for employees

Human Capital Management Standards

A Complete Guide

This book

• Provides practical guidance directly from those who created the Human Capital Management Standards

• Shows how the Human Capital Management standards can be applied to organizations of any size

• Guides organizations through the full standards accreditation process which is essential for winning government contracts

• Includes a foreword written by Dr Scott Steedman, VP (Policy) ISO and Director of Standards, BSI

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2019

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749484347

Ebook: 9780749484354

Pages: 344

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resource Management

Description

Human Capital Management Standards is a comprehensive guide to the BSI and ISO frameworks for people management. Providing internationally agreed definitions and best practice guidance, it offers a foundation for sustainable people management and development practices in organizations. Covering everything from organizational governance, workforce planning, diversity and inclusion to learning and development, this book explores the key areas of people management throughout the employment life cycle, from initial hire to the time people move on from the organization. There is also coverage of additional business standards such as those related to occupational health and safety as well as the implications of implementing standards in a globalized and interconnected organizational context.

Human Capital Management Standards will allow people professionals and managers in organizations of all sizes and types to develop and implement effective people policies and processes based on robust research to create a supportive organizational environment for a more productive workforce. This book also includes essential coverage of the standards assessment process and tips and advice on how to achieve successful accreditation. With case studies from organizations that have made HR interventions based on these standards and a glossary to explain the language of standards, this is an indispensable guide for HR professionals, managers and standards specialists in all organizations.

Author Information

Dr Wilson Wong is Head of Insight and Futures at the Chartered Institute for Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Chair of the Human Capital Standards Committee at the British Standards Institution (BSI). Prior to this, he worked in technology policy and financial/investment research.

Dr Valerie Anderson is Reader in Human Resource Development at the University of Portsmouth. She has gained extensive HRM and HRD management experience in a range of different public and private sector organizations.

Heather Bond is Standards Adviser at CIPD. Her professional expertise in people management and standards have been integral to the development of many standards in this book. Prior to this, she was responsible for CIPD qualifications development and regulatory compliance.

Table of Contents

1 Governance, human capital and culturethe role of standards and standardization [Edward Houghton]

2 It’s all a matter of standards [Heather Bond]

3 Workforce planning [Julie Sloan]

4 Recruitment [Sandy J Miles]

5 Learning and development [Valerie Anderson and Alaa Garad]

6 Diversity and inclusion [Anne McBride and Helge Hoel]

7 Occupational health and safety management [Martin Cottam]

8 Moving on from the organization [Valerie Anderson]

9 Cross-national, cross-sectoral and crossfunctional issues [Alaa Garad]

10 Assessment and accreditation [Angela Mulvie]

11 The future of standards affecting human capital management and development [Wilson Wong]

International Human Resource Management

A Case Study Approach A Cross-Cultural and Comparative Approach

This book

• Explores international HRM from crosscultural, comparative and international approaches

• Includes 'theory and practice' boxes, global case studies and examples in every chapter to help students see how the content applies in a business context

• New to this edition: brand new coverage of the gig economy, workplace diversity and the impact of technology on international human resource management

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides and additional case studies

Description

Mapped to the CIPD Level 7 module of the same name, International Human Resource Management is a critical textbook for all HR students. Structured around the three core areas of cross-cultural HRM, comparative HRM and international HRM itself, this book provides students with a thorough grounding in the key approaches to international HRM.

Packed with global examples and case studies to support learning., this book explores all aspects of international human resource management from global talent strategy, recruitment and knowledge management to the difference in reward systems across cultures and managing expatriate assignments making it essential reading for students on both CIPD and non-CIPD accredited courses.

Supported by 'theory and practice' boxes in every chapter and with reflective activities and learning questions throughout, International Human Resource Management ensures that students without real-world business experience fully understand the main concepts and how they apply in the world of work. This edition now includes new coverage of the impact of the gig economy on international HRM, how technology is impacting HRM across countries and new material on workforce diversity. Online resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides and additional case studies.

Author Information

Chris Brewster is a professor of International HRM at Henley Business School. He is based in Kent, UK.

Elizabeth Houldsworth is an associate professor of HRM at Henley Business School. She is based in Oxfordshire, UK.

Paul Sparrow is the director of the Centre for Performance-Led HR and professor of International HRM at Lancaster University Management School. He is based in Manchester, UK.

Guy Vernon is an associate professor of Human Resource Management at Southampton University. He is based in Southampton, UK.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781398603530

Ebook: 9781398603547 Pages: 488

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: International HRM

Table of Contents

International HRM - An introduction

Cross-cultural human resource management

Differing national contexts

The impact of national culture

Culture and organisation life

Comparative human resource management

Employee relations and collective communication

The organisation of work

Flexibility and work life balance

Recruitment and selection

Performance management

Rewards

Training and development

Global HRM departments

International human resource management

International HRM - Theory and practice

Managing expatriate assignments

Managing diversity in international forms of working

Integrating global HRM practices

Globalising HRM

International Human Resource Management

A Case Study Approach A Cross-Cultural and Comparative Approach

This book

• Fully examines the functional elements of International HRM including recruitment and selection, rewards and benefits, performance management, training and development, employment relations and job design

• Includes global case studies from a range of organizations such as Telefonica, McDonald's, Toyota, Unilever and Volkswagen

• Online resources: additional case studies, lecture slides for each chapter and discussion questions and self-test multiple-choice questions for students

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2017

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749480981

Ebook: 9780749480998

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Textbook Subject: International HRM

Description

In the face of globalization, multinational companies have become the norm, rather than the exception. HR professionals now need to manage across borders, cultures and time zones, meaning that a complete understanding of the theory and practice of International Human Resource Management (HRM) is essential. International Human Resource Management is a concise introduction for all students studying International HRM at the Masters level. It covers everything from the cultural and institutional contexts, international employment law and the role of International Framework Agreements to recruitment and selection, training and development, performance management, reward and benefits, job design and other functional areas of International HRM.

With numerous industry examples and global case studies from companies such as Telefonica, Unilever and Volkswagen, International Human Resource Management goes beyond the theory to fully explore how International HRM works in practice. It is an indispensable textbook to prepare students for successful careers in human resources. Online supporting resources include additional case studies, lecture slides for every chapter, self-test exercises for students, discussion questions and further reading.

Author Information

Daniel Wintersberger is a teaching fellow at Birmingham Business School in the UK, specializing in International Human Resource Management. He currently teaches on the MBA (HRM), MSc in Human Resource Management and the BSc in Business Management. Previously, Daniel lectured at Cardiff University Business School and Swansea School of Management. He has conducted research for the International Transport Workers' Federation (ITF) and worked with the British Airline Pilots' Association (BALPA). His professional and research experience spans Central and Eastern Europe, China, India and Brazil.

Table of Contents

1 The Context of International HRM

1 Introduction and Background to International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger]

2 The Cultural Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger]

3 Leadership Across Cultural Contexts [Avis Tam]

4 Cross-Cultural Communication [James Baba Abugre]

5 The Institutional Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger]

6 Global Labour Governance and Core Labour Standards [Christina Niforou]

2 Functional Areas of International HRM

7 International Recruitment, Selection and Talent Management [Peter Foss]

8 International Staffing in Multinational Companies [James Baba Abugre]

9 International Reward [Daniel Wintersberger]

10 International Training and Workforce Skills [Daniel Wintersberger]

11 International Employee Relations [Geraint Harvey]

12 Work Organization and Job Design across National Contexts [Daniel Wintersberger and Jorge Muniz Jr]

13 Conclusions: Change or Continuance in National Systems of HRM?

International Human Resource Management

A Case Study Approach A Cross-Cultural and Comparative Approach

This book

• Includes contributions from experts on HR in specific countries and regions

• Ideal for students studying International Human Resource Management for the first time or those studying in their second language

• Online resources: Lecturer guide, powerpoint slides, case studies and a bonus chapter on new directions in International HRM as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students

Edition: 1

Date: 26/04/2013

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843983002

Ebook: 9781843983538 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 245x189

Product Category: Textbook Subject: International HRM

Description

International Human Resource Management is an essential book for all students and HR professionals looking to really understand international HRM. Covering the context of International HRM, HRM and National Culture, HRM in different regions and international HRM policies, this book provides thorough discussion and comprehensive consideration of all elements of international HRM,

Full of contributions from experts in specific regions including North America, the Middle East and North Africa, India, Russia and China, this book will provide readers with a thorough understanding of HRM around the world. With crucial coverage of international HRM issues including cross-cultural leadership, business ethics, global talent supply and management as well as performance management of international staff, International Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those working or looking to work in HR around the world, particularly those looking to work in multinational companies. Fully supported by online resources including powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide, additional case studies and a bonus chapter on issues and new directions in International Human Resource Management as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students.

Author Information

Paul Iles is Professor of Leadership and HRM at Glasgow School for Business and Society, Glasgow Caledonian University, UK

Dr. Crystal Ling Zhang is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

Table of Contents

1 Introduction and Context

1 International HRM, National Differences and the Transfer of HRM (Paul Iles)

2 National Difference, Culture and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles)

3 Globalisation and IHRM Policies at the Enterprise Level (Paul Iles)

2 HRM and National Culture

4 Cross-Cultural Learning - Theories and Principles (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles)

5 Cross-Cultural and Global Leadership, Leadership Development and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles)

6 Ethics, Culture and Corporate Social Responsibility (Paul Iles)

7 IHRM, Culture and Knowledge Flows in International Alliances, Joint Ventures, Mergers and Acquisitions (Paul Iles)

3 HRM in Different Regions

8 HRM in North America and Western Europe - The emergence of a ‘Western’ HRM model? (Paul Iles)

9 HRM in Russia and Central and Eastern Europe (Paul Iles)

10 HRM in the Middle East and North Africa (Paul Iles & Niki Kyriakidou)

11 HRM in Sub-Saharan Africa (Paul Iles)

12 HRM in Latin America (Paul Iles)

13 HRM in India (Crystal Zhang, Shakiya Nisa & Paul Iles)

14 HRM in China (Paul Iles & Xiaoxian Zhu)

4 International HRM Policies in IES

15 Employee Resourcing - Staffing, Recruitment and Selection in International Contexts (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang)

16 Cross-Cultural Training and International HRD (Crystal Zhang & Paul Iles)

17 Global Talent Management (Paul Iles, Xiaoxian Zhu)

18 Managing the Performance of International Staff (Paul Iles)

19 Global Reward Management, Organisational Benefits and Employer Branding (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang)

20 Employment Relations and Employee Voice in a Global Context (Paul Iles)

Predictive HR Analytics

Mastering the HR Metric

This book

• Offers a detailed yet accessible guide to understanding and working with people analytics and advanced statistical techniques

• Contains numerous worked examples of analyses of various forms of HR data - such as employee engagement, performance and turnover - which are supported by SPSS screenshots and online datasets

• Shows how to use the results of such analyses to enable practitioners to develop effective evidence-based HR strategies

• New to this edition: new material on machine learning, biased algorithms, data protection and GDPR considerations, a new example using Kaplan Meier Survival analyses for tenure/turnover modelling, a new appendix showing main R coding for the focal analyses approaches in the book and updated screenshots and examples with SPSS version 25

• Online resources: SPSS and Excel data sets and R syntax with worked case study examples

Description

HR metrics and organizational people-related data are an invaluable source of information from which to identify trends and patterns in order to make effective business decisions. But HR practitioners often lack the statistical and analytical knowhow to fully harness the potential of this data.

Predictive HR Analytics provides a clear, accessible framework for understanding and working with people analytics and advanced statistical techniques. Using the statistical package SPSS (with R syntax included), it takes readers step by step through worked examples, showing them how to carry out and interpret analyses of HR data in areas such as employee engagement, performance and turnover. Readers are shown how to use the results to enable them to develop effective evidence-based HR strategies.

This second edition has been updated to include the latest material on machine learning, biased algorithms, data protection and GDPR considerations, a new example using survival analyses, and up-to-the-minute screenshots and examples with SPSS version 25. It is supported by a new appendix showing main R coding, and online resources consisting of SPSS and Excel data sets and R syntax with worked case study examples.

Author Information

Martin R Edwards is Reader in HRM and Organizational Psychology at King's Business School, King's College London. He has taught statistics to undergraduate, postgraduate and PhD students for over 15 years and also teaches HR analytics to MSc students. As a consultant, he has delivered HR analytics workshops to FTSE-100 companies.

Kirsten Edwards is HR Lead for Advanced Analytics and Data Science at Rio Tinto and has over 20 years' broad international experience in analytics, HR and management consulting. She is a visiting lecturer at Kent Business School and at King's Business School.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/03/2019

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9780749484446

Ebook: 9780749484453 Pages: 536

Format (mm): 241x171

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: HR Analytics

Table of Contents

1 Understanding HR analytics

2 HR information systems and data

3 Analysis strategies

4 Case study 1 – Diversity analytics

5 Case study 2 – Employee attitude surveys – engagement and workforce perceptions

6 Case study 3 – Predicting employee turnover

7 Case study 4 – Predicting employee performance

8 Case study 5 – Recruitment and selection analytics

9 Case study 6 – Monitoring the impact of interventions

10 Business applications – Scenario modelling and business cases

11 More advanced HR analytic techniques

12 Reflection on HR analytics – Usage, ethics and limitations

13 Appendix R

Introduction to People Analytics

A Practical Guide to Data-driven HR

This book

• Enables HR practitioners with little or no experience of analytics to feel confident in their ability to find and handle workforce data and use it to make better business decisions

• Demonstrates how to make an impact by starting small and building people analytics into business processes

• Shows how people analytics can be used to increase performance, improve efficiency and reduce costs

• Includes case studies from AstraZeneca, Brompton Bikes, Swarovski, NHS and Experian

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789661804

Ebook: 9781789661828

Pages: 352

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Description

An understanding of people analytics is a crucial skill for all HR professionals. No longer limited to employees in data teams or those with analyst in their job titles, people analytics is now an integral part of every HR job. Introduction to People Analytics allows all HR professionals to get to grips with analytics, feel confident in their ability to handle employee and organizational data and use analytics to move from opinions to insights.

From where to find data in an organization, how to collect it and analyse it through to how to use these findings to add business value, Introduction to People Analytics is essential reading for all HR professionals. With case studies and thought leadership insights from companies who have leveraged people analytics to improve culture and employee engagement, increase performance and reduce costs including NHS, Brompton Bikes, British Heart Foundation, King, Experian and AstraZeneca, FIS and Swarovski, this book shows how and where HR analytics can make a tangible difference to organizations. There is also expert guidance and practical advice on how to embed analytics into HR processes and adopt a data-driven approach to all workplace activities.

Author Information

Nadeem Khan is a futurist, speaker, coach, industry writer and consultant in organizational strategy, digital transformation and the future of work. He is also the managing director of Optimizhr Ltd., a data and people analytics solution provider offering services that amplify and align organizational strategy with capability towards business optimization.

Dave Millner has 30 years of consulting experience working with global organizations to offer a range of organizational development solutions underpinned by people analytics. He is also frequently referenced as one of the most influential HR practitioners to follow on Twitter (HRCurator). In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Table of Contents

Preface

1 Context for change

1 Redefining HR: the context for change

The age of data and people analytics

2 Making the shift to a data-based approach

3 The commercial HR mindset

Developing new ways of working

Working with data

3 People analytics delivering value

A people analytics framework

Business insights from people analytics Delivering people analytics projects

4 Looking to the future

6 How to be more data-driven and people analytics-focused

7 The road ahead: turning intent into tomorrow’s people function through people analytics

8 Index

Excellence in People Analytics

How to Use Workforce Data to Create Business Value

This book

• Shows how to use insights from data to improve business decision making and prove the ROI of people analytics

• Provides advice on how to formulate smart business questions and use people data to answer them

• Explains how to implement processes and establish robust infrastructure for ethical data collection

• Includes case studies from global organizations who are leveraging the value of people analytics including IMicrosoft, HSBC, Syngenta, Capital One, Novartis, Bosch, Uber, Santander Brasil and American Eagle

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749498290

Ebook: 9780749498306 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 232x152

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Description

Effectively and ethically leveraging people data to deliver real business value is what sets the best HR leaders and teams apart. Excellence in People Analytics provides business and human resources leaders with everything they need to know about creating value from people analytics.

Written by two leading experts in the field, this practical guide outlines how to create sustainable business value with people analytics and develop a data-driven culture in HR. Most importantly, it allows HR professionals and business executives to translate their data into tangible actions to improve business performance. while navigating the rapidly evolving world of work.

Full of practical tools and advice assembled around the Insight222 Nine Dimensions in People Analytics® model, this book demonstrates how to use people data to increase profits, improve staff retention and workplace productivity as well as develop individual employee experience. Featuring case studies from leading companies including Microsoft, HSBC, Syngenta, Capital One, Novartis, Bosch, Uber, Santander Brasil and American Eagle Outfitters®, Excellence in People Analytics is essential reading for all HR professionals needing to unlock the potential in their people data and gain competitive advantage

Author Information

Jonathan Ferrar is a globally recognised consultant, speaker and business advisor in HR strategy and analytics. He is chief executive officer of global people analytics firm Insight222, and board advisor to the Chartered Institute of Personnel & Development.

David Green is an influencer, advisor and prolific speaker in the field of people analytics, human resources technology and the future of work. He is managing partner at Insight222 and host of the Digital HR Leaders podcast. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Table of Contents

The case for people analytics

Introduction

The business value of people analytics

Nine Dimensions for Excellence in People Analytics

Governance

Methodology

Stakeholder Management

Skills

Technology

Data

Workforce Experiences

Business Outcomes

Culture

The next steps for people analytics

Transforming people analytics

Epilogue - the future of people analytics

Concluding remarks

Glossary

Index

Learning Analytics

Using Talent Data to Improve Business Outcomes

This book

• Shows how to measure and evaluate learning and development initiatives through analytics in order to maximise their impact and identify gaps for improvement

• Enables L&D professionals to make the business case for their activities and deliver an evidence-based service to their organizations

• Features case studies from organizations such as JetBlue Airways, Hilton Worldwide University and Seagate Technology who have applied these approaches in practice

• New to this edition: updates to the chapters on learning technology tools and moving beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics and fresh content on informal learning, instructor management, and a portfolio evaluation approach.

Description

Effective evaluation and measurement of learning and development initiatives is critical to maximise the impact of training, identify gaps for improvement and ensure that efforts are aligned to the business' needs. Learning Analytics outlines how analytical approaches can respond to these challenges, the types and benefits of technological solutions and how to ask the right questions of organizational data in order to build a learning organization that boosts performance and competitive advantage.

Drawing upon case studies from organizations who have applied such approaches such as The Gap, Hilton Worldwide University and Seagate Technology, Learning Analytics will enable those involved in learning and development to make the business case for their activities and deliver an evidence-based service to their organizations. Alongside updated chapters on learning technology tools and moving beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics, this second edition also features new content on measuring informal learning, increasing data literacy, and framing L&D's contributions through a portfolio evaluation approach.

Author Information

John R. Mattox II is the Head of Talent Research at Explorance. He helps clients develop measurement strategies to improve business performance by measuring the impact of training. Prior to this, Mattox was a Principal Consultant with Gartner and led training evaluation teams at KPMG, PwC and Arthur Andersen.

Peggy Parskey is a part-time managing consultant at Explorance. Based in Connecticut, she also runs her own consulting firm, Parskey Consulting, which provides organizational improvement initiatives to Fortune 500 firms.

Cristina Hall is Vice President of Strategy at Explorance and is based in Chicago, Illinois. Before this, she worked at Gartner for over 10 years, where she was most recently director of product strategy.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/04/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789663006

Ebook: 9781789663013

Pages: 400

Format (mm): 232x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Table of Contents

1 What is learning analytics?

2 Technology’s role in learning measurement

3 Linking learning to business impact

4 Scrap learning: the new leading indicator of success

5 Aligning L&D to business goals through needs assessment

6 Benchmarks

7 Optimizing investments in learning

8 Beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics

Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI

A Practical Guide to Delivering Data Science and Machine Learning Products

This book

• Explains how to build the organizational capability to deliver Data and AI products and drive immediate business results as new digital technologies significantly disrupt business

• Provides best practices, tools and templates for managing the organizational and technological change process to become an AI-driven enterprise

• Includes a variety of international case studies across several industries such as insurance, fashion, consumer goods, finance, technology and automotive

• Outlines how to develop a product strategy, build teams and design the platform and architecture

• Provides key principles for sharing knowledge, educating staff on data and AI, and effectively engaging top executives

Description

Leading tech companies such as Netflix, Amazon and Uber use data science and machine learning at scale in their core business processes, whereas most traditional companies struggle to expand their machine learning projects beyond a small pilot scope. This book enables organizations to truly embrace the benefits of digital transformation by anchoring data and AI products at the core of their business.

It provides executives with the essential tools and concepts to establish a data and AI portfolio strategy as well as the organizational setup and agile processes that are required to deliver machine learning products at scale. Key consideration is given to advancing the data architecture and governance, balancing stakeholder needs and breaking organizational silos through new ways of working.

Each chapter includes templates, common pitfalls and global case studies covering industries such as insurance, fashion, consumer goods, finance, manufacturing and automotive. Covering a holistic perspective on strategy, technology, product and company culture, Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI guides the organizational transformation required to get ahead in the age of AI.

Author Information

Dr Alexander Borek is an independent advisor for data, analytics and machine learning strategy. He was previously the Global Head of Data, Analytics & AI at Volkswagen Financial Services, scaling data products across international markets. In his previous roles, he led the data transformation at Volkswagen Group and worked as management consultant at Gartner and IBM.

Dr Nadine Prill is Head of Product at Taktile, a Berlin based tech company that provides a platform for machine learning model deployment, governance and explainability. Previously, she worked as product manager at PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC). She holds a PhD from the University of Oxford.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789665390

Ebook: 9781789665406

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Table of Contents

1

Introduction to delivering data and AI products

2 Developing the data and AI product strategy and goals

3 Setting up the data and AI product delivery organization

4 Identifying and defining data and AI products

5 Delivering high quality data and AI products

6 Designing the data and AI platform and architecture

7 Driving transformative change with data and AI products

8 The future of data and AI products in your organization

Data-Driven HR

How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Drive Performance

This book

• Shows how to take a data-driven approach to recruitment, engagement, safety, wellbeing, training and performance management

• Helps HR professionals analyze the vast amount of company data to gain tangible organizational insights and drive performance

• Includes guidance on how to ensure data collection is transparent and that employees understand what information is being collected and why

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2018

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749482466

Ebook: 9780749482473 Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Table of Contents

1 What is data-driven HR?

2 The evolution of intelligent (and superintelligent) HR

3

Data-driven strategy: making a business case for more intelligent HR

4 Capitalizing on the data explosion: identifying key sources of HR-relevant data

5

Description

FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2019 - HR and Management Category

Traditionally seen as a purely people function unconcerned with numbers, HR is now uniquely placed to use company data to drive performance, both of the people in the organization and the organization as a whole. Data-Driven HR is a practical guide which enables HR professionals to leverage the value of the vast amount of data available at their fingertips. Covering how to identify the most useful sources of data, collect information in a transparent way that is in line with data protection requirements and turn this data into tangible insights, this book marks a turning point for the HR profession.

Covering all the key elements of HR including recruitment, employee engagement, performance management, wellbeing and training, Data-Driven HR examines the ways data can contribute to organizational success by, among other things, optimizing processes, driving performance and improving HR decision making. Packed with case studies and real-life examples, this is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to make a measurable difference in their organizations.

Author Information

Bernard Marr is a Big Data guru and bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has and advised many of the world's best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business and data strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of data and analytics for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse. Bernard Marr is also the author of Data Strategy (2017) published by Kogan Page.

Data-driven HR tools: turning data into insights with HR analytics

6 Potential pitfalls: looking at data privacy, transparency and security

7 Data-driven recruitment

8

Data-driven employee engagement

9 Data-driven employee safety and wellness

10 Data-driven learning and development

11 Data-driven performance management

12 The future of data-driven HR

Research Methods in Human Resource Management

Investigating a Business Issue

This book

• Provides detailed guidance through each stage of an HRM business project as well as collecting and interpreting both qualitative and quantitative data

• New to this edition: international case studies, increased discussion of methodological issues, best practice sample literature reviews and real-life examples

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

Edition: 4

Date: 03/12/2019

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9780749483876

Ebook: 9780749483883 Pages: 496

Format (mm): 250x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Business Research

Description

Research Methods in Human Resource Management is a key resource for anyone undertaking a research report or dissertation. It covers the planning and execution of HRM research projects, from investigating and researching HR issues to designing and implementing research and then evaluating and reviewing the results.

Filled with international examples to provide a global perspective, this fully updated 4th edition of Research Methods in Human Resource Management balances theoretical frameworks and practical guidance. Fully updated throughout, this edition now includes increased discussion of methodological issues, more real-life examples and international case studies and best practice sample literature reviews and write-ups. 'Review and Reflect' sections at the end of each chapter help to consolidate learning and explain how it can aid professional development. This book is fully mapped to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module on Investigating a Business Issue from an HR Perspective, and multiple-choice questions and a glossary of terms help students understand the key concepts and use the terminology confidently. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor's manual and lecture slides and there are annotated web links, further reading and new reflective questions for students.

Author Information

Valerie Anderson, Chartered MCIPD, is Reader in HRD at University of Portsmouth. She gained extensive HRM and HRD management and consultancy experience in a range of different public and private sector organizations before moving to a career in higher education.

Rita Fontinha is a Lecturer of International Business and Strategy specialising in Strategic and International Human Resource Management at Henley Business School, University of Reading.

Fiona Robson, Academic FCIPD is Director of Excellence in Learning & Teaching and Reader in Human Resource Management at Newcastle University Business School.

Table of Contents

1

Investigating and researching HR issues

2 First stages towards an HR project

3 Finding and reviewing HR literature and information sources

4 Ethics, professionalism, standards and HR research

5 Planning the research process

6 Finding and using documents and organisational evidence

7 Collecting and recording qualitative data

8 Analysing qualitative data

9 Collecting and recording quantitative data

10 Analysing quantitative data

11 Writing up your project and making recommendations

12 Making an impact – the relationship between research and practice

Development

Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment

This book

• Provides coverage of all the latest developments impacting work and employment including flexibility, sustainability, agility and ethics

• Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply

• Covers both the theory and practice of the topic so that students can hit the ground running in their future careers in the HR industry

• Online resources: Lecturer slides, for each chapter

Description

Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment is the definitive textbook for the new CIPD Advanced Level 7 module. It provides students with an understanding of the major contemporary trends in the HR business environment and discussion of significant areas of HR and Learning and Development (L&D) activity that derive from or are given additional prominence as a result of environmental developments.

It provides students with an understanding of ways in which major, long-term environmental developments affect employment, work and people management in organizations as well as a thorough grounding in current and short-term developments in the people management environment. These areas include globalisation, technology, the economy, labour markets, society, politics, public policy and employment regulation. This book also includes expert coverage of how change, innovation and creativity can promote improvements in organisational productivity.

Most importantly, this brand new textbook covers the key elements that students on HR masters courses will need in their future careers including flexibility, agility and resilience. productivity, ethics and values, sustainability, equality, diversity and inclusion, wellbeing and working internationally. Case studies and examples demonstrate how the theory applies in practice and pause and review boxes will help students think critically about the content. Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment is ideal reading for all postgraduate students on both CIPD and non-CIPD accredited courses. Online supporting resources include powerpoint slides for every chapter.

Author Information

Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS.

Graham Perkins is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at University of Exeter Business School. Prior to a career in academia, he held a number of HR and Learning and Development roles in both public and private sector firms.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398600201

Ebook: 9781398600218 Pages: 416

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: The Business Environment

Table of Contents

past

present

and competition

diversity and inclusion

Wellbeing

Working internationally

The New World of Work

Shaping a Future that Helps People, Organizations and Our Societies to Thrive

This book

• Explores how to close the skills gap, boost productivity, improve employee wellbeing and both build and engage a diverse workforce

• Includes advice on how to design organizations, work and job roles for individual and business success

• Explains how to adopt an evidence-based approach to work instead of following intangible, unproven ideas about best practice

• Provides guidance on how organizations can become responsible businesses with a focus on trust, transparency and 'good work'

• Written by the Chief Executive of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and includes case studies from global public and private sector organisations

Description

Work has changed forever. How can HR and leaders adapt? How can they deal with the wellbeing and productivity crisis, address the skills gap and build better organizations? This book has the answer.

Written by a leading voice in the people profession, The New World of Work takes an evidence-based approach to provide practical advice on how the business and employees can succeed. It covers how to combat stalling productivity, poor wellbeing and the increase in mental health issues in the workplace as well as the need for agile learning, ways to close the skills gap and a refreshingly realistic look at the impact of technology. There is also essential discussion of job design, flexible working, diversity and inclusion (D&I) and how to engage both an ageing workforce and new Gen Z recruits. This book also includes guidance on how to build a business which is responsible, trustworthy and transparent, is based on the principles of 'good work' and is one that employees are proud to work for.

With global examples and case studies from private and public sector organizations, The New World of Work is the book that HR and business professionals need to seize the opportunity and allow both the business and its people to succeed.

Author Information

Peter Cheese is Chief Executive of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the professional body for HR and people development. He is also Chair of the What Works Centre for Wellbeing. Based in London, UK, he writes and speaks widely on the themes of the future of work, and engages with politicians, policy makers, academics, business leaders and leaders in the people profession. Prior to the CIPD, he was Chair of the Institute of Leadership and Management after a long career at Accenture where he led the global consulting practice in people and organisation.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398602090

Ebook: 9781398602106

Pages: 400

Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Diversity & Inclusion

Table of Contents

A new era of work

Economics and the economy

Globalization and geopolitics

Social and demographic change

Technology: Automation, AI and beyond

Education and learning

Focusing on the right things

Building responsible business

Leadership for the future

People strategy at the heart of business strategy

Good work as a goal

The agile learning organization

Wellbeing as an outcome

#WTF - What’s the future?

The Power of Difference

Where the Complexities of Diversity and Inclusion Meet Practical Solutions

This book

• Explains why it is our differences that create great workplaces and how, when we understand how to see difference, value it and learn to combine it, that organizations achieve the best results

• Brings together the author's own experiences, personal stories, interviews, examples and the latest research to provide practical solutions

• Written with wit in an honest and engaging style to encourage fresh thinking, curiosity and greater understanding of a complex subject

• Shows that one opinion doesn't represent the viewpoint of a group and why it's essential to listen to all voices

• Demonstrates how to recognize and be curious about what you don't know, instead of accepting generalization or making assumptions

Description

SHORTLISTED: Business Book Awards 2022 - Diversity, Inclusion & Equality category

Good intentions are not enough - real diversity is about change. This book explains why it's our differences and how we combine them that creates true diversity and generates innovation, fresh thinking and ultimately, success.

With clarity and wit, The Power of Difference brings together the author's own experiences with the latest research to explain why inclusion is more than just being nice to people, why unconscious bias training isn't the fix we need and why listening to all individual voices, not just assuming that one viewpoint represents a group, is key.

Offering insight, analysis and practical solutions, The Power of Difference is a must read for all managers, leaders and HR professionals as well as anyone looking to engage with the topic, who doesn't know where to start. Exploring how to confront bias, question assumptions and avoid generalizations, this book illustrates why diversity should be part of the overall business strategy, not separate from it. It shows how for innovation and diversity to flourish, we must create spaces that are safe for disagreement, not from disagreement.

Written in an engaging yet practical style, this book courageously tackles some of the most significant issues at work today.

Author Information

Simon Fanshawe OBE is the co-founder of Diversity by Design, where he works with public, private and third sector companies to bring about meaningful change in the diversity of their talent and the true inclusiveness of their culture. He is Chairman of Hexagon Housing and on the Board of POWERful Women. Based in Brighton, UK, he was a co-founder of Stonewall and was awarded an Honorary Doctorate from the University of Sussex for his work on diversity and human rights. He has long been involved in campaigns for equality and positive social change and has served on the Board of companies and organizations in the private and charity sectors for over thirty-five years. In 2021 he was named as the fourth Most Influential HR Thinker by HR Magazine

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398601543

Ebook: 9781398601550

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Diversity & Inclusion

Table of Contents

Introduction - Who am I and why this book?

1 What is diversity for?

2 Inclusion is not just about being nice to people

3 Diversity is not a minority sport

4 Unconscious bias is an excuse

5 Ditch the superhero

6 Diversity isn’t harder to manage - You only think it is 7 References

Learning Technology

A Complete Guide for L&D Professionals

This book

• Discusses the history of learning technology, its aims, the benefits for individuals and the business and how to assess the return on investment (ROI) of learning technology

• Covers the latest developments in learning technology such as artificial intelligence, virtual reality and the metaverse

• Explains Learning Management Systems (LMSs), Learning Experience Platforms (LXPs), Learning Record Stores (LRSs) as well as discussion of data and analytics, simulations and mobile learning

• Written by an industry expert with over 35 years' experience in learning tech

• Includes case studies from organizations including British Airways, UK National Health Service (NHS) and Learning Pool

Description

Learning technology is now an integral part of all learning and development (L&D) activity. Understanding what these technologies, are, how they work and their aims is key to successful L&D practice.

Learning Technology is written by a leading voice in the learning tech industry with over 35 years' experience. It explains the history of learning tech, its aims, its introduction to the workplace and the benefits to both the individual and the business. This book covers everything from online and mobile learning, simulations and gamification as well as detailed discussion of Learning Management Systems (LMSs), Learning Experience Platforms (LXPs) and Learning Record Stores (LRSs). This book also highlights the importance of data and analytics and covers the latest developments in the learning technology space including artificial intelligence, virtual reality and the metaverse.

Most importantly, Learning Technology helps L&D professionals assess where their budget is best spent on technology and explains how to analyse the return on investment (ROI). Full of examples and practical advice throughout, this book also includes case studies from organizations including British Airways, UK National Health Service (NHS) and Learning Pool.

Author Information

Donald Clark has over 35 years' experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher and is also a Visiting Professor at the University of Derby. Based in Brighton, UK, Donald Clark is also the author of Artificial Intelligence for Learning and Learning Experience Design, both published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9781398608740

Ebook: 9781398608764 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

1 A History of Learning Technology

What is Learning Technology?

Benefits for the Individual

Benefits for the Organization

Why Technology is Essential for L&D

Assessing Learning Technology

Analysing ROI of Learning Technology

Data and Analytics

Learning Management Systems (LMSs)

Learning Experience Platofrms (LXPs)

Learning Record Stores

Online Learning

Mobile Learning

Simulations:

Gamification

Virtual Reality

Artificial Intelligence

Metaverse

Learning Ecosystems

Creating Innovative, Lean and Tech-driven Learning Strategies

This book

• Explains why a learning strategy which encourages a culture of continuous improvement is essential for success

• Provides guidance on upskilling and reskilling a workforce in a collaborative and techenabled world

• Shows how to take a human-centric approach to innovation and offers techniques for a variety of situations including problem analyses, experimentation and algorithmic business thinking

• Explores lean learning, data analytics, learning technologies including artificial intelligence (AI) and the ethics of using these technologies

• Includes case studies from Etihad Airways, ING and FEDEX

Description

Building and sustaining an organization which is nimble, adaptable, resilient and future proof is both complex and urgent. Only those with flexible and innovative Learnscapes will succeed.

Learning Ecosystems explains how organizations evolve into LearnScapes where learning techniques are aligned with continuous interaction with the ecosystem they are part of. It explains how to upskill and reskill a workforce continuously in an increasingly collaborative and tech-enabled world. Full of practical guidance and strategic advice, this book covers how to take a lifelong approach to learning in the organization and the core competencies needed for this. It explains what to do when building a value and data-driven learning strategy and discusses the symbiosis of people and technology.

This book explores lean learning, data analytics, learning technologies including artificial intelligence (AI) and the ethics of using these technologies. There is also crucial guidance on how to take a human-centric approach to innovation. Learning Ecosystems demonstrates the value of continuous improvement and offers techniques for a variety of situations including problem analyses, experimentation and algorithmic business thinking. Most importantly, it provides guidance on how to build a learning culture and a learning ecosystem throughout the company. Supported by case studies from companies including Etihad Airways, ING, ESF and FEDEX, this is essential reading from a leading learning innovator who has helped global organizations to rethink their learning strategies to achieve sustained business growth.

Author Information

Katja Schipperheijn is an internationally recognized learning strategist and founder of Habit of Improvement, a consultancy that focuses on learning strategies that foster growth and well-being in a human-machine symbiosis. Besides her work in corporate settings, she is founder of the sCooledu foundation with which she reached over 15,000 children participating in her workshops on digital citizenship. Based in Antwerp, Belgium and Dubai, UAE, she is also an international keynote speaker and guest lecturer.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398607408

Ebook: 9781398607415 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

A world in ever-increasing change

1 The world of human and machine

2 The value driven organization

3 The data driven organization

2 Learning to stay relevant for the future

4 Lifelong learning in a world of change

5 Competences that make us unique as human beings

3 Learning strategies and technology

6 Can learning strategies stand the test of time?

7 Learning technologies

4 Lean learning ecosystems and LearnScapes

8 The learning maturity model - from data repositories to LearnScapes

9 Lean learning

10 The six drivers of LearnScapes to make learning central

5 Building LearnScapes

11 Step 1: Discovery - analysing the current learning needs for future success

12 Step 2: Burning platform: a supported choice for change

13 Step 3: Path to improvement - where technology, content and the learning culture come together

14 Step 4: Joint execution - no success without cooperation

15 Step 5: Future growth and improvementnever stop learning

16 Conclusion - next steps

Artificial Intelligence for HR

Use AI to Support and Develop a Successful Workforce

This book

• Defines artificial intelligence (AI) for the non-expert and explains its impact on the HR function

• Shows how applications of AI, such as natural language processing and chatbots, can enhance the key HR functions of recruiting, developing and retaining staff

• Includes case studies from global companies, including IBM and Unilever, which use AI in their HR teams to add business value

• New to this edition: Material on applications for AI in virtual work, reskilling and data integrity; discussion of latest research including perceptions of AI in hiring and developing human skills at work; new and updated case studies

Description

Artificial intelligence is changing the world of work. How can HR professionals understand the variety of opportunities AI has created for the HR function and how best to implement these in their organization? This book provides the answers.

From using natural language processing to ensure job adverts are free from bias and gendered language to implementing chatbots to enhance the employee experience, artificial intelligence can add value throughout the work of HR professionals. Artificial Intelligence for HR demonstrates how to leverage this potential and use AI to improve efficiency and develop a talented and productive workforce. Outlining the current technology landscape as well as the latest AI developments, this book ensures that HR professionals fully understand what AI is and what it means for HR in practice.

Alongside coverage of employee engagement and recruitment, this second edition features new material on applications of AI for virtual work, reskilling and data integrity. Packed with practical advice, research and new and updated case studies from global organizations including Uber, IBM and Unilever, the second edition of Artificial Intelligence for HR will equip HR professionals with the knowledge they need to improve people operational efficiencies, and allow AI solutions to become enhancements for driving business success.

Author Information

Ben Eubanks is an HR industry analyst and influencer. He is the Principal Analyst at Lighthouse Research & Advisory where he oversees the development of research, assets and insights to support HR, learning and talent executives. Based in Huntsville, Alabama, he is also the founder of HR community upstartHR, the co-founder of the HRevolution movement and host of the We're Human podcast.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604001

Ebook: 9781398604018 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

1 A snapshot of HR today

The basics of artificial intelligence

General AI Applications with HCM

Core HR and workforce management

Talent acquisition

Learning and development

Talent management

Challenges of adopting AI technology

HR skills of the future

Introduction to HR Technologies

Understand How to Use Technology to Improve Performance and Processes

This book

• Uses clear, accessible and jargon-free language to explain the technologies available to HR professionals

• Explains how technology can improve performance in each of the core areas of HR activity including recruitment, reward and L&D

• Uses a brand-agnostic approach to show how to assess the available technologies and identify which are worth investing in

• Includes discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) and explores what impact these will have on HR

• Provides examples of how technology can improve efficiency by streamlining and speeding up processes to save both time and money

Description

Technology can have huge benefits for the HR function. Whether it's saving time by streamlining processes, boosting engagement by enabling analysis of people data or improving employee development by allowing staff to access the content they need on different platforms, wherever and whenever they need it; the opportunities are vast

However, with more apps, software and platforms than ever before, the volume and variety of available technologies can be overwhelming. This makes it extremely difficult for HR professionals to know where to start when assessing what technologies are out there and which are worth investing in. Introduction to HR Technologies addresses these issues in clear, accessible and jargon-free language and is an indispensable guide for HR professionals needing to get to grips with technologies and understand how to use them to add tangible business value.

Covering all the core areas of HR including recruitment, performance management, learning and development (L&D) and reward, Introduction to HR Technologies allows practitioners to identify areas where technologies can be used to drive performance and what to look for when assessing technological solutions. There is also discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) and what they mean for HR. This book is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to use technology confidently to increase performance, improve processes and add value to both employees and the business as a whole.

Author Information

Stacey Harris is the Chief Research Officer, Managing Partner of Sapient Insights Group where she oversees their industry research work, including the esteemed Annual HR Systems Survey and White Paper, now in its 24th year. She sits on the IHIRM Board of Directors, as Vice Chair and is frequently included in Human Resource Executive® and the HR Technology Conference's Top 100 HR Tech Influencers list. She is a frequent speaker at HR events both in the U.S. and abroad, and regular podcast host as an industry researcher and analyst.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789665277

Ebook: 9781789665284

Pages: 208

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

Preface

What is Human Resources technology?

The history of HR technology use

Who uses HR technology?

Who owns HR technology?

Core HR administration applications

HR service delivery applications

Time management applications

Talent management applications

HR analytics and planning

Emerging HR technology and the future of work

HR technology as an environment

The HR systems strategy

The journey continues – Keep learning

Digital HR Strategy

Achieving Sustainable Transformation in the Digital Age

This book

• Provides guidance on how to build a strategy that uses digital advancements and new technologies to make HR processes more efficient, improve individual performance and increase company profits

• Explains how to use insights from data and analytics to improve employee engagement and wellbeing

• Demonstrates how to recruit new staff and upskill existing employees so that the business has the expertise it needs to succeed in the digital age

• Includes case studies from companies who have effectively implemented a digital HR strategy and are seeing the benefits from it including Airbnb and PepsiCo

• Shows HR professionals how to adapt to the new elements of their roles created by digital transformation and new technologies

Description

We are living in an uncertain world that is rapidly changing with an overload of information and a continual rise of technologies. Automation, the gig economy, digital platforms and other innovations are changing the fundamental nature of work and are having a significant impact on the workforce, workplace and the HR function. Digital HR Strategy is crucial reading for all HR practitioners and leaders wanting to ensure that their organization adapts to this changing and increasingly competitive environment by creating a strategic approach for sustainable transformation which goes beyond conventional digital HR propositions. Featuring case studies from organizations including Airbnb and PepsiCo, it covers areas such as the importance of cultural change and creating a humancentric employee experience, leveraging value propositions, and harnessing data insights and analytics to improve performance.

Digital HR Strategy also explores frameworks, strategies and opportunities for wellbeing initiatives, upskilling and reskilling workforces to respond to and establishing a culture of collaboration and innovation. Featuring tips, tools, and key questions to consider, it is an indispensable resource for all HR practitioners and leaders looking to build, develop and execute a digital HR strategy in order to achieve and sustain competitive advantage in this fast-changing digital age.

Author Information

Soumyasanto Sen is the Founder and Future of Work Strategist at People Conscience, where he provides advice to communities dealing with digital transformation, the new world of work and HR strategy. He is an INSEAD alumni and currently also a HR IT Program Manager at large healthcare company. Prior to this, he was a Global HR IT Manager at one of the largest global automobile companies and a Senior Consultant at IBM Global Business Services. He is a regular conference speaker and commentator on all aspects of HR technology, digital transformation, people analytics and the future of work.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789661224

Ebook: 9781789661231

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Revolution

1 Growing the digital economy alongside disruptions

2 The need for transformation and having the right mindset

The game changers - culture, data and strategy

4 Creating value propositions that are fit for purpose

2 Survival

The demand for the human-centric experience

6 Evolving the future of work, jobs and the workforce

7 Ongoing augmentation, reskilling and collaboration

8 Section - THREE: Sustainability

9 Recreating the organization as a living organism

10 Driven by innovation and led by people

A sustainable evolution and a fairer society

Conclusion 13 Index

Artificial Intelligence for Learning

How to use AI to Support Employee Development

This book

• Shows how to use AI to curate and personalize learning content to improve learner engagement

• Debunks the myths around AI and explains how to cut through the hype and critically assess the impact of artificial intelligence on L&D

• Provides guidance on how artificial intelligence can be used to improve the assessment, evaluation and measurement of learning in organizations

• Explains how AI can be used as an aid in employee learning and is not a replacement for L&D professionals

• Includes case studies and real-world examples from companies including Netflix, British Airways, Vision Express and the NHS

Description

Artificial intelligence is creating huge opportunities for workplace learning and employee development. However, it can be difficult for L&D professionals to assess what difference AI can make in their organization and where it is best implemented.

Artificial Intelligence for Learning is the practical guide L&D practitioners need to understand what AI is and how to use it to improve all aspects of learning in the workplace. It includes specific guidance on how AI can provide content curation and personalization to improve learner engagement, how it can be implemented to improve the efficiency of evaluation, assessment and reporting and how chatbots can provide learner support to a global workforce.

Artificial Intelligence for Learning debunks the myths and cuts through the hype around AI allowing L&D practitioners to feel confident in their ability to critically assess where artificial intelligence can make a measurable difference and where it is worth investing in. There is also critical discussion of how AI is an aid to learning and development, not a replacement as well as how it can be used to boost the effectiveness of workplace learning, reduce drop off rates in online learning and improve ROI. With real-world examples from companies who have effectively implemented AI and seen the benefits as well as case studies from organizations including Netflix, British Airways and the NHS, this book is essential reading for all L&D practitioners needing to understand AI and what it means in practice.

Author Information

Donald Clark has over 30 years' experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher on AI in learning and is also a Visiting Professor at the University of Derby.

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789660814

Ebook: 9781789660821 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology

Table of Contents

Homo technus

What is AI?

teacher fallacy

is the new UI

chatbots

creation

final frontier

next?

Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management

An Evidence-Based Guide to Performance Leadership

This book

• Addresses all areas of performance management, from performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers and having difficult conversations

• Includes examples and exercises to show how the latest developments in performance management and leadership can be implemented with case studies from Microsoft and IBM

• New to this edition: material on managing and measuring performance with a remote workforce and creating agile performance goals; exploration of new approaches for bonuses and performance reviews

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides, a glossary and literature review

• Is written by the UK's bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages

Description

Optimizing staff performance is a key component of achieving outstanding business results. The new edition of Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management is an essential companion for improving employee and organizational performance.

From performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers, this handbook addresses all areas of performance management to enable students and practitioners to understand how to assess, measure and improve performance.

This updated seventh edition contains new chapters on the meaning and development of performance management and managing performance with a remote workforce. It also covers performance leadership and multi-source feedback. Packed with examples to show how the theory applies in practice and exercises to consolidate student learning, Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management remains an indispensable and engaging resource for securing effective performance across all aspects of the organization. Supporting online resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides, a glossary and a literature review

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is the UK's bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. Based in London, UK, he is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

Edition: 7

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398603028

Ebook: 9781398603035 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 242x172

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Performance management fundamentals

The meaning and nature of performance management

The conceptual framework of performance management

Performance management systems

Performance management issues

Performance management developments

Performance management processes

Performance leadership

Performance and development planning

Assessing performance

Conducting performance reviews

Multi-source feedback

Performance management skills

Defining objectives

Providing feedback

Coaching

Managing underperformance

Applications of performance management

Managing organizational performance

Managing team performance

International performance management

Managing the performance of homeworkers

Performance management and learning

Performance management and talent management

Performance management and reward

Performance management and employee engagement

Managing performance management

performance management

about performance management

performance management

Section - Part Six: Conclusions

Where is performance management today?

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management

Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement

This book

• Written by the UK's bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages

• Provides insights into innovative approaches organizations such as Deloitte, Expedia and Google are taking to build organizational performance

• Shows how to build a culture of managing performance throughout the year which delivers results and reduces bureaucracy

• Empowers line managers to own the performance management process rather than HR, ensuring that the process is effectively cascaded across the business

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2017

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749478117

Ebook: 9780749478124

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

Performance Management – The Concept

Performance Management – The Reality

Effective Performance Management

What’s Happening to Performance Management?

Reinventing Performance ManagementThe Issues

Improve Objective Setting

Replace the Annual Performance Review

Abolish Rating

Enhance Personal Development

Provide Training

The Reinvention Programme

Conclusions

Description

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management presents a holistic approach to performance management, drawing on Michael Armstrong's vast research and experience. Most organizations have performance management processes in one form or another, but these are often based on formal annual reviews, forced rankings and directly linked to pay decisions. These traditional approaches are often at the expense of ongoing, continuous feedback and focus on looking back at what has or has not been achieved rather than looking forward. Direct links to pay decisions avert attention from people development, and managers often get lost in the bureaucracy of complex forms rather than fully engaging with their people.

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management details how to build a culture of ongoing feedback and coaching and provides case studies of how this approach to building performance has been effective in organizations including Deloitte, Gap, Expedia and Google. Filled with practical advice, including how to deal with underperformers, it enables organizations to remove overly bureaucratic and ineffective systems based on topdown judgments and ratings, and demonstrates how to get line managers' support for the process focusing on actionable feedback and growth.

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is the UK's bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

Performance Management Performance Management

A Practical Introduction Theory and Practice

This book

• Balances theory with practice to give students a full understanding of the subject

• Maps to the CIPD advanced-level unit on Performance Management

• Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links for students

Edition: 1

Date: 29/08/2013

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843983057

Ebook: 9781843983286 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 240x190

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

Setting the Scene - HRM and Performance

Strategic Performance Management

Motivation at Work

The Role of Line Managers in Managing Performance

Defining and Measuring Individual Work Performance

Performance Appraisal and Feedback

Integrating Learning and Performance

Performance-Related Rewards

Managing Under-Performance

Description

How do you systematically decide and communicate strategic performance aims, objectives, priorities and targets? How do you plan effective policies and practices? Which techniques, rewards and sanctions should you use to improve performance? How do you critically evaluate the effectiveness of performance management? Performance Management combines theory and practice to help students master these key concepts and apply their learning. Mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced unit by the same name, the book is a core text for any student taking a performance management module at undergraduate or postgraduate level.

Featuring examples from a range of sectors and organizations across the globe, Performance Management is packed with pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, case studies, activities, reflection questions and further reading to fully engage students with the subject. Online supporting resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides and annotated web links for students.

Author Information

Sue Hutchinson is an associate professor in HRM at the University of the West of England, where she is also Associate Head of the HRM teaching and research group. She teaches on a range of HRM postgraduate modules including Performance Management, and is actively involved in research. Her main research interests focus on the link between people management and performance, the role of line managers in HRM and involvement and consultation. Previous work experiences include research and teaching at Bath University, policy advisor for the CIPD and industrial relations advisor in the paper industry.

Absence Management

International Performance Management

Developing Performance Management

Performance Management

A Practical Introduction Theory and Practice

This book

• Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

• Uses practical tools, assessments and more to demonstrate how to build a successful performance management strategy

• New to this edition: considers the major developments in the field and includes new case studies from companies such as Deloitte, who have dropped the formal appraisal process

• Online resources: downloadable templates and tools, including self-assessment questionnaires, to be used in practice

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2018

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749483371

Ebook: 9780749483388 Pages: 224

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

1 What is performance management?

Why is it important?

3 How does it fit with organization and HRM strategy?

How does it work?

How do you do it?

Planning and action

Measurement

Conclusion

Description

Effective performance management is at the heart of organizational success, delivering able and motivated employees who are aligned to an organization's values and goals. Using a combination of case studies, interviews, tools and diagnostic questionnaires, Performance Management is a complete and practical guide to getting the best out of people and achieving positive organizational outcomes through successful performance management.

It covers all areas of the subject, from objective-setting, giving feedback, measuring performance and managing underperformance and absence, to effectively integrating systems and processes into organizational and HR strategies.

This second edition of Performance Management contains new material on the ethical focus of the topic, promoting employee wellbeing through performance management, and the future of the annual appraisal, as well as new case studies and examples from Deloitte, Jumeirah Hotels, the CIPD and Hilton. Supporting online resources consist of additional activities and guidance for further research on the topic.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers. They are endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the UK professional body for HR and people development, which has over 145,000 members worldwide.

Author Information

Linda Ashdown is an Assessment Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HRM consultant through her own company Ashdown-Jones HR Ltd. She is also an Associate Lecturer at Portsmouth University Business School, specialising in performance management and employee engagement. She was previously on the board of a multinational advertising company as HR Director.

Motivation and Performance

Guide to Motivating a Diverse Workforce

This book

• Explains the science behind motivation to unlock productivity and high performance, and reduce staff turnover

• Provides practical guidance on how to measure motivation, highlight areas for improvement, demonstrate which employee motivation programmes are working, and where costs can be reduced

• Helps transform talent management and succession planning by explaining what motivates an employee to want to progress in an organization

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2017

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9780749478131

Ebook: 9780749478148

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

A Model of Motivation

Generational Differences

The Biology of Stress and Well-being

Measuring Motivation

The Power of Communication and Conversations

Intrinsic Motivation

Work Engagement, Organizational Health and Culture

Extrinsic Motivation and Rewards

Culture and Values

The Importance of Motivation Gaps

Description

Many organizations approach the issue of employee engagement and motivation by tapping into age, gender and other stereotypes. Motivation and Performance challenges these notions, bringing together evidence that group differences are often exaggerated and that getting to the heart of what really motivates individuals is what's most important.

This book is a practical guide to ensuring that organizations consider all motivators - job security as well as the need for personal growth - to improve employee satisfaction, boost organizational productivity and reduce staff turnover.

Underpinned by original research, Motivation and Performance features case studies from finance, retail, the public and other sectors to show how the principles of motivating employees apply at all levels of the organization, not just at the leadership level, and how values and motivation can be changed and developed.

Complete with a framework for conducting effective visits to front-line locations, it will help HR professionals ask the right questions, choose whether to implement external motivation-building programmes and make a real impact on an employee's desire to progress in the company.

Author Information

Adrian Furnham is professor of psychology at UCL, and adjunct professor of management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1,000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world.

Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customised psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people. He is a PhD candidate at Maastricht University.

Outsourcing Motivation

The Dark Side and Derailed Motivation

Best and Worst Practice from Real Companies

Building Top-Performing Teams

A Practical Guide to Team Coaching to Improve Collaboration and Drive Organizational Success

This book

• Explains how to develop a purpose-driven team with shared goals, vision and identity who can achieve greater business success than individual employees are able to

• Shows how to manage internal team conflict that can arise from employees having different priorities, motivations and levels of experience

• Provides diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises in each chapter so that readers can identify how the content can apply in practice in their own team

• Contains more than 40 tools which can be used when coaching virtually or face-to-face

• Includes practical case studies from organizations including John Lewis, Mothercare, Carlsberg, PepsiCo and Unilever

Description

The best way for a business to succeed is through its people. While there are gains to be had from streamlining processes, reducing costs or making a strategic change, the biggest potential for success comes through how humans collaborate. Specifically, the greatest gains are achieved through high performing teams, and teams of teams.

Containing more than 40 tools which can be used in a virtual or in-person coaching environment, Building Top-Performing Teams is a practical guide for leaders, HR professionals, coaches, team coaches and anyone with management responsibility. It covers how to motivate, develop, engage and reward a team of employees with different levels of experience and priorities to achieve outstanding business success.

Building Top-Performing Teams includes essential guidance, tools and techniques that show how to promote team ways of working rather than individual-focused processes. It also includes guidance on managing internal team conflict and ensuring that teams are purpose-driven and working towards a shared business goal. Each chapter includes diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises to allow readers to identify how to apply each element of team development to their workforce. Supported by the authors' experience in organizations such as the BBC, John Lewis, KPMG, Britvic, the NHS and BMW this is essential reading for anyone needing to unlock the value of teams to achieve greater business performance.

Author Information

Lucy Widdowson MSc PCC is an accredited executive and team coach, Director of Performance Edge, and a lead tutor on team coaching at Henley Business School. During her 30 year corporate career she has worked as a HR Director and is a UK board member for team coaching for the ICF.

Paul J Barbour MSc is an executive and team coach, with 20 years prior experience leading businesses and teams in Kerry Group plc. A writer and speaker with strong interests in human collaboration and conflict resolution, he is also a lead tutor on team coaching at Henley Business School.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666762

Ebook: 9781789666779 Pages: 304

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Performance Management

Table of Contents

1 Introduction - why the world needs topperforming teams and the argument for team coaching

2 Beyond tools and techniques - why is a team coach’s ‘way of being’ so important?

3 Team coaching frameworks, models and approaches - introducing the ‘Creating the Team Edge’ framework

4 The purpose driven team - why does being purpose driven matter so much?

5 Team identity - why is team identity so important?

6 Team values and beliefs - why are team values and beliefs so important?

7 Team awareness - why is it important to develop awareness both within and beyond a team?

8 Team relatedness - why is building trust and connection so important?

9 Team ways of working - how can teams keep reinventing how they work together?

10 Team transformation - what do teams need to do to become transformational?

11 Conclusion - what does the future require of team coaching?

Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice

Improving Performance Through Reward

This book

• Offers a detailed and comprehensive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward systems

• Connects the theoretical discussion to realworld examples and case studies, including General Motors (GM), the UK National Health Service (NHS), Tesco and BT

• New to this edition: majorly revised and updated chapters on equal pay and the gender pay gap, employee benefits and total reward and a new chapter on employee financial wellbeing

• Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and handbooks for lecturers and students which include learning summaries, discussion questions and exercises, further case studies, literature reviews and glossaries

Description

Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice is the definitive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward strategies.

This book covers all the essential aspects of improving organizational, team and individual performance through reward processes, including financial and non-financial rewards, job evaluation, grade and pay structures, rewarding specific employee groups and ethical considerations. This revised and updated sixth edition incorporates the latest research and developments and contains updated coverage of equal pay and the gender pay gap, employee benefits and total reward and a new chapter on employee financial wellbeing.

As with all of Armstrong's texts, Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice bridges the gap between academic and practitioner and is ideally suited to both HR professionals and those studying for HR qualifications, including master's degrees and the CIPD's intermediate and advanced level qualifications. Tips and checklists and can be found throughout, alongside case studies from organizations including General Motors, the UK National Health Service and Tesco. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students, which include learning summaries, discussion questions and exercises, literature reviews and glossaries.

Author Information

Michael Armstrong is the UK's bestselling author of human resource management books including Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, also published by Kogan Page. His books have sold over a million copies and have been translated into 21 languages. He is a former Chief Examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an independent management consultant.

Duncan Brown is Head of HR Consultancy at the Institute for Employment Studies. He has more than 25 years' experience in consulting and reward and he was previously the Assistant Director General at the CIPD. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Edition: 6

Date: 03/02/2019

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9780749484361

Ebook: 9780749484378 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Reward Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

management

affecting reward

rewards

rewards

and reward

and reward

Performance and reward

well-being

gender pay gap

The ethical approach to reward and performance management

pay management

evaluation

pricing

and pay structures

and recognizing performance

progression through contingent pay

schemes

Team pay

for business performance

special groups

chief executives

sales and customer service staff

knowledge workers

manual workers

International reward

benefits

pensions and benefits

benefits

practice of reward management

reward management

reward systems

reward risk

for reward

management developments in the UK

Reward Management

A Practical Introduction Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts

This book

• Gives a complete theoretical grounding in reward management as well as practical examples and case studies so the theory can be applied in the workplace

• New to this edition: Coverage of the latest developments in reward management including the gender pay gap, international reward, the impact of Brexit, executive reward and pay ratio reporting

• Online resources: lecturer manual and lecture slides

• Includes additional discussion of how different cultures impact reward management and why one size of reward doesn't fit all

Description

Reward Management is a comprehensive guide to all elements of reward in the workplace. From the theoretical frameworks and legal context of reward through to practical application in the workplace, this book provides all the essential information for both students of reward management and practitioners involved in reward management in organizations.

Covering all the key areas of reward management including pay structures and pay setting, job evaluation and employee benefits, Reward Management is a key book for anyone studying the Level 7 CIPD reward management module or a postgraduate qualification in HR. This book also includes guidance on non-financial reward and new coverage of the gender pay gap, executive reward and pay ratio reporting. There is also extensive discussion of international reward including the impact of different cultures on reward, benefits for multi-local talent, rewarding expatriates and why one size of reward doesn't fit all. Accompanying online resources include lecturer manual and lecture slides.

Author Information

Stephen J. Perkins is ann Emeritus Professor at London Metropolitan University and a Research Fellow with the Global Policy Institute, London. A non-executive director and corporate adviser, he has previously held executive posts in industry as well as undertaking management consultancy in the UK and internationally.

Sarah Jones is a Senior Lecturer in HRM and Organization Behaviour at the University of Northampton, UK.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/01/2020

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781789661774

Ebook: 9781789661781 Pages: 496

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Reward Management

Table of Contents

Introducing the reward management system

Conceptual and theoretical frameworks

The legal, employment relations and market context

Base pay structures and relationships

Pay-setting, composition and progression

Variable pay schemes

Benefits

Pensions

Non-financial reward

Rewarding directors and executives

International reward management

Reward management within HRM

Reward Management

A Practical Introduction Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts

This book

• Uses practical tools and reflective questions to build knowledge and skills for implementing a successful reward management strategy

• Features examples and case studies, including from Which? and The Royal Horticultural Society to show how organizations can align reward strategy with wider objectives

• New to this edition: material and examples on approaching wellbeing within the benefits package and the latest application of technology; how to manage reward strategy with new ways of working

• Online resources: downloadable templates and tools to develop and implement reward management strategies

• Is part of the HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Description

How can I fairly reward and recognize employees and align this with team and organizational performance? Reward Management is a practical guide for understanding how to develop successful reward strategies.

It covers key areas including pay and grade structures, job evaluation, non-cash reward, pay reviews, bonus plans and tax issues. Featuring guidance, practical tools and case studies throughout, this book provides the knowledge and skills needed to plan, implement and assess an effective reward strategy in any type of organization.

This third edition of Reward Management includes the latest research and developments, such as how to incorporate wellbeing and new technologies in reward strategy and how new ways of working may affect a benefits package. Case studies include insight from McDonald's UK, Marks and Spencer and Which? to show how this can be applied in practice. Online resources include downloadable templates and further tools to be used in practice.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides featuring exercises, examples and case studies. They are ideal for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers.

Author Information

Michael Rose is an author, speaker and independent reward consultant based in London, UK. He was formerly the Vice-President of reward at the CIPD, and has held a number of senior reward management positions, such as the Director of Total Reward for Aon Corporation and Head of Reward Management for TSB Bank plc. A regular international conference speaker, he has also appeared on radio and TV commenting on reward issues and has written a number of books and articles on the topic.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398605299

Ebook: 9781398605305 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x160

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Reward Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The fundamentals of reward management

Reward and reward strategy

2 Why reward is important and how it can make an impact

Relationship between motivation and reward

How reward fits together

How to get started with a reward strategy

Communications

Tax and National Insurance

Reward in practice

Grades and pay structures

Managing pay data and pay reviews

Bonus plans

Recognition and non-cash reward

Long-term plans

Benefits

Conclusions

Appendix

References

Making Sense of Change Management

A Complete Guide to the Models, Tools and Techniques of Organizational Change

This book

• Provides a comprehensive overview of the theories, frameworks and techniques of change management to enable organizations to successfully navigate through periods of change

• Supports learning and understanding with features including checklists, tips, insights from industry expert contributors and 'food for thought', 'stop and think' and summary boxes

• Contains examples from organizations including Google, Burberry and Volvo

• New to this edition: chapters on digital transformation and becoming a sustainable business, material on resilience, wellbeing and effective leadership and updated wider content with the latest thinking and theories

• Online resources: international case study question packs and lecture slides with further reflective questions

Description

This definitive, bestselling text in the field of change management provides comprehensive guidance of everything needed to successfully navigate times of change.

Making Sense of Change Management provides a thorough and accessible overview for students and practitioners alike. Without relying on assumed knowledge, it comprehensively covers the theories and models of change management and connects them to workable approaches and techniques that organizations of all types and sizes can use to adapt to tough market conditions and succeed by changing their strategies, structures, mindsets, leadership behaviours and expectations of staff and managers.

This completely revised and updated fifth edition contains new chapters on digital transformation and becoming a sustainable business, new material on resilience, wellbeing and effective leadership, and new examples from organizations including Google, Burberry and Volvo.

Supported by "food for thought" and "stop and think" features to aid critical thinking and understanding, as well as checklists, tips and helpful summaries, Making Sense of Change Management remains essential reading for anyone who is currently part of, or leading, a change initiative. New and updated accompanying online resources include international case study question packs for lecturers and lecture slides with reflective questions.

Author Information

Esther Cameron is a freelance change adviser and coach who supports senior leaders and their teams and organizations through change. Her recent clients include Shell, Tata Steel, Canaccord Genuity and several British government departments.

Mike Green is the Managing Director of Transitional Space, a consultancy firm that specializes in change management, leadership development and individual and team coaching. He is a Visiting Executive Fellow at Henley Business School and also delivers accredited programmes in change management to senior managers and change agents in the UK, Africa and the Middle East.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9780749496975

Ebook: 9780749496982 Pages: 544

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

The underpinning theory

Individual change

Team change

Organizational change

Leading change

The change agent

The applications

Restructuring

Mergers and acquisitions

Culture and change

Digital transformation

Becoming a sustainable business

Emerging inquiries

Complex change

Leading change in uncertain times

Project- and programme-led change

Conclusion

References and further reading

Index

Managing Change

A Critical Perspective

This book

• Offers a critical perspective and challenges change management assumptions to facilitate a deeper understanding and appreciation of the subject

• New to this edition: new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation; a revised structure to reflect strategic, group and individual change; a revised final chapter on evaluating the practice and theory of change management; and an appendix of twenty popular change management techniques

• Online resources: annotated web links for students, an instructor's manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book, lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors

Description

Managing Change: A Critical Perspective explores how and why change occurs in organizations and how the change process can be managed effectively. Complete with an appendix featuring twenty popular change management techniques, it is an ideal core textbook for change modules on HR and business degree programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. It offers a critical perspective, challenging the main assumptions and ensuring that the complexity of the subject is understood and appreciated.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Managing Change: A Critical Perspective includes new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation. Its revised structure reflects strategic, group and individual change, and a revised final chapter evaluates the practice and theory of change management. Online supporting resources include annotated weblinks for students, an instructor’s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book and lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors.

Author Information

Mark Hughes is a senior lecturer in organisational behaviour at Brighton Business School, UK.

Edition: 2

Date: 13/08/2010

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843982418

Ebook: 9781843984528 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 245x190

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

The Managing Change Conundrums

Organisational Change Classifications

History and Organisational Change

The Role of Paradigms and Perspectives

External and Internal Change Context

Why Organisations Change

Organisational Design and Change

Strategic Level Change

Group and Team Level Change

Individual Level Change

Managing Change

The Leadership of Change

Change Communications

Resistance to Change

Cultural Change

Organisational Learning

Developments in Managing Change

Power, Politics and Organisational Change

Ethics and Managing Change

Change Agents and Agency

HRM and Managing Change

Technological Change

Conclusions

Evaluating Managing Change

- The Organisational Change Field Guide

Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change

The Theory and Practice of Sustaining Change through People

This book

• Equips students and practitioners with the knowledge and skills to manage people through times of change and achieve sustainable operational performance

• Uses the author's evidence-based research to provide new models including a 'Change Readiness Assessment Template'

• Includes global case studies to help apply the theory to practice, including PepsiCo, Nissan and Aegon Asset Management

• New to this edition: content on managing the impact of technological advances and the importance of wellbeing; case studies from Netflix and the UK National Health Service

• Online resources: lecturer's slides and discussion points for each chapter

Description

Change in organizations is all about people: it is people who plan, prepare for and implement change, and who are affected by it in the daily course of their work. Yet there is a tendency to focus on quantifiable and often more easily solved technical aspects of implementing organizational change programmes, and ignore the complex ways that these will impact individuals.

Providing an evidence-based analysis of change in organizations, Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change is written for practitioners responsible for change programmes and postgraduate students of organizational change.

This updated edition demonstrates the importance of understanding the effects of change on individuals and engaging them collaboratively through the transformation journey. Featuring new material on individual wellbeing and the impact of technological advances on the workplace, this book sets out frameworks, practical approaches and recommendations for communicating with and leading individuals, teams and organizations through change. Full of exercises, interviews and case studies from across the globe, this book is an essential resource for leaders and students enabling them to achieve sustainable benefits of change at work.

Author Information

Professor Julie Hodges is a leading expert on change in organizations. Prior to this, Julie Hodges worked as a business consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including PwC. Based in the UK, she is also an Academic Fellow of the ICMCI (International Council of Management Consulting Institutes), a Principal Fellow of the Higher Education Academy, and a Senior Fellow of the Foundation for Management Education (FME), and a member of the editorial board of the 'Management Consulting' journal.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/05/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781789667974

Ebook: 9781789667981 Pages: 368

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Understanding organizational change

The context and nature of change

Individual responses to change

The impact of organizational change on emotions

Individual sense-making processes

The role of leaders and managers

Leading people through change

Fostering commitment and ownership

Engaging people through dialogue

Changing elements of the organization’s culture

Building capabilities

Building capabilities for sustaining change

Sustaining change

Glossary

Index

Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change

A Practical Guide to Delivering Value

This book

• Shows how to plan a consulting intervention, from diagnosing what change is needed and identifying risks to ensuring ethical practice and demonstrating value

• Provides global case studies and perspectives from internal and external consultants across a range of consultancies, from the 'Big Four' to boutique firms

• Helps build the necessary skills to get work as a consultant, from putting the business case forward to establishing credibility

• Online resources: Lecturer slides

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749478636

Ebook: 9780749478643 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Change Management

Description

Organizations are increasingly investing in consulting capabilities to understand what changes they need to make to keep up the pace with the competition and future-proof their business. Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change is a guide for students and internal and external consultants needing to develop the necessary skills to consult in organizational settings where there is a great deal of complexity.

It tackles the issues posing the greatest threat to the success of the change programme, including how to adapt to rapidly shifting needs, deal with the emotional and ethical issues that arise and ensure that the managers take full ownership for the change so that 'business as usual' is established.

Complete with case studies from the 'Big Four' consultancy groups as well as boutique firms, Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change shows how to identify and execute interventions in a variety of organizational settings to deliver value. It provides guidance on how to develop a value proposition; define, write and present the business case for the proposed interventions; establish credibility and report on the results.

Author Information

Professor Julie Hodges is a leading expert on change in organizations. Prior to this, Julie Hodges worked as a business consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including PwC. Based in Durham, UK, she is also an Academic Fellow of the ICMCI (International Council of Management Consulting Institutes), a Principal Fellow of the Higher Education Academy, and a Senior Fellow of the Foundation for Management Education (FME), and a member of the editorial board of the 'Management Consulting' journal.

Table of Contents

The Context of Consulting

The Nature and Value of Consulting

Roles and Responsibilities of Consulting

The Consulting Cycle

Preparation and Contracting

Diagnosing the Need and Readiness for Change

Designing and Delivering Interventions

Transition

Consulting Capabilities

Building Capabilities for Consulting

Becoming a Consultant

The Shadow Side of Consultancy

Conclusions and Reflections

The Effective Change Manager's Handbook

Essential Guidance to the Change Management Body of Knowledge

This book

• Is the official guide for the first ever Change Management Body of Knowledge, created by Change Management Institute and APMG

• Provides a strong base level knowledge for continuing professional development across the discipline

• Enables change managers to effectively advise and coach senior colleagues and those sponsoring or leading change initiatives

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2014

Price: £41.99

Paperback: 9780749473075

Ebook: 9780749473082 Pages: 632

Format (mm): 241x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Change Management

Description

The Effective Change Manager's Handbook helps practitioners, employers and academics define and practise change management successfully and develop change management maturity within their organization.

A single-volume learning resource covering the range of knowledge required, it includes chapters from established thought leaders on topics ranging from benefits management, stakeholder strategy, facilitation, change readiness, project management and education and learning support. Endorsed by the Change Management Institute and the official guide to the CMI Body of Knowledge, The Effective Change Manager's Handbook covers the whole process from planning to implementation, offering practical tools, techniques and models to effectively support any change initiative.

The editors of The Effective Change Manager's Handbook - Richard Smith, David King, Ranjit Sidhu and Dan Skelsey - are all experienced international consultants and trainers in change management. All four editors worked on behalf of the Change Management Institute to co-author the first global change management body of knowledge, The Effective Change Manager, and are members of the APMG International examination panel for change management.

Author Information

APMG is a leading global Examination Institute and the Official Accreditor of the UK Government's Cabinet Office and the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS). They accredit professional training and consulting organizations and manage certification schemes for knowledge-based workers.

Richard Smith (Editor) is a specialist in organizational development-related people development issues. He works with clients as diverse as Unilever, Nestle, Mars and Harvard Business School. He is the Chief Examiner for APMG Change Management products and lead author of the first global Change Management Body of Knowledge (CMBoK) for the Change Management Institute. He is also a Fellow of the CIPD.

Table of Contents

1

A change management perspective –Richard Smith

2 Defining change – Robert Cole, David King and Rod Sowden

3 Managing benefits: Ensuring change delivers value – Stephen Jenner

4 Stakeholder strategy – Patrick Mayfield

5 Communication and engagement – Ranjit Sidhu

6 Change impact – Caroline Perkins

7 Change readiness, planning and measurement – Nicola Busby

8 Project management: Change initiatives, projects and programmes – Ira Blake

9 Education and learning support – Richard Smith

10 Facilitation – Dan Skelsey

11 Sustaining change – Helen Campbell

12 Personal and professional management – Ray Wicks

13 Organizational considerations – Tim Cole, Martin Lunn, Una McGarvie and Eric Rouhof

Neuroscience for Organizational Change

An Evidence-based Practical Guide to Managing Change

This book

• Offers a practical approach underpinned by neuroscience for engaging and supporting employees during times of change

• Contains numerous examples of how these approaches have been applied in organizations including as Lloyds Banking Group and Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ)

• Includes key reflection points at the end of each chapter to aid planning and implementation of key steps and insights

• New to this edition: new chapters on planning the work day with the brain in mind and overcoming the difficulties related to behavioural change, as well as updated wider content and further case studies

Description

Organizational change can be unpredictable and stressful. With a better understanding of what our brains need to focus, organizations can increase employee engagement, productivity and well-being to successfully manage periods of uncertainty.

Drawing on the latest scientific research and verified by an independent neuroscientist, Neuroscience for Organizational Change explores the need for social connection at work, how best to manage emotions and reduce bias in decision-making, and why we need communication, involvement and storytelling to help us through change.

Practical tips and suggestions can be found throughout, as well as examples of how these insights have been applied at organizations such as Lloyds Banking Group and GCHQ. The book also sets out a practical science-based planning model, SPACES, to enhance engagement.

This updated second edition of Neuroscience for Organizational Change contains new chapters on planning the working day with the brain in mind and on overcoming the difficulties related to behavioural change. It also features up-to-the-minute wider content reflecting the latest insights and developments, and updated case studies from the first edition which give a long-term view of the benefits of applying neuroscience in organizations.

Author Information

Hilary Scarlett is a writer, international speaker and consultant on change management and neuroscience. Her work, which has spanned Europe, the US and Asia, concentrates on the development of people-focused change management programmes, employee engagement and well-being. Hilary has been working with neuroscientists at University College London and in the US to apply cognitive neuroscience to practical management tools. She regularly works with leadership teams in the private and public sectors to help them build resilience and successfully introduce change.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749493189

Ebook: 9780749493196

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Preface

1 The challenge

Introduction to neuroscience

Brain facts

Why our brains don’t like organizational change

What can we do?

Performing at our best during change

Our social brains: The role of leaders and managers

Managing emotions during change

Decision-making and bias

Communication, involvement and the role of storytelling

Planning change with the brain in mind

Changing behavior

Planning the working day to maximize productivity

Applying neuroscience in the organization

Index

Agile Change Management

A Practical Framework for Successful Change Planning and Implementation

This book

• Explains core concepts of agile methodologies enabling readers to create a flexible plan for managing both large-scale and micro-level change in their organization

• Provides best practice advice on how to build strong relationships with stakeholders to ensure benefits are realized early

• New to this edition: Chapters on behavioural change and decomposition in planning iterations; discussion on prototyping for business needs and virtual leadership; refresh of the content to cover the latest developments and support the APMG Agile Change Agent course

• Online resources: PDFs of appendices from the book on change roles, change management documents, change capabilities, a change activity index and communication activities

Description

The second edition of Agile Change Management provides essential tools to build change manager capabilities and ensure change initiatives are embedded effectively throughout the organization.

This book is a comprehensive resource for creating a roadmap that is flexible and unique to each organization to manage any type of change initiative. Detailing all the processes, activities and information needed, from creating the right environment for change to completing iterative tasks, it shows how to respond to different needs as they arise, reducing the potential for wasted time and resources.

The updated second edition features chapters on behavioural change and decomposition in planning iterations, and new material on prototyping for business needs and virtual leadership. Whether implementing a large-scale transformation or working through projects at micro-level, Agile Change Management provides tools, frameworks and examples necessary to adapt to and manage change effectively.

Author Information

Melanie Franklin is a globally recognized thought leader in change management who has effected business change programmes across public and private sector organizations. Based in London, UK, she is the Director of Agile Change Management Ltd and Founder of the Continuous Change Community. An impressive array of clients in Europe, the US and the Middle East benefit from her unique insights into change. She designs and runs in-house programs to develop skills in change and transformation and advises boards on strategies for change. She is Chief Examiner for the Agile Change Agent qualification from APMG International and works for several professional bodies to help grow the consulting and change management professions. She is the author of several publications and a regular keynote speaker at various conferences worldwide.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398603141

Ebook: 9781398603158

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Concept

Roadmap

Business need

Relationship building

Environment

Coaching for Change

Building the Agile Business

Through Digital Transformation

This book

• Shows how businesses can embrace digital transformation and agile processes to achieve organizational success

• Provides guidance on how to scale agile principles and operations, make change stick and adopt agile mindsets and culture

• Contains real-life insights and examples from organizations driving business success with agility and digital innovation such as AirBnb, Amazon and Google

• New to this edition: material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams

Description

How can businesses transform to achieve competitive advantage in a digital-enabled world? How can managers and leaders create a culture that supports lasting change through these transformations?

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation is an in-depth guide for all those needing to better understand, implement and lead digital transformation in the workplace. It sets aside traditional thinking and outdated strategies to explain what steps need to be taken for an organization to become truly agile, embed innovation and develop talent to succeed.

This majorly revised second edition of Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation contains new material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, and using data effectively in organizational decisionmaking. Full of practical advice, examples and real-life insights from organizations at the leading edge of digital transformation including AirBnb, Amazon and Google, this book is an essential guide to driving success by becoming an agile and digital native business.

Author Information

Neil Perkin is a writer, keynote speaker and founder of Only Dead Fish, a consultancy which specialises in digital strategy, transformation and agility. Based in West Sussex, UK, he has worked with organizations including Vodafone, GSK, Samsung, the UK Government and The Financial Times, and curates the quarterly series of Firestarters thought leadership events for Google UK.

Peter Abraham is an author, practitioner and co-founder of weareCrank, which uses data to drive decision making and driving growth through the intersection of data, user experience and channel optimization. Based in Surrey, UK, he has over 20 years' experience of helping global companies define their digital strategy and build digital centres of excellence to support true agility in business.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789666533

Ebook: 9781789666540

Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Table of Contents

The agile business

The key forces for change

How digital disrupts

What’s stopping you?

Defining digital transformation and how an agile business is the foundation for it

Fast

Operating in the ‘ambiguity zone’

The agile innovation process

THREE: Focused

The role of vision and purpose

Agile strategy and planning

Linking strategy to execution

Flexibility

Agile structures and resourcing

Scaling agility

Building the culture to move fast

A blueprint for flexibility - autonomy, mastery and purpose

Digital-native talent

Start small, scale fast and the transformation journey – putting it all together

Index

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management

Using AI to Facilitate Organizational Development

This book

• Enables readers to understand Appreciative Inquiry (AI) conversational techniques and implement them for change within their organizations

• Explores the difference that AI can make through in-depth case studies from BP Castrol Marine, Nokia and Orbseal Technology Center

• New to this edition: chapters on how positive psychology can enhance appreciative practice and appreciative coaching

• Teaches new ways of authentically engaging with others in business to facilitate positive change

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2016

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749477912

Ebook: 9780749477929

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 165x120

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Change Management

Description

Appreciative Inquiry (AI) is a widely recognised process for engaging people in organizational development and change management. Based on conversational practice, it is a particular way of asking questions, fostering relationships and increasing an organization's capacity for collaboration and change. It focuses on building organizations around what works, rather than trying to fix what doesn't, and acknowledges the contribution of individuals in increasing trust and organizational alignment and effectiveness. Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management studies AI in depth, identifying what makes it work and how to implement it to improve performance within the business.

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management explains the skills, perspectives and approaches needed for successful AI, and demonstrates how a practical conversational approach can be applied to organizational challenges in times of change. Case studies from organizations that have already integrated AI into their change management practice, including Nokia and BP, reveal why the processes are valuable and how to promote, create and generate such conversations in other organizations. Written in jargon-free language, this second edition now includes chapters on how positive psychology can enhance appreciative practice and appreciative coaching, making it an essential resource for anyone looking to implement AI in their organization.

Author Information

Sarah Lewis is an Associated Fellow of the British Psychological Society, a Principal member of the Association of Business Psychologists, and the owner of Appreciating Change, where she works as a facilitator and consultant.

Jonathan Passmore is an award-winning professor of psychology with an international reputation for his work in coaching, change and leadership. He is managing director of Embrion and consults and speaks at conferences across the world.

Stefan Cantore is the Principal Teaching Fellow in Organizational Behaviour and HRM and the Director for the MSc in Organizational Change Management at the University of Southampton. He is an experienced leadership and organizational development consultant.

Table of Contents

1 Organizations as machines, workers as cogs and management as a control process

2 An alternative approach: organizations as living human systems

3 The development of conversational approaches to organizational change

4

Appreciative Inquiry: how do you do it?

5 The power of the question

6 The power of conversation

7 Extending practice: working with story in organizations

8 Extending practice: working with appreciative coaching

9 How Positive Psychology enhances Appreciative Inquiry

10 Developing your conversational practice

11 Becoming an appreciative conversational practitioner

12 How to introduce Appreciative Inquiry and related approaches to your organization

13 Case study: using Appreciative Inquiry at BP Castrol Marine

14 Case study: revitalizing corporate values in Nokia

15 Case study: World Café enabling strategic change at the American Society for Quality

16 Case study: rapidly transforming conflict into co-action at a South African coal mine

17 Case study: applying Appreciative Inquiry to deliver strategic change at Orbseal Technology Center

Leading Cultural Change

The Theory and Practice of Successful Organizational Transformation

This book

• Helps readers to lead a successful cultural change intervention within their organizations

• Guides the reader towards achieving sustained competitive advantage through organizational change

• Provides a practical framework for the implementation and evaluation of cultural change

• Enables managers to communicate cultural change successfully to their stakeholders

• Includes a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public-sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding

Description

With coverage of the major theories and concepts alongside diagnostic tools and a practical framework for implementation, Leading Cultural Change will help the reader analyse and diagnose their current organizational culture, become aware of the key challenges and how to overcome them and learn how to adapt their leadership style, ensuring they are fit to lead a cultural change programme. Taking in core topics such as change context, language and dialogue as a key cultural process and the change team process, it uses a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding.

Leading Cultural Change is a unique text, rooted in behavioural sciences, which explores the topic as an organizational necessity to achieving sustained competitive advantage.

Author Information

Professor James McCalman, formerly MD of Sotheby's Institute of Art, is currently the Head of the Centre for Strategy and Leadership at the University of Portsmouth. He has previously enjoyed roles as MBA Director at the Universities of Glasgow and Strathclyde as well as at Ashridge Business School, before moving to senior leadership roles in the private and charitable sectors.

Dr David Potter is the founder of The Cultural Change Company, which specializes in enabling cultural change interventions. He is a qualified NLP Practitioner and holds both an MBA and a PhD specialising in strategy design and cultural change dynamics. He frequently teaches and presents to students on MBA and Executive courses on the topic of cultural change, including at Adam Smith Business School University of Glasgow, University of St Andrews Business School, Glasgow Caledonian University and Glasgow University Business School.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2015

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749473037

Ebook: 9780749473044 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Change Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

Leading cultural change. Theoretical perspectives

Cultural change management

Organization development

Cultural change literature

A theory of culture

Cultural management as a form of control

Leadership as a cultural variable

Leadership and the management of meaning

Language as a cultural process

Ethnography as a tool for cultural change

Cultural and strategic tensions. When theory meets practice

The client and its problem

Change technologies

What did the people think?

Reflective learning

Closing thoughts

The Next Rules of Work

The Mindset, Skillset and Toolset to Lead Your Organization through Uncertainty

This book

• Includes exercises to help leaders create an organization mindset that can continually adapt its strategy and execution

• Outlines the five questions that individuals and organizations need to answer to align around strategic goals

• Helps individuals identify their "superpower" skills, which are those reflecting their strengths and are most needed to solve organizational problems

• Includes global examples drawn from the author's work with Itau (Brazil), British Telecom, Emirates Airlines, NetHope (Jordan), Adecco, SwissRe, Novartis (Switzerland), and the governments of Chile, Tunisia and New Zealand

Description

Organizations, managers and workers still have an Industrial Era mindset towards work. How can leaders guide individuals and organizations to solve the increasingly complex work challenges of tomorrow?

As traditional jobs give way to new work roles and software and robots perform the repetitive tasks formerly done by humans, the work of today is no longer guaranteed to be here tomorrow. The Next Rules of Work helps leaders understand why traditional notions about work inhibit the organization's ability to address new problems and how they can successfully equip their organizations to manage constant change. By first developing a new mindset to help themselves and their teams become more agile, leaders can then co-create the organization's "next mindset" by answering five key questions that help them establish constantly adaptive strategies. Finally, leaders develop agile learning practices to ensure that workers will continually have the skillsets and toolsets they need to solve organizational problems today.

By redefining the fundamental nature of work, teams and the organization, The Next Rules of Work goes beyond offering advice and predictions and provides organizational leaders with a guide to create truly agile organizations that can respond to perpetual change.

Author Information

Gary A. Bolles is based in San Francisco, California and is the Chair for the Future of Work with Singularity University and a partner in strategy consulting firm Charette, LLC. A globally recognized expert on the future of work, he consults with C-suite leaders of global companies, labor and education leaders from Brazil to Canada, and global non-profits. He is the co-founder of eParachute.com, inspired by his father's bestselling book What Color Is Your Parachute?, and visiting lecturer to a variety of school systems, including Isha Vidhya in India, and a regular guest lecturer for Gartner.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398601635

Ebook: 9781398601642

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x165

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction

Rules

The Old Rules of Work

The Next Rules of Work

Mindset

Your Organization’s Culture Is Its Mindset

The Problem-Solving Mindset of Workers and Teams

Skillset

The Skills of Next Organizations

The Skills of Tomorrow for Workers and Teams - PACE

4 Toolset

The Next Toolset for Organizations

The Next Toolset for Workers and Teams

Conclusion - The Future We All Want

Employee Engagement

Practical

This book

• Provides practical tools, assessments and real-life examples from organizations for developing and measuring an effective strategy for engaging employees

• Features examples and case studies from organizations such as Capital One, EDF Energy and Marks & Spencer

• New to this edition: exploration of engagement strategies for the new world of work; why wellbeing, empathy and human connection are essential for engagement and how to create strategies that are inclusive of all employees

• Online resources: downloadable templates and tools to be used in practice, including self-assessment questionnaires

• Is part of the HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Description

How can I create engagement strategies that will empower employees to succeed? This book offers a practical resource for developing an effective engagement strategy aligned to business objectives.

An engaged workforce is essential to the performance and success of any organization. Featuring practical tools and templates, Employee Engagement provides comprehensive coverage of all stages of the engagement process, from planning initiatives to building and measuring their success.

This updated third edition presents engagement strategies that account for recent workplace developments, from remote working to creating psychological safety. It also includes updates on the evolving technology trends that impact engagement and guidance on how to create strategies that are inclusive of all employees. With examples and case studies from organizations such as AXA PPP Healthcare, EDF Energy and Marks & Spencer, Employee Engagement is essential reading for HR students and professionals. Online supporting resources include diagnostic tools, templates and additional bestpractice case studies.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides featuring exercises, examples and case studies. They are ideal for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers.

Author Information

Emma Bridger is an award-winning employee engagement specialist and Director of People Lab, an employee engagement consultancy that works with high-profile clients worldwide. Based in Hastings, UK, she has designed and developed the CIPD range of public and in-house employee engagement courses and is a regular conference speaker. She contributed to the UK Government Review Engaging for Success and is a member of the Engage for Success movement as part of its "guru group" In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398605145

Ebook: 9781398605152

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x160

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Employee Engagement

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

What is employee engagement?

2 Does engagement matter?

3 Developing your employee engagement strategy

4 How it works

5 Employee engagement: How do you do it?

Employee engagement tools and techniques

7 Planning and action

8 Measuring engagement

9 The future of employee engagement

Successful Employee Communications

A Practitioner’s Guide to Tools, Models and Best Practice for Internal Communication

This book

• Delivers an essential and easy-to-follow framework for delivering engaging communication strategies including the transition to flexible working

• Advises how to communicate change effectively and bring clarity and stability to difficult situations, with lessons learned from the Covid-19 crisis

• Includes case studies from global companies including Unilever, John Lewis, HSBC, Volvo Group and the BBC

• New to this edition: chapters on Generation Z in the workplace and the impact of remote working and new material on the responsibility of employers to assure wellbeing and diversity and inclusion

Description

Communicating effectively is crucial to improving employee engagement, organizational culture, and performance. Learn how to focus your time and resources to make the most positive difference to your organization and its people.

Successful Employee Communications explores how to help organizations work with purpose, be better listeners and connect with employees who have higher expectations and new ways of working. Easy-to-follow frameworks and checklists will help you conduct an internal communication audit, develop and measure a communication plan, work with difficult news and behaviour change, and support leaders to be more effective communicators.

Written by leading PR and internal communications experts and packed with new case studies and updated content, this second edition of Successful Employee Communications blends theory and practice, sharing insights and lessons from global organizations including AB InBev, Cambridge University, Reckitt and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD). It is essential reading for anyone responsible for internal communication, employee engagement, organizational culture or employee experience in the new world of work.

Author Information

Sue Dewhurst worked as a senior internal communicator in house and as a consultant for over 20 years, before specializing in learning and development. She's trained thousands of leaders and professional communicators and her models and frameworks are used in organizations worldwide.

Liam FitzPatrick is experienced in change management, PR and internal communications in-house and for major consultancies. He lectures on developing teams, research, and planning, and has served as an external examiner at UK universities.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604483

Ebook: 9781398604575 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Employee Engagement

Table of Contents

1 Making the case for employee communications – Understanding the value leading practitioners add

2 Conducting your own employee communications audit – Tools and tips from experts

3 Setting objectives – Considerations and templates that work based on real life examples

4 Understanding your audience – Building a realistic profile of your workforce and how to use it

5 Defining your messages – Insights from pros on why it matters, how to define them, get them agreed and stick to them

6 Channel choices for employee communications – What to consider when choosing and using methods

7 Line managers as communicators – How to help them add the most value

8 Making it happen – Overcoming obstacles and project management when implementing employee communications

9 Change and transformation –Understanding the differences for effective employee communication

10 The Changing Nature of Work and the Workplace

11 Listening and Employee Voice

12 Communicating in tough times –Preparing leaders for delivering tough messages

13 Is it working? – Evaluation and measurement of an employee communication strategy that adds value

14 Communicating on purpose – Helping employees find meaning in the modern workplace

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures

How to Develop Companies where Employees Thrive

This book

• Shows how to create a structure that leverages peoples' strengths allowing them to grow and develop

• Includes assessments to define your organization's core values and build a company culture around them

• Explainshow to implement a strategic workforce plan that leverages the changing talent landscape

• Shows how to deconstruct existing company cultures that are having negative business effects and rebuild them for success

• Shows how to identify what competencies will be needed and how to hire for current and future success

Description

WINNER: Nonfiction Authors Association Book Awards Gold Award 2021

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures is a practical guide for HR and OD professionals which explains how to proactively design, build and foster a culture that creates employee and business success.

For a company to outperform the competition and achieve sustainable business growth, it needs a high performing, engaged and committed workforce with the skills the business needs both now and in the future. Attracting, motivating and retaining top talent can't be done simply by attaching individual benefits to specific job roles. To be effective, companies need to build an exceptional company culture where people want to work and that allows them to develop and perform to their full potential.

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures provides guidance on all elements of building a top performing culture including how to identify and define core company values and embed them throughout policies, processes and behaviours as well as how to create an organizational structure that leverages employees' strengths for optimum performance. It also covers how to assess what roles the business needs, how to recruit for future success and make the most of non-traditional hires as well as covering employee engagement, motivation, reward, diversity and Learning and Development (L&D). With practical examples, tips and advice throughout , this is crucial reading for anyone needing to build a culture that attracts the very best talent and achieve sustainable business growth.

Author Information

Jamie Jacobs is the co-founder of High Performanceology. For over 20 years she has built high-performing organizations and teams across the technology, financial services and hospitality industries as a HR and culture executive. Based in San Diego, California, she is President of the National Human Resources Association and a Professor at University of Southern California.

Hema Crockett is an award-winning HR professional and the co-founder of High Performanceology. Prior to this she led the Total Rewards programme for LPL Financial and an HR Executive for Renovate America. Based in San Diego, California, she has also worked with Biotechnology companies and the US State Department.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9781789667219

Ebook: 9781789667226

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – C is for conscious

2 What is organizational culture?

3 Why top-performing cultures don’t happen by accident

Organizational structure

Identifying and defining core values

Skills for now and the future

Attracting and retaining the right talent

Engagement and motivation

Total Rewards

Diversity, inclusion, and belonging

Moving to action

Human Resources, Organizational Development and

Strategic Internal Communication

How to Build Employee Engagement and Performance

This book

• Helps improve employee engagement and performance by ensuring business goals are effectively communicated to staff

• Combines theory and practice - including case studies from the author's own experience - for confidently designing and implementing a strategic approach to internal communications

• New to this edition: Specific guidance on how to use the Dialogue Box tool to communicate organizational restructures more successfully and avoid misunderstandings among employees

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2017

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749478650

Ebook: 9780749478667

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Description

Previously restricted to cascading information and managing day-to-day conversations, internal communication is now essential to empowering employees to deliver business strategy. Strategic Internal Communication shows how to design and implement a strategy which will lead to engaged and motivated staff, increased productivity and consequently improved business performance.

The book uses the author's own Dialogue Box tool designed to help companies explore more thoroughly what kinds of conversations they need to have with employees to address internal and cultural challenges. It helps transform organizations into open and transparent communities to ensure that entire workforces are committed to the overall business vision.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Strategic Internal Communication includes new information on how to use Dialogue Box during times of transition and organizational change. It also gives advice on how to manage difficult conversations and avoid damaging miscommunication and misinterpretation.

Supported by examples and case studies from the author's own experience, Strategic Internal Communication is an indispensable guide to creating an integrated and collaborative culture which will take your organization to the next level of success.

Author Information

Dr David Cowan is a visiting scholar in the Communications Department at Boston College, USA. He has worked with a variety of clients, including SABIC, Honeywell Aerospace, SAP, Saudi Aramco, Hewlett-Packard, and has taught the Dialogue Box to over 600 participants in America, Britain, China, Netherlands, India, Saudi Arabia, Singapore and South Korea. He is former Global Head of Internal Communications at ArcelorMittal and has worked at the World Bank and as a finance and technology journalist. He holds degrees from the University of Oxford and the University of St Andrews, where he earned his PhD.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The New Organizational Triangle –Internal Communications, Employee Engagement and HR

2 Culture Shock – Corporate Culture Does Not Exist

3 Communicating Through Change, Changing Through Communication

4 Dialogue and the Digital World

5 Zone 1 – Intelligence – How Organizations and People Think

6 Zone 2 – Emotion – How Organizations and People Feel

7 Zone 3 – Interpretation – How Organizations and People Understand

8 Zone 4 – Narrative – How Organizations and People Agree (or Disagree!)

9 The End Zone – Ensuring Effective Dialogue – How Organizations and People Talk

10 Using the Dialogue Box

Human Experience at Work

Drive Performance with a People-focused approach to Employees

This book

• Uses original research to show the performance and wellbeing benefits of a human-centric approach to work

• Explains how to focus on employees as people rather than a commodity in order to attract, engage and retain the best talent

• Provides guidance on how to embed a people-focused approach to employee practices and processes to improve business performance

• Includes case studies from global organizations including GSK, Ford, IKEA, Fotile, Grenade, Huel, and Moneypenny

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789667639

Ebook: 9781789667646

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Description

The only way for HR professionals to ensure sustainable top performance from their workforce is by taking a people-focused approach to their employees.

To outperform their competitors, businesses need happy, engaged and committed employees performing to their full potential. Investing in new technologies or embracing people analytics won't achieve this but a people-focused approach will. It not only improves staff engagement, productivity and wellbeing but also secures the benefits for the business with Deloitte reporting in 2019 that 'organizations focusing on human experience are twice as likely to outperform their peers in revenue growth over a three-year period.' Human Experience at Work is a practical guide for HR professionals and those responsible for talent management which provides advice, examples and guidance on how to embed people-centred approach to staff development.

Human Experience at Work covers what human experience is, the benefits for the organization, the benefits for employees, how to make it part of a talent management and organizational development strategy and how to leverage it. There is also coverage of how focusing on people and allowing them to be themselves at work creates a more diverse and inclusive work environment. Supported by case studies, insights, and examples from companies including GSK, Ford, IKEA, Fotile, Grenade, Huel, and Moneypenny.

Author Information

Ben Whitter is the CEO of HEX Organization and the Founder of the World Employee Experience Institute (WEEI). Ben Whitter was recognized by Thinkers50 as one of the top management thinkers in the world for 2021 for his 'compelling' EX research. Ben Whitter is best known for pioneering and popularizing the concept of employee experience worldwide. Based in Cheshire, UK, but operating globally, he shares his work & research through popular keynotes, advisory services, coaching and the global HEX Practitioner programme. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Table of Contents

Introduction

The human experience

Why humanity demands a new model for work

Accelerating holistic, human-centred and experience-driven business

Delivering world-class human experiences at work

Reset, refresh and relaunch work around life

Evolving human experiences at work

Epilogue

References

Index

Introduction to Employment Law

Fundamentals for HR and Business Students

This book

• Provides students with no prior understanding or experience of the UK legal system with a thorough grounding in the key employment law concepts

• Supports students' learning with pedagogical features including chapter objectives, tasks, 'explore further' sections, key learning points, examples to work through and a dedicated study skills chapter

• New to this edition: new material on the rights of agency workers, furlough practices, bereavement leave and the legal implications of Brexit

• Online resources: lecture slides, case studies, annotated weblinks and an instructor's manual

• Covers key areas including employment contracts, protected characteristics, discrimination, tribunals and redundancy

Description

Written specifically for HR and business students, Introduction to Employment Law is a clear, accessible and jargon-free guide to UK employment law and how it applies in practice.

This book covers all the essentials of employment law including employment contracts, discrimination, redundancy and employment tribunals. There is also expert guidance on key issues including shared parental leave, flexible working policies and protected characteristics. Fully revised with the latest cases and legal developments, this new edition includes coverage of the rights of agency workers, bereavement leave, furlough practices and the legal implications of Brexit. This textbook doesn't assume any prior knowledge of the UK legal system and equips students with the knowledge and skills that they need to take forward into the workplace.

Packed with pedagogical features to consolidate learning including tasks, examples, explore further sections and key learning points as well as a dedicated study skills chapter covering employment law assignments and exams, Introduction to Employment Law is essential reading for all students studying the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate module in employment law. It is also an accessible introduction for Level 7 students and those on undergraduate and postgraduate business courses needing a thorough grounding in employment law. Online resources include lecture slides, case studies, annotated weblinks and an instructor's manual.

Author Information

Professor Kathy Daniels is Associate Pro-Vice Chancellor (Engagement) at Aston University, Birmingham, UK. She teaches employment law and employee relations at both undergraduate and masters level and is the lead tutor for employment law programmes at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). She writes and presents extensively for a variety of organizations and law firms, specialising in employment law. She is a lay member of the Employment Tribunals, sitting in Birmingham. Prior to these appointments she was a senior HR manager in the manufacturing sector.

Edition: 6

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398603783

Ebook: 9781398603790 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 245x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Table of Contents

The formation of employment law

The Employment Tribunals and the Employment Appeal Tribunal

Contract of employment

Atypical contracts and the variation of contracts

Individual protection rights

Forms of discrimination

Discrimination - the protected characteristics

Termination of employment

Redundancy and transfers of undertaking

Trade union legislation

Privacy and confidential information

Health and safety

Study skills in employment law

List of legislation referred to

List of cases cited

Useful websites

Employment Law

This book

• Covers how employment law relates to all the key functions of HR including recruitment, discrimination, health and safety, parental rights and redundancies

• Easy to navigate and written in accessible language specifically for non-law students, the book also includes a glossary with clear explanations of technical terms

• Mapped to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module in Employment law but suitable for any non-CIPD HR or business postgraduate students

• New to this edition: Up to date coverage of the latest legal developments including discrimination and working time updates as well as the legal implications of Brexit including workers' rights and freedom of movement

• Online resources: lecturer guide, powerpoint slides and additional case studies

Description

Employment Law is the core textbook for the CIPD Level 7 module of the same name. Easy to read, jargon-free and full of case studies and useful examples this fully updated 16th edition provides a thorough grounding in UK employment law and how it applies in practice.

This definitive guide covers everything students need know to excel at their studies and begin a successful career as an HR professional. It covers the formation of the Contract of Employment, recruitment and selection, parental rights, discrimination and health and safety in the workplace. There is also essential coverage of unfair dismissal and redundancy.

This new edition is completely up to date with the latest cases and legislation including updates to discrimination law and working time. There is also guidance on the legal implications of Brexit such as freedom of movement, workers' rights and the change to procedural arrangements for the final court of appeal in UK cases. Reflective activities, case studies and explore further boxes encourage critical thinking, broader engagement with the topic and a clear understanding of how employment law applies in practice, Online resources include a lecturer guide, powerpoint slides and extra case studies to support learning and enable students to apply the theory in practice.

Author Information

David Lewis is Professor of Employment Law in the Law School at Middlesex University, UK.

Malcolm Sargeant was Professor of Labour Law in the Business School at Middlesex University, UK.

Ben Schwab is a Senior Lecturer in Employment Law at the University of Reading, UK.

Edition: 16

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781398604728

Ebook: 9781398604735 Pages: 464

Format (mm): 246x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Table of Contents

1 The sources and institutions of employment law

2 Formation of the contract of employment (1) – the sources of terms

3 Formation of the contract of employment (2) – implied terms of law

Recruitment and selection

Pay issues

Discrimination against employees (1)

Discrimination (2) – lawful discrimination, vicarious liability, burden of proof, enforcement and equality of terms

Parental rights

Health and safety at work

The regulation of working time

Variation, breach and termination of the contract of employment at common law

Unfair dismissal (1) – exclusions and the meaning of dismissal

Unfair dismissal (2) – potentially fair reasons and the concept of reasonableness

Redundancy

Unfair dismissal and redundancy claims

Continuity of employment and transfers of undertakings

Information and consultation

Trade unions and collective bargaining

Glossary

Employment Law

This book

• Builds knowledge in the core areas of employment law, including immigration, contracts, discrimination, equal pay and redundancy

• Features practical tools, checklists, case studies and real-life examples to help apply the knowledge in practice

• New to this edition: new material on the changeability of the law, family-friendly case law and out-of-court settlements, as well as updated case studies throughout

• Online resources: templates, forms and checklists including settlement offers, person specifications, appraisal forms, job induction checklists, preparation checklists for Employment Tribunals, additional references and links to podcasts

• Is part of the HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Description

The updated third edition of Employment Law is a clear and practical guide to understanding the complex, important system that regulates the relationship between employers and employees in the UK.

Understanding and applying the law effectively at work is essential for organizations. Employment Law offers a complete overview of the core components that form the interactions between an organization, its employees and the HR function. The third edition includes the latest developments and changes in law and HR perspectives, with new material on the changeability of the law, equal pay and parental leave.

Featuring practical tools, checklists, case studies and real-life examples, Employment Law builds legal knowledge in key areas including recruitment, contracts, discrimination, equal pay, health and safety and managing the end of the employment relationship. It is supported by case studies on topics such as early conciliation, implied rights and diversity and inclusion and online resources including person specification templates and appraisal forms and additional references.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides featuring exercises, examples and case studies. They are ideal for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers.

Author Information

Elizabeth Aylott has over 15 years' experience as an HR specialist and lecturer in areas of Employment Law and Employee Relations. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. She is based in Surrey, UK.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398603950

Ebook: 9781398603967 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Fundamentals

What is employment law?

The importance of employment law

Employment law and strategy

In practice

How it works

How you do it

Planning and action

Measurement

Conclusions and Government changes to employment law

Managing Employment Relations

This book

• Provides a thorough and up-to-date grounding in the concepts and processes of employment relations as well as coverage of the legal context

• New to this edition: brand new content on workers in the gig economy, the need for greater transparency in the employeremployee relationship and how to support and encourage diversity in the workplace

• Online resources: lecturer guides, lecture slides, sample essay questions and additional case studies for students and lecturers and annotated web links

• Covers managing conflict, workplace grievances, employee discipline and how to use mediation to resolve conflict

Description

Employment relations is concerned with the relationship between employees and their employers - one of the most important aspects of an HR role. Managing Employment Relations will give students a thorough grounding in the processes, context and practical application of employment relations and the skills they need for a successful career in HR.

Covering everything from the legal aspects of employment relations, essential policies, strategies and the changing social context to conflict resolution, mediation, employee engagement and workplace discipline, Managing Employment Relations is an indispensable guide. With brand new content on gig economy workers, supporting diversity in the workplace, individual and group policies and the need for greater transparency in the employer-employee relationship, this book is a comprehensive guide to the theory and practice of employment relations. Mapped to the CIPD Level 7 module in employment relations and full of case studies and exercises to help students understand the practical application of the core topics, this is an essential textbook for postgraduate HR students and practitioners in an employment relations role. Online resources include a lecturer guide, lecture slides, sample essay questions and additional case studies for students and lecturers as well as annotated weblinks.

Author Information

Tony Bennett is a Senior Lecturer at Sheffield Business School, Sheffield Hallam University, UK and a Visiting Fellow at the Institute for Research on Organizations, Work and Employment at the University of Central Lancashire, UK.

Richard Saundry is a Professor of HRM and Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK.

Virginia Fisher is a Senior Lecturer at the University of Exeter Business School, Exeter, UK.

Edition: 7

Date: 03/02/2020

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781789661453

Ebook: 9781789661460 Pages: 472

Format (mm): 240x185

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Table of Contents

Introduction

The concepts and processes of employment relations

The context of employment relations

Employment relations and the law

The global environment

Employment relations strategies, policies and change

Employee engagement

Managing employment relations

Employee representation

Employee involvement and participation

Managing workplace conflict

Managing workplace discipline

Managing employee grievances

Managing redundancy

The role of mediation in conflict resolution

Conclusion – Thoughts for the future

Employment Relations

A Critical and International Approach

This book

• Covers both the conceptual debates and functional areas of employment relations

• Considers the local, national and global effects on the practice of employment relations

• Online resources: lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides and additional cases as well as annotated web links and further reading for students

Edition: 1

Date: 18/02/2011

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843982685

Ebook: 9781843983255

Pages: 392

Format (mm): 248x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Description

Drawing on the latest research, Employment Relations is a key text for anyone studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module Managing Employment Relations as well as all those looking to expand their knowledge and understanding in this area. Covering both the conceptual debates and contextual factors relating to employment relations as well as key management interventions, this is invaluable reading for anyone looking to understand both the theory and practice of employment relations.

With coverage of the main players in employment relations - Trade Unions, Employers and the State - and critical discussion of the local, national and global effects on employment relations, Employment Relations provides a thorough grounding in the international context of employment relations. With comprehensive consideration of key workplace issues including employee engagement, discrimination, conflict, downsizing and redundancies, this is ideal reading for students and practitioners alike. Packed with exercises, examples and case studies, this book allows readers to take a critical approach to this crucial topic. Online supporting resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides, additional cases, annotated web links and further reading.

Author Information

Pauline Dibben is Senior Lecturer in Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK.

Gilton Klerck is Professor of Sociology at Rhodes University, South Africa.

Geoffrey Wood is Professor in Human Resource Management at the University of Sheffield, UK.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

Conceptual Debates and Contextual Factors

1 The Main Players in Employment Relations - Trade Unions, Employers, and the State

Theories of Employment Relations

Employment Relations and Human Resource Management

Local, National and Global Effects on the Practice of Employment Relations

Power and Authority

Management Interventions in Employment Relations

Voice

Employee Engagement

Pay and Reward

Discrimination, Difference and Diversity

Discipline and Grievance

Conflict and Dispute Resolution

Downsizing and Redundancy

Conclusion: The Relevance of Employment Relations and Comparative Employment Relations

Employee Relations

This book

• Provides practical tools, assessments and real-life examples including from Amazon and HSBC for planning, implementing and managing employee relations

• Shows how to align employee relations strategies to broader organizational objectives and improve business performance

• New to this edition: coverage of recent legislation changes relating to the new world of work, dispute resolution and deregulation; new and updated case studies on employee voice and industrial action

• Online resources: templates, questionnaires and further tools for development of an effective employee relations strategy

• Is part of the HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Description

The third edition of Employee Relations is a practical guide to the principles and practice of fostering positive relationships with employees to develop their engagement and achieve business success.

It features updated material on recent legislation changes including employment status in the gig economy and deregulation as a result of new international relations. Covering key areas such as conflict and dispute resolution, redundancies, rights and ethics, this book equips you with the skills and knowledge to plan, build and assess employee relations in any type of organization. Practical diagnostic tools and real-life examples from organizations including HSBC show how these strategies can be applied in practice.

With updated guidance and examples covering employee voice and the virtual workplace, Employee Relations is a vital resource for HR practitioners and students alike. Online resources include questionnaires and templates to support the development of an effective employee relations strategy.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides featuring exercises, examples and case studies. They are ideal for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers.

Author Information

Elizabeth Aylott is an experienced HR specialist and lecturer in the areas of employee relations and employment law. After a career in HR, both in industry and the charitable sector, she taught on CIPD programmes at all levels and lectured on HRM and business degree courses. She is also the author of Employment Law, published by Kogan Page. She is based in Surrey, UK.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398604834

Ebook: 9781398604919 Pages: 224

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Employment Law & Relations

Table of Contents

What is Employee Relations?

importance of Employee Relations

Relations and strategy

practice

Relations in practice

and action

Handbook of Learning and Development

Guide

Theory

Practice

This book

• Covers blended, social, experiential and digital learning as well as learning analytics and how AI, augmented and virtual reality can be used to support learning

• Outlines the role and responsibilities of an L&D professional and the essential skills needed to succeed

• Examines the latest development in the area including micro learning, connected learning, personalised learning and learning experiences

• Online resources: Lecture slides, Lecturer manual, student manual

• Provides a thorough grounding in the theory of L&D including the components of L&D, the distinction between L&D and training and discussion of how people learn

• Features case studies and examples to put the theory in context, reflective questions to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to encourage broad engagement with the topic

1

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398601888

Ebook: 9781398601895 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

Fundamentals of learning and development

The basis of learning and development

The context of learning and development

Learning culture

Organizational learning and the learning organization

Individual learning

Learning and development strategy

The contribution of learning and development to organizational performance

Learning analytics

The responsibility for learning and development

The role of the learning and development function

The role of the line manager

The process of learning

The nature of learning

Approaches to learning and development

Learning and development techniques

Areas of learning

Workplace learning

Social learning

Digital learning

Training

Planning and delivering learning events

Identifying learning needs

Planning learning events

Managing learning events

Transferring learning

learning events

Aspects of learning and development

Leadership and management development

training

Learning and development trends and issues

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace

This book

• New to this edition: a new chapter on the role of an L&D practitioner, critical examination of apprenticeships and greater international coverage and case studies

• Includes a 'what next' section in every chapter to extend learning in the subject area

• Provides additional questions in every chapter which can be used by individuals to reflect on their learning or for further discussion with a group

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and self-test questions.

• Is a core CIPD Level 3 textbook mapped to the CIPD qualifications and CIPD Profession Map 2.0

Description

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace is the ideal textbook for anyone studying CIPD L&D qualifications and apprenticeships at Level 3 or Level 5, as well as for practitioners new to an L&D role.

This book covers what is required of an L&D professional and how to meet and exceed these expectations, how to align L&D activity with organisational strategy and, crucially, how to identify learning needs and design effective L&D practice.

This new edition of Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace has been fully updated, reflecting the new CIPD Profession Map, and now has dedicated chapters on the different approaches to learning delivery, including face-to-face training and facilitation, technology-based learning, coaching, mentoring and social and collaborative learning. There is also expert guidance on learner engagement including insights from neuroscience and psychology, as well as advice on evaluating the impact of L&D. With case studies, activities and examples throughout, this new edition is an indispensable guide for students and new practitioners alike. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, annotated web links and self-test questions.

Author Information

Kathy Beevers, Chartered FCIPD, is a qualified trainer, coach and author. She runs a learning and qualifications consultancy, Lightbulb Learning Ltd, and is also the Chief External Quality Advisor (CEQA) for CIPD.

Andrew Rea, Affiliate MCIPD, is a trainer, coach and facilitator with a background in management. He works with a range of organisations, creating and facilitating L&D initiatives, and has contributed to several L&D textbooks.

David Hayden, Chartered FCIPD, is the L&D Digital Learning Portfolio Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He has been working with CIPD qualifications since 2007.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9780749498412

Ebook: 9780749498429 Pages: 352

Format (mm): 246x190

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

How to use this book

The L&D professional

The organisational context

Identifying learning and development needs

Designing learning and development activities

Delivery - Face-to-face training and facilitation

Delivery - Using technology

Delivery - Coaching and mentoring

Delivery - Social and collaborative learning

Engaging learners

Evaluating impact

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Learning for Organizational Development

How to Design, Deliver and Evaluate Effective L&D

This book

• Provides up-to-date thinking on the issues and opportunities facing learning and development (L&D), including the role of L&D in talent attraction and retention

• Includes case studies and reflective questions alongside the knowledge and understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)'s intermediate level courses in learning and development

• Arms the professional with the evidence for L&D's transformational impact, showing how to link L&D to individual performance and organizational success

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2017

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749477448

Ebook: 9780749477455 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Learning & Development

Description

Learning for Organizational Development presents how to design, deliver and evaluate effective learning and development (L&D) programmes. This definitive guide to L&D's function in enhancing individual performance and organizational success is a core text for those studying for L&D qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) Intermediate level as well as a useful handbook for L&D professionals looking to further their understanding of the latest developments.

Complete with case studies and reflective questions to aid comprehension, Learning for Organizational Development considers the strategic business function of L&D for communicating the vital contribution that it makes to both individual performance and organizational success. It explores the role of L&D in talent development, showing how to support line managers in developing their people to drive retention and attraction. It also addresses the importance of developing the leadership capability within the organization, and provides practical guidance and examples of what works.

Author Information

Eileen Arney is Teaching Director of Masters Programmes at The Open University Business School, UK. She is a Chartered Fellow of CIPD, has taught on level 7 CIPD programmes and has trained and practised as an executive coach. She has held senior civil servant posts including Assistant Director of National Police Training and has designed and delivered leadership programmes for senior managers in the UK and overseas.

Table of Contents

1 Understanding Organizational Development

2 The Role of Learning and Development in Talent Management

3 Developing Leadership and Management Capability

Using Facilitation Skills

Implementing Coaching and Mentoring

6 Evaluating Learning and Development in a Knowledge Economy

Studying Learning and Development

Context, Practice and Measurement

This book

• Is written and edited by experts with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining in the field of Learning and Development

• Has an easy to navigate structure that takes students step-by-step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, the context of learning and development and fully utilising data in order to build a business case for its value within an organisation

• Online resources: multiple-choice questions for self-assessment, web links, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and test banks

Description

Studying Learning and Development is the essential textbook for anyone studying the field in order to further their professional development, and HR practitioners wishing to extend their understanding of its background and practical application. With a clear layout that is easy to navigate, it takes you step by step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, understanding the broader context of learning and development - including the influential factors on achieving strategic objectives and developing policies that suit your organisational needs - and fully utilising learning and development data in order to build a business case for its value within your organisation.

Written and edited by experts in the field with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining, Studying Learning and Development is the first and only text to map the unit learning outcomes of the three core modules for the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate level qualification. Its broad coverage means that it is also ideal for any students studying Learning and Development as part of a wider HR or business degree and wanting to gain a deeper appreciation for the knowledge, skills and planning required for the success of its policies and activities in practice. The additional resources available online, including multiple choice questions for self-assessment, web links to further resources, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and text banks, will enhance learning of the text and ensure thorough grounding in the theory. There are also six ebooks available to support the CIPD Level 5 Studying Learning and Development optional modules.

Author Information

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University, UK.

Edition: 1

Date: 30/01/2017

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9781843984146

Ebook: 9781843984603 Pages: 256

Format (mm): 247x189

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D

Essentials for Practice

This book

• Mixes theory, case application and exercises to provide a comprehensive exploration of the topic

• Includes a range of case studies from different countries to illustrate how key ideas and theories are operating in practice around the globe, and are accompanied by questions or activities for students

• Online resources: instructor's manual, lecture slides and web links

Edition: 1

Date: 28/05/2014

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843983606

Ebook: 9781843983699

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 246x190

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development

Description

As the global economy has changed and thus organizations with it, more learning is delivered at and through work and individuals are encouraged to utilise the opportunities that advances in technology have brought to take charge of their own learning. Essential reading for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced postgraduate unit Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development Provision, Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D critically examines the contextual factors impacting upon these activities in organizations. With case studies from the public, private and voluntary sectors as well as examples of international practice, the book helps to identify some of the challenges L&D professionals face in a range of environments.

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D is suitable not just for students working towards a CIPD Level 7 qualification, but also for those studying more general business and management degrees, as well as anyone who may have studied the subject previously and wishes to engage in continuous professional development with regard to this key HR practice. Online supporting resources include an instructor's manual, lecture slides and web links.

Author Information

Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD.

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Table of Contents

1 Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development (Peter Cureton and Jim Stewart)

2 Individual and Collective Learning (Clair Doloriert, Jim Stewart and Sally Sambrook)

3 The External and Internal Context (Amanda Lee, Sophie Mills and Dalbir Sidhu)

4 Establishing Learning Needs (Tricia Harrison and Randhir Auluck)

5 Designing Learning Interventions (Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou)

6 Delivering and Facilitating Learning (Michelle McLardy and Nigel O’Sullivan)

7 Evaluating Learning and Development (Marian O’Sullivan and Michael McFadden)

8 Acting Professionally and Ethically (Peter Cureton and Maureen Royce)

9 Themes and the Future of DDE (Jim Stewart and Peter Cureton)

Continuing Professional Development

This book

• Examines the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the methods that can be used to create and implement a CPD plan

• New to this edition: increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, an outline of how to organize and encourage CPD and guidance on how senior members of the profession can benefit from CPD

• Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Edition: 2

Date: 22/01/2007

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781843981664

Ebook: 9780749482503 Pages: 176

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Learning & Development

Description

To maximise enjoyment of work and life requires a continual response to the changing world in which we live. Are you living to work or working to live? What would you like to be doing? We need to look within at our latent skills and abilities and explore ways of building on our current talents and developing new aspects of ourselves. Continuing Professional Development explores the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the different methods that can be used to analyse development needs and create and implement a CPD plan. It provides practical guidance and a theoretical overview of CPD, including examples and case studies.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Continuing Professional Development includes increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, outlines how to organize and encourage CPD and provides guidance on how senior members of the profession can use and benefit from CPD. Activities and self-diagnostic tools, critical debates about issues and coverage of how to organize and encourage CPD all bring the topic to life for CIPD students undertaking the Professional Development Scheme as well as general readers seeking to encourage CPD in the workplace. Online supporting resources include an instructor's manual and lecture slides.

Author Information

David Megginson is a professor of HRD at Sheffield Hallam University, UK. He is on both the membership and education committees of the CIPD and the CPD Working Group.

Vivien Whitaker is a lecturer, researcher and consultant at Sheffield Hallam University, UK.

Table of Contents

1 Exploring Continuing Professional Development

1 Clarifying Continuing Professional Development

Understanding Continuing Professional Development

Engaging in Continuing Professional Development

Identifying Development Needs

Prioritising Needs and Selecting Appropriate Activities

Undertaking Development Activities

Recording and Evaluating Development

Organisational Contribution to CPD

Consolidating Your CPD Achievements

Celebrating Success

Networking Your Future

Empowering Career Creativity

How People Learn

Designing Education and Training that Works to Improve Performance

This book

• Provides guidance for learning and development (L&D) professionals on how to apply insights from neuroscience, human behaviour and AI to learning design including tips on how to engage staff in training

• Shows how to develop user-led training initiatives to optimize development and retention

• Outlines how simulations can be used to replicate a real-world challenge as closely as possible and how to integrate programmes into employees' existing workflow

• Includes case studies from global organizations including BP and the BBC

• New to this edition: learning in a hybrid world; changes in education that enable building better systems; practical guidance on user-centred design and building programmes that work

Description

How can I design training so that it makes a real difference to employees' skills and development? This book gives L&D professionals everything they need to build effective learning experiences.

How People Learn provides L&D professionals a new way of thinking about learning by exploring what happens when we learn. It shows how to apply insights from neuroscience, human behaviour and artificial intelligence (AI) to learning design including tips on how to interest, excite and engage staff in training. Using the author's '5Di model', this book demonstrates how to define, design and deploy training into existing workflows so it works both for and with employees. It also explores how simulations can be used to replicate a real-world challenge as closely as possible.

The second edition features new material on learning in a hybrid world, and how to manage skills development and performance now that work, workplaces and workers have changed. It includes more practical guidance on building programmes with usercentred design and covers developments in the connection between learning and cognition, alongside case studies and examples from companies such as BP and the BBC.

Author Information

Nick Shackleton-Jones is HR Director, Talent & Learning at Deloitte, UK. His work focuses on building a better experience for employees and improving organizational performance. He was previously the Director of Learning and Performance Innovation at PA Consulting Group and Director of Learning Innovation and Technology at BP. He has also held senior roles in L&D at Siemens Communications and the BBC. Based in Reading, UK, in 2017, he is a previous award winner of the Colin Corder award by the Learning and Performance Institute for services to the learning industry.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398607194

Ebook: 9781398607200

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

Introduction – Everything you know about learning is wrong

1 Where’s my robot? Or ‘what AI taught us about learning’

2 How we learn – The affective context model

3 Re-imagine your world

4 Learning design – push or pull?

5 Learning elimination– Resources not courses

6 Education – The great learning prevention scheme

7 What to do about it – Techniques for human-centred learning design

8 Learning culture

9 The future of learning (and how to make it happen in a hybrid world)

10 Conclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Adjacent Learning

Using Insights from Outside the Organization to Develop Workplace Performance

This book

• Explains how to design learning using experiences from outside the traditional business setting to improve learner engagement, attention and performance

• Includes expert advice on why it's essential to consider experiences from other countries and industries to create diversity of thought in learning to achieve the best possible results

• Covers topics including acting, emotion, language, memory, observation and storytelling and explains how they can imform learning design

• Each chapter includes reflection points and key takeaways as well as advice, tips, examples and interview with leading L&D figures

Description

Use insights from outside the business to rethink workplace learning in order to drive individual and team performance.

Workplaces are not the only setting where employees learn. They are learning constantly in all areas of their lives. The problem is that learning and development (L&D) practitioners don't know how to apply the experiences from outside the traditional business setting to improve employee learning and drive business results. Adjacent Learning is a practical guide which solves this problem.

Topics covered include acting, difference and emotion through to language, observation and storytelling and explains how these can be used to deliver more effective workplace learning. There is also expert guidance on the importance of employees understanding the 'why' of learning as well as just the 'how' as well as why it's essential to consider experiences from other countries and industries to create diversity of thought which generates the best possible results. Reflection points and key takeaways are included in every chapter as well as interviews with leading figures in the L&D industry. This practical guide is also full of advice, tips and examples throughout to help L&D professionals design a robust learning strategy that will allow employees and the business to thrive.

Author Information

David Hayden is the L&D Digital Learning Portfolio Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) where he's been working since 2012. Prior to this he was a lecturer at University Centre Doncaster and has held various L&D roles in the private sector. He is based in Doncaster, UK.

Steve George is a Digital Learning Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), Prior to this he was a Learning Solutions Consultant at Lumesse. He is based in London, UK.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398608238

Ebook: 9781398608245 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

Why Effective Learning is Crucial for Business Success

Learning by Looking Beyond the Workplace

Framework for Outstanding Learning

the Why as well as How

Importance of Diversity of Thought

Success

Performance

the Impact

Neuroscience for Learning and Development

How to Apply Neuroscience and Psychology for Improved Learning and Training

This book

• Provides updated examples and practical tips underpinned by scientific research on how to design and deliver effective learning and training

• Presents a scientific evidence base to help build a stronger business case to budget holders for L&D and training interventions

• Contains examples from a range of international L&D practitioners who have applied such approaches in practice, in organizations including Humanitarian Leadership Academy, Simply Learning UK and The Open University

• New to this edition: new chapter on creating an autonomous learning culture; new tools and strategies to enable L&D professionals to reflect on their own learning and apply it when designing initiatives

Description

Neuroscience for Learning and Development provides L&D professionals the tools and ideas to design and deliver effective initiatives with knowledge of how our brains process information.

Using the latest research and concepts, this book covers areas such as motivation, habits and the link between sleep and learning. It demonstrates how to create effective learning environments and make learning 'stickier' through the use of stories. The practical tools and guidance can be applied in different contexts, such as digital learning, in-person training sessions, lectures and presentations.

The third edition contains a new chapter on creating an autonomous learning culture. It explains the strategies, tools and techniques L&D professionals can use to encourage and support employees to learn in the flow of work. With insights from L&D practitioners who have applied these approaches in organizations such as Humanitarian Leadership Academy, Simply Learning UK and The Open University, this edition is an indispensable book for creating and maintaining workplace learning that benefits people and organizations.

Author Information

Stella Collins, MSc, FITOL, is co-founder and Chief Learning Officer at Stellar Labs. Based in Mechelen, Belgium, she and her team pragmatically apply principles from neuroscience and psychology to consult, design and build practical performance focused solutions with measurable ROI. She has trained thousands of learning professionals in brain friendly principles over more than 20 years in L&D.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/06/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398608337

Ebook: 9781398608405

Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

1 Why neuroscience and learning are good companions

2 The science of your brain

3 What to do when someone says ‘neuroscience says…’

4 The science of learning

5 Motivating learners from curiosity to persistence

6 Use your sense: Getting information from the outside world and into your head

7 Attention, learning and why Goldilocks deserves recognition

8 Making learning meaningful and valuing intelligence

9 Meaningful memories: From encoding to forgetting

Testing, experimenting, habits and practice

11 Review and reflect: Getting rid of the magic wand

Stickier stories and food for thought

Sleep and learning

Your brain and digital learning

Creating an autonomous learning culture

The future is already with us

The end of this journey and the start of more

Learning and Development

A Practical Introduction

This book

• Features practical tools and assessments to build knowledge and skills to implement a successful L&D strategy

• Includes real-life examples such as WhatsApp to show how strategies and technologies are applied in practice

• New to this edition: chapter on the design of learning interventions; material on the impact of virtual learning, recent technological developments and accessibility in learning; case studies on learning through change and communities of practice

• Online resources: video clips from L&D specialists, an annotated bibliography, extended case studies and self-evaluation materials

• Is part of the HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Description

How can learning initiatives contribute to employee and organizational success? This is a practical introduction to the principles of designing and delivering effective training and L&D programmes.

Providing diagnostic tools, scenarios and case studies, Learning and Development demonstrates how to link learning to strategic business goals and explores both the benefits and complexities associated with L&D. This updated third edition features a new chapter on designing learning interventions, covering technology-led development and the impact of virtual learning. There is also guidance on making learning and development strategies accessible and inclusive for all employees, and information on metrics that can be used for measuring effectiveness.

Learning and Development features guidance in essential areas including identifying L&D needs, selecting the most appropriate types of intervention and the processes of measurement and evaluation. Online resources include extended case studies, an annotated literature review and self-evaluation tools.

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides featuring exercises, examples and case studies. They are ideal for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers.

Author Information

Rebecca Page-Tickell is Director of MBA programmes and Director of Education and Experience at the Royal Docks School of Business and Law, University of East London, UK. A Principal Practitioner with the Association for Business Psychology, she has a particular expertise in self-managed learning and providing coaching to senior managers and directors. She previously held a number of senior L&D and HR management positions across a variety of industries and in multinational corporations.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398605800

Ebook: 9781398605831 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

1 Fundamentals of learning and development

1 Defining learning and development

2 The importance of learning and development

3 Learning and development, organization and human resource management (HRM) strategy

4 How learning and development works

2 In practice

How do you do it?

6 Design of learning and development interventions

Planning and action

Measurement

Conclusion

Workplace Learning

How to Build a Culture of Continuous Employee Development

This book

• Demonstrates the individual and companywide benefits of building a culture of continuous workplace learning and examines the impact of recent changes to the workplace on learning and development

• Provides an evidence-based model to enable Learning & Development professionals to identify the key learning needs of the organization and measure success

• Includes case studies from companies who have successfully established a culture of continuous workplace learning including Microsoft and The Happy Company

• New to this edition: a chapter on organizational learning and distinguishing self-determined and self-defined learning; new and updated case studies; a practical tool that allows companies to measure their current learning culture

Description

How can I develop an effective workplace learning culture to drive employee and business success? This new edition of Workplace Learning provides the knowledge and tools to create an outstanding learning culture in the new world of work.

It's no longer enough for Learning and Development professionals to only offer a catalogue of workplace learning courses: competing effectively in today's business environment requires organizations and their employees to adapt and learn daily. Providing an evidence-based model for identifying key areas of focus and measuring success,

Workplace Learning is a practical guide that shows how to build and embed a culture that continuously encourages and engages employees in learning and achieve business success.

The updated second edition features new material on organizational and self-determined learning, and case studies from Microsoft, Novartis and PwC. Packed with practical suggestions, tools and tips, Workplace Learning is an essential resource for establishing an outstanding continuous learning culture in all parts of the organization.

Author Information

Nigel Paine is a change-focused leader with a worldwide reputation and extensive experience in leadership and consultancy. Based in London, UK, he runs his own consultancy which focuses on leadership, creativity, innovation and e-learning, working with companies in Europe, Brazil, Australia and the US. A former Head of Training and Development at BBC, he is now an academic director and member of the international advisory board at the University of Pennsylvania, board member of Management Issues and a Masie Learning Fellow. He presents a monthly TV programme, Learning Now TV, co-presents From Scratch podcast and regularly writes articles for magazines and journals about development, technology and leadership.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398601505

Ebook: 9781398601512 Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

Exploring the concepts of learning culture and learning organization

1 What is a learning culture?

2 Where did learning culture come from?

3 Senge and The Fifth Discipline

4 Bob Garratt and The Learning Organization

5 What are the core components of a learning culture?

2 Case studies - Learning culture in action

6 Lubricating learning - A case study of the WD-40 Company

7 Taking the medicine - Novartis and curiosity

8 happy Ltd and HT2 - Learning culture in action

9 Dressing up a learning culture - Cotton On Group

3 Building a learning culture - A gyroscope for organizational effectiveness

10 Work and learning

11 Why technology is an essential component of a learning culture

12 What are the essential components of a learning culture?

Learning Experience Design

How to Create Effective Learning that Works

This book

• Explains how to use emotion, attention, memory, engagement, enjoyment, transfer, practice and retention to create effective learning content and interactions

• Shows how to make evidence-based decisions when creating learning and development (L&D) content and initiatives to ensure that the learning makes a tangible difference to employees

• Includes practical examples and expert advice on how to design each aspect of learning content including audio, visual, text, graphics, simulations and both virtual and augmented reality

• Provides coverage of user experience (UX), design thinking and blended learning which can be applied to face-to-face, remote and digital learning

• Contains a jargon-busting glossary to demystify learning experience terms and acronyms

Description

How can I create in-person learning that engages people? How can I build digital learning that is effective? How can I develop learning content that can be used remotely and ensure that the learning sticks? Learning Experience Design has the answers to all these questions and more.

This book is a practical guide for all learning and development (L&D) professionals. It covers everything from what learning experience design (LXD) is, the role of the L&D professional in LXD, and what the main areas to consider when designing learning are including emotion, attention, memory, engagement, enjoyment, transfer, practice and learning retention. It includes practical advice for all areas of learning design including text, graphics, audio, visual, simulations, AR/VR, question and social design. There is also essential guidance on instructional design, UX (user experience) design and how to design effective learning analytics.

The final part of the book covers design thinking, blended learning and discussion of LMSs (learning management systems), LXPs (learning experience platforms) and LRSs (learning record stores). With examples, tips, case studies and advice throughout, this is an invaluable book for anyone wanting to make an impact with their learning design and ensure knowledge, skills and performance improvement.

Author Information

Donald Clark has over 30 years' experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher and is also a Visiting Professor at the University of Derby.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398602625

Ebook: 9781398602632 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Table of Contents

1 Learning experience design

Learning experience designers

Emotion, attention and motivation

Interface design

Text and graphics

Audio for learning

Video and animation

Engagement, questions and feedback

Scenarios and simulations

VR and AR

Games and gamification

Social learning

Transfer and practice

Workflow, curation and data

The Learning and Development Handbook

A Learning Practitioner’s Toolkit

This book

• Provides practical tips, tools and models to improve performance both immediately and for mid and long-term success

• Shows how to embed digital and social learning into an organization's L&D offering

• Includes guidance on engaging stakeholders in learning and aligning L&D strategy with overall business strategy

• Explains how to use neuroscience to deliver brain-friendly learning content for improved learning retention

• Demonstrates how to measure and evaluate the effectiveness of learning and build these insights into future L&D decisions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789663327

Ebook: 9781789663334

Pages: 360

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Description

The skills needed in today's business world are not the same as they were in the past. Therefore, upskilling, reskilling and developing staff has never been more important. However, classroom training isn't the best way to achieve this with employees forgetting more than 70% of what they've been taught within just one day. Learning outside the workplace is social, digital and immediate and companies need to embrace this to achieve the productivity, performance and revenue benefits that come from effective learning.

The Learning and Development Handbook is a practical guide for L&D professionals wanting to move away from traditional classroom teaching but not sure where to start. Full of practical tips and advice, this is urgent reading for anyone in the learning profession.

The Learning and Development Handbook includes advice on how to embed social and digital learning, make the most of blended learning, adopt brain-friendly learning and design more effective learning content for improved employee engagement and performance. This book also provides guidance on how to identify learning needs in an organization, gather evidence to engage stakeholders and align L&D strategy with overall business strategy. There is also expert guidance on how to evaluate and measure the effectiveness of learning, where to find the data needed to support learning activity. Written by an L&D practitioner, for L&D practitioners, this book is packed full of tips, hints, tools and models that can be used to improve both employee and overall business performance in the immediate, middle-term and long-term future.

Author Information

Michelle Parry-Slater is an award-winning L&D professional with more than 20 years' experience in the industry. She is the Founder and Director of Kairos Modern Learning, an L&D consultancy specializing in driving a shift from traditional courses to the best of digital, social and face-to-face workplace learning, working with clients such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), Co-op and Duke of Edinburgh Awards. She is also the Lead Volunteer for L&D for Girlguiding UK and was listed as one of the Top 20 Corporate eLearning Movers and Shakers of 2018 by eLearning Industry.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Practical L&D Tips

Practical L&D – Getting Started

Strategy for L&D

Stakeholder engagement

Consultative L&D

Data and Evaluation

Social Learning

Digital Learning

Blending Learning

Frameworks

ICE – Information, Communication, Education

EPC – Environment, Permission and Culture

The 3Rs – Required, Resourced, Referred

Strategies

or revolution

practice

Hold it lightly and celebrate success

Experiential Learning

A Practical Guide for Training, Coaching and Education

This book

• Combines an in-depth theoretical analysis of experience-based learning with practical international case studies, examples and tools that address the main factors to consider when developing and delivering learning experiences

• New to this edition: fresh material on the mechanisms underpinning learning, mindfulness and wellbeing, experience and language and digital games in the design of multi-sensory experiences along with new international case studies and examples

• Online resources: 'Introduction to Sensory Intelligence' audio files

Edition: 4

Date: 03/08/2018

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749483036

Ebook: 9780749483043

Pages: 376

Format (mm): 235x160

Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development

Description

In a fast-paced and innovative world, traditional training methods can no longer be relied on to improve performance, engagement or promote behavioural change. Experience-based learning, in which the experience is central to the learning process, is more affordable, appealing and effective than ever before.

Experiential Learning combines in-depth theory with international case studies from companies including KidZania, Shell and the UK National Health Service (NHS) and numerous practical tools for developing and delivering learning experiences in both for-profit and not-for-profit organizations. It presents a simple model, the Learning Combination Lock, which enables trainers, coaches, facilitators and educators to select the best strategies for their circumstances to maximize comprehension, knowledge retention and application. Essential reading for anyone designing and delivering learning experiences, it covers areas such as experiential learning activities, indoor and outdoor learning environments, creative learning, working with the senses and emotions to help promote learning, and reviewing and evaluating initiatives.

In addition to featuring new international case studies and examples, this updated fourth edition of Experiential Learning contains new material on the mechanisms underpinning learning, mindfulness and wellbeing, experience and language and digital games and the design of multi-sensory experiences. Online supporting resources consist of audio files exploring sensory intelligence.

Author Information

Colin Beard is a professor and National Teaching Fellow at Sheffield Business School. He works with leading global public and private organizations to design and facilitate experiential learning strategies. He is the author of The Experiential Learning Toolkit, also published by Kogan Page.

John P. Wilson holds positions at Sheffield and Oxford Universities. His experience in education and consultancy spans a variety of countries and sectors, including aerospace engineering, banking, law and pharmaceuticals. He has written and edited a number of books and articles, and has blogged for the CIPD.

Table of Contents

1 A brief introduction to experiential learning

1

Experiential learning: foundations and fundamentals

2 Practical answers to some theoretical questions

3 Designing, delivering and evaluating experiential learning

2 The Learning Combination Lock model

4 The outer-world learning environment: other humans, other living creatures, and spaces and places (the belonging dimension)

5

Experiential learning activities, behaviours and actions (the doing dimension)

6 Sensory experience and sensory intelligence (SI) (the sensing dimension)

7 Experience and emotions (the feeling dimension)

8 Experience, knowing and intelligence (the knowing dimension)

9 Deeper learning (the being dimension)

3

Experiential learning and the future

10 Imagining, experiencing and learning from the future

Organizational Behaviour

People, Process, Work and Human Resource Management

This book

• Bridges the gap between OB and HRM and shows you how to put effective people management at the heart of your organization

• Examines the role of corporate governance in shaping the scope of managerial choices in organizations and what this means in practice

• Looks at the ethical dimensions of OB that are increasingly important to understand in the context of 'good employers' and global employment standards

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2013

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749463601

Ebook: 9780749463618

Pages: 360

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations

Description

Author Information

Raisa Arvinen-Muondo works in HR management in Luanda, Angola. She has undertaken doctoral research at the University of Bedfordshire, on the career development of Angolan professionals within Western multinational organizations, focusing on the impact of experiences associated with international living.

Stephen J Perkins is Dean of London Metropolitan Business School and a Visiting Research Fellow at Cass Business School. In addition to having served in several universities, he has held senior management posts in industry at times of transformational change and consulted with private and state-owned organizations internationally.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction

1 Introduction – Stephen Perkins and Raisa Arvinen-Muondo

2 Individuals at work under an employment relationship

2 Managing diverse identities at work – Janice Johnson and Christina Schwabenland

3 Perception, making decisions and people management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo

4 Motivation at work: engagement and facilitation – Nahid Rozalin

3 Employing human resources to work together for a purpose

5 Managing performance – Caroline Bolam and Sarah Jones

6 Leadership, communication and organizational effectiveness – Linda Holbeche

7 Talent management – Raisa ArvinenMuondo and Qi Wei

4 Shifting contexts for organizational behaviour

8 Conflict, power and politics – Philip Davies and Rod Smith

9 Organizational culture – Eliot Lloyd

10 Managing organizational change – Faten Baddar Al-Husan and Konstantinos Kakavelakis

11 Creativity, innovation and the management of knowledge – Pauline Loewenberger

5 Summation and reflection

12 Coda: HRM and OB – accenting the social – Stephen Perkins and Raisa ArvinenMuondo

Data-Driven Organization Design

Delivering Perpetual Performance Gains Through the Organizational System

This book

• Shows how to optimize the design of an organization to meet its strategies through the use of data and analytics

• Explores how to collect, sort and analyze people data in order to obtain actionable organizational insights

• Contains case studies and examples from real-world interventions, and describes how to avoid common challenges and pitfalls

• New to this edition: material on organizational planning and analysis, role design and job architecture, position management lifecycle and delta reporting and new case studies and examples

Description

SHORTLISTED: CMI Management Book of the Year 2017 - Management Futures Category

Understand how to drive business performance with your organizational data and analytics in the second edition of Data-Driven Organization Design

Using data and analytics is a key opportunity for businesses to transform performance and achieve success. With a data-driven approach, all the elements of the organizational system can be connected to design an environment in which people can excel and attain competitive advantage. Data-Driven Organization Design provides a practical framework for HR and organization design practitioners to build a baseline of data, set objectives, carry out fixed and dynamic process design, map competencies, and right-size the organization. It shows how to collect the right data, present it meaningfully and ask the most relevant questions of it to help complex, fluid organizations constantly evolve and meet moving objectives.

This updated second edition contains new material on organizational planning and analysis, role design and job architecture, position management lifecycle and delta reporting. Alongside this, new case studies and examples will show how these approaches have been applied in practice. Whether planning a long-term transformation, a large redesign or an individual small project, Data-Driven Organization Design will demonstrate how to make the most of your organizational data and analytics to drive business performance.

Author Information

Rupert Morrison is the CEO and co-founder of Concentra Analytics, a software provider and consultancy firm which captures, manages, and analyzes data to improve organizational operations and execute strategies more effectively. Concentra Analytics works with clients including HSBC, Tesco, Aviva and FedEx and has won a Most Innovative award in The Sunday Times FastTrack Tech 100. Based in London, UK, he is also an international conference speaker and industry writer, whose contributions have featured in The HR Director, Personnel Today and the SHRM Blog.

2

Date: 03/10/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398603264

Ebook: 9781398603271 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Organizations

Table of Contents

Introduction

Data driven organization design

and core concepts

design

articulation and design criteria

options and business case

design

The data goldmine

Objectives management

Fixed process design

Dynamic process design

Competency management

Making it real

Common traps

How will it work in practice (HOWWIP)?

Implementation

Workforce planning

Talent management, succession development and planning

Organizational getting things done

Sustaining the edge

Myths of Work

Dispel the Misconceptions and Succeed in the World of Work

This book

• Explores over 30 of the most confusing myths about the workplace - from the serious to the silly - and destroys them with accurate easyto-apply antidotes and advice

• Overturns stereotypes, wrongly-held views and misinformation to help you be better manager in the modern workplace

• New to this edition: updated to include a focus on remote work, digital communication, advice on what 'social distance' actually means in the workplace and more myths debunked around issues such as performance and productivity

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

Buying a table tennis table will make your staff happier. Working eight hours a day, five days a week, will result in the most productivity. Paying higher salaries will always result in higher motivation. But will it really?

There are a staggering number of myths, stereotypes and out-of-date rules that abound in the workplace. This can make it feel impossible to truly know how to get the most out of your career, your team and your company. In Myths of Work, Ian MacRae take an entertaining and evidence-based look at the most pervasive myths about our working lives, from the serious to the ridiculous, to give you the insight you need to become a better manager in the modern workplace. Fascinating real life case studies from organizations around the world display the myths (and how to overcome them) in practice.

Myths of Work combines business thinking with psychology to give you practical insights, a lively writing style and a handy dip-in-and-out structure to form your ultimate guide to becoming a better and enlightened manager.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the myth-busting test. Both entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Ian MacRae is a work psychologist, consultant, speaker, author and Managing Director of High Potential Psychology. He works with, and writes about, a wide range of topics relating to psychology and the workplace. He developed the High Potential Traits Inventory (HPTI), a personality assessment which has been translated into dozens of languages and used by over 50,000 people around the world. He is also the author of Myths of Social Media and co-author of Motivation and Performance

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398608573

Ebook: 9781398608580

Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x135

Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

Staff should work eight-hour days, Monday to Friday

2 Working from home reduces productivity

Social media should never be used at work

4 Listening to music while working is distracting

5 Health and safety is the enemy

6 Surveillance improves performance

7 Creating a Google-style office environment will make staff more innovative

8 Mindfulness is the answer to all problems

9 Neuroscience is the silver bullet to workplace problems

10 Start-ups need a different type of leader to succeed

It’s better to have higher self-esteem at work

12 We only use 10 per cent of our brain at work

13 Making workplaces sustainable is a burden

14 The best way to motivate people is to pay them more

15 Employees who work the longest hours are the most valuable people

16 People should retire at 65

17 Perfectionists make the best employees

18 Women aren’t as competitive as men at work

19 People’s personalities can be sorted into categories at work

20 Sexuality and gender should be taken into account at work

21 Millennials are changing the workplace

Co-workers should not form romantic relationships

23 Teaching and training are the same

Annual appraisals are the best way to measure performance

25 High achievers always make great managers

26 A computer is going to take your job

Open-plan offices are always the best option

Organization Development

A Practitioner’s Guide for OD and HR

This book

• Provides a complete guide for both students and practitioners to implementing effective OD to drive performance and growth

• Includes theory overviews as well as tools, techniques and international case studies from organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield

• Explores HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, employee engagement, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change

• New to this edition: chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation, organization health and 'use of self', material on digitization, OD in SMEs, competence profiles and OD education and development, new case studies and practice suggestion boxes at the end of each chapter

Description

Organization Development (OD) is key to ensuring that organizations and their people can adapt to and engage in ongoing change in today's fast-paced and competitive world. How can those responsible for managing change determine the most appropriate course of action for their organization's needs and maximize capability?

Written by two of the leading experts in the field, Organization Development is an essential guide to the theories, practices, tools and techniques for achieving success. It explores the role of HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change.

Alongside international case studies from organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield, UK, this revised third edition of Organization Development contains new chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation and organization health and 'use of self'. With fresh material on digitization, OD in SMEs, and competence profiles, this is an indispensable handbook to understanding, communicating and implementing organization development approaches for both experienced practitioners and students.

Author Information

Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge has over 30 years' experience of delivering transformational change in a range of international organizations, including the BBC and Singapore's public sector agencies. A widely published author and international conference speaker, she was voted a Top Influential Thinker by HR Magazine in 2017 and 2019.

Linda Holbeche is Co-Director of the Holbeche Partnership, Adjunct Professor at Imperial College London Business School, UK, and Visiting Professor at four other UK universities. She acts as consultant on OD, HR, Strategy and Leadership. She is Fellow of Roffey Park and the Institute of Employment Studies and was previously Director of Research and Policy at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Director of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation. She is the author of The Agile Organization, also published by Kogan Page.In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Edition: 3

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781789667912

Ebook: 9781789667929 Pages: 576

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

A practitioner’s guide for Organization Development

OD history and theory overview

What is OD? Its brief history

Theories and practices of OD: a theory overview

OD cycle of work

Theories and practices of OD - the OD cycle and the entry and contracting phase

Theories and practices of OD - the diagnostic phase

Theories and practices of OD - the intervention phase

Theories and practices of OD - the evaluation phase

OD and change

Living at the edge of chaos and change

Back-room and front-room change matters

Can behavioural change be made easy?

The Organization Development practitioner

The Organization Development practitioner

Power and politics in Organization Development

Additional thoughts

What is an organization? What is organization health?

How to build up your presence and impact on organization life

HR in relation to OD: theory and practice

HR in relation to OD

Organization Design

Transformation and culture change

Building organizational agility and resilience

A culture conducive to innovation and learning

Building the context for employee engagement

Developing effective leadership

Postscript – towards a better tomorrow

References and further reading

Index

Developing People and Organisations

This book

• Helps students develop effective analytical and problem-solving skills as they understand key OD and HRD issues

• Explains concepts and theoretical approaches clearly and provides activities to help cement understanding

• Online resources: instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links

Edition: 1

Date: 28/08/2012

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9781843983132

Ebook: 9781843983316 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 246x191

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizational Development

Description

Developing People and Organisations introduces and explores concepts relevant to the learning outcomes for the optional units in CIPD's Level 5 Intermediate qualifications in human resource development (HRD) and organisational design and development. It provides a practical and accessible exposition of key theories informing the professional practice of HRD so students can explain and analyse the organisational context of HRD practice and describe, compare and critically evaluate a range of theories and approaches.

Written and edited by CIPD-accredited experts in the field and mapped to CIPD's HR Profession Map, Developing People and Organisations covers key topics such as organisation design and development, developing coaching and mentoring in organisations, meeting OD needs and developments in HRD. It includes reflective activities, annotated further reading, a glossary and case studies to encourage the application of theory to a practical working environment. Online supporting resources include an instructor's manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links.

Author Information

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University, UK.

Table of Contents

1 Organisation Design (Gary Connor, Ian McLean and Michael McFadden)

2 Organisation Development (Sophie Mills, Kristen Stevens, Krish Pinto, Amanda Lee)

3 Developing Coaching and Mentoring within Organisations (Terrence Wendell Brathwaite, Jill Ashley-Jones, Rosalind Maxwell-Harrison)

4 Meeting Organisational Development Needs (Jim Stewart, Dalbir Sidhu)

5 Contemporary Developments in Human Resource Development (Jim Stewart, Sharon McGuire)

6 Knowledge Management (Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins)

7 Improving Organisational Performance (Patricia Rogers, Michelle McLardy, Raymond Rogers, Susan Barnes)

Resources, Organizational Development

People and Organisational Development

A New Agenda for Organisational Effectiveness

This book

• Provides examples of emergent theories of OD and HRM and details of how these can be applied in the workplace

• Includes international case studies showing both successful and unsuccessful attempts at change

• Online resources: additional case studies and practical tools

Edition: 1

Date: 01/01/2012

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843982692

Ebook: 9781843983279 Pages: 376

Format (mm): 242x190

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizational Development

Description

People and Organisational Development is ideal for both practitioners and students alike. Setting out a new agenda for organisational effectiveness, this book not only covers emergent theories of organisational development and human resources management, it also gives practical examples for how these theories can be applied. Covering everything from how HR can support strategic change and how technology can be an agent of transformation to performance management, diversity, talent management and emotion at work, this book firmly places HR at the heart of a modern approach to OD.

Crucially, People and Organisational Development doesn't just examine successful change initiatives, it also covers the unsuccessful attempts at organisational change and what can be learnt from these. There is also invaluable discussion of the OD role of HRD in ethics, corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability. Packed with international case studies and examples, this is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Organisation Design and Organisation Development module and everyone wanting to make a difference to the development of their people and their organisation. Online supporting resources include additional case studies and practical tools.

Author Information

Helen Francis is Director of the Edinburgh Institute of Leadership and People Management (EILPM) and Reader within Edinburgh Napier Business School, UK.

Linda Holbeche is Visiting Professor at both the University of Bedfordshire and Cass Business School and an Associate at Ashridge Business School, UK.

Martin Reddington was formerly Global Programme Director, HR Transformation, at Cable & Wireless. Since leaving Cable & Wireless, he blends academic research with consultancy.

Table of Contents

1 Organisational Effectiveness - A New Agenda for Organisational Development (OD) and Human Resource Management (HRM) (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington)

2 The Strategic Context for The New OE (Linda Holbeche)

3 The Historical and Theoretical Background to Organisation Development (Naomi Stanford)

4 Developing an Organisational Strategy from an HR Perspective (Mark Withers)

5 Organisational Culture and Cultural Integration (Valerie Garrow and Graeme Martin)

6 An ER Perspective on Organisational Effectiveness (John Purcell)

7 Transforming HR to Support Strategic Change (Peter Reilly)

8 Technology as an Agent of Transformation (Martin Reddington)

9 Critical HRD and Organisational Effectiveness (Allan Ramdhony)

10 The Role of Line Managers in HRM, Learning and Innovation (John Castledine and Douglas W. S. Renwick)

11 Strategic Workforce Capability - Planning for a New Era (Roger Cooper and Melanie Wood)

12 Performance Management and Reward (Roger Cooper and Adrian Furnham)

13 Inclusive Talent Management and Diversity (Eddie Blass and Gillian Maxwell)

14 Employer Branding and Organisational Effectiveness (Helen Francis and Martin Reddington)

15 The OD Role of HRD in Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility and Sustainability (Carole Parkes)

16 Emotion at Work (Chiara Amati and Chris Donnegan)

17 The New OE - Future Prospects and Possibilities (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington)

The Agile Organization

How to Build an Engaged, Innovative and Resilient Business

This book

• Demonstrates how to design agile organizations and adapt existing people practices, including working patterns, job design, workforce planning and employee engagement

• New to this edition: new content on building agile careers and hybrid forms of working; how inclusion and wellbeing support individual resilience and contribute to improved performance across the organization

• Features case studies from organizations including the Alliance Manchester Business School, the UK National Health Service (NHS), SNC-Lavalin's Atkins business and General Electric (GE), new case studies; including how organizations responded to COVID-19

Description

The key to retaining competitive advantage in a volatile business world is agility. The third edition of The Agile Organization shows how to develop capabilities across the organization to adapt.

With helpful checklists, tips and advice, this is a practical blueprint to building both agility and resilience at individual, team and organizational levels. It covers how to design agile organizations as well as how to implement agile models into existing organizations and people practices. There is guidance on how agility can be applied to talent management, flexible working patterns and the importance of mobilizing and energizing employees for change.

This edition contains new material on agile mindsets and enterprise agile planning, alongside how hybrid forms of working can enhance resilience. There is also extended material on how inclusion and wellbeing initiatives can support individual resilience and innovation to improve performance across the organization. Case studies include ING, the University of California, Berkeley, the UK National Health Service (NHS) and SNC-Lavalin's Atkins business. This book is an essential read for HR and OD specialists, senior leaders and managers who want transform their organization and build an agile business.

Author Information

Linda Holbeche is co-director of The Holbeche Partnership, and was previously Director of Research and Policy at the CIPD. She was Director of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation and of Research and Strategy at Roffey Park and is Visiting Professor at five UK universities. In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine and is the co-author of Organization Development, also published by Kogan Page. She is based in Sussex, UK.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/06/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398608665

Ebook: 9781398608672 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

Why go agile?

Why are agility and resilience so elusive?

The resiliently agile organization

Agile strategizing

Agile implementation

Agile linkages

Designing for agile

Agile people processes

HR’s role in building a high-performance work climate

Nurturing employee engagement and resilience

Change and transformation

Building a change-able culture

Agile leadership

Conclusion

Organizational Planning and Analysis

Building the Capability to Secure Business Performance

Title

This book

• Explains what organizational planning and analysis is and how it can improve business performance

• Outlines the difference between strategic and operational workforce planning and how to embed robust succession planning

• Shows how to match people to new or changing roles and identify any skills gaps in the organization

• Covers how to use people analytics to improve the return on investment (ROI) for each employee in the organization

• Includes case studies from KPMG, Sainsbury's, WPP, Accenture, TSB, Johnson & Johnson, Aer Lingus and FedEx.

Description

What is the cost of employees today and what will this be in the future? This book explains how to take a data-driven approach to workforce planning and allow the business to reach its strategic goals.

Organizational Planning and Analysis (OP&A) is a data-driven approach to workforce planning. It allows HR professionals, OD practitioners and business leaders to monitor an organization's activities and analyse business data to regularly adjust plans to ensure that the business succeeds. This book covers everything from how to build an OP&A function, the difference between strategic and operational workforce planning and how to manage demand and supply through to how to match people to new or changing roles and develop robust succession planning. Organizational Planning and Analysis also covers how OP&A works with HR operations including recruitment, L&D, reward and performance management and includes a chapter on new human capital analytics which allow a business to improve the return on investment for each of its employees.

Full of practical advice and step by step guidance, this book is also supported by case studies from organizations including KPMG, Sainsbury's, WPP, Accenture, TSB, Johnson & Johnson, Aer Lingus and FedEx.

Author Information

Rupert Morrison is the CEO and co-founder of Concentra Analytics, a software provider and consultancy firm which captures, manages and analyses data to improve organizational operations and execute strategies more effectively. Concentra Analytics works with clients including HSBC, Tesco, Aviva and FedEx and has won a Most Innovative award in The Sunday Times FastTrack Tech 100. Based in London, UK, he is also an international conference speaker and industry writer, whose contributions have featured in Forbes, HR Director and Personnel Today.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398605817

Ebook: 9781398605862

Pages: 384

Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

Organizational planning and analytics

Data-driven organization design

Financial planning and analytics

Making it real - transformation and optimization

Introduction

Stage 1 - Preparing to execute

Implementation

Stage 4 - Ongoing optimization

Workforce Planning

Introduction

Supply forecasting and top-down demand planning

Bottom-up position planning, finalizing the workforce plan and monitoring progress

OP&A analysis

Introduction

Laying the foundations for effective OP&A analysis

Ignoring statistical traps and leveraging data science

The OP&A function

Introduction

Scoping the macro operating design and writing the business case

Detailing the OP&A function

Making the OP&A function real

Glossary

Business Resilience

A Practical Guide to Sustained Progress Delivered at Pace

This book

• Focuses on a new vision for managing continuous organizational improvement by enhancing product development, service delivery and customer value

• Provides a roadmap to establishing business resilience foundations, where resilience is part of the everyday culture so the company can survive and thrive during times of crisis

• Explains how businesses can adapt to work differently depending on the level of disruption and change at that moment in time, from gradual innovation to swarming on a problem

• Demonstrates how to improve current practices by combining them with new 'progress at pace' and business resilience models, building on what the organization does well and avoiding unnecessary change

• Presents a practical framework with practices and tools which can be tailored to any organization and used as standalone improvements or combined across departments

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398604643

Ebook: 9781398604650 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Principles – underpinning the framework

2 Progress@PACE ‘8-4-8 model’ – Double infinity loop design

3 Progress cycle – First infinity loop

4 PACE elements – Linking progress cycle and resilience foundations

5 Resilience Foundations – Second infinity loop

6 Progress@PACE – Tools and techniques

7 Established tools and techniques

Progress measures

9 PACE profiling with gap analysis

10 Progress@PACE roles

11 Case histories – examples of Progress@ PACE

Networked, Scaled, and Agile

A Design Strategy for Complex Organizations

This book

• Includes examples from global companies going through transformation as well as high growth challengers

• Outlines how organization design can help mature companies better embrace and connect digital capabilities, and how fastgrowth companies can mature and scale a culture that was effective for a start-up but is now facing new competition

• Conveys contemporary concepts around organization design in practical, accessible language

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789667790

Ebook: 9781789667806

Pages: 200

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Organizational Development

Description

While technology and geopolitical forces change the face of business today, the patterns and challenges of organizing humans to work together across organization, culture, language and time zone boundaries remain. To face these challenges, all organizations need to be agile, networked and scalable.

Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how to shape organizations that will enable people to make faster and better decisions in a more complex world. By outlining the tension between the need for agility/differentiation and scale/integration, the book offers a new way to think about this debate using the models of the Tower (vertical integration) and the Square (horizontal integration). It addresses the role of the leadership team and how the organization design process can build C-suite leaders and successors. Each chapter concludes with a series of reflection questions for leaders as well as a summary of key concepts and tips.

Including case studies from global organizations, Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how organization design can address three of the biggest business challenges organizations face today: how to build a new capability across the entire enterprise; how to make the entire organization more customer-centric; and how to allow for faster innovation.

Author Information

Amy Kates, Greg Kesler, and Michele DiMartino are organization design practitioners that consult to senior executives in companies around the world and live in New York, NY, Turnbull, CT and St. Petersburg, FL respectively. They are Managing Directors at Kates Kesler Organization Consulting, which is part of Accenture. Kates Kesler is recognized as one of the leading organization design firms and their methodology has become the global standard. The firm has been named by Forbes as one of the best consulting firms annually since 2016.

Table of Contents

Introduction

The Central Design Problem

Operating Models

Organization Models

Vertical Organization - The Tower

Horizontal Organization - The Square

Leadership in the Tower and the Square

Design Challenge - Enterprise Capabilities

Design Challenge - Customer Solutions

Design Challenge - Faster Innovation

Conclusion

Remote Workplace Culture

How to Bring Energy and Focus to Remote Teams

This book

• Shows how to build a culture that engages and motivates staff wherever they work from

• Explains how building a strong culture for remote workers allows businesses to recruit nationally or even globally to find the best talent needed for success

• Provides practical guidance on wellbeing and mental health initiatives, mentoring staff and addressing diversity and inclusion challenges

• Includes case studies from the BBC and Salesforce

• Offers insights on avoiding common pitfalls such as overreliance on technology, blurring work/life boundaries and a misunderstanding of remote working etiquette

Description

The way we work has changed and a strong, supportive company culture is key for success. When employees work remotely, even occasionally, HR professionals and business leaders need to think differently.

Practitioners now need to motivate their workforce, support talent development, ensure an inclusive environment and protect their employees' mental health, all without being in the same physical space. A strong and effective company culture that is built specifically with this purpose in mind is crucial. Remote Workplace Culture is a practical guide that shows how to achieve this and explains why simply replicating what used to happen in the office in a virtual environment doesn't work.

This book shows how a strong culture for remote, hybrid and flexible working helps attract the best talent, whether this is nationally or globally and explains how to prioritize inclusion. There is also specific guidance on wellbeing initiatives, how to replace social learning in a hybrid or remote working culture and how to avoid common pitfalls such as an overreliance on technology, the blurring of work/life boundaries and a misunderstanding of remote working etiquette. Supported by case studies from BBC, Salesforce, leading financial services brands and law firms, Remote Workplace Culture is essential reading for all HR professionals and business leaders needing to develop strong company culture in the new world of work.

Author Information

Sean O'Meara is a public relations and user experience consultant from Nottinghamshire, England. He founded the 'remote-first' digital communications consultancy Essential Content in 2015 and has more than 15 years' experience of working remotely. He lives in Stockport, Greater Manchester, UK.

Professor Sir Cary Cooper is the 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the ALLIANCE Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK and was President of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Based in Macclesfield, UK, he is also the Chair of the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398603868

Ebook: 9781398603875

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

The new normal

It’s not just where we work, it’s how we work

Recruitment, onboarding and retention

Social impact

Work–life integration

Wellbeing, environment, inclusion and belonging

Remote by design - A case study

Remote culture tools, hacks and techniques

Rules and etiquette

A hybrid future - Balancing physical and virtual culture

Conclusion

References

The Energized Workplace

Designing Organizations where People Flourish

This book

• Explains why traditional organizational structures and processes are holding employees and businesses back and how to redesign them to allow both people and the business to reach their full potential

• Shows how technological advances that mean staff are connected to work in their evenings, weekends and on holiday are having a direct impact on employee wellbeing and how to tackle this

• Includes international case studies from companies including Brewdog, Wegmans, CyberClick and Mind Valley

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749498665

Ebook: 9780749498672

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Organizational Development

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 2050 voyaging

2 20th-century design flaws

3 80/20 variances

4 1/20 or a 20 per cent probability

5 The 5 x 20 life and the redesign of age

6 20:20 vision

7 The 20 misuses of energy in the workplace

8 The 2020 list of energized workplaces

9 20 minutes per day to energize yourself

10 Tools for the next 20 years

Description

SHORTLISTED: Business Book Awards 2021 - HR & Management Category

Productivity is flatlining, employee wellbeing is at an all-time low and stress at an all-time high. Mental health issues are now the biggest single disability affecting the UK and are estimated to cost the economy £105bn each year. Traditional company design, structures and processes are making these issues worse and leading to unprecedented levels of staff burnout. This not only impacts individual employees, there is also a detrimental effect on overall company performance when employees can't perform to their full potential. It is the responsibility of Organizational Development and HR professionals to address these issues urgently and redesign work to allow people to flourish and businesses to thrive. Full of practical advice, tips and tools, The Energized Workplace provides a blueprint for how practitioners can redesign their organizations to support employees and ensure the business outperforms the competition.

It covers everything from why existing structures are causing business output to decline, why traditional processes are holding organizations back and what the consequences of not addressing these design issues will mean for business including increased staff turnover, a rise in employee absence and a decline in company profits. Including case studies from organizations across a range of sectors who have successfully put people at the heart of their workplace design such as CyberClick, Mind Valley, Brewdog and Wegmans and with specific guidance on designing for five generations working side by side, across different countries and on separate time zones, The Energized Workplace will help OD and HR professionals confidently tackle the organizational issues putting their company success and employee health and happiness in jeopardy. This book is essential reading for practitioners needing to deal with the wellbeing crisis and productivity puzzle in the new world of work.

Author Information

Perry Timms is a coach, consultant, international conference speaker and the founder of People and Transformational HR Ltd. He is also the social media and HR adviser to the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Named by HR Magazine as the second most influential HR thinker of 2021, he is a visiting fellow at Sheffield Hallam University Business School, a fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) and the world's first WorldBlu-certified Freedom at Work coach. Perry Timms is also the author of Transformational HR, published by Kogan Page.

Resourcing and Talent Management

The Theory and Practice of Recruiting and Developing a Workforce

This book

• Fully aligned to the CIPD's new qualification framework and includes 'pause and reflect' boxes to reinforce learning, 'explore further' boxes to help students read more widely and activities to help put learning into practice

• Explains how to manage the internal and external recruitment and selection of staff including advertising jobs, interviewing processes and contracts of employment

• Covers information on job design, flexible working, discrimination and equality at work, retirement, redundancy and dismissals

• New to this edition: New chapter on the UK labour market outside the EU and the implications of Brexit on recruitment and staff development as well as further new chapters on HR analytics and employee experience

• Online resources: Lecturer Manual, PowerPoint Slides and Web links

Description

An essential textbook for the CIPD Level 7 module in Resourcing and Talent Management which covers the recruitment, selection and retention of staff as well as employee retirement, dismissals and redundancy.

Resourcing and Talent Management provides broad and accessible coverage of key topics for HR masters students and is the essential companion for the CIPD Level 7 module of the same name. It covers everything from job design and both internal and external recruitment through to interviewing, selection and contracts of employment. There is also guidance on staff retention, succession planning, employee turnover as well as crucial information on how staff leave the business whether this is retirement, redundancy or dismissal.

This new edition of Resourcing and Talent Management now includes a brand new chapter on managing absence as well as new content on the UK labour market outside the EU and the implications of Brexit on recruitment and staff development, Fully updated throughout and aligned to the new CIPD qualification framework, this textbook includes 'explore further' boxes to encourage students to read more deeply, 'pause for thought' boxes to encourage reflection on learning and activities to put their learning in practice and test their understanding.

Author Information

Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School. He is also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and the NHS. Based in Devon, UK he is co-author of Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 8

Date: 03/12/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398600461

Ebook: 9781398600508 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 246x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Table of Contents

Introduction

The Resourcing and Talent Management environment

Human resource planning

Job analysis and job design

Recruitment advertising

Alternative recruitment methods

Employer branding

Selection - The classic trio

Advanced methods of employee selection

The new employee

Performance management strategies

Performance appraisal

Managing absence

Succession planning

Measuring and analysing employee turnover

Improving employee retention

Redundancy

Resourcing and Talent Management strategies

Learning and Talent Development

This book

• Shows the nature and benefits of a critical understanding of and approach to the professional practice of learning and talent development

• Case studies help students focus on particular concepts and prepare for professional practice

• Online resources: web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructor’s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter

Edition: 1

Date: 13/01/2011

Price: £47.99

Paperback: 9781843982500

Ebook: 9781843983422 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 245x189

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Description

Written for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Learning and Talent Development combines a clear and concise structure and writing style with an academic and critical approach to the subject. It analyses and evaluates a range of learning and talent development theories and strategies so students can learn how to take the lead and confidently initiate, develop and implement these strategies, interventions and activities in the workplace.

Covering key topics such as the national and organizational context of learning and talent development, concepts related to individual and organizational learning and the functions associated with managing learning and talent development in the context of professional practice, Learning and Talent Development equips individuals to meet the expectations placed upon those performing specialist roles in developing others and is therefore also ideal for undergraduate and postgraduate students of human resource management or business students taking a module in human resource development or learning and development. Online supporting resources include web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructor's manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter.

Author Information

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Clare Rigg lectures at the Institute of Technology, Tralee, Ireland.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

The Nature, Purpose and Context of Learning and Talent Development

1 Organising and Managing Learning and Talent Development

2 International and National Contexts

3 Various and Varying Organisation Contexts

4 The Politics of Learning and Talent Development

2

The Process of Learning and Talent Development

5 Individual and Organisation Learning in Talent Development

6 Establishing Needs and Solutions to Talent Development

7 Learning and Talent Development Practical Strategies

3 The Management of Learning and Talent Development

Designing and Evaluating Talent Development

Accessing and Managing Resources

Ethics and Professionalism in Learning and Talent Development

Doing a Student Research Project

Conclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Inclusive Talent Management

How Business can Thrive in an Age of Diversity

This book

• Shows how to attract the best candidates and keep them by building cultures in which they feel valued

• Provides evidence for how better diversity and inclusion practices lead to increased creativity, openness to change, new ideas and understanding of new markets

• Includes original research from globally recognised organizations including Goldman Sachs, NHS, Telefonica, Unilever, KPMG, Royal Mail, Hitachi, Oxfam, Novartis and the Rio 2016 Olympic Games on how diversity and inclusion activities can improve talent attraction, management and retention

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2016

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749475871

Ebook: 9780749475888 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Table of Contents

1 Challenge - The Addiction to Likeness in an Age of Diversity = Sameness

1 The Fierce Urgency of Now

2 Homogenous Talent Management

3 History – How a Segregated Mindset Evolved

4 The Future – Diversity is Local, Inclusion is Global

5 The Case for Inclusive Talent Management

2 How to Meet the Challenge

6 ITM in Recruitment – Finding Diverse Talent

Description

SHORTLISTED: CMI Management Book of the Year 2017 - Practical Manager Category

Organizations traditionally have had a clear distinction between their policies on diversity and inclusion and their talent management. The main driving force behind diversity and inclusion has been being seen to be a good employer, to be able to make claims in the annual report and to feel as though a positive contribution is being made to society. On the other hand, talent management activities have been driven by a real business need to ensure that the organization has the right people with the right skills in the right place to drive operational success. Inclusive Talent Management aligns talent management and diversity and inclusion, offering a fresh perspective on why the current distinction between them needs to disappear.

Featuring case studies from internationally recognised brands such as Goldman Sachs, Unilever, KPMG, Hitachi, Oxfam and the NHS, Inclusive Talent Management shows that to achieve business objectives and gain the competitive advantage, it is imperative that organizations take an inclusive approach to talent management. It puts forward a compelling and innovative case, raising questions not only for the HR community but also to those in senior management positions, providing the practical steps, global examples and models for incorporating diversity and inclusion activities into talent management strategy.

Author Information

Stephen Frost works with clients worldwide to embed inclusion into their decision making. He teaches at various business schools and was formerly Head of Diversity and Inclusion for the London Organizing Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games.

Danny Kalman is a talent management consultant, executive coach and regular speaker on leadership development. He was Director of Global Talent at Panasonic Corporation from 2008-2013.

7 ITM in Development – Growing Diverse Talent

8 ITM in Retention – Keeping Diverse Talent

9 Leadership – How You Can Make a Difference

10 Resolution: Change the System (Unconscious Nudges) + Change Your Behaviour (Conscious Leadership) = Inclusion

Neurodiversity at Work

Drive Innovation, Performance and Productivity with a Neurodiverse Workforce

This book

• Explains what neurodiversity is and how it creates performance, productivity and financial benefits

• Provides guidance on how to optimize recruitment and talent management processes to attract, acquire and retain neurodiverse employees

• Includes case studies and interviews from IBM, LinkedIn, UK Cabinet Office, Autotrader and Heathrow Airport

• Covers how to adapt policies and workplaces to ensure that they work for all employees

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398600249

Ebook: 9781398600256 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Table of Contents

Introduction

Why neurodiversity is important

Labels - What do they mean?

Categories and spiky profiles

Eliminating kryptonite and enabling superheroes

Pre-employment - The lost demographics

Policies and procedures - What’s the legal stuff all about?

How can employers attract neurodiverse talent in recruitment?

Apprenticeships, internships, work placements and hiring schemes

Interviews and assessments

Making workplace adjustments

Induction and onboarding

Line management means having good conversations

Everyday meetings, conferences and seminars - Planning to be neuro-inclusive

Champions, staff networks and communities - How to succeed in being an inclusive workplace

Future workspaces and workplaces

Next Steps! Inclusion, equity and diversity

belonging - No one fits into one neat box

Appendix

Human

Development

Excellence in Coaching

Theory, Tools and Techniques to Achieve Outstanding Coaching Performance

This book

• Provides a complete resource for best practice coaching from industry experts including Sir John Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck

• Covers all the fundamental areas of coaching, from making the personal and business cases for coaching, to using goal setting, questions and reflection and coaching evaluation and accreditation

• Explores a range of coaching models and techniques in both theory and practice, to allow readers to tailor their approach to specific situations

• New to this edition: new chapters including neuroscience coaching, systemic coaching, existential coaching, coaching contracts, reflection practice in coaching alongside updates to incorporate new research and models published since the last edition

Description

How can you achieve coaching excellence? Use the latest research and insights from some of the biggest industry names in this fully revised fourth edition, which provides a diverse range of theory, tools and models for students and practicing coaches alike.

Excellence in Coaching is a comprehensive guide presenting the latest cutting-edge thinking in the field of workplace coaching. Published with the Association for Coaching, this book covers all key components of the coaching process, and examines a diverse range of coaching models including behavioural and transpersonal coaching, enabling coaches and trainers to adapt their approach and excel in their professional practice.

With updates to incorporate the latest thinking and insights, this revised fourth edition of Excellence in Coaching also contains a wealth of fresh material, including new chapters on establishing a coaching business, neuroscience coaching, psychodynamic coaching and understanding the coaching relationship. Featuring tips, checklists and tools, and a collection of best-practice material from some of the biggest names in the profession including Sir John Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck. This remains essential reading for practising coaches as well as for students.

Author Information

Jonathan Passmore is the Director of The Henley Centre for Coaching at Henley Business School, University of Reading. He works with leaders from business, politics and the public sector to help them improve individual, team and organizational performance through coaching. He is also an award-winning researcher, a regular international conference speaker, and the author and editor of a number of publications and books, including Leadership Coaching and Mastery in Coaching, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789665475

Ebook: 9781789665482 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 236x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

Introduction

The business of coaching

The development of coaching

What is coaching?

Coaching within organizations

Leveraging the coaching investment

Setting up and running your coaching practice

Coaching models and approaches

Coaching with the GROW model

Solution-focused coaching

Cognitive behavioural coaching

Transpersonal coaching

Appreciative Coaching: pathway to flourishing

Integrative coaching

Coaching issues

Intercultural coaching

Coaching and stress

Coaching ethics: integrity in the moment of choice

Coaching supervision

Evaluating coaching programmes

Coach accreditation

Team coaching

Goal setting in coaching

Association for Coaching

Index

Human Resources,

Development

How to Create a Coaching Culture

Practical Introduction

This book

• Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

• Uses practical tools, assessments and real life examples to build knowledge and skills in order to implement an efficient and effective coaching culture that empowers people and delivers business results

• New to this edition: demonstrates how a coaching culture should be closely aligned with broader business concerns, including bottom line results, productivity and agility in the VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous) environment. It shows how to link productivity and growth, how to adopt principles that naturally encourage coaching and engagement, how to develop autonomous teams, how to develop tools that foster flexibility, how to assess organisational readiness for change, and includes new international case studies

• Online resources: a suite of downloadable templates and tools for use in practice, including a diagnostic tool to check 'coaching culture health' and a corresponding report, development plan, monitoring templates, and training course assessment forms

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2018

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749483272

Ebook: 9780749483289 Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Fundamentals

1 What is a coaching culture?

2 Is having a coaching culture important for your organization?

3 Aligning the coaching culture with organizational strategy: getting the right fit

2 In practice

4 Creating a coaching culture: the key components

5 Planning and developing the right strategy for your organization

6 Measurement tools for evaluating coaching

7 Conclusion

Coaching and Mentoring

Practical Techniques for Developing Learning and Performance

This book

• Provides a complete resource for coaching and mentoring at individual, team and organizational levels

• Shows how to align coaching and mentoring to an organization's overall business strategy and measure its transformational impact

• Contains insights and case studies from the NHS and the CIPD's Steps Ahead mentoring programme

• New to this edition: a chapter on group and team coaching, material on systemic coaching and how to use coaching for diversity and inclusion, as well as updates to wider thinking and models

Edition: 4

Date: 03/03/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398601963

Ebook: 9781398601970

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

Introduction to this edition of Coaching and Mentoring

The purpose, nature and practice of coaching and mentoring

Coaching – what the research says

Learning and adaptability

The core skills

The toolkit chapter

Awareness of individual differences

Supervision for coach or mentor

Stories of coaching and mentoring

Description

How can coaching and mentoring approaches be applied in individual, team and organizational contexts to increase performance? Coaching and Mentoring offers a complete resource for developing and implementing the latest theories and models in your organization.

Featuring tips, tools and checklists throughout, this book covers all the key aspects of the process, from delivering feedback that builds confidence and success and observant listening to evaluating the effectiveness of initiatives and coaching supervision. Guidance is also provided on how to support people in their learning, getting buy-in from stakeholders and creating a coaching culture. Drawing upon insights from a number of experienced coaching and mentoring professionals, it also features case studies from the NHS and the CIPD's Steps Ahead mentoring programme to show how these approaches have been applied in practice.

This fully revised fourth edition of Coaching and Mentoring contains a new chapter on group and team coaching and further material on systemic coaching and how to use coaching for diversity and inclusion. Featuring updates to case studies and wider research, coaches and mentors of all levels of experience and those studying coaching and mentoring will benefit from this definitive text.

Author Information

Eric Parsloe was an experienced international executive coach-mentor, one of the founders of the European Mentoring and Coaching Council and founder of The OCM. He was also a member of the International Coaching Federation and the CIPD coaching and mentoring faculty.

Melville Leedham is an associate lecturer at The University of Northampton. Based in Northumberland, UK, he runs his own coach-mentoring business and also trains, supervises and assesses other coaches.

Diane Newell is the Managing Director of OCM Discovery at The OCM, based in Oxford, UK, offering consultancy and coaching to individuals and teams to support their strategic aims.

2 How to effectively implement coaching and mentoring in organizations

9 Why invest in coaching and mentoring? What and where is the need?

10 Coaching and mentoring: what they are and how they are used in organizations

Implementing coaching and mentoring

Roles and responsibilities in coaching and mentoring

Supervision in practice

Coaching the team

Coaching and mentoring in the system and the impact of culture

What’s next?

References

Appendix: Professional governing bodies

Systemic Coaching and Constellations

The Principles, Practices and Application for Individuals, Teams and Groups

This book

• Shows how to draw out and overcome systemic and relational issues in organizations to improve coaching approaches and performance

• Contains a wide range of practical exercises which coaches can use for their own development and with clients, both in one-toone and group settings

• Includes case studies from a joint ICF/EMCC constellation workshop and examples from coaches around the world, including Australia, Mexico, France, Spain, the US and the Netherlands

• Includes answers to the most frequently asked questions in workshops and training sessions

• New to this edition: a chapter on systemic supervision, material on team coaching, systemic questions and resourcing constellations as well as fresh case studies and updates to wider research and thinking

Description

Systemic Coaching and Constellations offers a refreshingly uncomplicated path into a potentially complex subject, demonstrating how to understand and manage intricate relationship systems as part of a powerful coaching agenda.

This book provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles that sustain systems, how to map and explore them through constellations, as well as a step-by-step guide to integrating these principles and practices into coaching. Featuring a variety of case studies from around the world to illustrate different facilitation styles and approaches, it also contains practical exercises which can be used in a variety of contexts, including one-toone coaching, group coaching, leadership development coaching and managing conflict in teams.

This updated third edition of Systemic Coaching and Constellations contains a new chapter on systemic supervision, new material on team coaching, systemic questions and resourcing constellations as well as new and refreshed case studies and updates to wider research and thinking. Whether used in an initial selection meeting or to underpin all coaching conversations and interventions, it remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits looking to transform their practice, as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Author Information

John Whittington is an individual and team coach with a broad portfolio of clients that includes entrepreneurs, executive leaders and public figures. He facilitates regular systemic workshop interventions in corporate environments and leads a small teaching team who share the systemic coaching and constellations approach with other professional coaches internationally. He is also a guest tutor at Henley Business School for students of the Msc in Coaching and Behavioural change in the UK and South Africa.

Edition: 3

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789662849

Ebook: 9781789662856

Pages: 368

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

Acknowledgements

Outside in, inside out

Outside in

Ingredients

Inside out

Principles

Belonging

Conscience, guilt and innocence

The universal language of systems

The time is now

Practices

Map making

Living maps

Tabletop to workshop

One to one: principles and practices in action

One to many: systemic team coaching

Sticky moments

Extending your practice: further practices and applications

Systemic supervision

Familiar themes

Human being

The F word

Appendix: Resources and further reading

Meet the team

Postscript: Outside in, inside out

FAQs: Answers to frequently asked questions

Index

Leadership Coaching

Working with Leaders to Develop Elite Performance

This book

• Includes wide-ranging, up-to-the-minute coverage of the leadership models and coaching frameworks most relevant to coaches working with business leaders

• Brings together a group of international experts, with each chapter providing a research-grounded overview of a particular approach, and illustrating this with a real-life case study

• New to this edition: Four brand new chapters on conversational leadership, team leadership, strengths focused leadership and complexity based leadership

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2015

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749473297

Ebook: 9780749473303

Pages: 384

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Description

Author Information

Jonathan Passmore is well known for editing the Association for Coaching series, as well as for other titles in leadership and organisational psychology. He is an occupational psychologist with an international reputation, having spoken at conferences across the world from Harvard University, to Denmark, South Africa and Israel. He is also the Series Editor for the Wiley Blackwell Industrial Psychology series and has authored/co-authored Top Business Psychology Models, AI for Change Management and The Facebook Manager over the last four years. In 2010, Jonathan was awarded the AC Global Coaching Award for his contribution to practice and research. He divides his time between academia, where he works as a professor of psychology at the University of East London, and business, where he works as a practicing psychologist.

Table of Contents

1 Leadership coaching

2 Coaching for authentic leadership

3 The integrated leadership model

4 Coaching for emotionally intelligent and inspiring leadership

5 The Leadership Radar™

6 An Asian perspective on leadership coaching: Sun Tzu and The Art of War

7 Coaching for Icarus leadership: helping leaders who can potentially derail

8 Coaching for integral leadership

9 Coaching political leaders

10 Leadership coaching with feedforward

11 Coaching from a systems perspective

12 Coaching for transactional and transformational leadership

Coaching for leadership style

Strategy coaching

Coaching global top teams

16 Coaching using leadership myths and stories: an African perspective

Coaching for conversational leadership

Coaching for team leadership: using the Belbin ‘team roles’ model

19 Coaching for strength-based leadership

Coaching with complexity-informed leadership

Leadership Team Coaching

Developing Collective Transformational Leadership

This book

• Provides a complete resource for coaching leadership teams, as well as international, virtual, project and account teams and executive and non-executive boards

• Explores the key techniques and tools to be used at each stage of the coaching process, as well as guidance on common challenges and pitfalls to avoid

• Includes case studies from organizations including Deloitte and General Electric (GE) to illustrate how these approaches have been applied in practice

• New to this edition: discussion of agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, and training team leaders to coach their own team; new and refreshed case studies; updates to incorporate new developments and research

Description

Organizations are most effective when the teams responsible for their success work together collectively and in a dynamic relationship with the rest of the company. For those involved in developing leadership teams, understanding coaching practices and techniques is essential for enabling the best performance.

Leadership Team Coaching provides a comprehensive roadmap for team coaching, explaining all the key elements alongside practical tools and techniques for developing international and virtual teams, executive and non-executive boards and project and account teams in all types of organizations. Featuring case studies and insights from organizations including Deloitte and General Electric (GE), it also contains guidance on choosing the best team coach, creating a team-based culture and common pitfalls to avoid.

This fully updated fourth edition of Leadership Team Coaching contains new material on agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, and training team leaders to coach their own team. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches and senior leaders as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Author Information

Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School, UK, and a visiting professor at the University of Bath, UK, and Oxford Brookes University, UK. The President of the Association of Professional Executive Coaching and Supervision (APECS) and the founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates, he has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. A regular keynote speaker at international conferences, he is also the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789667455

Ebook: 9781789667462 Pages: 488

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

1

High-performing teams

1 Why the world needs more highperforming leadership teams

2 The high-performing team and the transformational leadership team

The five disciplines of successful team practice

Team coaching

What is team coaching?

The team coaching process and journey

Coaching the five disciplines – Systemic team coaching

3 Coaching different types of teams

Many types of teams

Coaching the board

4 The next frontier for systemic team coaching – Beyond the high-performing team

9 Disrupting and renewing team coaching

10 New dimensions for eco-systemic team coaching

5 Creating shared leadership, selecting, developing and coaching your own team

– Advice to chief executives and other team leaders

11 Selecting the players for a high-performing team

12 Key steps for CEOs in creating a highperforming team with shared leadership

13 How to find, select and work with a good team coach

14 Developing as a team coach

Supervising team coaching

Team coaching methods, tools and techniques

Conclusion

50 Top Tools for Coaching

A Complete Toolkit for Developing and Empowering People

This book

• Provides over 50 easy-to-use tools and techniques to use throughout the coaching process, alongside supporting templates and tips to ensure their success

• Includes tools to enhance leadership styles, manage periods of change, address conflict and to increase personal impact and influence

• New to this edition: tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own coaching practice

• Online resources: additional tools, interactive templates, summary documents and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors

Description

Full of exercises, models, checklists and templates, this book covers how to assess the needs of clients, select the right tool for the circumstance and deliver effective coaching with confidence.

A complete resource for both in-house and external coaches, 50 Top Tools for Coaching presents the techniques required for every coaching situation. It focuses on every stage of the coaching process, from setting up and managing the coaching relationship, understanding and resolving conflict, developing client confidence and performance to enhancing leadership styles and coaching during periods of change. Supporting hints and tips are found throughout to maximise the effectiveness and impact of the tools.

This fully revised fifth edition of 50 Top Tools for Coaching includes new tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own coaching practice. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits, as well as managers and leaders looking to improve performance in their organizations through coaching. Online supporting resources include additional tools, interactive templates and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors.

Author Information

Gillian Jones is Managing Director of Emerge, an international development consultancy that specializes in leadership, organizational development and executive coaching. She is a motivational speaker, a Master Executive Coach and a champion for women's development, delivering RISE, the popular empowering women's programme, both in Europe and the Middle East.

Ro Gorell is Director at Change Optimised, supporting leaders to navigate organisationwide transformation through coaching, mentoring and change management solutions. She has extensive experience in both group and individual coaching. An accredited trainer with IC Agile she is an active member of both the Agile and Change Management global communities. Based in Australia, she is the author of Group Coaching and with Gillian Jones the co-author of How to Create a Coaching Culture, also published by Kogan Page. Her latest area of research is coaching self-organizing teams.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/04/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666557

Ebook: 9781789666564 Pages: 352

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice

Case Studies on Creating Highly Effective Teams

This book

• Shows how to use coaching tools and techniques to increase performance in leadership teams and the organization as a whole

• Features case studies from organizations from around the world and from a range of sectors, including Comair and the UK National Health Service (NHS) to show how these approaches have been applied in practice

• New to this edition: a new medley chapter of short case stories that address some of the regularly asked questions by new team coaches; a new chapter that explores ways of creating a teaming and team of teams culture; new material on the role of team coaching in mergers and developing the personal core capacities for systemic team coaching; a new case study describing team coaching in Toyota through a period of transformation

Description

A high-performing and cohesive leadership team is essential for organizational success. Leadership Team Coaching in Practice provides an overview of the tools and techniques for coaching leadership teams and shows how these approaches have been applied around the world in a variety of team types and industries.

Featuring expert contributions from chief executives, team coaches, team leaders and consultants in organizations including Comair and the UK National Health Service (NHS), this practical guide illustrates best practice tailored to the needs of each organization. The new and updated third edition of Leadership Team Coaching in Practice incorporates the latest research and thinking in the field, including new material on developing the personal core capacities for systemic team coaching.

Alongside updates to case studies to offer a long-term view of interventions, the third edition contains new case studies including team coaching in Toyota through a period of transformation. There is a new medley chapter of short case stories that address some of the regularly asked questions by new team coaches and new material that explores ways of creating a teaming and 'team of teams' culture. This book remains an essential resource for executive and team coaches, CEOs, team leaders, organizational development consultants, and those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Author Information

Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School, UK and a visiting professor at the University of Bath, UK and Oxford Brookes University, UK. Based in Bath, UK, he is the President of the Association of Professional Executive Coaching and Supervision (APECS) and the founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates. He has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. A regular keynote speaker at international conferences, he is also the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/02/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666212

Ebook: 9781789666229 Pages: 472

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Neuroscience for Coaches

How coaches and managers can use the latest insights to benefit clients and teams

This book

• Presents the latest neuroscientific research in an accessible and practical way for coaches and managers who coach

• Demonstrates the benefits neuroscience offers the coaching practice, including how to create the best coaching environment and the opportunity to ask more tailored questions to find an effective intervention

• Provides helpful tools and insights, including from Marshall Goldsmith and Susan Grandfield, on coaching concepts such as goals, decision-making and motivation to enable coaches to deliver greater value to their clients

• New to this edition: updated material on key brain concepts and chemicals; new tools and techniques in coaching areas including expectations and loneliness; new material and insights for managers who coach

Description

Many coaching tools and techniques are now well established, but how do they actually work? The third edition of Neuroscience for Coaches answers this question to help coaches and managers deliver greater value to clients and employees.

Based on extensive research, Neuroscience for Coaches provides a clear explanation of the aspects of neuroscience that are relevant to coaching so coaches can describe to clients why particular techniques work and the benefits to be gained from using them. It also features interviews with Marshall Goldsmith, Susan Grandfield, Christian van Nieuwerburgh and Kim Morgan on topics including mindfulness and behaviour change in coaching.

This fully updated third edition covers the latest neuroscientific research on key brain areas and their functions, such as the Prefrontal cortex and Amygdala which affect attention, processing and emotional regulation. With tips and insights throughout, it crucially demonstrates the ways in which coaches and managers who coach can use this information effectively and practically in their everyday work. Neuroscience for Coaches is a vital resource for improving coaching practice with the latest scientific developments, tools and techniques.

Author Information

Amy Brann is an author, consultant and global speaker. She is the founder of Synaptic Potential, through which she works with companies including Warner Brothers, EY, Twinings, the NHS and Mondelez International to help them better understand their teams, clients and organizations as a whole. Based in Warwick, UK, she is also the author of Make Your Brain Work, published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/03/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604193

Ebook: 9781398604209 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching

This book

• Explains how to assess different employee needs and identify which experiences may impact these needs

• Shows coaches and line managers how to discuss race, gender, class, culture, education and socio-economic issues confidently with their employees

• Provides practical tips, tools, advice, examples and activities to work through in practice in the workplace

• Includes specific guidance on how to deal with employee trauma such as prejudice, racism, bullying, burn out, impostor syndrome and grief

• Shows how coaches can build an inclusive culture and encourage authenticity and acceptance in the workforce

Description

Coaching and developing employees is not a one size fits all activity. Race, gender, class, education, culture and religion can all affect the needs of employees. Coaches, leaders and line managers must address this.

Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching is a practical guide for coaches, leaders and line managers which explains how to understand different employee needs, identify what experiences can impact these needs and shows how to develop a truly inclusive approach to coaching and employee development. It also covers how to recognize the difference between employees in survival mode as opposed to those who are thriving, feeling psychologically safe and displaying healthy resilience.

Packed full of practical tips, tools, case studies, interviews, examples and activities to work through in practice, this book allows coaches, leaders and line managers to create an inclusive culture of belonging and psychological safety to ensure that all employees flourish. There is also specific guidance on how to deal with employee trauma such as prejudice, racism, bullying, burnout, imposter syndrome and grief as well as how to cultivate a system of acceptance and encourage all employees to safely bring their authentic selves to work. Supported by expert advice, personal experience and industry research, this book is crucial reading for all coaches, leaders and managers responsible for talent development.

Author Information

Salma Shah is the Founder and Director of the award-winning Mastering Your Power, a certified coach training programme designed with a wider systemic lens of diversity, inclusion, belonging and equity. Based in London, UK she works with clients at a senior level in public, private and voluntary sectors. She supervises and trains other coaches as well as presenting at events globally. She has worked with clients across a range of industries, including: Teenage Cancer Trust, Reuters O2 and British Transport Police. She has also delivered programs for major international organisations including: Oracle and Ernst and Young (Kuwait, Palestine).

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604506

Ebook: 9781398604544

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Table of Contents

Coaching People through Organizational Change

Practical Tools to Support Employees through Business Transformation

New Title

This book

• Outlines what organizational change is, the different forms it can take and how it impacts coaching

• Explains how to use evidenced-based coaching techniques to coach employees during turbulent times to support the delivery of lasting business change

• Provides practical advice and coaching interventions which are all county-agnostic and can be used with employees both inperson and remotely

• Includes over 20 tools, techniques and frameworks with suggestions for what type of organizational change they're best suited to

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398607026

Ebook: 9781398607033

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 232x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Description

How can I coach employees effectively when business change is constant? What tools and techniques can I use both in-person and remotely? How can I reduce the stress caused by business transformation to boost productivity and wellbeing?

Coaching People through Organizational Change is a practical guide for professional coaches and managers alike. It is specifically designed to support those coaching employees during uncertain times in a new world of work which is in a constant state of flux. It outlines what organizational change is, the different forms it can take and how to use evidenced-based coaching techniques to support the delivery of lasting business change. It will help those coaching to develop a greater understanding of how the brain makes decisions and adjusts to change and provides practical advice and guidance that can be used to deliver the most effective coaching intervention.

Including over 20 tools and frameworks each supported by a suggestion for what type of organizational change the activity is best suited for, this is invaluable reading for anyone responsible for coaching and talent development whether as a professional coach or a line manager. Including country-agnostic advice that can be used with employees both in-person and remotely, this book will help to reduce stress and presenteeism and to boost productivity, performance, resilience and wellbeing.

Author Information

Sue Noble is the Founder and Director of Noble Learning Ltd where she delivers qualification, training and development in coaching, change management and leadership to individuals and organizations. Based in Sussex, UK, she is a founding member of the Change Management Institute (CMI) Coaching and Mentoring Think Tank.

Amy Tarrant is the Project Management Lead for a global corporate and speciality insurer where she focuses on internal change capacity. She is also their Programme Manager for the Operations Transformation Programme and is based in Brighton, UK. She is a founding member of the CMI's Coaching and Mentoring Special Interest Group.

Table of Contents

1

Organizational change in context

Acquisitions, digitalization and regulation

- The change giants

Coaching in a change context

Best practice coaching methods for change practitioners

Introduction to Emergenetics® and its relevance to change and coaching

Post-acquisition challenges

Resistance to organizational change

Business transformation and ambiguity

Stakeholder engagement

Making change stick

Building an internal coaching capability

Techniques to coach people through change

Procurement

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management

Understanding the Supply Chain

This book

• Unique breadth and depth of coverage of supply chain strategy and logistics/ distribution including step-by-step strategic accounts of setting up and operating supply chains for maximum value and the tactical elements of logistics and distribution

• Worked examples using current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps, equations) from the authors' first-hand experience bring the concepts to life

• Figures and flow charts show how the elements of supply chains are interdependent, and a dedicated chapter on supply chain integration brings them together

• New to this edition: the latest innovations in logistics and supply chain management including artificial intelligence, cyber-security, 5G mobile networks, drones and cobots

• Online Resources: Lecture slides (featuring tables, images and formulae from the text), infographic, acronyms and abbreviations and useful formulae

Edition: 7

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398602045

Ebook: 9781398602052

Pages: 824

Format (mm): 240x171

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

New

A Practical Guide to Logistics

An Introduction to Transport, Warehousing, Trade and Distribution

This book

• Presents a step-by-step guide to all aspects of logistics, from the warehouse to delivery, giving newcomers to the industry a complete overview of all the logistics processes

• Provides practical, accessible, up-to-date information on the field of logistics, covering today's best practices

• Features illustrations, reference charts and tables which provide useful visual explanations for both students and professionals

• Online resources: Lecture slides and bonus Figures

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749486310

Ebook: 9780749486327 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Description

Few people come into logistics management with knowledge and experience of all aspects of the profession. Some may have worked their way up from driving a vehicle but know little of warehouses, others may find themselves taking responsibility for logistics as part of a wider remit such as operations.

A Practical Guide to Logistics aims to equip them with the necessary knowledge to move on to the next stage, with simple non-technical explanations of the options available, and impartial advice on how to choose the right option for their business. It is also an excellent primer for students studying logistics for the first time, on BSc or MSc courses, as well as practitioners on professional training courses.

A Practical Guide to Logistics is a straightforward guide taking readers through all aspects of this fascinating industry, covering packaging, transportation, warehousing and exporting and importing of goods. There is a real need for this basic knowledge, both for practitioners starting out in the industry or more experienced practitioners who may have gaps in their knowledge. The book examines each aspect of logistics in turn and the text is supported by numerous illustrations.

Author Information

Jerry Rudd is a Logistics and Supply Chain professional with over 25 years' experience. He has worked with companies such as Ford, Peugeot, the Bank of England and Wincanton.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – What is logistics?

First steps – Strategic decisions

Storage – The physical infrastructure

Warehouse handling equipment

Warehouse operations

Warehouse management systems

Packaging and customer requirements

Road vehicles

Abnormal indivisible loads

Vehicle operations – Costs and their reduction

Legal requirements and compliance

Vehicle routing and networks

Rail and other inland transport

Seafreight and airfreight

Terms and conditions and insurance

Customs and imports

Export documentation requirements

Miscellaneous supply chain topics

Appendix list of suppliers of services

Supply Chains in Action

A Case Study Collection in Supply Chain, Logistics, Procurement and Operations Management

This book

• Learn from in-depth case studies which deliver insights and perspectives on current and emerging issues, trends and significant new areas of research

• Gain insights into a variety of topics including technology-related issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs

• Learn from first-hand experiences from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles

• Understand unique perspectives that demonstrate how leading organisations stay competitive across the globe in a variety of geographical contexts

• New to this edition: Covers hot new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide future strategies, as well as being edited by industry expert and highly respected academic, Richard Wilding

Description

Volume 2 of Logistics, Supply Chain and Procurement Case Study Collection contains new case studies tackling Supply Chain and Procurement issues, aiming to provide solutions affecting a range of different businesses. Comprehensive in scope and scrupulous in detail, this collection includes actual events experienced by businesses of every size, from SMB's to some of the most successful corporations in manufacturing, transportation, maritime and other industries. Readers will discover proven tactics and innovative solutions for handling uncertainties, solving problems and circumventing risk, plus a wealth of information to guide strategy and decision making.

Readers involved in logistics and supply chain management will find the Logistics, Supply Chain and Procurement Case Study Collection full of: immediate application of strategies and tactics to situations and challenges; valuable tools for testing management proficiency in crisis mitigation and resolution; independent learning modules and professional training programmes; expanded question-and-answer sections designed to measure knowledge transfer and lessons learned; engaging, topical situations highly relevant to the fields of logistics, supply chain management and operations. Students and prospective managers will learn crucial skills to meet current challenges, qualify for professional advancement and achieve success.

Author Information

Professor Richard Wilding OBE is recognised globally for his thought leadership in Logistics & Supply Chain Management. Richard is a highly acclaimed presenter and regularly speaks at Industrial Conferences and has undertaken lecture tours of Europe and Asia at the invitation of local Universities; Confederations of Industry.

As Chair (Full Professor) in Supply Chain Strategy at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Cranfield School of Management UK, Richard works with European and International companies on Logistics and Supply Chain projects in all sectors including pharmaceutical, retail, automotive, high technology, food, drink and professional services to name a few. He has published widely in the area of Supply Chain Management and is Editorial Advisor to a number of top journals in this area. He is currently Chair of CILT.

Operations and Supply Chain Management

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £160.00

Paperback: 9780749483708

Ebook: 9780749483715 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 240x160

Product Category: Reference

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents

1 Supply chain process design

1 Efficient integration of shipping into intra-regional supply chains [Anastasia Christodoulou, Zeeshan Raza, John Woxenius]

2 Overcrowding in a hospital emergency department – A supply chain management referral pathway to reduce overcrowding [Ingrid Hunt, Noreen Spillane]

3 X company’s OTD (On-Time Delivery) performance improvement – The application of lean six-sigma methodology [Gendao Li, Alireza Shokri, Kyrill Nussbaum]

4 Developing best-practice in operational workforce planning [Peter Hilton]

2 Supply chain network and infrastructure design

5 Why procurement should want to pay for performance – A case study of how buyer and sellers aligned to create the most profit for both [Todd C Snelgrove]

6 Closing the cycle from tree to product, x company’s sustainability journey [Gendao Li, Alireza Shokri, Jie Ma]

7 Environmentally responsible packaging in global supply chains [Henrik Pålsson]

8 Freight transport, storage and distribution organisations to be able to identify customer requirements [Graham Heron, Erica Ballentine]

3 Supply chain information system design

9 Protecting supply chains from counterfeit products [Mark Manning, Daniel Stanton]

10 The same but different; a comparative analysis of common reverse logistics and closed loop supply chain issues in the UK multiple retail sector [Graham Heron, Erica Ballentine]

11 Supply chain disruption [Steve O’Sullivan]

12 Defence support chain performance dashboard development [Alan Woods]

Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection

This book

• In-depth case studies deliver insight and perspective on current and emerging issues, trends and significant new areas of research in the fields of logistics, supply chain and operations

• Cases cover a variety of topics including how to tackle technology-related issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs

• Shares first-hand experiences and knowledge from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles

• Imparts unique perspectives that demonstrate how leading organisations stay competitive across the globe in a variety of geographical contexts

• Covers hot new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide future strategies

• Foreword by Martin Christopher

Description

The Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection contains real-life scenarios from leading companies including Volvo, Vortex, Honda of America, Green Cargo and Swedish Transport Administration. It includes a foreword by Martin Christopher. Comprehensive in scope and scrupulous in detail, this collection includes actual events experienced by businesses of every size, from SMB's to some of the most successful corporations in manufacturing, transportation, hospitality and other industries. Readers will discover proven tactics and innovative solutions for handling uncertainties, solving problems and circumventing risk, plus a wealth of information to guide strategy and decision making.

Readers involved in logistics and supply chain management will find the Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection full of: immediate application of strategies and tactics to situations and challenges; valuable tools for testing management proficiency in crisis mitigation and resolution; independent learning modules and professional training programmes; expanded question-and-answer sections designed to measure knowledge transfer and lessons learned; engaging, topical situations highly relevant to the fields of logistics, supply chain management and operations. Students and prospective managers will learn crucial skills to meet current challenges, qualify for professional advancement and achieve success.

Author Information

Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School. He has over 175 publications and is on the editorial boards of numerous journals.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2016

Price: £160.00

Paperback: 9780749475956

Ebook: 9780749477493 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 24x156

Product Category: Reference

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

LOGISTICS, SUPPLY CHAIN AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT CASE STUDY COLLECTION

Get access to dozens of real-life examples you can share with your students

Invaluable for students needing to understand key concepts and their real-life application, our case study collections bring operations management, supply chain management and logistics to life.

You can access these collections in one of three ways:

1 Buy EPDF access to individual case studies for use in teaching. If you’re interested in licenses for multiple users, please contact kpinfo@koganpage.com

2 Ask your university library to buy a copy of any of the complete collections in print or ebook format. Under the CLA (Copyright Licencing Agency) rules you can print/copy 10% of the books in teaching (which roughly equates to 3 cases)

3 Get your library to buy a print or ebook copy of the collections for reference

Access a free case study by visiting koganpage.com/free-case-study

From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics

Imperatives for a Developing World

This book

• Explains measurement processes for macrologistics, looking at GDP and freight flow measurements

• Includes case studies examining the use of freight-flow and logistics cost models

• Based on vital research from Stellenbosch University

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789664010

Ebook: 9781789664027

Pages: 320

Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents

An introduction to logistics and macrologistics

Business logistics and its role in customer service

Measuring and communicating the value of logistics

An introduction to strategy

Logistics strategy

Strategy implementation and change management

The need for macrologistics

The instrumentation of macrologistics

Macrologistics strategy

Logistics and the future

Mastering the Supply Chain

Principles, Practice and Real-Life Applications

This book

• Establish a holistic view of the many complex, real-life scenarios that supply chain managers face, in the context of a real company situation

• Gain a better understanding of the challenges of supply chain management and develop effective problem solving skills

• Discover how to deliver optimal performance by integrating the business, technical and leadership dimensions of supply chain management

• Learn how to tear down silos and create the right cross-functional mindset

• Online resources: free access to the online business simulation game The Fresh Connection, supporting templates, frameworks and PowerPoints

Description

Mastering the Supply Chain is an introduction to supply chain management. The book integrates theory with practice and aims to create a cross-functional mindset in students and practitioners.

It provides a wide overview of relevant supply chain concepts and sets out the challenges that need to be overcome in order to find practical ways of implementing these in a real company situation. Readers are continuously asked to actively reflect on the choices they make, thus experiencing first-hand the many challenges that good and effective supply chain management presents.

Mastering the Supply Chain presents a different way of learning that puts the reader at the heart of a life-like situation, so that they experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own 'silo' but across the business. In this way, they will learn that many supply chain concepts are relatively simple to understand, but not so easy to apply in reality. Chapter 6 helps students to pull everything they've learned together and see how the concepts play out in the real world by guiding them through an interactive demonstration of the online business simulation game The Fresh Connection (free access is included with the book). This is a key text for students on supply chain management BScs and MScs as well as background reading for students playing the full version of The Fresh Connection Business Simulation game.

Author Information

A freelance trainer and consultant, Ed Weenk is also a senior lecturer in Supply Chain at Maastricht School of Management, EADA Business School in Barcelona and the Antwerp Management School.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2019

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749484484

Ebook: 9780749484491

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents

Preface

1 Supply chain – General introduction

2 Introduction to the business dimension of supply chain management

3 Introduction to the technical dimension of supply chain management

4 Introduction to the leadership dimension of supply chain management

5 Scenarios in a fresh food company

6 Knowledge in action, with a supply chain simulation

7 Mastering the technical dimension of supply chain

8 Mastering the leadership dimension of supply chain

9 Supply chain in a VUCA world

10 Imagining business challenges for the supply chain

11 Imagining technical challenges for the supply chain

12 Imagining leadership challenges for the supply chain

Epilogue

References

Mastering the Supply Chain

by Ed Weenk

The Fresh Connection

The ultimate value chain experience

The Fresh Connection allows you to achieve a perfect balance between methodol ogy and a practical approach. This cross-functional business simulation game engages participants in turning around a manufacturer of fruit juices. In teams of 4, participants will represent the functional roles of VP Purchasing, VP Operations, VP Supply Chain, and VP Sales.

Accredited by professionals and educators from all over the world, it will motivate your students to deliver optimal performance. It pushes students to develop critical skills when dealing with supply chain best practices from theory and real life. Experience how this new tool creates high energy levels and keep your students engaged.

The Fresh Connection is now available with Textbook!

Integrates theory with practice and aims to create a cross-functional mindset in students and practitioners.

Easy to implement into your curriculum

Ingeniously incorporates knowledge and practice of the fundamentals. The diagrams are especially descriptive, and the combina tion of theory with experiential learning is a game-changer in the quest to educate students and professionals how to manage supply chains in an ever-changing world.

– Laura M Meade, Director of International Programs, Professor of Supply Chain Practice, Neeley School of Business, Texas Christian University, Forth Worth

Mastering the Supply Chain provides an invaluable guide for understanding how decisions are made when managing the supply chain strategically. The emphasis of the book is on practical learning and hence the book is wri en around 'The Fresh Connection' supply chain game. Having used this game in my courses over several years, this book would be an excellent companion. The book will provide value for UG, PG and MBA courses with a focus on supply chain management.

– Professor Samir Dani, Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Head of Logistics, Marketing, Hospitality and Analytics, University of Huddersfield, UK

FIND THE RIGHT BALANCE at any time!

Quickly switch between a classic, online, or hybrid classroom se ing

An out-of-the-box solution What’s included in our Integrated Learning Approach?

Mastering the Supply Chain Textbook

Business simulation game

Educator Course Materials

Exercises, videos & more

Our integrated Learning Approach allows for complete flexibility. When designing your course, you can easily tailor it to meet specific wishes!

Easy and fast to implement! Everything needed to start your course today is included. Our Teaching Approach takes away the stress of planning & designing your course.

Flip the switch and change how you teach your students. You control whether it is in a physical classroom, fully online, or a hybrid setting.

We provide 24/7 support and expert guidance to guarantee successful implementation.

Game setup

Game setup in a nutshell entails participants playing the web-based business game in teams of 4 people; either virtually or in classroom setting.

Eeach of the team members take up one of the four VP roles available in the business simulation game. The teams are challenged to manage a virtual company and consider corpo rate strategy and business objectives. Our business simulation games provide the ultimate learning experience using best practices from theory

Online Business game Teams of 4 virtually or in classroom

The team will experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own functional ‘silo’ but across their business!

Learning & Personal development

Alignment is key Real world Experience Teamwork skills Critical thinking

The benefits of using The Fresh Connection in your course

Easy to use and implement

Wide variety of course materials available

Testimonials

Increases student engagement

Switch instantly between classroom, online, or a hybrid setting

Perfectly match any knowledge level

Setup gameplay to highlight course topics

Creating the curriculum with the teaching materials was easily done. I had very limited time and was able to set up an entire semester in one evening.

– Professor Dr.Ing. Gaby Neumann Professor in Engineering Logistics Technische Hochschule Wildau

Ask your Kogan Page sales representative for more information: kpinfo@koganpage.com

Multiple learning cycles create a step-by-step learning experience

Put complex topics directly into practice

The only time I have trouble ge ing my students out of the classroom is when we’re playing The Fresh Connection.

– Dr. Roberto Perez–Franco Director, MIT Supply Chain Strategy Lab Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT)

Developed by: www.inchainge.com

Mastering the Circular Economy

by Ed Weenk and Rozanne Henzen

The Blue Connection Experience a circular future

The Blue Connection allows you to achieve a perfect balance between methodol ogy and a practical approach. This innovative web-based business game engages participants in the transitioning from a take-make-dispose linear production towards circular business models by implementing a circular strategy for a virtual e-bike manufacturer. In teams of 4, participants will represent the functional roles of VP Finance, VP Purchasing, VP Supply Chain, and VP Sales.

Accredited by professionals and educators from all over the world, it will motivate your students to deliver optimal performance. Experience how this new tool creates high energy levels and keeps your students engaged!

is now available with Textbook!

Integrates theory with practice! It aims to offer students and practitioners a deeper understanding of circularity from a business and value chain management perspective.

Easy to implement into your curriculum

Hands-on and engaging writing style with a brilliant structure where the reader is taken on the journey from idea to practice, and towards envisioning the future. Truly recom mendable!

FIND THE RIGHT BALANCE at any time!

Quickly switch between a classic, online, or hybrid classroom se ing

This timely book provides a thorough overview of the different aspects of the circular economy and concrete tools and exercises for implementing a circular strategy. The combination with The Blue Connection simulation game enables an experiential learning experience that will ensure that students master knowledge and skills needed in the circular economy.

An out-of-the-box solution What’s included in our Integrated Learning Approach?

Mastering the Circular Economy Textbook

Business simulation game

Educator Course Materials

Exercises, videos & more

Our integrated Learning Approach allows for complete flexibility. When designing your course, you can easily tailor it to meet specific wishes!

Easy and fast to implement! Everything needed to start your course today is included. Our Integrated Approach takes away the stress of planning & designing your course.

Flip the switch and change how you teach your students. You control whether it is in a physical classroom, fully online, or a hybrid setting.

We provide 24/7 support and expert guidance to guarantee successful implementation.

– Dr. Desirée Knoppen, Associate professor of circular economy and supply chain management, EADA Business School Barcelona

– Eric Dooms, Associate professor of Strategy at TIAS School for Business and Society

Game setup

Game setup in a nutshell entails participants playing the online business game in teams of 4 people; either virtually or in classroom setting. Eeach of the team members take up one of the four VP roles available in each business simulation game. The teams are challenged to manage a virtual company and consider corpo rate strategy and business objectives. Our business games provide the ultimate learning experience using best practices from theory and real life.

Online Business game Teams of 4 virtually or in classroom

Learning & Personal development

Alignment is key Real world Experience Teamwork skills Critical thinking

The benefits of using The Blue Connection in your course

Easy to use and implement

Wide variety of course materials available

Testimonials

Switch instantly between classroom, online, or a hybrid setting

Multiple learning cycles create a step-by-step learning experience

Put complex topics directly into practice

Ask your

more

At universities, the circular perspective will become a major topic when teaching students supply chain skills. Mastering the Circular Economy book, in combination with the business game “The Blue Connection”, provides a practical and concrete tool for both top level executives in companies and for professors at universities!

The Blue Connection is a simulation that allows us to manage this transition for an electric bicycle manufacturer, it surfaces many of the challenges we will face in reality and allows us to test different solutions and approaches to understand the interactions and inherent complexities.

kpinfo@koganpage.com

Developed by: www.inchainge.com

Increases student engagement Perfectly match any knowledge level

Setup gameplay to highlight course topics

– Søren Schulian Associate Professor at CPH business Copenhagen

– Denyse Julien Associate Professor Cranfield University School of Management

The team will experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own functional ‘silo’ but across their business!

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit

Over 100 Tools for Transport, Warehousing and Inventory Management

This book

• Presents models such as the 8D approach and Decision Matrix Analysis (DMA) as well as examples of how they are used in practice

• Provides over 100 tools that cover every function of warehousing, transport and inventory management

• Online resources: downloadable tools such as supply chain audits and supply chain strategy decision charts

• New to this edition: resource planning and productivity spreadsheets, CSR in supply chain audits and supply chain strategy decision charts

Edition: 3

Date: 03/03/2020

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781789660869

Ebook: 9781789660852 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Description

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit provides practical tools for warehouse, inventory and transport managers and students to help them tackle the challenges of logistics and supply chain management. It is full of practical ideas and information to optimise the management of logistics and supply chain processes.

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit offers solutions and plans spanning across a variety of sub-disciplines such as warehousing, logistics, supply chain management, inventory and outsourcing. Each toolkit addresses key principles within its area of discipline, providing the reader with a precision approach to be used in complex and sensitive circumstances. The toolkit presents a number of major management tools such as Fortna's Product Flow Smart Design, SMART, DMAIC and Gantt charts. General management, performance management and problem-solving tools have also been included to provide a broader, transferable scope of tools for the reader.

Author Information

Gwynne Richards has over thirty years' experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management for practitioners. He lectures at Warwick and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He is also the author of Warehouse Management.

Susan Grinsted has over thirty years' experience of improving material flow through supply chains, directly or indirectly, as a business manager, consultant, educator and trainer. She is co-founder of HowToLogistics.com, an associate at Apprise Consulting (UK) and a Principal Fellow of WMG at Warwick University (UK).

Table of Contents

Introduction

Warehouse management tools and guides

Transport management tools

Inventory management tools

Supply chain management tools

Outsourcing tools

General management tools

Performance management tools

Financial management tools and ratios

Problem-solving tools

Appendix 1 Useful websites

Appendix 2 Imperial/metric conversions

Appendix 3 Automatic identification (autoID)

Index

The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook

A Step-by-Step Guide From Strategy Through to Implementation

This book

• Provides a life-cycle approach to logistics outsourcing, with tried and tested processes for decision-making and implementation

• Includes informative case studies from large companies such as Asda, British Airways and KFC, as well as major 3PLs

• Looks at the benefits of outsourcing, such as enhancing customer satisfaction and reducing liabilities

• Presents current statistics for logistics outsourcing and analyses why contracts are both awarded and terminated

• Online Resources: Includes examples of decision tables, RFP/metrics/selection criteria as excel and word downloadable templates, as well as PowerPoints for students

Description

For any business involved in today's supply chains, logistics services are critical. Companies have to decide whether to retain their own logistics operations or place their trust in thirdparty suppliers. This potential move away from the traditional approach of managing these processes internally can lead to improved service and reduced cost although this isn't always the case. The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook provides step by step guidance on the process of logistics outsourcing and explains how to apply this information for commercial success. Vital advice is given on benchmarking existing operations, how to shortlist companies, produce a request for a proposal, choose the optimum supplier and implement and manage the contract.

The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook analyses outsourcing from both an industry wide perspective, while also drilling down into specific individual considerations. The book provides valuable guidance in terms of contractual relationships, cost models and the integration of information technology systems. By analysing current statistics and surveys, looking into factors behind why contracts are awarded and terminated important insights can be acquired. This book contains tools, models, online resources and case studies on the outsourced relationships of companies including Intel KFC and BA to further develop the reader's knowledge which makes this book an informative and essential resource.

Author Information

Gwynne Richards has over 35 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics outsourcing. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he produces and runs a number of courses on warehouse management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners.

Jo Godsmark is a supply chain professional and consultant with over 20 years experience in manufacturing and logistics. She is Chair of Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport's Outsourcing and Procurement Forum.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749484620

Ebook: 9780749484637

Pages: 384

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

Introduction

Logistics outsourcing

To outsource or not to outsource?

The logistics services marketplace

Supplier or partner?

The outsourcing lifecycle

Third-party logistics contracts and pricing mechanisms

Performance measurement and management

The risks associated with outsourcing

Managing relationships

IT in logistics outsourcing

The future of logistics outsourcing

Appendix I LSP warehouse audit checklists

Appendix II LSP transport audit checklists

Appendix III Sample non-disclosure agreement

Appendix IV LSP outsourcing contract –typical headings

Appendix V Sample receiving process flow

Appendix VI Sample customer questionnaire

Appendix VII Useful websites

References and further reading

Index

E-Logistics

Managing Digital Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage

This book

• Provides the latest insights from leading thinkers to keep readers up to date with the growth and evolution of e-logistics

• Explains key technological and business developments, such as cloud computing, social technology and distributed leger technology, and how they can be applied

• Examines the strategic role of e-logistics in managing information and information flows within and between organizations

• New to this edition: new chapters on AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of Things, Immersive technology, robotics, drone and last mile deliveries

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749496883

Ebook: 9780749496890

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Description

E-Logistics serves as the nerve system for the whole supply chain and enables smooth information flow within and between organizations.

This new and updated edition provides the latest and most comprehensive coverage on digitalization in logistics and supply chain. It covers all transport modes and the role of ICT in supporting an integrated freight and supply chain network.

E-Logistics provides a cross-academic and industry perspective with leading academics and practitioners as contributing authors. A variety of successful e-logistics business approaches are discussed covering a range of commercial sectors and transport modes. Subsequent chapters address in depth support systems for B2C and B2B e-commerce and e-fulfilment, warehouse management, RFID, electronic marketplaces, global supply network visibility and service chain automation. Industry case studies are used to support the discussion. The new edition also covers emerging technologies such as AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of Things, Robotics, drone and last mile deliveries.

Author Information

Yingli Wang is a Reader in logistics and operations management at Cardiff Business School. She specialises in logistics and supply chain digitisation and has led a number of research projects from a wide range of UK and international funding bodies. Her research started with examining technological innovation for organisations such as logistics service providers and manufacturers, and then recently extended to explore how technological innovations could benefit a wider society, in particular by addressing the 'wicked' problems and grand challenges. Dr. Wang is also a Chartered Member of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT).

Stephen Pettit is a Professor at Cardiff Business School and is a member of the Transport and Logistics Research Group within the Logistics and Operations Management Section. He has been involved in a wide range of transport-related research programmes for both the UK Government and the European Commission. His research interests include port management and policy, and the logistics of humanitarian aid delivery. His recent research has also focused on international logistics and the application of information and communication technology in the fields of transport, logistics and supply chain management.

Table of Contents

1 E-logistics definition, trends and directions

2 End-to-end global visibility and order management - Integrated supply and demand chains in the age of value chain management

3 B2C e-commerce and fulfilment

4 The challenges of e-commerce on warehousing in the future

5 Advanced warehouse management systems and innovations - Streamlining e-logistics processes with technology deployment

6 Automating a logistics service chain - A telecommunications company’s perspective

7 Regional electronic marketplaces to improve logistics

8 Trade and transport electronic single windows

9 Port-centric ICT systems - Building value in supply chains

Defence Logistics

Enabling and Sustaining Successful Military Operations

This book

• Covers the entire supply chain in a defence context through real-life case studies, examining issues such as circular logistics in defence and contracting

• Provides vital insights from international academics and professionals currently working in defence logistics areas such as distributive manufacturing and performance management

• Includes coverage of recent developments and technologies affecting defence logistics, such as 3D printing and issues such as obsolescence, counterfeiting and sustainability

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2018

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749478032

Ebook: 9780749478049

Pages: 384

Format (mm): 230x150

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Logistics

Description

The management of logistics and supply chain operations is of vital importance in the defence sector.

Defence Logistics looks at established theories and their practical utility, providing insights into current thinking for postgraduate and undergraduate students, lecturers, researchers, practitioners and professionals through real-life case studies.

Defence Logistics focuses on key areas of logistics and supply chain management in context, such as sustainability, inventory management, resilience, procurement, information systems and crisis response. This comprehensive and up-to-the-minute collection includes contributions from international academics from a range of universities, academies and defence schools, along with practitioners who are currently working in the field of defence logistics.

Author Information

Jeremy Smith manages modules on the Defence Acquisition Management and the Programme and Project Management MScs at Cranfield Defence and Security, UK. He developed and leads several logistics short courses and workshops pitched at strategic and practitioner levels. He served for 25 years in the British Army as a logistician and Ammunition Technical Officer.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Defence logistics definitions and frameworks

2 Defence logistics - an historical perspective

Defence logistics in context

Resilience in defence supply chains

Integrating mission and support systems through the life cycle - Integrated logistics support and maintenance strategies

6 Supportability analysis for supportable and supported mission systems

Achieving dependability in defence systems

Planning and executing defence operational logistics

Procurement for defence logistics support

Managing performance in defence logistics

Optimizing the defence inventory

Accounting and finance in defence logistics

Decision support in defence logistics

Defence logistics and crisis response

Defence logistics information systems

A look to the future

Fashion Logistics

Insights into the Fashion Retail Supply Chain

This book

• Provides a holistic view of both fashion retailing and fashion logistics.

• Studies major forces driving change in the fashion retail industry and how manufacturers can adapt their working practices accordingly.

• New to this edition: content has been restructured to include updated case studies, key objectives, summary q&a's and 'how to put into practice' textboxes.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749493318

Ebook: 9780749493325

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

1

Introduction to fashion logistics

2 The changing nature of fashion retailing: Implications for logistics

3 Offshore sourcing and outsourcing in the international fashion supply chain

4 Corporate social responsibility (CSR) in international fashion supply chains

International logistics

In-store consumer service

Online consumer service

8 Luxury fashion and supply chain management

9 Sustainable fashion retailing and logistics

Description

Retailers are being advised to review their supply chains in a bid to accelerate their speed to market. Fashion Logistics assesses the growth and changes in the industry as well as the drivers of change in the market. Supply chain networks and operations play an integral role in distributing product across the retail industry and significant changes within those networks have altered the way in which they function. Manufacturers therefore need to rethink their supply chains to make them resilient to shock, agile enough to respond quickly to sudden change, flexible enough to customize products and efficient enough to protect margins. Fashion Logistics assesses these forces and changes and how manufacturers should adapt their working practices accordingly.

This second edition of Fashion Logistics includes revised CSR and reshoring sections, updated case studies and new content on how manufacturers can adapt their working practices and the further demise of the department store sector.

Author Information

John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University, Scotland. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics. He was the founder editor of the International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management and is on the editorial board of numerous marketing and logistics journals. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Logistics and Transport. He holds an Honorary Professorship at St Andrews University and several visiting positions at European universities.

David B Grant is Professor of Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at the Hanken School of Economics, Finland. David has over 250 publications in various refereed journals, books and conference proceedings and is on the editorial board of several internationally ranked journals. Honours in 2019 include the award of the Bualuang ASEAN Chair Professorship at Thammasat University in Thailand.

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations

Creating and Operating Customer Focused Supply Networks

This book

• Looks at how bringing marketing and logistics together is a powerful way of improving customer service and increasing competitiveness

• Demonstrates how to deal with digitalisation and successfully integrate it into marketing and logistics strategies

• Presents a range of examples from a range of sectors such as retail, transport and the service industries

• Includes case studies such as Toyota and Value and Tesco and the club card

• Examines how to deal with scenarios such as Black Friday and Online Monday, where marketing is promising something logistics can't deliver

Description

Logistics and marketing stand out as two disciplines which are connected, and both are critical to the provision of customer value. Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations looks at marketing-led logistics and logistics-led marketing. In the current business world, the idea of a single supply chain has been replaced by an integrated multi-channel approach. The authors therefore examine how to optimise profit and control costs through the coordination of these two functions.

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations takes an in-depth look at physical supply chains where manufacturing of a product occurs from groceries to pharmaceuticals, and from automotive to construction. The authors examine omni-channel, how this affects the customer experience and the need for a joined-up strategy which is operationalised across all channels. They also look at the challenges of digitalisation and the customer interface with the growth of the internet as well as the intensification of competition across all sectors.

Author Information

Robert Mason has a business background, mainly in a variety of roles with M&S. He is now a Reader in Logistics and Operations Management (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner.

Barry Evans' early career involved roles in Logistics/Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail. This was followed by roles in Tesco plc, including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. He joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate. Mr Evans is now retired.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749478735

Ebook: 9780749478742 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

1 An Introduction – Setting the Scene

2 Customer Value – What is it?

3 Organisations have to be More Capable Today than Ever Before – Why?

4 How Purpose is Achieved – A Marketing and Logistics Led Approach

5 What Great Operational Process Capability Looks Like

6 Marketing and Logistics in Harmony –Building and Sustaining Operational Excellence Integrated with a Marketing Orientation

7 Finding Logistics Solutions – How Logistics is Responding to Modern Challenges

8 Conclusions – Logistics is Business Critical

Urban Logistics

Management, Policy and Innovation in a Rapidly Changing Environment

This book

• Provides fascinating cases that identify the key stages in the development of city logistics initiatives in London, New York, Paris, SaoPaulo, Tokyo, Beijing, Delhi and Gothenburg

• Examines urban supply chains for major cities, with cases looking at urban food supply chains, services and the special logistics requirements involved, construction, waste management, e-commerce and home delivery

• Includes toolkits to help policy makers and managers devise and work with new initiatives

• Presents and is based on original research from the University of Gothenburg and Chalmers in Sweden, the Centre for Infrastructure, Transportation and the Environment in New York and the University of California

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2018

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749478711

Ebook: 9780749478728

Pages: 392

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

1 Setting the scene

1 Introduction to urban logistics

2 Metropolitan economies and the generation of freight and service activity –An international perspective

3 Urban logistics – The regional dimension

4 Urban planning policies for logistics facilities: a comparison between US metropolitan areas and the Paris region

5 The dualism of urban freight distribution –City vs suburban logistics

6 Port cities and urban logistics

2 Urban logistics diversity

7 The logistics of parcel delivery – Current operations and challenges facing the UK market

8 E-commerce trends and implications for urban logistics

9 Food and urban logistics – A fast-changing sector with significant policy and business implications

10 Consolidation centres in construction logistics

11 The socio-economic benefits of off-peak hour distribution – The case of Stockholm

3 Making change happen

12 Stakeholder engagement and partnerships for improved urban logistics

13 Multi-actor multi-criteria analysis as a tool to involve urban logistics stakeholders

14 Off-hour deliveries – The importance of outreach and proper planning

15 The procurement process – A key to improved urban logistics efficiency

16 Future developments in modelling and information

Operations and Supply Chain

Packaging Logistics

Understanding and managing the economic and environmental impacts of packaging in supply chains

This book

• Explores key characteristics of industrial and consumer packaging in a variety of companies, using examples and case studies from practice

• Examines the different ways that packaging adds value to logistics and supply chain, such as cost-effectiveness and packaging aesthetics

• Provides concrete tools, methods and guidelines that help reduce the cost of materials handling, and increase safe and efficient storage

• Looks at environmentally friendly and innovative packaging solutions which help promote sustainability and cut costs

• Examines the track and trace capability of packaging through ICT, the technology included in packaging to enable tracking through the supply chain

Description

Packaging has a major impact on supply chain performance, as it affects all logistics activities in supply chains. Effective and efficient packaging can significantly improve the performance of companies by generating value and reducing costs and the negative environmental impacts in supply chains. Packaging Logistics uses a systems approach to examine all the essential roles of packaging in supply chains, from the purchasing of raw materials to the production and sale of finished products, as well as transport and distribution. It examines the strategic role of packaging and its operational importance, explains the theoretical basis, presents useful methodologies, tools and concepts, and provides decision support for packaging innovation. It provides several examples of the total environmental impacts of packaging: on logistics and transport efficiency, on product waste and from the packaging material.

Packaging Logistics covers essential topics such as one-way and reusable packaging, industrial and consumer packaging, ICT, end-of-life, environment, innovation, e-commerce, and future trends and challenges. This research-based and practical book takes the reader through every stage of packaging and relates it to supply chain and logistics, illustrated by many case studies.

Author Information

Henrik Pålsson is Associate Professor at Lund University, Sweden. He has conducted research and taught master's students within packaging logistics since 2004.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749481704

Ebook: 9780749481711

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

1 Defining Packaging Logistics

Packaging performance in supply chains

Packaging performance methodology

Environmental performance of packaging logistics

Managing packaging waste

Managing ICT features of packaging

Reusable packaging systems

Industrial packaging evaluation

Decision support for industrial packaging

Organising packaging development

Packaging innovation capability

Managing packaging logistics in e-commerce channels

Managing packaging logistics in developing countries

References

Health and Safety in Logistics

Assessing and Avoiding Risk in Warehousing and Transportation

This book

• Outlines health and safety from the basic principles such as establishing the best culture, through to issues relating to physical and mental health, personal protection equipment, manual and mechanical handling, and safe transport operations

• Provides the most up to date regulatory information on health and safety, such as the Health and Safety at Work Act (HASAWA)

• Focuses on assessment and elimination of risks, compliance and the avoidance of unsafe practices in logistics and transportation

• Looks at vehicles, their maintenance and driving standards as well as the important role of managers in safe operation, for example by optimum vehicle routing

Description

Logistics is a complex industry that exposes employees to a whole variety of risks.

These include not only accidents on the road and deaths and injuries resulting from unsafe use of forklifts, but also the consequences of poor fire safety, long-term health risks due to poor manual handling technique and problems relating to mental health. Many thousands of incidents are recorded every year. This book examines each aspect of health and safety in turn, with a focus on warehousing and transportation.

Health and Safety in Logistics informs managers about potential hazards found in the industry and explains in detail how they can make the workplace as safe as possible.

Author Information

Jerry Rudd is a logistics consultant. He was formerly Logistics Manager at Gefco and Business Unit Director at Wincanton, working with Waitrose, Sainsbury's and British Airways.

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789663259

Ebook: 9781789663266 Pages: 464

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Logistics

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – The importance of health and safety

Basic principles of health and safety

Physical health issues

Mental health

Drug and alcohol issues

Personal protection equipment

Safe storage and warehouse layout

Manual handling

Materials handling equipment

Fire safety

Yard safety

Vehicle loading

Road vehicle specifications, maintenance and compliance

Accident prevention during vehicle operations

Transport of dangerous goods by road

Vehicle mounted loading equipment

Seafreight, rolling motorway and airfreight

Miscellaneous issues

Health and safety monitoring and audit

Introduction to Global Logistics

Delivering the Goods

This book

• Offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics

• Provides in-depth definitions, descriptions and explorations of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express

• Examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and postharvest food losses

• Online resources: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2016

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749478254

Ebook: 9780749478261 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Global Logistics

Description

Introduction to Global Logistics offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics. Covering the breadth of logistics, this highly accessible text is illustrated by engaging case studies of market leaders. In this comprehensive second instalment of Global Logistics Strategies, John Manners-Bell provides an in-depth definition, description and exploration of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express. The book also examines major sectors, including automotive, chemical, pharmaceutical, retail, consumer, and high tech.

Introduction to Global Logistics offers a detailed examination of key topics, including: how the logistics industry has developed, how it is influenced by macro-economic factors and demand-side trends, what the risks are to the industry, and how it will develop over the coming years. It examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses.

Online resources available: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides.

Author Information

John Manners-Bell is the founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is Honorary Visiting Professor at the London Metropolitan University, adviser to the World Economic Forum and a former Chairman of the Supply Chain Council of the World Economic Forum. Prior to establishing Transport Intelligence, he worked as an analyst in consultancies specializing in international trade, transport and logistics. John Manners-Bell is author of Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets and Supply Chain Risk

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What’s shaping the global logistics market?

2 An industry in transformation: towards consolidation

3 Logistics market development by geography

The emergence of logistics clusters

International freight forwarding

Contract logistics

European road freight

Express parcels

Air cargo

Container shipping

The European rail and intermodal sectors

Supply chain technologies

Supply chain dynamics of vertical sectors

Risks in global supply chains

The e-commerce logistics phenomenon

Supply chain innovation and disruption

Ethical and sustainable supply chain strategies

Logistics, Operations and Supply

Global Logistics

New Directions in Supply Chain Management

This book

• Provides research from leading academics and practitioners on fundamental, cuttingedge and trending topics in logistics and supply chain management

• Offers guidance on how to apply key learnings, tools, and methods for use globally in the real world scenarios

• Examines the supply chain from start to finish to teach readers the importance and the nuances of each stage of supply chain management

• New to this edition: a revised structure and focus, a range of new topics including the supply chain of the future, ethical supply chains and supply chain leadership

• Supply chains are fundamental to the global economy. There is a now a need to rethink the concept of resilience and to tackle the challenges of achieving net zero emissions and continually evolving consumer demands. This latest version of Global Logistics addresses those issues and provides those in logistics and supply chain operations with valuable and current thinking from which we will all benefit.

Edition: 8

Date: 03/07/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398600003

Ebook: 9781398600010

Pages: 480

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Global Logistics

Table of Contents

1 Re-thinking supply chain strategy

2 Linking supply chain management to financial performance

3 Supply chain risk management: finance –the forgotten perspective?

4 Supply chain vulnerability and resilience

5 Fulfilling customer needs in the 2020s with marketing and logistics

6 New procurement directions in supply chain management

7 Maximizing capacity utilization in freight transport

8 Retail logistics

9 Trends and strategies in global logistics and supply chain management

10 Global sourcing and supply 190

11 Supply chain relationships: the foundation of success

12 Delivering sustainability through supply chain management

13 Greening of logistics: cutting pollution and greenhouse gas emissions

14 People powering contemporary supply chains

15 Leadership in logistics

16 Ethics in supply chains: an illustrated survey

17 Humanitarian logistics and supply chain management

18 Digitalization in global supply chain operations

19 Digitalization and Industry 4.0 in logistics

20 Performance measurement and management in the supply chain

21 Aligning technology, manufacturing and supply chain: why it matters and how to do it

22 The ‘deglobalization’ of logistics and supply chains: operating in an increasingly nationalistic and risky world

International Freight Transport

Cases, Structures and Prospects

This book

• Overviews global container transport, including shipping networks and inland/multimodal aspects

• Focuses on operational models and cost structures, including multimodal

• Discusses key origins and destinations, main routes and service types, and key players in the sector

• Written by industry experts and respected academics who have advised the Department of Transport and the United Nations

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2017

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749474348

Ebook: 9780749474355

Pages: 376

Format (mm): 240x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Global Logistics

Description

International Freight Transport presents the key changes and issues in the fast-moving industries of trade and transport. It includes coverage of regional trade groupings, the emergence of new large economies (i.e. BRIC countries), and pivotal regions such as the Middle East and Central America where major projects, such as new and widened canals, are underway or planned. These changes could redraw the trade map with major implications for transport patterns and solutions.

Blending geography, economics, politics and trade, International Freight Transport provides insight into a wide range of topics, including: globalisation; demand versus supply; buyers and sellers; transport regulation, geography, modes and methods; transport ownership; alliances; and safety and security. The book is the only comprehensive and accessible book on international transport available.

Author Information

Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes within Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America.

Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a range of transport related research including a ground-breaking project for the Department of Transport.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – Cases, Structures and Prospects

1 Trade and the Transport Environment

2 Demand, Supply and Freight Rates –The Shipping of Global Trade [Hassiba Benamara, Jan Hoffmann and Frida Youssef]

3 Trade and Customs Procedures in International Freight Transport –Requirements, Issues and Trends [Andrew Grainger]

2 International Freight Transport in Practice

4 Multimodal Transport Solutions for Grain Exports from Kazakhstan [Timur Bimaganbetov, Anthony Beresford and Stephen Pettit]

5 The Transport of Oil and Gas [Hance D Smith and Azmath Jaleel]

6 Global Container Transport [Rolf Neise]

7 Car Shipping [Paul Nieuwenhuis]

3 Trading Regions

8 International Freight Logistics in South East Asia – The Indonesia–Malaysia–Thailand Growth Triangle (IMT-GT) [Ruth Banomyong]

9 North America’s Evolving International Freight Transport – Challenges and Responses [Michael Ircha]

10 International Freight Transport in South America – The Case of Colombia [David B Grant, Rodrigo Britto, Juan Pablo Soto, Marcus Thiell]

11 International Freight Transport in Southern Africa [Christopher Savage]

12 Freight Transport in Korea and Taiwan [Su-Han Woo, Po-Lin Lai, Doori Kim and Jungeun Kim]

4 Challenging Environments and Transport Futures

13 Overcoming International Freight Transport Challenges in a Disaster Response Context [Peter Tatham and Gyöngyi Kovács]

14 Transport Futures – Reconciling the OnDemand Economy with Global Production Chains [Peter Wells]

Cross-Border Logistics Operations

Effective Trade Facilitation and Border Management

This book

• Provides a comprehensive overview of crossborder logistics from an operational and strategic perspective

• Focuses on operational and regulatory requirements, their impacts on business and ways to reduce those impacts

• Includes illustrative case studies and examples and extracts from relevant regulations and international recommendations

• Covers trade facilitation and frictionless trade, such as the World Trade Organization (WTO) Trade Facilitation Agreement, Customs Partnership Programmes and Region Trade Agreements

• Online resources: summary tables of regulations and international recommendations

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2021

Price: £59.99

Paperback: 9781789666724

Ebook: 9781789666748

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Global Logistics

Table of Contents

1 Cross-border logistics operations

Customs administrations, tariffs and other taxes

Customs declarations and control

Prohibitions, restrictions and other border procedures

Border facilities - Operations and design

Trade and customs compliance management

Coordinated border management and supply chain security

8 Logistics, supply chain management and borders

9 Trade facilitation

10 Borders and disaster relief logistics operations

International Supply Chain Relationships

Creating Competitive Advantage in a Globalized Economy

This book

• Examines the myriad ways in which companies are configuring themselves to compete in an internationalized economy

• Explains the shared benefits and metrics which are crucial for the long-term sustainability of international supply chain business relationships

• Presents case studies of long-term strategic relationships, which are critical for success, as well as short-term alliances designed to address specific tactical goals, projects or initiatives

• Online resources: audio Q&A clips with Patrick Daly

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749480035

Ebook: 9780749480042

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Global Logistics

Description

Multinational corporations have developed networks of production that stretch across the globe.

They have done this in order to maximize their ability to service their customers in markets worldwide, exploit greater opportunities for growth, maximize their profitability and increase their business value. It is the strength and quality of the relationships and connections that we build with other players that will ultimately determine the effectiveness and the success of our business.

International Supply Chain Relationships looks at these complex connections, covering long-term inter-organizational relationships, situational inter-organizational relationships, multi-disciplinary global engineering teams, technologies and innovations, supply chain communication, supply chain coordination, and future trends.

International Supply Chain Relationships aims to provide supply chain practitioners in any type of business with ideas, tools and strategies that they can readily access, interpret and put into practice speedily and pragmatically to create value for their own international business. In many instances, supply chain projects bring together people from different disciplines who may come from different cultures and ethnic backgrounds. Add in long distances and different time zones and the complexities and challenges of sustaining successful working relationships increase even more. This book provides case studies which illustrate how to manage these arrangements effectively.

Author Information

Patrick Daly has been a consultant for almost 20 years working in international supply chain and logistics with some of the world's top international corporations, including PepsiCo Worldwide Flavours, Pfizer, Proctor & Gamble, GlaxoSmithKline, Merck Millipore and many more. He has worked with these clients all around the world including China, India, Middle East, Europe, North America and South America.

Table of Contents

1 The globalization of business and the supply chain management concept

2 The world is not flat – Geography still matters

3 Culture – An evolutionary strategy for success

4 We’re getting hitched – Long-term interorganizational relationships

5 Let’s make a movie – Situational interorganizational relationships

6 Why bother? The whole is greater than the sum of the parts

7 Do you speak my language? Supply chain communication

8 Right stuff, right place, right time –Supply chain coordination

9 Finger on the pulse – Control and measurement

10 Looking around the block – Future trends

The Inventory Toolkit

Business Systems Solutions

This book

• Provides extensive guidelines to the key parameters used when planning inventory at the detailed item operational level and tools required to plan inventory at a strategic level.

• Presents case study examples to provide broader understanding of tools and techniques and to demonstrate where each tool is best applied

• Includes a comprehensive list of tools used in inventory planning, essential for both students and practitioners

• New to this edition: chapters on balancing and control, inventory stack and flow, future developments in inventory management and new tools and case studies.

• Online resources: supporting excel spreadsheets to aid understanding and implementation of inventory planning, with ready-to-use formulae.

Description

Looking beyond the complexity and theory of inventory management, authors Geoff Relph and Catherine Milner examine managing inventory and achieving targets. Whilst the first edition mainly focused on planning, this new edition of The Inventory Toolkit includes three new chapters that go beyond planning to implementation. Amongst other topics, the new chapters cover holding and moving inventory, working with suppliers and using stack and flow to identify pinch points and facilitate lean and agile operations.

This comprehensive second edition of The Inventory Toolkit includes case studies from diverse industries such as retail and aerospace, and worked examples and regular exercises which illustrate how the inventory tools can be used in an operational setting. It is an invaluable reference guide for students and practitioners focusing on inventory management and operations management in manufacturing and retail, as well as operational staff involved in the implementation of the MRP and inventory management modules of ERP systems.

Author Information

Geoff Relph has extensive experience in inventory and business systems management in the operational, consulting and academic sectors. He is an associate lecturer at the Warwick Manufacturing Group, University of Warwick, UK, and delivers modules for the MSc Programme in the UK and internationally.

Catherine Milner is a chartered engineer and project manager with experience working in aerospace, petrochemicals and telecommunications. She has managed many successful projects on electronic data exchange with customers, forecasting, MRP, supply chain management, and business process re-engineering. She is a managing consultant, and a visiting lecturer at the University of Warwick.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/07/2019

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482121

Ebook: 9780749482138 Pages: 448

Format (mm): 239x171

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Operations Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Introduction to inventory management

Business systems and business

Inventory balancing and control

The complexity of inventory management within business systems

Stack and flow inventories

Traditional thinking in inventory optimization

k-curve methodology

The practical application of k-curve

Case study examples of k-curve planning approach

Review, summary and what to do next

Appendix A

Appendix B

Appendix C

Useful websites

Index

Business Operations Models

Becoming a Disruptive Competitor

This book

• Looks at common strands that can inform strategy from a practical operating perspective

• Highlights the core fundamentals that business leaders should be guided by in order to achieve organizational success

• Offers a framework for achieving super performance

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2015

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749473310

Ebook: 9780749473327

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Operations Management

Table of Contents

1 What we mean by business operations models – and why are they important?

2 The characteristics of super-performing businesses

3 The customer lens – understanding compelling value

4 The strategy operations gap

5 Unpacking the business operations model framework

6 The technology dimension to being a disruptor

7 Market-changing models – driving transformation

Description

Most successful companies have operations management at their heart. It enables strategy and should be part of boardroom discussions. However, Cranfield research has shown that business strategy barely recognises the world of operations management.

Recognising that operations management needs to be more strategic, Business Operations Models is a revolutionary new title that looks at the interrelationship of operations management and strategy.

In Business Operations Models, Martin Christopher and Alan Braithwaite identify the characteristics of market-leading businesses that have transformed their markets and delivered super performance for their stakeholders. It points to the theory gap between strategic thinking and operations and how many high-performing businesses arrive at their new operating models as much by chance as judgement. Unpacking those observations leads to some clearly defined features of winning competitors, including eliminating waste, leveraging technology, and utilising transformative business models. Business Operations Models offers a framework for achieving super performance and understanding when and how a company may be able to leverage its capabilities to outperform.

The book provides detailed international case studies that illustrate how the principles work in practice, including Apple, Dell, Amazon, John Lewis, Southwest Airlines, Aldi, Toyota and many others.

Author Information

Alan Braithwaite is Visiting Professor at Cranfield University and specializes in supply chain strategy and operational excellence in the retail, manufacturing and service sectors. He is the founder of LCP Consulting, which collaborates with over 400 companies internationally.

Martin Christopher has been at the forefront of the development of new thinking in logistics and supply chain management for over 30 years. He is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, where he helped build the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management into a leading centre of excellence. His published work is widely cited by other scholars and he has been invited to participate in academic and industry events around the world.

8

Competing through the basics

9 Optimization of the business operations model

10 Making it happen – becoming a disruptor

11 Guiding principles to building a competitive edge through business operations models

The Operations Advantage

A Practical Guide to Making Operations Work

This book

• Shows how effective operations can have a huge strategic impact throughout the organization

• Provides guidance on how to respond to the most important challenges facing the practice of operations management

• Offers direction on how to set the agenda for developing operations capabilities

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749473549

Ebook: 9780749473556 Pages: 312

Format (mm): 233x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Operations Management

Table of Contents

Exploit the Power of Operations

Establish an Operations Capability Culture

Make Operations a Strategic Asset

Set Your Performance Framework

Resource Your Operation Appropriately

Establish Internal Processes Networks

Shape Your External Supply Networks

Learn from Day-to-day Control

Setting Improvement Priorities

Position Your Improvement Process

Master the Mechanics of Improvement

Description

The study and practice of operations has shifted to reflect the new challenges and uncertainties of how to thrive in today's ever-changing world. The Operations Advantage identifies the most significant challenges to the practice of operations management and gives guidance on how businesses can respond. Leaders need to link the strategic objectives of the business clearly and logically to its operations performance objectives. The book presents a series of ten activities that will help them to do this and therefore make operations work better, such as designing and configuring internal processes and resourcing the operations appropriately.

Based on the global teaching, training and consultancy conducted by the author, The Operations Advantage looks at the application of operations management across a range of sectors, including finance, healthcare, professional services, oil and gas industries. Although these diverse sectors require operations practitioners to apply knowledge in different ways, they essentially deal with the same set of processes. The book is an indispensable and unique guide for anyone with an operational role in any organization, as well as operations management students and academics.

Author Information

Nigel Slack is Emeritus Professor of Operations Management and Strategy at Warwick Business School, Coventry, UK and the former head of its Operations Management Group. He acts as a consultant in many sectors, including Financial Services, Utilities, Retail, Professional Services, General Services, Aerospace, FMCG, and Engineering Manufacturing.

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Warehouse Management

The Definitive Guide to Improving Efficiency and Minimizing Costs in the Modern Warehouse

This book

• Outlines the essential information on warehouse management and how to overcome common challenges and exploit potential opportunities

• Provides practical advice on how to operate an efficient and cost-effective warehouse using methods such as resource planning, labour management and warehouse layout

• Explores the latest technologies in warehousing, including robotics, cobots, technologies for dealing with pandemics, AI and drones in the warehouse, along with how these will impact the future of warehousing

• New to this edition: updates on new technologies in warehousing, the latest thinking on the future of warehouses and renewed online resources

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides (lecturer slides), bonus chapter on outsourcing

Description

Modern warehouses are capitalizing on cutting-edge technologies, new operating models and innovative practices to maximize their role in the wider supply chain. Understand how to successfully manage these warehouses with this bestselling guide.

The fourth edition of Warehouse Management is fully updated to include up to date information across the board. The latest technologies in warehousing, such as robotics, cobots and AI, are explained and their impact is situated alongside discussions on the future of warehousing. There are new case studies from companies who have achieved improvements and cost savings through the introduction of new technology and equipment, leaner processes and environmental initiatives. Gwynne Richards provides expert advice with clear and easy to grasp solutions.

Warehouse Management guides the reader through all aspects of successfully managing a warehouse, its operations and distribution. This bestselling book covers an extensive range of key topics from defining the modern warehouse, detailing management processes, strategies and practices to outlining how to tackle environmental challenges to ensure a sustainable supply chain. With practical insights into how to improve operating costs, increase efficiency and reduce costs, this is a must read for optimizing warehouse performance. New and updated online resources include PowerPoint slides and a bonus chapter on outsourcing.

Author Information

Gwynne Richards has over 30 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics and is based in the Vale of Glamorgan, UK. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners. He is the co-author of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit with Susan Grinstead and The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook with Jo Godsmark, both published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789668407

Ebook: 9781789668414 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Warehouse Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

The role of the warehouse

Role of the warehouse manager

Warehouse processes - Receiving and put-away

Warehouse processes - Pick preparation

Goods-to-person and person-to-goods picking

Order-picking methods

Warehouse processes from replenishment to despatch and beyond

Information systems in the warehouse

Warehouse layout

Storage and handling equipment

Resourcing a warehouse

Warehouse costs

Performance measurement and management

Health and safety

The warehouse and the environment

The warehouse of the future

Appendix 1 Global warehouse costs

Appendix 2 Warehouse audit checklists

Bibliography

Websites of companies that have contributed to this book and other useful websites

Glossary

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

Systems, Planning, Application and Cost Effectiveness

This book

• Presents the complex detail of warehousing and transportation logistics in a clear and digestible way

• Provides full-colour technical drawings, structural models and tables which clearly illustrate technical issues

• Translated from the original German bestselling book, Transport-und Lagerlogistik, published by Springer Nature.

• Includes valuable tools for planning and making economic efficiency calculations

• Provides more than 200 examples with worked solutions and gives the reader targeted practice with 250 questions and answers

Description

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics offers an overview of transport, warehousing and assembly logistics, including order picking, packaging, handling and management. The key focus is on the management techniques in transport and warehousing and the logistics-focused perspective runs throughout the entire book. The author examines different applications and planning techniques and includes examples of supporting economic calculations and questions and answers.

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics looks at unit creation, material flow or goods storage as well as systems and management for planning or information to identify objects, control and processing of orders. It is a practice-oriented book for students with a multitude of useful information and ideas. It is also a workbook for professional practitioners, production, planning and industrial engineers, who are specifically concerned with the planning side of this specialist area. The examples at the end of each chapter deepen and complement the content and there are comprehensive notes with each figure providing additional information on the topic.

Author Information

Professor Heinrich Martin was a lecturer at the University of Applied Science in Hamburg for over 30 years, and has been a visiting lecturer in universities around the world. His areas of expertise include transportation systems, warehousing systems, order picking systems, material flow systems and factory planning. Dr Martin has lead multiple projects with numerous organisations.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2018

Price: £54.99

Paperback: 9780749482206

Ebook: 9780749482213 Pages: 680

Format (mm): 241x170

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Warehouse Management

Table of Contents

Logistics Structures Within Companies

Material Flow Logistics

Transporting Goods – Packaging, Loading Unit

Basic Transport Logistics

Continuous Conveyor

Discontinuous Conveyor

Switching

Handling

Basic Warehouse and Picking Logistics

Warehouses and Shelves

Picking Systems

Planning System and Project Management

Information Logistics

Logistics and Retail Management

Emerging Issues and New Challenges in the Retail Supply Chain

This book

• Focuses on specific logistics and supply chain issues relevant to retail management

• Includes internationalization, corporate social responsibility and green logistics, and explores practical examples from Tesco and Schuh

• New to this edition: New material on the luxury fashion industry and the logistical challenges of e-commerce

• Features contributions from leading academics in the field and retail logistics practitioners

Edition: 5

Date: 03/11/2018

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9780749481605

Ebook: 9780749481612

Pages: 344

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Retail Logistics & Supply Chain

Description

Logistics and supply chains play a vital role in the overall success of retail management. This fifth edition of Logistics and Retail Management covers the major strides made in retail logistics and the challenges which remain, providing students and professionals with the current thinking and research in this strategic field. Including chapters on internationalization, corporate social responsibility (CSR), and green logistics, the book also explores examples from successful organizations such as Schuh and Tesco.

Fully updated with the latest international developments and on-going changes in the field, Logistics and Retail Management, 5th edition is a multi-contributed collection from leading academics and practitioners and an expert editor team. The new edition also includes material on the luxury fashion industry and the logistical challenges of e-commerce. Logistics and Retail Management, 5th edition is the essential text for students of retail logistics and supply chain management.

Author Information

John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics.

Leigh Sparks is Professor of Retail Studies at the Institute for Retail Studies, University of Stirling, Scotland. He is on the editorial boards of several leading marketing and business journals.

Table of Contents

1 Retail Logistics – Changes and challenges [John Fernie and Leigh Sparks]

2 Relationships in the supply chain [John Fernie]

3 The internationalization of the retail supply chain [John Fernie]

4 The international fashion supply chain and corporate social responsibility [Patsy Perry, John Fernie and Steve Wood]

5 The footwear supply chain – The case of Schuh [John Fernie and Colin Temple]

6 Supply chain strategy in the fashion and luxury industry [John Fernie and Patsy Perry]

7 Tesco’s supply chain management [Leigh Sparks]

8 On-shelf availability in UK retailing [John Fernie and David B Grant]

9 The development of e-tail logistics [John Fernie, Suzanne Fernie and Alan McKinnon]

10 The greening of retail logistics [Alan McKinnon and Julia Edwards]

Managing the Retail Supply Chain

Merchandising Strategies that Increase Sales and Improve Profitability

This book

• Explores retail supply chain and merchandising from the very basics, up to strategic and senior level challenges

• Includes an academic presentation of theories and models used to aid practical understanding

• Includes tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and merchant planners work more effectively

• Explores the differences between industries in retail (i.e. the supply chain function in a supermarket is different to a merchandising function in a fashion retailer)

• Bridges the gap between research-based texts and those aimed solely at managers

Description

Buying, merchandising and the supply chain are inextricably linked. Product merchandisers play a key role within retail, as profits can be affected by how successfully they undertake their work. Merchandisers set prices to maximise profits and manage the performance of ranges, planning promotions and mark-downs as necessary. They also oversee delivery and distribution of stock and deal with suppliers. Their connection with and understanding of the supply chain is vital. Supported by theories, explanations and real-life examples, Managing the Retail Supply Chain looks at concepts and core themes that run across all sectors.

Many businesses use a one-size-fits-all solution for any issues which arise, leading to big problems. Managing the Retail Supply Chain presents numerous examples of different business models adopted by a variety of companies. Covering basic principles of retail supply chain, KPIs, merchandise planning and demand planning as well as omnichannel, vertical integration, on-shelf availability and e-commerce, Managing the Retail Supply Chain is an essential guide for anyone involved in or studying retail supply chains and merchandising.

Author Information

James Topps has worked in retail supply chain for Kraft (Formerly Cadbury), Ted Baker and Morrison's. He currently heads up the merchandise planning (formerly supply chain) for Maplin Electronics, Rotherham.

Glenn Taylor is currently Merchandise Planning Director at Maplin Electronics. He has been Merchandise and Supply Chain Director in companies such as Dreams, B&Q and BonMarche, developing best practice through periods of expansion and growth for business on and offline, in the UK and overseas.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749480622

Ebook: 9780749480639

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Retail Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents

Introduction

Foundations of retail and supply chain and merchandising

Merchandise planning

Branch merchandising

Buying and sourcing

Logistics

Finance

Omni-channel retailing

Tools, reports and documents

Technology

Roles within supply chain and merchandising

Vertical integration and manufacturing

The fashion industry

Supermarket and food retail

Electronics retailing

Big ticket retailing

SME retail

Troubleshooting common issues in supply chain and merchandising

The future for supply chain and merchandising in retail

Road Passenger Transport Management

Planning and Coordinating Passenger Transport Operations

This book

• Essential guide to cost-effective, sustainable road passenger transport management

• Features a complete set of management tools equipping readers for success in the passenger transport field

• Includes essential guidelines on topics such as coordinating staff training, putting together performance reports for directors and arranging vehicle maintenance

• Online resources: sample performance reports and target assessment forms.

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749497019

Ebook: 9780749497026

Pages: 352

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Transport

Table of Contents

1 How the bus business works

Definition of road passenger transport

History, heritage, current challenges

The legal and regulatory framework

Planning

Vehicles and fuels

Operations

Fares, ticketing and other revenue – turning a social service into a business

Human resources case study: Metroline

Wider engagement

The present and potential market for public transport

Bus provision and land use planning

Description

Road passenger transport management is an important role, involving the planning and coordinating of passenger transport operations, including routes and schedules.

Managers ensure that passengers reach their destinations safely, on time and in the most cost-effective way. Road Passenger Transport Management covers all the essential tasks a transport manager is expected to master.

Road Passenger Transport Management provides tips and tools for working with customers, planning routes and scheduling delivery times, as well as managing a team of supervisors, administration staff and drivers. The authors include guidelines for coordinating staff training and arranging vehicle maintenance, MOTs and tax payments, as well as organizing vehicle replacements and managing contracts and developing new business. This is a contributed book, with expertise shared from well-known academics and practitioners who have spent many years in the passenger transport field. The tools and case studies in this vital new guide will enable readers to learn new skills or build on existing expertise. Online supporting resources include sample performance reports and target assessment forms.

Author Information

Anthony Francis is a consultant providing guidance on operating and commercial issues affecting the road, rail and aviation transport industries to passenger transport companies. He previously worked in senior strategic roles for the Department of Transport, the Strategic Rail Authority and Arriva.

David Hurdle is an independent transport consultant and a transport and town planner. He has written and spoken extensively on sustainable transport issues. He has worked for local government and the public transport industry.

Bus priority

Planning and operating a rural bus service

Further partnerships between bus operators, local authorities and employers

The bus industry in Wales

Working with the public

The value of the bus to society

Presentation

The future and new technology

Appendix I (by Cyril McIntyre) – Regulation of road passenger transport in the Republic of Ireland

Appendix II (by Gavin Booth) – Scotland’s buses

Index

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020

A Complete Self-Study Course for OCR and CILT Examinations

This book

• Covers the entire CPC 2020 syllabus (as laid out in EC regulation 1071/2009), including all the set examination questions and factual notes needed to pass the exams

• Meets the needs of those wishing to take either of the two most popular routes available to pass the CPC: the OCR and CILT examinations

• Provides summaries of key learning points, spaces for notes and self-test sections throughout the book

• New to this edition: updated sections on operator licencing, drivers' hours, tachographs, vehicle testing, vehicle tax, vehicle registration, civil law, international driving and documentation

Description

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 is a vital study guide that offers the thorough preparation needed to pass the tough CPC exams in the UK.

It covers the examination method used by the Oxford, Cambridge and RSA (OCR) and the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT). This is the Level 3 standard qualification overseen by The Office of Qualifications and Examinations Regulation (OFQUAL) and the Welsh Assembly Government, which is required by any person wishing to operate vehicles over 3,500 kg, the maximum authorised mass for hire and reward, in the UK and internationally.

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 has been extensively revised to include all the new legislation. It covers the eight study sections that the directive requires: civil law; commercial law; social law; fiscal law; business; financial; management of the undertaking access to the market; technical standards and technical aspects of the operation road safety. It features many case studies, examples, diagrams and graphics. New to this edition: updated sections on operator licencing, drivers' hours, tachographs, vehicle testing, vehicle tax, vehicle registration, civil law, international driving and documentation.

Author Information

Clive Pidgeon served as Chair on the Freight Transport Association (FTA) Welsh Freight Council for four years whilst with the PO. He joined OCR as a CPC examiner as a chief examiner. He also worked with HMG when the CPC qualification was reviewed in 1996. He serves as examination database manager for CILT Level 5 qualifications, a CILT Distance Learning Advisor, an examiner and verifier for CILT and an author of various CILT textbooks and training materials.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/02/2020

Price: £59.99

Paperback: 9781789665031

Ebook: 9781789665048 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Transport

Table of Contents

Introduction

Law

Commercial Law

Social Law

Fiscal Law

Business and Financial Management

Access to the Market

Technical Standards and Technical Aspects of Operation

Road Safety

Air Transport Management

Strategic Management in the Airline Industry

This book

• Delivers an in-depth investigation of the full scope of the airline industry

• Includes industry analysis of competing business models and the impact of airline alliances

• Provides an assessment of airline performance, examining core competencies, dynamic capabilities and key performance indicators

• Learn from case studies including Monarch, Air Berlin, Niki, Sabena, examining airline capacity management, risk models and fuel hedging

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749484569

Ebook: 9780749484576 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional Subject: Transport

Table of Contents

1 The scope of the airline industry

2 Growth and change in the airline industry

– Air transport liberalization

3 The airline alliances

4 Airline industry analysis – A structureconduct-performance perspective

5 Airline competing business models

6 Airline competition dynamics

7 Measuring airline performance

Strategic groups in the airline industry

The future outlook of air transport

Conclusion 11 Index

Description

The aviation industry is a major driver of world trade. As global markets and economies are constantly evolving, practitioners and academics need more quality information and a broader perspective of aviation management rather than just silo-based knowledge, particularly if they wish to move up the management ladder and progress. Air Transport Management presents the dynamic shifts which have influenced structural changes in the aviation industry, such as the emergence of low cost carriers. These changes have transformed the market, leading to deregulation and consolidation. The author provides a viable road map aimed at giving students and managers in the aviation industry a rigorous understanding on how to manage strategically in complex and turbulent market conditions.

Air Transport Management examines the airline industry structure in terms of entry barriers, competition dynamics and competing business models. With the inclusion of fascinating case studies, this handbook assesses different business models used by international companies and proposes best fit management practices which airlines should follow in order to survive.

Author Information

Prof Dr Eyden Samunderu (PhD) is a leading expert and well trusted advisor in the area of air transport with extensive international consulting experience. He is Program Director for a Master's programme at the International School of Management (ISM) in Dortmund Germany. He is currently a Board Advisor at Aviation Partners Africa London as well as sitting as Advisory Board Member for the Hamburg Aviation Conference. His research interests are in air transport economics, airport infrastructure financing, container and shipping logistics, competition policy, multimarket contact and strategic group theory in air transport.

Aviation Logistics

The Dynamic Partnership of Air Freight and Supply Chain

This book

• Explains how the rapidly evolving global logistics industry works in close partnership with the aviation operators to achieve fast and efficient facilitation

• Looks at air freight and how carriers are responding to market demands with new and better methods and technologies

• Reviews changes in manufacturing and production methods

• Illustrates how different challenges are met in varied markets through insightful case studies

• Features contributions from a team of experts, including: Oliver Evans, Chief Cargo Officer at Swiss International Airlines Ltd and Stan Wraight, who has over 40 years of industry experience gained through both senior management and board level positions at KLM Cargo, Atlas Air and AirBridge Cargo

• Online resources: Air Cargo News' Freighter Directory

Description

Aviation Logistics looks at the function of the air cargo business and its role in global supply chains and logistics. As global economies are constantly evolving, the supply chain business with its transport partners must be proactive for the future. Technology and its resulting efficiency and transparency are therefore a central part of this book. Aviation Logistics examines how carriers are coming up with new methods and technologies to improve ground handling and road transport, traceability systems and barcoding, security and screening, and safe delivery of perishable items (such as in the pharmaceutical and medical sectors).

Endorsed by The International Air Cargo Association (TIACA), Aviation Logistics is supplemented with case studies and contributions from a team of experts including Oliver Evans and Stan Wraight, both industry experts.

Online resources available: Air Cargo News' Freighter Directory.

Author Information

Michael Sales specializes in press relations and consultancy for the transport industry. He has handled a number of prestigious clients, including Airports of Paris, Air France Express, Athens International Airport, Cologne Bonn Airport, ECS, Basque regional industrial promotion, Düsseldorf Airport, Budapest Airport and many more. He is also a freelance journalist.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2016

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749472702

Ebook: 9780749472719

Pages: 208

Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Transport

Table of Contents

Air cargo – trying harder

The world of air cargo, Oliver Evans, former TIACA

Air cargo history

Airport connections

Cargo handling agents – the impact of IT

Road feeder service

Freight forwarder

Cool logistics

Express and mail

Special air cargoes

Cargo security and risk

Environment

Innovation and trends in air logistics

Views on the future

The law – organizations and regulations governing international aviation

Glossary of common air freight terms

Lowe's Transport Manager and Operator's Handbook 2023

This book

• Includes essential information on professional competence, technical standards and goods vehicle operation

• Provides clear guidance on the changes to transporting goods between Great Britain and the EU caused by Brexit and how to adapt working practices to remain compliant with the new rules and processes

• Offers a definitive one-stop reference source for those working in the haulage industry

• New to this edition: the latest updates to all UK guidelines and regulations; clear guidance for hauliers and commercial drivers on the impact of Brexit on transporting goods between Great Britain and the EU

Description

Lowe's Transport Manager's and Operator's Handbook 2023 provides a complete overview of the operational guidance governing the UK's road transport operators.

With the uncertainty of technological advancement, post-Brexit trade arrangements and various industry crises, it is essential for the UK's road transport operators to have a firm grasp of the processes, rules and regulations that govern their industry. This fully updated 53rd edition covers all aspects of transport legislation relating to goods vehicles and their operators from vehicle registration, maintenance and load management to professional competence, operator training and driver testing. Road traffic law is explained alongside how to ensure safety on the road and at work.

Meeting operating standards, keeping up to date with the latest industry changes and complying with the law, all while running sustainable transport operations, has never been simpler with the help of Lowe's Transport Manager's and Operator's Handbook 2023 It is an essential resource for transport managers, fleet operators, owner driver haulers and those working in the industry looking to ensure operational stability and legislative compliance in a turbulent environment.

Author Information

Glen Davies is a transport and logistics specialist and Managing Director at The Driver Handbook based in Derby, UK. Previously, he led the freight safety and environment programme at Transport for London following a 23 year career in military logistics. He is a Fellow of the Charted Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT) and is Technical Director at the Fleet Operator Recognition Scheme (FORS).

David Lowe was involved in the road haulage industry for many years and was an experienced consultant and freelance writer. He wrote notable books on transport including The Professional LGV Driver's Handbook and The Pocket Guide to LGV Drivers' Hours and Tachograph Law.

Edition: 53

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £64.99

Paperback: 9781398609914

Ebook: 9781398609921

Pages: 600

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Transport

Table of Contents

Introduction

Good vehicle operator licencing

Professional competence

Goods vehicle drivers’ hours and working time

Goods vehicles drivers’ records

Tachographs – Fitment and use requirements

Driver licensing and licence penalties

Driver testing and training

Vehicle registration, HGV road user levy, excise duty and trade licences 209 vehicle registration

Insurance (vehicles and goods in transit) and conditions of carriage

Road traffic law

Goods vehicle dimensions and weights

Construction and use of vehicles

Vehicle lighting and marketing

Goods vehicle plating, annual testing and vehicle inspections

Light vehicle (MOT) testing

Vehicle maintenance and maintenance records

Safety – On the road and at work

Loads – General, livestock, food etc

Loads – Abnormal and projecting

Loads – Dangerous goods and waste

Light vehicles

Vehicle fuel efficiency

Digital communications and technology

Transport and the environment

International operations

Maritime Logistics

A Guide to Contemporary Shipping and Port Management

This book

• Provides a comprehensive overview of maritime logistics including all of the core concepts and latest research

• Examines the latest risks and threats within the port and shipping industry such as the propagation effects on port disruption, and how recent technological developments such as improved analysis of real time data information seek to prevent these risks

• New to this edition: updates on real time data to improve operational efficiencies, capacity optimization, scheduling and agility, asset utilization within port management, route planning, integration and KPIs in intermodal shipping

• Covers all trade facilitating elements to maritime transport and its value within global supply chains

Description

Sea freight remains overwhelmingly the most common form of transport for goods globally. Grasp the core theories and understand the latest research in maritime logistics, along with how this field operates and contributes to global supply chains, with this key textbook.

Maritime Logistics provides a complete overview of the core concepts within this discipline from a range of international expert contributors. This textbook examines the recent developments in the ports and shipping industries including supply chain strategies and emerging, innovative practices. Designed for maritime students and professionals, the structure offers a complete approach with an emphasis on developing a well-rounded knowledge and understanding of the field.

The third edition is fully updated with new content on maintenance optimization, supply chain integration, economies of scale within liner shipping and port performance and management. In addition, this edition examines new technologies, considers new and existing risks to the maritime supply chain as well as generally how maritime logistics will continue to evolve. For those seeking to become maritime logistics specialists, this is the authoritative companion.

Author Information

Dong-Wook Song is Korean Chair in Maritime Affairs, Professor of Maritime Economics and Logistics and Head of Shipping Management and Logistics at the World Maritime University, Malmö, Sweden. He is Editor-in-Chief of WMU Journal of Maritime Affairs and has worked as consultant for a number of private and public organizations including the UN, OECD, ADB and World Bank

Photis M Panayides is Professor in Shipping Economics, Department of Commerce, Finance and Shipping at Cyprus University of Technology, Limassol, Cyprus. He serves on the editorial board of several academic journals and has served as Vice-President of the Board of Directors of the Cyprus Ports Authority and as member of the Council of the International Association of Maritime Economists.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/12/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789661699

Ebook: 9781789661705 Pages: 536

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Maritime Logistics

Table of Contents

Introduction

Introduction to maritime logistics

Maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator

International maritime trade and logistics

Defining maritime logistics and its value

Hinterland logistics and global supply chains

Human elements in maritime logistics

Shipping logistics

Intermodal freight transport and logistics

Global maritime networks in container shipping

Supply chain integration of shipping companies

Logistics strategy in container shipping

Tanker shipping logistics

Dry bulk shipping logistics

Port logistics

Dry ports in concept and practice

Port-centric logistics in concept and practice

Container hub ports in concept and practice

Multinationalizing container portsBusiness models and strategies

Public-private partnerships and port logistics performance

Port and logistics chains - Changes in organizational effectiveness

Logistics performance of supply chainoriented ports

Conclusion

Looking ahead

Maritime Transport

Shipping Logistics and Operations

This book

• Develop the ability to understand complex decision making approaches in international maritime logistics and transport settings

• Gain a critical understanding of international maritime transport from a strategic perspective

• Develop analytical skills to assess the role of logistics service providers and other stakeholders in international maritime transport and logistics

• Learn from insightful case studies covering topics such as: Gothenburg dry land transport; traffic between Helsinki and Tallinn; Russian transit traffic; IKEA transport operations; ship strategies: Greece vs Norway

Description

Maritime transport is the transport of people or goods by water. It is the backbone of world trade and globalization. Twenty-four hours a day and all year round, ships carry cargoes to all corners of the globe.

Maritime Transport focuses on the operational side of this important industry, covering many topics such as sea traffic currents, passenger transport, short sea shipping and dangerous cargoes.

Parts one and two of Maritime Transport present the concepts, theory and background information, then part three presents more complex and deeper issues such as the maritime transportation of the future. It covers topics such as intelligent shipping, data exchange at sea and maritime security. In addition, the book includes fascinating case studies and examples, such as maritime transport in the Baltic sea, ship strategies in Norway and Greece and the benefits of slow steaming. At the end of each chapter there are questions that will help students to gain a deeper understanding of the many topics covered.

Author Information

Ulla Tapaninen is a Senior Transport and Logistics Specialist for the City of Helsinki. She is also in charge of Helsinki City maritime cluster programme, focusing on the city's unique arctic and smart marine industry with start-up companies. She is an adjunct professor of maritime logistics and was previously at the University of Turku. She has worked in key positions in two Finnish shipping companies, Finncarries Oy Ab and ESL Shipping.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789662467

Ebook: 9781789662481

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Maritime Logistics

Table of Contents

Global shipping

World trade patterns

Globalization and growth in shipping

Sea traffic currents

Passenger traffic

Logistics definition

Logistics costs

Transport costs

Transport modes

Short sea shipping

Cargoes

Vessels

Employment issues

Sea transport market

Cargo review

Ship structure

Port time

Ship size

Freight ticket registers and subsidies for shipping

Other expenses

Funding

Operational cost accounting of the vessel

Relocation agreement and shipping documents

Cargo formation

Delivery clauses and shipping conditions

Operational operations of the port

Cargo handling

Environmental impacts of sea transport

Dangerous cargoes

Ship recycling

Maritime security and social responsibility

Supervision and regulation of shipping

Developments in maritime safety regulations

Security culture

Logistics exchange

Information exchange in the port

Data exchange at sea and in shipping companies

Intelligent shipping by sea

Port Management

Cases in Port Geography, Operations and Policy

This book

• Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for The Department of Transport and the United Nations

• Includes research-based findings from an international team of contributors as well as invaluable insights and international case studies

• Focuses on the big picture, which differentiates it from other available texts which are regional (e.g. Europe, Asia) or focus on specific aspects (e.g. privatisation, competitiveness)

• Online resources: Includes lecture notes, lesson plans and PowerPoints

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2017

Price: £54.99

Paperback: 9780749474324

Ebook: 9780749474331 Pages: 576

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Maritime Logistics

Description

Port Management looks at the numerous types of business interactions that occur at active ports. These include cooperating with other ports, coordinating deliveries with ships, overseeing port development, advertising and promotion, and enforcing security and environmental protection initiatives. Including research, practical insights and case studies, this book looks at quantitative methods and market analysis, maritime logistics, port planning and pricing, and commercial law.

Port Management covers all the main aspects of management, administration and policy, and fills existing gaps in the literature in this area. Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for the Department of Transport and the United Nations, this text is international in scope and includes research-based findings from a global team of contributors. It provides fascinating insights into the geography, economics, politics and trade involved in port management. Online supporting resources include lecture notes, lesson plans and PowerPoints.

Author Information

Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School, UK. He has been involved in a range of transport-related research including a groundbreaking project for the UK Department of Transport.

Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University, UK and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes in Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America.

Table of Contents

1 Global Challenges and Port Governance

1 Value Creation and Value Capture in the Ports’ Business System

2 The Governance of Ports under Global Challenges – What Next?

3 Effect of Global Supply Chain Developments on the Governance of Port Regulation

4 Port Governance Reform in Spain

2 Port Resilience, Transport Logistics and the Environment

5 Port Resilience – A Perspective from UK Ports

6 Quantifying Resilience in Seaports – An Application to Ports in the Hamburg-Le Havre Range

7 Understanding Australian Port Resilience and the Development of a Port Resilience Framework

8 Green Pricing Decision-Making –Tackling Uncertainty In The Case Of Port Infrastructure

9 The Implications of the SECA for Ports and Hinterland Transport in Sweden

10 The Role of Ports in the Offshore Wind Industry

3 Port Policies and Competition Strategies

11 Canadian Ports Policy – An Evolutionary Approach

12 Port Policies and Private Investments –Insights from Latin America and Caribbean Countries

13 The Operations Management and Governance of Cruise Terminals in Hong Kong

14 Competition Strategies in the Spanish Port System and Their Relationship with Port Authority Efficiency

15 Assessing the National Port System – The Case of Vietnam

4 Port Choice and Ports in Shipping Systems

16 Supply Chain Modelling for ContainerPort Choice – Case Study of a WestMediterranean Transhipment Port

17 Port-centric Logistics – The Seaport Versus Inland Location Dilemma

18 Port Management Implications from Economies of Scale in the Liner Container Shipping Industry

Container Logistics

The Role of the Container in the Supply Chain

This book

• Examines container logistics from the shippers perspective, tackling issues that are central to the role of organising and overseeing the transportation of goods and commodities, a unique angle which is not covered in other maritime transport books

• Provides insights into ways of managing container logistics as an integrated part of a shipper's global supply chain covering planning, procurement and execution and collaboration of logistics activities

• Provides shared knowledge from a team of international contributors such as the CEO of Hamburg Port Authorities, the International Logistics Director of Michelin, the Senior Vice President of Global Customer Solutions, Kuehne + Nagel and the Global Procurement Director, Mondi

• Features research and innovations from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective, covering topics such as empty container logistics, terminal & port optimisation and intermodal freight

• Includes vital tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and shippers work more effectively in complex areas, such as design thinking and real-time data management

• Online resources: Powerpoints of key diagrams and tables and chapter summaries

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2018

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749481247

Ebook: 9780749481254 Pages: 448

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Maritime Logistics

Technology and the Blue Economy

From Autonomous Shipping to Big Data

This book

• Discusses the high commercial value of the seas and oceans and the current areas of technological development within the blue economy

• Explains how to target and capitalise on the potential for maritime innovation within specific areas

• Provides insights into important innovations such as spatial data infrastructures and hydrography for maritime economies; the evolution of eNavigation and GNSS vulnerability; near or real time situational awareness

• Presents case studies from organisations who have successfully integrated new technologies into their existing business models

1

Date: 03/09/2019

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9780749483951

Ebook: 9780749483968 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Maritime Logistics

Table of Contents

An introduction to the blue economy

Shipping

Ports and harbours

Offshore renewables

The cruise industry

Maritime surveillance

Aquaculture

Hydrography and bathymetry

Ocean observation

Sustainable fisheries

Subsea monitoring

Safety of life at sea

Conclusion

Systems for Manufacturing Excellence

Generating Efficient and Reliable Manufacturing Operations

This book

• Examines the real secrets of highly effective production processes in winning organizations, such as Rolls Royce, Toyota and Land Rover, as well as Tesco and Unilever

• Explains socio-technical systems and their design through in-depth case studies of best practice

• Investigates high performing organisations and their use of six sigma and lean manufacturing

• Presents tools to help managers improve processes and the sustainability of improvement such as sand cone models and the supportive model of manufacturing

• Online resources: powerpoint diagrams of models, as well as surveys and exercises

Description

Many production managers have de-stocked excessively large inventories, gone lean, experimented with continuous improvement processes and introduced new working practices. These interventions have largely failed. Businesses have also failed to invest in the workforce that undertakes improvements. This means that cash flow stops quickly, stocks are depleted to zero and customers lose confidence.

Systems for Manufacturing Excellence looks at how people and technology work effectively together to generate high performance manufacturing and service operations. Not everyone is a Toyota but that does not mean we cannot learn from such businesses. The book will present a logic, variety of approaches and methods that underpin the different models of high performance used by 'world class' businesses. The authors use examples from their training with Toyota, work with Tesco, and many world class manufacturing businesses that form their research agenda. The book will help teams run each part of their production process for effectiveness and efficiency, with a high level of discipline that supports excellence in performance.

Author Information

Nick Rich is Professor of Operations Management at Swansea School of Management. He teaches Socio-Technical Systems Design. Nick Rich is a Fellow at Toyota Motor Corporation of Japan.

Mohamed Afy-Shararah is an industrial engineer experienced in the manufacturing and distribution sectors. He was awarded his doctorate in strategic operations management and received formal training at the Toyota Lean Management Centre.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749496999

Ebook: 9780749497002 Pages: 344

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Table of Contents

1 Operational excellence

2 The real issues and DNA of winning organizations

3 Socio-technical systems and their design

4 High performing organizations (six sigma and lean)

5 TPM and maintaining (reliability focused and OEE-based flow improvement)

6 Highly reliable organizations (organizational level pre-occupations)

7 Operations management by design of new processes

8 The safety case

Improving processes and the sustainability of improvement

The new agenda for change

Conclusions

International Standards for Design and Manufacturing

Quality Management and International Best Practice

This book

• Presents the theory behind international standards and their application in industry, with case studies from Bosch, BP, M&S, Bodyshop, Toyota, Tesco, McDonalds, Benetton and Royal Mint.

• Looks at how product and technical standards have evolved to help shape the way in which we manage entire businesses and their interactions with customers, suppliers and the consumer

• Introduces examples of standards working in practice, resulting in safer ways of working, better health and safety, better quality, better regulatory compliance, better environmental performance

• Includes insightful seminar topics and sample exam questions.

• Online resources: Full lecture slides for seminars as well as links to videos and revision materials for students

Description

International standards ensure that organisations operate the right processes to support their objectives. International Standards for Design and Manufacturing is an accessible guide for manufacturing and production managers and students. It guides readers through the standards needed to build operating systems which are robust, integrated and used to drive the continuous improvement of business performance.

International Standards for Design and Manufacturing is based on many years of research collaboration between Swansea University and leading manufacturing and production practitioners from key companies from around the world. Each chapter includes an introduction to the standards being discussed, definitions, examples of using the standards in practice, why these standards are important, conclusions, seminar topics and mock exam questions to allow the reader to test their knowledge and understanding.

Author Information

Nick Rich is Professor of Socio-Technical Systems Design at Swansea School of Management. He is an academic with a specialist interest in high performance and highly reliable businesses. He has gained international acclaim and has received a significant number of awards for his research work.

F. Tegwen Malik is an academic at Swansea University and focuses her research on biomimetics, product design and innovation (for all applications including the life sciences sector) and the application of international management standards to industry and service sectors.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781789660425

Ebook: 9781789660531 Pages: 368

Format (mm): 231x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Table of Contents

The importance of standards

The evolution of Total Quality Management (TQM)

3 Introduction to management system standards

4 Quality management system standards

Operational excellence (OpEx)

Environmental management systems standards (EMS)

7 Occupational health and safety management systems

8 Information security management

9 Business continuity and uninterrupted product flow

10 Supply chain management, design and international standards

11 Developing a learning organization and auditing

12 Leadership and international standards

13 Implementation, resistance to change and sustaining change

14 Conclusions and looking forwards

The Tesla Way

The disruptive strategies and models of Teslism

This book

• Investigates how to reinvent modern manufacturing processes through following the Tesla business strategy

• Examines some of the features of Tesla's ground-breaking model, such as their continuous improvement indicators and cycles that can drastically reduce and better sort waste, save energy, increase renewable energy and enable self-sufficiency

• Includes case studies from Michelin, Mass and other innovative consumer goods manufacturers such as Bosch and Kimberley Clarke

• Online resources: sample templates for analysing efficiency of processes on the factory floor

Description

Tesla disrupts the automotive industry by creating many innovative pieces that fit together. Its marketing, production, sales and technology strategies are all notably different from its competitors. The Tesla Way is an elongated case study looking at Tesla's business model and how this can be applied to existing manufacturing and production strategies in other companies. The author also includes case studies from Michelin, Mass and other consumer goods manufacturing companies.

The Tesla Way will look at the origins of Tesla, its journey to success, new business models and what will come next. The author includes a mixture of the theory behind the Tesla business model and its applications, examining the combination between the manufacturing world and the digital world. He has also interviewed a cross-section of Tesla's current employees in both the USA and France. At the end of each chapter an interview with a CEO or top manager of an industrial firm is featured: among others, the stories of Luxor Lighting, ThyssenKrupp, Bosch or Kimberley Clarke. There are also insightful questions for managers. Online supporting resources include sample templates for analyzing efficiency of processes on the factory floor.

Author Information

Michaël Valentin is Associate Director at OPEO, a consultancy specialized in industrial transformations. Having accumulated significant experience both as an operational manager in the automotive sector and as a McKinsey & Company consultant, Valentin now helps small to medium enterprises (SMEs) and large groups become industries of the future.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749497033

Ebook: 9780749497040

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Table of Contents

Hyper manufacturing

Cross integration

Software hybridization

Tentacular traction

Story making

Start-up leadership

Men & machine learning

The 3 concentric circles of Teslism – A systemic model

Case studies

Logistics, Operations and Supply

Toyota Methods and Operating Models

Achieve Business Success with the Toyota Way

This book

• Presents a case study of an organizational development programme, which transformed a small business into an international success through applying the Toyota methods and values

• Provides a detailed analysis of Toyota methods and operating models

• Gives advice on how to grow a business and achieve commercial success through the application of learnings from Toyota

• Presents Toyota's superior logistics networks as well as its development of an advanced and highly successful supply chain

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2020

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781789663044

Ebook: 9781789663075

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Description

Toyota Methods and Operating Models presents a case study of a small, traditional Italian manufacturer in the Toyota Industries Corporation Group, which began an important process of transformation until it became a successful, modern and advanced international business: Toyota Material Handling. Toyota management made internal changes and developed the commercial networks, successfully applying the Toyota Production System (TPS, or Lean Production) as well as the values of the Toyota Way.

Author Stefano Cortiglioni led the transformation project, which took four years. Toyota Methods and Operating Models presents the continuing success story. The authors analyze the Toyota methods and operating models that can be directly applied to your business in order to reach excellence in operations and industry 4.0. It provides tangible advice on how to grow a business and achieve commercial success, with superior processes and logistics networks, as well as the development of an advanced and highly successful supply chain.

Author Information

Stefano Cortiglioni is the Toyota Lean Academy Italy Director and a senior specialist in T.P.S and regional manager of Toyota Material Handling Europe. International Consultant optimizing business processes, He was formerly Operations Director at Toyota Material Handling Manufacturing, and General Manager of LTE Italy.

Leonardo Salcerini is the Managing Director of Toyota Material Handling Italia, President of Toyota Service Centre, Bologna, President of MBT, Chairman of the Academy and Logistics Solutions, Toyota Material Handling Italia, Bologna.

Danilo Verga is an international consultant working in business transformation through Toyota methods and practices.

Table of Contents

From CESAB to Toyota Material Handling Manufacturing Italy

The Toyota Group

The History of CESAB

The product

From Push to Pull

The production lines

The model

The 2S (Seiri and Seiton)

The Logistics

The organisation of Toyota

Standardisation

Quality

Visual Management

Kaizen and efficiency

Starting from the bottom up

Examples of the implementation of TPS in other organisations

Monozukuri and Hitozukuri (important men at the centre of the transformation)

Toyota and Business

Kaizena and Financial Results

TPS and Industry 4.0

The implementation of the Toyota Way into commercial processes and sales operations

The Toyota Academy

Problems faced, interviews with central figures

The Italian market

The Toyota Way, values, interpretations and lean

The new model A.C.C.E.S.S

3 Appendices

Product Design and the Supply Chain

Competing Through Design

This book

• Explains how to design and manufacture products that meet the diverse needs and demands of customers, covering a number of different industries, such as textiles, automotive, electronics, aerospace and retail

• Describes how to compete in a global market by integrating product design into the supply chain and looks at key issues, such as resource footprints and risk

• Provides valuable insights from leading businesses who are known for their successful product design, such as Egil Moller Nielsen, former Group-Vice President for Global Distribution and Logistics at LEGO

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749478230

Ebook: 9780749478247 Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x154

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Description

Product design touches every aspect of modern life, determining the form and function of the products and technologies that we use every day. Product design is not just concerned with the appearance and functionality of products; it has an important role in determining the cost, pricing, risk and profitability profile of those products. Product Design and the Supply Chain shows how decisions taken at the design stage of a product's life cycle go on to affect that product's subsequent value to a company. Eighty percent of a product's eventual supply chain costs are already present at the early stages of product design and development. This book allows companies to make informed design decisions that have significant positive through-life implications for risk, complexity and responsiveness, thus allowing them to create a 'moat' that is difficult for competitors to sidestep or surmount.

Product Design and the Supply Chain contains fascinating content applicable to industry. It is full of useful and insightful real-life cases and examples. This book sets out to show how design impacts: sales revenues, pricing, time to market, manufacturing and supply chain costs, supply chain risks, brand loyalty, and competitiveness.

Author Information

Omera Khan is Professor of Supply Chain Management at Royal Holloway University of London. She's also a Visiting Professor at the University of Agder in Norway and adviser in logistics and supply chain management to many other universities around the world. She is internationally recognized in the fields of supply chain risk management, supply chain resilience and cyber risk, supply chain responsiveness, sustainability and the impact of product design. Omera Khan's work in this area has been widely published in practitioner articles and academic publications.

Table of Contents

1 Setting the design agenda

2 The interface between product design and the supply chain

3 Product design and supply chain risk

4 Product design and the pursuit of agility

5 Product design and sustainability

6 Building bridges – Making the change

Strategic Sourcing Management

Structural and Operational Decision-making

This book

• Shares wisdom from one of the most respected academics in the field and a team of contributors who are both academics and industry experts

• Covers purchasing concepts, frameworks and best practice from esteemed business school HEC Paris

• Covers strategic and tactical standpoints, including strategic thinking and specific thought processes

• Shows how to optimise specific aspects of purchasing

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2016

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749476991

Ebook: 9780749477004 Pages: 720

Format (mm): 239x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Procurement

Description

Strategic Sourcing Management examines procurement and supply management in detail, covering the three dimensions of competitiveness, effectiveness and efficiency. Written by Olivier Bruel, Professor Emeritus HEC Paris, and a team of contributing experts from academia, consulting and industry, the book is organised into four parts: strategic decisions; operational management of procurement and related supply chain; management of human resources and dedicated information systems; management of performance and change.

This book has been written with a comprehensive global and coherent approach but the chapters are self-standing, enabling the reader to dip into different sections according to need. Strategic Sourcing Management considers both tactical and strategic perspectives that link with a corporate strategy and it includes dedicated chapters on how to set up a Strategic Sourcing function. The text is enriched with clear graphics and solid examples of best practice. Strategic Sourcing Management is a robust text based on both research and experience, so an essential reference for practitioners and academics working in or studying procurement and supply management. It is suitable for anyone involved in procurement and supply management at a senior level but also for general management enabling them to understand the mechanisms of value creation through Strategic Sourcing.

Author Information

Olivier Bruel is Professor Emeritus of the Information Systems and Operations Management Department at HEC Paris. He has also been conducting many consulting activities and is Founder and and Honorary President of the ACA (Association Cesa Achats et Supply Chain).

Table of Contents

Strategic decisions and supplier policies

Procurement: its integration in a company’s general strategy

Procurement marketing: segmentation and strategies

Definition of requirements and upstream procurement practices

Supplier policy: sourcing, panel and SRM

Globalization and international procurement

Sustainable procurement: stakes and implementation

Outsourcing, “make-or-buy” decisions and simple subconctracting

Operational management of procurement

Quantitative forecasting and requirements planning

Economic optimization: tco minimization, service level for internal clients and shared cash management

Calls for tenders: major stages, selection process and post-procurement follow-up

Procurement of services CAPEX procurement

The financial stakes of procurement: mechanisms for protecting currency and energy and commodity purchases

Public procurement: French and European contexts

The practice of international operations

International procurement: legal considerations

Organization and management of resources

Organization, structure and positioning of the procurement department

Procurement professions and humanresources management

Procurement information systems and dedicated web tools

Section - FOUR: Performance and change management

Procurement communication plan

Procurement performance: measurement indicators and reporting systems

Procurement performance: steering change management

The co-authors

Glossary

Effective Strategic Sourcing

Drive Performance with Sustainable Strategies for Procurement

This book

• Features interviews with supply chain leaders working in a range of industries, who share new insights and practical recommendations

• Explores how to drive performance and margin improvement in a sustainable and ethical way

• Outlines how to turn the theory into an action plan with a comprehensive toolkit of tried and trusted strategic sourcing techniques and processes

• Explains how to design and implement a sourcing strategy, from establishing success criteria through to supplier performance management

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides for lecturers

Description

Modern supply chains are enjoying new opportunities for innovation and growth. Build competitive advantage, optimize cost and encourage ethical business practices with the process of strategic sourcing.

Effective Strategic Sourcing brings together tools and techniques to develop comprehensive sourcing strategies and drive performance and margin improvement in an ethical, environmentally responsible way. From supplier research and risk analysis to category management and cost modelling, it answers key questions around make versus buy, outsource versus insource and RFI versus RFP.

Top supply chain leaders from a range of industries offer their insights and experience in interviews covering the challenges inherent in modern strategic sourcing. The book also focuses on how supply chain and procurement professionals can address sustainability concerns by thinking globally and acting locally and aiming for net-zero carbon footprint sourcing. Learn from the experts and thrive in the 'new normal' with this essential guide to maximising the benefits of strategic sourcing.

Author Information

Patrick Barr is the owner and Managing Partner of Barr Performance Coaching, based in Greater Dublin, Ireland. He has over 30 years' international experience in supply chain operations, strategic sourcing and strategy management, and previously held senior supply chain roles at Microsoft, Diageo and British Airways. His current clients range from micro SMEs to major multinationals. He is a Faculty member at the Irish Management Institute and is also the author of The Successful Career Toolkit, published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398605541

Ebook: 9781398605558

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

1

Establishing strategic sourcing success criteria

Supply market research

Supplier research

Make versus buy decisions

Outsource versus insource

Supply risk analysis

Category management

Thinking local acting global

Zero carbon footprint sourcing

RFI versus RFP

Strategic sourcing tools and techniques

Ecosystem mapping and value chain dynamics

Cost modelling and pricing models

Sustaining competitive pricing over time

Advanced negotiation skills

Supplier performance management

The Technology Procurement Handbook

A Practical Guide to Digital Buying

This book

• Provides a holistic, non-technical view of the strategic sourcing process for complex technologies

• Presents clear explanations of the end-toend costing model for digital buying, tied to a service lifecycle, project milestones and deliverables, illustrated with case studies

• Enables procurement managers to gain vital digital and analytical skills, helping them to realize business innovation and growth

• Online resources: sample audit sheets, workflows and checklists

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789662108

Ebook: 9781789662115

Pages: 328

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Procurement

Description

With the rise of cloud services and the digitization of all business units, procurement managers need to understand how to buy technology services in order to generate revenue, drive innovation and retain customers.

The Technology Procurement Handbook provides a structured and logical view of the digital buying process. It includes invaluable advice on how to manage digital demand, prepare sourcing strategies, analyze the cost and benefits of proposed solutions and negotiate and implement comprehensive agreements.

The Technology Procurement Handbook examines the multiple streams of data that feed into the technology procurement process, such as ITIL service lifecycle data, PMI project management and cloud and software contract provisions. The book includes case studies and extensive practical advice based on the authors experience from recent procurement projects. There is also a chapter on modular contracting for the US market, explaining the use of agile contracts for IT projects.

Author Information

Sergii Dovgalenko is the CPO at Ukrainian Railways. He specializes in technology procurement and used to manage IT category portfolios across multiple companies and geographies. His recent projects included full procurement support of new digital sales and communication channels, Agile development outsourcing from major Indian and Easter European hubs, SAP and Ariba implementation, various procurement transformation initiatives and many more.

Table of Contents

1 Setting the scene for the next-generation technology procurement

2 Four pillars of technology procurement

Technology basics for procurement professionals

4 Relationship management in procurement

Deep dive into the procurement process

6 Practical advice and case studies on technology procurement

7 US legislation and regulation on agile deployment and contracting and performance-based management

8 Procurement 3.1 – Agile, lean, and value delivery today

9 Conclusion

Category Management in Purchasing

A Strategic Approach to Maximize Business Profitability

This book

• Includes a full collection of the essential tools and templates for practitioners to apply category management and deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing

• Connects procurement theory and practice through case studies including IKEA, The Body Shop, the UK's National Health Service (NHS), Heinz and GlaxoSmithKline

• New to this edition: Examples and case studies from businesses who have successfully used the tools in practice, as well as an analysis of the effects of international developments, such as Brexit, on the procurement function

• Allows readers to analyze complex sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing

Description

Category Management in Purchasing is a comprehensive guide to strategic category management which provides a step-by-step guide to its implementation and use, and enables readers to deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing. Now in its fourth edition, this text has cemented its place as the essential reference for category management practitioners.

In this new edition, Jonathan O'Brien shows how a strategic approach needs to integrate with other approaches, such as supplier relationship management and how the procurement function negotiates. Additionally, this new edition includes some new insights, based upon the experience of senior practitioners in industry, on how to make category management a success in the organization. It also includes some general updates and contextualizes the future procurement function and an ever increasing digitally enabled, de-globalized, post Brexit world. There is also additional material on the effect of international developments on procurement, updated tools and templates, and examples of how these have been successfully used in industry. Category Management in Purchasing, 4th edition connects theory and practice and provides readers with the tools to analyze complex sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and so develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider. With over 27 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management, now in its second edition, The Buyer's Toolkit and his award-winning title Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, all published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/03/2019

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749482619

Ebook: 9780749482626

Pages: 520

Format (mm): 242x165

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

Introduction

Introducing category management

The principles of category management

Laying the groundwork for success

Stage 1 – Initiation

Stage 2 – Insight

Stage 3 – Innovation

Stage 4 – Implementation

Stage 5 – Improvement

Making category management happen

Guaranteeing success – Now and for the future

Sustainable Procurement

A Practical Guide to Corporate Social Responsibility in the Supply Chain

This book

• Introduces an actionable, step-by-step process for prioritising and implementing a sustainable procurement strategy

• Focuses on the social and environmental factors of procurement, including labour practices, the processes used and the waste created in goods and services bought

• Features guidance on implementing sustainability requirements with immediate suppliers and driving improvements elsewhere in the supply chain where there is no direct relationship

• Explains how to carry out a sustainability audit then develop objectives and a strategy based on the priorities and major impacts identified

• Highlights key methods of monitoring results, communicating to the organization and ensuring continued sustainability success in the future

Description

The business case for sustainability and the global imperative to act are now clear, but organizations still struggle with procurement and supply chains as some of the most difficult factors to improve.

Sustainable Procurement explains how procurement professionals can expand on existing tools and approaches to make sustainability a reality. It begins by exploring the current landscape and the need for new approaches before moving onto a step-by-step process for sustainable procurement and supply chain CSR, from reviewing goods and services bought to supply chain mapping and implementing new supplier requirements. Guidance is offered on factors such as specification, use of labour and processes, and how to drive improvements further up the supply chain where there is no direct contractual relationship.

Written by leading procurement expert and best-selling author, Jonathan O'Brien, this practical guide outlines how to carry out a sustainability audit to define objectives and develop a new strategy. It also explains how to monitor results, the governance required to ensure success and how to be ready for changes in the future. Drive positive change with this roadmap to sustainable procurement and responsible supply chains.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider, and is based in Plymouth, UK. With over 30 years of experience, he has helped global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals, Supplier Relationship Management and The Buyer's Toolkit, all published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2023

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398604681

Ebook: 9781398604698

Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

1 Why the world needs CSR

2 Why do this – The business case for sustainability

3 Frameworks for corporate action

4 The sustainable procurement process

5 Sustainability audit

6 Defining the sustainable procurement objectives

7 Making what we buy sustainable

8 Driving sustainability in our suppliers

9 Driving sustainability back up the supply chain

10 Creating a blended sustainability strategy and plan

11 Making it a success

12 What the future holds

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management

Lessons Learned at IKEA

This book

• Explores the extraordinary global sourcing methods of IKEA, one of the largest and most influential companies in the world

• Presents practical guidelines on how purchasing teams can real create value and tangible results in category sourcing

• Looks at how category sourcing, beyond the initial consolidation of the supplier base, can be successfully implemented and managed

• New to this edition: focus on Ikea as a good example of how to create cost leadership by creating value, exploration of new ways of helping practitioners to really understand the fundamental ideas in category sourcing, and not just rely on models and processes, with case studies from Maersk, Carlsberg, P&G and Aldi

Description

How is it possible to sell a kitchen at 30 per cent below market price? Why are hot dogs cheaper in IKEA than in the supermarket? How can IKEA sell the Lack table at half the price it was when it was launched 35 years ago and how can it be achieved with a substantial profit?

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management examines how IKEA - and other cost leading companies - use category management to create advantages with direct and indirect sourcing. With 25 years' experience from IKEA, where he had the responsibility to develop and execute the company's purchasing strategy, author Magnus Carlsson shares his insights on important topics: when category management is profitable and why; how teams repeatedly create value and results; what the main approaches are in different categories; how a company implements category management; the difference between success and failure.

In this new edition of Strategic Sourcing and Category Management, Magnus Carlsson has added new themes including examples and references from companies such as Maersk, Carlsberg, P&G and Aldi, illustrating the application of cost leadership that spans far beyond IKEA. Even there, the cost leadership lessons are not limited to home furnishings as the company is sourcing categories such as food, components, materials, transports and indirect materials, with a total purchasing spend of approximately €7 billion. But maybe even more importantly, the book illustrates how teams create value by thinking differently and asking the right questions, allowing an understanding that goes beyond mere tools and processes.

Author Information

Magnus Carlsson has 25 years' experience as a strategic sourcing expert at IKEA. He also has 10 years' experience with leadership and training within the Swedish defence forces and is an advisor in strategic sourcing for Kingfisher.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/05/2019

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749486211

Ebook: 9780749486228

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

Introduction

Lessons learned at Ikea

What is category management?

Leading category sourcing

The hunt is on

Where is the money?

Creating value

The moment of truth

Control performance and create more value

Different categories and other perspectives

From theory to practice

Success or failure?

Appendix tools and models

Notes

References and further reading

Contract Management

Core Business Competence

This book

• Provides a practical handbook for procurement and supply chain managers who need to review their own skills and practices

• Provides tools to help organizations move towards best practice

• Equips the reader with accompanying PowerPoint slides that illustrate the tools and skills

• Presents broad commercial skill-sets which are internationally applicable

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2017

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749480646

Ebook: 9780749480653 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

Introduction

Contract Management as a Value Driver

What is the Task?

Role and Importance of Effective Contract Management

Administration

Strategy

Contract Design

When Things Go Wrong

Managing for Success

Practical Tools and Checklists

Description

Contract management is a key management skill, yet it is underplayed in most organizations, which usually default to project management skills as a proxy for contract management skills. Whilst project management skills are equally essential, they are not the same thing. Contract Management looks at the wider contract management picture from an industrial-commercial perspective, and helps set-out typical structures and processes that assist the contract management task. The author uses diagramatic representations to depict complex ideas.

Contract Management includes "learning points" in each chapter, looking at handling problems, procedural changes and enhancing commercial performance.

Author Information

Peter Sammons is a commercial/procurement specialist with 35 years in field. He is now a consultant who provides commercial support and develops/delivers training seminars

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain

Supplier Relationship Management

Unlocking the Value in Your Supply Base

This book

• Provides clear guidance on all aspects of managing suppliers to demonstrate how effective relationships that maximize value and success in business can be formed and maintained

• Explains 'The Orchestra of SRM®' proven framework for developing successful supplier relationship management programmes alongside practical tips and tools for real world application

• Outlines how to manage supplier segmentation and put in place interventions unique to each supplier

• New to this edition: how working practices have changed in supplier relationship management due to COVID-19 and the implications moving forward, information on the future of the supply base, updates on how to practically develop strategic collaborative relationships and implement supplier innovation

Description

Effective supplier relationship management enables organizations to unlock value from their supply base and reap tangible benefits. With practical tips and a proven approach, this is the guide to understanding how to maximize the potential of suppliers to gain a competitive advantage, get more innovation and drive sustainability.

Supplier Relationship Management explains the importance of ongoing supplier management, how to measure and improve their performance, and for the critical few that can make a dramatic difference to our organization, drive in and future-proof strategic collaborative relationships. The Orchestra of SRM® framework, coupled with expert tips, tools and resources, delivers clear guidance on how to design an effective supplier relationship management program, with maximum return on time and investment.

Written by leading procurement expert, Jonathan O'Brien, this third edition offers new content on how to adapt to the huge changes we have seen across supply bases in recent years, and the new risks and challenges organizations face in managing key suppliers. It includes new information on driving sustainability, the future of the supply base, and how to secure more innovation from our suppliers. Supplier segmentation is outlined in more detail and there is new information on how companies are managing supply chains, and the impacts of this in practice. A practical guide to unlock the new value from your key suppliers in a changing world.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider, and is based in Plymouth, UK. With over 30 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through online and classroom training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive the adoption of supplier relationship management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, now in its fourth edition, The Buyer's Toolkit, and the award-winning title Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals, now in its 3rd edition, all published by Kogan Page

Edition: 3

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398602250

Ebook: 9781398602267

Pages: 504

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What we need from our supply base is...

Five good reasons to get close to our suppliers

3 Introducing the Orchestra of SRM

Segmenting the supply base

Supplier performance measurement

Building a supplier performance measurement system

Acting upon measurement

Supplier improvement and development

Supplier management

Contract management

Relationship management

Supply chain management

Strategic collaborative relationships

Innovation from suppliers

The Orchestra of SRM is ready to play

Glossary

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals

A Proven Approach for Negotiations with Suppliers

This book

• Offers a ground-breaking new approach to delivering winning negotiations in procurement and supply chain management

• Provides the vital tools and comprehensive tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation

• Helps purchasers to evaluate a supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their negotiation strategy

• New to this edition: changing themes in procurement such as near shoring, update of contextual global factors to negotiation.

Edition: 3

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789662580

Ebook: 9781789662597 Pages: 480

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Description

Highly effective negotiation skills are an essential element of a purchasing and supply chain professional's toolkit.

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a step-bystep approach to delivering winning negotiations and getting game-changing results. It provides purchasers and supply chain managers with the necessary tools and tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation.

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals allows the purchasing professional or the buying team to evaluate the supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their negotiation strategy depending on concession strategies, cultural influences and game theory. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a strong framework for discussion in advance of the meeting, allowing the negotiator to plan their agenda, objectives and tactics. Based upon the Red Sheet® Methodology, this book is a proven and collaborative technique used by many companies globally. The new edition includes supply chain planning, updates on multi-party negotiation for supply chain negotiations, Brexit as a retrospective example of negotiation and how the negotiation capability will need to change in the future.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider. With over 30 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their negotiation and purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of negotiation and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management, now in its second edition, The Buyer's Toolkit and Category Management in Purchasing, now in its fourth edition, all published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

Introducing negotiation

Countering the seller advantage

Red sheet

Planning the negotiation

Negotiation across cultures

Personality and negotiation

Power

Game theory

Building the concession strategy

The negotiation event

Winning event tactics

Body language

Managing what you say and how you say it

Post-negotiation activities

Negotiation as a key enabler for success

Appendix - The Red Sheet negotiation templates

The Buyer's Toolkit

An Easy-to-Use Approach for Effective Buying

This book

• Provides an understanding of core principles from category management, SRM, negotiation, contract management and supply chain management

• Equips the reader with simple toolsets and frameworks, translated from complex models and concepts

• Provides easily understood concepts that can be applied with no prior training or knowledge in this area

• Uses tried and tested methods to transform your business and increase its profit and value gained from the supply base

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749479817

Ebook: 9780749479824 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

1 How to Buy Really Well

2 The Size of the Prize

3 What Stops Us Being Good

4 The 5D Power Buying Process

5 Step 1: Define the Need

6 Step 2: Discover Our Position

7 Step 3: Determine How to Buy

8 Step 4: Securing the Best Deal

9 Step 5: Delivery - Ensuring We Get What We Agreed

10 Getting Good at Power Buying

Description

In order to buy well it is important to understand a few basic principles and apply a series of tools and approaches in given situations. The Buyer's Toolkit distills all the best practice tools for professional buying and negotiating into a simple, jargon-free framework that can be picked up and applied by anyone who buys. The book seeks to transform how individuals view and practise buying so they know when to influence a situation and what to do to buy well.

The Buyer's Toolkit has a simple chapter layout, contains graphics and models, and a simple flow of tools through the book with an overarching framework, that glues them together. Covering different buying scenarios, understanding and defining the requirements, choosing the right deal and supplier, negotiation, managing the contract and the suppliers, fixing problems and sustainable buying, this comprehensive guide will help you boost your advantage as a buyer.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 27 years' experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Category Management in Purchasing, Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, all published by Kogan Page.

Leading Procurement Strategy

Driving Value Through the Supply Chain

This book

• Delivers key strategic insights and guidance on formulating and implementing a robust procurement strategy

• Provides real world case studies from leading organizations including IBM, IKEA, John Deere, NASA, Nike and Tesla

• New to this edition: the latest on the future of procurement and digitalization, updates on green and socially responsible procurement

• Offers powerful practical tools for managing procurement and supply, brought to you by the authors, who have consideration professional and academic experience

Edition: 3

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398601581

Ebook: 9781398601598 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Description

Delivering successful procurement programs has helped businesses like IKEA, Tesla and Nike maximize the potential of their resources and gain the competitive advantage. Learn how to develop similar strategies, that meet the needs of the business, customers and suppliers, and lead their implementation using insights from the experts in procurement strategy.

Leading Procurement Strategy provides readers with a complete overview of the skills, knowledge and tools needed to implement a successful procurement strategy. The expert author team of Carlos Mena, Remko van Hoek, and Martin Christopher present practical advice and guidance underpinned by academic theory and supported by an extensive range of real-world case studies including IBM, IKEA, John Deere, NASA, Nike and Tesla. Readers are shown how to develop, deliver and sustain procurement performance with clear and accessible guidance.

The third edition offers the latest insights into the future of procurement and digitalization, updates on green and socially responsible procurement and a revised structure. The key issues affecting the procurement function are covered and tips for developing the best practices in teams are found throughout.

Author Information

Carlos Mena is the Nike Professor of Supply Chain Management at Portland State University (PSU), USA. Previously, he was a faculty member at Michigan State University, USA and Cranfield University, UK.

Remko van Hoek is Professor of Supply Chain Management at the University of Arkansas, USA. Previously, he was Chief Procurement Officer at the Walt Disney Company, California, USA and he held executive roles at Nike, Cofely (GDF SUEZ) and PwC.

Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield School of Management, Bedfordshire, UK.

Table of Contents

Procurement strategy

Introduction - The strategic role of procurement

Procurement and the organizationOrganizing for success

The strategic procurement cycle

Procurement and the supply network

Supplier relationship management

Global sourcing

Delivering performance in procurement

Strategic cost management

The impact of procurement on financial results

Supply chain risk management

Digitization of procurement - The enabling role of technology

Sustaining procurement performance

Sustainable procurement

The future of procurement

Global Contract Logistics

Best Practice Toolkit for Planning, Negotiating and Managing a Contract

This book

• Provides an overview of contracting logistics and the complexities of procurement and acquisition

• Gives clear guidelines for successfully planning, negotiating and managing a contract

• Features interesting examples of successful procurement projects from different industries, such as defence, aviation and ship building.

• Includes case studies from Ministry of Defence, Heathrow Airport and Cross-Rail based on the author's experience of leading the procurement and acquisition projects.

• Online Resources: contract templates for procurement and acquisition projects

Description

The role of a contracting professional begins well before the award of a contract and doesn't end until the benefits of the acquisition have been realised, long after the deliverables arrive in a box on a loading dock. Global Contract Logistics tackles the growing complexity of contracting in a technologically accelerating world. The author looks at the common errors and the ten phases of a successful acquisition.

Global Contract Logistics examines what it takes to be an intelligent client, one who employs contracting or procurement professionals to obtain goods and services on their behalf. It debunks many commonly held myths involving contracting, procurement and acquisition and outlines ten vital steps towards success for intelligent clients and their supporting acquisition professionals. The text is supported by case studies of projects that the author Steve Morgan has led, during his time with the Ministry of Defence and BAA. Online supporting resources include contract templates for procurement and acquisition projects.

Author Information

Steven Morgan was Director of Commercial Operations at the UK's Ministry of Defence (MoD). He was also responsible for the training, qualification, mentoring, and deployment of Commercial professionals throughout the MoD in collaboration with the Defence Academy. He was previously Capital Programmes Director for BAA, where he was responsible for capital projects and procurement. He has also previously worked at Sellafield as director of commercial and contract management.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2019

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749475932

Ebook: 9780749475949 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 232x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Procurement

Table of Contents

Introduction

Professional growth in procurement

Defining the need

Specifying the requirement

Chunking the work (aka acquisition strategy)

Competitively selecting the ideal source

Devising an incentivized contract for alignment

Supporting the contractor

Enforcing the contract

Integration

Commissioning

Assessing effectiveness

Conclusions

A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement

How to Maximize Impact with e-Sourcing and e-Negotiation

This book

• Demonstrates how to develop a successful e-sourcing and e-negotiation strategy using insights from Maersk's award winning program

• Explains e-auctions, when and how they should be applied and their numerous benefits

• Features practical learnings from more than 10,000 e-sourcing programmes across all spend categories

• Provides a new perspective on the future of e-auctions which includes the increased development of AI and Robotic Process Automation within the negotiation discipline

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398600287

Ebook: 9781398600294

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Procurement

Description

WINNER: 2021 Plume d'Or - Grand Prix ACA-Bruel Award.

A Practical Guide to E-Auctions for Procurement provides guidance to procurement professionals on how to realize the potential of e-auctions.

Now is the time to optimize your e-negotiation strategy using key insights from the author Jacob Gorm Larsen, who is responsible for one of the most successful and award-winning e-sourcing programs in the world.

A Practical Guide to E-Auctions for Procurement presents a proven process for developing an e-auction and e-negotiation strategy, along with a catalogue of change management initiatives for securing buy-in internally in the organization. The different e-auction formats and benefits are explained in detail and demonstrated with practical examples, templates and advice that can be adopted by the reader.

Jacob and the team at Maersk are at the forefront when it comes to developing robots that execute e-auctions from end-to-end and are kicking off a transformation that will fundamentally change how we consider e-auctions and negotiations. In addition, with learnings from more than 10,000 e-auctions globally, this is the book for those in procurement looking to implement, deliver and maintain a thriving e-auction program.

Author Information

Jacob Gorm Larsen is Head of Digital Procurement in Maersk with responsibility for the execution of the digital transformation of procurement. For the past 15 years he has been part of the procurement team at Maersk including responsibility for developing and operating the e-sourcing program for more than a decade.

Table of Contents

Understanding eSourcing and eNegotiation

What is an eAuction?

Applicability, when can you use eAuctions?

The history of eAuctions

Value in a theoretical perspective

eNegotiation strategy

Game theory - eNegotiations as a strategic game

Negotiation theory

eAuction formats

eNegotiation strategy objectives

Supplier relationships - maintain relationships

eNegotiation strategy framework

Bidder engagement

The value proposition for suppliers

Supplier communication

Supplier Training

Driving usage and adoption

Introduce a Center of Excellence (COE) for Support, Technology and Governance

Ensure executive support to eAuctions

Make it strategic

Drive it with hard KPI’s

Address the myths

Re-inventing yourself every year

Examples of best-practice

The selling never stops

The future of eNegotiation

The accelerating digitization of negotiations

AI powered negotiation guides

Automating negotiation processes

The future of eAuctions, cup half full or half empty

Supply Chain Finance

Risk Management, Resilience and Supplier Management

This book

• Looks at the benefits of the supply chain finance (SCF) approach, including reduction of working capital and increased profitability through the supply chain

• Examines the role of innovative technologies to support SCF, such as blockchain and the Internet of Things (IoT)

• Presents solutions and programmes that help mitigate and better manage financial flows within and across the supply chain

• Contains essential theory and practical case studies, making this a vital text for MSc, PhD and MBA students

• Links the field of SCF to that of the overarching problem of sustainability

• Online resources: self-test multiple-choice and essay questions for each chapter

Description

Supply Chain Finance is a contributed book looking at the two major perspectives of managing finance across the supply chain.

The first is more short-term, focused on accounts payables and receivables. The second is a more overarching perspective, focused on working capital optimization in terms of inventory and asset management. It includes chapters from a variety of research perspectives, as well as from business and policymakers. The authors look at the benefits of the supply chain finance approach including reduction of working capital, access to more funding at lower costs, risk reduction, as well as an increase of trust, commitment, and profitability through the chain.

Supply Chain Finance includes theory as well as practical case studies addressing advances in the area of supply chain finance. The editors and contributors look at how to design and implement supply chain finance in supply chains and examine what the future holds for this important area. Online supporting resources include self-test multiple-choice and essay questions for each chapter.

Author Information

Wendy Tate is the William J. Taylor Professor of Business and Cheryl Massingale Faculty Research Fellow, Department of Supply Chain Management at the Haslam College of Business, University of Tennessee in Knoxville, Tennessee.

Lydia Bals is Professor of Supply Chain & Operations Management at Mainz University of Applied Sciences, Germany and Visiting Professor at the Department of Strategy & Innovation, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark.

Lisa M. Ellram is the Rees Distinguished Professor of Supply Chain Management in the Department of Management at the Farmer School of Business, Miami University in Oxford, Ohio.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2018

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749482404

Ebook: 9780749482411

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Table of Contents

1 Supply chain finance – Solutions for financial sustainability, risk management and resilience in the supply chain

2 Supply chain finance – History and future directions

3 Suppliers, customers, and firms’ financial decisions

4 Supply chain finance – Definition, modern aspects and research challenges ahead

5 Optimizing cash flows for a retail supply chain coordinator

6 Supply chain finance opportunities by managing payables discounts

7 Mapping and managing the financial supply chain

8 Supply chain finance and cyber risk – An illustrative case study

9 Commodity risk management at BMW –Price indices and contracts

10 A business partners’ view on decisionmaking challenges in the supply chain

11 Exploring fragmentation in the supply chain finance (SCF) ecosystem

12 Foundational premises and value drivers of blockchain-driven supply chains – The trade finance experience

Supply Chain Management Accounting

Managing Profitability, Working Capital and Asset Utilization

This book

• Looks at the relationship between supply chain decisions and financial performance, measured by financial statements including the income statement, balance sheet and key financial and non-financial performance indicators

• Examines the applications of traditional and contemporary costing approaches and how they support supply chain management decision making

• Looks at the development of financially sustainable supply chain operations that have incorporated supply chain finance, working capital management and risk management

• Introduces a capital investment appraisal toolkit to construct the business case for investing in supply chain assets or considering an outsourcing or insourcing decision

• Online resources: invaluable study questions and worked solutions to reinforce the learning as well as multiple-choice questions with solutions and PowerPoint activities

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2019

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749472993

Ebook: 9780749473006

Pages: 392

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Table of Contents

1 Supply chain accounting

2 Profitability, liquidity and asset utilisation

3 Supply chain management and firm performance

4 Product costing – Comparing marginal costing with full costing

5 Activity based costing and time based process mapping

6 Investment appraisal

7 Total cost of ownership and life cycle costing

8 Target costing and new product development

9 Introduction to supply chain finance

10 Customer profitability analysis

11 Budgeting, sales and operations planning, standard costing and variance analysis

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

The Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash

This book

• Examines the 'inventory' or 'working capital' angle, which is overlooked in many of the more strategic supply chain management texts

• Includes a practical road map on how to improve a business and facilitate an improved Return-on-Capital-Employed

• Online resources: Includes worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/exercises to make it interactive

• Provides insightful case studies examining successful supply chain transformation programmes employed in a wide variety of international companies

Description

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics is a step-by-step guide to balancing the triangle of service, cost and cash which is the essence of supply chain management.

Supply chains have become increasingly strategy-driven, and this Supply Chain Triangle approach puts the supply chain at the heart of the strategy discussion instead of seeing it as a result.

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics fully reflects the 'inventory' or 'working capital' angle and examines the optimisation of the supply chain and Return on Capital Employed. Including case studies of Barco, Casio and a selection of food retail companies, this book covers building a strategy-driven KPI dashboard, target setting and financial benchmarking. Regular examples and diagrams illustrate how different types of strategies lead to different trade-offs in the Supply Chain Triangle. This ground-breaking text links supply chain, strategy and finance through financial metrics, therefore creating value for the shareholder. Online supporting resources include worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/ exercises to make it interactive.

Author Information

Dr Bram DeSmet is the CEO of Solventure where he helps global production and retail organizations in the domain of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2018

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749482572

Ebook: 9780749482589 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Table of Contents

1 The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash

2 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle

3 Financial Benchmarking in Two Dimensions

4 Financial Target Setting in Two Dimensions

5 The Impact of Strategy on Financial Benchmarking and Target Setting

6 Redefining the Service Corner into a Value Corner

7 Building a Strategy Driven KPI Dashboard

8 Implementing a Strategy Driven Supply Chain

9 Appendix – Financial Templates –Inventory Management

10 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain

A Reference Guide to Supply Chain Finance

This book

• Provides readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply chain

• Combines theory and practice to tackle key issues and adapt supply chain finance to individual organizations' circumstances

• Presents several initiatives to coordinate and develop cross-border financing from institutions such as the World Bank

• New to this edition: interviews from SCF platform providers, new examples on working capital management, additional learning activities and a terminology list

Edition: 2

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781789663488

Ebook: 9781789663495

Pages: 448

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The background

1

The nucleus – Supply chains and financial performance

2 The big issue – Working capital management

3 The flows – Towards an integrated view of supply chain processes

2 The current practice

4 The concept – A case for supply chain finance

5 The ecosystem – Who is involved in supply chain finance?

Description

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain provides readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply chain.

It demonstrates the importance of the strategic relationship between the physical supply of goods and services and the associated financial flows. The book provides a clear introduction, demonstrating the importance of the strategic relationship between supply chain and financial communities within an organization. This book links together treasury, banking, supply chain, systems, IT, and key stakeholders.

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain will help senior supply chain practitioners to build collaboration, improve relationships and enhance trust between supply chain partners. With its combination of theory and practice it tackles vital issues including physical, information and financial flows, and tailoring supply chain finance to individual organisations' circumstances. Recognizing that supply chain finance means different things in different countries, the authors also consider various initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing as well as including an agenda for national and international policy makers. The new edition features interviews from SCF platform providers on how ecosystems are involved in supply chain finance, additional learning activities for students and new examples on working capital management.

Author Information

Simon Templar is a founding member of the Supply Chain Finance Community, a nonfor-profit association. Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with 20 years' industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MSc's at Cranfield University.

Erik Hofmann is Head of Supply Chain Finance-Lab at the University of St.Gallen in Switzerland. He is also Director of the Institute of Supply Chain Management (ISCM-HSG) and Boardmember of the Supply Chain Finance Community (SCFC).

Charles Findlay is an experienced Business Strategy, Supply Chain and Procurement consultant , an agel investor and a Director of State of Flux.

6 The value proposition – Solutions for supply chain finance

7 The implementation – Bringing supply chain finance programmes to life

3 The future

8 The global setting – Supply chain finance in the context of cultural and geographical dispersion

9 The look beyond – Factors impacting the future of supply chain finance 10 Index

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling

Quantitative Tools and Applications

This book

• Provides a detailed explanation of the most frequently used business analytics models in the supply chain, the challenges these present and the impact on different parts of the supply chain

• Includes models in all areas of business analytics such as descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, with fully solved examples that can be easily followed and adopted

• Presents new research for developing, implementing and evaluating business analytics models within a complex supply chain environment

• Highlights the most recent developments in the field of supply chain analytics, which have been driven by new technologies

• Online resources: lecturer slides

Description

An incredible volume of data is generated at a very high speed within the supply chain and it is necessary to understand, use and effectively apply the knowledge learned from analyzing data using intelligent business models.

However, practitioners and students in the field of supply chain management face a number of challenges when dealing with business models and mathematical modelling.

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling presents a range of business analytics models used within the supply chain to help readers develop knowledge on a variety of topics to overcome common issues.

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling covers areas including supply chain planning, single and multi-objective optimization, demand forecasting, product allocations, end-toend supply chain simulation, vehicle routing and scheduling models. Learning is supported by case studies of specialist software packages for each example. Readers will also be provided with a critical view on how supply chain management performance measurement systems have been developed and supported by reliable and accurate data available in the supply chain. Online resources including lecturer slides are available.

Author Information

Nicoleta Tipi senior lecturer at The Open University, UK in the area of operations and supply chain. She has was senior lecturer at the University of Huddersfield where she has gained experience lecturing in the area of supply chain modelling and logistics operations. Nicoleta Tipi has considerable industry experience, having worked in different roles involving modelling and analytics for Unilever.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9780749498603

Ebook: 9780749498610 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Analytics

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to business analytics

2 The role of modelling in the supply chain

3 The role of data in the supply chain

4 Big data and data visualization

5 Supply chain performance measurement systems

6 Business analytics models

7 Supply chain analytics

8 The future of supply chain analytics

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Strategic Supply Chain Management

Creating Competitive Advantage and Value Through Effective Leadership

This book

• Offers a theoretical underpinning with supporting supply chain management tools and strategies

• Provides examples of best practice, including case studies of companies such as Nestlé and organisations from the Gartner Supply Chain Top 25

• Presents essential supply chain technologies, such as RFID, barcodes, logistics technology, automated warehouses, omnichannel, as well as future trends, such as big data, the Internet of Things (IoT) and autonomous systems

• Looks at how effective supply chain strategy can boost a company's competitive advantage and examines the importance of talent management and organisational strategy

Description

Supply chains, including logistics, are the functional elements of an organisation's operations. To formulate a strategy for this operation to work seamlessly the organisation needs to align these operations with the corporate and business strategy. Strategic Supply Chain Management provides a discussion on effective supply chain strategic leadership for managerial teams who have previously been operating on a tactical or operational level, as well as students who need to learn about applying the theories of strategic supply chain management in practice.

Strategic Supply Chain Management introduces concepts and tools which will enable successful buyer-supplier relationships and effective organizational leadership and talent management. Samir Dani provides a concise but important outlook on the connection between business strategy and supply chain strategy. The book delves into topical issues of risk, resilience, and sustainability and how these influence both business and supply chain strategy. The book also considers strategies for procurement, buyer supplier relationships, and sales & operations planning. An important aspect of this book is to consider the leadership and talent aspects of the humans in the supply chain and how this influences strategy and creates competitive advantage.

Author Information

Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management in Huddersfield Business School at the University of Huddersfield, UK. He is the recipient of the 2015 Prix des Associations prize at the Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain awards for his book Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749478841

Ebook: 9780749478858

Pages: 200

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 Elements of strategy

2 Sales and operations planning

3 Sourcing and purchasing

4 Supplier relationships and collaboration

Risk and resilience

6 The circular economy and supply chain strategy

7 Talent management

8 Other factors important for supply chain strategy

9 Appendix - Factors influencing the supply chain strategy

Operations and Supply Chain

Strategic Value Chain Management

Models for Competitive Advantage

This book

• Demonstrates how to integrate customer responsiveness and agile supply chains into the overall value chain strategy

• Provides research-based models and frameworks which introduce new ways of driving effective strategic decision-making

• Presents an interdisciplinary approach, highlighting the important field of systems sciences

• Includes real-life examples of how to increase competitive advantage through effective value chain management, from large corporates such as BAT and Maersk

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749484422

Ebook: 9780749484439 Pages: 440

Format (mm): 230x150

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Michael Porter – the founder of competitive strategy

2 A treatise of cybernetics, system sciences and complexity sciences

3 Introducing the six forces model

4 Global value chain management strategies and models for competitive advantage

5 Economic dimension of the six forces model and practical implications

Conclusion

7 Appendix – Economic layer, supply chain and collaboration

8 Index

Description

A supply chain is the process of all parties involved in fulfilling a customer request, while a value chain is a set of interrelated activities a company uses to create value and a competitive advantage. In Strategic Value Chain Management the authors bring together a variety of disciplines, showing how to move from traditional supply chain management to value chain management. Research from the (ISM) International School of Management, Germany, originating from a network of companies in a range of sectors, is integrated with case studies to demonstrate particular concepts.

Strategic Value Chain Management brings together theory and practice and presents tangible ways of creating competitiveness in a changing world through the use of effective models and frameworks. Challenging the traditional Porters Five Forces Model, the authors introduce the important academic disciplines of cybernetics and systems sciences as essential drivers of strategy within the supply chain, supported by case studies illustrating their implementation.

Author Information

Prof. Dr. Sc. Qeis Kamran (MBA-GM, MBA- PPM, MBL-HSG, LLM, PhD Scholar and researcher at University of Twente, the Netherlands) is the full Professor of Strategy, Cybernetics and Design Science at ISM International School of Management, Dortmund, Germany. He previously worked in sales, management, entrepreneurship and leadership roles in retail, energy, oil, petrochemicals and consulting industries.

Supply Chain 4.0

Improving Supply Chains with Analytics and Industry 4.0 Technologies

This book

• Explains the theory behind Supply Chain 4.0 and its application in practice, examining existing and emerging technologies, such as IoT, autonomous vehicles and big data

• Provides guidelines for designing and implementing innovative methods and techniques in order to address logistics problems effectively and systematically

• Explores the significant value of smart and integrated logistics operations

• Includes case studies of "Logistics 4.0" solutions in action, from companies such as Tesco, DHL and Waitrose

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789660739

Ebook: 9781789660746

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Supply Chain 4.0 has introduced automation into logistics and supply chain processes, exploiting predictive analytics to better match supply with demand, optimizing operations and using the latest technologies for the last mile delivery such as drones and autonomous robots.

Supply Chain 4.0 presents new methods, techniques, and information systems that support the coordination and optimization of logistics processes, reduction of operational costs as well as the emergence of entirely new services and business processes.

This edited collection includes contributions from leading international researchers from academia and industry. It considers the latest technologies and operational research methods available to support smart, integrated, and sustainable logistics practices focusing on automation, big data, Internet of Things, and decision support systems for transportation and logistics. It also highlights market requirements and includes case studies of cutting-edge applications from innovators in the logistics industry.

Author Information

Professor Michael Bourlakis is the Head of the Logistics, Procurement & Supply Chain Management Group at Cranfield School of Management. He is a member of the European Technology Platform (Food for Life, European Commission).

Dr Emel Aktas is a Senior Lecturer in Cranfield School of Management at Cranfield University. She specializes in supply chain analytics, using mathematical modelling and decision analysis in transport, retail and manufacturing sectors.

Dr. Vasileios Zeimpekis is a lecturer at the Hellenic Open University. He is a transportation expert in the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) and in the Hellenic Committee for Competitiveness and Development for Logistics. He is the Vice President of Operations at the board of directors of the Hellenic Logistics Association.

Professor Ioannis Minis is a Professor in the Department of Financial and Management Engineering of the University of Aegean. He is also the chairman of the National Council for Supply Chain Growth and Competitiveness, an advisory body to the Greek government.

Table of Contents

1 Supply Chain 4.0: enabling market-driven strategies [Martin Christopher]

2 Driving better customer experience in digital supply chains [Patrick Strauss]

3 Blockchain in the supply chain [Martyn Walker]

4 Blockchain for humanitarian supply chain [Rameshwar Dubey, Angappa Gunasekaram, Stephen J. Childe, Benjamin T. Hazen and Thanos Papadopoulos]

5 Supply Chain 4.0: the cyber-security challenge [James Kench]

6 Defining and testing system parameters for enhancing vision picking technology in warehouse operations [Anastasios Gialos and Vasileios Zeimpekis]

7 Collaborative robotics – transforming warehouse logistics [Markus Voss]

8 Improving cold-food quality control through the Internet of Things and big data: an empirical case [Alexandre Luis Prim, Tiago Pedro Nicchellatti and Roberto Goularth Mendes]

9 Predicting physical distribution delays: a case study of outbound logistics [Zina Ben Miled, Jeremy Archbold and Brooke Renee Cochenour]

10 Adopting Industry 4.0 technologies in agri-food supply chains: an exploratory investigation of drivers and barriers [Imran Ali, Sattar Satie and Vinh Thai]

11 The impact of sharing economy incentives and Industry 4.0 technologies on humanitarian logistics: insights from the Iran floods of 2019 [Hamed Seddighi and Hamid Moradlou]

12 In search of a human dimension of Supply Chain 4.0: stipulating learning as a lever for the future supply chain organization [Henning de Haas, John Bang Mathiasen, Søren Skjold Andersen and Torben Tambo]

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain

Integrating Strategy, Finance and Supply Chain for a Competitive Edge

This book

• Introduces the concept of the strategy-driven supply chain by exploring the effect of a poor strategy on supply chains and how strategy should translate into supply chain design

• Offers practical guidance on implementing the strategy-driven supply chain concept in an organization from the top down or bottom up

• Emphasises the need for strategic integrated value planning and execution as the next step beyond S&OP and IBP

• Explores the financial context of how Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) links to other financial metrics and targets like growth, EBITDA and free cash flow

• Builds and fully expands on the fundamental concepts of Bram DeSmet's previous book, Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

Description

Different strategies lead to different supply chains, and a lack of strategic choices leads to a blurred focus. This book introduces the concept of the 'strategy-driven supply chain', which changes the role of supply chain from operational-tactical to tacticalstrategic.

Building on the fundamentals of the author's previous bestselling book, Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics, this new work defines a mission and purpose for supply chain management which puts supply chain at the heart of the triangle of service, cost and cash. The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain explains the need for integrated value planning and execution as the next step beyond S&OP and IBP and how to use a strategy-driven scorecard with a focus on Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) as the overall value metric.

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain includes numerous tools to put these ideas into action, including a method to analyse financial metrics and compare them to key competitors, and exercises to define an organization's strategic choices (or lack thereof). It also features real-life examples of how to use the supply chain triangle to engage sales, finance and operations and case studies that illustrate the impact of strategy on the supply chain and financial metrics. This practical guide outlines a seven-step approach to integrating the people, process, tooling and analytics aspects of the change journey to the strategy-driven supply chain.

Author Information

Dr Bram DeSmet is the CEO of Solventure where he helps global production and retail organizations in the domain of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium and a visiting Professor at Peking University, China.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2021

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398600454

Ebook: 9781398600478

Pages: 320 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash

2 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle

3 Strategy-Driven S&OP

4 The Strategy-Driven Enterprise

5 The Strategy-Driven Scorecard

6 Implementing the Strategy-Driven Enterprise

7 Appendix – Financial Templates –Inventory Management

8 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management

Transformational Performance Improvement

This book

• Explains how to transform your company's operational performance by implementing demand-driven supply chain management

• Provides a very simple, but effective, way to segment your supply chain and achieve your planned service levels from up to half the average inventory while using significantly less capacity

• Understand how to reduce capacitydelivering cost savings of approximately 20%

• Online resources: Full-colour figures from the book

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749479978

Ebook: 9780749479985 Pages: 280

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Many manufacturing and distribution companies are moving from the traditional 'forecast push MRP' to demand-driven supply chain management (SCM). Demand-driven SCM is an 'end-to-end' supply chain planning and replenishment process that enables companies to achieve their planned service levels from up to half the average level of inventory and requiring significantly less throughput capacity - irrespective of the level of demand volatility or lead-time length.

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management is the go-to source for industry supply chain/ operations executives and students. It describes the 'what, how and why' of the demanddriven SCM process. The key themes in the book are: what is demand-driven? why is demand-driven so effective? how to operate a demand-driven supply chain? and how to adopt the demand-driven process in your company? Readers can quickly grasp the essential concepts from one of numerous self-contained sections that present the book's key concepts from different perspectives. Online resources available include full-colour figures.

Author Information

Simon Eagle is a senior supply chain planning and strategy consultant with over 20 years of international industry experience and significant expertise in S&OP and demand-driven supply chain management. He works with manufacturing and distribution companies that wish to make a transformational improvement in their E2E operations and supply chain performance and does so through helping them to adopt 'demand-driven' planning and execution.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction and Summaries

2 What is Demand-Driven SCM?

3 Why Demand-Driven SCM?

4 How to Operate a Demand-Driven Supply Chain

5 Demand-Driven SCM and Lean

6 Why Aren’t We Already Using DemandDriven SCM?

7 The Demand Driven Institute, DemandDriven MRP and SaaS

8 What Next – Control Theory?

9 Postscript: From Supply Chain – An Apology to Our Commercial Colleagues

10 The Story Behind DDMRP: Contribution by Chad Smith and Carol Ptak, Cofounders of the Demand Driven Institute

Supply Chain Disruption

Aligning Business Strategy and Supply Chain Tactics

This book

• Presents disruptive technologies as the enablers or drivers of new business models, products, services and overall solutions

• Maps how to create and implement superior process improvement solutions across the entire supply chain

• Features case studies of organizations that have successfully integrated new technologies into their existing business models and supply chains, such as BT, Morrisons and Aramex

• Features a foreword by world-leading thought leader, John Gattorna

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2019

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749484101

Ebook: 9780749484118

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Disruptive technologies have the power to upend supply chains, adding uncertainty, cost, and complexity to any business. These technologies can also create competitive advantage, but only if organizations strategically build them into their supply chains.

Supply Chain Disruption, with a foreword by John Gattorna, provides the vital knowledge that supply chain managers need in order to implement disruptive technologies strategically. This essential book avoids a one-size-fits-all approach and encourages the reader to consider customer needs first before aligning appropriate technologies with each supply chain application.

Supply Chain Disruption focuses on information systems, analysing how companies currently integrate and implement potentially disruptive technologies into their supply chain roadmaps. It presents new ways of planning more effectively and efficiently through the use of new tools and techniques, creating improvements in agility, customer service and cost.

Author Information

Steve O'Sullivan is a supply chain and logistics specialist with extensive two-decade international experience in complex business-critical environments for firms across multiple industries, such as aviation and consumer electronics. As an academic scholar-practitioner, Steve consistently creates and implements superior process improvement solutions across the entire supply chain process, while supporting international management teams in meeting and exceeding established targets.

Table of Contents

Preface – Setting the scene

1 An introduction to supply chain disruption

2 Supply chain strategic friction

3 Ad omnia paratus – Prepared for anything

4 Humanitarian disasters and the supply chain

5 The art of responding to disruption through the physical supply chain

6 Pharmaceutical supply chain disruption –A policy perspective

7 Corporate breakdowns and the supply chain

8

A conceptual process model – Reducing the gap of pain through dynamic strategic alignment

E-Business and Supply Chain Integration

Strategies and Case Studies from Industry

This book

• Discusses trends, issues and challenges associated with integrating e-business with supply chain management

• Provides an overview of the use of B2B and B2C technologies in supply chains in different industries, such as HE institutions, multinational automation corporations and healthcare

• Uses bona fide case studies from industry and academia which highlight concerns and problems such as e-technology security and collaborative system use

• Looks at how to use e-technologies to increase the efficiency of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2018

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9780749478452

Ebook: 9780749478469

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Using e-business technologies to manage supply chains increases the efficiency and performance of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains how a number of tools can be used to produce an e-supply chain and achieve higher productivity.

This essential book examines supply chain theories along with real life cases and examples from industry to illustrate how e-business can enhance supply chain integration and highlights the negative outcomes when it is poorly managed. Dr Ozlem Bak and a team of expert contributors from practice and academia assess the impact of e-business on numerous different sectors, such as automotive, healthcare, logistics, higher education, and professional services. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains the strategic implications of new technologies and provides guidance on effective supply chains in e-businesses.

Author Information

Dr Ozlem Bak is Senior Lecturer at Huddersfield University, UK. She lectures on courses in operations management, purchasing, and supply chain management at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Before entering academia she worked in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler Chrysler and Hyundai.

Table of Contents

1

E-integrated healthcare supply chains: tracking and monitoring medical devices in the National Health Service (NHS), UK [Dr Ying Xie and Dr Liz Breen]

2 Smart technologies: disruptive technologies and the agrifood industry – fit for practice? [Professor Kim P Bryceson and Dr Asif Yaseen]

3 Digital technologies in the professional services industry: aligning human capital supply with market demand [Georg Juelke]

4 Implementation of e-health to improve healthcare [Wenqi Jacintha Hee, Dr Geoffrey Jalleh and Dr Chad Lin]

5 E-learning in higher education: a case of doctoral dialogue in a virtual space [Dr Mark Readman]

6 E-government: assessing the impact of e-business technologies on government service supply chains [Dr Ozlem Bak]

7 Cloud technology: China’s e-business approach to market development – the case of `Alisports [David Cockayne]

8 Supply chain integration through e-business-enabled enterprise systems: the case of the UK automobile sector [Professor Vikas Kumar, Dr John Loonam, Archana Kumari, Professor Jose Arturo Garza-Reyes and Hieu Van Ngo]

9 The role of business-to-business platforms and their implications for supply chains: a case from the European automotive industry [Dr Ozlem Bak]

10 E-freight: prospects and challenges of the digitalization of the air cargo supply chain [Alicja Gajewska and Dr Eric Tchouamou Njoya]

11 E-learning in higher education: an account of student autonomy within the context of a UK-based e-learning environment [Dr Ozlem Bak]

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain

Key Organizational and Human Dynamics

This book

• Explains Integrated Business Planning frameworks and how they can be applied to supply chain management

• Encourages the application of academic theories to real-world problems, such as how to build an honest and open supply chain

• Discusses change and how to implement it through learning from examples provided by a range of supply chain professionals: academics, practitioners, consultants and service providers

• Includes numerous international case studies illustrating the successful and unsuccessful implementation of change

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749477684

Ebook: 9780749477691

Pages: 280

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Managing changes to the supply chain comes with its unique challenges. Supply chain planning presents an especially complex challenge for the change practitioner as multiple stakeholders and functions are involved.

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain evaluates different approaches to change interventions and explores how Integrated Business Planning could be implemented in any organization to create sustainable improvements.

Using frameworks based on extensive academic research, Richard Lloyd considers the potential blocks to an effective supply chain, and advises on how to deal with and identify uncertainties within an organization. Numerous international case studies included throughout show that every project has its own set of unique problems. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain is an invaluable guide for anyone who needs to implement change in the supply chain.

Author Information

Richard Lloyd is Associate Director of the Supply Chain Centre of Excellence at TATA Consultancy Services, Mumbai. The author has worked for lots of international companies designing and managing supply chains such as NOKIA, where he was responsible for driving their global supply chain. He is a visiting lecturer at Cranfield University, Bedford, UK.

Table of Contents

Introduction

The supply chain challenge

Context. Situation. Outside-in

An outside-in view of an organization

Who works here and why?

Digging to understand how we got here

2 Complication. What is really going on?

Incongruities and uncertainties: a look behind the scenes

Theory of action: linking behaviour to assumptions

The politics of information technology: patronage and partnership

3 Implications. Interpreting our findings

Wicked problems: understanding the challenge

Leadership approaches to change

Realpolitik and ideals: projects

Conclusions. Decisions. Shaping interventions

Conclusions

Platforms and tools for change

Getting to agility faster

Wrap-up: Case study re-imagined. Next steps

Case study re-imagined

Next steps

Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice

Value Creation Up, Down and Across Supply Chains

This book

• Provides best practice examples of collaborative working to help streamline working practices and drive waste and inefficiency out of supply chains

• Examines the role that government, industry bodies, regulators and contractor trade associations can play in driving collaborative innovation

• Provides insights into future digital collaborative knowledge-cube based procurement solutions

• Online resources: Bonus chapter and roadmap

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2018

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749480493

Ebook: 9780749480509

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Hyper competition and globalization mean that markets are changing. There is aggressive competition, shortening product life cycles, financial pressures and ever more demanding customers and consumers. Companies need to adopt new practices and new ways of thinking, so they are looking at collaboration across supply chains to become more sustainable, efficient and economical. Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice looks at behavioural and commercial collaborative business principles and their application by means of case studies which showcase collaboration success across the private, public and 3rd sectors.

Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice covers different perspectives: the client looking down the supply chain, the suppliers looking up the supply chain and the inter-dependencies of organizations horizontally across the supply chain. The book explores operational and project-type environments in different industry sectors, which will help you think about your supply chain differently and optimize your processes to achieve supply chain excellence. Online supporting resources include a bonus chapter and a roadmap on negotiations.

Author Information

Norman McLennan is a cross-industry leader in the area of supply chain management and business improvement. He is a visiting professor with the Robert Gordon University, Aberdeen. His professional industry experience spans over 30 years split between the oil and gas/energy, engineering and traditional construction sectors working in the UK, Europe and internationally with extensive supply chain management and commercial project management experience. The author is regularly invited to speak at related industry and professional bodies' events and conferences.

Table of Contents

1 Knowledge Architecture Around Collaboration

1 Introduction - the rationale for collaborative business practices across supply chains and why collaboration can be the jewel in the crown

2 Collaborative arrangements - different supply chain perspectives, drivers and interdependencies

3 Raising the game - ISO 44001 - the evolution and emergence of a new global standard for collaborative working

4 The importance of stakeholder engagement in harnessing the benefits of collaborative working practices

5 Pan industry supply chain collaborationan exemplar of solutions developed by the industry for the industry

6 Commercial risk and pricing considerations associated with collaborative versus traditional contracting arrangements

2 Case Studies Of Exemplar Historical Collaborative Practice

7 The team marine story - putting logic back into logistics

8 Captain - the impossible dream

9 Building supply chain functional excellence through collaboration with internal partners

10 Envoi - value creation through collaborative outsourcing of acquisition and divestmest (A&D) in upstream exploration and production (E&P) sector

3 Case Studies Of Exemplar Collaborative Practice In Play Or Evolving

11 Humanitarian relief - food for the hungry (daring to be different through collaborative innovation)

12 The oil and gas technology centre (OGTC)

13 All together now: improvements in collaboration in the pharmaceutical & biomedical life science sectors

14 The emergence of digital procurement in the IT sector

Referencing

Further reading

Index

Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation

A Practical Guide to Disruptive Technologies and New Business Models

This book

• Offers a detailed and up-to-date overview of all the major trends transforming the supply chain and logistics industry, including blockchain, automation and AI

• Presents a vision of how supply chains will develop in the coming years and how businesses can remain resilient to these innovations

• New to this edition: in depth discussions of urban logistics, smart warehousing, nearsourcing/re-shoring, and the role of new technologies in mitigating climate change

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides and sample case studies

• Investigates how disruptive technologies will transform supply chain dynamics in vertical industries such as automotive and fashion

Description

Global disruption, new technologies and changing consumer habits are causing turmoil in the supply chain industry. This book shows businesses how to remain resilient in this dynamic new environment.

The supply chain crisis of 2021 exposed the necessity of a sustainable supply chain. The Fourth Industrial Revolution has transformed our society and economy. The logistics and supply chain industry continues to be innovated by automation, blockchain and sustainability. Amid all this volatility, it is vital for businesses to not only protect their operations from disruption, but to rise to the challenge that these innovations pose to become game-changers in their sectors.

Now in its second edition, Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation provides vital insight into the major trends transforming the supply chain and logistics industry. Featuring a new section on the role of technologies in reducing carbon emissions, case studies from companies such as Amazon, Alibaba, Maersk, UPS and DHL, as well as a full update of all existing content on crowd sourcing and shipping, on-demand delivery, autonomous vehicles and more, Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation is the essential guide to thriving in a rapidly developing logistics landscape. Online supporting resources include PowerPoints and sample case studies.

Author Information

John Manners-Bell is Founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence Ltd. He is an Honorary Visiting Professor, London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University. He was formerly Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council of the World Economic Forum, speaking and moderating at the annual Davos meeting. In 2021 he founded the Foundation for Future Supply Chain. He has spoken at conferences in Asia, USA, Africa, Latin America, Middle East and Europe. He is based in Bath.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398607484

Ebook: 9781398607491 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

The impact of innovation and disruption on the supply chain

The Fourth Industrial Revolution and the anatomy of innovation

Breaking the paradigm: the rise of the disruptors

3 Lessons from the past: what present day disruptors can learn from the containerization of the shipping industry

4 Sector Case Study: disruption in the express parcels market

2 Transforming supply chain models

5 Innovation in logistics business models

6 The disruptive power of e-retailing

7 Case Studies: The ultimate disruptors: Amazon and Alibaba

3 New technology development and adoption

8 The Internet of Things, ‘Big Data’ and artificial intelligence

9 Control towers and supply chain visibility

10 3D printing: a review of its implications for the supply chain and logistics industry

11 Blockchain in supply chains

Autonomous vehicles and delivery robots

Sustainability

The role of new technologies in mitigating climate change

A guide to future energy use

Designing smart, circular supply chains

5 The Future for the Logistics Industry

16 The Future of Smart Warehousing: The disruptive potential of robots and automation

17 Digital road freight marketplaces

18 The digitalization of international freight forwarding

19 Disrupting trade finance: blockchain, banks and freight forwarders

20 Conclusion: Future scenarios for the supply chain and logistics industry

The Lean Supply Chain

Managing the Challenge at Tesco

This book

• Reviews how Tesco has tackled all the recent challenges by revitalizing itself under Dave Lewis and facing down threats from discounters and Amazon

• New to this edition: Chapters on rebuilding customer trust and Tesco's Corporate Social Responsibility agenda

• Uses real examples and academic research to explain the benefits of a Lean supply chain

• Examines the key principles behind Tesco's success: customer loyalty, simplicity of operations and Lean thinking

• Winner of the prestigious Prix des Assocation 2016, in Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain

Description

WINNER: Les Plumes des Achats 2016 - Prix des Associations (1st edition)

Over the last two decades Tesco has emerged as a dominant player in the UK market and a leading global retailer. The Lean Supply Chain explores how Tesco, over the last 20 years or so, has built its business around supply chain excellence. As a mega-retailer, Tesco has learnt to create a balanced supply chain system, supporting suppliers' needs as well as customers' requirements. This perspective, and an ambition to act sustainably, has underpinned a rebuilding of trust in the Tesco brand and a resurgence in commercial fortunes.

This fully updated edition of The Lean Supply Chain contains new chapters on Tesco's current strategy, rebuilding brand trust and its CSR agenda. It charts the principles of lean thinking, customer loyalty and simplicity which were used by Tesco to frame its supply chain strategy and draws upon the authors' deep knowledge of how the retailer has dealt with challenges and market changes to provide lessons for other businesses, large or small, who wish to place how they manage their supply chains at the heart of their competitive strategy.

Author Information

Barry Evans has held roles at Tesco including Lean Process Manager in Supply Chain Development. He was part of the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate until his retirement.

Robert Mason is Professor of Logistics and Programme Director, MSc Sustainable Supply Chain Management, at Cardiff Business School. He has led numerous business research projects, including working with Tesco as a partner.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/12/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749482060

Ebook: 9780749482077 Pages: 336

Format (mm): 234x159

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Tesco past and present

2 Tesco and strategy – Managing the what, why and how!

3 Customer insight – To drive the Tesco supply chain

4 Lean and the Tesco supply chain –‘Mastering the supply chain’

5 Tesco and their CSR agenda

6 Rebuilding trust

7 Tesco and continuous improvement –Debunking seven myths of conventional business thinking

8 Current challenges – Aligning corporate and supply chain strategies to a changing macro environment

9 Conclusions

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics

Understanding the Challenges of Production, Operation and Sustainability in the Food Industry

This book

• Provides the latest research on trends, challenges and technologies actively shaping food supply chains, such as veganism, supply shortages and blockchain

• Covers the fundamentals of food supply chain management including how food is produced, retailed and regulated

• Offers international case studies from leading companies such as Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks to show theory in practice

• New to this edition: topics including food innovation, emerging trends, such as data analytics within the food supply chain, postBrexit challenges to food supply chains and veganism, as well as online resources

• Online resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Description

First edition WINNER: ACA-Bruel 2015 - Prix des Associations

Food supply chains are integral in ensuring that food makes it from the farm to the table. Understanding how these operate has never been more important.

The new edition of Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics is the guide to all aspects of food supply chains. This book examines food production, operational challenges and the future challenges of the industry and sustainability. The emergence of new technologies, which are key in increasing the efficiency of processes, such as food apps, big data and blockchain, are discussed. As are wider trends including veganism and local sourcing.

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics embeds learning using case studies from leading companies such as Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks. In addition, case studies from sustainable businesses such as Omnom Chocolate and ReFood also feature. The book is structured to provide readers with an understanding of the basics of food supply chain management and logistics before expanding the scope to cover more of a range of topics. Online resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

Author Information

Samir Dani is Professor of Operations Management and Deputy Director of Keele Business School at Keele University, UK. He engages widely with industry and has research interests in supply chain risks, sustainability in supply chains, and the use of technology and business models. He works with the food sector on projects related to food supply risks, food sustainability, and food ecosystems. He has published widely and has presented his research to both academic and practitioner audiences.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781398600126

Ebook: 9781398600133 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

Introduction to food supply chains

Food production

Food production

Food manufacturing

Operational challenges

Food retailing

Food logistics

Challenges in international food supply chains

Collaboration and relationships

Food sourcing and procurement

Risk management

Technology trends in food supply chains

Sustainability and future challenges

Food regulation, safety and quality

Food innovation

Sustainability challenges in food supply chains

Food sector and economic regeneration

Food security and future challenges

Global Supply Chain Ecosystems

Strategies for Competitive Advantage in a Complex, Connected World

This book

• Gives invaluable advice on how to address the volatility and vulnerability of global inter-connected networks and build resilient, reliable and effective supply chains that drive competitive advantage

• Provides practical examples, strategies and recommendations that you can implement immediately, improving short-term performance as you prepare for longer-term issues

• Features real-life case-studies taken directly from the author's industry projects and extensive experience

• Presents a multi-dimensional geographic view, including opportunities and challenges in developing markets, multi-modal options of the New Silk Route, the diversity within Asia and developments in emerging Africa

Description

Twenty-first-century supply chains have evolved into world-wide inter-connected supplyand-demand networks comprising vastly more complex operations, with profound interdependencies and exposure to greater volatility in our uncertain world.

The linear concept of a chain is therefore no longer adequate to describe these complex international networks of suppliers, stakeholders, partners, regulators and customers that are involved in ensuring the efficient and effective movement of products, services, information and funds around the world - we are firmly in the era of Global Supply Chain Ecosystems.

Exploring the latest market trends and industry developments across emerging, developing and developed markets, in Global Supply Chain Ecosystems industry leader Mark Millar presents detailed and practical insights that will help you capitalise on market opportunities, overcome supply chain challenges and make better informed business decisions.

In addition to highlighting key supply chain shifts such as the move beyond globalisation back towards regionalisation, this ground-breaking new publication explores several critical aspects of global supply chain ecosystems - including visibility, resilience, sustainability and collaboration.

Author Information

Mark Millar is an internationally known industry expert who leverages over 30 years of global business experience to deliver practical knowledge and educated insights that help companies navigate the complex landscapes in Asia, develop new business opportunities, improve the efficiency of their supply chain ecosystems and make better informed business decisions.

Acknowledged as an engaging and energetic presenter, the author has completed over 450 speaking engagements at corporate events, client functions and industry conferences across 26 countries. A Visiting Lecturer at Hong Kong Polytechnic University, the author is recognised in the 'China Supply Chain Top 20', as one of 'Asia's Top 50 Influencers in Supply Chain and Logistics' and in the 2017 USA listing of 'Top Pros-to-Know in Supply Chain'.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2015

Price: £46.99

Paperback: 9780749471583

Ebook: 9780749471590

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 232x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 Global supply chain ecosystems

Supply chain visibility

Sustainability and green supply chains

Risk and supply chain resilience

Free trade for all – navigating the FTA landscape

The Asian Era

The New Silk Road connecting Europe and Asia

Integrated logistics hubs

Human capital – the talent pool

Omni-channel supply chains

Africa – is it the next Asia?

Supply chain innovation

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain

Supply Chain Risk Management

How to Design and Manage Resilient Supply Chains

This book

• The first edition, Supply Chain Risk Management, won the ACA Bruel Special Mention Prize in Paris for its contribution to the purchasing and supply chain industry

• Explains key areas of supply chain risk management, such as cargo crime, climate change and cyber-crime

• Provides case studies, such as Dell's response to climate changes, the Port of Antwerp cyber breach and the Yemen Air Cargo Plot, to embed learning using applicable examples

• New to this edition: a new chapter on 'The threat of supply chain cyber crime', additional case studies, the latest thinking on political risk as well as updates throughout

• Online resources: lecture slides and example test questions

Description

From political uncertainty to trade disrupts and cyber threats, the risk environment is continuously evolving, and new challenges frequently arise demanding immediate attention to avoid disruption to supply chains.

Supply Chain Risk Management is the guide to recognizing, reviewing and reacting to these risks to ensure continued operations and optimal service. This book is a practical learning tool which offers a comprehensive framework to understanding risk and how to engineer resilience into the supply chain.

The third edition of Supply Chain Risk Management details how to approach various threats, including black swan events, natural disasters, climate change, cargo crime and piracy, and terrorism and security. Using case studies and recent, topical examples, this book demonstrates how to successfully manage these risks and apply learnings in practice. Objectives, summaries and key point checklists in each chapter also help the reader grasp these key concepts and understand how to keep supply chains resilient. Online resources include lecture slides and example test questions.

Author Information

John Manners-Bell is the CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is also Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789666373

Ebook: 9781789666380 Pages: 368

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 A framework for understanding risk

Engineering supply chain resilience

Industry sector resilience to supply chain threats

4 Natural disasters and pandemics

Climate change and emissions policy

Economic risks to the supply chain

Societal risks to supply chains

Corruption in the logistics industry

Cargo crime and piracy

10 The threat of supply chain cyber crime

Political risks in supply chains

Illicit supply chains

13 Terrorism and security

Blockchain and the Supply Chain

Concepts, Strategies and Practical Applications

This book

• Provides the latest academic research on blockchain supported by actionable frameworks and practical insights from realworld application

• Outlines how blockchain and other technologies can be utilized in supply chain management to improve tracking, metrics and performance

• New to this edition: the latest technological developments relating to supply chain integration including Enterprise Blockchain, Ethereum and Hyperledger, the impact of COVID-19, the future of blockchain and potential developments

• Online resources: Lecture slides and example assignments and quizzes

• Examines case studies of successful implementation of blockchain and supply chain automation, and examples from IBM, Maersk-Line, ABN-AMRO

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9781398605213

Ebook: 9781398605220

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 232x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 Evolution of supply chain - How we got here

2 Supply chains in 2021 – Costly, fragile, and increasingly complex

3 Basics of blockchain

4 Internet of things, data analytics and other information technologies

5 Blockchain strategy – The why, what and how of blockchain

6 What supply chain management processes and metrics will be affected by blockchain?

7 Blockchain projects in practice – Case study

8 Blockchain use cases in supply chain

9 Economic impact and future outlook

Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management

A Toolkit for Practical Implementation

This book

• Demystifies blockchain technology and its intrinsic relationship to supply chain management.

• Provides multiple case studies of how a variety of businesses are using blockchain in the supply chain, including companies such as Walmart, Coca-Cola and Microsoft

• Offers practical tips, frameworks, and tools so readers can assess the business case for using blockchain and implement it within their supply chain

• Includes an invaluable benchmark survey on the state of play of blockchain in supply chain management.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749498269

Ebook: 9780749498252

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents

1 Understanding blockchain technology

2 Using blockchain as a new database

3 Common blockchain features

4 How to adopt blockchain and bridge the gaps

5 Supply chain operations and blockchain

6 Blockchain as a supplier of a stable and secure supply chain system

7 The implications of traceability across the supply chain

8 Blockchain technology and advantages for marketing products and services

9 What is the business case for embracing blockchain?

Description

Blockchain provides a secure ledger of transactions, programmable smart contracts, and real-time trustworthy visibility and insight into the supply chain process.

For all the promises it offers to supply chain professionals, however, there's very little guidance available on how organizations should begin evaluating and using it. Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management provides that much needed step by step guidance.

Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management is a very practical book of tools, frameworks and case studies. It will help students and supply chain managers to evaluate the value proposition blockchain brings. It will then guide them through essential processes for making informed, practical, timely, and business-savvy decisions for using blockchain as an effective supply chain tool. It includes a valuable benchmark survey of the state of play in blockchain in supply chain management, including organisations such as Tyson Foods, IBM and Coca Cola, as well as downloadable frameworks and tools.

Author Information

Remko van Hoek, is Professor of Supply Chain Management in the Walton College of Business at the University of Arkansas. Formerly Chief Procurement Officer for the Walt Disney Company, he has held senior supply chain executive roles in the US and Europe at several companies, including Nike and PwC. He also is the Chair of the Board of Directors of the Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals (CSCMP).

Brian Fugate is the Oren Harris Chair in Transportation, Chair of the Department of Supply Chain Management at the University of Arkansas, and MIT Fulbright Senior Research Scholar.

Marat Davletshin was formerly an Operations Manager with Amazon and is currently at the University of Arkansas.

Matthew A. Waller is the Dean of the Sam M. Walton College of Business at the University of Arkansas, where he also serves as the Sam M. Walton Leadership Chair and a Professor of Supply Chain Management.

Humanitarian Logistics

Meeting the Challenge of Preparing for and Responding to Disasters and Complex Emergencies

This book

• Discusses the logistics of a humanitarian response to an uncertain, rapid onset event

• Shows how to establish an agile supply chain that brings aid into confused and rapidly developing environments

• Offers topical focus by assessing issues of contemporary relevance, including the COVID-19 vaccine, migrant crises and sustainability

• New to this edition: contains new chapters on cash-based HL systems, providing logistics services for humanitarian relief and helping the humanitarian supply chain become more sustainable

• Features international perspectives from a range of expert contributors from practice and academia

Description

In rapidly developing emergencies, it is vital for aid agencies to understand how to establish an agile supply chain that resists the chaos of a crisis and caters to unknown needs.

In recent years, a number of global crises have highlighted the critical role that logistics plays in humanitarian response. From the distribution of the COVID-19 vaccine, to the providing of relief to victims of natural disasters, to the bringing of resources to a growing number of migrant crises, there is a vital need to understand how to conduct operations in confused and swiftly changing environments. This multi-contributed title contains chapters from a wide range of academics and practitioners who have worked in these situations, and offers cutting edge research into how these complex problems can be solved.

Now in its 4th edition, Humanitarian Logistics is fully updated and contains new chapters on the challenge of obtaining scarce resources in the aftermath of a disaster, sustainability in a HL context, the logistics of the COVID-19 vaccine, the challenges of procurement in HL, a study of the humanitarian service performance system, cash-based HL systems and the interaction of blockchain and HL. Tightly organized by highly qualified editors, this book is essential reading for anyone who needs to understand how to effectively manage supply networks during a rapidly developing emergency.

Author Information

Professor Peter Tatham is a member of the Editorial Boards of the Journal of Humanitarian Logistics and Supply Chain Management, and the International Journal of Physical Logistics and Supply Chain Management. He was Professor of Humanitarian Logistics at Griffith University, Australia, and he remains a leading international researcher in the field of humanitarian logistics.

Professor Graham Heaslip is Professor of Logistics Engineering and Head of School of Engineering at Atlantic Technological University, Galway, Ireland. He is a board member of the Humanitarian Logistics Institute (HUMLOG) based at Hanken School of Economics, Helsinki, Finland and is a member of the Editorial Boards of the Journal of Humanitarian Logistics and Supply Chain Management, and the International Journal of Physical Logistics and Supply Chain Management. His work in the field of logistics and supply chain management has gained international recognition, including the Emerald Literati Network Awards for Excellence.

Edition: 4

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £54.99

Paperback: 9781398607149

Ebook: 9781398607156 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents

Introduction [Graham Heaslip and Peter Tatham]

1 Impacts of funding systems on humanitarian operations [Tina Wakolbinger and Fuminor Toyasaki]

2 Supplier relationships in humanitarian operations [Jihee Kim, Stephen Pettit and Anthony Beresford]

3 Providing Logistics Services for Humanitarian Relief [Diego Vega and Christine Roussat]

4 Risky Business Revisited: Disasters within disasters [Paul Larson]

5 The journey from a patchy to a comprehensive supply chain in UNHCR (2005-2015) [Svein Håpnes]

6 Humanitarian supply chain service performance [Ruth Banomyong, Puthipong Julagasigorn, Paitoon Varadejsatitwong and Thomas E. Fernandez]

7 Network design for pre-positioning emergency relief items [Gerard de Villiers]

8 Competing for Scarce Resources during Emergencies: A System Dynamics Perspective [Paulo Gonçalves]

9 Preparing for cash and voucher assistance: Developing capabilities and building capacities [Russell Harpring]

10 Pandemic response and humanitarian logistics [Gyöngyi Kovács, Tina Comes and Ioanna Falagara Sigala]

11 Helping People and Planet – Making the Humanitarian Supply Chain more Sustainable [Maria Besiou, Sarah Joseph, Sophie t’Serstevens and Jonas Stumpf]

12 What next for Humanitarian Logistics? [George Fenton and Tikhwi Jane Muyundo]

13 The way forward: Current trends in humanitarian logistics [Gyöngyi Kovács]

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians

Tools for Practice

This book

• Offers vital insights on supply chain management from key practitioners and academics in the humanitarian field.

• Provides highly practical cases and examples, written by practitioners from international companies and associations.

• Shows how to integrate collaboration and coordination into working practices, one of the current biggest challenges in the humanitarian community.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2016

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749474683

Ebook: 9780749474690 Pages: 416

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain

Description

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians provides an in-depth insight into the management of supply chains in the context of humanitarian logistics. This accessible and practical book considers humanitarian logistics from a strategic and operational perspective.

The overarching theme is collaboration and coordination, one of the biggest challenges in the humanitarian community. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians takes a problem-based learning approach, featuring real cases and examples from leading organizations including Oxfam, Unicef, and The Red Cross.

Each chapter is self-standing, relating the content in each chapter to the supply chain as a whole. This enables the reader to easily dip into different sections. At the end of each chapter, there is a case study written by a leading practitioner currently working in the humanitarian field.

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians fills a much needed gap in the market and is essential reading for humanitarians worldwide.

Author Information

Dr Ira Haavisto is the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She teaches Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics in Finland.

Professor Karen Spens is the Dean of Education at Hanken School of Economics, and a professor in Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry.

Dr Gyöngyi Kovács is the Erkko Professor in Humanitarian Logistics at the Hanken School of Economics, and the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She also lectures in supply chain management and corporate geography. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry.

Operations and Supply Chain Management

Mastering the Circular Economy

A Practical Approach to the Circular Business Model Transformation

This book

• Gain a deeper understanding of the circular economy with a mix of theory and practice to encourage experiential learning

• Explores how different roles in supply chain management, purchasing, finance and sales must collaborate to create the right circular strategy for the business

• Examines the wider societal context of the circular economy and its applications to an individual company, focusing on business models, profitability and transformation

• Includes reflections, exercises and examples to aid understanding of the challenges, opportunities and practical implications of transforming to a circular business model

• Online resources: free introductory access to the online business simulation game The Blue Connection, supporting templates, videos and example course designs

Description

Global consumption of raw materials currently goes beyond the earth's regenerative capacity, but the circular economy offers a more sustainable model which also provides new business opportunities.

Mastering the Circular Economy is an introduction to circularity from a business and value chain management perspective. With many reflections and exercises throughout, the book draws a direct link between relevant recent theory and practice and offers students and practitioners a deeper understanding of the topic. It looks at both the macro and micro context of the circular economy, from the government and societal view to the impact of new business models in an individual company.

Starting from the corporate imperative of moving from linear to circular business models, Mastering the Circular Economy covers the associated opportunities and challenges for organizations, from regulation and risk to value chain collaboration, reverse logistics and product quality. Part two of the book helps students to pull together everything they've learned and see how the concepts play out in the real world by guiding them through application in the online business simulation game The Blue Connection (free basic access is included with the book). Readers are continuously asked to reflect on the choices they would make in different roles to demonstrate a full understanding of the strategic and operational implications of the circular economy.

Author Information

Ed Weenk is Senior Lecturer of Global Supply Chain Management at Maastricht School of Management and Senior Associate Professor at EADA Business School Barcelona. As a freelance trainer and consultant he also teaches at many other business schools around the world. He is based in Maastricht, the Netherlands.

Rozanne Henzen is a researcher and circular economy expert within the Sustainable Transformation Lab (STL) of Antwerp Management School, based in Antwerp, Belgium. She is currently recognized as one of the Sustainable Young 100 of 2020 in the Netherlands.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398602748

Ebook: 9781398602762

Pages: 376 Format (mm): 242x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

1 Exploring circularity

1 Introduction to circularity

2 Circularity – exploring the company perspective

3 Circularity – exploring the leadership perspective

4 Circularity – exploring the perspective beyond the company frontier

5 The corporate circular imperative

2 Mastering circularity

6 Knowledge in action – The Blue Connection

7 Circularity – mastering the company perspective

8 Circularity – mastering the leadership perspective

9 Circularity – mastering the perspective beyond the company frontier

10 The corporate circular imperative (2)

3 Imagining the transformation from linear to circular

11 The transformation from linear to circular

12 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective of the company

13 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective of leadership

14 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective beyond the company frontier

15 Conclusion

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management

Principles and Practices for Sustainable Operations and Management

This book

• Examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management including transport, warehousing and operations

• Provides a comprehensive overview of sustainability science, as well as an understanding of sustainability as it relates to supply chain

• Offers topical case studies based on extensive research by the experts in the field designed to be used in teaching

• New to this edition: Updated with coverage of the latest research and data including trends in logistics and supply chain management and new cases

• Online resources: instructor manuals and compiled lists of tables and figures

Description

Our daily lives are permeated by the activities of logistics and supply chain, from food and clothing to doorstep deliveries. As these processes have the ability to significantly impact the natural environment, it has never been so important to develop and implement sustainable principles and practices.

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is an essential textbook for undergraduate and postgraduate students for understanding sustainability as it pertains to logistics operations. This book covers the direct environmental impacts of logistics and supply chain processes, including emissions and waste, as well as how wider changes such as globalization need to be given similar considerations. Presenting different pathways to guide readers, case studies and supported by extensive research, this book provides all the support needed to understand and implement a sustainable approach.

Now in its third edition, Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is fully updated with the latest research and data including trends in logistics and supply chain management and new cases. Online resources include instructor manuals and complied lists of figures and tables.

Author Information

Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Supply Chain Management & Social Responsibility, Hanken School of Economics, Helsinki, Finland and Bua Luang ASEAN Chair Professor, Thammasat University, Bangkok, Thailand. He has over 175 publications and participates in editorial boards for numerous journals.

Professor Chee Yew Wong is Chair of Supply Chain Management at Leeds University Business School, UK. He has extensive consultancy experience in operations, purchasing, production, inventory and distribution management.

Dr Alexander Trautrims is a Lecturer in Supply Chain and Operations Management at Nottingham University Business School, UK. His research focuses on sourcing, compliance and supply issues.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/11/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398604438

Ebook: 9781398604445 Pages: 304

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Logistics and supply chain management

Science of sustainability

Freight transport

Sustainable warehousing

Product design, cleaner production and packaging

Sustainable purchasing and procurement

Reverse logistics and recycling

Risk, resilience and corporate social responsibility

9 Sustainable logistics and supply chain management strategy

A Circular Economy Handbook

How to Build a More Resilient, Competitive and Sustainable Business

This book

• Provides guidance on how to move away from the 'take, make, dispose' approach towards a circular economy model that regenerates goods into new products

• Explains how to create value instead of waste at every stage in the supply cycle, with real examples and case studies covering ecodesign, food waste apps, industrial manufacturing and key legislation changes affecting circular economies

• New to this edition: circular economy framework 2.0, ecodesign, food & agriculture, recycled fabrics in fashion logistics, new chapter on packaging and examples from Africa, India and other developing countries

• Online resources: lecture slides with figures and tables from every chapter

Description

WINNER: 2018 Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain - The Committee Special Prize

As we learn more about the climate and biodiversity crisis, it is clear that how we make and consume things is a major part of the problem. Extraction and processing of materials, fuels and food makes up about half of global greenhouse gas emissions and over 90% of biodiversity loss and water stress. Many modern businesses deplete resources, destroy ecosystems and dump waste and pollution at every stage - harming human health along the way.

Governments, businesses and think-tanks see the circular economy as the way forward. Now in its second edition, A Circular Economy Handbook is a guided tour through the concepts and the practicalities. A unique framework systematically explores the range of circular interventions, including product and supply chain design, material choice and supporting business models.

How does it really work for business? What circular approaches are emerging in food, fashion, consumer technology, packaging and other sectors? How do these reduce risk, improve resilience and build profitable, future-fit organizations? With over 300 real examples from around the world, this is a must-read for businesses, students and policymakers. This new edition has been extensively updated to include the latest trends, thinking, research and solutions, with a new chapter on packaging and 30 new company snapshots.

Author Information

Catherine Weetman helps entrepreneurs and business leaders to rethink their businesses for a circular, regenerative and fair economy. A trained industrial engineer, she is fascinated by the 'sweet spot' where strategy, supply chain and sustainability come together. She hosts the Circular Economy Podcast and is an international speaker, coach and advisor.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781789665314

Ebook: 9781789665321

Pages: 496

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction

An overview of the circular economy

The circular economy

The design and supply chain

Circular business models

Enablers and accelerators

How are businesses adopting circular economy models?

Drivers for change

Food and agriculture

Fashion and textiles

Consumer electricals and electronics

Industrial manufacturing

Packaging and plastics

What does this mean for supply chains?

Supply chain strategy and planning

Supply chain operations: Sourcing and procurement, manufacturing, distribution and reverse logistics

Implementation

Making the business case and starting the journey

Glossary

Index

Green Logistics

Improving the Environmental Sustainability of Logistics

This book

• Examines the most pressing issues and current trends in green logistics

• Analyses the environmental consequences of logistics and how to deal with them

• Examines ways of reducing these externalities and achieving a more sustainable balance between economic, environmental and social objectives

• Provides insightful international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice

• Online resources: Graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers

Edition: 3

Date: 03/02/2015

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749471859

Ebook: 9780749471866

Pages: 448 Format (mm): 234x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Global Waste Management

Models for Tackling the International Waste Crisis

This book

• Looks at the international trade of waste between countries, where hazardous and non-hazardous wastes are exported from developed to developing countries

• Features theory and research supported by fascinating case studies looking at transboundary waste transfer, covering essential topics such as the Chinese ban on waste imports and the huge issue of plastic waste

• Includes governance and management models and strategies for dealing with the waste crisis

• Presents vital data and statistics on the waste crisis, examines possible causes and introduces different discourses and strategies

• Performs a comparative analysis between the current main laws that regulate waste at international, European and Brazilian levels

Description

WINNER: 2020 International Solid Waste Association Publication Award

Among other factors, rapid global population growth, our development model and patterns of production and consumption have increased waste generation worldwide to unsustainable rates. This rise has led to crises in many countries where waste management practices are no longer sound. Global Waste Management outlines the emerging global waste crisis considering the perspectives of developed and developing countries around the world and the international relationships between them. This book provides an ecological viewpoint as well as studying these problems from a legal and justice standpoint.

Global Waste Management contextualises the problems faced when dealing with waste including the causes and origins. Focus is given to cross border waste transfer, as an ongoing and controversial practice, making waste management a global matter. This book scrutinizes existing international, European and Brazilian regulation on waste to highlight the complexity of the subject and the weaknesses of the law. Using a critical and socioecological approach, the book proposes an original model of governance to support a new system of global waste management that takes into account ecological sustainability and social justice to overcome the waste crisis. To create these models, a theoretical framework on socio-ecological justice is developed and combined with different discourses and theories described throughout the book. This is the essential guide to understanding the global waste crisis and the future of waste management.

Author Information

Dr. Kamila Pope is an environmental lawyer and researcher. She is a member of the World Commission on Environmental Law (WCEL/IUCN), the Experts Committee at Halte à l'Obsolescence Programmée (HOP), and Harmony with Nature Knowledge Network

Experts (HwN/UN). She has won two international awards for research on sustainability and her PhD thesis was elected the best Brazilian legal thesis of 2019, a prize awarded by the Ministry of Education and Research of Brazil.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789660777

Ebook: 9781789660784

Pages: 416

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The socio-ecological problem of waste

1 The waste crisis – origins and causes

Waste as a problem of justice

3 Models to overcome the waste crisis

2 A new waste management system for a sustainable and just future

Waste as a legal problem

5 Legal regulation of cross-border waste transfer

Global governance and the management of waste

Conclusion

References and further reading

Index

Understanding Planned Obsolescence

Unsustainability Through Production, Consumption and Waste Generation

This book

• Examines the ethical, social and economic causes and their negative consequences

• Clarifies how the sustainability ideal aligns with Economics and Law, and how manufacturers and supply chain practices can integrate it into their processes

• Outlines theoretical frameworks for tackling planned obsolescence

• Presents real-life case studies which give insights into production, consumption patterns and planned obsolescence

• Online resources: Chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2017

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749478056

Ebook: 9780749478063

Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Description

Planned obsolescence is a strategy used to make products obsolete, leading to their premature replacement. The result is the over-exploitation of natural resources, increased waste and detrimental social impacts. It is a known practice in consumer electronics and affects other industries as they put profit before consequence.

A ground-breaking new book, Understanding Planned Obsolescence looks at the causes, cost and impact of planned obsolescence. It considers the legal and economic frameworks to overcome the practice and how to mitigate its effects. It also unearths new patterns of production and consumption highlighting more sustainable development models. Including a wide range of case studies from Europe, USA and South America, Understanding Planned Obsolescence is a vital step forward for the future of business and academia alike. Online resources now available include chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides.

Author Information

Kamila Pope is an Environmental Law and Bio-law lecturer, researcher and lawyer. She has published a plethora of articles, chapters and papers covering Environmental Law, Sustainability, Planned Obsolescence and Waste Management. She holds a Master's in Law, Environment and Political Ecology and is studying a PhD in Law, Politics and Society.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Identifying the causes, consequences and history of planned obsolescence

1 Consumer society: A product of the growthist economy

2 Planned obsolescence as an instrument of the growthist economy and its socioenvironmental consequences

2 How to overcome planned obsolescence: from theory to practice

3 Sustainability in Economics and Law: The greening of sciences in the search for a new paradigm

4 The sustainability paradigm as the foundation to tackle planned obsolescence: New perspectives

5 Final considerations

Sustainability in Global Value Chains

Measures, Ethics and Best Practices for Responsible Businesses

This book

• Presents vital research from leading academics on sustainable supply chains, from the German Research Foundation - Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG) - the selfgoverning organization for science and research in Germany

• Provides examples of best practice in sustainable value chains from a cross-section of industries, such as agriculture, energy and retail

• Examines the impact of digitalization as an enabler for sustainable supply chains and a facilitator of high performance

• Focuses on increasing cost savings, profits and revenue

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789662627

Ebook: 9781789662634

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Sustainability

Description

Sustainability can create greater efficiency and cost savings in the supply chain. Supply chains, which are more complex and global than ever before, are full of both risks and opportunities. The risks range from inconsistent or poor quality, supply disruptions and health and safety concerns, to corruption. Businesses face pressure to adopt sustainable supply chain practices from various stakeholders and motivations typically come from one or more of four sources: customers, compliance, costs, competitive advantage.

Sustainability in Global Value Chains is the guide to understanding all aspects and approaches of sustainable supply chains using in-depth research from leading academics from sixteen different universities.

Sustainability in Global Value Chains focuses on how to make supply chains sustainable, with an emphasis on new technologies and digitization. The research featured covers topics such as KPIs in production and supply chains, the role of standards, blockchain technology and algebraic models. This comprehensive book presents real world issues, problems in implementing sustainability in the supply chain and examples of best practice.

Author Information

Michael Henke is Chair of Enterprise Logistics at TU Dortmund University, Director of Enterprise Logistics, IML Dortmund, Professor for Strategic Sourcing and Procurement at Louvian School of Management, Paris and Professor for Supply Chain Management at Lappeenranta University of Technology, Finland.

Holger Kohl is Director of Corporate Management at Fraunhofer IPK (Fraunhofer Institute for Design and Technology) and Head of Department in Sustainable Corporate Development at TU Berlin.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – About the book

2 The importance of supply chain management for sustainability in global value chains

3 Interdisciplinary research work in the field of SSCM

1 Ethical principles of sustainable value chain management

4 Start-ups as relevant supporters and initiators of sustainability attributes in global value chains of the future

5 Global value chain sustainability governance – Implications for management research and practice

2 Measuring sustainability in global value chains

6 Sustainability controlling in integrated value chains

7 Measuring diversity among competing supply-value chains

8 Sustainable buyer behaviour in value chains – Determinants and marketing implications

9 Tactical planning measures for sustainable and efficient international transportation networks

3 Actions to continuously improve sustainability in global value chains

10 Biomimetic principles for improved organizational information processing –Toward sustainable supply chains

11 (How) Can research in the field of sustainable supply chain management become more forward-looking and futureshaping?

12 Success factors of voluntary sustainable supply chain management sector initiatives

13 An institutional framework of urban logistics – Policy options and the role of the government

14 Index

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management

A Practical Guide to Reaching Net Zero Goals

New Title

This book

• Provides a practical roadmap for how organizations can incorporate climate change into their enterprise risk strategy, integrating existing and new risk management methodologies

• Covers best practice risk management tools and techniques and how they can be tailored for climate change such as use of the risk radar, bow tie analysis, stress and scenario testing, risk maturity models, and risk reporting dashboards

• Presents international, sector-agnostic approach supported by examples, case studies and interviews and insights from leading experts in risk management across different industries

• Explains the climate change risk taxonomy that is now widely and consistently used across world by regulatory and risk managers.

• Online resources: PowerPoint slides

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398608702

Ebook: 9781398608719

Pages: 336

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction - Climate change enterprise risk management in context

1 Climate change risk landscape and ERM maturity

2 Climate strategic positioning and risk appetite integration

3 Developing an effective climate governance framework

4 Climate change risk identification techniques including stakeholder mapping

5 Managing transition risks

6 Building climate resilience

7 Climate physical risks – data sources, uses and challenges

8 Designing an effective climate emerging risk management process

9 Climate emerging trends, issues and challenges

10 Climate stress and scenario testing

11 Climate risk integration into specific business processes

12 Financial reporting and climate disclosures

Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics

Case Study Collection

This book

• Contains in-depth international case studies written by leading academics, practitioners and consultants which deliver insights and perspectives on global sustainability trends

• Provides examples of sustainable practices and solutions introduced across different industries, such as food, manufacturing, transportation and construction, including Coca-Cola India, CargoPartners, Saica and Natvita and others

• Examines ways to reach sustainable business objectives through integration of innovative solutions and overcome considerable obstacles, with lessons learned from experts in industry and academia

• Explores innovative new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide readers to form future green and sustainable supply chain strategies

Description

Sustainability is an increasingly urgent and important factor in logistics and supply chain management, impacting the whole supply chain lifecycle from product design and development, to supplier management, packaging, transportation, warehousing and distribution.

The third volume of the Supply Chain Case Study Collection, the Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection contains real-life scenarios from leading companies who are pursuing a sustainability agenda. Cases cover sustainability and 'green' practices in a range of different industries, from food through to manufacturing and construction, and in a variety of organization sizes. They are written by leading international academics and feature cutting-edge research from countries including India, Vietnam, Brazil, China and the UK.

By exploring examples of waste reduction, supplier management, the circular economy and cross-industry collaboration, the Case Study Collection focuses on how organizations are currently trying to meet sustainability goals and achieve success in greening supply chains.

Author Information

Dr Ozlem Bak is a Senior Lecturer in Operations Management at Brunel Business School, based in London, UK. Her academic activities are underpinned by industrial and commercial background which included experience in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler, Chrysler and Hyundai. Her current research interests lie in supply chain management, particularly organisational transformation and e-business implementations in supply chains.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £160.00

Paperback: 9781789668216

Ebook: 9781789668223 Pages: 304

Format (mm): 240x160

Product Category: Reference Subject: Sustainability

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

The Road to Zero Emissions

The Future of Trucks, Transport and Automotive Industry Supply Chains

This book

• Examines the new technologies, artificial intelligence systems and applications needed to drive a sustainable trucking industry

• Explains how the acceleration of the adoption of zero emission transport will be linked to infrastructure investments, supported by case studies from companies such as Jaguar, Land Rover and Honda

• Presents the many other factors that will impact the survivability of Diesel as an energy source in the future, for the global manufacturers of Diesel cars and trucks

• Details new players in freight sustainability across four continents and examines future plans and models, which manufacturing companies are planning to role out by 2050

Description

The transport industry has an important role to play in addressing climate change and the environmental challenges facing governments, businesses and individuals.

Achieving net zero emissions by 2050 will require this sector, which is a large contributor of emissions, to innovate, adapt and drive positive change. New technologies including batteries and alternative fuels will all be significant, as will developing different approaches and outlooks.

The Road to Zero Emissions is the comprehensive guide for those in the transport industry to understanding what can and is being done to tackle climate change. Through examining established companies and new entrants in the automotive space, readers are provided with examples of the importance of infrastructure, business innovation and financing for the future. In addition to this, the role of governments in establishing policies, such as zeroemission zones, is also discussed. Progressing towards zero emissions requires immediate change and this book will start you on the journey.

Author Information

Dennis Evans has held senior positions in truck manufacturing companies around the world, most recently with a division of VW Commercial Vehicles. He has worked in the UK, Europe, USA, South America, Middle East and Africa, with all of the major vehicle manufacturers.

Des Evans is an honorary Professor within the Advanced Services Group at Aston University Business School. He was awarded an O.B.E. for services to the Motor Industry.

Alistair Williamson started as a technical engineer with Bedford Trucks and graduated through senior engineering roles at Scania UK and MAN AG, becoming Global Marketing Director for MAN AG based in Munich. He has operated his own successful Marketing consultancy for 14 years.

Edition: 1

Date: 10/09/2020

Price: £49.99

Paperback: 9781789665604

Ebook: 9781789665611

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The road to zero emissions

2 The fall of the diesel engine and the rise of the electric motor

3 Climate change action and the Paris Agreement

4 The climate change challenge

5 Infrastructure challenge and the role of government

6 ‘Shock waves’ in the global battery market

7 Global energy systems and the impact of electric vehicles

8 EV development and the world’s ‘top 10’ commercial vehicle manufacturers

9 ‘New kids on the block’ – new entrants into the EV market space

10 Alternative fuels to diesel and electricity for trucks and transportation

11 Business innovation in the automotive sector

12 Financing the future

13 Journey milestones

14 The journey continues – 2050 and beyond

Decarbonizing Logistics

Distributing Goods in a Low Carbon World

This book

• Provides original research conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg

• Presents vital insights into how different companies have tackled decarbonisation with a focus on transportation

• Includes a new decarbonisation framework within which external factors can be classified and systematically assessed by companies

• Explains the external factors likely to influence the carbon reduction in logistics, such as freight transport demand, truck fuel consumption and related CO2 emissions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2018

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749483807

Ebook: 9780749480486 Pages: 328

Format (mm): 236x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

1 Climate change: the nature and scale of the challenge

2 Developing a decarbonisation strategy for logistics

3 Reducing freight transport intensity

4 Shifting freight to lower carbon transport modes

5

Description

Logistics accounts for around 9-10% of global CO2 emissions and will be one of the hardest economic sectors to decarbonize. This is partly because the demand for freight transport is expected to rise sharply over the next few decades, but also because it relies very heavily on fossil fuel. Decarbonizing Logistics outlines the nature and extent of the challenge we face in trying to achieve deep reductions in greenhouse gas emissions from logistical activities. It makes a detailed assessment of the available options, including restructuring supply chains, shifting freight to lower carbon transport modes and transforming energy use in the logistics sector. The options are examined from technological and managerial standpoints for all the main freight transport modes.

Based on an up-to-date review of almost 600 publications and containing new analytical frameworks and research results, Decarbonizing Logistics is the first to provide a global, multi-disciplinary perspective on the subject. It is written by one of the foremost specialists in the field who has spent many years researching the links between logistics and climate change and been an adviser to governments, international organizations and companies on the topic.

Author Information

Alan McKinnon is Professor of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has been researching and teaching freight transport and logistics for almost forty years and has published extensively in journals and books. He was a member of the European Commission's High Level Group on Logistics, Chairman of the World Economic Forum's Logistics and Supply Chain Industry Council and a lead author of the transport chapter of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change's fifth assessment report. He has spent many years researching the links between logistics and climate change and been an adviser to governments, international organizations and companies on this topic.

Improving asset utilisation in logistics

6 Transforming energy use in road freight transport

7 Transforming energy use in maritime, air cargo and rail freight sectors

8 Decarbonising logistics at the national level: the case of the united kingdom

Decarbonizing Business

A Sustainable Roadmap to Net Zero

This book

• Explains how businesses can contribute to the carbon-neutral and carbon-free movements

• Provides insight into the ways corporate sustainability professionals can help their companies reduce their carbon footprint

• Offers insight into various business initiatives to join and processes business must integrate to tackle the climate crisis

• Includes stories from the leaders of the netzero movement at Google X, Engine No. 1, Holocene, Breakthrough Energy Ventures, AlgiKnit and Stanford Sustainable Finance

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398610835

Ebook: 9781398610880

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Making sense of your role as a sustainability officer

Designing a carbon-free brand

Decarbonizing your product

The financial side of net zero

Decarbonizing investments

Eliminating carbon from the supply chain

Decarbonizing transportation

Decarbonizing power

Decarbonizing electricity

Description

Discover the most impactful ways to decarbonize your industry through your business. This book offers readers a comprehensive roadmap for business leaders striving to set and achieve "net zero" goals.

Decarbonizing Business offers a sustainable path forward for companies working toward decarbonization. Written for business professionals working to advance climate goals across multiple aspects of a business, the book breaks down the process of decarbonization from the inside out.

In ten chapters, climate innovator, investor and operator Melissa Zhang explains everything from broaching the net-zero conversation with investors to the best ways to decarbonize a brand, product, fleet, investments and more. Readers will learn what those leading the net-zero movement are doing at their companies and how these methods can be applied to any business. Decarbonizing Business dives into what Audrey Zibelman at X is doing for the electric grid, how Anca Timofte at Holocene is reducing industrial emissions, what kinds of transportation policies politicians can enact to reduce the city's reliance on carbon, and the way conversations shift from the trade floor to the board rooms of companies including Exxon. The resulting book provides business professionals with a forward-thinking path to net zero, giving readers the critical insights they need to achieve a carbon-neutral status.

Author Information

Melissa Zhang is an experienced climate technology entrepreneur and investor based in New York City, NY. She has represented the Aspen Institute as a Future Climate Leader and On Deck as a Climate Tech Fellow. Zhan began her career managing the multi-billion dollar Low-Carbon Transition Readiness Fund and systematic hedge funds at BlackRock. She has also worked for the California Climate Risk Disclosure Advisory Group, MioTech and Tapestry at X, the Moonshot Factory.

10 How to dive into the world of public policy and become a voice for your company

11 Epilogue: Leading forward

Supply Chain Ethics

Using CSR and Sustainability to Create Competitive Advantage

This book

• Outlines suitable and safe conditions in which to manufacture products

• Clarifies issues on waste and what it does to the environment

• Depicts how to analyse the impact of the transportation of goods in terms of pollution

• Looks at ways road freight operators, warehouse companies, shipping lines and airlines can mitigate their impact on the environment

• Explores case studies including CEVA, ASOS, Apple, Intel, Exol Lubricants, ProLogis, Sports Direct, Unilever, Citylink, Deliveroo/Ubereats and Hewlett Packard

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2017

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749479459

Ebook: 9780749479466

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x160

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sustainability

Description

It is increasingly clear that traditional supply chains which focus on sourcing products from the lowest possible cost suppliers are failing to exploit their full potential. Supply Chain Ethics, through case studies, surveys and unique research, identifies and outlines best practice employed by global manufacturers, retailers and logistics companies. It examines the so-called 'triple advantage' that accrues to businesses when strategies that combine bottom line profits, sustainable environmental practices and positive societal impact are employed. Narrow supply chain strategies which focus on only one of these three factors will inevitably fail.

Supply Chain Ethics covers the following issues which affect senior supply chain, operations and manufacturing managers: 'triple advantage' best practice and how it can create value for global businesses; product design; sourcing and warehousing; transportation and recycling; environmental practices of logistics companies and suppliers; supply chain technologies. There is also an invaluable Ethical Supply Chains survey of top global companies.

Author Information

John Manners-Bell is Founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence Ltd, Bath, UK, which since 2002 has developed a market-leading position in the provision of market research to a range of blue chip customers and governmental organisations. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council of the World Economic Forum, attending meetings in the UAE, China and South Africa as well as speaking and moderating at the annual Davos meeting. He is regularly quoted in the trade and national press (FT, Bloomberg, Wall Street Journal, Economist) and has spoken at conferences worldwide.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 New Thinking and Business Models

1 Profit, People and Planet – The Triple Advantage

2 Supply Chains in the ‘Circular Economy’

3 The Role of Supply Chain Technologies

4 Sustainable Supply Chains Survey

2 Public Policy and Industry Response

5 Government Policy and Industry Response to Climate Change

6 Implementing a CSR Strategy

7 Sustainable Warehousing and Distribution

8 Sustainable Packaging Initiatives

9 Global or Local? The Ethical Debate

3 Ethical Issues in the Supply Chain

10 Societal and Environmental Supply Chain Responsibility

11 Ethics in the Supply Chain – Societal Impact

12 Ethical Supplier Relationships

13 Treatment of Workers in the Modern Logistics Sector

Sustainable Procurement

A Practical Guide to Corporate Social Responsibility in the Supply Chain

This book

• Introduces an actionable, step-by-step process for prioritising and implementing a sustainable procurement strategy

• Focuses on the social and environmental factors of procurement, including labour practices, the processes used and the waste created in goods and services bought

• Features guidance on implementing sustainability requirements with immediate suppliers and driving improvements elsewhere in the supply chain where there is no direct relationship

• Explains how to carry out a sustainability audit then develop objectives and a strategy based on the priorities and major impacts identified

• Highlights key methods of monitoring results, communicating to the organization and ensuring continued sustainability success in the future

Description

The business case for sustainability and the global imperative to act are now clear, but organizations still struggle with procurement and supply chains as some of the most difficult factors to improve.

Sustainable Procurement explains how procurement professionals can expand on existing tools and approaches to make sustainability a reality. It begins by exploring the current landscape and the need for new approaches before moving onto a step-by-step process for sustainable procurement and supply chain CSR, from reviewing goods and services bought to supply chain mapping and implementing new supplier requirements. Guidance is offered on factors such as specification, use of labour and processes, and how to drive improvements further up the supply chain where there is no direct contractual relationship.

Written by leading procurement expert and best-selling author, Jonathan O'Brien, this practical guide outlines how to carry out a sustainability audit to define objectives and develop a new strategy. It also explains how to monitor results, the governance required to ensure success and how to be ready for changes in the future. Drive positive change with this roadmap to sustainable procurement and responsible supply chains.

Author Information

Jonathan O'Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider, and is based in Plymouth, UK. With over 30 years of experience, he has helped global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals, Supplier Relationship Management and The Buyer's Toolkit, all published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2023

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9781398604681

Ebook: 9781398604698

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Sustainability

Table of Contents

1 Why the world needs CSR

2 Why do this – The business case for sustainability

3 Frameworks for corporate action

4 The sustainable procurement process

5 Sustainability audit

6 Defining the sustainable procurement objectives

7 Making what we buy sustainable

8 Driving sustainability in our suppliers

9 Driving sustainability back up the supply chain

10 Creating a blended sustainability strategy and plan

11 Making it a success

12 What the future holds

PR & communications

Strategy & planning

Essentials of Advertising

This book

• Takes a cross-disciplinary approach, explores the diverse ways advertising is interpreted by psychologists, sociologists, economists, historians, marketers, and media researchers - giving students the skills to respond sensitively to any advertising challenge

• Brings big picture, theoretical concepts down to earth, linking them to everyday practice with thought-provoking examples from international companies

• Builds awareness of the different ways advertising is interpreted across industries, enabling students to develop careers aligned with their abilities and interests, both client and agency side

• Includes in-depth coverage of ethics, encouraging students to think critically about advertising in different contexts, and respond appropriately when faced with ethically subjective situations throughout their careers

• Online resources: Lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, case studies, figures, and web-links to industry body research, magazines, relevant research, blogs, podcasts, videos and documentaries

Description

As a subject, advertising affects us all - it surrounds us every day. Yet there is a great deal of variety in the way advertising is interpreted, and practitioners and academics from different backgrounds and disciplines study advertising in vastly different ways. For example, psychologists try to understand what happens to our brains when we see adverts, while economists try to understand whether money spent on advertising is worth it. Essentials of Advertising is designed to help students navigate their way through the field of advertising. It will introduce readers to the key concepts of advertising as they have been developed not only by psychologists and economists, but also by sociologists, historians, marketers and media researchers - not to mention advertising practitioners themselves.

Meticulously researched, Essentials of Advertising will allow readers to understand not just what different research traditions say about advertising, but why they say it. This will help students develop key analytic skills to critically evaluate and exploit existing research on advertising, based on a greater understanding of where it comes from. This allows them to develop greater perception and awareness professionally, and acts as a springboard for students to jump into the wider area of advertising studies and to develop their careers according to their interests.

Online resources include lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, figures, and case studies for specific chapters, plus web links to industry body research and relevant further reading.

Author Information

Dr Robert Cluley is assistant professor at Nottingham University Business School, teaching in the fields of branding, advertising and marketing communications. He has contributed to a range of texts on branding and advertising, along with a plethora of research publications and edited collections.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2017

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749478391

Ebook: 9780749478407

Pages: 240 Format (mm): 238x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Advertising

Table of Contents

1 The Essentials of Advertising – What Are Adverts and Why Study Them?

2 Big Questions – Advertising, Communication, Rhetoric and Persuasion

3 Art or Science – What do Legendary Advertisers Think about Advertising?

4 Ad Work – Management and Organizational Perspectives on Advertising

5 Information and Value – The Economics of Advertising

6 The Hierarchy of Effects – The Psychology of Advertising

7 The Society of the Spectacle – The Sociology of Advertising

8 The Magic System – Cultural Studies of Advertising

9 The Medium is the Message – Media Studies and Advertising

10 The Distorted Mirror – Advertising and Ethics

11 Next Steps – The New Essentials of Advertising

Paid Attention

Innovative Advertising for a Digital World

This book

• Offers models for advertising innovation to gain commercial stability in an evolving media landscape along with innovative ideas to influence purchasing behavior

• Includes practical toolkits as well as realworld examples of advertising campaigns, including companies such as Google, Old Spice and Sony

• New to this edition: brand new chapters exploring advances in attention spans and new trends in online advertising, as well as new case studies on compelling brand ideas

• Online resources: additional toolkits focusing on brand behaviour and exercises on how to create case studies, and how to have ideas

Description

The advertising attention marketplace is a confusing and vast playing field where the rules have changed drastically over the last decade. Make yourself heard and win the attention of your target audience with the new edition of this ultimate guide.

Paid Attention delivers new and innovative insights into advertising ideas: what they are, why they are evolving and how to use them in day to day strategy to ensure commercial stability within a changing digital landscape. Packed with real-world examples of advertising campaigns such as Google, Sony and Old Spice, it provides a robust model for influencing human behaviour and toolkits that offer best practice on brand behaviour and effective communication.

This second edition includes two new chapters exploring the latest evidence about attention spans and trends in online advertising, as well as new case studies on compelling brand ideas. In a world where being a consumer is confusing, learn to take control of the situation and make yourself heard in today's crowded attention marketplace.

Author Information

Faris Yakob, Based in New York City, New York, is co-founder of Genius Steals LLC, an ideas and innovation consultancy and of The School of Stolen Genius, an online learning community for marketers and creative thinkers. He is former Chief Innovation Officer at MDC Partners, EVP & Chief Technology Strategist at McCann Erickson, plus Global Digital Strategy & Creative Director at Native Communications. Yakob is a prominent international speaker, guest lecturer for a number of universities and has written for publications including the Financial Times, Forbes, Advertising Age and Media Week.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398602502

Ebook: 9781398602519 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Advertising

Table of Contents

1 Paid attention

1 Introduction - Paid attention - How much is it worth?

2 Logocentrism - What’s in a name?

2 Attention deficit disorders

3 Uncovering hidden persuaders - Why all market research is wrong

4 Advertising works in mysterious waysModern theories of communication

5 Is all advertising spam? Communication planning in an on-demand world

6 The spaces between - The vanishing difference between content, media and advertising

3 Attention arts and sciences

7 Do things, tell people - How to behave in a world of infinite content

8 Recombinant culture - Talent imitates, genius steals

9 Combination tools - How to have ideas - A genius steals process

10 Advertising for advertising - Is the industry paying attention?

11 Integrative strategy and social brands - Be nice or leave!

12 Prospection - Planning for the future we want

4 2020 Foresight

13 Everything is PR

14 The quantity, quality, qualia and cost of attention

15 Epilogue - Talkin’ about your generation

Myths of Marketing

Banish the Misconceptions and Become a Great Marketer

This book

• Explores and debunks the most deeply entrenched myths about marketing, exposing them through academic research and examples

• Helps readers clarify and improve their own understanding of the marketing industry, allowing them to become more effective marketers

• Features fascinating examples and real world case studies from a diverse range of companies and sectors

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2020

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749483913

Ebook: 9780749483920

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: General Subject: Marketing Fundamentals

Table of Contents

1 Myth 1 - Marketing communications haven’t fundamentally changed

2 Myth 2 - Marketing is just communications

3 Myth 3 - Sales and marketing are basically the same

4 Myth 4 - I don’t need marketing – My company is too small and business comes from word of mouth

5 Myth 5 - I don’t need a marketing plan

6 Myth 6 - Marketing is solely the responsibility of the marketing department

Description

It's common knowledge that marketing is nothing but advertising, and if your business comes through word of mouth then you don't need marketing anyway. Besides, everyone knows that social media is the best form of free marketing there is... don't they?

The world of marketing is abound with a staggering number of misconceptions, fallacies and falsehoods. In Myths of Marketing, recognized industry expert Grant Leboff takes readers on a fascinating and entertaining journey through some of the most deeply entrenched stereotypes that exist in the industry, from the idea that sales and marketing are basically the same and that getting people's attention costs a lot of money, to the notion that demography is the best way to segment your market and 'content is king'.

Using a combination of academic research, amusing examples and industry case studies, Myths of Marketing effectively debunks many of the most pervasive myths and assumptions, leaving readers with a clearer, more perceptive understanding of marketing as a whole, to improve their own practice and marketing strategy.

Author Information

Grant Leboff is one of the UK's leading sales and marketing experts. He serves as a non-executive director and runs Sticky Marketing Club, a sales and marketing strategy consultancy. He speaks regularly at global conferences and contributes to publications including the Daily Telegraph, the Independent, and the Financial Times, and is the author of Sticky Marketing and Stickier Marketing, both published by Kogan Page.

7 Myth 7 - Ultimately, people buy on price

8 Myth 8 - Pricing is a matter of charging the highest amount possible

9 Myth 9 - The purpose of a brand is to build awareness

10 Myth 10 - Every business is a brand

11 Myth 11 - Business-to-business purchases are purely based on logic

12 Myth 12 - Business-to-business and business-to-consumer marketing are completely different

13 Myth 13 - Effective marcom means running a series of great campaigns

14 Myth 14 - A successful business requires a compelling USP

15 Myth 15 - Market positioning is all about the product or service on offer

16 Myth 16 - Visuals are the most important aspect of any marketing communications

17 Myth 17 - Our offering must attract the largest audience possible

Myth 18 - Demography is the best way to segment your market

19 Myth 19 - The focus of marketing communications should be a company’s products or services

20 Myth 20 - We are operating in a service economy

21 Myth 21 - The customer buying journey is no longer a linear process

22 Myth 22 - I instinctively understand my customer

23 Myth 23 - Marketing can still rely on the traditional purchase funnel

24 Myth 24 - Creating content takes too much time and money

Myth 25 - Social media is nothing more than some alternative channels to market

Myth 26 - Every business requires a ‘higher purpose’

Index

Digital Marketing in Practice

Design, Implement and Measure Effective Campaigns

This book

• Introduces key definitions and the tools, channels and platforms needed to create successful digital marketing

• Combines practical and implementable stepby-step guidance for creating and evaluating digital marketing campaigns with a robust theoretical and academic underpinning

• Describes how to incorporate accountability, inclusivity and meaningful sustainability messaging, as well as respect legal considerations such as the GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation)

• Features interviews with industry professionals, case studies from the likes of Adidas, Nielsen and The Eden Project as well as how-to guides, check lists and critical thought pieces

• Online resources: lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, worksheets, additional interactive case studies and further resource links

03/03/2023

£34.99

Paperback: 9781398608870

9781398608887

344 Format (mm): 240x170

Category: Textbook Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

Basic concepts and elements of digital marketing

Introduction to digital marketing

Planning a digital marketing strategy

Digital marketing campaigns

Accountability in the digital age

Researching the digital environment

The macro environment

The micro environment

Market segmentation, targeting and positioning

Big Data

Online customer behaviour

Primary and secondary data sources

The digital consumer

Customer journey and experiences

Socially responsible consumer behaviour

Global Consumer Behaviour

Implementing digital marketing

Objective setting

Marketing mix for the digital world

Digital tools, techniques and technology

Digital marketing channels and platforms

Measurement and evaluation

Evaluation of digital marketing success –Dashboards and challenges of data-driven marketing

Data analytics and metrics

Digital marketing audit

Legal and ethical considerations

Sustainability messaging

considerations

in the digital world

considerations

Digital Marketing Strategy

An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing

This book

• Provides a one-stop guide to creating a digital marketing strategy and understanding how to structure and build a more strategic approach

• Includes real-world case studies including Coca-Cola, MoneySupermarket.com, Bloom & Wild, Airbnb, Adidas and Uber

• New to this edition: material on AI in marketing, e-commerce, marketing automation, affiliate marketing and how to use digital analytical tools, plus new strategies for the latest cookie changes and privacy protection

• Online resources: Lecture slides, activity sheets, test banks, practical implementation guides and templates

Description

Build an effective and practical digital marketing strategy with this bestselling guide, covering everything from automation and analytics to integrating AI.

Digital Marketing Strategy is a global bestseller, and a one-stop guide to structuring and building a more strategic approach to digital marketing. Now fully updated, this third edition covers the integration of AI in marketing, e-commerce, marketing automation, affiliate marketing and how to use digital analytical tools, plus new strategies for the latest cookie changes and privacy protection.

Digital Marketing Strategy will show you how to effectively select, align and manage digital channels and operations, to streamline a successful digital marketing strategy for measurable, optimized results. Recommended by the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), it is supported by real-world case studies from the likes of Coca-Cola, Spotify, Airbnb, Adidas and Hostelworld as well as checklists, key terms and insights from leading industry practitioners to help you develop your own digital marketing strategy. This book is an invaluable guide for both digital marketing students and entry-level to mid-management marketing professionals.

Accompanying online resources consist of practical implementation guides spanning SEO, paid-search, email, lead-generation, as well as presentation slides and activity sheets.

Author Information

Simon Kingsnorth is a digital marketing expert with over 20 years' industry experience. Based in Reading, UK, he was formerly the Global Head of Digital Marketing at Citi Bank and has provided consultancy services to leading brands such as Vodafone, Asda and Lloyds TSB. A regular conference keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications, he is the author of The Digital Marketing Handbook, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398605978

Ebook: 9781398605985 Pages: 416

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction - How will this book transform your digital marketing strategy?

The foundations of digital marketing

Knowing your business objectives and your customer

Understanding the digital ecosystem

Integrating digital into wider organization strategy

Understanding the evolving digital consumer

Barriers, considerations and data protection in digital marketing strategy

2 Integrating digital change into your wider organization

Enabling technologies for online marketing and digital transformation

Planning your digital marketing strategy –Objectives, teams and budgeting

Using channel strategy to reach your customers

SEO strategy and organic techniques

Building and optimizing a winning paid search strategy

Display advertising and programmatic targeting

Tailoring your social media strategy

Marketing automation, messaging and email marketing – the unsung heroes

Affiliate schemes and partnerships to deliver highly targeted leads

Lead generation that delivers results

Content strategy – a key pillar of success

Personalizing the customer journey and digital experience

Conversion, retention and measurement

Effective Experience Design (XD)

Optimizing your e-commerce platform

Managing loyalty, CRM and data

Measuring success through data analytics and reporting

Tailoring your final digital marketing strategy

Providing a smooth online service and customer experience

Putting together your digital marketing strategy

The Digital Marketing Handbook

Deliver Powerful Digital Campaigns

This book

• Guides the reader step by step through building, implementing and optimizing the components of digital marketing such as SEO, social media content, paid search and display advertising

• Features practical tips, examples from brands including Google and Amazon, platform recommendations and common pitfalls to watch out for

• Written by a recognized industry expert and bestselling author who has more than 20 years' digital marketing experience

• Online resources: interactive tools and templates to be used in practice

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398603394

Ebook: 9781398603400

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Description

Build, implement and optimize your digital marketing campaigns, with this indispensable guide which covers everything from SEO, social media, paid search and display advertising.

The Digital Marketing Handbook takes the reader step by step through the various components of B2B and B2C online marketing, making it an essential companion to every marketer's desk. Highly practical in approach, it features tips, platform recommendations and common pitfalls to watch out for, as well as examples from global brands including Google, Amazon and Nissan. Detailed guidance is provided for key areas such as creating content that excites, informs and converts, using marketing automation and analyzing your results to maximize performance.

Written by recognized industry expert and bestselling author, Simon Kingsnorth, The Digital Marketing Handbook brings together reliable and actionable insights into one complete resource. Also covering how to manage affiliates and partnerships to deliver highly targeted leads and provide customer service that achieves high review scores and builds loyalty, it is accompanied by online templates and interactive tools to use in practice. This book is an essential blueprint for marketing professionals to deliver the best results from their digital marketing campaigns.

Author Information

Simon Kingsnorth is a recognized digital marketing expert with over 20 years' industry experience. Based in Reading, UK, he was previously the Global Head of Digital Marketing at Citi Bank and has worked with leading brands including Vodafone, Direct Line Group and Google as well as on many successful start-up launches. A regular conference keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications, he is also the author of Digital Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents

1 How this book works

2 Building a high-converting, beautiful website

3 Optimizing your website to deliver top SEO results

4 Managing paid search for cost-effective results

5 Running display advertising that delivers brand value

6 Managing affiliates and partnerships to deliver highly targeted leads

7 Creating content that excites, informs and converts

8 Delivering organic and paid social media that grows your brand

9 Using analytics to interpret and optimize your results to maximize performance

10 Automating your email and CRM plans to deliver compelling digital communications

11 Using e-commerce and retail partners to scale your merchandizing

12 Providing customer service that delivers high review scores and builds loyalty

New

Understanding Digital Marketing

A Complete Guide to Engaging Customers and Implementing Successful Digital Campaigns

This book

• Provides tips on how to best connect with customers in a rapidly changing climate of engagement and interaction

• Explores current and emerging trends which are shaping the industry, including voicebased marketing, influencer marketing and data insights

• New to this edition: updated content on martech, consumer data and privacy considerations, programmatic and content marketing, SEO & paid search and new global case studies and expert views

• Online resources: bonus contributor views and additional case studies on Kwik Fit, Battersea Dogs Home and Yves Saint Laurent

Edition: 5

Date: 03/11/2020

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9781789666014

Ebook: 9781789666021 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

1

Introduction - Digital transformation

Digital marketing strategy setting

Being online: Welcoming the world

Search - Being found online

Email marketing

Mobile marketing

Social media

Content marketing and native content

Programmatic marketing

Performance marketing

How to form meaningful insights from data

Description

Gain essential grounding in SEO, email marketing, social media, content marketing, performance marketing and much more, with this practical and essential guide to digital marketing.

The world of digital media is constantly changing, as technologies continue to transform the way we interact and communicate on a global scale. In this climate, Understanding Digital Marketing provides a practical, no-nonsense guide to digital marketing, from strategy and digital transformation to best-practice basics and trends, packed with clear and informative case studies and examples.

This fifth edition of the bestselling Understanding Digital Marketing is fully updated to reflect the latest global developments in the industry including martech, consumer data and privacy considerations, influencer marketing and voice marketing. Complete with first-hand accounts of what success in digital marketing looks like, this book is an essential resource for practitioners and students alike. It is now required reading for more than 100 universities and colleges, and has received endorsements from Harvard University, Hult Business School and the Chartered Institute of Marketing.

Author Information

Damian Ryan is a media and marketing expert with over 30 years' experience. He created the Golden Spider Awards for internet excellence, before establishing the first digital agency in the UK and Ireland in 1997. He went on to successfully build and sell three digital marketing businesses and is now a specialist adviser in mergers and acquisitions in corporate finance. Ryan is now a partner with BDO where he covers deals in media marketing communications and marketing technologies.

He is also author of Understanding Social Media and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World, both published by Kogan Page.

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy

How to Use New Frameworks and Models to Achieve Growth

This book

• Gives clear, direct explanations of the more advanced aspects of digital B2B marketing, and makes these accessible and user-friendly

• Expertly explains the most up-to-date digital frameworks relevant to the B2B marketing sphere, and shows how to implement these to achieve lead generation, customer retention and data management

• Is due to be the set text for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)'s course Advanced B2B Digital Marketing, and recommended reading for the courses B2B Acquisition and Retention Marketing, and Introduction to B2B Digital Marketing

• Includes a wealth of global case studies, featuring companies such as Danfoss, American Express, IBM, Schneider Electric and more

Description

Harness the most up-to-date techniques, frameworks and skills for effective B2B digital marketing, with this essential handbook as recommended by the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM).

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy is a decisive guide to the most recent developments in the field. It gives readers an overview of the latest frameworks and models, and shows how these can be used to overcome the everyday challenges associated with account targeting, data utilization, and digital campaign management.

Intensely practical, B2B Digital Marketing Strategy helps readers get to grips with some of the more advanced and complex elements of B2B marketing. It expertly explains how to incorporate the latest digital methodologies into critical processes such as lead generation, customer retention and customer experience personalization. Packed with global case studies and examples, this book is an invaluable resource for any professional operating in the B2B space.

Author Information

Simon Hall, Berkshire, UK is a marketing innovator with around 25 years' experience in Technology and Services Marketing. In his former career, he served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as many senior European roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In addition to running courses and workshops with companies on various B2B marketing and digital marketing areas, Simon Hall also lectures final year university students and degree apprentices in strategy, and marketing at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, of the DMA B2B Council, and a Global Thought Leader in B2B Marketing for the ICG Group (a global consulting company). He is the founder of NextGen Marketing Solutions and author of Innovative B2B Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789662542

Ebook: 9781789662559

Pages: 352

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

The new evolving business landscape

DEVELOPING THE B2B DIGITAL STRATEGY

B2B digital marketing strategy

B2B customer journeys and the customer experience

B2B personalization marketing and buyer personas

B2B customer insights and data management

2 THE EARLY BUYER JOURNEY STAGE

Generating awareness

B2B SEO and search strategies

B2B websites and website strategies

Digital for lead generation and lead nurturing

B2B digital marketing for lead generation

B2B digital and lead nurturing

Digital campaign management and integration

B2B content marketing

B2B digital marketing campaign planning

Digital integration marketing in B2B

Digital marketing and sales

Measuring digital marketing

Digital for retaining customers

Types of digital retention marketing

Digital retention marketing channels

B2B social media and digital marketing platforms

B2B social media marketing strategy

B2B digital marketing technologies and platforms

Index

E-Commerce Website Optimization

Why 95% of Your Website Visitors Don’t Buy, and What You Can Do About it

This book

• Highlights the most effective changes to undertake on your e-commerce site, demonstrating how to focus valuable time on tangible efficiencies and revenue gains

• Shows how to gain insights into online customers' behaviour and identifies free or inexpensive tools to help access them

• Supports the transition to becoming a data-driven organization, helping to adopt a scientific approach to implementing an optimized e-commerce website

• New to this edition: new content on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, plus updated case studies and recommended tools

Edition: 2

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781789664423

Ebook: 9781789664430 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction to e-commerce website optimization

The kick-off

How people buy

Essential research

Add depth with further research

Merchandizing analytics

Creating the optimization plan

Hypotheses and creative work

Testing your hypothesis

Personalization

Optimizing the optimization

People and culture

Persuasive website copywriting

Launching a new website

Description

Conversion rate optimization (CRO) is about understanding people and behaviour, not simply website visits. This book is an all-encompassing guide to the how, the why and the tools and techniques.

Grounded in best-practice theory and research, E-commerce Website Optimization brings together usability, analytics and persuasion to offer a detailed, step-by-step guide to increasing the percentage of visitors who buy from your site and subsequently the amount that these visitors spend when they do. In a complex and evolving field, it will help you improve conversion rates, increase ROI from online marketing campaigns, generate higher levels of repeat business and increase the e-commerce value of websites.

In the fast-moving world of e-commerce, this fully revised second edition includes updates on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, alongside updated case studies and newly recommended tools. E-commerce Website Optimization is an invaluable book for those seeking to implement a data-driven ethos for their organization's e-commerce programme, for everyone from chief digital officers and heads of online sales, to entrepreneurs and small business owners.

Author Information

Dan Croxen-John is CEO of AWA Digital, a global e-commerce conversion optimization agency. He is a certified Web Analyst, a Fellow of the Institute of Direct Marketing, and has served on advisory boards for numerous associations.

Johann van Tonder is COO at AWA Digital, working with brands such as Canon, Avis and Interflora. He has trained and coached big and small e-commerce businesses around the world, and is a regular speaker at international conferences.

Mobile Marketing

How Mobile Technology is Revolutionizing Marketing, Communications and Advertising

This book

• Is a clear-cut guide on how to structure mobile marketing in a planned and coordinated way

• Demystifies terms, tools and techniques, helping readers connect and coordinate the different dynamics across their business

• Includes high-profile case studies including Heineken, Nike Training Club, Google Play and MailChimp

• Changes since the last edition include two new chapters (Mobile & Email, LocationBased Devices and Beacons), plus cutting edge updates on wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and understanding the multi-screen journey

• Checklists chapter and practical frameworks such as how to create a mobile marketing strategy and how to develop an app

• Online resources: digital marketing instructors manual, lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template

Description

Mobile Marketing is a clear, practical guide to harnessing the mobile consumer and tackling the rising challenges of divided user attention across multiple screens at the same time. It demystifies the vast spectrum of tools and techniques now available and explains how to optimize these dynamics into an innovative and effective mobile marketing strategy.

Now that website search rankings take into account mobile optimization, no serious marketer can do without a thorough understanding of mobile.

The first edition of Mobile Marketing won the Judge's Choice Award in Social Media at the Small Business Trend's 2014 Book Awards. This fully revised 2nd edition includes straightforward explanations on mobile optimized content, app development, social media and proximity based marketing. It has also expanded to include two brand new chapters on mobile and email and on location-based devices, plus cutting-edge updates on advances in wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and strategies for the changing user journey. Integrated with tactical checklists, easy application frameworks and powerful case study insights such as Heineken, WordPress, MailChimp, Nike Training Club (NTC), Google Play and Moz, it provides a full overview from service provision and technology integration to content strategy, ready to capture fast-moving consumers on the go. Online resources include a digital marketing instructors manual, supporting lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template.

Author Information

Daniel Rowles has worked in digital marketing for almost 20 years on both the client and agency sides. He is a Course Director for the CIM, lecturer at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and lead judge of the CIM Marketing Excellence awards. He is also the host of the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. His company TargetInternet.com has helped clients of all types to use digital marketing more effectively, including the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/02/2017

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749479794

Ebook: 9780749479800

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 216x139

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

Mobile Marketing in Perspective

Introduction

Understanding the User Journey

Technology Change and Adoption

Disruption and Integration

Devices, Platforms and Technology

The Future of Mobile Marketing

The Tactical Toolkit

Introduction

Mobile Sites and Responsive Design

Mobile and E-mail

How to Build an App

Social Media and Mobile

Mobile Search

Mobile Advertising

Augmented Reality (AR) and Virtual Reality (VR)

Quick Response (QR) Codes

Location-based Devices and Beacons

Near Field Communication (NFC) and Mobile Payments

Instant Messenger (IM) Apps and Short Messaging Service (SMS)

Mobile Analytics

Mobile Marketing Checklists

Introduction

Checklists

Conclusions

Video Marketing

Create Engaging Video Campaigns to Drive Brand Growth and Sales

This book

• Provides step-by-step guidance for creating and activating effective video marketing and measuring its success

• Shows how to create and edit video campaigns for all budgets, including DIY approaches using DSLRs and smartphones

• Contains case studies and examples from well-known international brands including adidas, Kleenex, and Red Bull

• Online resources: video links for campaigns discussed in the book and a downloadable strategy planner

• New to this edition: chapters on understanding your audience and buying media space on ad networks and social media, content on personal and personalized content and avoiding potential pitfalls such as frauds and fake views

Description

In a 'video first' world, video is one of the most effective tools marketers can use to raise brand awareness, engage consumers, drive website traffic and increase sales.

Video Marketing takes a step-by-step and in-depth look at planning and creating great video campaigns, as well as activating, testing and measuring their success. Featuring case studies from global household names such as adidas, Kleenex, and Red Bull, it explores which video types and platforms brands should use, using multi-video campaigns, live videos and webinars, as well as creating and editing video campaigns on a budget using DSLRs and smartphones.

Updated with the latest developments, this second edition of Video Marketing contains new chapters on understanding your audience and buying media space on ad networks and social media, as well as further content on personal and personalized content and avoiding potential pitfalls such as frauds, fake views and updates. Accompanying online resources consist of video links for campaigns discussed in the book and a downloadable strategy planner for readers to complete and put into action.

Author Information

Jon Mowat is the founder and MD of Hurricane, an award-winning video marketing agency which has worked with organizations including BMW, Axa, Costa Coffee and UN Environment. With decades of experience in the industry, he previously produced documentaries for the BBC, and now turns his expertise to create video content to meet clients' business objectives. Based in Bristol, UK, he is a regular international conference speaker and has been published in a wide range of marketing publications including Adweek, Brandwatch, CIM, Smart Insights and Social Media Today.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/08/2021

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398601147

Ebook: 9781398601154

Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

1 Video marketing strategy - An introduction

1 What is video marketing?

2 Why video marketing works

3 Understand your audience

4 Video types and platforms

2 Creating great videos

5 The basics of video marketing

6 Planning effective video campaigns

7 Storytelling and creative that changes behaviour

8 Activation, measurement and testing

9 Buying media space on ad networks and social media

10 The dark underbelly of video advertisingHow to avoid losing money

3 DIY video projects

11 Filming and editing

12 Filming on a smartphone and DSLRs

4 Creating effective video campaigns

13 Steps 1 and 2 - Where your brand content is now and setting goals

14 Step 3 - Content planning and programming strategy

15 Step 4 - Building the perfect content hub

16 Step 5 - Creating high-volume video content - And making it easy

17 Step 6 - Multi-video campaign activation and testing (how to grow ROI)

Podcasting Marketing Strategy

A Complete Guide to Creating, Publishing and Monetizing a Successful Podcast

This book

• Demonstrates how to use podcasts effectively for content building, branding and business development to spread your organization's message

• Reveals why podcasting is a key way to stand out from the noise of social media

• Explains how people really listen and how to use these insights to build personal engagement with listeners

• Understand how to build the audience of your podcast through blogging and SEO, advertising and email marketing

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2019

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749486235

Ebook: 9780749486242 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing

How to Harness AI and Maintain the Competitive Edge

This book

• Delivers a real-world framework for the confident application and integration of AI for marketing strategies and campaigns

• Outlines time-saving marketing efficiencies such as chatbot customer service, market research samples, big data insights and brand safe content creation

• Clarifies how to manage both the advantages and ethical questions that arise in computerbased decision making, in line with individual business objectives

• Shares fascinating interviews from IBM, Tesco, Ocado and BT, plus case studies from Reiss, PwC and Gartner

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2019

Price: £21.99

Paperback: 9780749483395

Ebook: 9780749483401

Pages: 224 Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Description

Artificial intelligence (AI) is paving the way for the future of marketing and business transformation, yet many organizations struggle to know exactly how and where to integrate it. This book is the ultimate guide to embracing the opportunity that AI can bring for your marketing.

With AI forecasted to boost global GDP by 14% by 2030, an efficient and sustainable AI marketing strategy is now essential to avoid losing the competitive edge. Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing provides the definitive, practical framework needed for marketers to identify, apply and embrace the opportunity to maximize the results and business advancement that AI can bring.

Streamlining efficiencies into every business practice, AI automates simpler, repetitive tasks with unrivalled accuracy, allowing sales and marketing teams to return their attention to where human interaction is most valuable: strategy, creativity and personal connection.

Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing outlines key marketing benefits such as accurate market research samples, immediate big data insights and brand-safe content creation, right through to the on-demand customer service that is now expected 24/7. It also explores the inevitable myths, concerns and ethical questions that can arise from the largescale adoption of AI. This book is an essential read for every 21st century marketer.

Author Information

Katie King is a CEO and Business Transformation consultant with over 28 years' experience. She has advised many of the world's leading brands and business leaders, including Richard Branson, o2, Orange, Accenture, PA Consulting, Arsenal Football Club and Harrods. King has delivered numerous TEDx talks and is a frequent commentator on BBC TV and radio, and is a regular speaker on the international conference circuit.

Table of Contents

1 The AI wake-up call – The strategic transition of marketing

2 The personalization paradox – Global appetite for AI and the changing customer journey

3 Transformational marketing and AI in tourism – A glimpse at the Asia Pacific region

4 Transformational marketing and AI in Europe – Case studies from telecoms, banking and built environment

5 Transformational marketing and AI in North America – Case studies from banking and retail

6 Transformational marketing and AI in technology and venture capital – With a special focus on the Middle East

7 Framework for success – Democratization of AI

8 The new marketing paradigm –Reinventing the role of marketing, ethics and transparency

9 The future of marketing has arrived – AI’s wider impact on education, policy and politics

The Martech Handbook

Build a Technology Stack to Attract and Retain Customers

This book

• Explains how to use martech to add value in key areas of marketing including customer experience, automation, lead management, reporting and analysis

• Shows how to bring together different platforms and solutions into a joined-up martech stack and measure and monitor its success for maximum efficiency and impact

• Explores getting buy-in and scaling martech within organizations depending on their needs, size and budget

• Written by an industry expert who was named a Top Martech Marketer to Follow in 2020 by Martech Alliance and is a two-time Adobe Marketo Champion

• Contains case studies and examples from companies including General Electric, Tealium and Iterable, as well as frameworks, checklists, and interviews

Description

Increase customer attraction, acquisition and retention by using technology to create seamless, effective and joined-up marketing.

It can be hard to know where to begin with the sheer number of platforms and solutions available to marketers today, as well as to use martech to its full potential. The Martech Handbook provides a clear and step-by-step framework for understanding and selecting various forms of marketing technology to drive business value in all areas of marketing, from CX, automation and lead management, to reporting and analysis as well as designing and orchestrating a tech stack that brings them all together.

This book also explores getting buy-in, scaling martech within organizations depending on their needs, size and budget as well as measurement, monitoring and governance. Written by an award-winning martech leader, it features case studies and examples from companies including Spotify and Amazon alongside frameworks, question checklists, and interviews with leading industry practitioners. This is an essential resource for augmenting your marketing and achieving key objectives through leveraging technology.

Author Information

Darrell Alfonso is an award-winning Martech leader, influencer and speaker with 15 years' experience managing marketing technology at startups and the world's leading enterprises. Based in Irvine, California, he leads marketing operations at Amazon Web Services and has consulted for Fortune 500 companies such as GE, Abbot Labs and AT&T.

A frequent keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications, he was named a Top Martech Marketer to Follow in 2020 by Martech Alliance and is a two-time Adobe Marketo Champion. He is also a marketing instructor and was previously VP of Communications at the American Marketing Association.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2022

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398606449

Ebook: 9781398606456

Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

1 Introduction – the rise of marketing technology

2 The business need for Martech

3 Key categories of Martech

4 What is a Martech stack?

5 The framework for effective Martech stack design

6 The core business systems and platforms for every marketing team

7 Identifying value-add marketing platforms and tools

8 Principles for robust and scalable Martech stack management

9 Martech measurement, monitoring, and governance

10 Getting buy-in

11 Continual improvement

Social Media Marketing for Business

Scaling an Integrated Social Media Strategy Across Your Organization

This book

• Shows how to create a powerful social media marketing strategy which is embedded within your wider organization through effective workflows, team configurations and a supportive culture

• Covers key areas such as balancing social media ownership and developing and measuring engaging social media content to increase reach and better reflect the personality of the brand

• Contains a range of international case studies from a variety of sectors, including Airbnb, Hyundai, Deloitte Digital and LVMH

• Online resources: presentation slides, content calendars, a content marketing framework and interactive tools for effective social media management

Description

Social media has become an imperative for almost every business. Discover how to successfully implement an effective social media strategy that is supported and integrated throughout every part of your organization, with this essential handbook to enhancing your online presence.

Social Media Marketing for Business provides a step-by-step roadmap to setting up effective workflows, team configurations, governance models and social media policies, alongside creating and measuring content and social media campaigns that have the competitive edge. Featuring insights from leading industry experts, it covers areas such as balancing social media ownership, measuring success using analytics and conducting a social media audit.

Containing an array of international case study examples from organizations such as The World Wildlife Fund (WWF), Deloitte Digital, Dell, Burger King and LVMH, Social Media Marketing for Business explores how to build a supportive culture, get buy-in and the common pitfalls to avoid. Supported by a content calendar templates, content marketing framework and online presentation slides, this book is a one-stop-shop for developing effective social media marketing strategies and integrating them within your business.

Author Information

Andrew Jenkins is Principal of Volterra, a professional services firm specializing in social media and social selling strategies. Based in Toronto, Canada, he was formerly the Head of Social Media Strategy for Royal Bank of Canada (RBC) and has worked with a diverse list of companies in North America and Europe, including CIBC, Rogers, Bell Canada, InfoSpace and The Aga Khan Foundation. A regular international speaker and panellist at numerous industry conferences and events, he also teaches a course on Social Media Strategies for the Enterprise at the University of Toronto's School of Continuing Studies.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398603691

Ebook: 9781398603707

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Digital Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction

You’re in charge of social media, now what?

The who/what/where of your social media and content audit

Social media governance and policy development

Content! Content! Content!

Training

Analytics and ROI

Employee advocacy and personal branding

In-house or outsource

Beware bright shiny syndrome

Your social media operating model

Giving up control

Paid social media

Hashtags

Humanity

Bringing it all together

New

Understanding Social Media

How to Create a Plan for Your Business that Works

This book

• Covers topics such as how to develop a strategy and programme, budget for activities, set KPIs, determine ROI, create a dashboard and build a team

• Addresses the relationship between search and social, analytics, customer experience and risk assessment and management in social media

• Helps readers gauge their own social media score with crib notes and practical exercises

• Serves as both a reference guide for professionals and study guide for marketing students

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2015

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749473563

Ebook: 9780749473570 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Social Media

Description

Understanding Social Media is the essential guide to social media for students and professionals alike. Drawing on the experience, advice and tips from dozens of digital marketers and social media superstars, it is an extensive crowd-sourced guide to social media platforms.

Illustrated throughout with case studies from both successful and failed campaigns, Understanding Social Media democratizes knowledge of social media and promotes best practice, answering questions such as 'How do you create a compelling social media campaign?', 'How do you build and engage with an audience?' and 'Where is the line between online PR and social media drawn?' It is the most comprehensive and practical reference guide to social media available.

Author Information

Damian Ryan is founder and chairman of The Global Academy of Digital Marketing, a collaborative movement comprised of digital marketers seeking knowledge, case studies, contacts and credible data to help them prosper. He is also a partner with Mediaventura, the UK's leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector. He is also the author of Understanding Digital Marketing and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World

Table of Contents

1 Getting started – how to create a compelling social media programme

2 Rules governing the relationship between search and social

3 How to budget for social media activities

4 Setting KPIs and measuring success

5 Understanding social media ROI – what matters and what doesn’t

6 Why social media is central to customer experience

7 How to build a social media team – how to pick the right suppliers

8 Understanding the relationship between online PR and social media

9 The future for social media and the vastly changing landscape

10 Risk assessment and risk management in social media

Myths of Social Media

Dispel the Misconceptions and Master Social Media

This book

• Banishes 40 of the most commonly held myths and fictions about the use of social media as a business tool

• Helps readers understand the very benefitsand costs - of social media

• Is packed with instructive and entertaining examples and case studies of what should and shouldn't be done with social media

• New to this edition: fully updated data, case studies and examples and new myths including why social connectivity doesn't matter when people can't meet up, exploding the myths of digital poverty, digital transformation is actually slowing down

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

Everyone knows that social media is free, millennials are all adept social media experts, that businesses always have to be available 24/7 and ultimately none of it really matters, as the digital space is full of fake news and online messaging is seen as inauthentic. Don't they?

The use of social media as a business tool is dominated by falsehoods, fictions and fabrications. In Myths of Social Media, digital consultant Michelle Carvill and workplace psychologist Ian MacRae dismiss many of the most keenly-held misconceptions and instead, present the reality of social media best practice. Using helpful and instructive, sometimes entertaining and occasionally eye-watering examples of what you should and should not do, Myths of Social Media debunks the most commonly held myths and shows you how to use social media effectively for work and at work.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media, strategy and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the test. Entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Michelle Carvill is Founder of Carvill Creative - a social media marketing agency whose clients include the BBC, Nuffield Health and Norbord. Passionate about the digital future she advises clients on online marketing communication and social media strategies, and leads a team delivering practical social media planning and daily management. She is the author of Get Social, published by Kogan Page.

Ian MacRae is a work psychologist, consultant, speaker, author and Managing Director of High Potential Psychology. He works with, and writes about, a wide range of topics relating to psychology and the workplace. He developed the High Potential Traits Inventory (HPTI), a personality assessment which has been translated into dozens of languages and used by over 50,000 people around the world. Myths of Social Media is his fifth book, he is co-author of Motivation and Performance and Myths of Work, also part of the Business Myths series.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398607781

Ebook: 9781398607798 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 216x135

Product Category: General Subject: Social Media

Table of Contents

Introduction

Social media is a waste of time

All social networks do the same thing

Social media isn’t that influential

Social media replaces real-life networking

Social media marketing is a dark art

It’s not worth responding to criticism on social media

7 Sharing more content is always better

8 Social media is free

9 Social media can replace your business website

10 Social media activity is purely a marketing function

11 Social media cannot be done well inhouse

12 Social media means my business has to be available 24/7

13 Social media is no use for internal communications

14 Employees know what is expected of them on social media

15 Social media is not effective for business development

16 It’s not possible to measure social media ROI

17 Digital natives are all social media experts

18 Social media influencers are a new phenomenon

19 People have different personalities on social media

20 Saying the wrong thing on social media will get me cancelled

21 Public social media profiles are fair game for employers and recruiters

22 Business leaders don’t need a presence on social media

23 Social media is full of #fakenews

24 Social media is the best source of information

25 Social media intensifies information bubbles

26 Social media is not strategic

27 Social media is purely for broadcasting

28 Oversharing on social media can reveal trade secrets

29 Being active on social media lets me control my digital footprint

30 Social networks will protect my data

Social Media Strategy

A Practical Guide to Social Media Marketing and Customer Engagement

This book

• Create a long term customer engagement strategy rather than short term activity with minimal ROI, using interviews with global practitioners, template examples and case studies from National Geographic, Lush, South West Airlines, Dreams Beds and Mumsnet

• Measure and interpret social media activity into actionable data insights for the business

• Maximize community engagement, integrated content marketing, reputation, audience segmentation and channel investment with speed and clarity

• Focuses on big-picture strategy rather than micro-level social media management, so the frameworks and methods discussed remain relevant over time

• Online resources: digital versions of the templates featured in the book

Description

Create a long-term customer engagement strategy using effective social media campaigns that enhance ROI across channels, using guidance and examples from National Geographic, Lush, Dreams and more.

Organizations often talk of digital planning but struggle to know which channels to invest in, how to integrate them with content marketing activity, or fail to develop measurable outputs that align with business objectives. This book provides a clear road map for efficient planning, deliverance and financial accountability of social media's contribution to the business.

Social Media Strategy provides a simple, structured way to create integrated customer engagement and social media campaigns that work, delivering practical guidance on key areas, such as:

-Identifying and targeting audience segments

-Methods of two-way community engagement

-Reputation management

-Being present on the right channels

-Driving action through influencers

-Identifying the relevant tools and platforms to audit, track and measure business impact and customer engagement

With example templates, interviews and global case studies including National Geographic, Lush, South West Airlines, Dreams, Mumsnet and more, this professional guide delivers a long-term solution for maximizing social media led business development for any business.

Author Information

Julie Atherton is a business leader, public speaker, consultant and strategist with 30 years' experience gained working with global brands including Nissan, ITV, Deloitte Digital, Asos and St John Ambulance. Awarded IDM Educator of the Year in 2018, she trains marketing professionals and business leaders in digital, brand, social media and content marketing. She is also an experienced trustee and non-executive director for a range of organizations including the IDM Qualifications Advisory Board and Union of Brunel Students.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2019

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749497071

Ebook: 9780749497088

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x165

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Social Media Marketing

Table of Contents

1

The role of social media in business, marketing and customer expectations

2 Integrated customer engagement –Understanding how and why your social media strategy will enhance your PR and strategic business development

3 Getting started – Aligning social media goals and KPIs with your wider business objectives, PR and marketing campaigns

4 The power of social listening – How to profile your audience and customer insights for a global social media strategy

5 A quick-step guide to channel selection, digital integration, niche social and being present on the relevant channels

6 How to drive action and engagement through integrated content marketing on social media

7 Customer or celebrity? Identifying and attracting the right influencers to advocate your brand

8 Examples, tools and templates – What does a great social media strategy look like?

9 Measuring and benchmarking success –How and when do you know your social media strategy is working?

10 Crisis and reputation management for social media – A clear guide for the unpredictable

Influencer Marketing Strategy

How to Create Successful Influencer Marketing

This book

• Discusses the importance of maintaining control of the brand message while still giving the influencer the freedom to create posts in their natural style

• Helps readers understand the key facets of influencer marketing, walking them through the process of preparing their own influencer marketing strategy

• Features in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, to showcase the variety of influencer marketing strategies that can be adopted. Examples include Mumsnet, Fyre Festival, Dermalogica and Ryan's Toys

• Offers advice on incorporating influencer marketing into a wider content marketing strategy

Description

SHORTLISTED: Business Book Awards 2022 - Sales & Marketing category

Create an influencer marketing strategy that benefits both brand and the influencer with this fascinating guide, rich in case studies from the biggest and the best and the small and specialist.

Influencer marketing can no longer be ignored. Whether it's broad scale celebrity endorsement, or micro-influencers with niche, highly targeted followings, influencer marketing has become a natural extension of content marketing. However, while the opportunities are vast, the very nature of influencer marketing means that a brand must relinquish control of their marketing message to allow the influencer to communicate in their natural style. This can be unnerving, and it's therefore imperative to have a clearly defined campaign that mutually benefits and protects both the brand and the influencer.

Influencer Marketing Strategy gives readers everything they need to create influencer marketing strategy. It will walk readers through the key considerations, and offer insight into decisions such as choosing the right influencer, planning content, and how to incorporate influencer marketing into your wider marketing strategy. This book presents fascinating, in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, demonstrating the variety of ways that influencer marketing can be utilized, and the huge opportunities it presents for organizations and industries of all sizes. Influencer Marketing Strategy is the ultimate guide to developing a successful influencer marketing strategy - and building campaigns that create real value.

Author Information

Gordon Glenister, based in Cambridgeshire, UK, is Global Head of Influencer Marketing for the Branded Content Marketing Association, and has over 25 years' experience in promotional marketing. He is the host of Influence, the global podcast that shines a spotlight on influencer marketing. He also runs his own consultancy and regularly speaks around the world on influencer marketing, membership and merchandise. Gordon Glenister was Director General of the British Promotional Merchandise Association for 11 years.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789667257

Ebook: 9781789667264

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Social Media Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What is influencer marketing?

2 The major platforms for influencer marketing

Creating your strategic framework

4 The legal impacts of influencer marketing

Working with influencers

Finding influencers

7 Creating an ambassador programme

Influencer marketing around the world

The future of influencer marketing

Understanding analytics and measurement

Case studies

12 Appendix 1 – Directory of influencer marketing platforms, agencies and consultants

Appendix 2 – Glossary of terms

14 Index

Communications

Integrating Online and Offline, Customer Engagement and Digital Technologies

This book

• Has the strongest focus on online and offline integration of any marketing communications textbook, offering a blended approach that is key for the industry

• Grounds big picture theory in real-world practice with case studies from cutting-edge global companies, including Snapchat and Spotify

• Demonstrates how the latest technologies, including AI, Internet of Things, Big Data, AR/ VR, and marketing automation, have been used in successful marketing campaigns

• Covers the key themes of customer engagement, experience and journey, equipping students with a truly customerfocused mindset that will be highly sought after by future employers

• New in this edition: Increased focus on online and offline integration; customer experience; the opportunities and risks of social media; navigating ethical and data management challenges; cutting-edge digital technologies, and updated case studies and examples

• Online resources: lecture slides per chapter, multiple choice question bank and video reviews

7

Date: 03/12/2019

Price: £44.99

Paperback: 9780749498641

Ebook: 9780749498658

Format (mm): 245x189

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Marketing Communications

Table of Contents

Communications background and theories

New integrated marketing communications

Branding

Customer relationship management

Buyer behaviour

Communications theory

Marketing communications research

Marketing communications agencies

International marketing communications

The marketing communications plan

The changing communications environment

Communications tools

Selling, social selling, marketing automation and martech

Advertising

Publicity and public relations

Sponsorship

Content marketing and other sales promotion

Direct mail, email, messaging and chatbots

Exhibitions, events and experiential marketing

Merchandizing and point of sale

Packaging

Owned media – websites and social media

Index

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing

Perspectives, Issues, Challenges and Solutions

This book

• Features contributions from leading academics, industry experts, thought leaders and influencers around the globe

• Presents a wealth of varying perspectives on content marketing grouped into key subject areas, allowing the reader to move through the book according to their interests and absorb the most useful aspects of each discussion

• Includes coverage of core subjects including media publishing, text vs visuals vs gaming, the ethics of native advertising, content marketing measurement, content blockers, storytelling through data, and much more

• Brings together numerous, and often opposing, perspectives to present a unified, definitive appraisal of content marketing as a whole

• Online resources: Bonus chapters

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2018

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749482220

Ebook: 9780749482237

Pages: 288

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Communications

Table of Contents

1 Introduction: mapping the Content marketing & territory

1 Content marketing: a new and better promise?

2 Why Content is seen as the solution to current marketing challenges

3 Experience Economy: brand and customer experience as Content enablers

4 How Content can help build sustainable brands with better purposes

2 How Content changes the way we all do business

5 Creative agency perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue

6 Media agency perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue

7 Chapter - Online Chapter 01 Client perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue

8 Chapter - Online Chapter 02 Publisher perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue

3 Data, new formats and the role of Content in the consumer journey

9 Content distribution and its role in the consumer journey

10 Content and storytelling in the age of user data abundance

11 The evolution of Content formats: from text to video to AR/VR to AI…

4 How to measure and evaluate Content marketing

12 Key measurement issues relating to Content marketing

5 Content marketing: not such a new and better promise?

13 The rejecter’s manifesto: key arguments against the Content marketing ‘mirage’

14 Content marketing and ethics: challenges, threats and balancing acts

15 Conclusions

Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing

The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing Strategy

This book

• Is written by global industry thought-leader Rebecca Lieb, who has conducted and published more content marketing research than anyone else

• Shares the results of deep quantitative research and hundreds of hours of interviews with senior marketers at the world's most respected brands

• Reveals the value content can not only bring to owned media initiatives, such as company websites or blogs, but the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels

• Empowers readers to make the best organizational, tool and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across departments and organizational silos

Description

DISTINGUISHED FAVOURITE: NYC Big Book Awards 2017

Content, in all its forms, is the single most critical element of any marketing campaign. Finding a successful equilibrium between content marketing and content strategy is difficult, but essential. Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing goes beyond superficial descriptions of how to produce engaging social media content to offer the results of many years of deep quantitative research, and hours of interviews with senior marketers at some of the world's leading brands.

Written by a recognized industry thought leader, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing explores how content functions in the broader framework of all marketing, as well as organizational concerns and IT decision making. It demonstrates the value content brings not only to "owned" media initiatives, such as a company website or blog, but also the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels.

It will enable readers to make the organizational, staffing, tools and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across divisions and organizational silos. Deeply researched and insightful, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing is, quite simply, the definitive research-based guide to content marketing.

Author Information

Rebecca Lieb is a strategic advisor, research analyst, keynote speaker, author and columnist. She works with many of the world's leading brands on digital marketing innovation. Clients range from start-ups to non-profits to Fortune 100 brands and regulated industries, including Facebook, Nestlé, Adobe, Fidelity, IBM, Save the Children, Pinterest, Cisco and The Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Previously, she was Altimeter Group's digital advertising and media analyst, and prior to that she was Vice President at Econsultancy. Lieb was VP and Editor-In-Chief of The ClickZ Network for over seven years.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/06/2017

Price: £21.99

Paperback: 9780749479756

Ebook: 9780749479763

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Marketing Communications

Table of Contents

The shift to content marketing

Content marketing versus content strategy

Converged media

Native advertising

Organizing for content

A culture of content

Global content strategy

Real-time marketing

Content marketing software

Content marketing performance

Contextual campaigns

Experiential Marketing

A Practical Guide to Interactive Brand Experiences

This book

• Explains how to integrate immersive brand experiences into marketing strategies, using targeted outreach for a live social media domino effect

• Provides practical steps to plan, inspire, activate and evaluate tangible results from experiential initiatives

• New to this edition: four new chapters on digital experience and merged realities, the experience economy, customer experience and the 'Pop-Up' phenomenon

• Online resources: practical checklists, workbooks and sector -focused content on drinks, cosmetics, FMCG, automotive, retail, fashion and technology

Description

The immersive brand experience is revolutionizing brand engagement. Experiential Marketing, second edition, cuts through the jargon with clear practical guidelines on how to magnify marketing strategies to a powerful new level. This book emphasizes that experiential marketing is not just about creating a live event. A unique, immersive experience allows businesses to generate a surge of brand engagement, which is amplified immediately by a niche target of consumers through live content sharing and social media streams.

This comprehensive second edition of Experiential Marketing pinpoints exactly where this innovative strategy fits in with the current marketing and events climate, including a stepby-step outline to plan, integrate and evaluate its game-changing results. The completely fresh content analyzes the latest industry advances and case studies, including four new chapters on the digital experience and merged realities, plus the experience economy and creative explosion of the 'Pop-Up' phenomenon. Accompanied with a digital toolkit of downloadable resources, this book is essential reading for marketing, business, media and events professionals alike, providing strategic decision makers with a unique competitive advantage in a vibrant new era of marketing strategy.

Author Information

Shirra Smilansky is CEO and Executive Creative Director of Electrify Worldwide Ltd, an international brand engagement agency working with clients such as L'Oreal Luxe, Carling, Selfridges, Harvey Nichols, Lancome and Yves Saint Laurent. She is the Co-founder of an MA degree 'Experiential Meets Digital' and former Visiting Professor at London Metropolitan University. With over 15 years in the industry, Smilansky is an impactful thought-leader, entrepreneur and innovator in experiential marketing, co-founding her first company BlazinStar Experiential back in 2003.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/12/2017

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749480967

Ebook: 9780749480974 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Communications

Table of Contents

1 An experiential revolution: the accelerating transformation of business and marketing

1 What is experiential marketing?

2 A whole new world: millennials, brand experiences and social media

3 The experience economy is here

4 Concept stores, the future of retail and pop-ups

5 Digital experiences, artificial intelligence in marketing and merged realities

6 The BETTER creative model: how to create unique experiential marketing ideas

2 SET MESSAGE: an activation framework for your experiential marketing strategy

7 Situation and background: exploring the business context for experiential marketing

8 Experiential objectives: how to creatively define and set your goals

9 Target audience: gathering holistic insights and understanding of your customers

10 Message: key communication of your brand message using experiential marketing

11 Experiential strategy: how to develop live brand experience strategies and frameworks

12 Selected locations and brand ambassadors for your experiential marketing strategy

13 Systems and mechanisms for measurement for experiential marketing planning

14 Action: how to deliver and project manage live brand experiences

15 Gauging effectiveness: creating a realworld test-and-learn approach for experiential marketing environments

16 Evaluation: interpreting and monitoring tangible results from experiential marketing

17 Conclusion: planning for the future of experiential marketing

Persuasive Copywriting

Cut Through the Noise and Communicate With Impact

This book

• Explains how to amplify engagement by tapping into consumer emotions with practical, psychology-driven techniques

• Inspires the confidence and dexterity to sell and deliver stand out copy in a variety of creative contexts

• Includes exclusive interview insights across the creative industry from high profile copywriters, ad agencies and market leaders

• New to this edition: four new chapters placing copywriting in context: content marketing, creativity, storytelling and the impact of mobile and social channels; how to sell, quantify, brief and critique copy; plus brand new interview insights directly from the industry

Description

Enhance your copywriting skills with psychology-driven techniques to create stand out copy that taps into consumer decision making and sells, using this second edition of the ultimate copywriting survival guide for the 21st century - essential to every marketing or creative professional's bookshelf.

With many professionals now developing their skills on the job, it is notoriously difficult to benchmark successful copy. This book provides a step up for those who already know the basics of writing copy, and are seeking more advanced, psychology-driven techniques to gain the competitive edge. With practical insight into human decision making and consumer engagement, it will inspire the clear-cut confidence needed to create, quantify, and sell stand out copy in a cluttered marketplace.

Complementing the 'how to' perspective of copywriting, with impressive interviews from leading ad agencies and copywriters across the globe, this second edition addresses the everyday issues faced in a multitude of roles, including:

-Practical advice to measure and benchmark effective copy

-Guidance on creating and critiquing briefs

-New chapters on how to weave copywriting skills into the wider industry

-Storytelling and content marketing

-The impact of evolving channels like mobile and social media

Practical, inspiring and extremely digestible, Persuasive Copywriting is the only vibrant, all-encompassing guide to copywriting that you need.

Author Information

Andy Maslen is Managing Director of Sunfish, a writing agency specializing in corporate communications, direct marketing and digital content, and CEO of the Andy Maslen Copywriting Academy. A lifetime fellow of the Institute of Direct and Digital Marketing, Maslen works globally with clients such as the NHS, Prudential, The Economist, BBC Worldwide, Hamleys, London Stock Exchange, RSPB, The New York Times and PricewaterhouseCoopers. He is co-founder of the Copy Cabana conference and a bestselling author of numerous fiction and non-fiction books.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/01/2019

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749483661

Ebook: 9780749483678

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Marketing Communications

Table of Contents

1

Copywriting in context

1 Creativity – A genuinely marketable skill?

2 The right and wrong way to judge copy

3 The impact of new channels – From mobile to social

4 Blood brothers or ugly sisters – How do copy and content fit together?

2

Motivation versus reason – Tapping into your customer’s deepest drives

5 Harnessing the power of emotional copywriting to persuade your prospects

6 Three big ideas you should use for copy before highlighting the "benefits"

7 A powerful process for developing customer empathy through copy

8 Copywriting hacks – Flattery will get you everywhere

9 The ancient Greek secret of emotionally engaging copy

10 Copywriting and connecting on social media

11 Creating calls to action – Top tips to bring home the bacon

3 The pleasure principle – Making your writing more enjoyable and compelling

12 Balancing pleasure and profit – Five techniques to write fantastic copy

13 How to engage your imagination and free your creativity

14 Tone and technique in copy – Finding your voice (and that of others)

15 The definitive guide to when grammar matters in copywriting

16 Injecting life into your sales pitch – An ageold method

Inspiring Green Consumer Choices

Leverage Neuroscience to Reshape Marketplace Behavior

This book

• Uses neuroscience to explain the "say-do" gap in sustainable consumer behavior and how to overcome it

• Outlines how marketers can design informational campaigns to encourage more sustainable selections

• Explains how to leverage psychological framing effects, design choice architecture and pricing strategies to disrupt habits and promote sustainable behavior

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398601000

Ebook: 9781398601017

Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Description

While many consumers profess a desire to help end climate change by engaging in more sustainable behaviors, consumer behavior experts note the "say-do" gap between expressed intention and behavior. How do we explain this? What, if anything, can consumers be encouraged to do to close this gap and purchase sustainable products and services?

Inspiring Green Consumer Choices explains the factors that underlie the discrepancy between consumers' expressed preferences and their incongruous behavior in the marketplace. Drawing from advances in neuroscience, behavioral economics and experimental psychology, the author reveals how marketplace behavior is not always rational. Instead it is frequently the product of mental shortcuts, triggered by situational cues and colored by implicit emotional responses. In making purchasing decisions, routine consumer behavior is governed less by intention than by mental habits and unconscious response biases.

These tendencies are difficult (but not impossible) to change. Inspiring Green Consumer Choices outlines how techniques such as psychological framing, design of choice architectures and pricing strategy can be used to disrupt habits and promote sustainable behavior. The author also addresses the role that legislative policy and changing social norms can play in accelerating and sustaining behavior change. Illustrated with case studies and filled with best practices, Inspiring Green Consumer Choices helps marketers understand how consumers make purchase decisions in order to shift consumption choices towards a more sustainable future.

Author Information

Michael E. Smith is an applied cognitive neuroscientist and consumer insights professional with over three decades of research experience in the human brain and behavioral sciences. He is Principal Scientist and Founder of Adaptation Research and is based in La Jolla, California. He previously served as Vice President of Consumer Neuroscience at Nielsen and was President of CorTechs Labs Inc. He was also Program Officer in Cognitive Neuroscience at the US National Science Foundation. He has held numerous research and teaching positions, written for peer-reviewed journals and trade publications, and speaks at industry conferences.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Conscious Resource Limits and Mental Shortcuts

2 Reward Anticipation and Approach Motivation

3 Habits and their Triggers Along the Path to Purchase

4 Making it Easier to Change Habitual Behaviors

5 The Role of Policy in Incentivizing Consumption Changes

6 Reprogramming the "Behavioral Immune System"

7 Using Social Norms to Accelerate and Sustain Behavior Change

8 Overcoming Resistance to Behavior Change

9 Conclusion

The New Chameleons

How to Connect with Consumers Who Defy Categorization

This book

• Identifies the unique and complex relationships modern consumers form with products and services

• Discloses how many of the most fundamental assumptions marketers use to understand customers actually don't make sense anymore

• Illustrates the breaking of traditional boundaries using examples such as bitmojis, avatars, video games, Augmented Reality, the sharing economy and unisex clothing brands

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2021

Price: £14.99

Paperback: 9781398600041

Ebook: 9781398600058

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 220x130

Product Category: General Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Description

WINNER: NYC Big Book Award 2021 - Marketing & PR

Consumers are changing but the marketing categories used to identify them have not. Engage with this new generation of consumers who increasingly take for granted that products and advertising will blend their multiple brand identities rather than market to them as a specific subculture.

Male or female, work or play, online or offline. These and other market categories are no longer relevant as modern consumers defy traditional boundaries and identify as members of multiple subcultures. The New Chameleons reveals how to engage with this new generation and how to stand out among the competition.

Global consumer behavior expert Michael R. Solomon directs marketers to move beyond their traditional categories and communicate with consumers as individuals rather than as a market segment. He explains how traditional marketing is based on the assumption of boundaries between us and them, the individual and the collective, producer and consumer, work and play, humans vs. computers, and editorial vs. commercial. He then shows how those boundaries are blurring: people identify with members of multiple subcultures; individuals seek collective advice before making a purchase; consumers no longer distinguish between purchases online or in-store; consumer-generated content becomes the norm; gender identity is fluid; gamification strategies turn work into play; and identity marketing becomes more popular.

Combining history, data, experience and examples, The New Chameleons is written for every marketer (or reader) who wants to offer products and services that resonate with consumers now and in the future.

Author Information

Michael R. Solomon is professor of marketing in the Haub School of Business at Saint Joseph's University and he resides in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. He advises global clients in leading industries on marketing strategies to make them more consumer-centric. He is the author of several leading textbooks on marketing, consumer behavior, advertising and social media.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1

The evolution of marketing categories

2 Consumers who defy demographic labels

3 Consumers who defy traditional purchasing behavior

4 Consumers who defy the bricks vs. clicks debate

5 Consumers who defy buyers vs. sellers

6 Consumers who defy traditional sex roles and gender stereotypes

7 Consumers who defy the separation of brand and identity

8 Consumers who defy boundaries of traditional media

9 A fond farewell to dichotomies we love

Innovative B2B Marketing

New Models, Processes and Theory

This book

• Illustrates new approaches, models and solutions to help deal with any B2B marketing challenge

• Written by one of the leading voices in the B2B marketing sphere who brings a wealth of insight and information sourced from firsthand experience

• Online resources: case studies, web links to insightful videos and articles, and presentation slides with helpful templates

• New to this edition: new chapters on customer attrition, B2B partnership marketing and lead nurturing, new research on influencer marketing and the behaviours of millennial customers

Description

Navigate the B2B marketing sphere with this fully updated guide on how to better understand new customer habits, the digital era and how to shift away from outdated traditional practices.

Innovative B2B Marketing is an essential guide for marketers looking for the latest approaches, models and solutions for B2B marketing. Written by one of the leading voices in the B2B marketing sphere who works with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) and other major associations, this book features real-life examples from a diverse range of sectors including marine, information technology and pharmaceutical, plus topical discussion points and challenges from key B2B marketing forums and associations.

Now fully updated, the second edition of Innovative B2B Marketing features new chapters on customer attrition, B2B partnership marketing and lead nurturing, as well as further content on influencer marketing and the behaviours of millennial customers. It is accompanied by online resources which consist of case studies, web links to insightful videos and articles, and presentation slides with practical models and templates.

Author Information

Simon Hall, based in Berkshire, UK, is a marketing innovator with 25 years' experience in Technology and Services Marketing. He is the Managing Director and Founder of NextGen Marketing Solutions, a B2B marketing and business consultancy. Previously UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell, he has also held senior roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. He is a Course Director with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), and lectures at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a B2B council member with the Data and Marketing Association (DMA) and the author of B2B Digital Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/08/2022

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398604766

Ebook: 9781398604773 Pages: 376

Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: B2B Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction to business marketing

Developing your marketing strategy

The new marketing mix

B2B marketing strategy and planning

Improve B2B customer-centric marketing

Business customers and buying behaviours

Acquisition marketing

Retention and loyalty marketing

Marketing for preventing customer attrition

C-suite marketing

B2B product and solutions marketing

‘Transform’ through content and digital marketing

Digital and content marketing

Digital marketing strategy and planning

B2B digital marketing channels

Content marketing

B2B social media marketing

B2B brand building

‘Collaborate’ with partners

Partnership marketing

B2B influencer marketing

The modern B2B channel landscape

Marketing to and through channel partners

Optimizing marketing execution

Sales and marketing alignment

Account-based marketing

Lead generation

Lead nurturing

Modern B2B events marketing

Measuring and evaluating B2B marketing

B2B Marketing Strategy

Differentiate, Develop and Deliver Lasting Customer Engagement

This book

• Refocus on the outcome of marketing, rather than the tactics used in marketing, as the only way to win ongoing customer engagement

• Confronts and refutes widely accepted, but misguided, beliefs that are currently dominating the B2B marketing realm, and uses case studies and evidence to prove how they are misleading

• Features practical advice and real-world case studies including Apple, Volvo & NHS, to identify the model's effectiveness in realworld B2B marketing environments

• Presents a completely original model - the 3D Marketing Strategy - to shift focus from continually changing technologies and channels to lasting customer engagement and measurable results

Description

B2B marketing is functioning in an increasingly fast-paced and complex business landscape, with a wealth of new technologies, tools and channels, and where customers are more in control of the buying process than ever before. With the imperative to become 'digital', B2B marketers have become consumed by the marketing activity itself - the tactics - instead of the outcomes marketers want and need to achieve for customers and businesses. B2B Marketing Strategy provides fresh insight into the challenges marketers are facing in such an environment and offers a new framework for developing B2B marketing strategy and plans.

Written by an internationally recognised and award winning senior marketing strategist, B2B Marketing Strategy is a thought-provoking and comprehensive exploration of the state of B2B marketing. Expertly examined, this book will challenge the perspective of B2B marketers by confronting and refuting the many fallacies that currently dominate the industry. Filled with real-world case studies and practical, actionable insights, B2B Marketing Strategy takes the reader through three phases of thinking, doing and being different in order to make B2B marketing memorable in the hearts and minds of customers, creating lasting customer engagement.

Author Information

Heidi Taylor is a consultant, speaker and prolific blogger with a significant global following. Her expertise is in strategy and creating powerful multi-channel, multi-format marketing campaigns. In 2015 Heidi Taylor was named a top 25 UK B2B Marketing Influencer by Onalytica. She has won two awards at the Chartered Institute of Marketing's prestigious annual Marketing Excellence Awards, including the coveted overall Marketer of the Year.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2017

Price: £21.99

Paperback: 9780749481063

Ebook: 9780749481070

Pages: 216 Format (mm): 233x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Think Different - Fallacy #1; Marketing Has Forever and Fundamentally Changed

1 Change Happens – The Seismic Shift in Our B2B Marketing Environment

2 All That Glitters – B2B Marketing’s Obsession With the Latest Tools and Tactics

3 5 Essential Steps to Think Different

2 Do Different - Fallacy #2; The Marketing Plan is The Marketing Strategy

4 Getting Back to Basics – Brand, Strategy, Customers and Measurement

5 An Introduction to 3D MarketingDifferentiate, Develop and Deliver

6 5 Essential Steps to Do Different

3 Be Different - Fallacy #3; The Purpose of Marketing is Lead Generation

7 What is the Purpose of Marketing?

8 7 rules of Engagement For The Social Era

9 Taking a Big Idea to Market – 5 Lessons

10 5 Essential Steps to Be Different

4 Conclusion

11 Tactics are For The Moment, Ideas are Forever

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy

How to Use New Frameworks and Models to Achieve Growth

This book

• Gives clear, direct explanations of the more advanced aspects of digital B2B marketing, and makes these accessible and user-friendly

• Expertly explains the most up-to-date digital frameworks relevant to the B2B marketing sphere, and shows how to implement these to achieve lead generation, customer retention and data management

• Is due to be the set text for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)'s course Advanced B2B Digital Marketing, and recommended reading for the courses B2B Acquisition and Retention Marketing, and Introduction to B2B Digital Marketing

• Includes a wealth of global case studies, featuring companies such as Danfoss, American Express, IBM, Schneider Electric and more

Description

Harness the most up-to-date techniques, frameworks and skills for effective B2B digital marketing, with this essential handbook as recommended by the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM).

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy is a decisive guide to the most recent developments in the field. It gives readers an overview of the latest frameworks and models, and shows how these can be used to overcome the everyday challenges associated with account targeting, data utilization, and digital campaign management.

Intensely practical, B2B Digital Marketing Strategy helps readers get to grips with some of the more advanced and complex elements of B2B marketing. It expertly explains how to incorporate the latest digital methodologies into critical processes such as lead generation, customer retention and customer experience personalization. Packed with global case studies and examples, this book is an invaluable resource for any professional operating in the B2B space.

Author Information

Simon Hall, Berkshire, UK is a marketing innovator with around 25 years' experience in Technology and Services Marketing. In his former career, he served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as many senior European roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In addition to running courses and workshops with companies on various B2B marketing and digital marketing areas, Simon Hall also lectures final year university students and degree apprentices in strategy, and marketing at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, of the DMA B2B Council, and a Global Thought Leader in B2B Marketing for the ICG Group (a global consulting company). He is the founder of NextGen Marketing Solutions and author of Innovative B2B Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 13/08/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789662542

Ebook: 9781789662559

Pages: 352

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: B2B Marketing

Table of Contents

The new evolving business landscape

DEVELOPING THE B2B DIGITAL STRATEGY

B2B digital marketing strategy

B2B customer journeys and the customer experience

B2B personalization marketing and buyer personas

B2B customer insights and data management

2 THE EARLY BUYER JOURNEY STAGE

Generating awareness

B2B SEO and search strategies

B2B websites and website strategies

Digital for lead generation and lead nurturing

B2B digital marketing for lead generation

B2B digital and lead nurturing

Digital campaign management and integration

B2B content marketing

B2B digital marketing campaign planning

Digital integration marketing in B2B

Digital marketing and sales

Measuring digital marketing

Digital for retaining customers

Types of digital retention marketing

Digital retention marketing channels

B2B social media and digital marketing platforms

B2B social media marketing strategy

B2B digital marketing technologies and platforms

Index

B2B Customer Experience

A Practical Guide to Delivering Exceptional CX

This book

• Provides an accessible and practical approach on how to construct a B2B core customer experience (CX) strategy using AI

• Demonstrates a useful framework that gives practical key pointers to the design, delivery and measurement of the B2B customer experience

• Features case studies and examples from leading companies such as Zappos, Nordstrom and John Lewis

• New to this edition: new tactics and strategies to build an effective customer experience plan and expert guidance on how to use AI to deliver great customer experience, plus new case studies

Description

Use this bestselling and practical guide to steer you through how to create exceptional customer experience for the modern B2B consumer. This new edition explores key topics such as AI, the role of IT in customer experience and customer relationship management.

B2B Customer Experience shows readers how to deliver the very best customer experience within the business-to-business industry. Intensely practical in its approach, it is divided into five parts to walk readers through the journey of planning, mapping, structuring, implementing and controlling an effective customer experience, all bespoke for the B2B environment.

Now newly revised, this new edition will provide new case studies demonstrating what makes for good or bad customer experience as well as providing new tactics and strategies that will help build an effective customer experience plan. This new edition also aims to guide the reader on how to successfully incorporate AI into their strategy whilst still delivering great customer experience.

Discussing some of the best-known examples of consumer-focused customer experiences from companies such as Zappos, Nordstrom and John Lewis, B2B Customer Experience is the must-have text for any marketing professional working within a B2B environment.

Author Information

Nick Hague, based in Manchester, UK, is co-founder and Head of Growth at B2B International. He is also a host on the B2B Insights Podcast in which he interviews experts on customer experience and branding.

Paul Hague, based in Manchester, UK, is co- founder of B2B International. With 45 years of experience running market research agencies, his clients include Samsung, Microsoft, Henkel and Michelin. He has over 35 years of practical experience in running a successful market research agency and is the author of Market Research in Practice 5e and The Business Model Handbook, also published by Kogan Page

Edition: 2

Date: 03/05/2023

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398608511

Ebook: 9781398608528

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Table of Contents

Why Bother?

What is customer experience and what triggers it?

The importance of customer experience

The Net Promoter Score and customer experience

A Plan For Delivering Excellent Customer Experience

The six pillars of customer experience

Staying on track

Staying ahead of the competition

Drivers of customer experience

Customer experience throughout the customer journey

3 Turning The Customer Experience Plan Into Action

The long and the short of customer experience

Selling your customer experience strategy within your company

Building a customer experience culture

Horses for courses

Getting the right people

Linking Customer Experience To The 4Ps

How your brand affects customer experience

How your products affects customer experience

How your prices affects customer experience

How distribution and the supply chain affects customer experience

How advertising and promotions affects customer experience

The Role Of IT In Customer Experience

Make or break

Customer relationship management

Moving Forward

Continuous improvement in customer experience

Selling Transformed

Develop the Sales Values which Deliver Competitive Advantage

This book

• Introduces a new framework that will help sales people dramatically improve their performance by providing a better customer experience

• Presents a range of case studies from diverse global organizations including Starbucks and Hewlett Packard

• Provides models, diagrams and selfassessment questionnaires which will help sellers develop more customer-focused mindsets

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789665352

Ebook: 9781789665369

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x159

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Description

Learn how to develop the values proven to boost sales performance, to ensure customers choose you over the competition in today's crowded marketplace.

For years, sales people have struggled with cliched views of how they sell, while at the same time customers have become more sophisticated and discerning, stopping off at different or unconventional places in the sales funnel. The result is that the technique of sales people controlling the sales conversation and learning how to influence the customer no longer works. Selling Transformed introduces the new world of selling, and addresses the reasons why sales people are so poorly perceived.

Selling Transformed provides fresh, tangible ideas on how to develop better sales practices. Focusing as much on the customers as on the sellers, it explains key theories of selling effectively and introduces four proven strategies that are based on the values customers look for in sales people: authenticity, client-centricity, proactive creativity and being tactfully audacious. Explaining what customers look for in sales people, and advising on how to develop and deliver these values, this is a new type of sales manual guaranteed to improve sales performance.

Author Information

Dr Philip Squire is CEO of Consalia, a sales consulting group. Based in Surrey, UK, he has for over 20 years provided sales consulting education services and training to brands including Apple, AT&T, Ford, Hertz, HP, Pirelli, Royal Caribbean, SAP and Zurich Financial Services. He is a subject matter expert for the UK Trail Blazer undergraduate apprenticeship sales degrees and is co-founder of the International Journal of Sales

Transformation

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 How history informs current sales practice

2 Sales psychology and the pressure of time

3 Changing sources of competitive advantage require a new selling paradigm

4 A new paradigm of selling based on values - the research journey

5 Values creating a positive or negative selling experience

6 Values that are an antecedent to trust

7 Principle one - the value of authenticity

8 Principle two - the value of clientcentricity

9 Principle three - the value of proactive creativity

10 Principle four - the value of tactful audacity

11 Royal Caribbean International case study: turning a potential disaster into an opportunity

12 The role of leadership in transforming sales

13 Looking to the future

Implementing Key Account Management

Designing Customer-Centric Processes for Mutual Growth

This book

• Features case studies from diverse sectors including professional services (Ernst & Young), financial services (FM), manufacturing (Rolls-Royce), services (EMCOR, FM Global), pharmaceuticals (Pfizer), and engineering (AMEY)

• Combines ground-breaking research with experience from recognized thought leaders of Cranfield School of Management

• Offers an integrative Key Account Management framework that senior executives can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2018

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749482756

Ebook: 9780749482763 Pages: 352

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Description

Implementing Key Account Management is a highly practical handbook that guides readers through the realities of rolling out a functional key account management programme. The book offers an integrated framework for key account management (KAM) that businesses can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes, enabling them to overcome the obstacles that organizations often face when rolling out their strategies.

Bringing together the experiences of leading experts within this field, Implementing Key Account Management draws on two decades of research and best practice from Cranfield University School of Management, one of the foremost centres for researcher and thought leadership in KAM. Between them, the authors have designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Rolls-Royce, Unilever, Vodafone, The Economist and many more. Rigorously researched, well-grounded and practical, this book is - quite simply - the definitive, go-to resource for implementing key account management programmes.

Author Information

Javier Marcos has designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Barclays, Cap Gemini, GKN Aerospace, Rolls-Royce and Unilever.

Mark Davies acts as Visiting Fellow for Cranfield School of Management and facilitates the Cranfield KAM Best Practice Research Club.

Rodrigo Guesalaga is Senior Lecturer at Cranfield School of Management, Associate Professor at Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile, and Visiting Professor at Vlerick Business School.

Sue Holt is Director of the Cranfield School of Management's flagship Open Programme on KAM.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to implementing key account management

1

Re-engaging strategic customers

2 Adopting key account management

3 Building customer understanding and value planning

4 Developing customer relationships

2 Developing winning offerings

5 Creating compelling customer value propositions

6 Co-creating value with key customers

3 Designing customer-centric approaches and processes

7 The role of the key account manager and the KAM team

8 Measuring KAM performance

Motivating, incentivizing and rewarding for KAM

10 KAM and procurement: the buyer’s perspective and value-based negotiation

11 International key account management

4 Assessing your KAM programme: a framework

12 The KAM Framework

13 Epilogue: Final word on implementing KAM from a global practitioner at Unilever Food Solutions

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management

This book

• Understand the balance between achieving growth through the development of key accounts and serving key accounts, without letting costs become prohibitive

• Implement best practice in key account management in a confident and successful manner through a highly practical, step-bystep approach

• Benefit from rich learning features, including mini-cases, narratives, examples, diagrams, and visually represented models

• Online resources: include a bonus chapter, case studies, self-test questions, figures and tables, a template for creating your own KAM plan and suggested further reading

• Written by authors with over 20 years experience researching, teaching and consulting on key account management

Description

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management explores the challenges of winning, retaining and developing key accounts. Key accounts are customers who help their suppliers grow, and consequently, they wield significant power. Although they are the key to market share and revenue growth, the costs of serving key accounts can erode profitability unless they are thoroughly understood and managed.

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management takes a step-by-step approach to presenting best practice in key account management. Whether your business is starting up or well-established, there is always more to discover about improving the way value is created between you and your most important customers. Malcolm McDonald and Beth Rogers have spent over twenty years researching, teaching and consulting on key account management, and have condensed their knowledge into this book, focusing on making it clear, concise and easy to use.

Author Information

Professor Malcolm McDonald was formerly a Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management and is now an Emeritus Professor. Based in the UK, he is also an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and the author of Malcolm MacDonald on Marketing Planning, also published by Kogan Page.

Dr Beth Rogers was formerly a Business Development Manager at Portsmouth Business School and chaired project board developing National Occupational Standards for UK professional sales. Based in the UK, she is now the Director of two organisations and writes articles for business publications.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2017

Price: £21.99

Paperback: 9780749480776

Ebook: 9780749480790

Pages: 248

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Table of Contents

1

Introducing key account management

2 The role of key accounts in achieving business growth

3 Selecting the right key accounts

4 Understanding buying decisions

5 Key account plans

6 Understanding account-based marketing

7 People and skills for key account management

8 Going global with key accounts

9 The risks of key account management

10 The future of key account management

Appendix 1: The McDonald and Rogers 10 guidelines for profitable key account management

Appendix 2: A quiz for key account managers

Appendix 3: Important research articles on key account management

Key Account Management

Tools and Techniques for Achieving Profitable Key Supplier Status

This book

Focuses on practical implementation rather than the theory of account management

Helps boost account management effectiveness with practical tools including new and updated online resources

Brings the elements of key account management together to help practitioners form and implement their own strategy

Online resources: Helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests

Edition: 6

Date: 03/02/2015

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749469405

Ebook: 9780749469412 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Description

An organization's key accounts are its lifeblood. Key account management focuses on the long-term investment of resources in customers that can offer an exceptional return on resources. But which are the key accounts? Are they the ones growing the fastest? The ones that are most financially secure? Or are they the ones that shout the loudest? Key Account Management puts forward a straightforward and effective planning methodology.

This fully updated 6th edition of Key Account Management takes a long-term, teamselling strategic view of the whole process, from defining the customer, to managing the relationship and achieving key supplier status. With coverage of latest best practice including IT's role in account management, plus new case studies, online supporting resources and a new section comparing how different industries/markets approach key account management, it stands alone as the premier book on managing key customers.

Online resources include helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests to ensure that best practice is being followed.

Author Information

Peter Cheverton is Director of Insight Marketing & People, now established as the leading international training and consultancy firm in KAM implementation, working in more than thirty countries including Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, India, Italy, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, Poland, Singapore, South Africa, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, the United Kingdom and the United States, with a client list that includes some of the world's major blue chip companies. He is also the author of Understanding the Professional Buyer and Global Account Management (both published by Kogan Page).

Table of Contents

Definitions and purpose

The key account approach

Why Key Account Management?

The spectrum of KAM ambition

What is a key account?

What is Key Account Management?

Analysis: opportunity and value

Knowing the market, knowing your value

Knowing the people, knowing your value

Relationship management

From ‘bow-ties’ to ‘diamonds’

Decision mapping and contact strategies

The good, the bad, the sad and the ugly

Achieving key supplier status

The purchasing revolution

Supply chain management: seeking value

Purchasing organization: rationalization and centralization

Supplier positioning: managing suppliers

Achieving strategic supplier status

Being of strategic value

How do they plan to grow?

How do they aim to win?

What drives them?

A shared future?

The value proposition

The customer’s total business experience

The customer’s activity cycle

Measuring the value – securing the reward

Making the proposal

Planning and joint planning

The key account plan

planning

classification

distinction

Account Management

Making it happen

Sins and requirements

and organization

Skills, attitudes and behaviours

The role of information technology

Measuring customer profitability

The implementation plan

Training and further help

A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing

Accelerating Growth in Strategic Accounts

This book

• Provides step-by-step guidance on harnessing account-based marketing techniques and setting up ABM programmes to deliver successful B2B marketing

• Includes guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and managing your ABM career

• Contains case studies from organizations including Microsoft, Accenture, O2 and Fujitsu and insights from experienced ABM professionals

• New to this edition: updates to the ABM adoption model, further material on quantified value propositions, new and updated case studies and examples and updated wider research

Description

As some of today's major and complex companies are worth more than the GDPs of some countries, traditional marketing approaches, such as glossy corporate campaigns, will have limited returns.

Account-based marketing, also known as client-centric marketing, treats important individual accounts as markets in their own right, to help strengthen relationships, build reputation, and increase revenues in important accounts.

A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing outlines a clear, step-by-step process for readers to harness ABM tools and techniques and set up ABM programmes. Featuring insights from practising professionals and case studies from organizations including Fujitsu, Infosys, Microsoft, O2 and ServiceNow, it also contains guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and managing your ABM career.

This updated second edition contains further discussion on how ABM initiatives can go from a pilot to being embedded in a business, new material on quantified value propositions and updated wider research. Meticulously researched and highly practical, A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing will help all marketers to deliver successful B2B marketing.

Author Information

Bev Burgess, based in Kent, UK, is a Senior Advisory to ITSMA's global ABM practice and Founder and Managing Principal at Inflexion Group. Since she codified ABM in 2003, she has personally helped over 40 of the world's most influential firms accelerate account growth using ABM techniques through her consulting, training and thought leadership.

Dave Munn, based in Massachusetts, US, is a recognized thought leader in B2B services and solutions marketing. As President and CEO of ITSMA, he has led the way in defining and inspiring excellence within the ITSMA global community. Dave helped pioneer the discipline of Account-Based Marketing (ABM) in the early 2000s and is co-author of the first and second edition of, A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398600874

Ebook: 9781398600898

Pages: 312

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Table of Contents

1 Setting up an account-based marketing programme

1 The essentials of account-based marketing

2 Building the right foundations for accountbased marketing

3 Investing in the right tools and technologies

4 Deciding which accounts to focus on

The ABM adoption model

2 Account-based marketing step by step

Knowing what is driving the account

Playing to the client’s needs

Mapping and profiling stakeholders

Developing targeted value propositions

Planning integrated sales and marketing campaigns

Executing integrated campaigns

Evaluating results and updating plans

Developing your career as an accountbased marketer

The competencies you need to do accountbased marketing

Managing your ABM career

Index

Sales and Marketing Channels

How to Build and Manage Distribution Strategy

This book

• Provides a complete economic framework for analyzing any channel partner (distributor, reseller or retailer) and a new series of multisector insights

• Enables a defined go-to-market strategy and forecasting for emerging channels and technology

• Supports the allocation of scarce resources for the highest returns, and channel negotiation from positions of market strength or weakness

• New to this edition: multi-sector focus, the emergence of the cloud, new consumer channels, the switch from products to services, the 'gig economy' and monetizing intellectual property

• Online resources: Bonus chapters on how to engage with retailers, franchised systems, and managing the people-based business model

Edition: 3

Date: 03/04/2018

Price: £31.99

Paperback: 9780749482145

Ebook: 9780749482152 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Global Brand Management

A Guide to Developing, Building & Managing an International Brand

This book

• Prepares students to manage an existing global brand, as well as providing the basic considerations and strategies for developing and building a new one

• Features perspectives from world class practitioners to demonstrate the crucial importance of global brands effectively adapting to different languages, cultural values and commerce laws

• Demonstrates the essential role that flex and elasticity play in enabling a brand to maintain a distinct and unified identity across global borders

• Includes detailed case studies from Oreo, McDonalds, Harley Davidson, Tropicana and Xiaomi, and guest contributions from a range of international entrepreneurs, strategists and marketers

• Online Resources: Chapter PowerPoints, chapter summaries, test banks, sample syllabus

• Features a foreword by Mark Tungate: Editorial Director of the Epica awards, and author of multiple books on branding published by Kogan Page

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2019

Price: £39.99

Paperback: 9780749483609

Ebook: 9780749483616 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x167

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

Table of Contents

1

Theoretical and strategic foundations

A definition of brands and branding

2 The strategic role branding plays

Internal branding vs. external branding

MarTech, Programmatic, and more technological innovations

2 Practical and tactical applications

Brand foundational development

Brand actualization

Branding and the marketing communication ecosystem

Brand management

3 Branding issues and opportunities

Branding in a global economy

Brand architecture

Speciality application areas

12 Digital asset management (of branding elements)

The New Strategic Brand Management

This book

• Reveals and explains the latest branding techniques used by companies worldwide

• Includes expert advice on best practice for adding culture and content into brands

• Enables students and practitioners to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline

• Contains a section on brand valuation which illuminates the complex strategies behind how brands are ranked in the media

Edition: 5

Date: 03/01/2012

Price: £42.99

Paperback: 9780749465155

Ebook: 9780749465162 Pages: 512 Format (mm): 245x188

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

Description

Adopted internationally by business schools and MBA programmes, this book is the ultimate resource for senior strategists, positioning professionals and postgraduate students to understand and overcome the challenges of brand management and strategy today, written by the leading international expert of branding, Jean-Noël Kapferer.

The New Strategic Brand Management is simply the reference source for branding professionals and postgraduate students. Over the years it has not only established a reputation as one of the leading works on brand strategy, but also has become synonymous with the topic itself.

Using an array of international case studies, this book covers all the leading issues faced by brand strategists today, with both gravitas and intelligent insight. It reveals new thinking on topics such as putting culture and content into brands, the impact of private labels and the comeback of local brands.

This updated fifth edition builds on the book's already impressive reputation, including new content that will help students and practitioners stay up to date with targeting, with relevant research and market knowledge to support the discipline.

With dedicated sections for specific types of brands (luxury, corporate and retail), international examples and case studies from companies such as Audi, Nivea, Toyota and Absolut Vodka; plus models and frameworks such as the Brand Identity Prism; The New Strategic Brand Management remains at the forefront of strategic brand thinking.

Author Information

Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of the world's foremost thought leaders on luxury brands. An active researcher, he is an HEC Paris graduate and holds a PhD from Northwestern University's Kellogg Business School. Kapferer is author of Kapferer on Luxury and co-author of The Luxury Strategy (both published by Kogan Page). He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury worldwide at institutions including HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

Table of Contents

1 Introduction - Building the Brand when the Clients Are Empowered

Why is Branding So Strategic?

Brand Equity in Question

Strategic Implications of Branding

Brand and Business Models

Brand Diversity - How Specific Are Different Sectors?

Managing Retail Brands

The Challenges of Modern Markets

The New Brand Management

Brand Identity and Positioning

Creating and Sustaining Brand Equity

Launching the Brand

Growing the Brand

Sustaining a Brand Long Term

Brand and Products - Identity and Change

Growth Through Brand Extensions

Brand Architecture

Multi-Brand Portfolios

Handling Name Changes and Brand Transfers

Brand Turnaround and Rejuvenation

Managing Global Brands

Brand Valuation

Financial Valuation and Accounting for Brands

International Brand Strategy

A Guide to Achieving Global Brand Growth

This book

• Provides the necessary tools to create more informed marketing strategies, enabling brands to thrive in foreign markets

• Delivers a proven, repeatable methodology that can be adapted to any product, industry or region

• Helps organizations engage more effectively with buyers in the foreign market, and seize market opportunities promptly

• Contains clear, practical tips to recognize and avoid the most common pitfalls when entering new markets

• Helps readers understand the dynamic of product, price and value from a foreign market's perspective

Description

In theory, the Internet allows all brands to market internationally. But in practice, most companies struggle to compete outside their home market. Written from a marketing practitioner's perspective, International Brand Strategy evens the playing field with clear, actionable techniques to guide any organization going through the process. This book helps companies build sales in foreign markets, but just as important it helps them thrive by maintaining price integrity and building brand equity at the same time.

With the guidance provided in International Brand Strategy companies hit the ground running in foreign markets. This provides a competitive advantage from day one, empowers companies to avoid costly mistakes, and saves months of trial and error. The book lays out a unique methodology for managing brands abroad that can be implemented for any product in any market. These methods have proven their value for companies large and small across six continents. The book guides readers with pragmatic models and a wealth of examples from global companies such as Target Canada, Unilever and Apple.

International Brand Strategy was written for those who are planning to enter a new market and for those who are already there but wish to improve their brand's performance. It helps the reader recognize some of the most common pitfalls and how to avoid them, provides practical tips to understand the dynamics of price, product and value from a foreign buyer's perspective, and defines a conceptual framework to assess and improve brand equity at home and abroad.

Author Information

Sean Duffy is founder and CEO of Duffy Agency, based in Boston MA, USA and Malmö, Sweden. He is Adjunct Professor in International Strategic Marketing at Lund University School of Economics & Management, Sweden and contributes to its Masters Programme in Entrepreneurship. He has served two terms as European Governor of TAAN Worldwide, and was previously creative director with MullenLowe Group / IPG, Sweden.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666298

Ebook: 9781789666304

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Branding

Table of Contents

Preparation

Why brands fail abroad

The business case for entering a foreign market

Choosing the right market

The difference between domestic and international brand building

Defining an approach to international markets

Preparing the brand for travel

The new market

Understanding the mechanics of building brand equity abroad

Setting realistic expectations

Dealing with language

Assembling the right team

Segmenting the market and targeting

Understanding local buyers in foreign markets

Understanding local competitors from the buyer’s POV

Seeing your product from the local buyer’s POV

Seeing your product’s price from the local buyer’s POV

Seeing your brand’s value from the local buyer’s POV

Creating an international web presence

Responding to the market

Get moving

Engaging company leadership

A different type of management

The renewed importance of vision and mission

Distinguish between marketing and sales

Defining success

Evaluating risk

Conclusion

Brand Strategy in Three Steps

A Purpose-Driven Approach to Branding

This book

• Breaks brand strategy into three meaningful steps: identity, intention and implementation

• Helps brand strategists align their purpose with their goals to create meaningful messaging that will leave a lasting impact on customers

• Includes examples of effective brand strategies from top brands including Mastercard, Apple, Warby Parker and Sweetgreen

• Walks readers through cultivating a valuesdriven brand identity, creating an actionable branding plan and implementing the resulting strategy

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2023

Price: £21.99

Paperback: 9781398609792

Ebook: 9781398609808 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

Description

Learn how to create an authentic and consistent brand strategy by focusing on the values of your company. This book breaks this process into three steps focused on brand identity, setting intentions and implementing the resulting strategy.

To consistently appeal to consumers, a brand needs to implement a strong strategy that delivers a memorable experience. There are two other essential stages of this process, and the companies who skip over these risk seeming out of touch and inauthentic. In Brand Strategy in Three Steps, branding coach Jay Mandel takes readers through an innovative and efficient three-step approach to brand strategy centered on identity, intention and implementation.

Brand Strategy in Three Steps highlights the importance of communicating value to consumers through meaningful interactions. Jay Mandel walks readers through the best branding strategies for new companies and established ones looking to revamp their approach, providing thoughtful exercises to help readers map a living brand document. The book helps readers through the three essential steps of brand strategy: identifying their core values as a company, determining how this relates to the product or service and tying these together when rolling out the strategy. Readers will gain the practical insight necessary to launch a successful, purposeful brand strategy and go-to-market plan.

Author Information

Jay Mandel is the founder of Your Brand Coach, a brand management company based in New York City, New York. He served as Director of Marketing at IBM, Vice President of Global Digital Marketing at Mastercard and Digital Marketing Manager at CIT. A corporate trainer for the Association of National Advertisers, he is part of the marketing faculty at Sacred Heart University and serves as an adjunct professor of marketing at Fordham University and the Fashion Institute of Technology.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Identity

Brand identity

Identifying your goals and core values

Intention

Setting intentions

Cultivating brand purpose

Creating an actionable strategy

Setting intentional goals

Implementation

Creating an actionable plan

Executing a successful branding strategy

Conclusion

New

Digital Branding

A Complete Step-by-Step Guide to Strategy, Tactics, Tools and Measurement

This book

• Provides practical tools to deliver digital branding success, such as a checklist covering the entire process, and measurement devices for multiple channels and purposes

• Illustrates how popular and established brands use digital branding to create lasting and memorable digital marketing campaigns

• Written by a respected CIM fellow, course leader and industry thought leader, who has over 20 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides

• New to this edition: a closer study of brand authenticity and ethics along with fresh case studies, updates on social media regulations and overviews of new social media platforms such as TikTok

Description

Every decision and action you make contributes to your brand, so it makes sense that everything you do digitally also contributes to your digital brand. Use this bestselling guide to strengthen your brand's online presence and explore core marketing avenues.

Digital Branding is ideal for marketers and brand strategists who want to enhance their brand's online presence. It provides step-by-step, practical guidance on how to build a brand online and quantify it through tangible results. Written by a respected Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) fellow, course leader and industry thought leader, it examines core marketing areas such as content marketing, social media, search engine optimization and web analytics.

The book delivers a robust framework for planning, brand identity, channel selection and measuring the effectiveness of campaigns, and includes lessons from the BBC, Imperial College London and Hootsuite. Now fully updated, this third edition features new content on brand authenticity, ethics and meaning, as well as updates on social media regulations and social media platforms such as TikTok.

Author Information

Daniel Rowles, based in Jersey, has more than 25 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides. He is a CIM fellow and course director and the lead judge for the CIM Marketing Excellence Awards. Rowles also lectures at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and co-hosts the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-10 business podcast on iTunes. His digital marketing company, TargetInternet.com, supports clients such as the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco. He is also the author of Building Digital Culture, Mobile Marketing and Podcasting Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/01/2022

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9781398603189

Ebook: 9781398603196 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Branding

Table of Contents

Introduction

Digital branding in perspective

What digital branding really means

Focusing on value

Considering the user journey

Objectives and authenticity

The digital toolkit

Social media

Search

Mobile

Online advertising

Email marketing

CRM and marketing automation

From integration to transmedia campaigns

Digital brand strategy and measurement

Measuring digital branding

Primaries and indicators

The role of analytics

Bridging the gaps

The importance of asking questions

Conclusion

From Marginal to Mainstream

Why Tomorrow’s Brand Growth Will Come from the Fringesand How to Get There First

This book

• Explains why the quest for incremental advantages by mainstream brands will hold back market-beating growth

• Identifies why brand managers and product development teams need to seek out the quirky and the odd

• Demonstrates the principles and ways of working that need to be applied if brands are to develop new entrepreneurial products, learned from the margins

• Features case studies from brands operating at the margins and those organizations that have leveraged the margins such as Knorr and Peroni

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398604315

Ebook: 9781398604322 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

Description

Legacy brands are struggling. All around the world, mainstream thinking is holding back mainstream growth. The quest for small advantages in established businesses and brands has become a zero-sum game - producing small share gains and losses but nothing to bring about sensational new growth.

This book shows why businesses, marketers and entrepreneurs need to break through 'mainstream inhibition' and turn their attention to the margins - to confront, evaluate and embrace the 'strangeness' of behaviours, ideas and ways of life at the fringes.

Using new research and analysis of the brands that have successfully backed marginal behaviours, Marginal to Mainstream provides a framework for understanding and evaluating untapped mainstream potential.

Marginal behaviours may be unpromising, untested, weird, even sometimes repulsive - yet they can point the way to new innovation, new routes to market and exciting new category creation.

Today's margins are tomorrow's pot of gold - if you know where and how to look.

Author Information

Helen Edwards is a branding consultant, based in London, UK, and an award-winning columnist at Marketing Week, focusing on brand positioning and brand strategy. She is the director of Passionbrand, a Teaching Fellow in Marketing at London Business School and is the author of Creating Passion Brands

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 The margins and why they matter

1 From ‘Does anyone do that?’ to ‘Doesn’t everyone do that?’

2 Why modern mainstream marketing is a low-growth zone

3 Going for growth: Why the margins? And why now?

2 How to read the margins

4 Overview

5 A smouldering fire in the fringes: the elemental beacons

6 What’s hidden, what’s there and what could be: the revelatory beacons

7 Shakers of place and pace: the opportunity beacons

8 An irresistible momentum: the growth beacons

3 A strategy for growth

Overview

Entrepreneurs get it – they are marginals too

11 Growth from the margins: a marketer’s playbook

12 The M2M advantage: seven things every leader should know

New

Fashion Brand Management

Plan, Scale and Market a Successful Fashion Business

This book

• Introduces effective strategies and tools for starting or scaling a fashion brand

• Explains key business models such as Porter's Five Forces, Generic Strategy and Diamond; Kapferer's Brand Identity Prism; The Fashion Cycle; Design Thinking; Business Model Canvas; Sinek's Golden Circle; Greiner Growth Strategy

• Helps readers understand financial management and business planning and advises on how to raise money

• Assesses the impact of digital shifts and the impact of new technology including NFTs, AR, VR and AI

• Evaluates the impact of digital collections, gamification, product placement, omnichannel, the drop model and see-now buy-now

• Online resources: lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, worksheets and additional interactive case studies

Description

How do you develop an effective strategy for launching a fashion brand? What marketing activities do you need to undertake to identify and engage with your customers? How are new technologies shaping business models? This definitive guide explains the realities of the fashion industry.

Fashion Brand Management is an introduction to how to operate a fashion business in a multi-trillion revenue industry. Written by a leading innovator in the fashion industries, it's a guide to conceptualizing, developing and building a successful brand. It explains key needto-know marketing and branding models and shows you how to apply them successfully to your business, such as Porter's Five Forces and Generic Strategy, Kapeferer's Brand Identity Prism, the 10 Ps of marketing, how to differentiate your value proposition using Sinek's Golden Circle and Greiner's Growth Strategy.

Fashion Brand Management looks at the key challenges facing today's fashion industry and explores the ways in which both micro-brands and international businesses need to adapt. It explore issues such as an uneven recovery, logistics gridlock, the impact of the metaverse, the circular economy, digital only collections, social selling and see-now-buynow. Using case studies from a range of brands and covering luxury, mainstream and discount, this textbook is supported by online resources which include questions, extra resources and lecture notes.

Author Information

Alison Lowe, based in London UK, is a leading industry expert on fashion brand development and growth. She founded and leads two fashion incubator agencies which work with emerging fashion brands around the world, as well as acting as a consultant to a broad range of international fashion brands. She also works with numerous universities to develop and deliver programmes and courses up to and including MSc level, on subjects including Fashion Entrepreneurship, Business Management, Start Up Fashion, Marketing and PR and currently teaches at the University of East London and the University of the Arts, London. She is a judge on the Great British Entrepreneur Awards. In 2017 she was awarded MBE for Services to the Fashion Industry.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398609006

Ebook: 9781398609013

Pages: 344

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

Table of Contents

1 Getting Started

The changing reality of the fashion industry

3 The Business Structure

Who is Your Customer and Competitor?

Product design and development

Sourcing and manufacturing

Branding and marketing

Selling your collection

Direct to the consumer

Press and PR

Social PR and Social Media

Finance and business plans

Entrepreneurial spirit

Resources

Myths of Branding

Dispel the Misconceptions and Become a Brand Expert

This book

• Explores the most pervasive and damaging myths from the world of branding including, 'a good brand can save a bad business' and 'branding is all about visual identity', and debunks them with up-to-date examples and market-focused evidence

• Includes fascinating case studies from the world's leading brands and topmost branding agencies

• New to this edition: fully updated with new myths and case studies and examples

• Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Description

A brand is just a logo - everyone knows that, don't they? After all, it's not as though a good brand can save a bad business, and besides, the digital revolution is making branding irrelevant...

Myths of Branding, written by renowned branding experts Andy Milligan and Simon Bailey, explores the huge number of misguided, mistaken and blatantly false myths that abound in the branding arena. From the belief that developing brands is nothing more than fiddling with logos, to the perception that it's a 'soft' area of marketing that doesn't go beyond visual identity and that the customer is always right - these myths are all surprisingly entrenched, yet could not be further from the truth.

Myths of Branding uses up-to-date case studies and witty examples to debunk these popular misconceptions, and replaces them with the reality of what it's really like to work in the world of branding. Jam-packed with entertaining anecdotes and useful information that practitioners can learn from, it guarantees a deeper, sharper understanding of the realities of branding and brand management.

About the Business Myths series...

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media, strategy and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the test. Entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

Author Information

Andy Milligan is a leading international branding consultant. He has worked for almost 20 years advising major organizations on strategies for brand building, customer experience and internal culture, and comments regularly in the media on brand issues. He is the coauthor of On Purpose and Bold

Simon Bailey is an experienced business leader and brand specialist who advises CEOs on using their brand to drive business growth. He was formerly European CEO of Interbrand and UK CEO of WPP agency the Brand Union. His agencies have twice been awarded 'Agency of the Year' by Marketing Magazine

Edition: 2

Date: 03/10/2022

Price: £9.99

Paperback: 9781398608153

Ebook: 9781398608160

Pages: 264 Format (mm): 232x152

Product Category: General Subject: Branding

Table of Contents

1 Myth 1 – Brands are just a way of charging you more for the same product

2 Myth 2 – Once lost, brand trust can never be rebuilt

3 Myth 3 – A good brand can prop up a bad business

4 Myth 4 – Technology is diminishing the power of brands

5 Myth 5 – Branding is just about identity

6 Myth 6 – Brands don’t have any real economic value

7 Myth 7 – There is no such thing as brand loyalty

8 Myth 8 – The customer is always right

9 Myth 9 – It takes large resources and years of effort to build a global brand

10 Myth 10 – A brand is ’owned’ by the marketing department

11 Myth 11 – Brand purpose is about effective corporate social responsibility

12 Myth 12 – Customers are seeking a conversation with your brand

13 Myth 13 – There are no real tools to help you manage your brand

14 Myth 14 – In certain businesses, brands really don’t matter

15 Myth 15 – Branding has nothing to do with the customer experience

16 Myth 16 – Branding is all about the product

Managing Luxury Brands

A Complete Guide to Contemporary Luxury Brand Strategies

This book

• Explores what makes a luxury brand and how to market them in a changing global context

• Shows how luxury brands can develop customer relationships through AR and AI and embrace end-to-end sustainability and the circular economy

• Contains case studies from international brands such as Louis Vuitton, Michael Kors and Shanghai Tang as well as discussion points and suggestions for further reading

• Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and video interviews with industry experts

• Written by leading academics with extensive industry experience and tightly edited into a cohesive whole

Description

What are the key components of a luxury brand? How can luxury be marketed successfully in a changing global context? What opportunities does the increasing demand for sustainability and the latest technological developments present?

Managing Luxury Brands brings together insights from leading academics in the field to answer these questions and more in this comprehensive guide to luxury brand management. It examines what makes a luxury brand, the changing perception of luxury over time, and how to market luxury brands in light of socio and cultural developments and global market shifts. Featuring discussion points, key concept definitions and further reading suggestions for each chapter, it also explores how brands can embrace end-toend sustainable luxury and the circular economy, and the opportunities of technological developments such as artificial intelligence, augmented reality and non-fungible tokens (NFTs).

Featuring case studies from a range of international brands such as Louis Vuitton, Michael Kors and Shanghai Tang, Managing Luxury Brands combines rigorous academic research with the authors' extensive consulting and industry experience to ensure that complex ideas are firmly grounded in real-world implications and applications throughout. Supported by online resources of lecture slides and video interviews with industry experts, this book is an essential resource for any student studying luxury brand management.

Author Information

Eleonora Cattaneo (ed.) is Senior Lecturer in luxury marketing and Head of the MA in Luxury Brand Management at Regent's University London. Previously, she was Senior Lecturer at SDA Bocconi School of Management, Italy, and Adjunct Professor at Franklin University Switzerland. She has extensive consulting experience in a variety of industries including automotive, fashion and non-profit. The author of several publications and papers, her research interests focus on the management of iconic brands and luxury consumption. She is Senior Fellow of the Chartered Management Institute and is based in London, UK.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2023

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398606401

Ebook: 9781398606739 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Luxury Marketing

Table of Contents

1 Definitions of luxury and key facets of luxury branding

1 Luxury: A Changing Paradigm?

2 The evolving meaning of luxury brands and a framework for creating modern prestige

3 Luxury trends accelerated by the COVID-19 pandemic

4 The environmental and social impact of luxury - consumer concerns and practices

2 Managing luxury brands today

5 The environmental and social impact of luxury - consumer concerns and practices

6 Sustainable luxury and the circular economy – new business strategies

7 Developing profitable customer relationships through AI

8 Developing customer relationships through AR and AI

9 The ‘Brand Origin’ Dilemma

10 The niche world of ultra-luxury brands – a unique set of customers and how to act differently to serve them

11 THE OLD IS THE NEW “NEW”: Emerging Business Models in the luxury field: Renting and Resale

3 New directions in luxury branding

12 Future industry developments - experiential luxury, extreme personalization and bringing back the human factor in luxury branding

The Luxury Strategy

Break the Rules of Marketing to Build Luxury Brands

This book

• Identifies the rules for marketing luxury products and implementing a luxury strategy

• Provides the depth insight required to master luxury marketing strategies

• Includes coverage of human resources and financial management in the luxury space

Edition: 2

Date: 03/09/2012

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749464912

Ebook: 9780749464929

Pages: 408

Format (mm): 241x166

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Luxury Marketing

Description

Discover the secrets to successful luxury brand management with this bestselling guide written by two of the world's leading experts on luxury branding, Jean-Noël Kapferer and Vincent Bastien, providing a unique blueprint for luxury brands and companies.

Having established itself as the definitive work on the essence of a luxury brand strategy, this book defines the differences between premium and luxury brands and products, analyzing the nature of true luxury brands and turning established marketing 'rules' upside-down.

Written by two world experts on luxury branding, The Luxury Strategy provides the first rigorous blueprint for the effective management of luxury brands and companies at the highest level.

This fully revised second edition of The Luxury Strategy explores the diversity of meanings of 'luxury' across different markets. It rationalizes those business models that have achieved profitability and unveils the original methods that were used to transform small family businesses such as Ferrari, Louis Vuitton, Cartier, Chanel, Armani, Gucci, and Ralph Lauren into profitable global brands.

Now with a new section on marketing and selling luxury goods online and the impact of social networks and digital developments, this book has truly cemented its position as the authority on luxury strategy.

Author Information

Jean-Noël Kapferer is an internationally recognized thought leader on brands and brand management. A professor at HEC Paris, he holds a PhD from Northwestern University (USA) and is an active consultant to many European, Asian and American corporations. He is the author of 12 books, including the international bestseller New Strategic Brand Management, and Reinventing the Brand (published by Kogan Page).

Vincent Bastien is one of the most experienced senior managers in the luxury business. Formerly MD of Louis Vuitton Malletier and CEO of Yves Saint Laurent Parfums, he has held senior posts at some of the world's most prestigious luxury brands. He is now Affiliate Professor at HEC Paris, teaching Strategy in Luxury.

Table of Contents

1 Back to luxury fundamentals

1 In the beginning there was luxury

2 The end of a confusion: premium is not luxury

Anti-laws of marketing

Facets of luxury today

2 Luxury brands need specific management

Customer attitudes vis-à-vis luxury

Developing brand equity

Luxury brand stretching

Qualifying a product or service as luxury

Pricing luxury

Distribution and the internet dilemma

Communicating luxury

Financial and HR management of a luxury company

Strategic perspectives

Luxury business models

Entering luxury and leaving it

Learning from luxury

Luxury and sustainable development: convergences and divergences

Kapferer on Luxury

How Luxury Brands Can Grow Yet Remain Rare

This book

• Addresses the need to demonstrate growth in the face of the many unique challenges to the luxury sector

• Offers expert strategies that help sustain luxury growth at higher volumes without risking dilution

• Includes recent and authoritative international research into the basis of the luxury dream and a fresh approach to the specific obstacles to perceived exclusivity posed by the Internet

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2015

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749474362

Ebook: 9780749474379 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Luxury Marketing

Description

This book addresses the No 1 challenge of all major luxury brands today: How can these brands pursue their growth yet remain luxury? How do you reconcile growth and rarity?

Kapferer on Luxury offers a selection of the most recent and insightful articles and original essays on the luxury growth challenge from Jean-Noël Kapferer, a worldrenowned luxury analyst. Each chapter addresses a specific issue relating to the luxury growth challenge such as sustaining the 'luxury dream', adapting the internet to luxury demands, re-widening the gap with premium brands' competition, and the importance of non-delocalization. It also explores in detail facing the demand of the Chinese clients, rising sustainable quality and experiential standards, developing real luxury services and managing luxury brands within groups without diluting their equity and more.

As such, Kapferer on Luxury is the perfect and timely resource for luxury executives, communication managers, luxury observers and advanced students willing to deepen their understanding of this major luxury challenge.

Author Information

Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of world's foremost thought leaders on luxury and its brands. An active researcher, HEC Paris graduate and PhD-holder from Northwestern University's Kellogg Business School (USA), Kapferer is co-author of The Luxury Strategy and The New Strategic Brand Management and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury all around the world at institutions such as HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

Table of Contents

Introduction: Growth issues for luxury

1 How luxury is changing

1 Sustaining the luxury dream: challenges and insights

2 Abundant rarity: the key to luxury growth

3 The artification of luxury: from artisans to artists

2 Specific issues and challenges

4 Luxury after the crisis: pro logo or no logo?

5 Why luxury should not delocalize: a critique of a growing tendency

6 Internet and luxury: under-adopted or illadapted?

7 Does luxury have a minimum price?: an exploratory study into consumers’ psychology of luxury prices

8 All that glitters is not green: the challenge of sustainable luxury

3 The business side of luxury brands’ growth

9 Not all luxuries act alike: the distinct business models of luxury brands

10 The LVMH–Bulgari agreement: what changes in the luxury market lead family companies to sell up?

11 Developing luxury brands within luxury groups: synergies without dilution?

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio

How to Use the Creative Luxury Process to Develop Products Everyone Wants

This book

• Provides examples from global brands such as Harley-Davidson, Caterpillar, Disney, Apple, Madecraft, LinkedIn, Johnson & Johnson, Nestle, FedEx, and Gillette among others

• Introduces a detailed step-by-step formula to transition any part of your portfolio, regardless of industry, to luxury status

• Redefines luxury as a series of attributes or "switches" that create greater perceived value in the eyes of consumers

• Online resources: sample syllabi for classroom use, templates for application of framework, case studies, discussion questions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666090

Ebook: 9781789666106

Pages: 216 Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Luxury Marketing

Table of Contents

The Luxury Opportunity – Upscale and Grow

Switching on Luxury – The Tools of Creative Luxury

Transforming a Product or Service to Luxury

Transforming the Shopping and Buying Experience

Transforming the Usage Experience

Transforming the Post-Purchase Experience

Driving Prestige into Your Culture

Conclusion

Description

Expand your existing portfolio by using the creative luxury process to elevate specific products and provide greater value to customers.

Contrary to popular belief, luxury is a well-defined code that can be reapplied to any other product or service to enhance its value. Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio reveals how non-luxury companies can apply the principles of luxury and creativity to transition parts of their portfolio to luxury status.

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio describes how companies can elevate any product or service at each step of the customer buying journey (awareness, search and compare, purchase, use, advocate). By applying the creativity technique Closed World Principle, readers can determine which luxury benefits (security, fun, self-respect, self-fulfillment, accomplishment, recognition, relationships or belonging) would best map to their product or service and garner the greatest business impact at that particular stage of the customer buying journey.

Illustrated with examples from industries as diverse as healthcare and industrial equipment, Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio shows companies how to borrow the elements of luxury and sprinkle them throughout the customer experience in order to strengthen loyalty and increase their appeal to potential new customers. Online resources include sample syllabi, templates to aid in application of framework, case studies and discussion questions.

Author Information

Drew Boyd is Associate Professor of Marketing and Innovation at the University of Cincinnati in Mason, Ohio. He trains, consults and speaks on the topics of innovation, persuasion and marketing strategy at Macy's, Toyota and Procter & Gamble. He spent 17 years at Johnson & Johnson in marketing, mergers and acquisitions, and international development, where he also earned his first of five patents for medical devices. His work has been featured in business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Bloomberg, Industry Week, Psychology Today, and Strategy+Business

Brand Elevation

Lessons in Ueber-Branding

This book

• Explains how any marketer, in any category, can elevate their brand and become a modern prestige brand

• Provides actionable checklists and advice on how to apply the power of prestige to add meaning to a brand, making it peerless, priceless and profitable

• Includes answers to key questions such as how to operate a luxury brand on social media

• Packed with case studies from leading global brands including including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, Burt's Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube

Edition: 1

Date: 03/01/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789664669

Ebook: 9781789664676

Pages: 304

Format (mm): 233x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Luxury Marketing

Description

How can a brand become one of those peerless 'Ueber-Brands' we all admire and are willing to pay a premium for? Is there a proven process? Where should we start?

Brand Elevation explains the main drivers behind brands becoming peerless and priceless and how to harness these principles to develop a winning brand strategy. Written for marketers and brand managers of all levels of experience, and for both those working in start-ups and established players, it proposes a six-step, easy-to-follow program to elevate your brand.

Brand Elevation explores challenges such as creating a distinct and brand-guiding mission, mediating between exclusivity and inclusion and mastering the art of seduction. Featuring case studies and expert accounts from organizations including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, Burt's Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube, Wolfgang Schaefer and JP Kuehlwein skilfully explain how any brand - regardless of sector and industry - can become a modern prestige brand.

Author Information

Wolfgang Schaefer is CEO and Founder of zwoelf consulting, specialized in narrative brand strategies. Based in Berlin and NYC, he lectures at XU Exponential University Potsdam and other schools in Europe and the US. For the past 25 years as chief strategist he has worked with many of the world's top marketers at LVMH, P&G, Miele, Swarovski, Coty and Unilever et al.

JP Kuehlwein is the Founder of marketing consultancy Ueber-Brands. He's also Adjunct Professor of Marketing at NYU Stern and Columbia Business School and leader of the Marketing Institute at The Conference Board think tank. Previously, he was Executive Vice President at Frederic Fekkai & Co as well as Brand Director and Director of Corporate Strategy at Procter & Gamble.

Table of Contents

1 RECAP – THE PRINCIPLES OF UEBERBRANDINGTM

1 Principle 1 - Mission incomparable –Having a distinct, brand-guiding Mission

2 Principle 2 - Longing vs belonging –Balancing exclusivity and inclusion

3 Principle 3 - Un-selling – Mastering the art of seduction

4 Principle 4 - From Myth to meaning –Giving the brand soul

5 Principle 5 - Behold the product! Making your product manifest the Myth

6 Principle 6 - Living the dream – Letting the brand radiate from the inside out

7 Principle 7 - Growth without end –Balancing scaling and brand building

2 HOW TO – SIX STEPS TO ELEVATE YOUR BRAND

8 Step 1 - Set Your Mission

9 Step 2 - Write Your Myth

10 Step 3 - Realize Your Dream

11 Step 4 - Live Your Dream

12 Step 5 - Find Your Ueber-Target

13 Step 6 - Ignite All Targets

14 Summing up – The Ueber-Branding Model

3 LESSONS – UEBER-BRANDING IN ACTION

15 Case 1 - TerraCycle – From Mission to Myth to movement, or – How to ‘eliminate the idea of waste’

16 Case 2 - Acqua di Parma – The power of a mythical core, or – How to build your business and your equity simultaneously

17 Case 3 - Burt’s Bees – Growing an UeberBrand ground up, or – How purpose and profit can live in harmony

18 Case 4 - Starbucks – The renaissance plan, or – How to leap ahead by going back to quality and service

19 Case 5 - Airbnb – The importance of culture, or – How Airbnb found, launched and lives its purpose

20 Case 6 - Lakrids – Growth without end, or –How to scale a dream

21 Case 7 - YouTube – Platform or brand of the future, or – How to be one when you are many

4 EPILOGUE: Crises – Times of UeberOpportunities

22 References and further reading

Index

The Management of Luxury

International Guide

This book

• Explains how to streamline marketing and management processes across a luxury business

• Contributes unique strategies from more than fifty luxury thought leaders across Europe, Asia, Australia and the Americas

• New to this edition: how to manage the changing Asian markets, the digitalization of sales, communication and product, new strategies for the evolving market and business of luxury

• Shares high profile insights to case studies such as Louis Vuitton, Leica and MoëtHennessy

Edition: 2

Date: 03/06/2018

Price: £31.99

Paperback: 9780749481827

Ebook: 9780749481810 Pages: 496

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Luxury Marketing

Description

Examine luxury branding on a global scale, with more than fifty cutting edge contributions from the foremost thought leaders in luxury management and marketing.

The Management of Luxury, second edition, presents a unique snapshot of best practice insights into the increasing challenges faced in luxury business, with contributions shared by more than fifty global leaders on luxury management. The highly renowned editors draw these together into one essential handbook, ranging from luxury brand strategy, luxury consumer behaviour and market positioning, through to management succession, heritage, counterfeiting and competing effectively as a luxury SME.

Fully updated in its second edition, The Management of Luxury explores the newly evolving direction of Asian market trends and how to integrate digitalization into sales and product strategies. Both are crucial for competitive advantage in the luxury market, featured alongside iconic case studies such as Burberry, Louis Vuitton and Leica. The book's value is not only in streamlining management processes and return on investment; but equally for those who marvel at an industry unlike any other, striving to trust both in the conventional and innovate new paths towards the extraordinary. Highly influential, applicable and enlightening, it is a vital addition to every luxury business manager's collection.

Author Information

Benjamin Berghaus is Head of the Competence Center for Luxury Management at the Institute of Marketing of University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Management and Organization at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland, and Director of its Institute of Management.

Sven Reinecke is Associate Professor of Business Administration, specialized in Marketing, and Director of the Institute of Marketing at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

Event Planning and Management

Principles, Planning and Practice

This book

• Combines an academic perspective with practical insights gained from the authors' extensive industry experience of working on a variety of events

• Explores a diverse range of case studies such as the National Health Service's (NHS) bespoke planning mode and Standon Calling (the cashless festival).

• New to this edition: Renewed focus on virtual and hybrid events, expansion of health and safety advisory in light of COVID-19 and anti-terrorism, as well as new models such as the Cultural Risk Assessment and new case studies

• Online resources: activity sheets, group activities, lecturer slides, self-tests questions, case studies and web links

Description

Do you know how to conduct a risk assessment? How to build an events team? How do you measure the success of an event? Event Planning and Management is the comprehensive guide for facing the new wave of live brand and customer experiences

Written by authors with extensive industry experience, this is an essential step-by-step resource for students and the next generation of event planners to plan and deliver a successful event. Using real-world examples such as National Health Service's (NHS) bespoke planning model and Standon Calling (the cashless festival), this book offers a structured, practical approach to all types of events, from the initial planning to the final evaluating stages.

Now fully updated, this third edition of Event Planning and Management provides a renewed focus on virtual and hybrid events. It also provides an expansion of health and safety advisory in light of COVID-19 and anti-terrorism, as well as new models such as the Cultural Risk Assessment, and further case studies. Accompanied by a host of downloadable resources, this book is the ideal end to end resource for students studying event planning modules and certifications, marketing and PR professionals.

Author Information

Ruth Dowson is Senior Lecturer in events management at the UK Centre for Events Management at Leeds Beckett University, UK. She has more than 30 years of experience in strategic development, management and delivery of events, conferences, seminars and exhibitions, in both the public and private sectors.

Bernadette Albert is Senior Lecturer at Leeds Beckett University, UK, where she leads the undergraduate programme in Event Management. She draws on extensive experience in managing and advising on international, state, civic and private events.

Dan Lomax is Senior Lecturer at Leeds Beckett University, UK. He has 25 years' experience in the live music and cultural events sector specializing in content creation, event planning and operational delivery.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398607101

Ebook: 9781398607118

Pages: 352

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Event Management

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to events

2 Putting event planning into motion

3 Location, location, location! Destination and venue selection for events

4 Developing your events programme and content

5 Understanding site planning and safety essentials for events

6 How to build and develop an events team

7 Drawing in the crowds - Promotion and publicity for events

8 Budgeting, finances and procurement for events management

9 A practical guide to managing an event on the day

10 Measuring success – Post-event evaluation and insights

11 Future-proofing your events

Event Sponsorship and Fundraising

Advanced Guide

This book

• Introduces the subjects of event sponsorship, fundraising, partnerships and relationship development, in the context of the Integrated Marketing Communications Mix, allowing readers to see the role they play in overall events management

• Includes discussion questions and recommended reading sections, with each chapter structured around specified learning outcomes

• Reveals fascinating discussion on the future of fundraising and sponsorship, including burgeoning developments such as crowdfunding

• Online resources: Comprehensive set of downloadable teaching aids

Description

Securing sponsorship and other sources of funding for events is becoming increasingly competitive, making differentiation and delivery vital. Event Sponsorship and Fundraising explores this complex area of event management, drawing on both experiential marketing and consumer behaviour theories, and developing critical insights on the dynamics of successful event sponsorship. Its coverage includes professional guidance on prospecting for sponsors, brand activation and evaluation, as well as advice on relationship management, proposal writing and pitching to potential sponsors.

Event Sponsorship and Fundraising places each of these concepts at the heart of the Integrated Marketing Communications Mix, alongside cutting edge literature on the topic. Written by two highly experienced industry practitioners, both of which now teach on two of the UK's leading event management degree courses, and supported by a comprehensive set of online resources, this book is an invaluable go-to resource for event management students, tutors and professionals alike.

Author Information

Tom Lunt is the Programme Leader for International Events Management at the University of Surrey. He is former senior lecturer at London Metropolitan University and spent nine years working in fundraising events with organizations such as Christian Aid and the Royal Star & Garter Home for disabled servicemen and women.

Eva Nicotra is Senior Lecturer at London Metropolitan University, teaching event planning, events marketing and sponsorship, and live music events promotion. She is an accomplished events and music industry professional and previously ran her own events management company for live events, charity fundraisers, concerts and festivals.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2018

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749480929

Ebook: 9780749480936 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook

Subject: Event Management

Table of Contents

1 Introduction to event sponsorship, fundraising, partnerships and relationship development

2 Event sponsorship at the centre of the integrated marketing communications mix

3 Delivering event sponsorship campaigns

4 Identifying and securing sponsors and funding opportunities

5 Prospecting for grant funding and sponsorship: case studies from Scottish cycling events

6 Preparing and delivering a sponsorship pitch

7 Managing relationships with sponsors and funding bodies

8 Legal issues in event sponsorship and fundraising

9 Evaluating sponsorship and grantmaking relationships

10 Where next for event sponsorship and fundraising?

11 Practical templates to kick-start your event sponsorship and fundraising

12 Afterword – building your career in sponsorship and fundraising

Statistics for Research online course

Are your students struggling to grasp statistics?

Created in collaboration with the Market Research Society (MRS), this course covers the fundamentals of statistics in market research, theory and practice.

students with a

that

this

course offers students the opportunity to develop their

set when working with

of the

This course is worth six CPD points

NEW! Exclusive academic discount now available

Market Research in Practice

An Introduction to Gaining Greater Market Insight

This book

• Explores the fundamentals of market research, and offers a step-by-step guide to managing the process such as guidance on planning a project and executing it through to analysis and presenting the findings

• Explains how to use market research tools and methods effectively to obtain reliable results with examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors

• New to this edition: two new chapters on using market research to test social and political opinions and GDPR, as well as new sections on web scraping, storytelling reporting and research trends.

• Online resources: templates to use when conducting market research such as 'customer satisfaction questionnaires' and 'focus group discussion guide' as well as improved PowerPoint slides for lecturers and exercises for students

Description

Learn the fundamentals of market research with this bestselling guide that delivers an overview of the whole process, from planning a project and executing it, what tools to use, through to analysis and presenting the findings.

Market Research in Practice provides a practical and robust introduction to the subject, providing a clear step-by-step guide to managing market research and how to effectively to obtain the most reliable results. Written by an industry expert with over 35 years' practical experience in running a successful market research agency, tips and advice are included throughout to ground the concepts in business reality. This text also benefits from real-world examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors.

Now in its fourth edition, Market Research in Practice is now fully updated to capture the latest changes and developments in the field and explores new tools of qualitative research using online methods as well as expanding further on online surveys such as SurveyMonkey. Accompanied by a range of templates, surveys and resources for lecturers, this is an invaluable guide for students of research methods, researchers, marketers and users of market research.

Author Information

Paul Hague is based in Manchester, UK and is the founder of B2B International Ltd. Their clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States. Paul Hague is the author of a dozen books on market research as well as books on customer experience and business models that share over 35 years of practical experience in running a successful market research agency. These include Kogan Page titles such B2B Customer Experience (2018) and The Business Models Handbook (2019).

Edition: 4

Date: 03/11/2021

Price: £34.99

Paperback: 9781398602823

Ebook: 9781398602830 Pages: 392

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Market Research

Table of Contents

Planning a market research study

Introduction

Market research design

Uses of market research

Qualitative research

Qualitative research

Desk research

Focus groups

Depth interviewing

Observation and ethnography

Quantitative research

Quantitative research

Sampling and statistics

Questionnaire design

Face-to-face interviewing

Telephone interviewing

Self-completion questionnaires

Online surveys

Data analysis

Using market research

Using market research to segment markets

Using market research to improve a brand position

Using market research to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty

Using market research to achieve optimum pricing

Using market research to enter a new market

Using market research to test advertising effectiveness

Using market research to launch a new product

Reporting

The market research industry

International market research

Research trends

Ethics in market research

Questionnaire Design

How to Plan, Structure and Write Survey Material for Effective Market Research

This book

• Provides a toolkit to structure, compose and design questionnaires for business application

• Delivers an accessible guide to aid the process of writing a questionnaire with easy navigation to key points

• Addresses the modern-day challenges facing questionnaires such as the pressure to be shorter and smarter than ever

• New to this edition: advances in behavioural science and more in-depth review of neuroscience approaches in questionnaires, a 'mobile-first' focus in the text and inclusions of clear and quick reference summaries at the end of each chapter

Description

Will your questionnaire work as well as it needs to by today's standards? Use this new edition of the bestselling guide to make sure it does.

Good data is central to information-based decision making. Increasing access to online survey software is allowing more organizations to benefit from contact with their customers, employees and the public. However, the challenges facing the questionnaire writer remain and the greater volume of surveys and demands on potential respondents' time is making the task even harder. Your questionnaire needs to work better than ever to keep their attention. Questionnaire Design provides comprehensive and practical guidelines to plan, structure and compose questionnaires across all industries and purposes, ensuring valuable data insights are captured with accuracy and efficiency.

You can't write a good questionnaire unless you know exactly what you are trying to achieve. This updated fifth edition recognizes this fundamental challenge, with advice for gaining the clarity needed to plan and focus your questionnaire. It continues to provide guidance for those using interviewer administered surveys, but now reflects the primacy of online and the challenges that brings. With pressure on everyone's time, this revised edition makes it even easier to navigate to the key points with new bullet-pointed takeaways at the end of each chapter.

Author Information

Ian Brace, based in Oxford, UK, is a fellow of the MRS and runs training courses on questionnaire design. He was previously director of research methods at TNS UK and a visiting professor in market research at Bristol Business School.

Kate Bolton, based in Surrey, UK, is a certified member of the MRS and has been its key industry trainer for questionnaire design for over 20 years as well as being an examiner for the MRS Advanced Certificate. She previously led the Foundations Research Skills Programmes at Kantar.

Edition: 5

Date: 03/05/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398604124

Ebook: 9781398604131

Pages: 368

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Market Research

Table of Contents

Introduction

Defining achievable questionnaire objectives

Influence of data collection approach on question design

Planning a questionnaire

An overview of question types

Identifying types of data created by questions

Creating appropriate rating scales

Asking about behaviour

Measuring satisfaction, image and attitudes

Writing effective questions

10 Creating a questionnaire for an online survey

11 Engaging respondents in online surveys

12 Choosing online survey software

13 Considerations for intervieweradministered and paper self-completion surveys

14 Test piloting your questionnaire

15 Ethical issues in questionnaire design

16 Understanding social desirability bias

17 Designing questionnaires for multicountry surveys

User Research

Improve Product and Service Design and Enhance Your UX Research

This book

• Clearly outlines and explains all the key methods of user research, such as card sorting, A/B testing, stakeholder and workshops

• Benefit from in-depth knowledge from one of the UK's leading UX research professionals

• Features tools and frameworks that readers can refer to when conducting their own user research

• New to this edition: new chapter on research operations and infrastructure, further analysis on combining user research methodologies and combined new research plan and strategy templates

Edition: 2

Date: 03/02/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398603578

Ebook: 9781398603585 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Market Research

Description

Despite businesses often being based on creating desirable experiences, products and services for consumers, many fail to consider the end user in their planning and development processes. This book is here to change that.

User experience research, also known as UX research, focuses on understanding user behaviours, needs and motivations through a range of observational techniques, task analysis and other methodologies. User Research is a practical guide that shows readers how to use the vast array of user research methods available. Written by one of the UK's leading UX research professionals, readers can benefit from in-depth knowledge that explores the fundamentals of user research.

Covering all the key research methods including face-to-face user testing, card sorting, surveys, A/B testing and many more, the book gives expert insight into the nuances, advantages and disadvantages of each, while also providing guidance on how to interpret, analyze and share the data once it has been obtained. Now in its second edition, User Research provides a new chapter on research operations and infrastructure as well as new material on combining user research methodologies.

Author Information

Stephanie Marsh (she/they) is a leading UX research professional and currently UX Research Operations Lead at Springer Nature. They are the former Head of User Research and Analysis for the UK Government Digital Service and former Head of Digital Strategy for the UK Ministry of Defence. She was also previously a consultant at Bunnyfoot, a leading UX consultancy in the UK. They have contributed chapters to a range of peer-reviewed texts in related fields and has delivered talks on UX Research, Research Operations and UX strategies at a range of conferences and industry events. She is based in London.

Using Semiotics in Marketing

How to Achieve Consumer Insight for Brand Growth and Profits

This book

• New to this edition: three new chapters on researching digital culture, applied semiotics in branding and storytelling and branding in marketing communications

• Provides insight into what semiotics is, why it matters and how it enables marketers to understand consumers from a whole new perspective

• Delivers guidance on the end-to-end process of running a commercial semiotics project, from commission and design right through to analysis of results

• Discover how to convert results into brand strategy to guide business development and increase profit margins

Description

Semiotics is the new superpower for marketers. This new edition sheds new light on consumers and the world they live in, stimulates creativity and innovation, guides brand strategy, and finds solutions to a plethora of marketing problems.

Using Semiotics in Marketing will help marketers looking to launch new brands and reposition or rejuvenate established ones. In what can seem a complex and abstract field, this book is a clear and practical resource on how to seize the tremendous opportunity that semiotics offers. This book will cover key topics such as how to research using semiotics, semiotic tools for thinking and looking at images, language and other semiotic signs.

Newly updated, this second edition includes three brand new chapters on researching digital culture and applied semiotics looking at brand and branding and storytelling in marketing communications.

Written by one of the original founders of commercial semiotics, Using Semiotics in Marketing outlines precisely what semiotics is, why it matters and how it enables marketers to tap into consumers like never before. This results in better ads, websites, packaging and social media content - ultimately driving brand growth and profits. It also demonstrates how to run a successful commercial semiotics project from commission and design right through to analysis of results.

Author Information

Dr Rachel Lawes is recognized as one of the original founders of commercial semiotics. She has convened the Market Research Society (MRS) Advanced Qualitative Methods Masterclass for over ten years and was previously a Principal Lecturer in Marketing at Regent's University London. She has supplied brand strategy and consumer insight to major brands globally, including Unilever, P&G, Kraft Tesco and The Discovery Channel. Based in London, UK, she is also the author of Using Semiotics in Retail, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/03/2023

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398607644

Ebook: 9781398607651 Pages: 288

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Market Research

Table of Contents

Introduction

Semiotics will change your career in marketing or market research

1 An explosion of semiotics in business

2 How to do research using semiotics – A blueprint for marketers

3 Images, language and other semiotic signs

4 Society, culture and other big influences on consumers

5 Creativity and innovation – Semiotic tools for thinking

6 How to do semiotic field trips

7 Combining semiotics with ethnography and discourse analysis

8 Data – insight – strategy

9 Sharing the findings of semiotic research

10 Industry debates and the future of semiotics

11 Inspiration – How to continue teaching yourself to do semiotics

12 Research digital culture

13 Applied Semiotics: Brands and Branding

14 Applied Semiotics: Storytelling in Marketing Communications

Games and Gamification in Market Research

Increasing Consumer Engagement in Research for Business Success

This book

• Shows readers how to create intrinsic engagement through gamification, and use this engagement to glean more meaningful consumer insights

• Provides insight into the contexts in which gamification can be used, and the specifics of designing and making games for research purposes

• Written by one of the UK's leading designers of Research Games, Betty Adamou, who has been named one of seven women shaping the future of market research

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2018

Price: £31.99

Paperback: 9780749483357

Ebook: 9780749483364 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Market Research

Description

Games are the most engaging medium of all time: they harness storytelling and heuristics, drive emotion and push the evolution of technology in a way that no other platform has or can. It's no surprise, then, that games and gamification are revolutionizing the market research industry, offering opportunities to reinvigorate the notoriously sluggish engagement levels seen in traditional surveying methods. This not only improves data quality, but offers untapped insights unattainable through traditional methods. Games and Gamification in Market Research shows readers how to design ResearchGames and Gamified Surveys that will intrinsically engage participants and how best to use these methodologies to become, and stay, commercially competitive.

In a world where brands and organizations are increasingly interested in the feelings and contexts that drive consumer choices, Games and Gamification in Market Research gives readers the skills to use the components in games to encourage play and observe consumer behaviours via simulations for predictive modelling. Written by Betty Adamou, the UK's leading research game designer and named as one of seven women shaping the future of market research, it explains the ways in which these methodologies will evolve with technologies such as virtual reality and artificial intelligence, and how it will shape research careers. Alongside a companion website, this book provides a fully immersive and fascinating overview of game-based research.

Author Information

Betty Adamou is the Founder and Chief ResearchGame Designer at Research Through Gaming. In addition to developing ResearchGames on behalf of Fortune 500 companies and academic institutions alike, Adamou also guest lectures, writes about and gives keynote presentations and talks on Game-Based Research Methods. Adamou has won multiple awards for her work in entrepreneurship and innovation in market research.

Marketing Analytics

A Practical Guide to Improving Consumer Insights Using Data Techniques

This book

• Provides an accessible and step-by-step guide to providing actionable marketing insights through using analytical tools and techniques

• Shows how to analyze customer demand, market segmentation, customer loyalty and campaign success to increase conversion rates and engagement

• New to this edition: material on forecasting, customer touchpoints modelling, a new focus on customer loyalty and additional analytics techniques and approaches

• Supporting resources: Datasets, presentations slides for each chapter and a test bank of self-test questions

Description

Who is most likely to buy and what is the best way to target them? How can I use both consumer analytics and modelling to improve the impact of marketing campaigns? Marketing Analytics takes you step-by-step through these areas and more.

Marketing Analytics enables you to leverage predictive techniques to measure and improve marketing performance. By exploring real-world marketing challenges, it provides clear, jargon-free explanations on how to apply different analytical models for each purpose. From targeted list creation and data segmentation, to testing campaign effectiveness, pricing structures and forecasting demand, it offers a complete resource for how statistics, consumer analytics and modelling can be put to optimal use.

This revised and updated third edition of Marketing Analytics contains new material on forecasting, customer touchpoints modelling, and a new focus on customer loyalty. With accessible language throughout, methodologies are simplified to ensure the more complex aspects of data and analytics are fully accessible for any level of application. Supported by a glossary of key terms and supporting resources consisting of datasets, presentation slides for each chapter and a test bank of self-test question, this book supplies a concrete foundation for optimizing marketing analytics for day-to-day business advantage.

Author Information

Mike Grigsby, based in Orlando, Florida, has more than 30 years' experience in the field of marketing analytics. He was formerly vice president of customer insights and advanced analytics at Brierley and Partners and of strategic business analysis and advanced analytics at Targetbase and has also held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and Gap. Previously an adjunct professor at the University of Texas at Dallas, he taught analytics at both graduate and undergraduate levels. He is the author of Advanced Customer Analytics, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/12/2022

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9781398608191

Ebook: 9781398608207 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Analytics

Table of Contents

ANALYTICS

Behavior

What is an Insight?

Marketing

VARIABLE TECHNIQUES

Modeling Demand and Elasticity

Polynomial Distributed Lags

Using Poisson Regression

Logistic Regression and Market Basket Analysis

Survival Modeling and Life-Time Value

Panel Regression and Same Store Sales

Introduction to Forecasting

TECHNIQUES

Simultaneous Equations

Principal Components and Factor Analysis

Segmentation Overview

Tools of Segmentation

ON MEDIA AND LOYALTY

Modelling Marcomm Value

Media Mix Modeling

of Loyalty

Loyalty with SEM

Customer Loyalty Journey

IMPORTANT

Testing

to Big Data

FOR

Predictive Analytics for Marketers

Using Data Mining for Business Advantage

This book

• Provides an impartial overview of the various solution vendors and software providers available, enabling readers to select the most appropriate predictive analytic tools for their needs

• Features international case studies gleaned from the author's more than 25 years of industry experience, and contains supplementary articles from recognised thought-leaders in the field

• Gives a holistic, balanced overview of predictive analytics, the universal branch of advanced analytics used to make predictions about unknown future events

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2018

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749479930

Ebook: 9780749479947 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 234x154

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Marketing Analytics

Description

Predictive analytics has revolutionized marketing practice. It involves using many techniques from data mining, statistics, modelling, machine learning and artificial intelligence, to analyse current data and make predictions about unknown future events. In business terms, this enables companies to forecast consumer behaviour and much more. Predictive Analytics for Marketers will guide marketing professionals on how to apply predictive analytical tools to streamline business practices. Including comprehensive coverage of an array of predictive analytic tools and techniques, this book enables readers to harness patterns from past data, to make accurate and useful predictions that can be converted to business success. Truly global in its approach, the insights these techniques offer can be used to manage resources more effectively across all industries and sectors.

Written in clear, non-technical language, Predictive Analytics for Marketers contains case studies from the author's more than 25 years of experience and articles from guest contributors, demonstrating how predictive analytics can be used to successfully achieve a range of business purposes.

Author Information

Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics and a marketing analytics expert. He is Emeritus Chair of the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), which is an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS) and a leading voice in the UK information industry. He was recently awarded the MRS Gold Medal Award - the association's rarest accolade, presented for the first time since 2008 - in recognition of his lifetime of exceptional achievement and contribution to the research profession.

Table of Contents

Introduction to predictive analytics

1 How can predictive analytics help your business?

2 Using data mining to build predictive models

3 Managing the data for predictive analytics

4 The analytical modelling toolkit

5 Software solutions for predictive analytics

6 Predicting customer behaviour using analytical models

7 Predicting lifetimes – from customers to machines

8 How to build a customer segmentation

9 Accounts, baskets, citizens or businesses – applying predictive analytics in various sectors

10 From people to products – using predictive analytics in retail

11 How to benefit from social network analysis

12 Testing the benefits of predictive models and other marketing effects

13 Top tips for gaining business value from predictive analytics

Marketing Metrics

Leverage Analytics and Data to Optimize Marketing Strategies

This book

• Shows how to create an agile data-powered marketing strategy to increase engagement, enable customer personalization and build brand and product strategies

• Describes how to communicate data analysis effectively to stakeholders, and how to develop the skills needed to be a data-savvy marketer

• Explores how to use data in a non-invasive, secure and ethical way, which respects consumer privacy and new global laws

• Includes best practice case studies and examples from a range of organizations in a variety of sectors, including Coca-Cola, Sephora and The American Marketing Association

Description

Stop feeling overwhelmed by data and start using it to its full potential, to create an agile and forward-looking strategy that enables customer-centric marketing, builds your brand and develops product strategies.

Many brands talk about creating a marketing strategy powered by data, analytics and metrics. Yet too often they're still overwhelmed by data, or unsure of how to use it to create a flexible and future-focused strategy that doesn't just validate what's happened in the past. Marketing Metrics takes readers through all the stages of implementing a data-first strategy, from early-stage adoption to more advanced customization. Featuring examples from a range of organizations including Coca-Cola and Mercedes-Benz, it shows how to create a strategy which leverages consumer data for customer-centric marketing, establishes the ROI of channels and campaigns, strengthens brands and creates datadriven product strategies.

Covering the range of new global laws that impact consumer privacy and data collection and usage, Marketing Metrics shows how to use data in a non-invasive, secure and ethical way. Also showing how to communicate critical data to the right stakeholders and the skills of the data-savvy marketer, this is a clear and jargon-free guide to creating a futurefocused and data-powered marketing strategy.

Author Information

Christina Inge is the Founder and CEO of Thoughtlight, a tech consulting company which specializes in digital marketing and analytics strategies. She has worked with well-established brands such as Nissan, Smithsonian and Pega Systems, as well as a range of startups and nonprofits. Based in Boston, Massachusetts, she is a member of the Massachusetts Technology Leadership Council and has served on the board of the American Marketing Association-Boston. An instructor at Harvard University Extension School and Northeastern University College of Professional Studies, she is a frequent and sought-after speaker and has been published in numerous industry publications.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/09/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398606593

Ebook: 9781398606609

Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Analytics

Table of Contents

1 Data-driven strategy

2 Customer data: the core four

Metrics-driven customer journeys and personas

Channel metrics

Data-driven branding

Content marketing metrics frameworks

Content marketing: the essential metrics

8 Data-driven product strategy

9 Price and place metrics

10 Marketing performance metrics

11 Data governance and the new privacy laws

12 Building dashboards and data evangelism

13 What are the skills of a metrics-driven marketer?

14 Marketing metrics resources

15 Dictionary of marketing metrics and related terms

Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice

An Overview of Tools and Techniques

This book

• Serves to integrate widely disparate approaches to predicting consumer choice via artificial intelligence marketing, showing the strengths, weaknesses and best applications of each method and point of view.

• Covers methods and techniques including Discrete Choice Modelling, Conjoint Analysis and Machine Learning Models, placing all of these in the wider context of predictive analytics and artificial intelligence marketing.

• Explores the human side of advanced analytics - using data to predict what people will choose.

• Includes extensive diagrams and charts, pointers on tools and techniques, definition boxes and practical hints and tips.

• Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, and a range of multiple or single product simulators

Description

The ability to predict consumer choice is a fundamental aspect to success for any business. In the context of artificial intelligence marketing, there are a wide array of predictive analytic techniques available to achieve this purpose, each with its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice serves to integrate these widely disparate approaches, and show the strengths, weaknesses, and best applications of each. It provides a bridge between the person who must apply or learn these problem-solving methods and the community of experts who do the actual analysis. It is also a practical and accessible guide to the many remarkable advances that have been recently made in this fascinating field.

Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, plus single and multiple product simulators.

Author Information

Dr. Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 years' experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decision-making and behavior. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9780749479558

Ebook: 9780749479565 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 234x154

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Marketing Analytics

Table of Contents

1 Who Should Read this Book and Why?

2 Getting the Project Going

3 Conjoint, Discrete Choice and Other Trade-offs: Let’s Do an Experiment

4 Creating the Best, Newest Thing: Discrete Choice Modelling

5 Conjoint Analysis and its Uses

6 Predictive Models: Via Classifications that Grow on Trees

7 Remarkable Predictive Models with Bayes Nets

8 Putting it Together: What to Use When

Advanced Customer Analytics

Targeting, Valuing, Segmenting and Loyalty Techniques

This book

• Full of case studies and examples demonstrating the use of the analytic techniques.

• Considers the specific features of retail that set it apart from other disciplines, such as proximity to customers and the interface with merchandising, putting forward effective solutions to the challenges these present.

• Employs a pervasive example retail analyst as the vehicle to explain how theoretical concepts can be applied in practice across the range of data challenges.

• Online resources: Supported by a selection of datasets in relation to specific chapters.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2016

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749477158

Ebook: 9780749477165

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 234x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Analytics

Description

Advanced Customer Analytics provides a clear guide to the specific analytical challenges faced by the retail sector. The book covers the nature and scale of data obtained in transactions, relative proximity to the consumer and the need to monitor customer behaviour across multiple channels. The book advocates a category management approach, taking into account the need to understand the consumer mindset through elasticity modelling and discount strategies, as well as targeted marketing and loyalty design.

A practical, no-nonsense approach to complex scenarios is taken throughout, breaking down tasks into easily digestible steps. The use of a fictional retail analyst 'Scott' helps to provide accessible examples of practice. Advanced Customer Analytics does not skirt around the complexities of this subject but offers conceptual support to steer retail marketers towards making the right choices for analysing their data. Online resources include a selection of datasets to support specific chapters.

Author Information

Mike Grigsby has been involved in marketing science for more than 25 years. He was marketing research director at Millward Brown and has held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and the Gap. With a wealth of experience at the forefront of marketing science and analytics, he now heads up the strategic retail analysis practice at Targetbase. Mike is also known for academic work, having written articles for academic and trade journals and taught at graduate and undergraduate levels. He is a regular speaker at trade conventions and seminars.

Table of Contents

Regression and Factor Analysis

Understanding and estimating demand

Price elasticity and discounts

Valuing marketing communications (marcomm)

Forecasting future demand

Targeting the right customers

Maximizing the impact of mailing

The benefits of product bundling

Estimating time of purchase

Investigating the time of product purchase

Increasing customer lifetime value

Modelling counts (transactions)

Quantifying complexity of customer behaviour

Designing effective loyalty programmes

Identifying loyal customers

Introduction to segmentation

Tools for successful segmentation

Drawing insights from segmentation

Creating targeted messages

RFM vs. segmentation

Marketing strategy

Practical Text Analytics

Interpreting Text and Unstructured Data for Business Intelligence

This book

• Provides real-world guidance on the application of text analytics for marketing professionals

• Bridges the gap between marketers and data analysis experts by cutting through jargon

• Helps marketers to frame the right questions and apply the results successfully

• Online resources: Self-test questions, chapter review Q&A and an Instructor's Manual with text sources and instructions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/07/2015

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749474010

Ebook: 9780749474027

Pages: 272

Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Analytics

Description

In an age where customer opinion and feedback can have an immediate, major effect upon the success of a business or organization, marketers must have the ability to analyze unstructured data in everything from social media and internet reviews to customer surveys and phone logs. Practical Text Analytics is an essential daily reference resource, providing real-world guidance on the effective application of text analytics. The book presents the analysis process so that it is immediately understood by the marketing professionals who must use it, so they can apply proven concepts and methods correctly and with confidence.

By decoding industry terminology and demonstrating practical application of data models once reserved for experts, Practical Text Analytics shows marketers how to frame the right questions, identify key themes and find hidden meaning from unstructured data. Readers will learn to develop powerful new marketing strategies to elevate customer experience, solidify brand value and elevate reputation. Online resources include selftest questions, chapter review Q&A and an Instructor's Manual with text sources and instructions.

Author Information

Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 years' experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decision-making and behaviour. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

Table of Contents

1 Who should read this book? And what do you want to do today?

2 Getting ready: capturing, sorting, sifting, stemming and matching

3 In pictures: word clouds, wordles and beyond

4 Putting text together: clustering documents using words

5 In the mood for sentiment (and counting)

6 Predictive models 1: having words with regressions

7 Predictive models 2: classifications that grow on trees

8 Predictive models 3: all in the family with Bayes Nets

9 Looking forward and back

Advanced Marketing Management

Principles, Skills and Tools

This book

• Offers a well-rounded approach to the new realities of marketing professions, including discussions of multidisciplinary skills, tools, and the updated 4Ps (Product, Price, Promotion & Place)

• Adapts a variety of cutting-edge business issues from the wider business world into a focused marketing context

• Summarizes a large body of literature and academic research on new developments in marketing management, making them accessible and actionable

• Explores case studies from significant brands and multiple real-world examples in a comprehensive way

• Online resources: Lecture slides and further questions for group discussion

Description

Marketing as a practice is facing unprecedented challenges: a changing media landscape, an increasingly complex customer journey, innovative technologies, start-ups which disrupt traditional channels and a new generation of tech-savvy clients. How should students and practitioners adapt to this shifting landscape and address the skills gap that many of today's marketers face? Advanced Marketing Management prepares students for this new world of marketing. Since traditional marketing approaches fail to provide convincing solutions to modern business realities, a new approach is urgently needed if marketers are to regain trust within their organizations.

Using contemporary examples, business case studies and supporting pedagogy, Advanced Marketing Management will provide a critical exploration into the more advanced aspects of marketing management, including the gap that exists between formal marketing literature and real-world practice, discussion of multidisciplinary tools, and the crucial evolution of the '4Ps'. Summarizing a large body of literature and academic research on new developments, this book is the go-to guide for students, lecturers and practitioners, wanting to succeed as modern marketers.

Online resources include lecture slides and further questions for group discussion.

Author Information

Dr Nikolaos Dimitriadis is an award-winning educator and consultant and the CEO of Trizma Neuro, a neuromarketing and neuroHR company. He is also Regional Director of The University of Sheffield International Faculty, CITY College, for the Western Balkans.

Dr. Neda Jovanovic Dimitriadis is an academic researcher and guest lecturer on brand strategy, consumer behaviour and marketing communications. She specializes in behavioural research in marketing, branding and media planning.

Dr Jillian Ney is a consultant and guest lecturer on social media intelligence in the UK and Europe. Her work has featured at global conferences and has been used by Fortune 500 companies.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2018

Price: £36.99

Paperback: 9780749480370

Ebook: 9780749480387 Pages: 320

Format (mm): 240x170

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Marketing Strategy

Table of Contents

1 The need for the new marketer

2 Neuroscience skills – Marketing and the human brain

3 Predictive skills – Marketing and data intelligence

4 Innovation skills – Marketing and creative thinking

5 Adaptability skills – Marketing and decision making

6 The 4EPs marketing mix, part 1 –Empathic product and experiential price

7 The 4EPs marketing mix, part 2 – Everpresent place and engaging promotion

8 Reorganizing the marketing function

9 Marketers – The new transformational leaders

Marketing Strategy

Overcome Common Pitfalls and Create Effective Marketing

This book

• Presents an easy-to-follow framework for creating a marketing strategy which is scalable and adaptable and can be applied to any business or industry

• Written by thought-leader Jenna Tiffany, who has been has been recognized as one of the top 100 female marketers to follow worldwide by Search Engine Journal

• Identifies the most common pitfalls in everyday marketing practice and provides tools to pre-emptively avoid them

• Supports key concepts with practical tasks for the reader to complete, to cement their understanding of the tasks discussed

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789667417

Ebook: 9781789667424

Pages: 320

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Strategy

Description

WINNER: The BookFest Spring Book Awards 2022 - Marketing category

WINNER: Business Book Awards 2022 - Sales & Marketing category

Tasked with creating marketing strategy? This book is for you. Learn about the most useful tools and models, dodge common mistakes, and optimize your marketing strategy success, with this practical and adaptable framework from award-winning thought-leader Jenna Tiffany.

Create an effective marketing strategy for your business with Marketing Strategy, which offers a clear, easy-to-follow overview of why strategy is important, how to create it, how to implement it, and - crucially - how to measure its success. Packed with global examples and case studies, the book opens by discussing the role strategy plays in any organization's long-term vision. It also discusses the key models and frameworks that can be used to analyze the marketing environment, and offers information on segmentation, targeting and positioning. Importantly, it will outline some of the key challenges likely to crop up, and gives pre-emptive tools for avoiding them.

Marketing Strategy is highly practical in approach. Chapters are supported by short tasks to complete throughout, to cement the reader's understanding of the concepts discussed. Put together, these tasks create an easy to follow, step-by-step framework for creating a marketing strategy. The framework is adaptable and can be applied to any industry or business. Marketing Strategy also includes input from leading marketing strategists including Mark Ritson and organizations such as Mailchimp, the CIM and DMA.

Author Information

Jenna Tiffany, based in London, UK and Lisbon, Portugal is Founder and Strategy Director at marketing agency Let'sTalk Strategy and is recognized as one of the top 50 marketers to follow in the world. A Chartered Marketer and awarded fellow of the IDM, she has worked with brands such as Shell, Hilton and World Duty-Free, and is an elected member of the prestigious DMA UK Email Marketing Council. Jenna Tiffany is also an international conference speaker, qualified teacher and a thought-leader on marketing trends.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 What is strategy?

2 Scenario - Establishing the current situation

3 Targets - Setting objectives

4 Reach - Researching your customers

5 Awareness - Planning your marketing campaign

6 Tactics - Selecting the right channels

Execution - Implementing your marketing strategy

8 Generate - Tracking the results

Yield - Analysing your strategy’s success

Common pitfalls in marketing strategy

Glossary

Further resources

Sales and Marketing Channels

How to Build and Manage Distribution Strategy

This book

• Provides a complete economic framework for analyzing any channel partner (distributor, reseller or retailer) and a new series of multisector insights

• Enables a defined go-to-market strategy and forecasting for emerging channels and technology

• Supports the allocation of scarce resources for the highest returns, and channel negotiation from positions of market strength or weakness

• New to this edition: multi-sector focus, the emergence of the cloud, new consumer channels, the switch from products to services, the 'gig economy' and monetizing intellectual property

• Online resources: Bonus chapters on how to engage with retailers, franchised systems, and managing the people-based business model

Edition: 3

Date: 03/04/2018

Price: £31.99

Paperback: 9780749482145

Ebook: 9780749482152 Pages: 384

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Sales & Key Account Management

Using Behavioral Science in Marketing

Drive Customer Action and Loyalty by Prompting Instinctive Responses

This book

• Shows how to increase response rates, engagement and sales conversions by applying behavioral science techniques to shape consumer behavior

• Covers key areas such as marketing communications, campaigns, social media marketing and customer retention strategies

• Explores how to maximize consumer involvement and engagement through storytelling and convey exclusivity and desirability

• Includes insights from organizations including AT&T, The US Navy, Merrill and The Wall Street Journal

• Online resources: downloadable checklists and interactive templates to be used in practice

Description

Increase engagement, response rates and the ROI of marketing initiatives with this step-by-step guide to harnessing hardwired consumer behavior and instinctive responses.

Using Behavioral Science in Marketing shows how to apply behavioral science principles in key areas of marketing, including marketing communications, email, direct mail and ad campaigns, social media marketing and sales funnel conversion strategies. Highly practical and accessible, it includes case studies and examples from AT&T, Apple, Spotify and The Wall Street Journal showing how these approaches have been used in practice.

Using Behavioral Science in Marketing also reveals how to increase consumer involvement and engagement, convey exclusivity and desirability, and prompt customer action and loyalty with scientifically proven principles such as autonomy bias, storytelling, and the Von Restorff effect.

Featuring common mistakes to avoid and key takeaways at the end of each chapter, it's also accompanied by downloadable checklists and an interactive template to use in practice. In a highly competitive space, where even an incremental advantage can result in significant uplifts, this is a crucial resource to create stand out and successful marketingespecially for marketers in highly regulated or highly competitive environments.

Author Information

Nancy Harhut is Co-Founder and Chief Creative Officer at HBT Marketing, a consultancy which specializes in applying human behavior techniques in marketing and whose clients include H&R Block, AARP and Transamerica. Based in Boston, Massachusetts, she previously held senior creative management positions with agencies within the IPG and Publicis networks, where she worked with clients including Dell, Bank of America and AT&T. A regular international conference keynoter, she has been recognized as an Online Marketing Institute Top 40 Digital Strategist and Ad Club Top 100 Creative Influencer.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398606487

Ebook: 9781398606678 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

Table of Contents

1

Emotional and rational elements in decision making

2

Conveying customer benefits through loss aversion and the endowment effect

3 Achieving urgency and exclusivity through the scarcity principle

4 The reciprocity principle and the marketing value of give to get

5 Social proof - harnessing the power of people like us, and the people we like

6 Storytelling - increasing consumer involvement and engagement

7 Autonomy bias - harnessing the human need for control

8 Encouraging sales and loyalty through the consistency principle and the Zeigarnik effect

9 Information gap theory - prompting consumers to take action through curiosity and the need to know

10 Tapping into the authority principle to stand out and prompt responses

11 Choice architecture and status quo biashow to use inertia to get things moving

12 Labeling and framing - making people see things your way

13 Increasing action through automatic compliance triggers and reasons

14 Maximizing the impact of your marketing copy and language

15 Increasing desirability though triggering availability bias

16 Creating stand out marketing communications through context, rewards and unpredictability

17 Temporal discounting and temporal landmarks - the effects of time on behavior

New

Stand Out Marketing

How to Differentiate Your Organization in a Sea of Sameness

This book

• Presents fascinating original research comparing the websites and social media feeds of over 30 organizations from various sectors, proving how consumers are dealing with a 'sea of sameness' with many of them saying the same thing

• Offers a clear, seven-step, values-based framework that will help organizations break away and differentiate themselves from the competition

• Helps companies identify the exact capabilities, attitudes and behaviours that need to be adjusted to escape the 'herd instinct', enabling them to meet consumers' needs more effectively, and therefore stand out from the competition

• Helps organizations create differential value for their customers, by re-focusing on the consumer and the kinds of solutions they want, rather than the kinds of solutions the organization has traditionally offered

Description

"How do we get customers to choose us over our competitors?"In a crowded market it's imperative to demonstrate that you understand what your customers value and can communicate how you can solve their problem better than the competition.

Stand-out Marketing presents original research which compares the content produced by organizations in a range of sectors which demonstrates that customers are left swimming in a "sea of sameness" by copycat marketing that makes choice difficult.

On the back of this unique and fascinating research, Stand-out Marketing sets out a framework of five competencies for business leaders, marketing and sales professionals to successfully differentiate themselves from competitors. These include seeing the next competitive move, staying in tune with your customers and becoming indispensable to them, activating and evaluating initiatives, as well as building an organizational culture which enables these competencies. Featuring interviews with industry experts, tools and exercises throughout, Stand-out Marketing is an essential resource to help companies stand out, deliver genuine value, and achieve competitive advantage.

Author Information

Dr Simon Kelly is President of Shake Marketing, and was formerly Marketing Director (SVP) of British Telecom. He is also Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Sheffield Business School, and Lecturer in Marketing and Sales at University of York.

Dr Paul Johnston is a senior lecturer in marketing and innovation at Nottingham Trent University.

Stacey Danheiser is CEO and founder of Shake Marketing. She is also CEO and Course Creator for Customer Value Link.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789664829

Ebook: 9781789664836

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Strategy

Table of Contents

1 B2B organizations are stuck in a Sea of Sameness

2 Why does sameness happen in B2B marketing?

3 The V.A.L.U.E. competency framework –core competencies for B2B differentiation

4 The role of sales and marketing in B2B organizations – what is important?

5 The visionary – competencies for seeing the next competitive move

6 The activator – competencies for getting things done

7 The learner – competencies for staying in tune with your customers

8 Usefulness – competencies for becoming indispensable to your customers

9 The evaluator – competencies for making good decisions

10 Building a V.A.L.U.E. competency culture

11 Using V.A.L.U.E. competencies to stand out from your competitors

Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions

How to Develop Them, How to Quantify Them

This book

• Provides readers with a simple, direct methodology to develop and financially quantify their value propositions

• Includes research that demonstrates the impact that quantified value propositions have on a company's financial performance, and why successfully implementing them will make a company more profitable

• Features a wealth of tools, frameworks and templates for the reader to apply to their own day-to-day business practices, and additional downloadable templates and resources

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749481766

Ebook: 9780749481759

Pages: 256

Format (mm): 230x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Marketing Strategy

Description

While many organizations understand the importance of having a clearly defined value proposition to help them become more profitable, many businesses struggle to use them effectively. This book will show you how to develop a financially quantified value proposition that drives growth.

A value proposition is an innovation or feature that clarifies a company's core purpose and identity. In the same way profit lies at the heart of every business, so does the value proposition, communicating how its service or products fulfil the needs of their customers.

Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions is a step-by-step guide to understanding exactly why financially quantified value propositions will help readers to increase revenue and deliver tangible results.

Highly practical and filled with useful tools and checklists, this succinct guide explains the process of developing a value proposition from start to finish, how to use segmentation appeal to the relevant key accounts, and to ensure it is both financially grounded and has resonance with customers. From understanding how buying decisions are made, through to financial dashboards and value quantification tools, Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions is perfect for anyone looking to integrate financial success into their proposition, and gain understanding of how it can be used to deliver and communicate value.

Author Information

Professor Malcolm McDonald is Emeritus Professor at Cranfield & Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School. He is Chairman of six companies, and works with the operating boards of some of the world's leading multinationals. He has written over 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them

Grant Oliver is MD at 90 Day Action Plan, and has over 20 years' experience in software and management consultancy. He has been interim IT director in the NHS, Finance Director of a software company, and Non-Executive Director of a Housing Association.

Table of Contents

1

An important introduction – getting the best out of your value proposition

2 How financially quantified value propositions will make you richer

3 Quantifying the emotional elements of value propositions

4 What exactly is a financially quantified value proposition?

5 An overview of the value proposition process – where to start

6 Why it is critical to understand how key buying decisions are made

7 Which key accounts should you develop value propositions for?

8 Which segments should you develop value propositions for?

9 Understanding key account and segment needs before building a value proposition

10 Understanding our own asset base and capabilities

11 Developing value propositions

12 Creating and financially quantifying value propositions

13 Developing and presenting value propositions that resonate with customers

14 Value-celling – How to maximize value creation in supply chains

15 Financial analysis, value quantification tools and financial dashboards

16 Summary of the value proposition process

Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning

Understanding Marketing Plans and Strategy

This book

• Written by the internationally acknowledged authority on marketing planning, Malcolm McDonald.

• Explains the key concepts and principles of marketing planning in an accessible, engaging fashion.

• A compact guide for busy professionals, containing all essential info in a user-friendly, pedagogically rich format featuring helpful margin notes and key points.

• Includes adaptable business templates and tools that the reader can use when establishing their own marketing plans.

• Online resources: multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

Description

A primer for marketing professionals and students, the second edition of Malcolm McDonald On Marketing Planning provides a clear guide to marketing planning. Focusing on the practical application of marketing planning, this book will guide readers through the production of a marketing plan that has real world application. Key content includes defining markets and segments, setting marketing objectives and strategies, advertising and sales promotion strategies, and price and sales strategies.

With an emphasis on practicality, this fully revised second edition has been thoroughly overhauled to contain new content on the essentials of marketing planning and the strategic marketing process. Online resources include multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

Author Information

Professor Malcolm McDonald is a global leading authority on marketing. He was until recently Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management, and is now an Emeritus Professor at the University as well as being an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and Academic Advisor at the Oxford College of Marketing. He has consulted many major companies in strategic marketing and is Chairman of numerous companies for some of the world's leading multinationals. He has written more than 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them

Edition: 2

Date: 03/11/2016

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749478216

Ebook: 9780749478223 Pages: 192

Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional Subject: Marketing Planning

Table of Contents

1 Let’s get real

Getting rid of that big managerial nonsense

3 Understand the real meaning of customer value

4 A very practical way to begin planning a profitable future

Market segmentation

What do our customers want?

How to set marketing objectives

How to set marketing strategies

9 A step-by-step strategic planning system

10 How to deal with adversity

How to Write a Marketing Plan

Define Your Strategy, Plan Effectively and Reach Your Marketing Goals

This book

• Provides a step-by-step guide to formulating a workable and successful marketing plan

• Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

• Features a free downloadable marketing plan template

• New to this edition: updated to include the use of new technologies and with new templates and revised marketing models

Edition: 7

Date: 03/07/2022

Price: £12.99

Paperback: 9781398605688

Ebook: 9781398605695 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 211x140

Product Category: General Subject: Marketing Planning

Table of Contents

Introduction

Situation analysis – The marketing audit

Objectives

Strategies and action plans

The distribution plan

The advertising and promotions plan

Costs and budgets

Writing the plan

Presenting the plan, follow-up and revision

Mini-plans and quick plans

Appendix – Marketing plan for the UK market

Description

A step-by-step guide to creating a successful marketing plan: from carrying out a marketing audit, setting objectives and devising budgets to writing, presenting and implementing the plan.

How to Write a Marketing Plan includes advice on producing mini-plans and the most current information on email marketing, web usage, mobile commerce and social media. This 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to help you develop this all-important business skill. Including helpful chapter summaries and a detailed sample marketing plan, it is essential reading for anyone who wants to boost their product or business.

The Creating Success series of books... Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this millionselling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you'll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information

John Westwood has held a wide variety of senior sales and marketing positions and is currently an independent marketing consultant, based in East Sussex, UK. He is the author of The Marketing Plan, 30 Minutes to Write a Marketing Plan, The Marketing Plan Workbook and Marketing Your Business, all published by Kogan Page.

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns

A Strategic Approach

This book

• Covers all aspects of planning and managing campaigns in a structured way, from research and analysis, to objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales, resources, evaluation and review

• Features best-practice examples from organizations including Procter & Gamble, Co-op, McDonalds and the UK Government

• New to this edition: material on the latest developments such as online influencers, the role of big data in stakeholder identification and disruptive models

• Online resources: extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks

Edition: 5

Date: 03/12/2020

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789663204

Ebook: 9781789663211 Pages: 352

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Public Relations

Table of Contents

Planning and managing – The context

Public relations in context

Starting the planning process

Research and analysis

Communication theory and setting aims and objectives

Knowing the public and messages

Strategy and tactics

Timescales and resources

Knowing what has been achieved –Evaluation and review

Description

Taking a PR campaign from planning to implementation can seem overwhelming. This book provides a blueprint for success and is widely regarded as one of the best 'how-to' guides available.

Digestible and easy to read, this fifth edition of Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns presents a 12-point plan for ensuring success of campaigns of all sizes, covering vital areas including the role of public relations in organizations, the importance of context, research and analysis, setting objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales and resources, evaluation and review.

With discussion of new developments in the industry, from the gig economy and online influencers, to disruptive models, this fully updated new edition addresses the need for agile planning and draws on fresh case studies to provide up-to-date examples of best practice. Supported by a suite of online resources, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is an invaluable guide for students and practitioners alike. Online resources include extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks.

Author Information

Dr Anne Gregory is a professor of corporate communication and leading international academic. She is based in the School of Business and Law at the University of Huddersfield, and previously spent many years in public relations practice with senior experience both in-house and in consultancy. She remains a consultant and an advisor at board level to several large organizations.

PR Technology, Data and Insights

Igniting a Positive Return on Your Communications Investment

This book

• Reveals the specific purpose-built technologies, data assets and actionable insights that PR professionals can use to inform better executive decisions

• Outlines how you can use technology, data and insights to quantify PRs contribution to business objectives

• Includes case studies from Mastercard, Cisco, Southwest Airlines, Adobe, Oracle, Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, KPMG, Bank of NY Mellon, Wells Fargo, Visa, Audi, IBM, FedEx, NFL, Airbus and General Motors

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398600409

Ebook: 9781398600416 Pages: 232

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Public Relations

Description

Data, technology and insights have forever changed the public relations and corporate communications function. Failure to adapt is more a matter of willingness than inability.

Now, technology, data and insights inform more meaningful objectives and elevate performance evaluation. The result is a positive return on PR investment, reduced reputational risk and optimal efficiency. By ignoring these essential assets, PR professionals risk losing executive attention and organizational investment. While "building buzz" or "breaking through the media clutter" may have been adequate measures of success in the past, the top executives who fund and evaluate corporate communications expect much more, including a quantifiable and positive return on PR investment.

Leaders assume that corporate communications and PR professionals already understand the fundamentals of business, and they expect an ability to contextualize PR objectives, outputs and outcomes in the language of business. PR Technology, Data and Insights helps communications professionals understand the purpose-built technologies, data assets and actionable insights available to them while sharing best practices to apply these assets for improved PR performance over time, versus objectives and against competitors.

Using case studies from industries as varied as financial services, technology, travel, automotive and more, along with best practice examples from Adobe, Mastercard, Southwest, Ford and other world class organizations, PR Technology, Data and Insights shows professional communicators how to optimize technology, lead with data, quantify PR's ability to convert public relations outputs to business outcomes, and deliver insights that empower executive decision-making.

Author Information

Mark Weiner is Chief Insights Officer for PublicRelay, Inc. He lives in Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida. He has lectured at public relations programs at Columbia University, The University of Texas at Austin, UNC-Chapel Hill and New York University. He is an advisor for The University of Florida Public Relations Advisory Council, trustee for the Institute for Public Relations, member of the Arthur Page Society and a member of the PR News Public Relations Hall of Fame. He is the 2018 recipient of the Institute for Public Relations Jack Felton Medal for Lifetime Achievement.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Ethics in Public Relations

A Guide to Best Practice

This book

• Demonstrates that an individual's sense of morality has an impact on decision making and ethical business behaviour, and helps managers account for this in business practice

• Helps practitioners understand and react to ethical consequences in the face of fastmoving technological advances

• Explores the concept of personal ethics spilling into the professional realm in relation to topical issues such as sexual harassment and social media

• Relates underlying ethical issues such as utilitarianism and moral relativism to everyday issues

Description

The weight of social responsibility in public relations (PR) has never been more pronounced. Ensure the professionalism and credibility of your business using the practical tips and guidance in this book, written by a leading academic in the field and recommended for PR students and practitioners alike.

Ethical practice in any professional discipline is guided by age-old philosophical perspectives, but its modern parameters are continually evolving. Ongoing developments in technology, social media and social contexts mean that public relations and its practices are constantly changing, and so do the ethical questions faced by practitioners in the field.

Face the ethical questions and dilemmas that are inherent to public relations and ensure you practice across the public relations spectrum in an ethical and socially responsible manner with this fully updated guide, packed with useful tools and insights to support those in PR and corporate communications.

Engaging and accessible, Ethics in Public Relations offers a lively exploration of the key ethical concerns present in the public relations world today, written by an accredited academic with over 26 years' professional experience in the field.

Fully updated, this third edition includes an entirely new chapter on the uses of ethics in social media, covering topical issues such as blogger engagement and the relationship between employee social media activity and organizational reputation.

Author Information

Patricia J Parsons APR, FCPRS spent 26 years as a faculty member and former chairman in the Department of Communication Studies at Mount Saint Vincent University in Halifax, Canada retiring recently as a full Professor. Her research, writing and teaching focused on public relations ethics and strategy, and healthcare communication. She is the author of a dozen books and numerous papers for the professional and lay press. She is accredited in public relations and is a member of the Canadian Public Relations Society's College of Fellows. Prof. Parsons lives in Toronto and can be reached via email at ethicsinpr@gmail. com or via Twitter @ethicsinpr.

Edition: 3

Date: 03/04/2016

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9780749477264

Ebook: 9780749477271 Pages: 192

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Textbook/ Professional

Subject: Public Relations

Table of Contents

1 What Lies Beneath

Before we begin: New profession... or one of the oldest?

2 Lies, truth and honesty: their role in PR practice

3 Truth, trust and the virtue of being ‘good’.

4 Whose rights are right?

5 The trouble with rules

6 Utilitarianism: Right acts and wrong reasons

2 Ethics and the Practitioner

7 Your moral development: Cultivating respect and humility

8 Codes of ethics: The good, the bad and the (almost) ugly

9 Conflicts of Interest: Sex and other relationship issues

10 (Very) personal ethical decisions: Whistleblowing and moonlighting

3 Strategies and Dilemmas

11 Public Relations ethics and traditional media

12 Public Relations ethics and social media

13 Persuasion propaganda and advocacy: The ethics of influence

14 Supporting ‘good causes’: bad ethics or bad taste?

15 Deceptive authorship: Ghost-writing and plagiarism

4 Organizations, Ethics and PR

16 Making decisions: The true reality of everyday ethics

17 PR and the corporate ethics programme

18 The future of ethical PR: education and leadership

Appendix 1: For your bookshelf

Appendix 2: Chartered Institute of PR Code of Conduct

Appendix 3: Guidelines for the ethics audit

Crisis Communication Strategies

Prepare, Respond and Recover Effectively in Unpredictable and Urgent Situations

This book

• Delivers an improved holistic approach to crisis strategies, from guidance for when the incident first occurs, to the aftermath, the move to recovery and beyond

• Gives a practical framework with easy-tofollow tips, checklists and guidelines that readers can adapt to any industry and any kind of crisis

• Packed with brand new global case studies from responses to events including the British Post Office scandal, Burger King's misfired International Women's Day campaign, Yorkshire cricket's racism scandal and Peloton's crises

• New to this edition: New sections on managing long-running crises and the phases of crises, and new content on behavioral communication and diversity and inclusivity at a time of crisis

Description

Is your company equipped to deal with any kind of crisis - whether caused by internal error, customer action or social media mishap? This bestselling guide gives readers the skills, tools and knowledge to respond effectively to these high-stake situations and protect your brand from disaster.

Crisis Communication Strategies is a must-have guide that covers the whole span of a crisis from preparing and laying the groundwork before it occurs, during the incident, and the aftermath, including the move to recovery and beyond. It guides readers through each phase, providing details of what to consider, what should be done and tips and checklists for improved responses.

This second edition of Crisis Communication Strategies provides new sections on managing long-running crises and the phases of crises. It also contains new content looking at behavioral communication as a tactic during a crisis, and how to ensure diversity and inclusivity at a time of crisis.

Supported by brand new case studies and examples from responses to events including the British Post Office scandal, Burger King's misfired International Women's Day campaign, Yorkshire cricket's racism scandal and Peloton's crises. It also explores the role of leadership in a crisis and developing a crisis communication response that has people at the heart of it. It is an essential guide for PR and communication professionals who wish to protect their company and build long-term resilience.

Author Information

Amanda Coleman, is a PR and communication professional with extensive experience of managing communication when dealing with crises. She is the director of her own crisis communication consultancy and works with a wide variety of clients providing both training and support to deal with crises. Amanda is a Fellow of both the Chartered Institute of Public Relations and the Public Relations and Communications Association, as well as being a Chartered PR Practitioner. She writes the Amandacomms blog, and is the author of Everyday Communication Strategies, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 2

Date: 03/03/2023

Price: £24.99

Paperback: 9781398609419

Ebook: 9781398609426 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Public Relations

Table of Contents

1 The lead up

1 Are you ready for a crisis? Creating and testing a crisis communication plan

2 Recognizing a crisis: What it is and how to spot it

2 During the crisis

3 The operational response: The approaches and how they relate to communications

4 Remembering the people: How employees should come first

5 It’s tough at the top: The role of leadership in a crisis

6 The impact on the community: Managing the consequences

3 The aftermath

7 It’s OK to not be OK: Ensuring support is in place

8 Stepping on the road to recovery

9 So, what happens next?

Communicate in a Crisis

Understand, Engage and Influence Consumer Behaviour to Maximize Brand Trust

This book

• Clarifies a coordinated crisis response plan to overwhelming and often misinformed media and public reaction on social media

• Enables organizations to maximize positive customer engagement with a practical, step by step understanding of how a crisis spreads, the peaks and troughs of consumer reaction and how to turn it into an opportunity

• Embeds a 'bottom-up' crisis culture, including how to differentiate a daily problem from a crisis, engage in early mitigation and legally sound stakeholder response

• Features case studies from leading global brands, as well as personal anecdotes from front-line industry experience

Description

Communicate in a Crisis is the definitive guide for any PR or marketing professional to recognize, plan and respond to a sudden wildfire of consumer-led reaction, 'manipulated outrage' sparked from interaction on news feed algorithms, fuelled by social media and the constant demand for an instantaneous response.

This book turns the traditional crisis management approach on its head, starting by understanding changing consumer behaviours and the new 'threat' for brands, then outlining practical steps to prepare, synchronize and execute a coordinated brand response across all channels - under pressure. It reveals why we love to hate our favourite brands, how to recognize a day to day problem from a crisis, and offers valuable advice, such as using influencers and brand advocates to address social media trolls, rumours and the impact of fake news. With unique case studies, interviews and anecdotes from global leaders, Communicate in a Crisis will embed a bottom-up culture of long-term reputation management, always ready to face the unexpected.

Author Information

Kate Hartley is co-founder of Polpeo, a crisis simulation training consultancy that works with some of the biggest brands in the world. Hartley has 25 years' agency-side experience in crisis and reputation management and corporate PR. She has spoken and run workshops on the impact of social media on crisis management at international events including SXSW, The Global PR Summit, PR Week's Crisis Comms, and Social Media Today's Social Shake Up. She is a member of the CIPR and the PRCA, and sits on the PRCA's digital steering committee which is designed to shape digital best practice in the PR industry.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2019

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749486501

Ebook: 9780749486822 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Public Relations

Myths of PR

All Publicity is Good Publicity and Other Popular Misconceptions

This book

• Frames a critical look at the world of PR by exploring a number of myths that endure, and offers frank discussions of what they reveal about the industry

• Explores fascinating PR myths, and provides genuine insights into where these have stemmed from and what lessons they offer startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students

• Written in an engaging, anecdotal style while still being underpinned by research and clear, evidence-based conclusions

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2017

Price: £15.99

Paperback: 9780749479596

Ebook: 9780749479602

Pages: 224 Format (mm): 233x156

Product Category: General Subject: Public Relations

Description

Myths of PR uses popular myths about the theory and practice of public relations as a vehicle for helping startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students to distinguish between fads and tried-and-tested PR practice. Its purpose is to shatter widespread misconceptions about PR, and grant readers insights into why these myths have endured in spite of clearly demonstrable evidence to the contrary.

By exploring topics that readers will relate to (though many might frequently misunderstand), Myths of PR will shed new light on essential PR methodology. From the assumption that PR is a never-ending party, propagated by the way the industry is shown in the media and entertainment, to more potentially damaging misconceptions such as the often-repeated 'all publicity is good publicity', it is an engaging, anecdotal read that offers authentic insights into the reality of PR practice from one of the brightest and most exciting young communication experts in the UK.

Author Information

Listed in PR Week's 29 under 29 list and named one of 'the brightest young social media communicators', Rich Leigh has a rich and varied PR background, having led award-winning campaigns and household name accounts at digital agency 10 Yetis and consumer agency Frank PR. He now runs Radioactive PR, working with brands big and small, as well as a range of personal PR clients. Rich Leigh created PRexamples.com, dedicated to the best in up-to-date PR stunts and campaigns. He also co-founded blogger outreach service bloggabase, used by brands including Disney, Ralph Lauren and Tesco.

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 PR is all Spin, Smokescreens and Lies

PR Results Can’t Be Measured

All Publicity is Good Publicity

The Press Release is Dead

The Media Ignores Good News

You Have to Pay to See Social Media Benefits

PR is Glamorous

Calling the Media is a No-No

That You Can Make Something Go Viral

You Have to Be an Extrovert to Succeed in PR

PR is the Silver Bullet

Good People and Products Market Themselves

The More You Pay, the Better the Job Done

PR Results are Instant

Consumers Want Conversations With Brands

Working In-House is Easier

Media Relationships are Especially Important

Gender Wage Gap Figures

Conclusion

Influential Internal Communication

Streamline Your Corporate Communication to Drive Efficiency and Engagement

This book

• Delivers a clear, repeatable methodology that will transform an organization's IC practices from chaos to calm

• Uses data and statistics to prove the impact that IC has on profit margins, and gives practical tips for getting board members on side for IC initiatives

• Highlights relevant research, comments and input from leading industry figures including Seth Godin and Brené Brown

• Includes practical case studies from companies such as Perrigo, SSP and transport organizations like fire services and airports

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781789666137

Ebook: 9781789666144

Pages: 240

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Internal Communications

Table of Contents

Introduction

Description

Streamline your organization's communication for happier employees, clients and customers, with this powerful and practical methodology featuring insight from experts Simon Sinek and Brené Brown.

As the title suggests, Influential Internal Communication proves just how influential internal communications (IC) is, and the measurable impact it has on an organization's growth. For many organizations, IC often slips down the list of priorities when there are high pressure, high stakes business situations to cope with. This causes a sense of chaos and confusion within the organization that will - eventually - permeate to external customers and clients. Influential Internal Communication presents a clear, adaptable methodology that will help readers understand, diagnose and fix their own communication challenges, thereby transforming the chaos into calm.

Backed up with data and statistics from industry reports on workplace culture, Influential Internal Communication is based on The Field Model and draws on research with CEO's, some of the best insights into people, organisations and chaos. The theory is backed up with real world case studies, showing how chaos can impact a range of organizations of varying size and industry. Written by the 2020 President of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), Influential Internal Communication will streamline any organization's IC practices, and help to drive engagement, efficiency and profit across the board.

Author Information

Jenni Field has nearly 20 years' experience in communications and is based in Berkshire, UK. She has worked at Director level for numerous organizations including the global pharmaceutical company Perrigo. Jenni Field was the 2020 President of the CIPR, and is both Chartered and a fellow of the Institute. She has been quoted by The Times, Raconteur and listed on the Institute of IC's 30 under 30, and Inspiring Workplaces top 101 influencers in employee engagement. She now runs her own consultancy, Redefining Communications, and speaks regularly for organisations and at industry events.

the model and making it work for

Internal Communications

A Manual for Practitioners

This book

• Offers a refreshingly practical introduction to internal communications which covers all the core concepts and models, skills and processes

• Helps readers both understand key theories and put them into practice with tools and advice throughout

• Includes ready-to-use templates for communications in a variety of situations, including crises, health and safety, branding, redundancy and bad news, mergers and acquisitions, customer service and new business strategies

• Supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers

Description

Get internal communications right in your organization and the benefits are clear: motivated staff, better financial performance, a strong external reputation and delighted customers are just a few of the reasons why getting your message over to staff effectively matters.

Internal Communications explores what good practice in internal communications looks like, providing a no-nonsense, step-by-step approach to devising an internal communications strategy.

Written by experts with extensive experience as consultants and in-house leaders in the private, public and not-for-profit sectors, Internal Communications covers how to build an internal communications team and plan; devise messages and decide which channels to use; work with line managers and senior leaders; research and evaluate internal communications and support change within an organization.

Supported by easy to follow models, example explanations of the core theory, and case studies, it provides students and internal communicators alike with the practical tools and advice they need to make a difference in an organization. The book is also supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers.

Author Information

Liam FitzPatrick is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. He has worked both in-house and for major consultancies running change campaigns, developing communications teams and advising on metrics and evaluation. Liam co-founded the Black Belt series of training for internal communicators and lectures and has served as an external examiner at UK universities. A Fellow of the UK Chartered Institute of Public Relations, he has been involved in planning the education and training of PR practitioners. He is a also member of the Global Certification Council of the International Association of Business Communicators.

Klavs Valskov is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. Since 1999 he has worked in PR, marketing and communication with organisations including L'Oreal, Accenture, Nordea Bank and the Danish Government. From 2008-2013 Klavs was the award-winning Global Director of Communication in Maersk Line managing a team around the world working on public relations, crises, internal communications, social media and customer campaigns. Klavs is part of the Advisory Board at the Institute of Business Communication at Copenhagen Business School. He holds a double MA in Communication and Business Studies.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/08/2014

Price: £26.99

Paperback: 9780749469320

Ebook: 9780749469337 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Internal Communications

Table of Contents

1 What internal communication is and why it matters

Organizing internal communication

Planning

Audiences

Messaging

Channels

Why line managers matter and how to support them

Working with senior leaders

Change

Research and evaluation for internal communicators

11 Developing yourself and the team

Retail Marketing Strategy

Delivering Shopper Delight

This book

• Includes current insights derived from neuromarketing research into consumer behaviour

• Provides practical tools that are robust and easy to use to translate the theory into tangible results

• Contains new models for retail brand management based on first-hand experience at major global retailers and suppliers

Edition: 1

Date: 03/11/2015

Price: £32.99

Paperback: 9780749476915

Ebook: 9780749476922

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x158

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Retail

Description

Basing shopper marketing strategy on customer insights is what differentiates market leading retail brands from weaker competitors. Many retail organizations lack business development and strategic departments that collect experiences, set benchmarks and create models and manuals. Retail Marketing Strategy makes the information available to drive new ways of thinking and make retail practice more agile for everyone.

Outlining the five key capabilities required for retail excellence, namely in-store execution; organizational development; fact-driven decision making; multi-channel operations, and understanding customers, Retail Marketing Strategy answers some of the most difficult questions in retail including how to innovate to develop new ways to interact with customers across multiple channels, and how to replicate online success stories from other sectors. Practical steps are put forward for collating and interpreting the data generated in shopper activity, helping to make sense of trends and build effective strategy. Guidance is based throughout on neuromarketing research, providing a clear framework for building in experiential elements such as scent or music into the retail environment to really engage with consumers on an emotional level.

If you are a marketing, branding or supply chain professional working in retail seeking straightforward and research-driven techniques for building lasting customer loyalty, or you are responsible for driving retail strategy in your organization, let Retail Marketing Strategy be your guide.

Author Information

Constant Berkhout is a passionate practitioner of retail marketing and shopper psychology. He obtained a Master of Science in Economics Cum Laude with a major in Marketing at the University of Groningen in the Netherlands. Through his own agency, Berkhout works with retailers and suppliers in Europe, the Middle East and Asia including Conagra Brands, Danone, GrandVision, Heineken, JDE, Jumbo, Migros, SPAR International and Sonos. Before setting up his own agency, he held commercial and insights roles at Ahold Delhaize, Kraft, P&G and PepsiCo.

Table of Contents

Shopper happiness

Delivering shopper happiness

Shoppers are people

The myth of impulse purchasing

Tapping into irrational shopper behaviour

Understanding the shopper brain through neuro research

Channel choices

Channel preference: the future of the hypermarket channel

What the shopper wants from online shopping channels

Fact-driven decision making

Getting your assortment right

Really making loyalty card programmes work

Making big data digestible

In-store execution

The unstoppable growth of private labels and opportunities for A-brands

The unexplainable effect of music

Can scents work wonders?

Self-scanning is more than savings

Organizational development

The birth of category management

True customer understanding

Shopper marketing: new phase of trade marketing

Embracing the shopper

Retailers in action to increase shopper happiness

Next Generation Retail

How to Use New Technology to Innovate for the Future

This book

• Shows how to respond to the changing demands and expectations of today's and tomorrow's retail consumers in an authentic and relevant way

• Explores real world cases and risks to avoid for innovations including the metaverse, livestream shopping and blockchain to allow for more meaningful connections with consumers

• Describes how to create compelling content and retail media to drive commerce and monetize data while maintaining customer trust

• Contains original research and interviews with retail thought leaders, as well as case studies from the likes of Lancôme, Burberry and Walmart

Description

Forge deeper and more meaningful connections with consumers and embrace the latest opportunities occurring across the physical and digital retail landscape to become more adaptable, resilient and successful.

While change is a constant in retail, flux has accelerated in innovation, digital disruption and changing consumer demands and expectations. Written for both digital-first and physical retailers, Next Generation Retail describes how to respond to the needs and expectations of today's consumers and connect with Generations Z and Alpha in an authentic and relevant way. Highly practical in approach, it explores the latest opportunities and pitfalls to avoid for developments including the metaverse, livestream shopping, instant commerce, blockchain and non-fungible tokens (NFTs).

Next Generation Retail also describes how to create compelling content and retail media to drive commerce and monetize data while maintaining customer trust. Featuring original research and interviews with top industry experts, it contains examples and case studies from a range of brands and organizations including Lancôme, Burberry, and Walmart. This is an essential resource for retailers of all sizes to adapt to and thrive in today's environment of breakneck change and innovation.

Author Information

Deborah Weinswig is the founder and CEO of Coresight Research, a firm which helps retail clients accelerate innovation and growth. Based in New York City, New York, she was previously Managing Director and Head of the Global Staples and Consumer Discretionary team at Citi Research. A frequent conference keynote speaker, she sits on the advisory board of the World Retail Congress and was recognised as a Top Retail Influencer of 2022 by RETHINK Retail. She is frequently quoted in The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, Bloomberg and Forbes.

Renee Hartmann is the Co-Founder of CLA, a research and strategy consulting firm that advises consumer brands which include Giorgio Armani, Fendi and Yves Saint Laurent on international expansion and strategy. Based near Los Angeles, California, she has worked as a brand owner, retail operator, consumer researcher and branding and market entry strategist for the last 25 years.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2023

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9781398609631

Ebook: 9781398609624 Pages: 240

Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Retail

Table of Contents

Introduction – The changing nature of today’s consumer

1

Reaching consumers in new ways

1 Unlocking the metaverse

2 Livestreaming

3 New channels - instant commerce

4 Connecting with Gen Z and Gen Alpha using their language

5 Creating compelling content to drive commerce

2 Monetizing consumers with innovative models

6 Creating retail media to monetize consumer traffic

7 To NFT or not?

8 Bringing blockchain to retail

9 Unique collaborations and crossovers to drive energy and sales

10 Monetizing retail data while maintaining customer trust

Embracing Artificial Intelligence (AI) for retail optimization

3 What’s ahead? The future outlook for retail

What’s ahead?

Creating your roadmap

The Retail Start-Up Book

Successfully Plan, Launch and Grow a Business

This book

• Learn how to plan and deliver a successful retail vision, master the best routes to market and communicate effectively with new and existing customers

• Shows how to set KPIs to balance sales against overheads and use data to keep an eye on profits

• Teaches the science of shopping, how to research customer behaviours and optimize staff for the greatest customer satisfaction

Edition: 1

Date: 03/05/2019

Price: £22.99

Paperback: 9780749484729

Ebook: 9780749484736 Pages: 272

Format (mm): 240x160

Product Category: Professional/ Academic Subject: Retail

Description

The retail market in the UK is worth more than £400 billion annually and employs over 3 million workers, while in the US 29 million people create over USD $4 trillion of revenue through the industry. Despite the challenge to establish stores and big-box retailers, there's a rapid increase in the number of retail start-ups and consistent growth in the independent sector. From beard shops and barbers, through cafes and coffee shops, to 'retailment' concept stores and boutique consumer-focused experiences, the specialist retail sector is booming.

The Retail Start-Up Book provides clear guidance and advice on how to develop a winning retail strategy that seamlessly merges online and offline tactics. Introducing the science of shopping and how to understand customer behaviours and needs, it explores the essential steps of developing a business plan, marketing and promoting a business and advising on buying and visual merchandising. Building on years of retail experience nationally and internationally, in large groups and with independent retailers, The Retail Start-Up Book meticulously provide invaluable practical insights to help new retailers hit the floor running, or more established organizations grow their business and nurture their profits.

Author Information

Rowland Gee is former Chief Executive of Moss Bros Group plc. Under his leadership, Moss Bros entered a strategic business relationship with Hugo Boss, resulting in the UK establishment of the brand. He is co-founder of Grey4Gold Ltd, a professional skills matching service for retail.

Danny Sloan was BAA Director of Planning 2012, ensuring BAA airports delivered the First and Lasting Impression for the UK across its airports during the London Olympics. He is co-founder of Grey4Gold Ltd.

Graham Symes is an experienced finance director in retail and wholesale fashion, with clients including Harrods, Harvey Nichols, Selfridges, and Christian Lacroix.

Omnichannel Retail

How to build winning stores in a digital world

This book

• Exploit the multi-million revenue concept of 'research online, buy offline' (ROBO) to build real and profitable relationships with your best customers

• Learn how to use the digitally augmented store to face challenges affecting retailers in all sectors, from high street chains, through to out of town stores

• Understand how to use artificial seasonal peaks, such as 'Black Friday' to commercial advantage

• Work out how loyal customers can create a more stable foundation for your retail business

• Discover how customer data can have an accurate impact on range decisions

Description

FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2020 - Sales and Marketing Category

According to many reports, the physical retail experience is in crisis as more and more consumers shift to internet shopping. Despite this, the majority of global purchases still happen offline, from 90% of sales in the US through to 92% of sales in the UK and 94% in China. The big change is that today's shopper seeks content and advice online before buying in store. Omnichannel Retail celebrates all the advantages of the physical shopping experience, from its sensory selection through to try-before-you buy, and its potential for providing an instant and profitable retail solution, while explaining the imperative of bringing the power of digital and an omnichannel experience to everyday shopping.

Connecting the digital customer to the physical customer, Omnichannel Retail delivers a wealth of opportunities for the bricks and mortar store, including an enhanced customer journey, effortlessly tailoring specific products to a particular customer, exploiting surge pricing, upselling lucrative products and above all, building real, and profitable, relationships with your best customers. Based on over thirty years in loyalty marketing, Tim Mason diligently addresses the challenges facing retailers, providing tangible and proven solutions to capitalize on the changing retail landscape.

Author Information

Tim Mason has over 30 years' experience within the grocery and retail industries, with a strong background in strategic marketing and customer loyalty. He was the Deputy CEO of Tesco from January 2010 to December 2012 and held a number of senior roles in the Tesco Group including CMO, where he was responsible for the launch of Clubcard and Tesco. com. He is currently CEO of Eagle Eye, an SaaS technology company, working with leading grocery chains, the casual dining sector and non-food retailers.

Miya Knights is Head of Eagle Eye Solutions with 20 years' experience as an analyst, journalist and editor, specializing in enterprise technology use in retail. She owns Retail Technology magazine, is ranked one of Vend's top 50 retail influencers and has recently appeared on the BBC, ITN and Sky News, as well as regularly speaking at or moderating industry events.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/04/2019

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749484460

Ebook: 9780749484477

Pages: 224

Format (mm): 235x159

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Retail

Table of Contents

Introduction

The digital imperative

Analogue learnings

Loyalty is dead

Your location in the physical world

The digitally augmented store

Mobile makeover

Data-based retailing

Performance marketing

The importance of e-commerce

New media, new content

Lessons learned

Index

Retail Disruptors

The Spectacular Rise and Impact of the Hard Discounters

This book

• Explains the retail strategies and business models behind the leading hard discounters such as Aldi, Lidl and Trader Joe's

• Provides traditional retailers with the tips, strategies and techniques needed to remain competitive in the face of hard discounting disruption

• Questions whether or not hard discounters can feasibly replace traditional mega retailers, such as Walmart and K-Mart

Edition: 1

Date: 03/10/2018

Price: £19.99

Paperback: 9780749483470

Ebook: 9780749483487

Pages: 264

Format (mm): 230x155

Product Category: Professional/ Academic

Subject: Retail

Description

The rise of hard discounters like Aldi and Lidl has been monumental. Explore the very real threat they pose to traditional retailers and brand manufacturers and what you can learn from their growth.

Hard discounters are stores that sell a limited selection of consumer-packaged goods and perishables - typically fewer than 2,000 Stock Keeping Units - for prices that are usually 50-60% lower than national brands. The best-known hard discounters are Aldi and Lidl, but global brands include Trader Joe's, EuroSpin, Biedronka, Netto and Leader Price. Their rise has been monumental; they have irrevocably changed the face of retail in Europe and Australia and are making steady inroads into the US.

Retail Disruptors is the first book that explores this upheaval, providing expert insight into the business models of the leading hard discounters, and what mainstream retailers and brand manufacturers can do to remain competitive in the face of disruption. Meticulously researched by two of the leading authorities in retail strategy, private labels, branding, and hard discounting, Retail Disruptors is essential reading for all brand manufacturers and retailers who want to retain the competitive edge.

Author Information

Dr Jan-Benedict Steenkamp is Distinguished Professor of Marketing at University of North Carolina, USA. He is Honorary Professor at the European Institute for Advanced Studies in Management, Fellow of the European Marketing Academy, and Fellow at the Institute for Sustainable Growth at Fudan University (Shanghai). His work has received over 38,000 citations and been featured in the Wall Street Journal, Financial Times and the Economist

Dr Laurens Sloot is Professor of Retail Marketing at the University of Groningen. He founded the EFMI Business School at Erasmus University, which has since developed into a leading educational and research institute.

Table of Contents

1 How hard discounters are disrupting the traditional retail model

1 Hard discounter strategies

2 Understanding the hard discounter business model

3 Strategies of key hard discounters: Aldi, Lidl, Trader Joe’s and DIA

4 Hard discounter success around the world

5 The next frontier – dissecting the US grocery retailscape

2 Competitive counterstrategies for conventional retailers

6 How are conventional retailers being impacted by discounter entry?

7 How conventional retailers can compete with hard discounters

8 Strategies to reduce procurement costs

3 Brand manufacturer strategies versus hard discounters

9 Competition – creating winning brand propositions versus private labels

10 Cooperation – producing private labels for hard discounters

11 Co-opetition – generating successful sales in hard discounter stores

12 A look into the future of disruptive retailing

Using Semiotics in Retail

Leverage Consumer Insight to Engage Shoppers and Boost Sales

This book

• Reveals how to create effective retail marketing to increase sales and engagement by applying semiotic insights

• Equips retailers of all sizes with a practical toolkit to be implemented both online and in bricks and mortar stores

• Explains how to modify shopper behaviour to stimulate unplanned purchases, boost brand recognition and design exciting shopper experiences

• Contains numerous real-world case studies and examples throughout from brands including Unilever, Selfridges and Waitrose

• Online resources: interactive checklists and templates

Description

Boosting retail sales is more important than ever. Stand out in a global, digital marketplace, grow customer loyalty and evolve your brand by leveraging the power of semiotics online and in physical stores.

Practical, accessible and based on 20 years of global marketing experience, Using Semiotics in Retail shows retailers of all sizes how to upgrade and empower their marketing, today and for the future. Discover step-by-step how to recognise and design for emerging consumer needs and create meaningful shopper experiences. Learn how to surprise and delight consumers, increase engagement and make shopping easier for everyone. It features case studies and examples from Unilever, Freshippo, H&M, Google, Toyota and many more.

Using Semiotics in Retail shares game-changing marketing insights in categories such as FMCG, fashion, technology and entertainment, drawn from China, India, Mexico, the US and the UK. The book is supported by online resources that include templates and interactive exercises. Using Semiotics in Retail equips readers with a set of powerful tools which readers can use straight away to create engaging and successful retail marketing.

Author Information

Dr Rachel Lawes is recognized as one of the original founders of commercial semiotics. Based in London, UK, she is a Fellow of the Market Research Society, and for 15 years has convened its Advanced Qualitative Methods Masterclass. She supplies brand and marketing strategy to businesses such as Unilever, P&G, Kraft, Nike and Diageo, as well as clients in specialized sectors such as pharmaceuticals and finance. A regular international conference speaker, she is the author of Using Semiotics in Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/02/2022

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398603820

Ebook: 9781398603837

Pages: 296

Format (mm): 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Retail

Table of Contents

Case studies - semiotics in real-world retail

Semiotics will change your career in retail or retail marketing

How Unilever uses semiotics

The present day

Desire

‘Premium, natural, sensational!’ How to create meaning

Shopper needs and behaviour

Shopping and identity

The future

The future of business

The future of consumers

The future of retail

The future of everything

You can do semiotics - tools for retailers

Fast answers to everyday questions

Tools for thinking - how to generate ideas using semiotics

Acknowledgements

Retail Innovation Reframed

How to Transform Operations and Achieve Purpose-led Growth and Resilience

This book

• Provides insights from leading industry experts for retailers on how to navigate innovation and manage retail operations in a disruptive environment

• Offers the latest thinking on how to demonstrate the value and opportunities innovation can bring to clients and organizations

• Looks at the right ways to analyze and test new innovations, providing evidence, tools and business operations models to ensure change is sustainable

• Features case studies of Walmart, Amazon, Starbucks and Warby Parker

• Online resources: templates include interview sheet and observation sheets and a testing card for innovation ideas

Description

Retail is defined by disruption; companies either adapt or are replaced by those that will. More so than ever learning how to reframe your business, apply change and stay innovative is key to continued success and survival.

Innovation is hard for any organization, even more so for retailers where executing retail basics can often be seen as enough. But the difference between success and failure is increasingly becoming the ability to reframe your approach to innovation and use it to win the competitive edge, as Retail Innovation Reframed explains. Changing your business operations to solve customers' biggest challenges is how established household names and emerging businesses now thrive.

Featuring case studies including Walmart, Warby Parker, Starbucks and Amazon, Retail Innovation Reframed demonstrates how to weave innovation into the operating fabric your company to remain ahead of the curve. Start your journey to innovation and learn how to use change to succeed. Online resources include templates for testing and analyzing new innovations.

Author Information

Gareth Jude is Co-Founder and Asia Pacific Leader of ThinkUncommon based in Sydney, Australia. He was formerly group wide merchandise/marketing and store planning manager for the DSE division of Woolworth's where he led the launch of Australia's first full range, fully trading website by a traditional retailer. He has had several senior leadership or CEO roles in retail and is a highly respected influencer in Australian retail. He is passionate about educating the next generation of retailers and has done so at Sydney, Macquarie,

University of Technology Sydney and Shanghai Jiao Tong Universities.

Andrew Smith is Co-Founder and Manging Partner for the Americas of ThinkUncommon, based in New York, New York. He has formerly held roles including the Head of Customer Experience Strategy and the Head of Retail Operations for Telstra in Australia as part of a retail career focused on experience and technology innovation. He brings a decade of successful execution of innovation as a process in retail across two continents, with a focus on the new skills required for retailing during disruption.

Edition: 1

Date: 03/03/2021

Price: £29.99

Paperback: 9781398600911

Ebook: 9781398600935 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156

Product Category: Professional Subject: Retail

Table of Contents

Introduction

1 Why the retail industry needs to reframe

1 Why retail needs to be reframed

2 Why innovation is hard for retailers

3 Retail innovation as a process

2 Your Innovation quest

4 Stage 1 – Resetting the foundations and building an innovation Launchpad

5 Stage 2 – Filter the right ideas using the golden rule

6 Stage 3 – Get innovation-ready

7 Stage 4 – Analyse and design the solution

8 Stage 5 – Make the design and scale it

Stage 6 – Embedding and making it the new normal

3 The different paths of innovation

Urgent innovation

Innovation in small retail businesses

Weaving innovation into the operating fabric of your business

Conclusion

Index

Unlock fundamental skills for business success

Tackle

biggest falsehoods disrupting business today

Tackle the falsehoods that pervade the business world

From leadership and management to strategy, branding and social media, the Business Myths series equips readers with the insight wisdom needed to succeed

Accessibility

Kogan Page is committed to accessibility. We create highly accessible ebook files and we make sure they are readily available to users who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled. Our commitment to accessibility has been recognized by organizations such as DAISY, Inclusive Publishing and Digital Book World. Staff have presented on accessibility and born-accessible production workflows at the London Book Fair, the Frankfurt Book Fair International Supply Chain Seminar and the Anniversary Conference for the NADP and authored an accessibility case study for Inclusive Publishing.

Awards

Product Design Award (2021)

The Stationers’ Company Innovation Excellence Awards

Digital Publishing Award (2020)

IPG Independent Publishing Awards

ABC International Excellence Award in Accessible Publishing 2019 (shortlisted)

London Book Fair

ASPIRE rating GOLD for our website accessibility statement

Accessible ebooks programme

DAISY Award for Accessibility (shortlisted) Digital Book World 2019

Kogan Page is proud to be one of a small number of publishers in the world to receive Benetech’s Global Certified Accessible accreditation for ebooks. This award is the gold standard for accessible publications and certifies that Kogan Page has demonstrated conformance to accessibility guidelines set forth by the Global Certified Accessible Consortium, which are based on standards put in place by the W3C and the international publishing community.

Kogan Page ebooks are available in EPUB3 formats and conform to the W3C standard EPUB Accessibility 1 0. We ensure ARIA roles, EPUB types, accessibility metadata and alternative (alt) text and long descriptions for imagery and tables are included. All of our ebooks have a logical reading order and include mark-up and structure to ensure easy navigation and compatibility with assistive technologies, such as screen readers.

Accessing accessible ebooks

Since 2012, Kogan Page has worked with RNIB Bookshare, an online library of accessible publications, to make all of our ebooks available to persons who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled at the same time as the publication of the print editions. Our accessible ebooks are also available on numerous platforms including VitalSource Bookshelf, AccessText, Kortext, Bookshare (US) and Bookshare Australia (Vision Australia). We are a signatory to the Accessible Book Consortium’s Charter for Accessible Publishing, which promotes the production of ebooks in accessible formats.

If you have any questions about accessibility accessibility@koganpage.com

Index of titles

50 Top Tools for Coaching 240

Accelerated Digital Transformation 47

Accounting and Finance for Managers 10

Accounting for Non-Accountants 11

A Circular Economy Handbook 332

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 393

Adjacent Learning 211

Advanced Customer Analytics 408

Advanced Marketing Management 410

Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology 82

Agile Change Management 188

Air Transport Management 281

Anti-Money Laundering 17

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 190

A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement 306

A Practical Guide to Logistics 248

A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing 380

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 174

Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 135

Armstrong's Handbook of Learning and Development 204

Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 145

Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management 173

Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice 179

Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 147

Artificial Intelligence for HR 169

Artificial Intelligence for Learning 172

Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407 Assessment Centre Success 109

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 280

Aviation Logistics 282

B2B Customer Experience 375

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 353

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 374

B2B Marketing Strategy 373

Be Data Analytical 50

Be Data Driven 51

Be Data Literate 132

Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Brand Elevation 394

Brand Strategy in Three Steps 385

Building the Agile Business 189

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 53 Building Top-Performing Teams 178

Business Continuity Management 67 Business Experimentation 88 Business Operations Models 273 Business Research 34 Business Research Methods 35 Business Resilience 226

Career Fear (and how to beat it) 99

Category Management in Purchasing 297

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 72

Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 337

Coaching and Mentoring 236

Coaching People through Organizational Change 244 Coherence 63

Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice 320

Commercial Lending 26

Communicate in a Crisis 422

Confident Coding 127

Confident Cyber Security 75 Confident Cyber Security 130 Confident Data Skills 131 Confident Digital Content 128 Confident Web Design 129 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 185 Container Logistics 287

Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 367

Continuing Professional Development 209 Contract Management 300

Crisis Communication Strategies 421

Cross-Border Logistics Operations 270 Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 27 Cyber Risk Management 70

Cybersecurity for Business 74

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business 49

Data-Driven HR 162

Data-Driven Organization Design 219 Data Ethics 54

Dealing with Difficult People 122

Decarbonizing Business 341

Decarbonizing Logistics 340

Decision Making and Problem Solving 84

Defence Logistics 261

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 316

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 208

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures

Developing Mental Toughness

Developing People and Organisations

Developing Skills for Business Leadership

Your Leadership Skills

Your Presentation Skills

Digital Branding

HR Strategy

Marketing in Practice

Marketing Strategy

Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching

Digital Transformation through Data and AI

and Supply Chain Integration

E-Commerce Website Optimization

Effective Strategic Sourcing

E-Logistics 260

Emerging Markets 56

Employee Engagement 193

Employee Relations 203

Employment Law 199

Employment Law 200

Employment Relations 202

Essential Leadership 57

Essentials of Advertising 346

Ethical Data and Information Management 55 Ethics in Public Relations 420

Event Planning and Management 396 Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 397

Evidence-Based Management 79

Excellence in Coaching 234

Excellence in People Analytics 159

Experiential Learning 217

Experiential Marketing 368

Fashion Brand Management 388

Fashion Logistics 262

Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 19

Financial Technology 18

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 310

Flexible Working 152

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 323

Forensic Accounting and Finance 13

From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics 252

From Marginal to Mainstream 387

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 66

Fundamentals of Risk Management 65

Games and Gamification in Market Research 403

Global Brand Management 382

Global Business Ethics 41

Global Contract Logistics 305

Global Logistics 268

Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 324

Global Waste Management 334

Good Work 96

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 108 Green and Sustainable Finance 29

Green Logistics 333

Health and Safety in Logistics 266

How People Learn 210

How to Create a Coaching Culture 235

How to Manage People 126

How to Manage Projects 39

How to Organize Yourself 124

How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests 116

How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests 115

How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests 117

How to Work Remotely 125

How to Write a Business Plan 92 How to Write a Marketing Plan 417 How to Write Effective Business English 118

How to Write Reports and Proposals 119

Human Capital Management Standards 153

Human Experience at Work 197

Humanitarian Logistics 328

Human Resource Management 140

Human Resource Management at Work 136

Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 137

Human Resource Management in a Business Context 138

Human Resource Management in Context 139

Human Resource Practice 143

Implementing Key Account Management 377

Improve Your Communication Skills 120

Inclusive Talent Management 232

Influencer Marketing Strategy 364

Influential Internal Communication 424

Innovative B2B Marketing 372

Inspiring Green Consumer Choices

Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 327

Internal Communications

International Brand Strategy

International Finance 22

International Freight Transport 269

International Human Resource Management

International Human Resource Management

International Human Resource Management

International Standards for Design and Manufacturing

International Supply Chain Relationships

Introduction to Employment Law

Introduction to Global Logistics

Introduction to HR Technologies

Introduction to Human Resource Management

Introduction to People Analytics

Investment and Portfolio Management

IT Governance

Kapferer on Luxury

Key Account Management

Knowledge Management

Leadership Coaching

Leadership Team Coaching

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice

Leading Cultural Change

Leading Procurement Strategy

Learning Analytics

Learning and Development

Learning and Development

Learning and

Learning Ecosystems

Development

Learning Experience Design

Learning for Organizational Development

Learning Technology

Logistics and Retail Management

Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation

Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management

Lowe's Transport Manager and Operator's Handbook 2023

Make Your Own Map

Making Sense of Change Management

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management

Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning

Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions

Study Collection

Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution

Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change

Managing Change

Managing Employment Relations

Managing Luxury Brands

Managing the Retail Supply Chain

Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis

Maritime Logistics 284

Maritime Transport 285

Marketing Analytics 404

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 263

Marketing Communications 365

Marketing Metrics 406

Marketing Strategy

Market Research in Practice

Mastering the Circular Economy 330

Mastering the Supply Chain 253

Mobile Marketing 355

Motivation and Performance 177

Myths of Branding 389

Myths of Leadership 61

Myths of Management 33

Myths of Marketing 348

Myths of PR 423

Myths of Social Media 362

Myths of Strategy 85

Myths of Work 220

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals 302

Networked, Scaled, and Agile 227 Neurodiversity at Work 233

Neuroscience for Coaches 242

Neuroscience for Leaders 62

Neuroscience for Learning and Development 212 Neuroscience for Organizational Change 187

Next Generation Retail 427

Omnichannel Retail 429

Organizational Behaviour 218

Organizational Planning and Analysis 225

Organization Development 221

Packaging Logistics 265

Paid Attention 347

People and Organisational Development 223

People Practice 144

Performance Management 176

Performance Management Performance Management

Persuasive Copywriting

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns

Podcasting Marketing Strategy

Port Management 286

Practical Statistics 36

Practical Text Analytics 409

Predictive Analytics for Marketers

Predictive HR Analytics 157

Product Design and the Supply Chain 293

PR Technology, Data and Insights

Questionnaire Design 400

Radical Business Model Transformation 81

Reinventing Banking and Finance 28

Relationship Management in Banking 25

Remote Workplace Culture 228

Research Methods in Human Resource Management 163

Resetting Management 78

Resourcing and Talent Management 230

Responsible Business 42 Retail and Digital Banking 24

Retail Disruptors

Retail Innovation Reframed 432

Retail Marketing Strategy 426

Rethinking Reputational Risk 73

Reward Management 180

Reward Management 181

Road Passenger Transport Management

Sales and Marketing Channels

Sales and Marketing Channels

Selling Transformed

Social Media Marketing for Business

Social Media Strategy

Stand Out Marketing

Strategic Decision Making

Strategic Human Resource Management

Strategic Internal Communication

Strategic People Management and Development

Strategic Risk and Crisis Management

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management

Strategic Sourcing Management 294

Strategic Supply Chain Management

Strategic Value Chain Management

Studying Human Resource Management

Learning and Development

After Service

Successful Employee Communications

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain

Successful Time Management

Superconductors

Supplier Relationship Management

Supply Chain 4.0

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling

Supply Chain Disruption

Supply Chain Ethics

Supply Chain Finance

Supply Chain Management Accounting

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians

Supply Chain Risk Management

Supply Chains in Action

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

Sustainability in Global Value Chains

Sustainability to Social Change

Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics 338

Sustainable Human Resource Management 150

Sustainable Investing in Practice 30

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 331

Sustainable Procurement 298

Sustainable Procurement 343

Systemic Coaching and Constellations 237

Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 289 Technology and the Blue Economy 288

The Agile Organization 224

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs 100

The Business Analysis Handbook 37

The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 43

The Business Models Handbook 83

The Business Plan Workbook 91

The Buyer's Toolkit 303

The Change Mindset 59

The Contemporary CFO 16

The Cryptocurrency Revolution 21

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 366

The Digital Marketing Handbook 351

The Effective Change Manager's Handbook 186

The Energized Workplace 229

The Enterprise Big Data Framework 48

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech 20

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 23

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 247

The Inventory Toolkit 272

The Job-Ready Guide 111

The Knowledge Manager's Handbook 45

The Leadership Skills Handbook 58

The Lean Supply Chain 322

The Learning and Development Handbook 216

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 258

The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 259

The Luxury Strategy 391

The Management of Luxury 395 The Martech Handbook 359

The New Chameleons 371

The New Strategic Brand Management 383

The New Strategist 80

The New World of Work 165

The Next Rules of Work 192

The Operations Advantage 274

The Organizational Resilience Handbook 68 The Power of Difference 166

The Power of Project Leadership 40

The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation 52

The Practical Negotiation Handbook

The Retail Start-Up Book

The Return to Study Handbook

The Risk Management Handbook 69

The Road to Zero Emissions

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain

The Success Factor

The Successful Career Toolkit

The Sustainable Business Handbook

The Technology Procurement Handbook

The Tesla Way

The Young Entrepreneur

Toyota Methods and Operating Models

Ultimate Aptitude Tests

Cover Letters

Search

Job

Psychometric

Artificial Intelligence in Marketing

Using Behavioral Science in Marketing

Using Semiotics in Marketing

Using Semiotics in Retail

Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals

Marketing

Warehouse Management

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader

and Employment in a Changing Business Environment

Learning

Index of titles by author

Abley, Richard Relationship Management in Banking 25

Abraham, Peter Building the Agile Business 189

Abraham, Peter Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 53

Adair, John Decision Making and Problem Solving 84

Adair, John Develop Your Leadership Skills 60

Adamou, Betty Games and Gamification in Market Research 403

Afy-Shararah, Mohamed Systems for Manufacturing ExcellenceRich, Nick Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 289

Aktas, Emel Supply Chain 4.0 314

Alfonso, Darrell The Martech Handbook 359

Al-Karaghouli, Wafi Understanding Islamic Financial Services 15

Anderson, Valerie Human Capital Management Standards 153

Anderson, Valerie Research Methods in Human Resource Management 163

Arian, Somi Career Fear (and how to beat it) 99

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 174

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 135

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development 204 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 145

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management 173

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 179

Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 147

Armstrong, Michael How to Manage People 126

Arney, Eileen Learning for Organizational Development 206

Arvinen-Muondo, Raisa Organizational Behaviour 218

Ashby, Simon Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 66

Ashdown, Linda Performance Management 176

Asplen-Taylor, Simon Data and Analytics Strategy for Business 49

Atherton, Julie Social Media Strategy 363 Atkins, Derek Rethinking Reputational Risk 73

Aylott, Elizabeth Employee Relations 203

Aylott, Elizabeth Employment Law 200 Bailey, Simon Myths of Branding 389 Baker, Peter The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 247 Bak, Ozlem E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 318 Bak, Ozlem Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics 338 Bals, Lydia Supply Chain Finance 307

Bamber, Matt Accounting and Finance for Managers 10 Barbour, Paul J Building Top-Performing Teams 178 Barends, Eric Evidence-Based Management 79 Barker, Alan Improve Your Communication Skills 120 Barker, Jessica Confident Cyber Security 75 Barker, Jessica Confident Cyber Security 130 Barrett, Jim Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113 Barrett, Tom Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113

Barrow, Colin The Business Plan Workbook 91 Barrow, Paul The Business Plan Workbook 91 Barr, Patrick Effective Strategic Sourcing 295 Barr, Patrick The Successful Career Toolkit 97 Barthélemy, Jérôme Myths of Strategy 85

Bastien, Vincent The Luxury Strategy 391 Beard, Colin Experiential Learning 217 Beaven, Karen Strategic Human Resource Management 149 Beevers, Kathy Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 205 Beevers, Kathy People Practice 144 Behrends, Sönke Urban Logistics 264 Beije, Aljosja Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Bell, Fred Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 27 Bell, Graham The Organizational Resilience Handbook 68 Bennett, Tony Managing Employment Relations 201 Beresford, Anthony International Freight Transport 269 Beresford, Anthony Port Management 286

Berghaus, Benjamin The Management of Luxury 395 Berkhout, Constant Retail Marketing Strategy 426 Bernadette Event Planning and Management 396 Bhimani, Alnoor Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 19 Bishop, Kathryn Make Your Own Map 98 Bod, Anneke de From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics 252 Bolles, Gary A The Next Rules of Work 192 Bolton, Kate Questionnaire DesignBrace, Ian Questionnaire Design 400 Bond, Heather Human Capital Management Standards 153 Borek, Alexander Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 161 Bourlakis, Michael Supply Chain 4.0 314 Boyd, Drew Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 393 Brace, Ian Questionnaire DesignBrace, Ian Questionnaire Design 400

Braithwaite, Alan Business Operations Models 273 Brann, Amy Neuroscience for Coaches 242 Brewster, Chris International Human Resource Management 154 Bridger, Emma Employee Engagement 193 Brown, Duncan Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 179

Browne, Michael Green Logistics 333 Browne, Michael Urban Logistics 264 Brown, Robert

The Business Plan Workbook 91 Bruel, Olivier

Strategic Sourcing Management 294 Bryon, Mike How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests 116 Bryon, Mike Ultimate Psychometric Tests 114 Buglear, John Practical Statistics 36 Burgess, Bev

A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 380 Burroughs, Chloe The Return to Study Handbook 94 Calder, Alan IT Governance 46 Cameron, Esther Essential Leadership 57 Cameron, Esther Making Sense of Change Management 182 Cameron, Sheila Business Research Methods 35 Cantore, Stefan

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 190 Carlsson, Magnus Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 299 Carter, Philip Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Carvill, Michelle Myths of Social Media 362 Cattaneo, Eleonora Managing Luxury Brands 390 Caunt, John How to Organize Yourself 124 Chapman, Rose Anti-Money Laundering 17 Cheese, Peter

The New World of Work 165 Cheung-Judge, Mee-Yan Organization Development 221 Cheverton, Peter Key Account Management 379 Chew, Bee-Lean

Forensic Accounting and Finance 13 Chopra, Neetan

Accelerated Digital Transformation 47 Choudhury, Islam Business Resilience 226 Christopher, Martin Business Operations Models 273 Christopher, Martin Leading Procurement Strategy 304 Citroën, Lida Success After Service 101 Clark, Donald Artificial Intelligence for Learning 172 Clark, Donald Learning Experience Design 215 Clark, Donald Learning Technology 167 Clinton, Larry Cybersecurity for Business 74 Clough, Peter Developing Mental Toughness 95 Cluley, Robert Essentials of Advertising 346 Coakes, Elayne Business Research 34 Coleman, Amanda Crisis Communication Strategies 421 Collins, Stella Neuroscience for Learning and Development 212 Cooper, Cary Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 151 Cooper, Cary Myths of Management 33 Cooper, Cary Remote Workplace Culture 228 Cortiglioni, Stefano Toyota Methods and Operating Models 292 Coulter, Chris The Sustainable Business Handbook 87 Cowan, David Strategic Internal Communication 196 Craggs, Andy

The Change Mindset 59 Crask, James Business Continuity Management 67 Crockett, Hema Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 195 Croucher, Phil

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 247 Croxen-John, Dan E-Commerce Website Optimization 354 Crystal, Dr. International Human Resource Management 156 Cudby, Adrian Commercial Lending 26 Cureton, Peter Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 208 Dale, Gemma Flexible Working 152 Dale, Gemma How to Work Remotely 125 Daly, Patrick International Supply Chain Relationships 271 Danheiser, Stacey Stand Out Marketing 414 Daniels, Kathy Introduction to Employment Law 198 Danilo, Toyota Methods and Operating Models 292 Dani, Samir

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 323 Dani, Samir Strategic Supply Chain Management 312 Davies, Glen Lowe’s Transport Manager and Operator’s Handbook 2023 283

Davies, Mark

Implementing Key Account Management 377 Davies, Melissa

The Practical Negotiation Handbook 31 Davletshin, Marat Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 327

Dent, Julian Sales and Marketing Channels 381 Dent, Julian Sales and Marketing Channels 412 DeSmet, Bram Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 309 DeSmet, Bram

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain 315 de Swart, Jacques Responsible Business 42 de Waal, Anastasia

The Job-Ready Guide 111 Dewhurst, Sue Successful Employee Communications 194

Dibben, Pauline

Employment Relations 202

DiMartino, Michele Networked, Scaled, and Agile 227

Dimitriadis, Nikolaos Advanced Marketing Management 410

Dimitriadis, Nikolaos Neuroscience for Leaders 62

Donnelly, Rory Human Resource Management at Work 136 Dovgalenko, Sergii The Technology Procurement Handbook 296 Dowson, Ruth Event Planning and Management 396 Duffy, Sean International Brand Strategy 384

Hall, Cristina Learning Analytics 160 Hall, Simon B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 353 Hall, Simon B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 374 Hall, Simon

Dzamic, Lazar

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 366 Eagle, Simon Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 316 Edwards, Helen From Marginal to Mainstream 387 Edwards, Kirsten Predictive HR Analytics 157 Edwards, Martin R Predictive HR Analytics 157 Ellram, Lisa M Supply Chain Finance 307

Eremenko, Kirill Confident Data Skills 131 Eubanks, Ben Artificial Intelligence for HR 169 Evans’, Barry Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 263 Evans, Barry The Lean Supply Chain 322 Evans, Dennis The Road to Zero Emissions 339 Evans, Des The Road to Zero Emissions 339 Fanshawe, Simon The Power of Difference 166 Farnham, David Human Resource Management in Context 139 Fernie, John Fashion Logistics 262

Fernie, John Logistics and Retail Management 277 Ferrar, Jonathan Excellence in People Analytics 159 Fielding, Paul J How to Manage Projects 39 Field, Jenni Influential Internal Communication 424 Finch, Brian How to Write a Business Plan 92 Findlay, Charles Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 310 Fisher, Virginia Managing Employment Relations 201 FitzPatrick, Liam Internal Communications 425 FitzPatrick, Liam Successful Employee Communications 194 Fitzsimmons, Anthony Rethinking Reputational Risk 73 Fletcher, Janet Introduction to Human Resource Management 142 Fontinha, Rita Research Methods in Human Resource Management 163 Forsyth, Patrick How to Write Reports and Proposals 119 Forsyth, Patrick Successful Time Management 123 Francis, Anthony Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Francis, Helen People and Organisational Development 223 Francis , Ronald D Global Business Ethics 41 Franklin, Melanie Agile Change Management 188 French, Ray Strategic People Management and Development 148 Frost, Stephen Inclusive Talent Management 232 Fugate, Brian Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 327

Furnham, Adrian Motivation and Performance 177 Gee, Rowland The Retail Start-Up Book 428 George, Steve Adjacent Learning 211 Geva, Ilan Global Brand Management 382 Girod, Stéphane J.G Resetting Management 78

Giuliano, Genevieve Urban Logistics 264 Glenister, Gordon Influencer Marketing Strategy 364 Goddard, Jules Business Experimentation 88 Goddard, Jules What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 64 Godsmark, Jo The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 259 Googins, Bradley Sustainability to Social Change 86 Gorell, Ro 50 Top Tools for Coaching 240 Gorell, Ro How to Create a Coaching Culture 235 Gorm Larsen, Jacob A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement 306 Goswami, Swish The Young Entrepreneur 93 Gotian, Ruth The Success Factor 32 Goulding, Steve Relationship Management in Banking 25 Grainger, Andrew Cross-Border Logistics Operations 270 Grant, David B Fashion Logistics 262 Grant, David B Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 250 Grant, David B Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 331 Grath, Anders The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 23 Grayson, David The Sustainable Business Handbook 87 Green, David Excellence in People Analytics 159 Green, Mike Essential Leadership 57 Green, Mike Making Sense of Change Management 182 Gregory, Anne Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 418 Grigsby, Mike Advanced Customer Analytics 408 Grigsby, Mike Marketing Analytics 404 Grinsted, Susan The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 258 Grosse, Robert E Emerging Markets 56

Guesalaga, Rodrigo Implementing Key Account Management 377 Haavisto, Ira Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 329 Hague, Nick B2B Customer Experience 375 Hague, Paul B2B Customer Experience 375 Hague, Paul Market Research in Practice 399 Hague, Paul The Business Models Handbook 83

www.koganpage.com

Innovative B2B Marketing 372 Hamflett, Andy Technology and the Blue Economy 288 Hancock, Dora International Finance 22 Hardy, Michelle Investment and Portfolio Management 14 Harhut, Nancy Using Behavioral Science in Marketing 413 Harris, Stacey

Introduction to HR Technologies 170 Hartley, Kate

Communicate in a Crisis 422 Hartmann, Renee Next Generation Retail 427 Haslam, Simon Strategic Decision Making 77 Hatami, Alessandro

Reinventing Banking and Finance 28 Haupt, Michael The Contemporary CFO 16 Havenga, Jan From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics 252 Hawkins, Peter Leadership Team Coaching 239 Hawkins, Peter Leadership Team Coaching in Practice 241 Hayden, David Adjacent Learning 211 Hayden, David Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 205 Hayward, Andrew

The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 43 Heaslip, Graham Humanitarian Logistics 328 Henderson, Iain Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 137 Henderson, John Retail and Digital Banking 24 Henke, Michael Sustainability in Global Value Chains 336 Henzen, Rozanne Mastering the Circular Economy 330 Hesketh, Ian Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 151 Hillson, David

The Risk Management Handbook 69 Hodges, Julie Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 185 Hodges, Julie Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 184 Hodson, Christopher J Cyber Risk Management 70 Hofmann, Erik Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 310 Holbeche, Linda Organization Development 221 Holbeche, Linda People and Organisational Development 223 Holbeche, Linda The Agile Organization 224 Holguín-Veras, José Urban Logistics 264 Holt, Sue

Implementing Key Account Management 377 Hopkin, Paul Fundamentals of Risk Management 65 Horner, David Accounting for Non-Accountants 11 Houde, Shannon Good Work 96 Houlder, Dominic What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 64 Houldsworth, Elizabeth International Human Resource Management 154 Hughes, Mark Managing Change 183 Hurdle, David Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Hussain, Shazad People Practice 144 Hutchinson, Sue Performance Management Performance Management 175 Iles, Paul International Human Resource Management 156 Inge, Christina Marketing Metrics 406 Innes, James Ultimate New Job 103 IRM, The Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 337 Jacobs, Jamie Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 195 James, Rob Business Experimentation 88 Jenkins, Andrew Social Media Marketing for Business 360 John, Martin Ultimate Cover Letters 104 John, Martin Ultimate CV 105 Johnston, Paul Stand Out Marketing 414 John Yate, Martin Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 108 Jones, Gillian 50 Top Tools for Coaching 240 Jones, Gillian How to Create a Coaching Culture 235 Jones, Sarah Reward Management 180 Jovanovic Dimitriadis, Neda

Advanced Marketing Management 410 Jude, Gareth Retail Innovation Reframed 432 Kalman, Danny Inclusive Talent Management 232 Kamran, Qeis Strategic Value Chain Management 313 Kapferer, Jean-Noël Kapferer on Luxury 392 Kapferer, Jean-Noël The Luxury Strategy 391 Kapferer, Jean-Noël

The New Strategic Brand Management 383 Kates, Amy Networked, Scaled, and Agile 227 Kelly, Simon Stand Out Marketing 414 Kesler, Greg Networked, Scaled, and Agile 227 Kew, John Human Resource Management in a Business Context 138 Khan, Nadeem

Introduction to People Analytics 158 Khan, Omera Product Design and the Supply Chain 293 King, Katie

Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing 358 Kingsnorth, Simon Digital Marketing Strategy 350 Kingsnorth, Simon The Digital Marketing Handbook 351 Kirby, Amanda Neurodiversity at Work 233 Kirby, Justin

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 366 Knight, Hanne Digital Marketing in Practice 349

Knights, Miya Omnichannel Retail 429 Kohl, Holger Sustainability in Global Value Chains 336 Kovács, Gyöngyi Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 329

Kovela, Serhiy Business Resilience 226

Králik, Martin Resetting Management 78

Krishnamachari, Bhaskar Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Kuehlwein, JP Brand Elevation 394 Kynighou, Anastasia Human Resource Management at Work 136 Lambert, Nick Technology and the Blue Economy 288

Lawes, Rachel Using Semiotics in Marketing 402

Lawes, Rachel Using Semiotics in Retail 431

Leatherbarrow, Charles Introduction to Human Resource Management 142 Leboff, Grant Myths of Marketing 348

Leedham, Melville Coaching and Mentoring 236 Lee, Mark The Sustainable Business Handbook 87 Leigh, Rich Myths of PR 423

Leonardo, Toyota Methods and Operating Models 292 Leventhal, Barry Predictive Analytics for Marketers 405 Lewis, David Employment Law 199 Lewis, David What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 64 Lewis, Rhian The Cryptocurrency Revolution 21 Lewis, Sarah Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 190 Lieb, Rebecca Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 367

Lilley, Roy Dealing with Difficult People 122 Linz, Carsten Radical Business Model Transformation 81 Liu, Shaofeng Knowledge Management 44

Lloyd, Richard Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 319 Lomax, Dan Event Planning and ManagementAlbert, 396 Loudermilk, Derek Superconductors 110 Lowe, Alison Fashion Brand Management 388 Lowe, David Lowe’s Transport Manager and Operator’s Handbook 2023 283

Lunt, Tom Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 397 MacRae, Ian Motivation and Performance 177 MacRae, Ian Myths of Social Media 362 MacRae, Ian Myths of Work 220 Madsen, Susanne The Power of Project Leadership 40 Malik, Tegwen, F International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 290

Mandel, Jay Brand Strategy in Three Steps 385 Manners-Bell, John Introduction to Global Logistics 267 Manners-Bell, John Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation 321 Manners-Bell, John Supply Chain Ethics 342 Manners-Bell, John Supply Chain Risk Management 325 Marchington, Mick Human Resource Management at Work 136 Marcos, Javier Implementing Key Account Management 377 Marr, Bernard Data-Driven HR 162 Marsh, Stephanie User Research 401 Martin, Heinrich Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 276 Maslen, Andy Persuasive Copywriting 369 Mason, Robert Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 263 Mason, Robert The Lean Supply Chain 322 Mason, Tim Omnichannel Retail 429 Massey, Martin Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 72 Massey, Martin Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 337 Mattox II, John R Learning Analytics 160 McCalman, James Leading Cultural Change 191 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 378 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 416 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 415 McKinnon, Alan Decarbonizing Logistics 340 McKinnon, Alan Green Logistics 333 McLennan, Norman Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice 320

Megginson, David Continuing Professional Development 209 Mena, Carlos Leading Procurement Strategy 304 Middelburg, Jan-Willem The Enterprise Big Data Framework 48 Millar, Mark Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 324 Milligan, Andy Myths of Branding 389 Millner, Dave Introduction to People Analytics 158 Milner, Catherine The Inventory Toolkit 272 Milton, Nick The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 45 Minis, Ioannis Supply Chain 4.0 314 Minsky, Laurence Global Brand Management 382 Mirvis, Philip Sustainability to Social Change 86 Mohan, Devie

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech 20 Morgan, Steven Global Contract Logistics 305 Morrison, Rupert Data-Driven Organization Design 219 Morrison, Rupert Organizational Planning and Analysis 225 Morrow, Jordan Be Data Analytical 50 Morrow, Jordan Be Data Driven 51 Morrow, Jordan Be Data Literate 132 Mowat, Jon Video Marketing 356 Müller-Stewens, Günter Radical Business Model Transformation 81

www.koganpage.com442

Müller-Stewens, Günter The Management of Luxury 395 Müller-Stewens, Günter The New Strategist 80 Munn, Dave

A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 380 Murfey, Guy Global Business Ethics 41

Neise, Rolf

Container Logistics 287

Coaching and Mentoring 236 Ney, Jillian

Newell, Diane

Advanced Marketing Management 410 Ng, Wilson Business Research 34 Nicotra, Eva Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 397 Noble, Sue

Coaching People through Organizational Change 244

O’Brien, Daragh Data Ethics 54

O’Brien, Jonathan Category Management in Purchasing 297

O’Brien, Jonathan Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain

Professionals 302

O’Brien, Jonathan Supplier Relationship Management 301

O’Brien, Jonathan Sustainable Procurement 298

O’Brien, Jonathan Sustainable Procurement 343

O’Brien, Jonathan The Buyer’s Toolkit 303

O, Daragh Ethical Data and Information Management 55

O’Keefe, Katherine Data Ethics 54

O’Keefe, Katherine Ethical Data and Information Management 55 Oliver, Grant Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 415

O’Meara, Sean Remote Workplace Culture 228 Osborn, Tony

The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 43

O’Sullivan, Steve Supply Chain Disruption 317 Owen, Jo Myths of Leadership 61 Owen, Jo

The Leadership Skills Handbook 58 Pagdin, Ian Investment and Portfolio Management 14 Page-Tickell, Rebecca Learning and Development 213 Paine, Nigel Workplace Learning 214 Pålsson, Henrik Packaging Logistics 265 Panayides, Photis M Maritime Logistics 284 Panzarino, Helene Reinventing Banking and Finance 28 Parry, Simon Accounting and Finance for Managers 10 Parry-Slater, Michelle The Learning and Development Handbook 216 Parskey, Peggy Learning Analytics 160 Parsloe, Eric Coaching and Mentoring 236 Parsons, Patricia J Ethics in Public Relations 420 Passmore, Jonathan Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 190 Passmore, Jonathan Excellence in Coaching 234 Passmore, Jonathan Leadership Coaching 238 Patrick, The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 45 Pedersen, Niels Financial Technology 18 Percival, Rob Confident Coding 127 Perkin, Neil Building the Agile Business 189 Perkin, Neil Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 53 Perkins, Graham Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 164 Perkins, Stephen J Organizational Behaviour 218 Perkins, Stephen J Reward Management 180 Perry, John Developing Mental Toughness 95 Pettit, Stephen E-Logistics 260 Pettit, Stephen International Freight Transport 269 Pettit, Stephen Port Management 286 Pidgeon, Clive A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 280 Piecyk, Maja Green Logistics 333 Pope, Kamila Global Waste Management 334 Pope, Kamila Understanding Planned Obsolescence 335 Potter, David Leading Cultural Change 191 Price, Deborah Business Research Methods 35 Prill, Nadine

Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 161 Psychogios, Alexandros Neuroscience for Leaders 62 Rea, Andrew Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 205 Reddington, Martin People and Organisational Development 223 Rees, Gary Strategic People Management and Development 148 Reinecke, Sven The Management of Luxury 395 Reissner, Stefanie Developing Skills for Business Leadership 146 Relph, Geoff

The Inventory Toolkit 272 Reynolds, Alison What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 64

Richards, Gwynne

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 258 Richards, Gwynne The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 259 Richards, Gwynne Warehouse Management 275 Rich, Nick International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 290 Rigg, Clare Learning and Talent Development 231 Roberts, David Business Resilience 226 Roberts, Sheila Business Resilience 226 Robson, Fiona Research Methods in Human Resource Management 163 Rogers, Beth Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 378 Rogers, Ciaran Podcasting Marketing Strategy 357 Rogers, Patricia Developing People and Organisations 222 Rogers, Patricia Studying Learning and Development 207

Roobeek, Annemieke Responsible Business 42 Rose, Michael Reward Management 181 Rousseau, Denise M Evidence-Based Management 79

Rowles, Daniel Digital Branding 386

Rowles, Daniel Mobile Marketing 355

Rowles, Daniel Podcasting Marketing Strategy 357 Rubens, David Strategic Risk and Crisis Management 71 Rudd, Jerry A Practical Guide to Logistics 248 Rudd, Jerry Health and Safety in Logistics 266 Rüegger, Simon Strategic Risk and Crisis Management 71 Rushton, Alan The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 247

Russell, Ken Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Ryan, Damian Understanding Digital Marketing 352 Ryan, Damian Understanding Social Media 361 Sales, Michael Aviation Logistics 282

Sammons, Peter Contract Management 300

Samunderu, Eyden Air Transport Management 281

Sargeant, Malcolm Employment Law 199

Saundry, Richard Managing Employment Relations 201 Scarlett, Hilary Neuroscience for Organizational Change 187 Schaefer, Wolfgang Brand Elevation 394 Schipperheijn, Katja Learning Ecosystems 168 Schwab, Ben Employment Law 199 Sen, Soumyasanto Digital HR Strategy 171 Shackleton-Jones, Nick How People Learn 210 Shah, Salma Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching 243 She How to Work Remotely 125 Shenoy, Ben Strategic Decision Making 77 Simpson, Zane From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics 252 Sitko, Rafal Sustainable Human Resource Management 150 Slack, Nigel The Operations Advantage 274 Sloan, Danny The Retail Start-Up Book 428 Sloot, Laurens Retail Disruptors 430 Small, Nicky People Practice 144 Smilansky, Shirra Experiential Marketing 368 Smiles, Simon Sustainable Investing in Practice 30 Smith, Andrew Retail Innovation Reframed 432 Smith, Heidi How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests 115 Smith, Jeremy Defence Logistics 261 Smith, Michael E Inspiring Green Consumer Choices 370 Smith, PR Marketing Communications 365 Smith, Richard The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 186 Smith, Theo Neurodiversity at Work 233 Solomon, Michael R The New Chameleons 371 Song, Dong-Wook Maritime Logistics 284 Sparks, Leigh Logistics and Retail Management 277 Sparrow, Paul International Human Resource Management 154 Spens, Karen Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 329 Squire, Philip Selling Transformed 376 Steenkamp, Jan-Benedict Retail Disruptors 430 Stern, Stefan Myths of Management 33 Stewart, Jim Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 208 Stewart, Jim Developing People and Organisations 222 Stewart, Jim Learning and Talent Development 231 Stewart, Jim Studying Learning and Development 207 Straw, Gary Understanding Project Management 38 Stredwick, John Human Resource Management in a Business Context 138 Struhl, Steven Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407 Struhl, Steven Practical Text Analytics 409 Strycharczyk, Doug Developing Mental Toughness 95 Surti, Jay Ultimate Presentations 107 Sweeney, Edward Global Logistics 268 Symes, Graham The Retail Start-Up Book 428 Talbot, Fiona How to Write Effective Business English 118 Tanvir, Jawwad Business Resilience 226 Tapaninen, Ulla Maritime Transport 285 Tarrant, Amy Coaching People through Organizational Change 244 Tate, Wendy Supply Chain Finance 307 Tatham, Peter Humanitarian Logistics 328 Taylor, Glenn Managing the Retail Supply Chain 278 Taylor, Heidi B2B Marketing Strategy 373 Taylor, Stephen Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 135 Taylor, Stephen Human Resource Management 140 Taylor, Stephen Resourcing and Talent Management 230 Taylor, Stephen Studying Human Resource Management 141 Taylor, Stephen Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 164

Templar, Simon Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 310 Templar, Simon Supply Chain Management Accounting 308

Theobald, Theo

Develop Your Presentation Skills 121

Thompson, Clive Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 72 Thompson, Clive Climate Change Enterprise Risk Management 337 Thompson, Clive Fundamentals of Risk Management 65 Thompson, Simon Green and Sustainable Finance 29 Tiffany, Jenna Marketing Strategy 411 Timms, Perry

The Energized Workplace 229 Tipi, Nicoleta Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling 311 Tomlinson, Keith People Practice 144 Topps, James

Managing the Retail Supply Chain 278 Trautrims, Alexander Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 331 Turner, Jonathan Technology and the Blue Economy 288 Tyreman, Chris How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests 117 Ullah, Karim

Understanding Islamic Financial Services 15 Underwood, Quinn The Young Entrepreneur 93 Valentin, Michaël

The Tesla Way 291

Valskov, Klavs Internal Communications 425 van Hoek, Remko Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 327 van, Johann E-Commerce Website Optimization 354 van, Myrthe Responsible Business 42 van, Remko Leading Procurement Strategy 304 Vernon, Guy International Human Resource Management 154 Vorster, Lizette Digital Marketing in Practice 349 Vyas, Nick Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Wadström, Pontus Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology 82 Waite, Karen People Practice 144 Waller, Matthew A Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 327 Wang, Yingli E-Logistics 260 Waters, Adam Confident Digital Content 128 Waters, Donald Global Logistics 268 Watkins, Alan Coherence 63 Watkins, Steve IT Governance 46 Watson, Gillian

Developing Skills for Business Leadership 146 Weenk, Ed Mastering the Circular Economy 330 Weenk, Ed Mastering the Supply Chain 253 Weetman, Catherine A Circular Economy Handbook 332 Weightman, Tony Assessment Centre Success 109 Weiner, Mark PR Technology, Data and Insights 419 Weinswig, Deborah Next Generation Retail 427 Weiss, Antonio The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation 52 Westwood, John How to Write a Marketing Plan 417 Whitaker, Vivien Continuing Professional Development 209 Whiteing, Anthony Green Logistics 333 White, Michael Sales and Marketing Channels 381 White, Michael Sales and Marketing Channels 412 Whiting, Fiona Human Resource Practice 143 Whitter, Ben Human Experience at Work 197 Whittington, John Systemic Coaching and Constellations 237 Wickersham, Mark Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals 12 Widdowson, Lucy Building Top-Performing Teams 178 Wilding, Richard Supply Chains in Action 249 Wilkinson, Adrian Human Resource Management at Work 136 Williams, Lynn Ultimate Interview 106 Williams, Lynn Ultimate Job Search 102 Williamson, Alistair The Road to Zero Emissions 339 Wilson, John P Experiential Learning 217 Winter, Helen The Business Analysis Handbook 37 Wintersberger, Daniel International Human Resource Management 155 Witthöft, Ilse From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics 252 Wong, Wilson Human Capital Management Standards 153 Wood, Geoffrey Employment RelationsKlerck, Gilton Employment Relations 202 Woodhams, Carol Human Resource Management 140 Woodhams, Carol Studying Human Resource Management 141 Wood, Kenny Confident Web Design 129 Woods, Darren Confident Coding 127 Woxenius, Johan Urban Logistics 264 Wyatt, Stephen Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution 76 Yakob, Faris Paid Attention 347 Yew Wong, Chee Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 331 Zeimpekis, Vasileios Supply Chain 4.0 314 Zhang, Melissa Decarbonizing Business 341 Zimmermann, Alexander Radical Business Model Transformation 81 Zook, Ze Marketing Communications 365

Contact Us

United Kingdom

45 Gee Street, London EClV 3RS +44 (0) 20 7278 0433 kpinfo@koganpage.com

United States & Canada

Kogan Page Inc. 8 W 38th Street, Suite 902 New York, NY 10018

+1 (929) 362 7262 info@koganpage.com

Paul Raymond

Academic Sales Manager

+44 (0) 7866 109832 praymond@koganpage.com

Our Distributors

United Kingdom: The Book Service

Matt De Bono

Digital & Library Sales Manager +44 (0) 20 7843 1922 mdebono@koganpage.com

Stephen Dunnell

Academic Commissioning Editor sdunnell@koganpage.com +44 (0) 20 7278 0433

+44 (0)1476 541080 orders@gbs.tbs-ltd.co.uk

United States & Canada: Ingram Publisher Services +1 (866) 400 5351 ips@ingramcontent.com

India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka & Bangladesh: Viva Books +91 (0) 11 4224 2200 viva@vivagroupindia.in

UK & Ireland Field Representatives: Retail and Wholesale

Lee Morgan, Sales Director

+44 (0) 7901 916158 lee.morgan@compassips.london

Central & North London & South East England: Maddy Gwyer +44 (0) 7896 428429 maddy.gwyer@compassips.london London & South Eastern England: Sue Wilcox +44 (0) 7801 926247 sue.wilcox@compassips.london

Central & Southern England & South Wales : Sarah Hodgen +44 (0) 7824 513720 sarah.hodgen@compassips.london

Central & Eastern England: Richard Lyle +44 (0) 7901 916170 richard.lyle@compassips.london Ireland: Michael Darcy +353 (0) 86225 2380 michael.darcy@brookside.ie Northern & Western England, North Wales & Scotland: David Smith +44 (0) 7901 916164 david.smith@compassips.london

Overseas Representatives

Europe: Durnell Marketing Ltd +44 (0) 1892 544272 team@durnell.co.uk

Australia & New Zealand: Booktopia Publisher Services +61 2 9045 4336 bps@booktopia.com.au

Middle East & North Africa: Avicenna +44 (0) 7802 244457 avicennabk@gmail.com

South Africa: Jonathan Ball Publishers + +27 (0) 11 601 8000 services@jonathanball.co.za

Sub-Saharan Africa: Africa Connection +44 (0) 1491 837028 guy.simpson@africaconnection.co.uk +44 (0) 7808 522886

Singapore, Malaysia & Brunei: Pansing +65 6499 1730 infobooks@pansing.com Japan, Taiwan, Korea, Cambodia, Philippines, Indonesia, +44 (0) 7973 176046 andrew@thewhitepartnership.org.uk Thailand, Vietnam & Myanmar: The White Partnership

China & Hong Kong: China Publishers Marketing +86 21 5425 9557 benjamin.pan@cpmarketing.com.cn